Construction Engineering A Guide To Temporary Works Bs 5975

DISLAIMER
This document is the property of 3RM Associates Ltd and 3RM Associates Ltd accept no
responsibility for the interpretation, copying or use of any of the information in this document.
Any use of this document or the information within is at the risk of the individual and not of
3RM Associates Ltd or any associate or employee of 3RM Associates Ltd.
Although 3RM Associates Ltd does it best to ensure that any advice, recommendations or
information it may give, either in this document or elsewhere is accurate, no liability or
responsibility of any kind (including liability for negligence) howsoever and from whatsoever
cause arising, is accepted in this respect by 3RM Associates Ltd, its servants or agents.
2022
2 CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
REVIEWERS:-
• Alexander Kirk
• Andrew Dixon
• Andrew Lacey
• Andrew Leary
• Anish Patel
• Anthony Marshall
• Ashley Daniels
• Barry Dodd
• Cahan O’Driscoll
• Carl Morgan
• Chan Khan
• Ciaran O’Driscoll
• Conny McCarthy
• Daniel Pritchard
• Darren Holmes
• Daryl Smith
• David Corcoran
• David Glass
• David Holland
• David O’Sullivan
• Finn O’Sullivan
• George Zervas
• Habeeb Syed
• Ian Booth
• Ian Horton-Plant
• Ian Hylands
• Jonathan Yates
• Karl Bird
• Laura O’Driscoll
• Liz Smith
• Luke Collier
• Matt Sharp
• Matthew Parker
• Michael Wynn
• Oliver McMorran
• Paul Markham
• Paschal O’Driscoll
• Raymond O’Driscoll
• Richard McDonald
• Robert Carter
• Robert Lancaster
• Ryan Berry
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Sean Cronin
• Sean Pike
• Sophie Lacey
• Stephen Burke
• Steve McKenzie
• Steve Oleisky
• Stuart Cook
• Tim Griffiths
• Timothy O’Donovan
• Tom Langford
Ronan O’Driscoll
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................. 5
FOREWORD.......................................................................................................................................... i
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS .................................................................................................................. ii
The Final Report of the Advisory Committee on Falsework (Bragg Report) ...................... i
Principal Recommendations of the Bragg Report ................................................................. i
BS 5975 – A Brief Summary of the various revisions ............................................................. iv
The Construction (Design & Management) Regulations 2015 .............................................. vi
Regulation 8 – General Duties .................................................................................................. vii
Regulation 9 – Duties of Designers........................................................................................ viii
Regulation 11 – Duties of a Principal Designer in relation to H&S at the Pre-
Construction Phase ...................................................................................................................... ix
Regulation 19 – Stability of Structures .................................................................................... x
Other possible relevant Regulations ........................................................................................ x
The Management of Health & Safety at Work Regulations 1999 .......................................... xi
The Work at Height Regulations 2005 ........................................................................................ xiii
Temporary Works Coordinator, Supervisor & Awareness Training ...................................xv
Possible Course Structure .......................................................................................................xvii
Competency of Trainers .............................................................................................................xix
“Temporary Works” change to “Construction Engineering” ............................................. xxii
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 1
2 Hierarchy of Documents for Construction in the UK ..................................................... 20
3 Organisations involved in Construction Engineering.................................................... 22
3.1 CDM 2015 – Organisational Arrangement ................................................................. 22
3.1.1 The Client .................................................................................................................... 22
3.1.2 The Principal Designer (PD) ..................................................................................... 23
3.1.3 Designers..................................................................................................................... 24
3.1.4 Principal Contractor (PC) .......................................................................................... 25
3.1.5 Contractor .................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.6 CDM 2015 - Organogram.......................................................................................... 26
3.1.7 FIGURE 1 – CDM 2015 Organogram when on site and construction has begun
26
3.2 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A Single Contractor on a Small Project ................. 27
3.2.1 FIGURE 2 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a Single Contractor on a Small Project
28
3.3 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A PC Appointed by the Client ................................... 29
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.3.1 FIGURE 3 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a PC Appointed by the Client ............ 30
3.4 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A PC with several small sites ................................... 31
3.4.1 FIGURE 4 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a PC with several small sites ............. 32
3.5 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A PC who appoints a Sub-Contractor to
implement the PC’s Construction Engineering ................................................................... 33
3.5.1 FIGURE 5 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a PC appoints a Sub-Contractor to
implement PC’s Construction Engineering ............................................................................. 34
3.6 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A Complex Project able to split into well-defined
areas 35
3.6.1 FIGURE 6 – BS 5975 - Organogram for Complex project able to be split into
well-defined areas ...................................................................................................................... 36
3.7 BS 5975 – Arrangement when A Principal Contractor appoints a Sub-
Contractor to co-ordinate their own Construction Engineering...................................... 37
3.7.1 FIGURE 7 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a Principal Contractor who appoints a
Sub-Contractor to co-ordinate their own Construction Engineering ................................... 38
3.8 BS 5975 – Arrangement when A Client appoints a Sub-Contractor to co-
ordinate their own Construction Engineering ...................................................................... 39
3.8.1 FIGURE 8 – BS 5975 - Organogram for A Client who appoints a Sub-
Contractor to co-ordinate their own Construction Engineering ........................................... 40
3.9 Typical Interfaces between parties on a Construction Project ............................ 41
3.9.1 FIGURE 9 – BS 5975 - Organogram to show Typical Interfaces between
Parties on a Construction Project ............................................................................................ 42
3.10 Flowchart representation of typical Interfaces between a PC and a Sub-
Contractor on site delivering Construction Engineering .................................................. 43
3.10.1 FIGURE 10 – BS 5975 - Flowchart representation of typical Interfaces between
a PC and a Sub-Contractor on site delivering Construction Engineering.......................... 44
4 Procedural Control of Construction Engineering ........................................................... 45
4.1 Example Small Contractor building residential houses ........................................ 45
4.1.1 Why would a small Contractor pay a designer for a standard solution Drawing?
47
4.2 Aim of a Construction Engineering Procedure ........................................................ 49
4.3 Control of Construction Engineering Risk ................................................................ 51
4.3.1 TABLE 1 – Implementation Risks Classes for Construction Engineering and
examples of mitigation measures ............................................................................................ 52
4.4 Construction Engineering Design ............................................................................... 54
4.4.1 Design Brief ................................................................................................................. 54
4.4.2 Design Guidance ........................................................................................................ 55
4.4.3 Choice of Construction Engineering Design Solutions ......................................... 57
4.4.4 Construction Engineering Design Check ................................................................ 58
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.4.5 TABLE 2 – Categories of Design Check in Construction Engineering .............. 61
4.4.6 Resolution of Queries Raised by the Design Checker ......................................... 64
4.4.7 Design Alterations ...................................................................................................... 65
4.4.8 Designers Risk Assessment ..................................................................................... 65
4.5 Construction Engineering Register ............................................................................ 66
4.6 Construction Engineering Site Considerations ....................................................... 68
4.6.1 Site Co-ordination, Supervision and Checking of Work on Site .......................... 68
4.6.2 Loading and Un-Loading of Construction Engineering......................................... 70
5 Organisations Requiring Procedural Control of Construction Engineering............ 73
5.1 Overview of the main roles involved within organisations in Construction
Engineering ................................................................................................................................... 73
5.1.1 FIGURE 11 – BS 5975 - Organogram to show Typical Construction Stage
Interfaces between Principal Contractor and other Parties on a Construction Project ... 74
5.1.2 Designated Individual (DI)......................................................................................... 75
5.1.3 Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) ........................................................ 76
5.1.4 Construction Engineering Supervisor (CES) .......................................................... 78
5.2 Clients Construction Engineering Procedures ........................................................ 79
5.3 Principal Designers (PD) Construction Engineering Procedures ....................... 80
5.4 Permanent Works Designers (PWD) Construction Engineering Procedures .. 81
5.5 Construction Engineering Designers (CED) Construction Engineering
Procedures..................................................................................................................................... 84
5.6 Principal Contractor (PC) Construction Engineering Procedures ...................... 84
5.7 Contractor Construction Engineering Procedures ................................................. 85
5.8 Supplier / Manufacturers Construction Engineering Procedures....................... 86
5.9 Addressing Scaffold Management .............................................................................. 86
6 Auditing of Construction Engineering in line with BS 5975 ......................................... 88
7 Construction Engineering Interfaces ................................................................................. 89
8 Construction Engineering Work On Site ........................................................................... 90
9 Construction Engineering Design ....................................................................................... 91
9.1 Some Background on British Standards ................................................................... 92
10 Load Basics ........................................................................................................................... 96
10.1.1 FIGURE 12 – Simple Diagram of Force from a mass onto a surface (Courtesy
of Richard McDonald) ................................................................................................................ 97
10.2 Compression and Tension ............................................................................................ 98
10.2.1 FIGURE 13 – Simple Diagram of Compression and Tension Force (Courtesy of
Richard McDonald) .................................................................................................................... 98
10.3 Shear ................................................................................................................................... 99
Ronan O’Driscoll
10.3.1 FIGURE 14 – Simple Diagram of Shear (Courtesy of Richard McDonald) ....... 99
10.4 Bending Moment ............................................................................................................ 100
10.4.1 FIGURE 15 – Simple Diagram of Bending Moment (Courtesy of Richard
McDonald) ................................................................................................................................. 100
10.5 Deflection ......................................................................................................................... 101
10.5.1 FIGURE 16 – Simple Diagram of Beam Deflection (Courtesy of Richard
McDonald) ................................................................................................................................. 101
10.6 Stress ................................................................................................................................ 102
10.7 Strain ................................................................................................................................. 102
11 Geometric Properties ........................................................................................................ 103
11.1.1 FIGURE 17 – Cross Section of a Steel Beam (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)
103
11.2 Second Moment of Area (I) .......................................................................................... 103
11.3 Radius of Gyration (r).................................................................................................... 104
11.4 Elastic Modulus (Z) ........................................................................................................ 105
11.5 Plastic Modulus (S) ........................................................................................................ 105
11.6 Modulus of Elasticity (E) .............................................................................................. 106
11.7 Stiffness............................................................................................................................ 107
11.7.1 Axial Stiffness ........................................................................................................... 107
11.7.2 Bending Stiffness...................................................................................................... 108
11.7.3 Torsional Stiffness .................................................................................................... 108
11.8 Some Geometric Properties of Triangles ................................................................ 109
11.8.1 FIGURE 18 – Simple Triangle for illustration (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)
109
12 Bending Moment and Deflection Formula................................................................... 111
12.1 BASIC CALCULATION FOR SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM
LOAD ON FULL SPAN............................................................................................................... 111
12.1.1 FIGURE 19 – Simply supported beam with Uniform Load on Full Span
(Courtesy of Richard McDonald)............................................................................................ 112
13 Some useful Quadratic Equation Formula for Reference ....................................... 118
14 Dead Loads .......................................................................................................................... 119
15 Imposed / Live Loads ........................................................................................................ 120
15.1.1 FIGURE 20 – Controlled heaping of concrete ..................................................... 121
16 Wind Loading ...................................................................................................................... 123
16.1 General Wind Loading Information ........................................................................... 123
16.2 Peak Velocity Pressure for Falsework - qp .............................................................. 125
16.3 Wind Factor - Swind ......................................................................................................... 125
Ronan O’Driscoll
16.4 Probability Factor - cprob ............................................................................................... 125
16.5 2022 Update to Probability Factor - cprob .................................................................. 126
16.6 The Fundamental Basic Wind Velocity – Vb.map ...................................................... 127
16.7 Wind Force – Unclad Falsework – Fw,max .................................................................. 127
16.8 Wind Force – Soffit Formwork .................................................................................... 127
16.9 Wind Force – Edge Formwork .................................................................................... 127
16.10 Wind Force – Clad Falsework – 𝑸𝑸 5 ........................................................................ 128
16.11 Wind Force – Working Wind.................................................................................... 128
16.12 Reference to BS 6399-2 ............................................................................................ 129
16.13 BASIC WIND LOADING EXAMPLE......................................................................... 130
16.13.1 FIGURE 21 – Simple Formwork example for Basic Wind Loading to BS 5975
17 Notional Horizontal Loading ........................................................................................... 133
18 Concrete Pressures........................................................................................................... 134
18.1.1 FIGURE 22 – Concrete Design Pressure Envelope for Formwork .................. 135
18.2 Coefficient Dependent on Size & Shape – C1 ......................................................... 135
18.3 Coefficient Dependent on Constituent Materials of the Concrete – C2............ 136
18.3.1 TABLE 3 – Values of Coefficient C2 (Refer to CIRIA R108 Table 1) ................ 136
18.3.2 TABLE 4 – Updated Values of Coefficient C2 (Refer to CS30 – Formwork – A
Guide to Good Practice -3rd Edition – Concrete Society - Table 23) ................................ 137
18.4 Density of Concrete - D ................................................................................................ 137
18.4.1 TABLE 5 – Values for Density of Reinforced Concrete (Refer to BS 5975:2019
– Table D.2)............................................................................................................................... 137
18.4.2 TABLE 6 – Values for Density of lightweight Reinforced Concrete (Refer to BS
5975:2019 – Table D.3)........................................................................................................... 138
18.5 Vertical Form Height - H ............................................................................................... 138
18.5.1 FIGURE 23 – Height value to be used in formulae for both H and h ............... 138
18.6 Underwater Concreting ................................................................................................ 139
18.7 BASIC CONCRETE PRESSURE EXAMPLE ............................................................. 140
18.7.1 FIGURE 24 – Simple Formwork example for Basic Concrete Pressure Loading
to BS 5975 (Courtesy of Richard McDonald) ....................................................................... 140
19 Earth Pressures .................................................................................................................. 142
19.1.1 FIGURE 25 – Simplistic View of Free earth support walls (horizontal prop at
point O) 143
19.2 Cohesive Soils ................................................................................................................ 143
19.3 Cohesionless Soils ........................................................................................................ 144
19.4 Mixed Soils....................................................................................................................... 146
Ronan O’Driscoll
19.5 Surcharge loading ......................................................................................................... 146
19.6 BASIC EARTH PRESSURE EXAMPLE ...................................................................... 147
19.6.1 FIGURE 26 – Simplistic Earth Pressure Example Showing a Proprietary
Manhole Box (Supplied from MGF’s Website)..................................................................... 147
20 Water Pressures ................................................................................................................. 150
20.1 Wave Forces .................................................................................................................... 151
20.1.1 FIGURE 27 – Non-Breaking Waves – Section Diagram (From BS 5975: 2019)
152
21 Snow Loading ..................................................................................................................... 153
22 Ice Loading .......................................................................................................................... 154
23 Vehicle Barrier Loading.................................................................................................... 155
24 Highway Bridge Live Loads ............................................................................................ 156
25 Permissible Stress Design and Limit State Design .................................................. 157
25.1.1 FIGURE 28 – Simple Stress-Strain Curve for a Material ................................... 157
25.1.2 FIGURE 29 – Simple Permissible Stress Example (Courtesy of Richard
McDonald) ................................................................................................................................. 159
25.1.3 FIGURE 30 – Simple Limit State Design Example (Courtesy of Richard
McDonald) ................................................................................................................................. 160
25.2 Load Factors ................................................................................................................... 161
25.3 Limit State Design.......................................................................................................... 162
25.4 Eurocodes ........................................................................................................................ 164
25.5 Permissible Stress or UK Limit State Design or Eurocodes for Construction
Engineering? ............................................................................................................................... 166
26 Steel Column Design ........................................................................................................ 168
26.1 BASIC STEEL COLUMN DESIGN EXAMPLE ........................................................... 170
27 Design of Steel Beam at points of Reactions and Concentrated Loads ............. 172
27.1.1 FIGURE 31 – Stress Dispersion – Buckling (refer to BS 5975:2019 Figure J.1)
174
27.1.2 FIGURE 32 – Stress Dispersion – Bearing (refer to BS 5975:2019 Figure J.2)
175
27.1.3 TABLE 7 – Effective lengths and slenderness ratios of an unstiffened web
acting as a column (refer to BS 5975:2019 - Table J.1)..................................................... 176
27.2 BASIC WEB STIFFENER DESIGN EXAMPLE .......................................................... 178
27.2.1 TABLE 8 – Effective lengths of load bearings (refer to BS 5975:2019 - Table
J.2) 183
28 STEEL TRUSS DESIGN EXAMPLE ................................................................................ 187
29 Properties of a combined element cross section...................................................... 193
Ronan O’Driscoll
29.1 BASIC EXAMPLE TO CALCULATE THE PROPERTIES OF A COMBINED
SECTION ....................................................................................................................................... 194
30 STEEL CONNECTION BASIC DESIGN EXAMPLE ..................................................... 201
31 Basics of Steel Frames..................................................................................................... 210
32 BASIC CONCRETE BEAM / SIMPLE SLAB DESIGN EXAMPLE ............................. 216
33 BASIC CONCRETE PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN EXAMPLE .................................. 221
34 BASIC CONCRETE PILED FOUNDATION DESIGN EXAMPLE ............................... 229
35 Blinding Concrete .............................................................................................................. 234
36 Concrete Spread Footings .............................................................................................. 234
37 Concrete Reinforcement Tie Types............................................................................... 235
38 Concrete Backpropping in Multi-Storey Construction ............................................ 237
38.1.1 TABLE 9 – Example of percentage of Load Transfer for less than 350mm thick
flat slabs (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 21) .................................................................... 237
39 Basic Timber Design ......................................................................................................... 238
39.1.1 TABLE 10 – Values for Basic Stresses and Moduli of Elasticity for the Wet
Condition (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 3)...................................................................... 238
39.2 Timber Size ...................................................................................................................... 239
39.2.1 TABLE 11 – Preferred target sizes and actual dimensions for constructional
sawn softwood timber (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 7) ................................................ 239
39.3 Timber Modification Factors ....................................................................................... 239
39.3.1 Size – K1 .................................................................................................................... 239
39.3.2 Moisture Content – K2 .............................................................................................. 239
39.3.3 Duration of Load – K3............................................................................................... 239
39.3.4 TABLE 12 – Modification factor, K3 for duration of load n falsework (Refer to
BS 5975:2019 – Table 8) ........................................................................................................ 240
39.3.5 Compression perpendicular to the grain – Bearing Stress Modification - K4 .. 240
39.3.6 TABLE 13 – Modification factor, K4 for bearing stress (Refer to BS 5975:2019 –
Table 9) 240
39.4 Compression parallel to the grain ............................................................................. 240
39.5 Depth-to-breath ratios................................................................................................... 240
39.5.1 TABLE 14 – Maximum Depth to Breath Ratios (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table
10) 241
39.6 Shear ................................................................................................................................. 241
39.6.1 FIGURE 33 – Shear stress on a timber of rectangular cross-section (Refer to
BS 5975:2019 – Figure 5) ....................................................................................................... 242
39.6.2 FIGURE 34 – Shear stress diagram for a rectangular solid section (Refer to
Formwork – A guide to good practice – 3rd Edition – Figure 38)....................................... 243
39.7 Timber Permissible Stresses ...................................................................................... 244
Ronan O’Driscoll
39.7.1 TABLE 15 – Permissible Stresses and Moduli of Elasticity for General
Falsework Applications (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 12) ........................................... 245
39.7.2 TABLE 16 – Permissible Stresses and Moduli of Elasticity for Load-Sharing
Falsework Applications (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 13) ........................................... 246
39.8 Timber Depth – K7 .......................................................................................................... 246
39.9 Timber Load Sharing – K8 ............................................................................................ 246
39.10 Grading Used Timber ................................................................................................ 247
39.11 Bending Stress ........................................................................................................... 247
39.12 Bending Stiffness - EI ............................................................................................... 248
40 Foundations ........................................................................................................................ 249
40.1 Slope and Stability ......................................................................................................... 252
40.2 California Bearing Ratio Guidance ............................................................................ 253
40.3 Site Investigation for Falsework Foundations ....................................................... 255
40.3.1 TABLE 18 – Identification and Description of Soils (Refer to BS 5975:2019 –
Table 19).................................................................................................................................... 256
40.3.2 TABLE 19 – Presumed allowable bearing pressure under vertical static loading
(Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 18) ..................................................................................... 257
40.3.3 TABLE 20 – Typical allowable bearing pressures under static loads (refer to
Fiona Cobb – Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004 – Page 100) ......... 258
40.4 Depths for Site Investigation and Sampling ........................................................... 260
40.5 Modification Factors Applied to Presumed Bearing Pressures (Table 18)..... 261
40.5.1 Modification Factor for Reliability of Site Information ......................................... 261
40.5.2 Modification Factor for Settlements of Foundations Underneath the Falsework
261
40.5.3 Modification Factor for Ground Water Levels ...................................................... 261
40.6 Simple Foundations on Sands and Gravels (Non-Cohesive Soils) - SPT Values
262
40.7 Simple Foundations on Cohesive Soils – C Values .............................................. 262
40.8 Fill Material....................................................................................................................... 263
40.9 Protection of the Foundation Area ............................................................................ 263
41 Excavation Guidance for Construction Engineering................................................ 264
42 Working Platform Foundations for Plant ..................................................................... 269
42.1 Working Platform Design – General Approach ...................................................... 269
42.2 BRE 470 Working Platform Design – Calculation Stages.................................... 273
42.2.1 BRE 470 Working Platform Design – Limitations of Application ....................... 273
42.3 FIGURE 35 Construction Plant-hire Association (CPA) – Ground Conditions for
Construction Plant – Good practice Guide – Crawler Track Pressure Distribution............ 274
42.4 Load spread under foundations................................................................................. 275
Ronan O’Driscoll
42.4.1 FIGURE 36 – Load Spread Model (Refer to TWf publication – Figure 1) ....... 275
42.4.2 FIGURE 37 – Load Spread Model (Refer to TWf publication – Figure 2) ....... 276
42.4.3 FIGURE 38 – Conversion from trapezoidal / triangular stress block to
rectangular stress block (Refer to TWf publication – Figure 20)....................................... 277
42.4.4 FIGURE 39 – Depth of influence for bearing as defined by Boussinesq
pressure bulbs (Refer to TWf publication – Figure 14)....................................................... 278
42.5 Load spread under tyres .............................................................................................. 279
42.5.1 FIGURE 40 – Typical area for a tyre in contact with the ground (Refer to TWf
publication – Figure 18) ........................................................................................................... 280
42.5.2 FIGURE 41 – Schematic showing how the ground bearing pressure can be
considered as acting on the area of the tailer or “shadow area” under the transporter
(refer to TWf publication – Figure 20) ................................................................................... 281
43 Outrigger Mats .................................................................................................................... 282
43.1.1 FIGURE 42 – Proximity of Slopes and Excavations (refer to CPA document Fig
D1 & CIRIA C703 Page 55) .................................................................................................... 283
43.1.2 FIGURE 43 – Proximity of Slopes and Excavations (refer to BS 7121-3 Figure
12) 283
43.1.3 FIGURE 44 – Proximity of Earth Retaining Structure (refer to CIRIA C703 Page
56) 284
43.1.4 FIGURE 45 – Proximity of Basement Structures (refer to CIRIA C703 Page 56)
284
43.1.5 FIGURE 46 – Outrigger spread of load into ground (refer to BS 7121-3 Figure
11) 285
43.1.6 FIGURE 47 – Load spread through Timber Outrigger Mat (refer to BS
5975:2019 Clause 19.6.3)....................................................................................................... 286
43.1.7 FIGURE 48 – Outrigger Foundation Areas on Granular Soils (refer to CIRIA
C703 Page 49).......................................................................................................................... 287
43.1.8 FIGURE 49 – Outrigger Foundation Areas on Cohesive Soils (refer to CIRIA
C703 Page 50).......................................................................................................................... 288
43.1.9 TABLE 22 – Safe Working Loads for Differing Ground Conditions and Mat
Sizes (refer to CPA Document Table E1) ............................................................................. 289
43.2 BASIC OUTRIGGER MAT DESIGN EXAMPLE ........................................................ 297
43.2.1 FIGURE 50 – Outrigger Foundation Example from CIRIA C703 Appendix A1
44 Scaffold Tube - Basics...................................................................................................... 302
44.1.1 FIGURE 51 – Maximum deviation of load path in Scaffold connections (Refer
to BS 5975:2019 Fig 50) ......................................................................................................... 306
44.1.2 TABLE 23 – Section Properties of Scaffold Tube (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table
B.1) 307
Ronan O’Driscoll
44.1.3 TABLE 24 – Safe Axial Loads in Compression for Type 4 Steel Scaffold Tubes
Manufactured in accordance with BS EN 39:2001 (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table B.2)
308
44.1.4 TABLE 25 – Safe Axial Loads in Compression for Type 4 Steel Scaffold Tubes
Manufactured in accordance with BS 1139-1:1982 (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table B.3)
309
44.1.5 TABLE 26 – Safe Working Loads for individual Couplers and Fittings (Refer to
BS 5975:2019 Table B.4) ........................................................................................................ 310
44.1.6 TABLE 27 – Masses of Scaffolding Material (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table D.4)
311
45 Brickwork and Blockwork – BS 5975:2019 Guidance .............................................. 312
45.1 Propping and Needling of Masonry Walls - Basics............................................... 312
45.1.1 FIGURE 52 – Load triangle and Interaction Zone (Refer to BS 5977-1 Fig 1)
313
45.1.2 FIGURE 53 – Propping and Needling example (Supplied from Maybe Hire
website) 314
46 Coefficient of Friction - Basics ....................................................................................... 315
46.1.1 FIGURE 54 – Lateral restraint provided by friction (refer to BS 5975 Fig 47) 315
46.1.2 TABLE 28 – Recommended Values of Coefficient Static Friction (Refer to BS
5975:2019 Table 25) ................................................................................................................ 317
46.1.3 FIGURE 55 – Freestanding Falsework Sliding Forces (refer to BS 5975 Fig
H.4) 318
46.1.4 TABLE 29 – Coefficients of Friction and bearing pressures (for initial study use)
(Refer to CIRIA Report 68 Table 2) ....................................................................................... 319
47 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion - Basics.................................................... 320
47.1.1 TABLE 30 – Coefficients of Linear Thermal Expansion (Refer to Structural
Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition – Page 64)................................................................. 321
48 Hydraulics - Basics............................................................................................................ 322
49 Buoyancy Calculations - Basics .................................................................................... 325
50 Centre of Gravity - Basics................................................................................................ 327
50.1.1 FIGURE 56 – Steel support frame for an item of mechanical plant ................. 328
51 Planning of Construction Engineering Works - Basics ........................................... 332
51.1.1 FIGURE 57 – Simplistic Diagram to Visualise the Construction Process ....... 339
51.1.2 FIGURE 58 – Simplistic Diagram to Visualise the Construction Process
highlighting an increased workface ....................................................................................... 340
52 Construction Engineering using Technology ............................................................ 341
REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................. 343
APPENDIX A .................................................................................................................................... 346
BS 5975 – Construction Engineering Flowchart...................................................................... 346
Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX A 1 ................................................................................................................................. 349
BS 5975 – Construction Engineering Flowchart...................................................................... 349
APPENDIX B .................................................................................................................................... 351
Draft Construction Engineering Design Brief ........................................................................... 351
APPENDIX C .................................................................................................................................... 353
Draft Designers Check Certificate ............................................................................................. 353
APPENDIX D .................................................................................................................................... 357
Draft Designers Risk Assessment ............................................................................................. 357
APPENDIX E .................................................................................................................................... 359
Draft Construction Engineering Register .................................................................................. 359
APPENDIX F..................................................................................................................................... 361
Draft Construction Engineering Permit To Load / Unload ...................................................... 361
APPENDIX G .................................................................................................................................... 364
Draft Construction Engineering Coordinator Appointment..................................................... 364
APPENDIX H .................................................................................................................................... 370
Draft Construction Engineering Supervisor Appointment ...................................................... 370
APPENDIX I ...................................................................................................................................... 373
Draft Construction Engineering Schedule for a PWD ............................................................. 373
APPENDIX J ..................................................................................................................................... 375
Draft Construction Engineering Check Lists ............................................................................ 375
APPENDIX K .................................................................................................................................... 394
Draft Temporary Works Awareness Course Slides ................................................................ 394
APPENDIX L ..................................................................................................................................... 529
Draft Temporary Works Procedure - Client .............................................................................. 529
APPENDIX M .................................................................................................................................... 555
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Principal Designer ....................................................... 555
APPENDIX N .................................................................................................................................... 589
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Permanent Works Designer ...................................... 589
APPENDIX O .................................................................................................................................... 623
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Temporary Works Designer ...................................... 623
APPENDIX P .................................................................................................................................... 658
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Principal Contractor .................................................... 658
APPENDIX Q .................................................................................................................................... 728
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Contractor .................................................................... 728
APPENDIX R .................................................................................................................................... 793
Ronan O’Driscoll
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Temporary Works Suppliers ...................................... 793
APPENDIX S .................................................................................................................................... 827
Draft Temporary Works Audit Questions – Construction Engineering Procedures
alignment with BS 5975 : 2019 .................................................................................................. 827
APPENDIX T..................................................................................................................................... 829
Temporary Works Design Report Checklist - aligned with BS 5975 : 2019 ........................ 829
APPENDIX U .................................................................................................................................... 831
Temporary Works & Scaffold Specific Site Inspection Checklists ........................................ 831
APPENDIX V .................................................................................................................................... 834
Using the BRE Document to explain normal distribution and standard deviation .............. 834
APPENDIX W ................................................................................................................................... 843
Details of the Author .................................................................................................................... 843
Ronan O’Driscoll
FOREWORD
This document has been compiled to assist Temporary Works Coordinators, Supervisors
and others involved in Temporary Works on construction sites. This document serves to
bring existing information together as a comprehensive reference document to support
Temporary Works Professionals rather than detailing any new industry findings or stand
points.
This document will provide some clarity for the onsite management of Temporary Works in
the construction industry and provide useable information for the interpretation of the
recommendations in place in Section 1 and 2 of BS 5975: 2019.
The author used to go from office to office with boxes of highlighted reference documents for
use but several years ago he decided to go digital with reference material and just keep one
or two key reference documents in paper format such as the Structural Engineer’s Pocket
Book (1st Edition 2004) by Fiona Cobb and The Handbook of Structural Steelwork (3rd
Edition) by the Steel Construction Institute with notes, rules of thumb, etc. scribbled in these
documents for reference. With that in mind this is also one of the reasons the author felt it
may be beneficial to others to compile some BS 5975 Temporary Works specific reference
material.
BS 5975: 2019 statements may be misinterpreted if read in isolation for example, BS 5975:
2019 does not refer to an organisation having anything more than one Designated Individual
(DI) and this could be interpreted that only one DI can be in place in any organisation. In a
seminar on BS 5975: 2019 provided by the NASC (National Access & Scaffolding
Confederation) and the TWf (Temporary Works forum) on the 24th of July 2019 held at City,
University of London during the Questions and Answers section the two speakers Peter F
Pallett and Frank Marples confirmed it is completely acceptable for an organisation to have
more than one DI if required due to geographical reasons and possible volume of Temporary
Works. The two speakers highlighted BS 5975: 2019 should not be read and interpreted
word for word. It is to be noted that both speakers were part of the committee that created
BS 5975:2019.
A note from the author “Information and knowledge are to be shared so we can all learn and
develop from what each of us experience or understand. As Engineers, we should always
share information and knowledge so that all Engineers can learn from others. Doing this may
save the next generation of Engineers time learning and allow them to develop past the
learning of the previous generation. Meaning that the future generation are less likely to
regress or repeat the mistakes of those before them.”
i CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The reviewers of this document are all to be thanked for their time and input to take the draft
to this completed document.
Richard McDonald is to be thanked for creating the diagrams as highlighted from Figure 12
onwards.
The author would like to thank all the many individuals he has previously worked alongside
and the ones he is currently working with, for always improving his knowledge and
understanding. He has been lucky to work with some great individuals over the years that
have helped him learn massively and he continues to learn every day.
The author has had the honour to have some great mentors, but one deserves a particular
mention and that is Peter Ellarby who mentored him during his time with Mabey Support
Systems.
The authors wife, Laura, and his family are to be thanked for their patience, time and support
to enable him to complete this document over a number of years in his own spare time and
sacrifice time he could have spent with them.
The proposal is for this document to be a free download for all to use and share as they see
fit. The sacrifice of the authors time to complete this document will all be seen as a success
if even one individual downloads this document and finds it useful and beneficial to assist
them. An additional success would be if the basic engineering information provided in this
document gave a young Engineer or Temporary Works Coordinator the information and little
bit of confidence to go on and learn more and develop their engineering understanding,
experience, and competence.
With this mention of support in mind, the author would like to dedicate this document to his
Mother Josie and late Father John (1943 – 2020) O’Driscoll, his wife Laura O’Driscoll and all
his great family that have provided unmeasurable amounts of support and time over the
years. It is their support that have made it possible for the author to be in a position to pay
this support forward.
ii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
The Final Report of the Advisory Committee on Falsework
(Bragg Report)
This report is the basis of the British Standard (BS) 5975 – 1982 - Code of practice for
Falsework.
The final report was issued in 1975 and the chairman of the advisory committee on
falsework that created the document was Stephen Lawrence Bragg (1923-2014) Vice-
Chancellor and Principal of Brunel University and a Fellow of the Institution of Mechanical
Engineers.
The committee was appointed with the following terms of reference from the UK Secretary of
State: -
“To consider and advise on the technical, safety and other aspects of the design,
manufacture, erection and maintenance of temporary load bearing falsework used to
support formwork or permanent structures, particularly bridges, during construction,
and, in particular, to.
a) Identify any inadequacies in present knowledge, standards and practices,
recommend such steps as may be needed, and indicate an order of priority.
b) Draw up interim technical criteria, for use in advance of the publication of a
British Standard Code of Practice, together with such procedural guidance as
the Committee may consider appropriate;
c) Recommend what research and development should be carried out in the
short and long term; and
d) Advise as to the training, organisational and manpower implications of the
Committee’s recommendations.”
Principal Recommendations of the Bragg Report
Apologies in advance for the excessive use of “he” when referring to an Engineer but these
27 recommendations have just been copied from the original report word for word.
1. Any collapse of falsework whether it leads to injury or not should be made reportable
by statute.
2. Regulations relating to falsework should be harmonised with those relating to
periodic examination of scaffolding so that the same administrative rules apply
whether or not the falsework is used for access.
3. Designers must consider the lateral and longitudinal stability of falsework. Unless and
until an authoritative body, backed by appropriate research and field testing,
recommends a different figure we reiterate the recommendation in the Interim
Report. That is, all falsework should be designed to withstand a total horizontal load
in any direction equal to the sum of the calculated loads plus 1% of the vertical or 3%
of the vertical load whichever is greater.
4. Although individual components in a falsework may have their own accepted factors
of safety we nevertheless recommend that the overall factor of safety for the
i CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
falsework as a whole should not be less than two. Particular elements may require
the adoption of a higher figure.
5. In his calculations the designer should allow for possible variations in positioning and
alignment which are inevitable even with good workmanship. The drawings should
state the tolerance within which the falsework must be constructed.
6. All falsework must be designed, even if on a small job the design is only a simple
sketch. The designer, especially if he is not on site, must have a proper written brief
which must include all the factors which have been allowed for.
7. Special attention must be paid to the design of grillages. The designer must ensure
that tendencies for beams to overturn or webs to buckle under load (particular
eccentric or lateral loads) are resisted and that allowable bearing stresses are not
exceeded.
8. Work on the measurement of loads on actual falsework in the field should be
extended.
9. Theoretical and laboratory work on falsework elements and systems should be
extended and correlated with the measurements made under the previous
recommendations.
10. Suppliers of proprietary materials should be required to specify the conditions of test,
the failure loads and the mode of failure of each item of equipment in addition to any
recommendations about safe working load.
11. Tests should be carried out on new materials to check the validity of claims made for
them and on used materials to check deterioration which occurs in service.
12. The designer should assume that previously used material will be incorporated in
falsework and must use appropriate stresses. If there are critical areas where he has
assumed the use of new material these must be clearly indicated on the drawings.
13. The initial design of any falsework other than minor and any subsequent significant
alterations must be approved by a fully qualified engineer.
14. If a design contains novel features the contractor should arrange for the design to be
checked by an independent assessor.
15. The falsework design and, if he requests them, the calculations which were made
must be submitted to the designer of the permanent works for comment. If the person
responsible for the permanent works is an architect without engineering qualifications
he must submit them to his consulting engineer unless the building method is
traditional in all respects.
16. The philosophy of preparing and checking the design, of not modifying it without
assessing the resulting effects and of having any doubtful points checked must apply
in all cases major and minor.
17. On all sites the contractor or construction organisation must appoint a properly
qualified Temporary Works Co-ordinator whose duties are to ensure that all
procedures have been followed, that all checks and inspections have been carried
out and that any modifications or changes have been properly authorised. Falsework
may not be loaded or struck without the written permission of the Temporary Works
Co-ordinator.
18. Communication between designers and others on and off site must be improved.
Drawings must be clear and loading diagrams must be provided.
19. Training in safe working procedures must be an integral part of all courses in
falsework technology and practice, whether for skilled operatives or professional
engineers.
20. Instructions in the special features of falsework should be included in all education
courses in civil engineering and architecture.
ii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
21. Professional institutions should require the design of the relevant falsework to be
included with any permanent works design submitted as evidence of professional
competence. They should also commission case histories and suitable data for
instructional purposes.
22. Short professional courses in falsework should be provided for practising engineers
and architects.
23. Practical training courses in falsework should be provided for skilled operatives and
first line supervision. The performance of everyone attending such courses should be
assessed and a certificate awarded to those reaching an acceptable standard.
Courses should be on such a scale that the proportion of certificated operatives in
the industry should be 10% at the end of the year in which courses tarted and should
continue at this rate.
24. The standard of the courses should be controlled by the Health and Safety Executive
and reviewed regularly. Resources for such courses are already available form the
Construction Industry Training Board. The Training Services Agency should regard
falsework as a key training area.
25. Contractors, sub-contractors and other construction organisations who are directly
responsible for falsework must keep a register of the number of certified operators
they employ on each site.
26. The Government should insist that contractors carrying out work for the public sector
in which falsework is a feature, provide a training record and programme which will
ensure that properly trained operatives will be employed on that work.
27. A handbook on falsework and simple data sheets for use by personnel on site should
be commissioned by the Government. A textbook on falsework should also be
commissioned.
iii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
BS 5975 – A Brief Summary of the various revisions
One of the key points to note here is that the term “Temporary Works” was not introduced
until the 2008 revision of BS 5975. Also 2008 was the first introduction of the titles
“Temporary Works Coordinator” and “Temporary Works Supervisor” and the Design Check
Categories 0 to 3.
The first revision of BS 5975: 1982 -
• Titled: - BS 5975: 1982 – Code of Practice for Falsework

• This document gives recommendations for the methods of design, erection and use
of temporary structures used to support permanent structures until such time as the
later become self-supporting
• Defines Falsework as: -
o “Any Temporary Structure used to support a Permanent Structure while it is
not self-supported”
• 87 Pages in total
• 3 pages dedicated to procedures in Section 2 of the document
• Endorses the adoption of a Temporary Works Coordinator but within this code the
narrower term Falsework Coordinator is used
• Introduces a reference to register or record the drawings, calculations and other
relevant documents relating to the final design, i.e., “Temporary Works Register”.
The second revision of BS 5975: 1996 -
• Titled: - BS 5975: 1996 – Code of Practice for Falsework

• This document did have some additional minor amendments No. 1 and 2
The third revision of BS 5975: 2008 -
• Title changed and introduced Temporary Works for the first time as: - BS 5975: 2008
– Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the Permissible Stress
Design of Falsework
• Defines Temporary Works for the first time as: -
o “Temporary Works is an “engineered solution” used to support or protect
either an existing structure or the permanent works during construction, or to
support an item of plant or equipment, or the vertical sides or side-slopes of
an excavation during construction operations on site or to provide access.”
• This document did have some additional amendments and was added to in 2011,
titled as “+A1:2011”
• Introduces for the first time the title “Temporary Works Co-ordinator” as a competent
person with responsibility for the co-ordination of all activities related to the
Temporary Works.
• Introduces for the first time the title “Temporary Works Supervisor” as a competent
person who is responsible to and assists the Temporary Works Co-ordinator.
iv CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Introduces for the first time the Design Check Categories 0 to 3.
The fourth revision of BS 5975: 2019-
• Titled: - BS 5975: 2019 – Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the
Permissible Stress Design of Falsework
• Adds to the previous definition of Temporary Works as follows: -
o “Temporary Works can be described as providing an “engineered solution”
that is used to support or protect either an existing structure or the permanent
works during construction, or to support an item of plant or equipment, or the
vertical sides or side-slopes of an excavation during construction operations
on site or to provide access. It is used to control stability, strength, deflection,
fatigue, geotechnical effects and hydraulic effects within defined limits.”
• The main points noted in the document regarding the changes from the previous BS
5975 revision are as follows: -
o The 2019 revision provides details for Clients, Permanent Works Designers
and Temporary Works Designers to adopt, this detail has not been provided
in previous revisions and previously concentrated on details of the procedure
for contractors to adopt.
o This revision considers the Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 2015 and particularly in respect to the interface between the
design of Permanent Works and the design of Temporary Works.
o The Principal Contractor’s Temporary Works Co-ordinator (PC’s TWC) retains
overall responsibility for the Temporary Works on site, but where another
Contractor manages their own Temporary Works within that site, they have
their own procedures and appoint their own TWC.
o Section 2 has been updated to include recommendations for designers on the
Partial Factors to be used in Limit State Design of Temporary Works and on
design considerations to be applied for all Temporary Works design. (This
refers to Clause 13.3.9)
o There has not been a revision to Section 3 but a relevant safety point relating
to fatigue has been noted in Clause 16.3.5
In summary: -
• BS 5975 is predominantly a Temporary Works design code with reference to

procedural control
• Prior to 2008 the code referred to “Falsework” and “Temporary Works” was not
referred to
• In 2008 the title of BS 5975 changed, and “Temporary Works” was added to the title
for the first time
• In 2008 the definition of Temporary Works was introduced for the first time
• Before 2008 the terms “Temporary Works Coordinator” and “Temporary Works
Supervisor” did not exist in BS 5975
• Before 2008 the Design Check Categories 0 to 3 did not exist in BS 5975
v CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
The Construction (Design & Management) Regulations
2015
The first introduction of these regulations in the UK construction industry was March 31st
1994. All design and construction work must align with the requirements of these regulations
and Permanent Designers responsibility to consider the selected method of construction and
consider Temporary Works in their designs is made very clear.
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Clause 19.1.2.

These regulations are widely referred to as CDM 2015 and within these regulations there is
an Interpretation section that refers to a number of things with a sample of some of this as
follows: -
“Client” means any person for whom a project is carried out;
“Designer” means any person (including a client, contractor or other person referred
to in these Regulations) who in the course or furtherance of a business-
a) Prepares or modifies a design; or
b) Arranges for, or instructs, any person under their control to do so,
“Design” includes drawings, design details, specifications and bills of quantities

(including specification of articles or substances) relating to a structure, and
calculations prepared for the purpose of a design;
“Principal Contractor” means the contractor appointed under regulation 5(1)(b) to

perform the specified duties in regulations 12 to 14;
“Principal Designer” means the designer appointed under regulation 5(1)(a) to

perform the specified duties in regulations 11 and 12;
“Structure” means—
a) any building, timber, masonry, metal or reinforced concrete structure, railway
line or siding, tramway line, dock, harbour, inland navigation, tunnel, shaft,
bridge, viaduct, waterworks, reservoir, pipe or pipeline, cable, aqueduct,
sewer, sewage works, gasholder, road, airfield, sea defence works, river
works, drainage works, earthworks, lagoon, dam, wall, caisson, mast, tower,
pylon, underground tank, earth retaining structure or structure designed to
preserve or alter any natural feature and fixed plant;
b) any structure similar to anything specified in paragraph (a);
c) any formwork, falsework, scaffold or other structure designed or used to
provide support or means of access during construction work,
and any reference to a structure includes part of a structure;
vi CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
In summary: -
• The definition of “Structure” in CDM 2015 refers to Temporary Works as underlined

above
Regulation 8 – General Duties
8.—(1) A designer (including a principal designer) or contractor (including a principal

contractor) appointed to work on a project must have the skills, knowledge and experience,
and, if they are an organisation, the organisational capability, necessary to fulfil the role that
they are appointed to undertake, in a manner that secures the health and safety of any
person affected by the project.
(2) A designer or contractor must not accept an appointment to a project unless they fulfil the
conditions in paragraph (1).
(3) A person who is responsible for appointing a designer or contractor to carry out work on
a project must take reasonable steps to satisfy themselves that the designer or contractor
fulfils the conditions in paragraph (1).
(4) A person with a duty or function under these Regulations must cooperate with any other
person working on or in relation to a project, at the same or an adjoining construction site, to
the extent necessary to enable any person with a duty or function to fulfil that duty or
function.
In summary: -
• 8-(1) above notes that a Designer including the Principal Designer and the Contractor
including the Principal Contractor must have the skills, knowledge and experience
necessary to fulfil their role in a manner that secures the health and safety of any
person. One of the things this means is that construction work and Temporary Works
must be considered as this secures or ensures the health and safety of the
individuals undertaking the construction work. The Permanent Works Designer must
have a clear understanding of how they foresee their design to be built considering
the Temporary Works required, space for access and plant, etc. otherwise one of the
obligations under this regulation has not been fulfilled
vii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
Regulation 9 – Duties of Designers
9.—(1) A designer must not commence work in relation to a project unless satisfied that the
client is aware of the duties owed by the client under these Regulations.
(2) When preparing or modifying a design the designer must take into account the general
principles of prevention and any pre-construction information to eliminate, so far as is
reasonably practicable, foreseeable risks to the health or safety of any person—
(a) carrying out or liable to be affected by construction work;
(b) maintaining or cleaning a structure; or
(c) using a structure designed as a workplace.
(3) If it is not possible to eliminate these risks, the designer must, so far as is reasonably
practicable—
(a) take steps to reduce or, if that is not possible, control the risks through the subsequent
design process;
(b) provide information about those risks to the principal designer; and
(c) ensure appropriate information is included in the health and safety file.
(4) A designer must take all reasonable steps to provide, with the design, sufficient
information about the design, construction or maintenance of the structure, to adequately
assist the client, other designers and contractors to comply with their duties under these
Regulations.
In summary: -
• 9-(2) above notes that a Designer must consider the Principles of Prevention in their
design and highlights that construction work and as a result Temporary Works is to
be considered in their design. If a Permanent Works Designer cannot demonstrate
they know how their design is to be constructed considering all Temporary Works,
access requirements, etc. they cannot demonstrate they have fulfilled their
obligations in this regulation. Likewise, if a Principal Designer cannot clearly explain
and highlight all considerations that are present in the Permanent Works design for
construction considering any required Temporary Works, they cannot demonstrate
they have fulfilled their obligations in this regulation.
viii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
Regulation 11 – Duties of a Principal Designer in relation to H&S at
the Pre-Construction Phase
11.—(1) The principal designer must plan, manage and monitor the pre-construction phase
and coordinate matters relating to health and safety during the pre-construction phase to
ensure that, so far as is reasonably practicable, the project is carried out without risks to
health or safety.
(2) In fulfilling the duties in paragraph (1), and in particular when—
(a) design, technical and organisational aspects are being decided in order to plan the
various items or stages of work which are to take place simultaneously or in succession; and
(b) estimating the period of time required to complete such work or work stages,
the principal designer must take into account the general principles of prevention and, where
relevant, the content of any construction phase plan and any health and safety file.
(3) In fulfilling the duties in paragraph (1), the principal designer must identify and eliminate
or control, so far as is reasonably practicable, foreseeable risks to the health or safety of any
person—
(a) carrying out or liable to be affected by construction work;
(b) maintaining or cleaning a structure; or
(c) using a structure designed as a workplace.
(4) In fulfilling the duties in paragraph (1), the principal designer must ensure all designers
comply with their duties in regulation 9.
(5) In fulfilling the duty to coordinate health and safety matters in paragraph (1), the principal
designer must ensure that all persons working in relation to the pre-construction phase
cooperate with the client, the principal designer and each other.
(6) The principal designer must—
(a) assist the client in the provision of the pre-construction information required by regulation
4(4); and
(b) so far as it is within the principal designer’s control, provide pre-construction information,
promptly and in a convenient form, to every designer and contractor appointed, or being
considered for appointment, to the project.
(7) The principal designer must liaise with the principal contractor for the duration of the
principal designer’s appointment and share with the principal contractor information relevant
to the planning, management and monitoring of the construction phase and the coordination
of health and safety matters during the construction phase.
In summary: -
• There is clear responsibility here for the Principal Designer to ensure construction
work and as a result Temporary Works has been considered in the Permanent Works
design otherwise the Principal Designer has not fulfilled one of their obligations under
this regulation.
ix CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
Regulation 19 – Stability of Structures
19.—(1) All practicable steps must be taken, where necessary to prevent danger to any
person, to ensure that any new or existing structure does not collapse if, due to the carrying
out of construction work, it—
(a) may become unstable; or
(b) is in a temporary state of weakness or instability.
(2) Any buttress, temporary support or temporary structure must—
(a) be of such design and installed and maintained so as to withstand any foreseeable loads
which may be imposed on it; and
(b) only be used for the purposes for which it was designed and installed and is maintained.
(3) A structure must not be so loaded as to render it unsafe to any person.
In summary: -
• This regulation clearly highlights construction work and as a result Temporary Works
must be considered at numerous stages including when the structure “is in a
temporary state of weakness or instability”. If a Permanent Works Designer cannot
clearly demonstrate they have considered all stages of construction in their design
and considered what Temporary Works, access, etc. maybe required they cannot
demonstrate that they have even considered this regulation.
On the other side of this if the Permanent Works Designer has considered
construction and any Temporary Works, access, etc. required and clearly
communicated this information on construction drawings to the Contractor it would be
the Contractors responsibility to follow those instructions. In this instance if the
Permanent Works Designer has fulfilled their requirements and passed the correct
information to the Contractor it would be the Contractor that is responsible
themselves if they have not followed the Permanent Works Designers instructions.
So, no guidance at all would indicate the Permanent Works Designer at fault here.
Other possible relevant Regulations
Other possible relevant regulations would include:-
• Regulation 20 – Demolition or Dismantling

• Regulation 22 – Excavations
• Regulation 23 – Cofferdams and Caissons
x CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
The Management of Health & Safety at Work Regulations
1999
The CDM Regulations reference the Principles of Prevention directly from this document.
Regulation 4 and Schedule 1 within these regulations refers to the Principles of Prevention
referenced in the CDM 2015 Regulations that all designers must comply to and Schedule 1
copied here as:-
(a) avoiding risks.
(b) evaluating the risks which cannot be avoided.
(c) combating the risks at source.
(d) adapting the work to the individual, especially as regards the design of workplaces, the
choice of work equipment and the choice of working and production methods, with a view, in
particular, to alleviating monotonous work and work at a predetermined work-rate and to
reducing their effect on health.
(e) adapting to technical progress.
(f) replacing the dangerous by the non-dangerous or the less dangerous.
(g) developing a coherent overall prevention policy which covers technology, organisation of
work, working conditions, social relationships and the influence of factors relating to the
working environment.
(h) giving collective protective measures priority over individual protective measures; and
(i) giving appropriate instructions to employees.
In summary: -
• If a Permanent Works Designer cannot demonstrate they have considered and

understand how their design will be constructed on site considering any Temporary
Works required, room for access and plant movement etc. they cannot demonstrate
how they have applied and used the Principles of Prevention in their Design and as a
result have not fulfilled their obligations under the CDM 2015 and Management of
H&S at Work 1999 Regulations.
• The same is true for the Principal Designer as they are to ensure the Permanent
Works Designer has fulfilled their obligations in the Regulations
xi CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
As BS 5975 :2019 Section 5.2 refers to Training it is worth noting Regulation 13 –
Capabilities and Training, which is copied below as follows: -
13.—(1) Every employer shall, in entrusting tasks to his employees, take into account their
capabilities as regards health and safety.
(2) Every employer shall ensure that his employees are provided with adequate health and
safety training—
(a) on their being recruited into the employer’s undertaking; and
(b) on their being exposed to new or increased risks because of—
(i) their being transferred or given a change of responsibilities within the employer’s
undertaking,
(ii) the introduction of new work equipment into or a change respecting work equipment
already in use within the employer’s undertaking,
(iii) the introduction of new technology into the employer’s undertaking, or
(iv) the introduction of a new system of work into or a change respecting a system of work
already in use within the employer’s undertaking.
(3) The training referred to in paragraph (2) shall—
(a) be repeated periodically where appropriate;
(b) be adapted to take account of any new or changed risks to the health and safety of the
employees concerned; and
(c) take place during working hours.
In summary: -
• An employer has a clear obligation to provide training with regards any task that
influences an employee’s health and safety. Adequate training is to be provided once
the employee is recruited. Training is also to be provided if the employee is exposed
to a new or increased risk due to being given a new task, use of new work
equipment, use of new technology and or a new system of working. Training is to be
repeated periodically where appropriate and take place during working hours.
xii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
The Work at Height Regulations 2005
The Work at Height Regulations refers directly to requirements that must be in place for all
working at height. Any work on site requiring scaffold as stated in the Working at Height
Regulations must be undertaken by suitably trained and competent scaffolders. Likewise,
any scaffold design that falls under the Working at Height Regulations requires a suitably
experienced and competent scaffold design specialist. It is noted elsewhere in this document
that not all Temporary Works Designers can design scaffold suitable for access as required
in the Working at Height Regulations.
Scaffold used on site that is not related to any requirements of the Working at Height
Regulations maybe considered differently and this is one of the reasons BS 5975:2019
provides some details on scaffolding design and use.
The information below has been taken from BS 5975: 2008 as it suitably gives an overview
of these regulations.
The Work at Height Regulations 2005 as amended by the Work at Height (Amendment)
Regulations 2007 Reg. [10] and [11], require that duty holders do all that is reasonably
practicable to prevent anyone falling.
The Regulations require that employers ensure that work is not carried out at height where it
is reasonably practicable to carry out the work safely otherwise [see Reg. 6(2)].
Where work is carried out at height, every employer is required to take suitable and sufficient
measures to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable, any person falling a distance liable
to cause personal injury [Reg. 6(3), 6(4) and 6(5)].
The Regulations also set out a simple hierarchy for managing and selecting equipment for
work at height (Reg. 7). There is a specific requirement [Reg. 7(a)] to give collective
protection measures (eg. safe working platforms and guard-rails, toe-boards etc.) priority
over personal protection measures (eg. fall protection and fall arrest systems).
Amongst other matters the Regulations deal with include:
• planning and organization of work at height (see Reg. 4);
• the requirement that all work at height takes account of weather conditions that could
endanger health and safety [see Reg. 4(3)];
• the competence and training of those who engage in any activity (including organisation,
planning and supervision) relating to work at height (see Reg. 5);
• in the case of specific categories of particular work equipment (i.e. protective
measures/work equipment/working platforms/personal fall protection systems) that the
employer ensures compliance with the appropriate Schedules to the Regulations (see Reg.
8 and Schedules 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6);
• the inspection of work equipment for work at height (see Reg. 12); and
• the inspection of places of work at height (see Reg. 13).
Schedule 3 of the Regulations provides specific requirements for working platforms and
supporting scaffolding, including stability, strength and rigidity. This includes:
xiii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
• the provision of strength and stability calculations for scaffolding (see Schedule 3,
paragraph 7); and
• the supervision (together with the training of workers) of the assembly, alteration and
dismantling of scaffolds (see Schedule 3, paragraph 12).
The Regulations and Schedules deal with the suitability, strength and stability of any
anchorages required for fall arrest, fall protection or work restraint systems. See for example:
• Reg. 8 (c) and Schedule 4, paragraph 4; and
• Reg. 8 (d) and Schedule 5, Part 1, paragraph 3.
The use of ladders is dealt with under Reg. 8(e) and Schedule 6. Paragraph 1 of Schedule 6
requires that every employer shall ensure that a ladder is used for work at height only if a
risk assessment [made under Reg. 3 of the Management of Health and Safety at Work
Regulations 1999] has demonstrated that the use of more suitable work equipment (e.g.
proprietary stair access towers) is not justified.
xiv CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
Temporary Works Coordinator, Supervisor & Awareness
Training
BS 5975:2019 Section 5.2 makes direct reference to training requirements and highlights the
requirement to assess the competence of the actual trainer but does not provide guidance
as to how you may do this. Section 5.2.3 directly states safety professionals and / or
competent skills centre tutors are unlikely to have the necessary understanding in technical
and/or practical aspects of Temporary Works to satisfy minimum training requirements
highlighted in BS 5975:2019.
BS 5975: 2019 – Section 5.2 details training recommendations and states the following: -
5.2.1. All those managing temporary works should have, as a minimum, an

understanding of:
a) the procedures outlined in Section 2 of this British Standard;
b) the specific procedures for the organization for whom the person works;
c) the risk management aspect associated with the management of temporary works;
d) technical knowledge relevant to both the role and the complexity of the work; and
e) practical knowledge relevant to the complexity of the work.
Regarding assessing trainer competence BS 5975: 2019 states the following:-
5.2.3 Those procuring training should assess the actual trainer for competency, not
the training provider; to ensure that the trainer has the relevant and up-to-date
technical or practical experience in Temporary Works.
NOTE 1 Whereas risk management and procedural aspects of Temporary Works
training can be carried out by safety professionals and/or competent skills centre
tutors, they are unlikely to have the necessary understanding in technical and/or
practical aspects of Temporary Works to satisfy the minimum training requirements
identified in 5.2.1d) and 5.2.1e).
BS 5975 : 2019 Section 3.13 describes a competent person / organisation as : -

person/organization with the necessary skills, knowledge and experience (and
organizational capability) of the specific tasks to be undertaken and the risks which
the work entails, to enable them to carry out their duties in relation to the project, to
recognize their limitations, and to take appropriate action in order to prevent harm to
those carrying out construction work, or those affected by the work
xv CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
Within BS 5975: 2019 any further reference to Temporary Works Coordinator or Temporary
Works Supervisor training refers to relevant up-to-date training with no further detail.
The Bragg report recommendations numbers 19 to 26 refer to training recommendations.
Recommendation number 23 refers to practical courses and recommendation number 24
refers to the Construction Industry Training Board (CITB) having resources to assist with
practical courses as the CITB provided a lot of practical training in the 1970’s.
Recommendation number 24 also refers to the Health & Safety Executive controlling the
standard of the courses and reviewing regularly.
This is all very interesting information but the majority of experienced TWC’s or TWS’s in the
UK Construction Industry who have been told they have to attend a CITB 2 Day Temporary
Works Coordinator Course, or a 1 Day Temporary Works Supervisor course have raised
questions as to the validity and use of this training. The individuals who have fed back
positively on this training have predominantly been individuals at the start of their Temporary
Works career. It is great that those embarking on their career have access to training that
gives them a good basic introduction, but it does demonstrate that there is a gap for more
comprehensive training for those operating at a higher level as part of the mandatory training
requirements
Safety and Temporary Works Management are both fundamental parts of the construction
industry and as such it is imperative that up-to-date training is fit for purpose. Any training
should aim to deliver comprehensive, accurate and engaging content to execute positive
change across the industry.
Temporary Works Training should have a syllabus and progression route through the
training process rather than repeating information across the three training courses which
are: -
1. Temporary Works Awareness
2. Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS)
3. Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC)
The question must be asked if you have no Temporary Works experience, is it appropriate
that an individual can attend a 2 Day CITB Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) Training
Course and get a TWC Certificate?
Does the short training course, providing certification accurately value the role of Temporary
Works and Temporary Works Training in the UK construction industry?
Of course, it is fully acknowledged that just doing the training does not make you a TWC as
you need to be assessed and appointed by the relevant Designated Individual (DI). This
further highlights the importance of having suitably experienced and competent DI’s
appointed in organisations.
If the value and kudos of this training is increased, then the value and kudos on site of
Temporary Works automatically increases and the industry begins to change its perception
and appreciation to reflect this. The role of a TWC and TWS then is given higher value and
better acknowledged on site. There should be a strong drive in the UK Construction Industry
to correct this current situation as that will over time reap massive benefits for safety and
onsite management of Temporary Works.
The Author recommends the following changes to the current training requirements. A
syllabus should be introduced for this training with a progression route to the TWC level and
xvi CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
this would start with the Temporary Works Awareness training course. Content should not be
repeated in all three courses.
Confirmation of attending the previous course should be provided before progressing on to
the next level of course and experience achieved in Temporary Works on site being
documented and shown for progression. For instance, graduate Engineers starting out on
site could join the course and attend the Temporary Works Awareness to progress to TWS
and eventually TWC training and sign off competence.
Having this type of structure and syllabus would make the Designated Individual TWS or
TWC appointment process easier and more quantifiable for all parties.
This style of training could be advocated for by the Temporary Works forum (TWf) which
would in turn drive and promote it through the UK Construction Industry and set the standard
for training.
Attached in Appendix K is a very rough first draft for a Temporary Works Awareness Course.
It is to be noted this example provided is not a finished complete Temporary Works
Awareness training course but instead is a starting point to be used if found to be suitable
and will require editing, etc. as required. It is also to be noted that this awareness course
content has been created to attempt to match the current CITB Temporary Works
Awareness course content requirements and the author would agree there is little value in
some of the slides present.
Possible Course Structure

Possible course content could be as follows: -
1. Temporary Works Awareness Training Course
• No previous site experience required to attend
• Course content to cover: -
o What Temporary Works are, so delegates know what is being referred to
o The history of Temporary Works in the UK Construction Industry, historic
failures, Bragg Report, creation of BS 5975, etc.
o Brief overview of Health & Safety At Work Act (HSAWA) 1974, CDM, Working
At Heigh, LOLER, PUWER, etc.
o Brief overview of BS 5975 highlighting the DI, TWC, TWS and how
Temporary Works is controlled using a Temporary Works Procedures and
these individuals
o Brief overview of Temporary Works Design and the process of how it is
managed on site
o Etc.
2. Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS) Training Course

• Must have attended the Temporary Works Awareness course
• Must have suitable on-site experience and kept a documented record (i.e.,
similar CPD records for Temporary Works Site knowledge). This could be listing
information such as “2 months on site setting out working alongside steel fixing
team and observing Temporary Works being constructed”, etc.
o What BS 5975 states a Temporary Works Supervisor must do
xvii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
o Highlighting the practicalities of what a being a TWS on site is such as the
inspection and recording requirements, etc.
o Highlighting the Temporary Works Design Categorisation - 0 to 3 and what
that might look like on site for Inspections
o Highlighting the Construction Implementation Risk Classes – Very Low, Low,
Medium, and High and what that might look like on site for Inspections
o Highlighting the letter of appointment and the content and limitations of this
appointment, making the TWS responsibility very clear
o Highlighting the type of records to be kept and reported to the TWC and
others as required on site, giving practical examples, explanations and
tutorials
o Highlighting the chain of command and responsibility from TWC to TWS
o Highlighting the requirements if the TWS works for a sub-contractor under a
Principal Contractor (PC)
o Etc.
3. Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) Training Course

• Must have attended the Temporary Works Supervisor course
• Must have suitable on-site experience and kept a documented record (i.e.,
similar CPD records for Temporary Works Site knowledge). This could be listing
information such as “I was actively part of the Temporary Works Team
overseeing and inspecting the formwork installation on site for the last 2 months”,
etc.
o What BS 5975 states a Temporary Works Coordinator must do
o Highlighting the practicalities of what a being a TWC on site is such as the
Design Brief, Design Liaison, Temporary Works Inspection and recording
requirements, etc.
o Highlighting the Temporary Works Design Categorisation - 0 to 3 and what
that might look like on site for the creation of Temporary Works Design Briefs,
etc.
o Highlighting the Construction Implementation Risk Classes – Very Low, Low,
Medium, and High and what that might look like on site for the creation of
Temporary Works Design Briefs, etc.
o Highlighting how the correct brief and Temporary Works Selection is critical
o Highlighting how to assess the returned designs before final agreement and
sign off with the Temporary Works Designer
o Highlighting how to create use and manage a Temporary Works Register
effectively as required on site, giving practical examples, explanations and
tutorials
o Highlighting the letter of appointment and the content and limitations of this
appointment, making the TWC responsibility very clear
o Highlighting the chain of command and responsibility from DI to TWC to TWS
o Highlighting how the site is managed if there is a Principal Contractor TWC
with Sub-Contractors TWC’s working under the PC TWC
o Etc.
There is nothing to stop suitably experienced contractors creating and managing their own
Temporary Works Training and it is just the Construction Industry as a whole that has just
defaulted to “you must have a CITB Training Certificate” and used this as a simple tick box
xviii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
for training requirements without actually assessing the value of this training. BS 5975:2019
does not state training has to be the CITB course.
Companies could create their own in-house training following these general principles and
document the information and assessments of individuals and then get this training
independently audited so all this information can be presented to verify the value of the
training and not to then need a 2-Day CITB TWC Course of limited real value.
The Temporary Works Forum could become the auditing body for these bespoke company
Temporary Works Training courses and be the body to ensure suitable training is in place in
the industry and organisations comply to the training they provide.
If things are to improve in Temporary Works in the UK Construction Industry, then everyone
needs to start with the training and take it seriously and give it some real value and focus
rather than defaulting to the same training as a tick box with no real value for a TWC working
on site.
Competency of Trainers
For those operating in the current training landscape (at time of writing) it is imperative that
you assess the competency of the trainer you are employing and your Temporary Works
training requirements. If nothing else please at least assess the competence of the trainer
you are employing which has been highlighted in BS 5975: 2019 Clause 5.2.3.
It is reasonable (and diligent) to expect to be provided with an up to date CV of the trainer
highlighting the trainers Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) and / or Temporary Works
Supervisor (TWS) practical experience.
The term “competent person” is not a defined term and has been the subject of legal
discussions. However, as a guide, a person may be regarded as able to perform the duty if
they have sufficient practical and theoretical knowledge and actual experience of the work in
question to enable them to recognise hazards associated with the work being undertaken.
Noting the term “Temporary Works” and the roles “Temporary Works Coordinator” and
“Temporary Works Supervisor” first appeared in the 2008 revision of BS 5975.
The below list aims to serve as a helpful tool for those assessing Trainer competence look at
or ask the following: -
1. Is the trainer able to demonstrate experience of working on a construction site for a
Contractor delivering and managing their own Temporary Works as an appointed
Temporary Works Coordinator or Temporary Works Supervisor after 2008?
o If the course is a TWS course, then you look for TWS experience and likewise
for TWC course you look for TWC experience
o Scrutinise the experience to ensure they have actually fulfilled this role
actively on site and not had an oversight role where the sub-contractor
actually did the TWS or TWC role
o Ask for references to confirm this experience and competence on site
o The answer to this question should be simple yes or no after you look at the
detail
xix CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
2. If the answer to question 1 is NO, this would be the next question of the trainer.
Has the trainer practical experience as a Temporary Works Designer delivering fit for
construction drawings to contractors on site and liaising with contractors TWCs after
2008?
o Scrutinise the experience to ensure they have actually fulfilled this role getting
their boots dirty on site and not undertaken Permanent Works type designs
where other designers have undertaken the fit for construction Temporary
Works Designs
o Ask for references to confirm this experience and competence on site
o The answer to this question should be simple yes or no after you look at the
detail
3. Can the trainer convey the course content and engage with the delegates to ensure
information is taken in suitably by the delegates? (Basically, can the trainer train
effectively, as this is a skill in itself) This can be demonstrated by references from
previous course delegates or the relevant training providers clients.
4. Has the trainer read BS 5975 cover to cover at least once? (Basically, has the trainer
read the main and only official document on this subject?). It is recommended that
any train the trainer accreditation for Temporary Works could be awarded on this
basis.
Summary review:-
• The answer to all questions should be YES, the importance of understanding BS

5975 in its entirety should not be underestimated.
• Being an effective trainer is a skill in itself and sometimes people with all of the
knowledge and experience cannot effectively communicate the information to
delegates present
• If the first 2 questions returned a NO answer but you have a trainer that is brilliant at
conveying the course content to the delegates, then you still may choose to use that
trainer, but you will note the limits of the trainer’s practical experience and
understanding. This will be critical for any questions or understanding of
interpretation of BS 5975 as the trainer will interpret BS 5975 with no Temporary
Works competence or experience. Remember BS 5975:2019 is not to be read and
interpreted word for word as noted in the Foreword of this document.
• Regarding question 4, all trainers need to reply yes to this question with no
exception. How can the trainer be able to answer questions on a document they have
not even read fully?
You may choose to use these 4 questions or use your own questions or even add to these
questions but as long as you assess the practical Temporary Works on-site experience and
knowledge of the trainer you are at least undertaking due diligence with the money you are
spending for the training service being provided.
Regarding Temporary Works Competence please remember Temporary Works is an
“Engineered Solution” with direct practical application. So Temporary Works is engineering
xx CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Ronan O’Driscoll
based with on-site practical applications. From this if you have not actually done the job on
site after 2008 and / or have no Temporary Works Engineering experience you have no up-
to date knowledge or Temporary Works experience.
We will all have come across individuals in our careers who profess to be subject matter
experts but lack true active site-based experience. Temporary Works is no exception to this
and as such it is important that appropriate training and subsequent accreditation is applied
appropriately. This will in turn ensure that the Temporary Works Industry is valued and
respected as it should be across the Construction Industry
Let’s use the following as an example: -

Imagine you sit on a bus every day, possibly traveling to work and back and imagine
that journey takes an hour each way. During this time, you always sit at the front of
the bus and watch everything the bus driver does and perhaps even chat with them
about driving buses.
After doing this for a number of years are you then qualified to start teaching bus
drivers to drive buses?
Another example maybe as follows: -

Imagine you are an aircraft incident investigator and you have been trained to
investigate accidents and you have vast training and experience in investigating
incidents such as this. There has been a plane crash that you investigate to
understand the reasons for the crash and what went wrong. You spend a lot of time
and use your vast training and experience to get to the root cause of the incident.
After the findings are published and everything is finished are you then qualified to
teach pilots how to fly airplanes?
Reflecting on these two examples and looking at each in turn please now consider in
example one that Temporary Works on a construction site is the bus, the Bus Driver is the
TWC and the individual riding the bus and observing is a Health and Safety or other
Construction Professional working on site.
In the second example imagine the Investigator is a Health and Safety Investigator on a
Construction Site and imagine the plane crash is a Temporary Works Incident on a
Construction site and the pilot is a TWC.
It is to be noted that Health and Safety or other Construction Professionals working on site
may be very experienced and competent in their chosen fields and the author has nothing
but respect for these individuals but without suitable experience, knowledge and
competence they cannot be assumed to be competent in another field such as Temporary
Works. The same can be said for experienced and competent Temporary Works
professionals without suitable experience, knowledge and competence cannot be assumed
to be competent in other chosen fields of construction professionals.
xxi CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
“Temporary Works” change to “Construction Engineering”
The term “Temporary Works” is proving more difficult for individuals to understand as the
years pass and some of this is possibly due to the fact that the term “Temporary Works” is a
contract term that has been adopted in the UK Construction Industry probably for as long as
construction contracts have been in place and as the years pass it is less widely understood
as to what the term directly refers to.
To understand why the term “Temporary Works” is used you need to consider construction
contracts in the UK. These construction contracts refer to the “Works” as this is a contractual
term for what is to be completed by the contactor under the terms of the contract. Within the
construction contract it will usually refer to the “Permanent Works Design” which depending
on the contract type is usually provided to the contractor to complete the “Works”.
Anything outside of the “Permanent Works” that the contractor is to design for the
construction of the “Works” will usually not be left in place after the construction (hence
Temporary) of the “Works” and as a result may be referred to in the contract as “Temporary
Works”. The “Temporary Works” are the engineered solutions designed by the contractor to
complete the “Works” as highlighted in the construction contract.
This terminology has likely been in place and used in the UK by contractors for as long as
there have been construction contracts, dating back to the contracts for canals, bridges and
railways in the days of Thomas Telford (1757-1834) and beyond.
Following on from this use of the term “Works” for everything to be completed in the contract
and keep this terminology in mind for descriptions such as “Formwork”. Which as you know
is the face material to form the concrete when it is poured.
The description of “Falsework” which was usually the supporting structure to the “Formwork”.
“Falsework” is removed once concrete is poured and reached suitable strength and is not
visible or present when all the “Works” are completed so the work is seen as “False” work.
Over time, despite being widely used by civil contractors on construction sites in the UK,
these terms have become less widely understood, but individuals arriving on site must learn
and use them in communication. To assist with the wider appreciation of Temporary Works
in the UK Construction Industry and to highlight this is an “Engineered Solution” the author
would propose referring to “Temporary Works” as “Construction Engineering”. This would
better reflect the engineering basis of Temporary Works and the author believes this would
make the terminology easier to picture and understand across the industry.
Also, for technical training in Colleges and Universities having a module on Construction
Engineering would seem logical for Engineering students.
For the remainder of this document please note the following: -
• “Construction Engineering” (CE) = “Temporary Works” (TW)

• “Construction Engineering Coordinator” (CEC) = “Temporary Works Coordinator” (TWC)
• “Construction Engineering Supervisor” (CES) = “Temporary Works Supervisor” (TWS)
• “Construction Engineering Designer” (CED) = “Temporary Works Designer” (TWD)
• “Construction Engineering Register” (CER) = “Temporary Works Register” (TWR)
• “Construction Engineering Schedule” = “Temporary Works Schedule”
xxii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Ronan O’Driscoll
1 Introduction
Construction Engineering can be described as providing an “engineered solution” that is
used to:-
• Support or protect either an existing structure or the permanent works during

construction
• Support an item of plant or equipment, or vertical sides or side-slopes of an
excavation during construction operations on site
• Provide access
It is used to control stability, strength, deflection, fatigue, geotechnical effects, and hydraulic
effects within defined limits. The “engineering” refers to civil, structural, or mechanical
design.
Construction Engineering is engineering with a practical and real application on construction
sites and as such is fundamental for all construction to be undertaken. Construction
Engineering has been around as long as Humans have been building. Consider the
assumption that timber rollers, earth ramps and ropes and levers were used to get large
stones in place for the construction of the ancient pyramids in Egypt - that would be
Construction Engineering.
To get an understanding of what we are referring to the photos below are shown to ensure
the reader understands the term Construction Engineering. Generally, the author would say
“generally” as this is not always completely true but will suffice to give an example and
understanding, what you can see present in the partially constructed photos that are not
present in the photo of the completed structure can be considered as Construction
Engineering. It is to be noted that Construction Engineering is also used for demolition,
refurbishment works, lifting and moving structures, etc.
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Royal Albert Bridge
o Is a railway bridge which spans the river Tamar in England between
Plymouth, Devon and Saltash, Cornwall
o Construction commenced in 1854 and it opened on the 2nd of May 1859
o Central span of 138.7m (455 feet) made from two lenticular iron trusses
30.5m (100 feet) above the water
This photo of construction shows the bridge span being This photo of construction shows the bridge
jacked up into location which is all Construction span again being jacked up into location,
Engineering which is all Construction Engineering. Notice
the height above the water of the bridge
span
This photo of construction shows the bridge approach parapets being constructed
Ronan O’Driscoll
This photo shows the completed final structure as a comparison to the previous under construction
photos.
What is present in the previous photos and missing in this final photo is predominantly all
Construction Engineering
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Clifton Suspension Bridge
o Is a suspension bridge which spans the Avon Gorge and the River Avon in
England linking Clifton in Bristol to Leigh Woods in North Somerset
o Construction commenced in 1831 and was affected by the Bristol Riots, it
opened in 1864
o Central Span of 214m (702 feet) and a height of 76m (249 feet)
This photo of construction shows the timber This photo of construction shows the timber structures
structures used to build the abutment piers which is used to build the abutment piers with both piers visible
all Construction Engineering
This photo of construction shows the progress of placing

the suspension chains
This photo of construction shows the timber
structures used to build the abutment piers
and the start of the suspension chains
Ronan O’Driscoll
This photo of construction shows the progress of placing
the suspension chains
This photo of construction shows the work force of that time
This photo shows the completed final structure as a comparison to the previous under construction photos.
What is present in the previous photos and missing in this final photo is predominantly all Construction
Engineering
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Brooklyn Bridge
o Is a hybrid cable-stayed/suspension bridge which spans the East River in
New York City between the boroughs of Manhattan and Brooklyn
o Construction commenced in 1869 and it opened on the 24th of May 1883
o Main span is 486.3 meters (1,595.5 Feet)
o It was the first steel wire suspension bridge constructed
This diagram cross section shows the

construction of the piers and the workers
digging under the structure to place it deeper
in the riverbed
This photo of construction shows the progress of the
construction of one of the piers
This photo of construction shows the progress of the

suspension cables and the deck below
Construction workers working on

the suspension cables
Ronan O’Driscoll
A view of the construction from the riverbank looking out across the river
This photo of construction shows the progress of the construction work and various Construction
Engineering present
Ronan O’Driscoll
Engineering
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Eiffel Tower
o Is a wrought-iron lattice tower on the Champ de Mars in Paris, France
o Construction commenced 28th January 1887 and it opened on the 31st of
March 1889
o 324 meters (1,063 feet) tall
o Base footprint is 125 meters (410 feet) square
This photo of construction shows the progress of the This photo of construction shows the progress of the
construction work and various Construction construction work and the first platform level being
Engineering present constructed
This photo of construction shows various This photo of construction shows the progress of the
Construction Engineering from the access to the construction work as the first platform level is being
temporary supports completed
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction workers working high
above Paris
Engineering
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Forth Rail Bridge
o Is a cantilever railway bridge which spans the Firth of Forth in the east of
Scotland, 9 miles west of central Edinburgh
o Construction commenced in 1882 and was completed on the 4th of March
1890
o When it opened it was the world’s longest single cantilever bridge span and
even today it is now the world’s second longest with a span of 521m (1,709
feet)
o It is the first major structure to be built in Britain from Steel
This photo of construction shows the piers

being constructed This photo of construction shows various Construction
Engineering from the access to the temporary supports
This photo of construction shows various Construction Engineering with a large

amount of access platforms
Ronan O’Driscoll
This photo of construction shows the pier construction progressing with the spans
between not yet in place
This photo of construction shows the spans being constructed
Ronan O’Driscoll
This photo of construction shows the spans being constructed
Engineering
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Millau Viaduct
o Is a multi-span cable-stayed bridge across the gorge valley of the Tam near
Millau in the Aveyron department in the Occitanie Region, in Southern
France
o Construction commenced in December 2001, and it opened on the 16th of
December 2014
o One of the masts summits is 324 meters (1,063 feet) tall
o Bridge deck height of 270 meters (886 feet)
o This is an example of Construction Engineering integrated into the
Permanent Works Design process and planning
o
o
This photo of construction shows the piers being

constructed
This photo of construction shows the piers

being constructed
This photo of construction shows the deck

being constructed with Construction
Engineering in place to allow the deck to be
moved into place
This photo of construction shows the towers for the
bridge support cables being placed
Ronan O’Driscoll
This photo of construction shows the piers being constructed
This photo of construction shows the deck being constructed with

Construction Engineering in place to allow the deck to be moved into place
This photo of construction shows the deck being constructed with Construction Engineering in place
to allow the deck to be moved into place. Note the bridge parapet undulating along its length at this
construction stage
Ronan O’Driscoll
Engineering
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering is one of the most interesting and rewarding areas of engineering
to be involved with as you can use your Engineering knowledge and skill applied to a direct
practical application on site for the benefit of the construction team. With Construction
Engineering you can be involved in many levels and areas, from feasibility construction
proposals through design, delivery and management on site including installation and
removal.
From an Engineering application alone a Construction Engineering Designer needs to have
the understanding of the Permanent Works Design to fully understand the designed load
path and then use their Engineering knowledge and understanding to undertake
Construction Engineering Design for the safe, efficient and timely delivery of construction on
site.
From an onsite Coordination and Supervision application the Construction Engineering
solution must be proposed and agreed understanding the site limitations and / or restrictions
to allow it to be designed. When the solution is finalised and agreed the Construction Team
is to be Supervised and Coordinated to complete the construction work safely and efficiently.
Construction Engineering allows you to be involved with design through to site management
with any variation of both depending on your preference and / or skill set. It allows you to
propose new and interesting solutions to problems and issues encountered on site for the
benefit of the construction team’s safety and the completion of the construction work on time
and to budget.
It is an area where there is always room for innovation and new solutions, so you always
have an opportunity to make a real difference and make your mark in construction for the
benefit of safety and cost.
Having the opportunity to work on site and learn from site teams to grow your understanding
and confidence both in engineering and site management enables you to become a
competent and experienced Construction Engineering professional, so that in construction
and design meetings you can confidently discuss a variety of construction and design topics
with knowledge and understanding beyond most present.
Gaining Construction Engineering Design knowledge and understanding will mean you have
Engineering knowledge beyond the Permanent Works Designer as you need to understand
the Permanent Works Design load paths during construction and when fully completed and
know how and where to control those loads.
Construction Engineering is the one area that remains and will always remain an area in the
Construction Industry where you can truly make a difference and have the variety and
challenge of work that will keep you engaged and interested in your whole professional
career. The author would say in the correct construction / design organisation there is no
better and rewarding area of engineering to be involved in.
If you look through history at some of the great engineers of which there are many, the ones
that really left a mark on society and history were the engineers involved from the feasibility
and proposal stage through the design and construction on site. These engineers had an in-
depth knowledge of Construction Engineering both from a design point of view and an on-
site delivery application. They built structures that many at the time did not believe were
possible. They could only achieve what many thought was impossible through Construction
Engineering Design and application for on-site delivery.
Ronan O’Driscoll
There are many examples of this through history such as Thomas Telford (1757-1834) who
was an experienced stone mason before becoming the great engineer everyone remembers
him as. He used his on-site practical construction knowledge from his days as a stone
mason along with his engineering knowledge to be an expert in Construction Engineering.
This allowed him to fully understand what was required for construction of his structures and
how he would deliver this on site.
George Stephenson (1781-1848) was very much a self-taught Civil and Mechanical
Engineer who utilised his practical hands-on experience and knowledge for the construction
of his structures and locomotives, etc. He also invented things such as a safety lamp for use
in flammable atmospheres as he began his working life in coal mines. He worked closely
with his son Robert Stephenson (1803-1859) and the railways lines they constructed would
not have been possible if they did not have an in-depth knowledge and understanding of
Marc Isambard Brunel (1769-1849) who patented the tunnel shield and utilised this for the
construction of the Thames Tunnel demonstrates a clear application of Construction
Engineering on site.
Isambard Kingdom Brunel (1806-1859) followed in his father’s footsteps and there are many
examples of his application of Construction Engineering for the successful construction of his
structures. An example would be the modular hospitals he designed and built so that they
were prefabricated and shipped out for use in the Crimean War at Scutari. Florence
Nightingale referred to these structures as “those magnificent huts”. The creative design
enabled hygienic, ventilated hospital facilities to be built efficiently, resulting in the reduction
of patient deaths during the Crimean War. Brunel sent the prefabricated units, tools
equipment, labour and clear instructions to erect the units in position. Without a clear
understanding of Construction Engineering and how structures are built and site practices,
he would not have been able to modularise construction and prefabricate in this way.
Gustave Eiffel (1832-1923) detailed knowledge of Construction Engineering was utilised for
all his many construction projects. As an example, the Eiffel Tower, which is his most
famous structure, required a huge understanding of Construction Engineering to be able to
construct the four steel legs and then to get them to meet high in the air and be joined with
steel and rivets. He utilised caissons to dig the foundations for the four legs and sand placed
in the leg bases so that he could level the four legs suitably to make the connection high in
the air. When the first high level platform was constructed, he ensured welfare facilities were
placed at this level for the construction teams again demonstrating his knowledge and
understanding of the construction process and what was required to be designed and
managed for use on site. The steel pieces were all delivered to site fabricated to size in the
order required for the steel erection to be completed which again demonstrates an
understanding of Construction Engineering required on site. Not one death occurred during
the entire construction of the tower, except for one worker who entered the closed site at
night after work had finished and fatally attempted to show off to his girlfriend by climbing
dangerously.
Washington Roebling (1837-1926) and Emily Warren Roebling (1843-1903) who are famous
for the construction of Brooklyn Bridge clearly demonstrated their knowledge and application
of Construction Engineering for the completion of this project. From the Construction
Engineering required for the construction of the foundations below the surface of the East
River in caissons breathing compressed air to the temporary access required at high level
over the river for the construction of the towers, the suspension cables and deck.
Ronan O’Driscoll
The many great engineers that are remembered in history all have something in common
and that common thread is Construction Engineering. The author would challenge you to
think of and name a great engineer who has not demonstrated a clear understanding of
Construction Engineering to allow their projects to be successfully completed on site.
It appears with the creation of British Standards at the beginning of the 20th Century (The
Engineering Standards Committee – the forerunner of the British Standards Institution (BSI)
– came into being on the 26th of April 1901) that the Engineering on Construction sites
started to become more specialist than generalist and this is not a bad thing. The focus and
development in specific areas allows deeper understanding and appreciation of those areas
for the benefit of all and this has allowed major advancements in understanding and
knowledge. However, it is strange that around this time and soon after we appear to no
longer see the great engineers that we had seen in previous years and some of this is a
result of the change in the type of construction projects and end of the Industrial Revolution.
Some of the reason may also be that Construction Engineering was not highlighted around
this time as a specialism in Engineering and got somewhat ignored by British Standards.
Perhaps over the years as Construction Engineering lost clear focus with the creation of
British Standards in other areas, this resulted in the knowledge and understanding becoming
a little diluted in the construction industry. Perhaps as a result of this when construction
boomed in the 1960’s and 1970’s in the UK several Construction Engineering collapses
tragically resulted in the loss of life and this focused the UK Government to correct the issue.
The result was the creation of a Construction Engineering Design Code in 1982 (BS 5975).
If you are interested in Construction and Engineering, be it from design through to on-site
management with any variety of each and you want to follow in the footsteps of the great
engineers in history to make your mark and name in the construction industry for the benefit
of safety and the further advancement of construction practices you need to have an
understanding of BS 5975 and gain on-site experience and knowledge of Construction
Engineering. The rewards of becoming a Construction Engineering Professional are huge
and will set you apart from others in the industry.
Ronan O’Driscoll
2 Hierarchy of Documents for Construction in the UK
This section is to give a brief understanding of the importance and relevance of certain
documents and some of the key documents referenced here have already been highlighted
in the earlier sections of this document before the Introduction.
In the UK construction industry, we have a hierarchy of documents as follows: -

Acts of Parliament (Acts)
Regulations (Regs)
British Standard (BS)
Publicly Available Specification (PAS) /

Industry Guidance Documents /
Trade Guides (e.g. SCI and NASC Publications) /
Published and peer reviewed papers /
Text books (e.g. Tomlinson or the Steel Designers Manual) /
Company Policies, etc.
You are legally required to comply to all the relevant requirements of an Act or Regulation that
is relevant to you and the work you are undertaking with no exception. Not complying with an
Act or Regulation will most probably result in court action and can result with an individual and
company being prosecuted and one of the outcomes maybe a prison sentence and a large
fine.
You are not legally required to comply with all the relevant requirements of a British Standard
that is relevant to you and the work you are undertaking. Not complying with a British Standard
may not result in court action if it can be demonstrated what is being done is suitably and
sufficiently managed to be safe for all parties involved but it is recognised that it is easier for
all parties if you can demonstrate compliance to a suitable British Standard as required.
Also, there is no legal requirement to comply to any PAS, Industry Guidance, etc.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Examples of some of these relevant documents are as follows: -
Acts of Parliament (Acts)
Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 (HASAWA)
The Health and Safety (Offences) Act 2008 (HSOA 2008)
Etc.
Regulations (Regs)
The Construction Design & Management Regulations 2015 (CDM 2015)
The Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1999
The Works At Height Regulations 2005 (WAH)
Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations 1998 (LOLER)
Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations 1998 (PUWER)
The Personal Protective Equipment at Work Regulations
Etc.
British Standard (BS)

BS 5975 : 2019 Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the Permissible
Stress Design of Falsework
Etc.
Publicly Available Specification (PAS) / Industry Guidance Documents / Company

Policies, etc.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3 Organisations involved in Construction Engineering
To start looking at the organisations involved in Construction Engineering we first need to
look at the organisational arrangement of the UK Construction Design and Management
Regulations (CDM) 2015 so that we can understand the preconstruction connection to the
Permanent Works Designer and the responsibility of the Permanent Works Designer and the
Principal Designer to consider Construction Engineering in the design as early as is possible
as this will reap the greatest rewards for safety, programme and cost.
3.1 CDM 2015 – Organisational Arrangement

The CDM regulations references duty holders as follows: -
• The Client
o The organisations or individuals for whom a construction project is carried out
• The Principal Designer (PD)
o Designers appointed by the Client in projects involving more than one
contractor. They can be an organisation or an individual with sufficient
knowledge, experience, and ability to carry out the role
• Designers
o Those, who as part of a business, prepare or modify designs for a building,
product or system relating to construction work
• The Principal Contractor (PC)
o Are contractors appointed by the Client to coordinate the construction phase
of a project where it involves more than one contractor
• Contractors
o Are those who do the actual construction work and can either be an individual
or a company
3.1.1 The Client

The Client is responsible to ensure: -
• Duty holders such as the Principal Designer and Principal Contractor are appointed
and suitably competent and experienced to undertake their tasks
• Sufficient time and resources are allocated to the Project to ensure it can be
completed as required
• Al relevant information is prepared and provided to the duty holders
• The Principal Designer and the Principal Contractor carry out their duties
• Welfare facilities are provided on site
If the Client appoints a PD who cannot demonstrate suitable competence and experience,
then the Client has failed their duty. Likewise, if a Client appoints a PC who cannot
demonstrate competence and experience.
The Client is to provide all information and cannot withhold any information from the PD or
PC that is anyway relevant to the planning or execution of the construction project.
The Client is to confirm as work progresses that the PD and PC are carrying out their duties
under CDM 2015.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.1.2 The Principal Designer (PD)
The PD must: -
• Plan, Manage, Monitor and Coordinate Health and Safety in the Pre-Construction
Phase of a Project. This includes: -
o Identifying, eliminating, or controlling foreseeable risks
o Ensuring Designers carry out their duties
• Prepare and provide relevant information to other duty holders
• Provide relevant information to the PC to help them plan, manage, monitor, and
coordinate Health and Safety in the construction phase
The PD is the controlling organisation or individual for the project until construction begins,
and a PC is duly appointed.
All designers involved with the project must be coordinated by the PD and the PD is to
ensure all Designers carry out their tasks considering the Principles of Prevention.
It is the job of the PD to create the Pre-Construction Health and Safety file for the project and
have designs that are fully constructable considering all Construction Engineering and any
site restrictions as required.
If a PD has done their job correctly, they will hand over the Pre-Construction information to
the PC that has had full constructability reviews and considers all required Construction
Engineering clearly highlighting how the Designers have planned for their Designs to be built
on site. If the PD does not hand this level of information to the PC at the beginning of the
project the PD has not done their job as highlighted in the CDM Regulations.
Once the PC is appointed and construction begins the PD has no further role but to
coordinate questions on the design from the PC Team to the Permanent Works Designers. If
the PD has done their job correctly these questions should be minimal and the questions
should be as a result of the PC changing the proposed construction sequence the
Permanent Designer has highlighted or due to some unforeseen circumstances such as
change in ground conditions, etc.
When construction is complete the PC hands the Construction Health and Safety File back
to the PD to compile and complete the final Health and Safety file for the project.
It is to be noted that the PD role requires the organisation or individual to have a clear
understanding of Construction Engineering and as a result requires experience and
competence in Construction Engineering.
Suitable competence would be such as: -
• Demonstrable experience of being a Construction Engineering Coordinator working

on site for a Contractor managing and delivering their own Construction Engineering
solutions in line with the requirements of BS 5975 from 2008 onwards
And / Or
• Demonstrable experience of being a Construction Engineering Designer creating Fit

For Construction drawings and solutions on site for a Contractor in line with the
requirements of BS 5975 from 2008 onwards
Ronan O’Driscoll
The PD must have Engineering knowledge and capabilities to be able to oversee all the
required Permanent Works Designers at the Pre-Construction Stage for the Client and
ensure the Principles of Prevention have been considered by all Designers.
If the PD does not have working knowledge, experience, and competence of BS 5975 they
are not competent to assess the constructability issues of any proposed designs.
Previously before the PD Role in CDM 2015 the CDM Regulations had roles called “CDM
Coordinator” for CDM 2007 and prior to that it was “Planning Supervisor” for CDM 1994. This
role has progressed from “Planning Supervisor” to PD to reflect the design requirements for
this role and the need to clearly understand Construction Engineering. Being a Health and
Safety Professional with no demonstrable Construction Engineering competence or
knowledge does not make you suitable for the PD role.
The largest benefits to construction safety, construction duration / programme and
construction cost are when Construction Engineering is considered as early as possible in
any design, and it is the job of the PD to ensure Designers do this and do it to the correct
level as required.
3.1.3 Designers
Designers must: -
• When preparing or modifying designs, to eliminate, reduce or control foreseeable

risks that may arise during:
o Construction; and
o The maintenance and use of a building once it is built
• Provide all information to other members of the project team to help them fulfil their
duties
The PD is to coordinate all information from all the Permanent Designers involved and
ensure the Designers have fulfilled their duties under the CDM regulations and applied the
Principles of Prevention, etc.
All designers must understand BS 5975 otherwise they cannot demonstrate any
understanding of construction as is highlighted as one of their duties in the CDM regulations.
Any designer be it Permanent Works Designer or any other Designer must be aware of BS
5975, if they are not, they are not competent and / or fulfilling their requirements under the
CDM Regulations.
The question has to be asked –
• How can any Designer claim they have considered construction in their design if they
do not know how their design is to be built on site and they have never heard of BS
5975 (The British Standard for Temporary Works (Construction Engineering) Design
and On-Site Management) ?
If you do not know how your design is to be built on site, you should not be designing it.
When we refer to how it is built on site the minimum requirement is that the designer can
clearly describe the steps of construction in their proposed design so that the Principal
Designer can assess and confirm they know how it is to be constructed.
Ronan O’Driscoll
This information should be communicated on the Designers Fit For Construction drawings.
There are three reasons for this as follows: -
1. Noting the proposed construction sequence on the drawing demonstrates the
Designer has applied the Principles Of Prevention as required in the CDM
Regulations
2. If the Contractor on site does not follow the Designers proposed Construction
Sequence and anything does not go correctly on site, then it will be clear this is the
Contractors responsibility and not the Designers
3. This information on the drawings can be used by the PD to assess and confirm the
Designer has fulfilled their requirements under the CDM regulations
It is recommended that all Permanent Works Designers also produce a Construction
Engineering Schedule, this is like a Construction Engineering Register but has fewer details.
A sample is included in APPENDIX I attached to this document. The Construction
Engineering Schedule would just show line items for the assumed Construction Engineering
required by the Permanent Works Designer to be able to construct their design on site. This
is clear evidence the Permanent Works Designer has fulfilled their requirements in the CDM
Regulations and considered construction in their design.
It is to be noted that not all Designers will have suitable Construction Engineering knowledge
or experience and in this case specialist advice should be sought from individuals or
organisations with this knowledge and experience to assist and educate Designers where
required. Ignorance is not a defence any Designer can use for not knowing how their design
was going to be built on site.
3.1.4 Principal Contractor (PC)

A PC must: -
• Plan, Manage, Monitor and Coordinate Health and Safety in the Construction Phase
of a Project. This includes: -
o Liaising with the Client and Principal Designer
o Preparing the Construction Phase Plan
o Organising cooperation between contractors and coordinating their work.
• Ensure Suitable site inductions are provided
• Ensure reasonable steps are taken to prevent unauthorised access
• Ensure workers are consulted and engaged in securing their Health and Safety
• Ensure Welfare Facilities are provided
The PC is the controlling organisation for the project during the construction phase and the
PD is to provide support to the PC as required.
It is the job of the PC to create the Construction Phase Plan using the information supplied
by the PD in the Pre-Construction Health and Safety file.
When construction is complete the PC hands the Health and Safety File back to the PD to
compile and complete.
It is expected that the PD will have completed their role as required and provided Designs
that are fully constructable with clear outline construction sequences. The PC can use this
information for the completion of construction on site and will be able to clearly highlight any
deviations from the Designers outlined construction sequence.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Any deviations from the Designers sequences and / or Designs can then be clearly
communicated back to the Designers via the PD who coordinates and manages this
process.
It is foreseen that any competent PC will have clear understanding of Construction
Engineering and be fully familiar with BS 5975.
3.1.5 Contractor
A Contractor must: -
• Plan, Manage and Monitor Construction Work under their control so that it is carried
out without risks to Health and Safety
• For projects involving more than one contractor, coordinate their activities with others
in the project team – in particular, comply with directions given to them by the
Principal Designer or Principal Contractor
It is foreseen that any competent Contractor will have clear understanding of Construction
Engineering and be fully familiar with BS 5975.
3.1.6 CDM 2015 - Organogram

Below is a typical organogram for the CDM 2015 arrangement when on site and construction
has begun: -
3.1.7 FIGURE 1 – CDM 2015 Organogram when on site and construction

has begun
Client
Principal Designer (PD)
Self Delivering Supervised

Client Contractor
Sub-Contractor Sub-Contractor Clients
Permanent Works Designer (PWD)
Other Designers
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.2 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A Single Contractor on a Small
Project
This situation is for a small construction project with one contractor on site. As there is only
one contractor on site that contractor will be recognised as the PC in line with the
requirements of the CDM Regulations.
The Contractor (PC) Construction Engineering Coordinator is the main individual for
Construction Engineering on site and that is true for all arrangements shown throughout this
document and BS 5975.
Another point that is true for all arrangements is the requirement for the Principal Designer
(PD) to be the single point of contact for the PC Construction Engineer Coordinator for any
questions or queries on the Permanent Works Design supplied to site by the PD. From this if
there are any queries on the constructability of the Permanent Works Design or any
proposed changes to the Permanent Works Design the PD is to be the single point of
contact to answer these and all other design queries. The PD will take the queries from site
back to the Designer to then return the answer back to site.
A minor point to note is that the Contractor Construction Engineering Coordinator may have
designers to undertake Construction Engineering Designs on site. These Designs and
Designers do not require any contact with the PD or anyone outside of the Contractors
organisation if the designs do not affect the Permanent Works. This is one of the reasons the
Permanent Works Designer and the PD must make it clear as to how it was foreseen the
construction would take place on site and what steps are required to ensure the safe
construction of the Permanent Works.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.2.1 FIGURE 2 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a Single Contractor on a Small Project
Client
Clients
Principal Contractor (PC) Principal Designer (PD) Permanent Works Designer (PWD)
PC Other Designers
Coordinator (CEC)
Specialist Supplier PCs PCs

CED In-House External
Construction Engineering Construction Engineering
Designer Designer
(CED) (CED)
PC
Supervisor (CES)
PC
Site Team
Construction
Engineering On
Site
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.3 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A PC Appointed by the Client
This situation is for a PC who is Appointed by the Client and matches the typical CDM
arrangement. It is very similar to the previous arrangement, but in this instance the PC
Appointment is more formal rather than by default.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.3.1 FIGURE 3 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a PC Appointed by the Client
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
Coordinator (CEC)
PCs PCs
Specialist Supplier In-House External
CED Construction Engineering Construction Engineering
Designer Designer
(CED) (CED)
PC PC
Supervisor CES Supervisor CES
PC PC
Site Team Site Team
Construction Construction
Engineering On Engineering On
Site Site
MAIN PROJECT or SITE PART of SITE or ANOTHER SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.4 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A PC with several small sites
This situation is for a PC who is Appointed by the Client and has several small sites as part
of the project. There is not much further detail than Figure 3 and it is to be noted depending
on the size and complexity of the project the PC may have a Lead Construction Engineering
Coordinator with a Construction Engineering Coordinator appointed for each of the small
sites and have Construction Engineering Supervisors as required under the Coordinators.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.4.1 FIGURE 4 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a PC with several small sites
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
Coordinator (CEC)
PCs PCs
Designer Designer
(CED) (CED)
PC PC PC
Construction Engineering Construction Engineering Construction Engineering
Supervisor CES Supervisor CES Supervisor CES
PC PC PC
Site Team Site Team Site Team
Construction Construction Construction

Engineering On Engineering On Engineering On
Site Site Site
SMALL SITE SMALL SITE SMALL SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.5 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A PC who appoints a Sub-
Contractor to implement the PC’s Construction Engineering
This situation is for a PC who appoints a Sub-Contractor to implement the PC’s Construction
Engineering under the direction of the PC’s Construction Engineering Coordinator. This
arrangement assumes the Sub-Contractor is not managing their own Construction
Engineering on site but are delivering the PC’s Construction Engineering.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.5.1 FIGURE 5 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a PC appoints a Sub-Contractor to implement PC’s Construction
Engineering
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
Coordinator (CEC)
PCs PCs
Designer Designer
(CED) (CED)
PC
Supervised
Sub-Contractor
Supervisor CES
Sub-Contractor
PC
Site Team
Supervisor CES
Site Site
Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.6 BS 5975 – Arrangement for A Complex Project able to split into
well-defined areas
This situation is for a PC managing a complex project that can be split into well defined
areas and requires a lot of Construction Engineering management. In this arrangement the
PC has appointed more than one Construction Engineering Coordinator for the project.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.6.1 FIGURE 6 – BS 5975 - Organogram for Complex project able to be split into well-defined areas
Client
Clients
Principal Contractor (PC) Principal Designer (PD)
PC Other Designers
Lead Construction Engineering
Coordinator (L-CEC)
PCs PCs
Designer Designer
(CED) (CED)
PC PC
Coordinator Supervisor CES
(CEC) INTERFACE FOR LEAD
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
PC COORDINATOR TO MANAGE
PC
Site Team
Supervisor CES
Site Site
WELL DEFINED AREA X WELL DEFINED AREA Y
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.7 BS 5975 – Arrangement when A Principal Contractor appoints
a Sub-Contractor to co-ordinate their own Construction
Engineering
This situation is for a PC who appoints a suitably experienced and competent Sub-
Contractor to manage their own Construction Engineering on site.
It is to be noted that the Sub-Contractor Construction Engineering Coordinator must report to
the PC Construction Engineering Coordinator on site.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.7.1 FIGURE 7 – BS 5975 - Organogram for a Principal Contractor who appoints a Sub-Contractor to co-ordinate
their own Construction Engineering
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
Coordinator (CEC)
PCs PCs
Designer Designer
(CED) (CED)
PC
Self Delivering
Sub-Contractor
Supervisor CES
Sub-Contractor
Construction Engineering PC
Coordinator CEC Site Team
Sub-Contractor
Construction Engineering Construction
Supervisor TWS Engineering On
Site
Construction
Engineering On
Site
Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.8 BS 5975 – Arrangement when A Client appoints a Sub-
Contractor to co-ordinate their own Construction Engineering
This situation is for a Client who appoints a suitably experienced and competent Sub-
Contractor to manage their own Construction Engineering on site.
It is to be noted that the Sub-Contractor Construction Engineering Coordinator must report to
the PC Construction Engineering Coordinator on site.
This arrangement may be messy on site as the Client Appointed Sub-Contractor will have a
contract in place with the Client but may have no contractual arrangement whatsoever with
the PC on site. It is to be made to the Client and the Sub-Contractor in these situations that
the CDM Regulations will override any contract or commercial arrangements in a court of
Law and the requirements of the CDM Regulations must be followed. The Sub-Contractor
must work to the guidance and instruction of the PC on site as required in the CDM
Regulations whether there is a contract in place or not.
In this situation the sub-contractor must be assessed as being suitably experienced and
competent to manage their own Construction Engineering on site, if not the PC should
ensure the Sub-Contractors work stops until this is rectified and any delay to the construction
programme and additional costs will be taken directly by the Client as they have appointed
this Sub-Contractor. To avoid this situation the Client should include the PC at the earliest
possible stage in the selection and appointment of any Sub-Contractor who will be delivering
Construction Engineering on site.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.8.1 FIGURE 8 – BS 5975 - Organogram for A Client who appoints a Sub-Contractor to co-ordinate their own
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
Coordinator (CEC)
PCs PCs
Designer Designer
(CED) (CED)
PC
Self Delivering
Client Sub-Contractor
Supervisor CES
Construction Engineering PC
Coordinator CEC Site Team
Supervisor CES Engineering On
Site
Client Construction
Engineering On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.9 Typical Interfaces between parties on a Construction Project
In the simplest of terms, the Principal Designer should pass all of the relevant pre-
construction design and constructability information to the Lead Construction Engineering
Coordinator on site and coordinate and transfer relevant information between the Lead
Construction Engineering Coordinator and the Permanent Works Designer and / or any other
Designer that the Lead Construction Engineering Coordinator does not have direct contact
with.
If the Principal Designer is suitably experienced and competent and has completed his or
her task as required in the CDM Regulations, then there should not be any information
required from the Permanent Works Designers once construction begins.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.9.1 FIGURE 9 – BS 5975 - Organogram to show Typical Interfaces between Parties on a Construction Project
Client
Clients
Client Contractor Principal Contractor (PC)
PC
CEC
Client Contractor
CEC
Supervised PC Other Designers
Sub-Contractor Site Team
Client Contractors Client Contractors
PWD CED
Self Delivering
Sub-Contractor
Sub-Contractor
CEC PCs PCs
In-House External
Self Delivering Specialist Supplier Designer Designer
Sub-Contractor CED (CED) (CED)
CED
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.10 Flowchart representation of typical Interfaces between a PC
and a Sub-Contractor on site delivering Construction
Engineering
This is to give a very simple idea of the arrangements required for Construction Engineering
management in line with BS 5975: 2019.
There is a more detailed flowchart provided in APPENDIX A and A1 that shows the
Construction Engineering arrangements in line with the requirements of BS 5975. There are
two Flowcharts, one is horizontal in swim lanes and the other is vertical.
Ronan O’Driscoll
3.10.1 FIGURE 10 – BS 5975 - Flowchart representation of typical Interfaces between a PC and a Sub-Contractor on site delivering Construction Engineering
BS 5975 – BASIC FLOWCHART FOR CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING IN CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTOR
DESIGNATED
INDIVIDUAL
PRINCIPAL
Designated Individual DI Establishes a Principal

PC DI Ensures all PC Construction
(DI) Contractor (PC) CE
organisations have a Engineering Principal Contractor Appoints a Principal Contractor Reviews & Approves Sub-
Appointed for Principal Procedure Principal Contractor Reviews & Approves Sub-Contractor
Construction Engineering Procedure Sub-Contractor Contractor Construction Engineering Procedure
Contractor (PC) 5.1.1.1, 6.1.1.8, 6.1.2.1, Construction Engineeering Coordinator Appointment
(CE) Procedure in place 6.1.1.7, 6.1.2.2, 9.1.8, 9.2.2, 9.2.6, 9.5.2.3
5.1.2, 6.1.2.1 9.2.1
Construction Engineering (CE) Register

LEAD CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Register as a minimum to include the following columns:-

Lead Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) experience and competency checked
PRINCIPAL CONTRACTOR
and confirmed by the PC DI to ensure they have suitable experience and competency for CEC is competent & has relevant up-to-date CEC selected and record - Reference Number
the role taking into account the complexity of Construction Engineering training & the necessary skills, knowledge & maintained of experience and CEC Letter of Appointment Lead CEC Coordinates with all parties to establish CE scope and what CE are required CEC Creates Construction Engineering - Short Description (including location, etc.)
Yes
The CEC should not be responsible for the day-today progress of the CE or other project experience appropriate to the complexity of the competency assessment for CE 6.1.1.7, 11.2.2.3 Register - Design Check Category
matters (e.g. commercial or programme matters) project and anticipated CE and Construction - Risk Classification of Construction Engineering
COORDINATOR
9.3.2.1 - Date Design Brief issued to Designer

- Construction Engineering Designer name (company and / or individual)
- Design Checker (company and / or name) CEC to assess if any Construction
- Date Design is required Engineering Supervisors (CES) are to be
- Date Design completed appointed
No - Date Design checked / approved

- Any Third Party Approvals (if required)
- CE erection complete & checked with date of Permit To Load (if required)
- Date of Permit to Unload (if required)
Lead CEC Coordinates with all Sub-Contractor CECs and

If the CEC is deficient in competency by a small amount further training and experience can be given parties to establish CE scope and what CE are required
Or 9.5.1.4, 11.2.2.1, 11.2.4.1
They can be closely mentored and managed by the PC’s DI until the DI is satisfied they can work independently
Or
Another more suitable CEC is selected
CONTRACTOR
DESIGNATED
INDIVIDUAL
Designated Individual Sub-Contractor DI Ensures Sub-Contractor

(DI) all organisations they DI Establishes a Sub-Contractor Construction DI Appoints CECs as required and
SUB-
Appointed for Sub- employ have a Construction (PC) CE Procedure Engineering nominates one Lead CEC
Contractor (PC) Engineering (CE) Procedure 6.1.1.1, 6.1.1.8, 6.1.2.1, 9.2.1 Procedure 9.3.3.1
5.1.2, 6.1.2.1 in place

CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING COORDINATOR
- Reference Number
- Short Description
- Design Check Category
- Risk Classification of Construction Engineering
- Date Design Brief issued to Designer
CEC is competent & has relevant up-to-date CEC selected and record - Construction Engineering Designer name (company and / or individual)
training & the necessary skills, knowledge & - Design Checker (company and / or name) CEC to assess if any Construction
maintained of experience and CEC Letter of Appointment CEC Creates Construction Engineering
SUB-CONTRACTOR
Yes CEC Coordinates with all parties to establish CE scope and what CE are required - Date Design is required Engineerings Supervisors (CES) are to be
experience appropriate to the complexity of the competency assessment for CE Register
project and anticipated CE - Date Design completed appointed
and Construction
- Date Design checked / approved
No
If the CEC is deficient in competency by a small amount further training and experience can be given
Or
Or
Ronan O’Driscoll
4 Procedural Control of Construction Engineering
The basic premise or idea for procedural control of Construction Engineering is not to add
extra paperwork for paperwork’s sake and not to increase administration for no real benefit,
it is to ensure there is clear demonstrable management of Construction Engineering on site
for the safety of all parties involved.
The level of procedural control (or paperwork) is to be in line with the complexity and volume
of Construction Engineering being undertaken therefore one size does not fit all and is also
another reason why BS 5975 cannot be interpreted and just read word for word as
highlighted in the Foreword of this document.
For example, if we consider a small contractor who builds residential houses and employs
ten individuals, undertaking similar repetitive work compared to a contractor that employs
thousands of individuals and builds power stations we can clearly see the requirements for
procedural control of Construction Engineering is going to be vastly different.
The latter contractor will find that the information in BS 5975 is very relevant to them, and
they can clearly see the application while the former contractor will see BS 5975 as being
way past anything they undertake.
4.1 Example Small Contractor building residential houses

If we look at the contractor building residential houses, that contractor may have a
Construction Engineering Procedure document that is just a few pages long. The procedure
may highlight what Construction Engineering is briefly, briefly highlight appointments and
responsibility of the Construction Engineering Coordinator and Construction Engineering
Supervisor, have the Construction Engineering Design Categorisation (0 to 3) and
Implementation Risk (Very Low ot High) tables and highlight the Construction Engineering
Register, that would be sufficient. This company Construction Engineering Procedure may
be less than ten pages and if suitably experienced and competent in this work the company
director maybe the Designated Individual.
A site manager or project manager within the company may be appointed as the
Construction Engineering Coordinator. Or if the volume of work means the Designated
Individual is also managing the work on site and no one else is suitable the Designated
Individual maybe the most experienced and competent for the role and appoint themself as
the Construction Engineering Coordinator. The company Construction Engineering
Procedure must highlight and allow this situation.
Ultimately as long as there is a suitably experienced and competent individual undertaking
the Construction Engineering Coordinator role with a formal appointment so they and
everyone else on site know they are the responsible Construction Engineering Coordinator
that is the basic requirement of BS 5975.
On site this Construction Engineering Coordinator may have some heras fencing (or similar)
for the site boundary, some signs on timber posts, some simple low height concrete pours,
occasional use of acrow props (or similar) for temporary supports during construction,
access scaffold provided by a scaffold company, some minor excavations, etc. All relatively
straightforward and relatively low risk Construction Engineering and very much repeated for
each house build project undertaken.
This Construction Engineering Coordinator may have a simple Construction Engineering
Register with simple line items for: -
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Heras fencing (or similar) installed and used as per the manufacturer’s guidelines,
Category 0 Construction Engineering Design with a Construction Engineering
Implementation Risk of Very Low
• Acrow prop (or similar) installed and used as per the manufacturer’s guidelines,
Category 0 Construction Engineering Design with a Construction Engineering
Implementation Risk of Very Low
• Access Scaffold provided by Scaffold Contractor and all TG20 designs therefore
CAT 1 or less and with a Construction Engineering Implementation Risk of Very Low
as the experienced Scaffold Contractor installs and removes as required. NOTING: -
Refer to the Scaffold Inspectors Scaffold Register for further details
This level of information is probably repeated on each project this contractor undertakes.
It is to be noted that for something like the Acrow prop to be a line item like this in the
Construction Engineering Register the Permanent Works Designer must do what is required
from them in the CDM regulations and show on their fit for construction drawing where they
assumed a prop is required and what load is assumed to be taken by that prop and they can
state prop designed and provided by others. Provided the prop load and length required etc.
is within the standard application tables for that prop and does not require any further design
it can be simply recorded as a CAT 0 line item on the register as stated above.
The Scaffold access can easily be covered like this if it is TG20 standard solution as this is a
Category 1 design. It is a Category 1 design as a suitably competent person must use the
TG20 software for the correct selection of the design and use of the scaffold so as a result it
is a basic Cat 1 design as opposed to a Cat 0 design which is just where you read and select
straight from a table, etc. with less selection or competence required.
If the contractor employs the Scaffold Contractor to provide a Scaffold Inspector to
undertake the required 7 day inspections as required under the Working At Height
Regulations then it would be suitable for the Construction Engineering Coordinator on site to
appoint that Scaffold Inspector as a Construction Engineering Supervisor with the
appointment clearly highlighting this is only for the access scaffold on site. As the Working At
Height regulations require the Scaffold Inspector to keep a Scaffold Register there is no
need to copy and repeat this information in the Construction Engineering Register but just
place a line item in the register as noted in the third bullet point above.
For this contractors work those three line items in the Construction Engineering Register
probably cover the majority of the Construction Engineering they undertake on site and it can
be seen that this is not too onerous and should be relatively straightforward and easy to
replicate on future projects.
For the remaining items of Construction Engineering mentioned earlier which are: -
• Signs on timber posts

• Simple low height concrete pours
• Minor excavations
The contractor could approach a small Construction Engineering Design Consultant to ask
for a standard detail drawing for each of these line items so the contractor can then use
those details as standard solutions on all their projects in the future.
For the signs on timber posts the contractor could tell the designer the type of timber they
use, the height they want the signs and allow variation in height if required, the size of the
signs, etc. and get a simple drawing showing this as a standard detail. This one drawing
Ronan O’Driscoll
should be all that is required for all uses provided the drawing allows for all variations and
then a single line item can be placed in the Construction Engineering register to record this
on all projects as required.
For the simple low level concrete pours the contractor could tell the designer the minimum
and maximum height of concrete pour they undertake on site, assuming it is single sided
formwork with no through ties. Highlight to the designer the materials that are used for this
work and any specific way the site team would prefer to construct the formwork, etc. The
designer should be able to provide a simple drawing showing this formwork as a standard
detail. This one drawing should be all that is required for all uses provided the drawing
allows for all variations and then a single line item can be placed in the Construction
Engineering register to record this on all projects as required.
A similar process can be followed for minor excavations to get a simple drawing showing a
standard detail.
From this the contractor should have all Construction Engineering on site suitably recorded
and with suitable designs and controls in place in line with all requirements of BS 5975 and
the CDM Regulations. This can be carried on to all future projects and used as required.
This then ensures everyone on site is clear as to what is required and the site team will have
suitable drawings with details they can follow for the safe construction on site, etc.
Now if the site has a visit by a Health and Safety Executive (HSE) Inspector it will be clear
and evident to the Inspector that there are suitable and sufficient Construction Engineering
management and controls in place.
On the other hand, if the HSE Inspector arrives on site and there are open excavations,
scaffold, acrow props, etc. present and being used and no one on site can explain any
controls in place or know who is responsible for these items to confirm they are being used
correctly it maybe a different conversation. Of course, this all depends on the level of risk
present on site with any of these Construction Engineering items.
4.1.1 Why would a small Contractor pay a designer for a standard solution
Drawing?
As a small contractor a question on this maybe why should I pay for a Construction
Engineering Design Consultant to undertake a standard solution for let’s say my formwork?
Again, this depends on what level of risk we are talking about and the competency of the site
team.
It is to be noted that the heights mentioned below are not prescriptive and these are just
used as examples, there is no set cut off height for a design or not a design.
If the contractor let’s say never undertakes a concrete pour above 0.15m in height and this is
always at ground level, then the author would say a design would not make any real sense
and the details of the formwork could be recorded in the Risk Assessment and Method
Statement (RAMS) for this work and those RAMS used on al projects. In essence the design
details are recorded in the RAMS and are just a record of the solution provided by suitably
experienced and competent site personnel. A Construction Engineering Register could have
a line item highlighting this is covered in the RAMS.
Ronan O’Driscoll
On the other hand, if the contractor regularly undertakes concrete pours of let’s say more
than 1m then it may be beneficial to have a standard detail drawing for the site team to
reference. It is at this point the contractor might say “why should I pay for a design for this?”
To try to answer that question let’s assume the design including the drawing costs the
contractor a one-time fee of £1,500 (this is just a random number so please do not question
the value, that is not the point of this discussion). The contractor does not see a point in
paying this when he has an experienced site team suitably delivering the work on site safely
and to programme.
Lets imagine the contractor has a very experienced site supervisor who has done this work
for years and does it to a very high standard and never compromises safety or quality and
this individual always oversees this work on site. From this it is safe to assume if this
individual is present there will be no issues.
As with all sites there are less experienced individuals on site learning and building their
competence and experience. These individuals work closely with the experienced supervisor
and absorb the supervisors experience to learn. One day the supervisor must go to another
site and starts the less experienced individuals building some formwork, the supervisor gives
some instruction and must leave to go to the other site. The individuals left building the
formwork do the very best they can, but they have no drawing or reference to work from, so
they carry on making some assumptions.
The supervisor returns at the end of the day and finds there are some mistakes, and the
formwork must be rebuilt. Through no one’s fault and with everyone trying their best to do a
good job there is now a days work wasted that the contractor must cover the cost of. Now
imagine this happens on other sites and maybe for different lengths of time, i.e., an hour of
rework here, a half a day there, etc.
In this situation the £1,500 cost for the design may not be that bad a price when you add up
the possible reduction in rework if the site team had something to reference when they were
not sure of a point.
This assumes that the experienced supervisor can see the mistakes before the formwork is
loaded with concrete and there are no formwork failures which would result in safety issues
and more costs to the contractor.
Another answer to the contractor’s question of “why should I pay for a design for this?”
consider the situation where the HSE Inspector is on site asking questions regarding the
safe management of Construction Engineering on site and the site team spend half a day
going through the Inspectors points to satisfy the Inspector. This half a day could possibly be
reduced to an hour if the site team could point the Inspector to a standard detail drawing etc.
This is just to try and give an example and this is used for discussion and is not to be used
as a black and white reference as to what is required on site.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.2 Aim of a Construction Engineering Procedure
BS 5975 highlights the main aim of the Construction Engineering Procedure and method of
work adopted is to minimise the chance of errors being made, and to maximise the chance
of errors being discovered if they are made.
It also states there should be effective communication of information and requirements
between all levels of the construction organisation involved, whether they are concerned
primarily with the Permanent Works or the Construction Engineering.
An effective system of checking, both for the design and its implementation must be
implemented.
If required the procedure will put in place ways to manage potential problems with interfaces
to ensure suitable site management of Construction Engineering.
Section 6 of BS 5975 notes that when a project has, or might be anticipated to have, the
requirement for any Construction Engineering, the organisations listed below, should have
and implement a procedure which outlines how that organisation is to discharge its duties in
relation to the Construction Engineering.
The following organisations should have procedures covering roles, responsibilities and
appointments, all with the intention of removing ambiguity and making the PC’s overall
responsibilities clear.
a) Clients
b) Principal Designers
c) Management / Cost Consultants (this includes Architects acting for a client)
d) Contractors / Sub-Contractors / Specialist Contractors (including demolition
contractors) all of which manage their own Construction Engineering. This includes
third-party employed contractors, such as utility providers and their contractors
e) Construction Engineering Designers and Permanent Works Designers
f) Manufacturers / Suppliers
It is also highlighted in Section 6 of BS 5975:2019 that: -

• Any organisation employing another organisation to carry out design or construction, in
relation to Construction Engineering, should check that they are competent to do so.
• Where more than one contractor is present during the construction phase, each
contractor should co-ordinate the planning, management and monitoring of their own
work with that of the PC in relation to their Construction Engineering
• Where there is an interface identified at the pre-construction phase between two or
more projects, the Principal Designers (PD’s) involved should co-ordinate their
activities
• Where there is an interface during the construction phase between two or more sites,
the PC’s involved should co-ordinate their activities
• During the conceptual or design stage, either the Clients or the PD’s Construction
Engineering Procedures should be used
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Once the PC is appointed the PC’s procedures should take the precedence over the
Clients or the PD’s
• The PC has an overall duty for the safe execution of all works on site, including
• The PC’s duty is always retained on site, but the responsibility may be delegated by
the PC (or by the actions of the client or a third party) to one or more sub-contractors
or contractors or third-party employed contractors
• The PC should, before appointment or permitting these organisations to co-ordinate
their own Construction Engineering, carry out a robust and auditable vetting process to
check the competence of these or other contractor(s), and then be proactive in
monitoring the performance of the contractor(s) and their compliance with their own
procedures
A Permanent Works Designer is to ensure their design has considered the construction
sequence and all Construction Engineering required. Where the method of construction of
the Permanent Works differs from what has been proposed by the Permanent Works
Designer, the Construction Engineering Designer should include an assessment of the
Permanent Works for the various stages of construction, modification or demolition to
determine adequacy or strength and/or stability.
Where the Permanent Works Designer has not considered the construction sequence, they
have not fulfilled what is required of them by the Construction Design and management
(CDM) Regulations. In these instances, it is very difficult for the Construction Engineering
Designer to assess if their Construction Engineering proposal and construction sequence is
not as the Permanent Works Designer has assumed in their design. For instances like this
the Permanent Works Designer cannot ignore their responsibilities under the CDM
Regulations and will be required to have a greater interaction with the Construction
Engineering Designer and take more responsibility for the construction sequence.
There is a clear and direct link to increased project durations and cost and safety concerns
during construction where the Permanent Works Designer has not demonstrated an
assumed clear construction sequence in advance of construction commencing. Designing
and making construction sequence assumptions on site once construction has begun is less
safe overall and costs more for the project. If the Permanent Works Designer does not have
the knowledge or experience, they should consult a suitably competent Construction
Engineering Specialist in advance to answer any relevant queries if required.
When a party / organisation undertakes two or more roles the relevant Designated Individual
should establish and maintain suitable and separate procedures for each of the roles for
which the party or organisation is responsible or can constrain or influence. As an example,
this maybe in circumstances such as when: -
• The Permanent Works Designer is also the Construction Engineering Designer
• The Principal Designer is also the Permanent Works Designer
• The Client is also the Principal Contractor
• Etc.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.3 Control of Construction Engineering Risk
BS 5975 Clause 6.1.3 relates to what is referred to as implementation risk and is not to be
confused with the category of design check. The design check category would remain the
same for a design but when the design is to be implemented in different locations, different
competencies of site teams, etc. then the implementation risk may change.
It is stated the risks associated with Construction Engineering can be considered to arise
from: -
• Their design
• Their construction, use and removal
• The consequences of their failure
Design risks relate to the complexity of the design and the mitigation is addressed through
the selection of the category of design check.
Construction, use and removal risks relate to such aspects as workmanship, materials,
experience and manner of use. These are termed execution risks.
Consequences of failures risks relate to the location of the Construction Engineering, and
what might be affected by the failure.
Execution risk and consequence of failure risk combine to form an implementation risk.
The Implementation Risks used are: -
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High
To assess the risks associated with Construction Engineering Works on a project, each item
of Construction Engineering should be classified, and appropriate procedures adopted to
control risk.
Each organisation involved in Construction Engineering should determine the level of control
for each risk class of Construction Engineering depending on: -
• The experience of that organisation (including that of operatives)

• Competence
• Location of the particular Construction Engineering
• Consequence of the failure of the Construction Engineering
The approach to be taken when managing risk under each of the implementation classes
should be defined in the company Construction Engineering procedures.
Implementation risk classification should be undertaken in consultation with other relevant
parties, such as the construction team or the design team.
Where there is an interface of Construction Engineering with another party / contractor the
Principal Contractor (PC) Construction Engineering Coordinator on site should be consulted
by the relevant organisation and be responsible for the risk classification. Where there is no
interface the Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) of the relevant organisation is
responsible for the risk classification.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.3.1 TABLE 1 – Implementation Risks Classes for Construction
Engineering and examples of mitigation measures
Implementation Risk Permits required Other

risk class control
Very low • No identified practical mode of N/A Control via RAMS.
ilure.
Inspection by site
• No impact if failure occurs. team, not necessarily
recorded on the
temporary works
register and might
not require a design
Low • Minor structures with high Permits can be Follow company
levels of robustness. signed by a procedures, including
Construction inspection and test plan
• Very experienced workforce.
Engineering
• Failure is entirely within the Coordinator (CEC) or
site, of low impact. an authorized CES.
Inconvenient, but personal
Medium • Conventional Permits can be Follow company
structures. signed by the PC’s procedures, including
Conventional CEC or an inspection and test plan
construction methods. authorized CEC.
• Relatively
experienced
workforce.
• Failure would be major,
potentially involving injury,
fatality or significant
High • Schemesi withl dependency
W ld t Permits can be Follow company
on critical structural details, signed by the PC’s procedures, including
with little or no redundancy, CEC or an authorized inspection and test plan
or with stability reliant on CEC.
critical elements.
PC’s DI to ensure the
• Schemes with complex For Sub-Contractors scheme is reviewed,
interfaces where various items Construction e.g. HAZOP or peer
of temporary works impact on Engineering that is review.
one another deemed High Risk
and requires a Permit
• Inexperienced workforce.
the PC CEC can
• Unfamiliar processes countersign after the
or equipment. relevant Sub-
Contractor has
• Failure would be catastrophic
completed the
in its own right, or if minor
required inspections
might initiate a secondary or
and signed their
chain reaction of major or
Permit
catastrophic events.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Looking at this table in BS 5975 :2019 it is to be noted that the High-Risk Implementation
Class states “Permits signed by PC’s CEC”.
This is not to be interpreted directly as read and was discussed with two of the contributors
to BS 5975 2019 in a presentation they gave in London on the 24th of July 2019 which was
organised by the Temporary Works Forum (TWf) and National Access & Scaffolding
Confederation (NASC).
If you were to follow Table 1 in BS 5975: 2019 as read and for example had a Permit To
Load to sign from a sub-contractor on site. The CEC for the sub-contractor responsible for
the Construction Engineering would not sign the Permit To Load for their Construction
Engineering and the Principal Contractor CEC would sign the Permit To Load for another
organisations Construction Engineering. Imagine if anything would go wrong in this instance
and then the CEC for the organisation responsible for the Construction Engineering would
clearly say they did not sign the Construction Engineering Permit To Load and was not
responsible as a result of this. The PC CEC would be solely responsible as they signed the
Permit To Load for the other organisations Construction Engineering. This was discussed
with the contributors to BS 5975 2019, and it was agreed a counter signature from the PC
CEC on the Permit To Load after the CEC of the relevant organisation completed and signed
the Permit To Load would be more sensible.
So following on from this for High Risk Implementation Risk Class where Permits are
required for organisations that are not the PC on site the following should be followed: -
• The CEC for the organisation responsible for the Construction Engineering will follow
their agreed Construction Engineering Procedure and inspect as required to allow the
CEC to sign the Permit for their own Construction Engineering.
• The Permit will require a counter signature from the PC CEC before the work can
proceed.
• The PC CEC counter signature on the Permit is to confirm the CEC for the
organisation responsible for the Construction Engineering has followed their agreed
Construction Engineering Procedures and the work can then proceed.
• The CEC for the organisation responsible for the Construction Engineering retains
responsibility for their Construction Engineering.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.4 Construction Engineering Design
BS 5975 Clause 13 relates to the design of Construction Engineering, and it states design of
Construction Engineering should be undertaken with reasonable professional skill and care.
Clause 13.1.2 & 3 refer to what the Permanent Works Designer should do such as: -
• Considering the risks involved in the buildability of the structure

• The Permanent Works Designer should have taken account of the methods of
construction and the space required for the Construction Engineering
• The Permanent Works Designer should provide the relevant information, particularly
the significant residual risks involved in its construction
• The Permanent Works design output has to clearly communicate any particular
sequence in which the works should be built, or for any particular feature (such as
stiffness or point support) in the Construction Engineering scheme. This should be
clearly illustrated or communicated in the Permanent Works design output.
During construction if the Construction Engineering Coordinator responsible for the work
wishes to depart from the Construction Engineering and construction requirements the
Permanent Works designer has communicated or illustrated the Construction Engineering
Coordinator should confirm with the Permanent Works Designer that the change is
acceptable.
If the Permanent Works Designer has not communicated or illustrated any particular
sequence or requirements for the Construction Engineering or not provided any particular
significant residual risks involved. It will prove very difficult for a Construction Engineering
Coordinator to communicate a change to the Permanent Works or know if there is a change
to the proposed construction sequence that the Permanent Works Designer has allowed for
in their design.
It is noted a designer includes anyone who specifies a design, design standard or design
method, alters a design, or specifies a particular method of work or material, or arranges for
or instructs someone else to do so. The designer should justify their requirements by
identifying the associated risks and how they might be mitigated.
4.4.1 Design Brief

BS 5975 Clause 13.2 relates to Construction Engineering Design Briefs and notes this
should be prepared to serve as the basis for subsequent decisions, design work,
calculations, drawings and design checks. All concerned with the construction should
contribute towards the preparation of the Construction Engineering Design Brief.
The brief should include all data relevant to the design of the temporary works including
residual risks introduced by the methodology chosen by the site team or by the Permanent
Works Designer. It should be prepared early enough to allow sufficient time for all
subsequent activities, i.e. design, design check, procurement of equipment and
construction/erection of the scheme.
The preparation of the brief might involve relatively little work for the smaller scheme, but for
major work such as the construction of a large bridge or deep excavation a large amount of
information might be needed; the Construction Engineering Coordinator should ensure that
sufficient and comprehensive information is collated before design work can commence or a
programme for the construction of the Construction Engineering can be drawn up.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Clause 13.2.4 gives some guidance on possible things to include and consider in a design
brief.
It states a Construction Engineering Designer should be provided with a design brief,
irrespective of whether they are from the construction organisation or not.
It is to be noted that not all Construction Engineering solutions will require a Design Brief.
For example, referring back to the earlier example in 4.1 and the acrow prop or heras
fencing referred to would not have a Design Brief. This is where suitable experience and
competence are required to ensure common sense and reason are applied rather than just
applying a blanket rule for everything and increasing paperwork and bureaucracy for no
benefit. It can be argued that increased paperwork and bureaucracy for no benefit actually
make things unsafe as individuals lose sight of the real risks and issues and waste time in
the weeds with pointless paperwork.
When you are creating a design brief think of supplying everything you believe is relevant to
the design and then everything else you currently know that is required as this may also be
useful to the designer. Consider the design brief is the way for you to communicate to the
designer so later when you are on site and call the designer, they cannot say they were not
aware of the point you are discussing as you had highlighted it quite clearly in the design
brief.
When you are creating, the design brief also consider other issues you may have that the
designer may be able to consider and could possibly assist to reduce these issues on site,
such as restrictions on available space for access, restrictions on size of equipment to be
able to lift and move parts of the Construction Engineering solution, preference or
competence of the site team to use certain suppliers equipment, etc.
Anyone suitably competent and experienced can create the Construction Engineering
Design Brief but the Construction Engineering Coordinator for that work is to review and sign
it off as correct and ready to supply to the Construction Engineering Designer. Part of the
process must include consultation with the site team that will be undertaking this work to
ensure they agree with the details in the Design Brief as they will have to construct and work
with the solution on site. Ideally the design brief would have a sign off from a suitable
representative of the team on site who will deliver this work to confirm this interaction and
acceptance.
A very basic draft Construction Engineering Design Brief is attached in APPENDIX B
4.4.2 Design Guidance

BS 5975:2019 states those responsible for the design of a Construction Engineering scheme
should base their design on the previously agreed Design Brief.
The Construction Engineering Designer should communicate any changes from the Design
Brief to the Construction Engineering Coordinator responsible for the Construction
Engineering as soon as the changes are identified, and the Design Brief can be amended to
reflect these changes if agreed.
All Construction Engineering should be designed using global or partial factors appropriate
to the situation, taking material quality, certainty of loading and standard of execution of the
Construction Engineering into account.
Ronan O’Driscoll
For permissible stress design the global factors incorporated into the allowable working
loads given in BS 5975:2019 Section 3 should be used for general falsework and other
Construction Engineering design.
The loads supplied in BS 5975:2019 Section 3 are suitable as unfactored service loads for
Limit State Design.
For limit state design of Construction Engineering, the loads should be in accordance with
BS EN 1991 1 6 and other relevant codes and industry best practice guidance.
BS EN 1991 1 6 states that the supported loads are to be treated as variable actions
(imposed loads) and not as permanent actions (dead loads). In some situations,
geotechnical loads may be considered as permanent actions instead of variable actions.
For the design of steel or aluminium elements of Construction Engineering, the partial factor
for material at ultimate limit state should be a minimum of 1.1. Where Construction
Engineering is designed, manufactured, and assembled for a single use using similar details
and execution standards as adopted for Permanent Works then the designer may justify the
use of a lower partial material factor.
The increased partial material factor for Construction Engineering applications is used to
take into account reuse of equipment, increased tolerances, reduced stiffness at joints,
reduced residual stiffness and reduced redundancy compared with permanent works.
Construction Engineering Design software should be used with caution to ensure all
appropriate checks are carried out.
Construction Engineering systems should be designed with regard to ease and safety of
erection and dismantling. Construction Engineering Designers and suppliers should provide
guidance on the implementation of their design.
Detailing of the Construction Engineering structure should be such that any local failure
within it does not lead to the progressive collapse of the whole structure.
Where the design relies on specific site conditions, such as ground conditions, the
Construction Engineering Coordinator should be provided with guidance on the identification
of the soil type and environmental conditions such as water level.
It is to be noted that the Construction Engineering Designers calculations do not form part of
the design output. The design output would be the Designers Risk Assessment, the Design
Drawing, the Design Check Certificate (if required) and any other additional information
required to communicate the design requirements.
For complex schemes the Construction Engineering designer should brief the site team on
the key elements and hazards identified during the design process.
Any British Standards or other design guidance, or software, used in the design should be
summarized separately from the design calculations in order that it can be available to the
Construction Engineering Design Checker (CEDC). For complex schemes the information
may be presented in the form of a “design statement” which may also include: an idealized
structure, method(s) of analysis, and the version of computer software, if any, used.
For each Construction Engineering design, the designer should consider:
a) the structural strength and stiffness of the individual members and their connections
to transmit the applied forces safely including any p-delta or feedback effects.
Ronan O’Driscoll
b) the lateral stability of both individual members and the structure as a whole.
c) the resistance to overturning or rotational failure of the Construction Engineering
structure.
d) positional stability; and
e) the effects on the permanent works and its surroundings.
Within these five considerations, subsidiary considerations might be necessary to allow for
the different phases of construction and the varying stability and restraint conditions applied,
including the particular case where falsework is designed as top-restrained.
The five considerations (a to e) apply to both Limit State and Permissible Stress Design.
From these five points in can clearly be seen that Construction Engineering is based on
Civil, Structural and / or Mechanical Engineering Design. Construction Engineering does not
include Electrical design.
4.4.3 Choice of Construction Engineering Design Solutions

BS 5975 states it should be decided whether it is appropriate to have a bespoke design or,
alternatively, to proceed based on a standard solution.
A standard solution comprises: -
• A suitable arrangement for which the basic design work has already been carried out
• Presented in a tabular or other easily assimilated form
• No further structural calculations are necessary
When selecting a standard solution, those responsible for making the final choice should
ensure that they understand and take full account of the limitations of these designs so that
they are used only in appropriate circumstances
If a design office produces standard solutions to suit their materials or operations, then such
designs should: -
• Be produced in accordance with the recommendations of relevant codes
• Be accompanied by information covering: -
o Layout
o Loading
o Limitations
o Tolerances
o Lateral restraint requirements
o etc.
Those who select a particular standard solution should be aware that they have
responsibilities and duties as a designer under the CDM regulations.
An organization might publish technical data in the form of arrangements of Construction
Engineering of their equipment based on certain conditions of use. These arrangements,
known as standard solutions and often presented in a tabular or readily assimilated format,
should relate to the organization's products only. The organization should carry out the
structural design calculations and verify the arrangements with design check certificates.
For each standard solution the organization should identify the limitations of their use and of
their design responsibility.
Ronan O’Driscoll
For example: -
• A standard solution for a proprietary soffit system might not include design of the
foundations, or the method by which top restraint is obtained for lateral stability.
Equally it might not include design of any face contact material, although the
standard solution might assume a certain grade of material is used.
Provided the equipment is erected, used and operated within the limitations placed in the
standard solution, a Construction Engineering Coordinator does not need to further verify the
actual design calculations of the standard solution.
Users of standard solutions should ensure that the:
a) solution assumes that the equipment specified is used, without substitutions
b) concept is acceptable for the location
c) conditions of use and limitations on use are within the specified limits
NOTE: - For trench support systems this includes verification that the ground
conditions (including groundwater level) are as specified for the equipment
d) assembly is erected to the expected tolerances
e) solution is within the experience of the workforce and its supervision
f) equipment is not damaged and does not show signs of excessive wear
g) method of loading the system is as stated in the standard solution
h) ancillary items, or additional Construction Engineering (such as foundations), by
others have been designed and supplied as required; and
i) arrangement, prior to use, has been separately checked for compliance with the
guidance provided by the supplier or organization responsible for the standard
solution
4.4.4 Construction Engineering Design Check

BS 5975 states prior to the commencement of the construction work, the proposed
Construction Engineering Design should be checked for concept, adequacy, correctness,
and compliance with the requirements of the design brief. This check should be carried out
by a competent person or persons, independent from those responsible for the design. The
ability of the Construction Engineering Design Checker (CEDC) and their remoteness or
independence from the Construction Engineering Designer (CED) should be greater where
new ideas are incorporated, or the Construction Engineering are complex.
When the design has been completed, or is advanced to an appropriate stage, the design
brief should be provided to the organization/individual who is to carry out the design check,
together with the relevant design statement, drawings and specification and associated
information.
The responsibility for stating the independence of the design check category should be
established at an early stage as it can affect the level and quantity of design output.
It should require input/advice from the designer. The check category is unlikely to be known
at the time of writing the original Construction Engineering Register but should be included
when determined.
Where different organizations, or individuals, have prepared different parts of a design, the
category of design check should be appropriate to the part of the design being checked. For
example: -
Ronan O’Driscoll
• If a proprietary supplier is carrying out a falsework design for their equipment, and
stability is assumed by being fixed at the head to the Permanent Work (i.e., top
restrained), the check on the falsework would be Category 1 but the check that the
structure is able to resist the applied horizontal load might be Category 2.
On completion of the design and design check, a certificate should be issued for Category 2
and Category 3 checks and, depending on the organization's procedures, might also be
required for a Category 1 check.
The certificate should: -
• Confirm that the design conforms to the requirements of the design brief
• State the standards/technical literature used
• List the constraints or loading conditions imposed.
• State the category of check
• Identify the drawings/sketches
• Identify specification
• Identify any methodology that are part of the design
The certificate should be signed by: -
• The designer
• The design checker
The package of Construction Engineering Design information issued to the Construction
Engineering Coordinator should include this certificate.
Neither the designer nor the design checker’s calculations form part of the design
compliance items listed on the signed design certificate.
Construction Engineering Design check categories can be developed by each organisation’s
procedures to suit their range and scope of work.
Design checks should be undertaken in accordance with one of the categories given in
Table 2
The design check categories relate to the level of independence of the design check and are
not related to the classification of risk associated with implementation listed in Table 1.
Implementation risk in Construction Engineering is classified as very low, low, medium or
high. This is used to establish the management level required on site, not the design check
category.
It is noted for Category 0 Construction Engineering Design Check: -
• The check should include verification that the application selected suits the limits and
conditions
• The independence of the check is established by the person selecting the standard
solution obtaining approval from a second competent member of either the site or
design team
• The degree of formality would be determined by the organization, but it is assumed
no Design Check Certificate is required
It is noted for Category 1 Construction Engineering Design Check: -
• The check should include verification both that the simple design suits the site
conditions, and that relevant technical information has been interpreted correctly
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Approval from a competent member of the design team is required
• The degree of formality would be determined by the organization, but it is assumed
no Design Check Certificate is required
It is noted for Category 2 and Category 3 Construction Engineering Design Check: -
• The checker should carry out the check without reference to the designer’s
calculations
• The checker should be supplied the design brief, including its associated information,
and the design output
• It is assumed a Design Check Certificate is required
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.4.5 TABLE 2 – Categories of Design Check in Construction Engineering
Category Scope Comment Independence of
Checker
0 Restricted to standard solutions This applies to the use of Because this is a site
only, to ensure the site standard solutions and not issue, the check may
conditions do not conflict with the original design, which be carried out by
the scope or limitations of the requires both structural another member of the
chosen standard solution. calculation and checking to site or design team.
These may include standard Category 1, 2 or 3, as
trench boxes. appropriate.
1 For simple designs. These may Such designs would be The check may be
include formwork; falsework; undertaken using simple carried out by another
needling and propping to methods of analysis and be member of the design
brickwork openings in single in accordance with the team.
storey construction. relevant standards,
supplier’s technical
literature or other reference
publications.
2 On more complex or involved Category 2 checks would The check should be

designs. Designs for include designs where a carried out by an
excavations including
considerable degree of
excavation support using sheet individual not involved
interpretation of loading or
piles, for foundations, for in the design and
structural steelwork soils’ information is
connections, for reinforced required before the design not consulted by the
concrete. Designs where of the foundation or designer.
stability is obtained by restraint
at the top of the Temporary excavation support or slope
Works (e.g., top restrained is carried out.
falsework).
3 For complex or innovative These designs include The check should be

designs, which result in unusual designs or where carried out by another
complex sequences of moving significant departures from organization and
and / or construction of either
standards, novel methods should include an
the Temporary Works or
of analysis or considerable overall check to assure
Permanent Works. It also
includes basement excavations exercise of engineering co-ordination of the
and tunnels. judgment are involved. whole design.
Basically, the Categorisation is referring to the separation between the Designer and the
Design Checker as Designs become more technically challenging or complex. Simple to
complex being Cat 0 to Cat 3. This ensures more independence of the individual checking
the design when the design is more complex.
Some examples as follows: -
• Category 0 Design: -
o No calculations required the solution is selected directly from a table or
manufacturers details to match the requirements.
o It is not foreseen that there will be a Design Brief for this Category of design
Ronan O’Driscoll
o Depending on competency and what the appointments states that individual
can undertake i.e., Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) appointment
might state this individual is competent to select CAT 0 Construction
Engineering Designs for ground supports, etc.
In this instance the CEC may select a CAT 0 solution and someone with
suitable competence and experience in the site team maybe asked to check
this solution so that individual becomes the Design Checker and the CEC is
the Designer.
o This information will be recorded in the Construction Engineering Register
o No Temporary Works Design Check Certificate is required
o This is still for relatively simple designs, but it is as soon as you need to
undertake any calculations it immediately becomes a CAT 1 design over a
CAT 0 design (which there are no calculations undertaken on site)
o There may or may not be a Design Brief for this level of design depending on
the competency of the parties involved
o The designer is anyone undertaking the design and the design checker can
be someone sat next to the designer that has been consulted in the design
o Some experienced Construction Engineering Designers may classify some of
their design work as CAT 1 because they do it every day and are very
experienced and competent in that type of Construction Engineering Design
while another Designer may categorise that same design as a CAT 2
because they are less familiar and experienced in that Construction
Engineering design. This is where the competence and experience of the
Construction Engineering Coordinator is required to assess the Designer
Competency for Construction Engineering if required. Again, this is another
reason why BS 5975 cannot be read as black and white with one size fitting
all.
o Again, the name of the designer and design checker will be recorded in the
Construction Engineering Register
o No Temporary Works Design Check Certificate is required
o This is for more complex and involved designs and as stated for CAT 0
designs previously, the competence and experience of the designer may
make the difference between being a CAT 2 or Cat 1 design.
o The design will be undertaken with a Construction Engineering Design Brief
o This is where a Temporary Works Design Check Certificate will be issued
o The name of the designer and design checker will be recorded in the
o The designer and design checker can be from the same organisation, but the
checker must not have been consulted for the design or aware of the design
details
Ronan O’Driscoll
o This is for the most complex and involved designs and as stated for CAT 0
designs previously, the competence and experience of the designer may
make the difference between being a CAT 3 or Cat 2 design.
o The design will be undertaken with a Construction Engineering Design Brief
o A Temporary Works Design Check Certificate will be issued
o The name of the designer and design checker will be recorded in the
o The designer and design checker cannot be from the same organisation. The
Design Checker is to be an independent third party
Careful selection of CAT 3 Design Checks is required as a specialist design company CAT 2
check maybe more beneficial than a CAT 3 check. For example: -
A specialist Construction Engineering Design Consultant regularly undertake
complex designs and are the only competent design company that undertake this
specific design. They have stringent Quality Assurance (QA) Control process for their
Category 2 Construction Engineering Design Checks with suitable experience
required and the appointed CAT 2 Design Checkers named and listed with CV’s etc.
All information is packaged together with their CAT 2 design check certificates, etc.
Even though they have undertaken this particular design several times and have a
proven track record and have highlighted their recommendation to undertake a CAT
2 Design Check the Client organisation requires a CAT 3 Check to be undertaken by
their Permanent Works Designer who has never designed any Construction
Engineering Designs and has no experience in this specialist design.
The Permanent Works Designer undertaking the Design check does not understand
the Construction Engineering Design and does not understand the independence
required between Designer and Design Checker as highlighted in BS 5975 and
requests to see the calculations as part for the design check. This is not allowed in
Construction Engineering unless there is a serious issue and all other options to
resolve that issue have failed.
As the Permanent Works Design Checker cannot see the Construction Engineering
Designers calculations the checker tries to design this specialist piece of
Construction Engineering to Permanent Works Design codes.
This results in many months of back and forth with queries as the design checker
does not understand the design.
After many meetings and a long delay, the Design Checker confirms the design is
acceptable and has highlighted no structural issues in the original design to warrant
the delay and the numerous meetings.
In this example a CAT 2 design check from the specialist designer would be more beneficial
than the CAT 3 Design Check from a less experienced and competent Permanent Works
Designer.
A draft sample Designers Check Certificate is supplied in APPENDIX C.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.4.6 Resolution of Queries Raised by the Design Checker
BS 5975 states in all categories of check the design checker should withhold signature of the
design check certificate until they are completely satisfied that the design output contains all
necessary information to allow the Construction Engineering to be constructed without the
site team having to develop it further.
In addition, the design checker should be satisfied that the design output is in accordance
with the requirements of the design brief and has been produced in accordance with
recognized engineering principles, relevant British Standards and other appropriate
specialist guidance.
The Design Checker should sign the Check Certificate only when the following is confirmed:
-
• The Design Checker has confirmed the Design is suitable and correct and there is
nothing further required
• The Design Checker has confirmed the design output is suitable and sufficient for the
site team to construct on site and there is nothing further required to progress the
work on site.
If the Construction Engineering Design Checker has any queries on the design and prior to
signing the Check Certificate, they should identify areas in the design output where their
calculations indicate an element (including connections) might be overstressed or exceed
the allowable load in a proprietary member. The design checker should identify also any
area where further or additional detail is required.
For Category O or Category 1 Design Check Queries should be raised directly with the
designer and resolved before the design output is issued as a certified design. It is foreseen
that there will be no Design Check Certificate for CAT 0 and CAT 1 Designs.
Category 2 and Category 3 Design Check Queries should be prepared in a schedule by the
Design Checker and issued directly to the Construction Engineering Designer with a copy of
the query schedule sent to the CEC for that work and copied to the PC’s CEC as
appropriate. The query schedule should: -
• Not contain references to calculations
• Can indicate levels of stress in members or forces or ground pressures
The Construction Engineering Designer should respond to the queries and provide additional
and / or revised design outputs where necessary. The Construction Engineering Designer
should copy the schedule with responses to the CEC and the PC’s CEC where appropriate
and ensure it is issued to the design checker.
The design checker should then review the schedule and annotate it to accept or reject the
designer’s response. When there is an impasse over queries the CEC for this work and the
PC's CEC as appropriate, after consultation with the client, should confirm whether the
designer and design checker should discuss the outstanding query(ies) and how these
discussions should be recorded. The design checker should confirm all queries have been
resolved and the designer should issue the revised design output in order that the design
and design check certificate can be signed by the design checker.
For Category 3 designs and design checks the design parameters (loads, idealized
structures, soil parameters and design standards/guidance) should be identified in an AIP
(Approved In Principle) or similar document (design statement) prepared by the designer
Ronan O’Driscoll
and agreed by the client’s technical advisor before commencement of the design. In the
event that the client does not appoint a technical advisor, the Principal Designer (PD) should
agree the AIP (design statement). The design statement should form the basis for the design
and checking and should assist in the resolution of queries.
4.4.7 Design Alterations

BS 5975 states changes in the requirements of the design brief should be recorded in
writing, with reference to the original design brief, and issued to the designer. The designer
should check the proposals against the certified design and incorporate the requirement for
these alterations into the design and drawings.
If there is no significant change to the design, the designer should confirm the acceptability
of the proposals to the appropriate CEC.
Any alterations to the Construction Engineering, proposed by the site team, should be
referred to the CEC or PC’s CEC as appropriate, who should contact the CED for
incorporation of the change into the design.
Where the designer considers that the alteration is significant, the alteration should be
referred to the design checker. Any revised design or design check documentation should be
recertified when considered appropriate by the CEC or PC’s CEC as appropriate.
The better the quality of the design brief and the design drawing the easier it will be to
decide if there is a design alteration or not. The design brief and the design drawing clearly
showing the assumed load paths in the design and how the design will behave structurally
will ensure any design alteration can be clearly highlighted over minor insignificant
amendments not requiring design input.
4.4.8 Designers Risk Assessment

The Designers Risk Assessment is a crucial document for the Designer to be able to
communicate and demonstrate the risk has been considered, designed out where possible
and where not possible to design out this risk is highlighted to the site teams to manage.
A Designers Risk Assessment must include design risks and not site management issues
that a competent contractor would be expected to risk assess and manage.
You can see from the draft sample document provided in APPENDIX D that the form is not
like a construction risk assessment. The key items in this document are: -
• The activity in the construction process that causes the hazard from this design risk
is identified along with the possible consequence
• Persons at risk are identified
• It is highlighted if the risk is removed by design, or the hazard reduced by design
• The remaining risks and who is to control these risks is highlighted so the site team
can transfer this information into the Risk Assessments for the Method Statements to
undertake this work on site
• To demonstrate the designer has considered this adequately other solutions
considered not reasonably practicable are listed
• To reinforce the designer has considered construction as required in CDM and to
ensure it is clear the risks and hazards identified are from the Designers presumed
construction sequence the Presumed Construction Methods are briefly highlighted
The draft sample Designers Risk Assessment is supplied in APPENDIX D.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.5 Construction Engineering Register
BS 5975 states the Construction Engineering Register is an aide memoire to assist
categorizing, designing, and checking all the relevant Construction Engineering. Correct use
of such a register is an important management tool for the site. The register is also useful as
verification that a safe procedure is in use on the site.
There is no standard format of a register; each organization needs to relate its register to the
type of work carried out and the nomenclature/forms, etc. used in the company procedures.
What is important is how it is used and the way in which it is maintained and kept up to date
as the project progresses.
The Construction Engineering Register is usually on a project-specific database this gives
the opportunity for several different staff to monitor progress of the Construction
Engineering, but overall, it remains the responsibility of the PC’s CEC throughout the project.
Where a contractor has been appointed to manage their own Construction Engineering the
relevant CEC should also prepare and maintain their own Construction Engineering register.
The CEC should provide relevant information to the PC’s CEC to enable a master
Construction Engineering register to be maintained.
The CEC should supply the register to the PC’s CEC: -
• Each time it is updated
• And at a regular agreed interval.
The register should be in a common format to allow incorporation of the CEC’s data into a
PC’s CEC’s master register for the project. This master register could simply be an excel
workbook with separate worksheets for each contractor on site.
The PC’s CEC should ensure that a Construction Engineering register is prepared and
maintained throughout the project. The register should identify what Construction
Engineering is needed on the contract. The register, often commenced at tender stage in
outline, and when it is at tender stage in outline it is: -
• Not expected to identify all the details of all the Construction Engineering to be
required.
As the project progresses the register should be maintained as an “active document” and the
PC’s CEC should ensure that it is kept up to date.
The register is an important management tool, and the relevant company should have a
process by which such registers are regularly audited. The auditing should be carried out by
someone familiar and competent with Construction Engineering.
A Construction Engineering register should include:
a)reference number and short description.
b)date design brief issued.
c)date required.
d)risk classification of Construction Engineering (see Table 1);
NOTE: - The implementation risk classification might be influenced by the client’s
requirements, such as increasing the risk level for a particular section of Construction
Engineering.
e) designer (company and/or individual);
f) design checker (company and/or individual);
Ronan O’Driscoll
g) design check category.
NOTE 2 The design check category can be influenced by the client’s or third-party’s
requirements (see BS 5975:2019 Clause 13.7) or by a minimum category of check
for a particular type of Construction Engineering set by the PC or contractor.
h) date design completed.
i) date design checked/approved.
j) erection complete and checked with date of permit to load (bring into use);
k) date of permit to unload (take out of use) as necessary; and
l) third-party approvals
The Construction Engineering Register is the most important document on site for the
management of Construction Engineering and everything relating to Construction
Engineering should be referenced in this document, so this is a one stop location for the site
management of Construction Engineering.
One of the main items to be covered in any Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC)
training course is the continuous use and input into the Construction Engineering Register.
This Register is the main tool to be used by the CEC and is the main document that will be
referenced for any Construction Engineering on site.
A draft sample Construction Engineering Register is supplied in APPENDIX E.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.6 Construction Engineering Site Considerations
4.6.1 Site Co-ordination, Supervision and Checking of Work on Site

Work on site should be the subject of careful direction, supervision and inspection and
checks to ensure that the Construction Engineering is constructed safely in accordance with
the design and specified materials and equipment, and that only when all checks have
proved satisfactory is the works loaded, used, maintained, unloaded and then dismantled in
accordance with an implementation plan.
The PC's CEC or other CEC should ensure that a Construction Engineering implementation
plan is in place covering the erection/assembly, use, unloading and dismantling of the
Construction Engineering including what inspections, checks, hold points, permits and
certification are required. This should include defining the regular inspections which are
required during the use (loading) of the Construction Engineering.
The implementation plan could consist of the method statement, task specific risk
assessment, inspection, and test plan (ITP), checklists and other certification (for example,
quality control check lists).
The inspection and test plan can be used to define hold points, where works stops for an
inspection or testing to take place. A permit is used to release the hold point and allow work
to continue.
The implementation plan should be developed considering the site conditions, programme,
original design brief and the construction phase plan and use of the drawings, specification
and methodology supplied by the designer.
The plan should define hold points at which the structure should be checked for conformity
and who is authorized to do so, including issuing permits to load or unload (release the hold
point), signing of quality control check lists etc. by the PC's CEC, the CEC or the CES, and
how the results of these inspections should be communicated and acted upon.
If the implementation plan has been produced by others it should be approved by the PC's
CEC or the relevant CEC.
CES may issue the permit for a defined scope and range of work as described in the
individual's appointment.
The PC's CEC or relevant CEC should ensure that the guidance on the implementation of
the design provided by the designer or supplier, including any residual risks, are
incorporated into the implementation plan.
The design residual risks should be addressed in the method statement.
The design documentation and method statement should be followed but those responsible
for work on site should bear in mind the need to compare conditions experienced on site
during construction with those assumed by the design in order that appropriate action can be
taken if it becomes apparent that they are different.
At all stages during fabrication/pre-fabrication, construction/erection, use and dismantling of
the Construction Engineering, the information being used should be checked to ensure that it
is correct, and that the work carried out is in accordance with the design details
(drawings/sketches) and is as specified to ensure that the completed structure will function
as intended.
This is necessary, not only to ensure that the Construction Engineering is safe to use, but
also to facilitate remedial work should this prove necessary; it is often difficult to do this later.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Prior to bringing Construction Engineering into service a final inspection should be carried
out to verify that it has been constructed in accordance with the requirements of the design
and any subsequent approved modifications.
The results of these inspections, together with any requirements for improvement, should be
recorded by the appropriate person as allowed by the implementation plan. For complex or
innovative designs consideration should be given to an inspection by the CED.
It might be necessary to carry out inspections of the Construction Engineering at points
during assembly/erection.
Some draft Construction Engineering Checklists are provided in APPENDIX J. It is to be
noted that a checklist should not be a prescriptive list of items to cover everything but
instead should be a high-level list to cover the main items and act as an aide memoir used
by a suitably experienced and competent individual and should not just list every possible
item. Please refer to publications such as “The Checklist Manifesto” by Atul Gawande for
more guidance on the effective use of checklists.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.6.2 Loading and Un-Loading of Construction Engineering
4.6.2.1 Loading (Bringing into use)

As a means of exercising control over bringing the Construction Engineering into use a
formal procedure for giving permission to load or proceed to the next stage in the
implementation sequence should be part of the implementation plan.
In simple cases a single “permit to load”, when the Construction Engineering has been
checked, might be appropriate.
In complex or larger cases, permits might be required at different stages, both as regards
loading or for different areas or for excavation.
It is normally desirable to limit the period of validity of the permit, as subsequent
modifications or changes in circumstances (soil wash out under footings or similar) may take
place. For example, a permit to load for a falsework used for concrete pours is normally valid
for 24 hours.
The area over which loading can take place, and to what extent, is set down in the permit,
e.g., it might be “reinforcement only”.
The PC's CEC, an authorized CEC or authorized CES as identified in the implementation
plan, should ensure that a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) is issued to the site
team prior to its use.
The permit to load (or proceed), issued prior to release of the hold point, should confirm that:
a) The Construction Engineering have been constructed in accordance with the certified
design (design and design check certificates have been issued and the drawings and
specification used are the ones referenced on the certificates);
b) Any modifications to the Construction Engineering have been approved by the
designer; and
c) The water, ground and environmental conditions and use are as envisaged by the
design.
Not all Construction Engineering requires a Permit To Load and again this is why BS 5975:
2019 cannot be read as black and white and requires interpretation and common sense as
noted in the Foreword of this document and this is one of the many reasons only suitably
competent and experienced individuals can audit contractors to BS 5975 : 2019.
For instance, a site hoarding will not have a Permit To Load. Once the hoarding is erected
by the site team it is already being loaded by the wind loading it was designed for, would a
Permit To Load in this instance stop the wind loading? of course not and the Permit To Load
would provide no control or benefit but would just be paperwork for paperwork’s sake and
add bureaucracy to the process for no benefit.
Also, if there are other suitable inspections that ensure suitable safe management of the
Construction Engineering on site this may reduce the need for a prescriptive Permit To Load.
This could be hold points to be signed of by the construction site supervisor in the RAMS to
confirm everything has been constructed to that point in line with the drawings and the
RAMS for that work. This could be noted and recorded for that item of Construction
Engineering in the Construction Engineering Register.
Ronan O’Driscoll
To ensure the value and requirement for a separate Permit To load for Construction
Engineering is maintained and recognising the requirement for a Permit To Load should be
decided using a risk based approach. This can be recorded in the Construction Engineering
Register so it is clear and transparent and can be audited as required.
For an example if you look at a low height concrete pour for a ground bearing base slab or
footpath and assume it is 200mm deep. The failure of the Construction Engineering here
would mean the formwork failing and the 200mm depth of concrete being released on the
ground, we are assuming no other work in the area, no drains, etc. Of course, there is cost
and time for the clean-up but ultimately in this situation there is no danger to life or welfare.
Let’s consider two options for the delivery of this on site as follows: -
• Option 1: -
o The site is very large with a lot of other high risk Construction Engineering
being undertaken and the Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) for
the site is very busy with these high-risk items. The site team constructing this
200mm concrete slab is very competent and the CEC has no concerns with
their competence to deliver this work. The CEC has discussed this work with
the construction supervisor delivering this work and the supervisor is
competent and accepts the responsibility for this pour. The RAMS reflects this
and has a hold point present before pouring concrete where the construction
supervisor signs the RAMS to confirm everything is in place and the formwork
has been checked ready for the pour. The CEC records this in the
Construction Engineering Register.
In this instance a Permit To Load brings no further benefit and does not
increase safety for this operation but instead just adds paperwork for
paperwork sake and wasted time with bureaucracy. What is described here is
perfectly acceptable.
• Option 2
o Again, as Option 1 above the site is large and the CEC is very busy but the
CEC in this instance has a site team that is less competent and requires
additional support. In this instance the CEC may appoint a suitable
Construction Engineering Supervisor (CES) for the work and highlight they
can issue Permits To Load for this work in their appointment letter. Or the
CEC may issue a Permit To load themself for this work. So, in this instance
the Permit To Load is required as it is an extra level of inspections due to the
experience and competence of the site team present.
Other variables maybe that this 200mm concrete pour is no longer a ground bearing slab but
instead it is an elevated slab and as a result has greater risk attached if anything was to go
wrong and in that instance a Permit To load would be required.
So, one size does not fit all and not all Construction Engineering requires a Permit To Load.
Again, this is where the experience and competence come into play and just reading BS
5975: 2019 line for line in black and white does not work. An auditor that does not have
suitable Construction Engineering experience and competence could never assess this as
they do not understand what is required.
A draft sample Construction Engineering Permit To Load / Unload is supplied in APPENDIX
F.
Ronan O’Driscoll
4.6.2.2 Unloading (Taking out of use)
Where the Construction Engineering is used to provide support to the Permanent Works until
it is self-supporting, the PC's CEC, relevant CEC or CES, as identified in the implementation
plan, should determine that the Permanent Works have attained adequate strength and/or
stability, with reference to the PWD’s specification or in conjunction with the PWD if
necessary, prior to ensuring that a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use) is issued.
A CEC or CES may issue the permit for a defined scope and range of work if authorized to
do so by the PC's TWC in the implementation plan; for example, they might need to verify
concrete strength or that all structural steelwork elements and connections are completed or
that any post-tensioning has been carried out prior to issuing the permit.
The sequence and order of removing Construction Engineering, where critical, should be
defined in the design output and/or confirmed in the implementation plan. The sequence
should be referenced in the permit to unload or permit to proceed.
The sequence and order of removing Construction Engineering supports can be critical to
avoid damage to the Permanent Works under construction. Generally, the supports to
spanning members should be removed starting mid-span, and for cantilever sections, should
be removed starting at the tip.
The PC’s CEC, or relevant CEC where appointed, should refer to the Permanent Works
and/or Construction Engineering Designer if in any doubt about the sequence.
The sequence and level of props removed during backpropping operations is particularly
important to avoid overloading of the completed slabs. The sequence should be agreed by
the PC's CEC or the relevant CEC with the Permanent Works designer and be included in
the implementation plan.
4.6.2.3 Dismantling of Construction Engineering

When the structure being supported by the Construction Engineering has become self-
supporting, or the excavation has been backfilled or other condition, the Construction
Engineering should be dismantled (removed) in accordance with any restrictions imposed by
the Permanent Works Designer as set out in the implementation plan. As at the loading
stage, a permit to dismantle the Construction Engineering might be appropriate, particularly
where this takes place in stages. Care should be taken to ensure that the Construction
Engineering remains stable during all stages of the dismantling process.
Ronan O’Driscoll
5 Organisations Requiring Procedural Control of
The following organisations should have procedures covering roles, responsibilities and
appointments, all with the intention of removing ambiguity and making the PC’s overall
a) Clients
d) Contractors / Sub-Contractors / Specialist Contractors (including demolition
contractors) all of which manage their own Construction Engineering. This includes
third-party employed contractors, such as utility providers and their contractors
e) Construction Engineering Designers and Permanent Works Designers
For the suitable and safe management of Construction Engineering each organisation
involved in Construction Engineering should have a Construction Engineering Procedure of
suitable detail to explain the roles, responsibilities, appointments, etc. in line with BS 5975:
2019.
Some of the basics of the procedure requirements have been highlighted in the previous
section, in this section we will look at the roles and a little more details as to specific
requirements for each organisation.
5.1 Overview of the main roles involved within organisations in

For the safe management of Construction Engineering on site the main roles highlighted in
BS 5975:2019 are as follows: -
• Designated Individual (DI)
• Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC)
• Construction Engineering Supervisor (CES)
These individuals will be supported by Construction Engineering Designers and Construction
Engineering Design Checkers.
If CDM 2015 has been correctly followed the Permanent Works Designer (PWD) will have
fully considered all Construction Engineering in their design and the Principal Designer (PD)
will have compiled all of this and coordinated, it to submit to the Principal Contractor (PC) on
site before work commences in the Pre-Construction Health & Safety File. After this point
any queries relating to the Permanent Works Design will be raised by the PC CEC to the
Principal Designer to get answered. The PD may have to coordinate with the PWD to get
queries answered.
Ronan O’Driscoll
5.1.1 FIGURE 11 – BS 5975 - Organogram to show Typical Construction Stage Interfaces between Principal
Contractor and other Parties on a Construction Project
Client
Designated Individual
Clients
Client Contractor Principal Contractor (PC) Designated Individual
Designated Individual Designated Individual
PC
CEC
Client Contractor
CEC
Sub-Contractor Site Team Designated
Individual
PWD CED
Self Delivering
Sub-Contractor
Sub-Contractor
CEC PCs PCs
In-House External
Self Delivering Specialist Supplier Designer Designer
Sub-Contractor CED (CED) (CED)
CED
Ronan O’Driscoll
5.1.2 Designated Individual (DI)
The Designated Individual (DI) is a senior person within an organisation with responsibility
for establishing, implementing, and maintaining a procedure for the control of Construction
Engineering for that organisation.
This person is usually reporting to the board of directors for their organisation.
All organizations which are party to a contract or otherwise involved in a project which has a
requirement for Construction Engineering or involved in Construction Engineering should
appoint a Designated Individual (DI).
The DI should be either a member of or directly responsible to a member of the
organization's main supervisory board (of directors) and should have both responsibility and
authority for establishing and maintaining a procedure to control those aspects of
Construction Engineering (and associated risks) for which the organizations have
responsibility or which they can constrain or influence.
The Construction Engineering procedure should be approved by the main board or a main
board director.
Among other things the DI is responsible for: -
• The Construction Engineering Procedure

• Appointing Construction Engineering Coordinators
• Supporting the Construction Engineering Coordinators as required
• Ensuring suitably competent organisations are working on the project
• Liaising with other Designated Individuals if required
• Ensuring the appointed Construction Engineering Coordinators are not responsible
or pressured by other project matters such as: -
o Commercial issues or Commercial pressures
o Construction programmes issues or Construction programme pressures
The DI should be responsible for ensuring that any organizations that they employ or
recommend being employed have adequate Construction Engineering procedures if they are
designing, carrying out and/or managing Construction Engineering.
This is not to be interpreted directly as read in BS 5957:2019 and was discussed with two of
the contributors to BS 5975 2019 in a presentation they gave in London on the 24th of July
2019 which was organised by the Temporary Works Forum (TWf) and National Access &
Scaffolding Confederation (NASC). The two individuals highlighted and discussed that it may
be perfectly acceptable to have Area DIs within a company as one DI may not be able to
cover all areas for one company and having Area DI’s reporting to the Lead DI would be
perfectly acceptable in their opinion. This has been noted in the Foreword of this document.
The DI must have suitable knowledge and experience to deem them competent for the role.
As with all Construction Engineering roles demonstrable experience of being a Construction
Engineering Coordinator on a construction site managing your own Construction
Engineering for a contractor after 2008 is a key piece of experience to demonstrate some of
your knowledge and competence. This CEC experience must be demonstrable for the
individual managing their own Construction Engineering Register, creating design briefs,
undertaking site inspections, and issuing permits to load, etc. Experience of being a CEC
and not managing your own Construction Engineering but instead just overseeing other
contractors delivering their own Construction Engineering on site is not suitable experience
or knowledge to demonstrate suitable competence.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Failing having any suitable CEC experience the DI could have demonstrable experience of
being a Construction Engineering Designer delivering fit for construction drawings to a
contractor on site and liaising with the on-site Construction Engineering Coordinators and /
or site teams to resolve any queries, develop design briefs, etc. This design experience must
be demonstrable and being a Permanent Works Designer who has no Temporary Works
design experience for a contractor is not suitable experience.
It is to be noted that suitable CEC experience and site experience developing and delivering
CE solutions is far superior for DI competence than CE design experience is.
The DI must have in depth knowledge of BS 5975: 2019 and have read it from cover to
cover.
The DI must have in depth knowledge of CDM 2015 to clearly understand the requirements
of all parties as is legally required.
The DI must have the technical knowledge required for the role so that the DI can mentor
and answer any queries from any appointed Construction Engineering Coordinator. This
technical level will vary depending on organisations and the type of Construction
Engineering they undertake on sites.
Any DI that is required to appoint CECs must be an individual: -
• Who has read BS 5975 cover to cover
• Who has undertaken the role of Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) for
Construction Engineering at an equivalent technical level to the Construction
Engineering they are being appointed DI for in this role. (This CEC experience must
be after 2008)
• Who can fulfil the CEC role themselves (otherwise they cannot mentor any CEC’s
they appoint)
• Who has in depth knowledge of CDM 2015
• Who does not allow a CEC to be pressured by commercial or programme issues
5.1.3 Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC)

BS 5975:2019 states to cater for the wide range of knowledge, skills, experience and
qualifications which are encountered, this British Standard is drafted in the broadest terms.
This should allow the duties, of the Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) and
Construction Engineering Supervisor (CES) for example, to be carried out by individuals who
do not have engineering qualifications.
For every site, responsibility for and the scope of the work of all organizations and
individuals involved in any aspect of Construction Engineering should be established.
The person designated as responsible for the coordination of the Construction Engineering
should be named as the Construction Engineering Coordinator.
One or more CES may be appointed to assist the PC’s CEC and/or any relevant contractor
CEC.
Among other things the CEC is responsible for: -
• The safe on-site management and coordination of all Construction Engineering they
have been appointed to control
• Managing and maintaining a live Construction Engineering Register
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Appointing suitable Constructing Engineering Supervisors to support them as
required on site
• Ensuring on site the approved Construction Engineering Procedure is understood
and followed by all parties involved
• Ensuring the Construction Engineering Design solutions are suitable and fit for
purpose by coordinating with designers and the site teams delivering the works
• If required Coordinating with the Principal Designer to answer any Request For
Information (RFI) or Technical Queries (TQ) to the Permanent Works Designer
• If required coordinating and liaising with any sub-contractors in line with the approved
Construction Engineering Procedure
The CEC is not and can never be responsible for: -
• The day-to-day progress of the Construction Engineering or other project matters that
may compromise the overarching principle of ensuring safety to all involved with the
Construction Engineering on site
• For example: -
o Commercial issues or Commercial pressures
o Construction programmes issues or Construction programme pressures
If practicable within the team structure on site, the CEC should be independent such that
their responsibility for safely implementing the CE works does not clash with their other
commercial and programme responsibilities.
Where this is not possible, the PC's CEC should recognize that the role of CEC overrides
other responsibilities the individual might have and should not put progress of the works
above the safety of the Construction Engineering. However, it is recognized that this might
not be possible on projects that have few or no engineering staff.
If the PC’s CEC has responsibility for both checking the Construction Engineering and
progress of the construction works, decisions should not be compromised by commercial or
other pressures. If the PC’s CEC considers that they are under undue pressure to achieve
production at the expense of structural stability, then they should seek assistance from their
DI.
As noted in the beginning of this document relating to training it would be assumed that the
DI appointing the CEC will ensure the CEC has suitable experience and training to
undertake the role.
The DI must ensure the CEC is suitable competent and experienced before being appointed
and if not, they may organise a suitable mentoring period before allowing the CEC to work
independently. This can all be recorded and highlighted in the letter of appointment for the
CEC and any limits of the appointment can also be noted and made clear.
As well as suitable knowledge and experience the CEC has to have enough time to
undertake the role required. If the CEC appointment is in addition to the day-to-day role the
individual has on site, then the DI must clearly highlight how many hours per week the role
requires and ask the CEC if he / she can provide a time break down of their current week so
the DI can assess if the individual has the time required to fulfil the role.
A DI must not appoint an individual without undertaking a time assessment for the
individual’s current workload and the realistically estimated time required for the CEC role
each week. Otherwise, the DI will appoint a CEC and possibly increase stress and pressure
to that individual as their day-to-day role has not been considered and this may result in the
Ronan O’Driscoll
individual missing important points on site due to stress and time constraints affecting their
decision-making abilities.
If the individual being appointed purely as a CEC with no other role, then the time
assessment is not required.
A draft sample Construction Engineering Coordinator Appointment is supplied in APPENDIX
G.
5.1.4 Construction Engineering Supervisor (CES)

BS 5975:2019 states to cater for the wide range of knowledge, skills, experience and
qualifications which are encountered, this British Standard is drafted in the broadest terms.
This should allow the duties, of the CEC and CES for example, to be carried out by
individuals who do not have engineering qualifications.
The CES should be aware that the PC’s DI defines the PC’s CEC lines of responsibility in
relation to each contractor’s CEC and/or CES, which is employed on the site.
The role of the CES should include as follows: -
• The CES, where appointed, should be responsible to the PC’s CEC or relevant
contractor CEC as appropriate. The CES should assist the PC’s CEC or relevant
contractor CEC, as appropriate, in the supervision and checking of the Construction
Engineering.
• The line of responsibility is appropriate to the organization making the appointment
and whether the organization is approved to manage their own Construction
Engineering.
• A CES should only be authorized to issue a permit to proceed, e.g. load (bring into
use) or unload (take out of use), if the DI of their organization and the PC’s CEC are
satisfied that:
o An individual CES is competent and has been given the appropriate authority
in respect of that individual; and
o The risk classification identified is low or very low
• The role of the CES is to provide on-site support to the PC’s CEC or relevant
contractor CEC for the control of Construction Engineering as such the CES should
not be responsible for any design or design checking of Construction Engineering but
should be responsible for the implementation of the PC’s or contractor’s procedure
for the control of Construction Engineering.
This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads; assessment of load
paths; engineering checks of any kind; determination of foundation capacity, etc.
• The appointment of a person as CES should not preclude them from carrying out
design or design checking if they are considered competent
The organization's DI can appoint the same individual to carry out specific design
and/or design checking but this would be under a separate specific nomination
relating to design.
CECs should appoint their own CES’s, and this should be made clear in the Construction
Engineering Procedure they are working to. The CEC is best placed to assess and appoint a
relevant CES rather than a DI who may be removed from site and the requirements of the
CEC in question.
Ronan O’Driscoll
It is to be noted that the CEC is still ultimately responsible for signing off CE works and that
the CES’ approval can be used to inform the CEC to sign off works but it is not a suitable
substitution.
As with the DI appointment of the CEC, if a CEC is appointing a CES they must undertake a
time assessment to ensure the CES has the time available to fulfil the role adequately
without added time pressures.
If the individual being appointed purely as a CES with no other role, then the time
assessment is not required.
A suitable CES is usually an experienced and competent site supervisor or equivalent who is
working on site and supervising the site team for the erection and use, etc. of the
A draft sample Construction Engineering Coordinator Appointment is supplied in APPENDIX
H.
5.2 Clients Construction Engineering Procedures

Attached in APPENDIX L is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the
requirements of BS5975:2019. This procedure uses the term “Temporary Works” so that it is
useable with the current industry terminology. This procedure is a draft and not the finished
article and can be edited with information removed as required to reduce the size of the
document
The Client’s document is to highlight the appointment of a suitably experienced and
competent Client Designated Individual (DI) and for that individual to be responsible to
ensure the Principal Designer (PD), Permanent Works Designer (PWD) and Principal
Contractor (PC) are suitably competent and experienced with the required Construction
Engineering knowledge to foresee any issues in the construction project.
The main requirement of the Client that is to be highlighted in the Client Procedure is that the
Client is fully aware of the requirement for suitable consideration, design, and management
of Construction Engineering to safely and timely deliver the construction project. The other
main requirement is to ensure suitably experienced and competent individuals are employed
for the PD, PWD and PC roles.
The Client must rely on the PD to coordinate all issues at the preconstruction relating to
design that can mitigate any Construction Engineering issues.
Preconstruction the PD is the lead for the project and once construction begins the Principal
Contractor is the lead for the project so these parties must be suitably experienced and
competent for the role they are undertaking.
The Client must ensure suitable competent parties are appointed to these positions as is
required of the Client in the CDM 2015 regulations.
An appointed PD must have in depth knowledge and experience of Construction
Engineering otherwise they are not competent for the role.
An appointed PC must have experience of similar work and the suitable Construction
Engineering knowledge.
Ronan O’Driscoll
5.3 Principal Designers (PD) Construction Engineering Procedures
Attached in APPENDIX M is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the
document
The Principal Designers Construction Engineering procedure should highlight who within the
organisation is responsible for the Construction Engineering and ensuring the design
considers Construction Engineering as required. The procedure should highlight the
interaction with the PWD and the PC Team on site once construction begins.
Under the CDM Regulations the PD has a legal obligation to ensure all of Designers they
manage at the preconstruction stage have fulfilled their legal obligations under the CDM
Regulations. This means all Designers must have considered construction when undertaking
their design so that their design can be built as safely and efficiently as is reasonably
practicable and where that has not been possible, they highlight this with the design
information supplied to site.
The PD is the last gatekeeper in this process to ensure all designers have considered
construction in their design before handing the completed designs to the contractor to deliver
on site.
If the PD does complete their role correctly there should be very little correspondence
between site and the Permanent Works Designers during the construction phase. This will
be as a result of the design considering all required Construction Engineering and the
contractor on site being supplied a design that is fit for construction with no questions on
how it is to be built.
If the PD has done their job badly and not in line with CDM 2015 the construction team on
site will have numerous questions that requires answers from the Permanent Works
Designers.
From this it can clearly be seen the PD role has to be undertaken by an individual or
organisation with a strong and extensive knowledge of Construction Engineering.
A Health and Safety professional with no Construction Engineering Design experience
cannot undertake the role of a PD. Unfortunately, they are not experienced or competent to
do so without suitable Construction Engineering experience.
A Permanent Works Designer who has never delivered fit for construction drawings for
Construction Engineering designs to a contractor on site while working in partnership with
the relevant Construction Engineering Coordinator and site delivery teams cannot undertake
the role of a PD. Unfortunately, they are not experienced or competent to do so without
suitable Construction Engineering experience.
The PD must: -
• Have demonstrable experience of being a Construction Engineering Coordinator

working on site for a contractor managing their own Construction Engineering in line
with the requirements in place in BS 5975 since 2008
• Be a chartered Civil and / or Structural and / or Mechanical Engineer
Ronan O’Driscoll
The PD should: -
• Have demonstrable experience of being a Construction Engineering Designer

delivering fit for construction, Construction Engineering design solutions to site
• Have demonstrable experience of being a Permanent Works Designer
When a client is appointing a PD, they should consider questions such as: -
• If the PD has never worked for a contractor on a construction site how can that
individual have suitable knowledge and experience to ensure construction issues
have been suitably considered at the design stage?
• If the PD has never worked as a designer of Construction Engineering how can that
individual have suitable knowledge and experience to ensure construction issues
have been suitably considered at the design stage by the Permanent Works
Designer so that the remaining Construction Engineering can be suitably designed?
• If the PD has never worked as a designer of Permanent Works how can that
individual have suitable knowledge and experience to ensure the Permanent Works
Designer has considered construction issues at the design stage?
• If the PD is not a Chartered Engineer, how can they demonstrate they have suitable
Engineering understanding for this role?
5.4 Permanent Works Designers (PWD) Construction Engineering

Procedures
Attached in APPENDIX N is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the
document
The Permanent Works Designers Construction Engineering procedure should highlight who
within the organisation is responsible for the Construction Engineering and ensuring the
design considers Construction Engineering as required. The procedure should highlight the
interaction with the PD.
The Permanent Works Designer has the greatest influence on the safe construction of the
project as well as the length of time to construct and the total cost of construction. A PWD
with suitable Construction Engineering knowledge and experience is a huge asset to any
project but unfortunately it has been proved by numerous organisations and surveys that
very few if any PWD’s in the UK currently adequately consider Construction Engineering in
their designs. The Temporary Works Forum recently undertook a survey that produced some
very concerning results regarding the lack of consideration of Construction Engineering by
PWD’s.
If a site is given a design that has not fully considered all that is required in construction the
PWD has failed their legal duty under the CDM Regulations to apply the Principles Of
Prevention and consider construction.
On the other hand, if the PWD has supplied a design with drawings clearly highlighting the
steps they have assumed in the construction process they can clearly demonstrate their
compliance to their legal obligations in the CDM Regulations.
Ronan O’Driscoll
To assist with the demonstrating compliance to CDM regulations and to highlight the PWD
has considered construction a PWD should create a Construction Engineering Schedule for
their design.
The Construction Engineering Schedule should be a high-level line item for any Construction
Engineering considered and when the PD supplies the preconstruction design information to
the contractor this schedule can become the start of the PC’s Construction Engineering
Register which will be more detailed.
A draft sample Construction Engineering Schedule for a PWD is supplied in APPENDIX I.
If a PWD does not know how their design will be built, they should not be designing it and
that is the principle of CDM.
If a PWD does not know, and as a professional engineer recognises the limits of their
knowledge, then looks to others for the knowledge they do not possess that is perfectly
acceptable. In this instance a Construction Engineering consultant could be contacted to
work with the PWD to ensure the finished design is suitable as required.
If all of the construction is suitably considered and communicated in the design information
any contractor on site will clearly understand the proposed load paths and construction
method so there is no confusion or risk to safety on site.
The more competent the PWD is with Construction Engineering the better the result for all
parties involved including the site team, PC, PD and Client, etc.
All PWD designer should have a working knowledge of BS 5975 :2019 otherwise they
cannot demonstrate how they have any consideration for construction. As Permanent Works
Designer how can you say you have considered construction if you do not have working
knowledge of the design aspects of BS 5975:2019?
All PWD’s must spend time on site to assess how their design has been constructed and
delivered otherwise there is no feedback or learning and any mistakes in design will just be
repeated for the next project and throughout that designer’s career. The great engineers of
old referenced in the Introduction of this document all worked on site with the construction
teams for the construction and delivery of their designs and that experience allowed them to
improve and excel as engineers and designers as they had a feedback loop to learn from
any mistakes and / or misunderstandings.
The author knows from experience there is massive value in learning and development from
spending time on site and being present when things do not go to plan and the construction
team maybe tired and weary after along shift plus the weather may be wet and cold and they
turn to you to resolve a design issue they are trying to deal with. At these times when you
are challenged with what you have designed and proposed for construction you learn to
change it if required for the next time you undertake a design like that and you usually learn
things you would never have learned sat in a design office removed from the actual work on
site.
As PWD undertaking a design you must ask yourself if you can picture every step of the
construction of your design. You must consider the whole process of construction in your
design and this among other things, and this list is not exhaustive, includes: -
• What material are you constructing from?
o Is it available? can the site store enough of that material as required?
Ronan O’Driscoll
o i.e., if large amounts of concrete are required does your design allow for the
concrete deliveries considering the site boundary and other activities being
undertaken within the site boundary? Do you need to allow construction joints
in your design and design those partially completed structures to be stable; to
allow the construction to proceed due to the site space restrictions? Can you
off site manufacture and use just in time deliveries and if so, does the design
allow for this?
o Is all of this highlighted clearly on the PWD drawings?
• What is the space available on site for construction?
o What is the proposed site boundary and with the project design how has the
designer assumed the construction works will be phased and delivered?
o If the construction is reinforced concrete is there enough space for storing
rebar and falsework and formwork on site? and allow safe access of plant and
personnel?
o If tower cranes are required for the construction of this design where has the
designer assumed the tower crane will be placed? Has the designer assumed
the foundations for the tower crane will remain in one location or will move
during the construction of their design?
o Has the design considered the weights and locations of any items required to
be lifted so the crane size is suitable to construct the proposed design?
o When concrete is being poured has the PWD assumed suitable space for
scaffold access and plant movement if required?
o Has the PWD considered the space required to remove any formwork and
falsework and the space for access and transportation of equipment to
undertake this activity?
o Has the PWD considered the ability of the partially completed structure to
support the construction loads for plant, equipment, and personnel etc.?
• Is there any interaction with any neighbouring structures?
o If there are any neighbouring slopes, structures, services, etc. has the PWD
allowed for this, and the space and access required for construction in their
designs?
• Access during construction?
o Can the workforce safely access the required areas for all phases of
construction and has this been communicated on the PWD design?
o Has the PWD allowed for brackets in their design to facilitate temporary
access platforms?
o Has the PWD designed the permanent access to be used for the
construction?
• Stability during construction?
o Has the PWD ensured at every stage of the construction their design will be
self-supporting and able to support the required construction loads for plant,
equipment and access as well as any wind loadings, etc.?
You could go on and on with this list but at least it gives a flavour of the kind of things a
Construction Engineering competent PWD will consider in their Permanent Works Designs.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Referring to the Introduction of this document, it is these types of considerations that the
great engineers of old would consider with all their designs without question or prompting
and perhaps there is link between this and the lack of similar great engineers in the modern
day.
5.5 Construction Engineering Designers (CED) Construction

Engineering Procedures
Attached in APPENDIX O is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the
document
The Construction Engineering Designers Construction Engineering procedure should
highlight who within the organisation is responsible for the Construction Engineering
procedure and ensuring the design considers Construction Engineering as required. The
procedure should highlight the interaction with the PC, other contractors and designers as
required.
Construction Engineering Designers are expected to be very experienced and competent
with Construction Engineering so the procedure should be away of formalising their work
and quality systems for the delivery of Construction Engineering solutions to site.
5.6 Principal Contractor (PC) Construction Engineering

Procedures
Attached in APPENDIX P is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the
document
The Principal Contractors Construction Engineering procedure should highlight who within
the organisation is responsible for the Construction Engineering and ensuring the design is
suitably delivered and managed on site as required. The procedure should highlight the
interaction with the PD and other contractors as required.
PCs are expected to be very experienced and competent with Construction Engineering so
the procedure should be away of formalising their management systems in line with BS 5975
:2019.
If there are multiple contractors on site the procedure should highlight if the PC is going to
accept other contractors Construction Engineering Procedures so they can self-deliver their
own Construction Engineering and they can appoint their own Construction Engineering
Coordinators, etc.
The PC Procedure should highlight how other contractors who self-deliver their own
Construction Engineering is managed on site. Such things as: -
• How documents are submitted and accepted by the PC CEC, this will include CEC
appointments
Ronan O’Driscoll
• What site inspections or audits maybe undertaken
• How the PC CEC will interact with the Contractors CEC, i.e., meetings, etc.
• When Construction Engineering Registers will be submitted, i.e., weekly, monthly?
• What hold points or approvals are required form the PC CEC for progress of the
Contractors Construction Engineering on site
• Etc.
The procedure can be used to highlight any specific processes or controls the PC may have
such as how Scaffold is managed, if Construction Engineering Supervisors (CESs) can issue
Permits To Load and for what scope of work, etc.
The coordination of CEC’s and managing any resulting Interfaces is a key requirement of the
PC CEC on site and this is to be described in the procedure.
If there will be multiple CECs from the PC for different areas, then the procedure has to
highlight this and highlight the requirement for a Lead CEC for the PC to coordinate all of the
PC CEC’s. If a sub-contractor has multiple CECs, they have to highlight a similar detail in
their procedure.
For a PC of smaller projects Section 4.1 of this document gives a little example as a guide.
For a PC of a multi-billion-pound project the best current example (as of 2022) in the UK is
Hinkley Point C (HPC) Nuclear Power Plant construction. The PC Construction Engineering
Team there have had Clause 9.3.2.5 of BS 5975: 2019 created specifically for the way they
manage Construction Engineering. That team is the first of its kind as there has not been a
construction project of that scale in a generation in the UK and there has never been a PC
dedicated team to Construction Engineering like that before in the UK construction industry.
The PC Construction Engineering Team there do not deliver any work directly themselves
but instead work collaboratively and in partnership with some of the world’s best
Construction Engineering Teams from all the contractors present on that site.
Attached in APPENDIX T is a Construction Engineering Design Report Checklist that the
HPC PC Construction Engineering Team use. This checklist is aligned with the requirements
of BS 5975:2019 and provides an objective scoring systems of contractors Construction
Engineering Design Reports. This allows better metrics and monitoring of contractors on a
huge project when you have a small PC Construction Engineering team.
Attached in APPENDIX U is a Construction Engineering Site Inspection and a more focused
Scaffold Site Inspection Checklist that the HPC PC Construction Engineering Team use.
These checklists provide an objective scoring systems of contractors Construction
Engineering on site. This allows better metrics and monitoring of contractors on a huge
project when you have a small PC Construction Engineering team.
5.7 Contractor Construction Engineering Procedures

Attached in APPENDIX Q is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the
document
The Contractors Construction Engineering procedure should highlight who within the
organisation is responsible for the Construction Engineering and ensuring the design is
Ronan O’Driscoll
suitably delivered and managed on site as required. The procedure should highlight the
interaction with the PC and other contractors as required.
The Contractor Procedure will have to reference and match the requirements of the PC
Procedure as a minimum and the points noted for the PC Procedure in the last section are
all so relevant to the Contractors Procedure.
Contractors are expected to be very experienced and competent with Construction
Engineering so the procedure should be away of formalising their management systems in
line with BS 5975 :2019.
5.8 Supplier / Manufacturers Construction Engineering Procedures

Attached in APPENDIX R is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the
document
The Supplier / Manufacturers Construction Engineering procedure should highlight who
within the organisation is responsible for the Construction Engineering and ensuring the
equipment being supplied has all relevant information regarding Construction Engineering to
allow safe management on site as required. The procedure should highlight the interaction
with the PC and any other contractor as required.
Construction Engineering Suppliers / Manufacturers are expected to be very experienced
and competent with Construction Engineering so the procedure should be away of
formalising their work and quality systems for the delivery of Construction Engineering
equipment to site.
5.9 Addressing Scaffold Management

Scaffolding is Construction Engineering but is a specialised area of Construction
Engineering that requires specific knowledge and experience.
From days gone by when the author undertook Construction Engineering Design, he would
have been confident designing scaffold tube as bracing and structural supports, but he
would never be confident or attempt to design scaffold for any access requirements. A
competent Construction Engineering Designer is not necessarily competent to design
scaffold for access unless they have spent time with a specialised scaffold designer to learn
the nuances of this specialist design.
To be competent scaffold designer you must have a good knowledge of how scaffolders
work and erect scaffold systems and which items and fixings they use and how they use
them, without this knowledge a designer can design a scaffold access system that is not
efficient and hard for the scaffolders to erect and dismantle so as a result increasing risk on
site. You must also have in depth knowledge of all of the requirements of the Working at
Height Regulations.
Once you have a suitably competent Scaffold Designer you need a suitable experienced and
competent scaffold contractor to erect, inspect and dismantle your access scaffold in line
with all the requirements of the Working at Height Regulations.
Ronan O’Driscoll
With all of this in place the next issue is how the Access Scaffold is recorded and managed
on site with regards Construction Engineering and listing items on Construction Engineering
Register.
As Access Scaffolding comes under the Working At Height Regulations (WAH) there is
already a high level of control and inspection in place. Access Scaffold and any Working At
Height platform has to be inspected every 7 days as required and highlighted in the WAH.
This 7 day inspection is recorded by the Scaffold Inspector on a Scaffold Register as
required in the WAH and this register used to be referred to as the “F91” document.
If this is taking place and the access scaffold is being inspected and suitably maintained by
suitably trained and competent individuals why would we repeat this information on the
projects Construction Engineering Register?
In the past on previous projects, the author attempted to place all scaffold on the
Construction Engineering Register and found he had low risk little hop-up scaffold and a
range of other low risk items on his register making the register hard to manage as there
was so much additional and quite frankly not needed items listed. By placing all these items
on his register at the time he was not providing any more safety or better management as
the Scaffold Inspector was managing this and he was copying the contents of the scaffold
register.
So, the most practical and realistic way to manage scaffold is as follows and the author has
used this through his career: -
o Appoint the Scaffold Inspector as a Scaffold Construction Engineering Supervisor
(CES) and within the appointment make it clear to the scope of the appointment
covering the scaffold being inspected
o Get this CES to send a copy of the Scaffold Register every week or month as
required and this can be saved with the project Construction Engineering Register so
items can be checked if required
o Place a line item in the project Constructing Engineering Register highlighting and
pointing to the Scaffold Register being supplied from this CES
o If the scaffold contractor uses a company design manual, get copy of this document
and ensure it is referenced in the project Construction Engineering Register as a line
item for CAT 0 Scaffold designs. Highlight this can be used by advanced scaffolders
from that company that have been trained and briefed how to use their company
design manual and as a result it can be categorised as a CAT 0 design.
o If the scaffold contractor uses TG20 Scaffold Design software to produce the
required Scaffold Design Compliance Sheets for use on site. Highlight this is a CAT 1
Scaffold design, as a competent person must make some basic design decisions
when choosing the suitable solution using this software. Again, highlight this a s a
CAT 1 design in the project Construction Engineering Register provided the software
is used by suitably competent and trained individuals.
o From this for the use of the company design manual and the TG20 software there
should be no further requirement to list anything more in the project Construction
Engineering Register and these designs can be checked on the Scaffold Register
supplied by the Scaffold CES if required.
o After this any other designs can go through the standard Temporary Works Design
process and be recorded and managed on the project Construction Engineering
Register as required
Ronan O’Driscoll
o The relevant contractors Construction Engineering procedure must highlight this
approach to ensure clarity for all parties and avoid any issues if audited
Experience has shown this to be a very effective and sensible way to manage access
scaffold utilising the expertise and skills of scaffold contractors and scaffold inspectors.
6 Auditing of Construction Engineering in line with BS 5975

Attached in Appendix S is a draft list of questions that could be utilised for an audit of
Construction Engineering Procedures to the requirements of BS 5975:2019. This is a draft
and not the finished article and can be edited with information removed as required.
The questions provided are aimed to check the alignment of a procedure with the
requirements of BS 5975:2019. If you are auditing a procedure against the requirements of
BS 5975:2019 the auditor must have suitable Construction Engineering knowledge and
experience. As stated in the Foreword and throughout this document BS 5975:2019 cannot
be just read and interpreted black and white and experienced is required to confirm what is
required depending on the application.
An auditor who does not have suitable experience of being a Construction Engineering
Coordinator after 2008 and / or suitable experience of being a Construction Engineering
Designer is not suitably knowledgeable and / or competent to be able to audit any company
against the requirements of BS 5975:2019.
However, If the audit is to check compliance to a contractors own Construction Engineering
Procedure, and the audit is checking the contractor is doing as is stated in their own
Construction Engineering Procedure then the auditor does not require the same level of
competence in Construction Engineering. For this audit any experienced auditor would be
suitable to undertake this audit.
Ronan O’Driscoll
7 Construction Engineering Interfaces
The management of Construction Engineering interfaces is critical and should not be
overlooked. If a Construction Engineering Coordinator is appointed for an area, then it would
be fair to expect that area to have its Construction Engineering well managed as the
appointed CEC should be assessed as suitable experienced and competent and is aware of
all requirements to manage their area suitably.
When there is a site with more than one CEC and / or CECs from different contractors the
interface between these CECs becomes very critical.
The PC CEC is responsible to coordinate and manage all CECs on site and the main area of
management will be the interfaces between CECs.
As stated, this interface maybe between different contractors CECs or even CEC from the
same organisation.
If a sub-contractor on a site has more than one CEC they must appoint a Lead CEC to
manage and coordinate all of the CECs from that contractor. The Lead CEC must ensure
suitable management and awareness of any interfaces between CECs. This Lead CEC can
then manage interfaces with other contractors through the PC CEC.
The PC CEC must manage the contractor CEC interfaces and any interfaces within the PC
CEC team if there is more than one CEC from the PC.
The management of Construction Engineering Interfaces such be kept simple to ensure safe
and efficient management and control of interfaces and avoid excessive bureaucracy for no
benefit. This could consist of a regular meeting at set intervals between all of the relevant
parties so any interfaces can be highlighted to all teams as required for information and if
any actions are required, they can be noted and tracked through the same meeting.
Ronan O’Driscoll
8 Construction Engineering Work On Site
For guidance on Construction Engineering work on site the Construction Engineering
Coordinator and / or the Construction Engineering Supervisor should refer to BS 5975: 2019
Section 20.
This section of BS 5975:2019 gives valuable information and guidance on such items as: -
• Critical factors for workmanship on site

• Accuracy of falsework – Adjustable steel props and forkheads
• Accuracy of falsework – Tube and coupler falsework
• Accuracy of falsework – Aluminium props and towers
• Accuracy of falsework – Purposely fabricated steelwork and structures made form
proprietary steel components
• Accuracy of falsework – Other types of construction
• Vertical movement
• Top arrangements
• Wedging
• Lacing and Bracing
• Importance of Details
• Checking Falsework – When to Check
• Checking Falsework – Items to be Checked
• Application of Loads to Falsework
• Dismantling of Falsework
Ronan O’Driscoll
9 Construction Engineering Design
The most important skill any Engineer can have is the ability to follow the load through a
structure. Some Engineers call it “having an eye for the load” and it is an ability that develops
with experience and understanding.
Anyone who can follow a load through a structure from the application of a load though to
the foundations is demonstrating engineering understanding.
This ability is more important than being able to just perform calculations and a skilled
Engineer will be able to do both. The Engineer who can observe a structure and clearly
knows how that structure transfers all applied loads to the foundations can ask any design
Engineer to undertake calculations of the areas they see as taking the critical loads so that
structure can be checked if any modifications, etc. is required.
To learn how to do calculations in isolation and to do those calculations in line with a design
code is a skill but less of a skill than being able to understand the load paths through
different structures. This is not taking away from the ability to undertake calculations, but it is
to be understood that calculations and design are some of the tools an Engineer uses.
The Engineer looks at what is to be achieved, understands the loads that needs to be
supported, considers the foundations that have to support these loads, and then chooses
the best option to achieve what is required using Engineering judgment and skill. Then some
initial calculations may be undertaken to check the feasibility of the chosen solution and from
this there may be changes in the options. After that the more detailed calculations may
follow and these calculations may be undertaken by less experienced Engineers as they will
be overseen by the more experienced Engineer. So, from this you can see the real
Engineering skill is not purely in undertaking calculations and detailed design.
In Construction Engineering the most skilled Engineers will be able to identify the issue
being raised in a Construction Engineering Design Brief. By understanding the surrounding
ground and environment and any restrictions on access and movement of plant, etc. they
can provide an Engineering Solution that fulfils what is required and is safe and
constructable for the site team. This will not be possible if there is not a clear understanding
of where the load is coming from and where it is going to ultimately load the foundations.
The better understanding a Construction Engineering Coordinator has of the load path
through any given structure the better they will be to convey more useful information to the
designer in the Construction Engineering Design Brief.
The skilled designer will know the limitations of the relevant design codes being used, clearly
understand all load paths and all possible failure mechanisms. They will have in depth
knowledge of Construction Engineering and BS 5975 design recommendations. From this
combined experience and competence, they will be able to decide if they are on the
boundaries of any design codes capabilities and if they need to justify being outside of the
design code guidelines. A skilled designer will never just say they cannot design something
because it is not covered in the code or design word for word as the code states when the
design requirements are outside of this.
What follows is nothing new and is widely available from many sources including Section 3
of BS 5975 :2019. The information here present is to be checked and used by suitably
experienced and competent individuals and used at those individuals’ risk. Any mistakes
present are not the fault or responsibility of the author or 3RM Associates Ltd. This
Ronan O’Driscoll
information present is here to assist a Construction Engineering Coordinator on site if they
need this level of information and understanding.
9.1 Some Background on British Standards
As highlighted an Engineer is not just an individual who can undertake design work, the
ability to design is a tool the Engineer uses, and a good Engineer will have more capabilities
than just being able to design to code.
Engineers will design to codes of practice and standards so it is beneficial for the Engineer
to understand where this information originated from so a better understanding of the use
and limitations can be made. Codes of practice and standards are tools to be used and
adapted as required by the Engineer, provided the validity of the design approach can be
clearly demonstrated.
No Engineer should assume that any codes pf practice or British Standard define the limits
or the only way design and analysis can be undertaken, quite the contrary they form the
basis for the Engineer to spring board and develop design and concepts further.
A good Engineer will be able to look at codes of practice and standards and design within
their requirements but also know where the design can be taken beyond the black and white
interpretation of the printed design guidance information in front of them or look at multiple
standards and codes for further interpretation. Or they will at least put their hand up and
admit they cannot solve the issue and perhaps they know others that can solve this and
consult with them to see if there is a suitable solution.
A less experienced Engineer will use the excuse of “that is what the code says” and will not
interpret further or investigate further. Unfortunately these Engineers have not developed
and learned enough to be able to call themselves a true Engineer.
Tung-Yen Lin (1912 – 2003) a Chinese American Structural Engineer and referred to as “Mr.
Prestressed Concrete”, stated the following in an interview in 1984 about the narrowness of
the education of contemporary civil engineers:
“We concentrate so much on mathematics, physics, and mechanics, we have no time
to teach them real engineering. Four years of college is far too little. It should be
more like five to six, maybe even seven years. You can’t get the needed exposure to
crucial social, legal, financial, and environmental issues in a short four-to-five-year
program. As an engineer, you are dealing with not only numbers, you are dealing
with human beings, so young engineers need to be educated as broadly as
possible.”
Isambard Kingdom Brunel in 1848 was asked for his view on Government Inspections and
creating of design rules, etc. by the Royal Commission on the Application of Iron to Railway
structures, He said:
“If the commission is to enquire into the conditions “to be observed”, it is to be
presumed that they will…. laydown, or at least suggest “rules” and “conditions” to be
observed in the construction of bridges, or, in other words, embarrass and shackle
the progression of improvement tomorrow by recording and registering as law the
prejudices or errors of today. No man, however bold or however high he may stand in
his profession, can resist the benumbing effect of rules laid down by authority….
Ronan O’Driscoll
Devoted as I am to my profession, I see with fear and regret this tendency to legislate
and rule…”
Some great references on the history of British Standards can be found in such publications
as listed below and the information that follows is copied directly from those publications: -
• Historical Structural Steelwork Handbook – BCSA – W. Bates

• Appraisal of Existing Structures (Third Edition) – October 2010 – The Institution of
Structural Engineers (IStructE)
It is interesting to note that the British Standards Institute (BSI) came into being as a direct
result of the wide variety of iron and steel products produced by individual manufacturers.
British Standard - BS 1 was titled “Rolled steel sections for structural purposes”.
Various attempts were made to alleviate this problem by standardisation, but it was not until
April 26, 1901, that the Engineering Standards Committee – the forerunner of the British
Standards Institution (BSI) – came into being. The Engineering Standards Committee was
representative of the Institution of Civil and Mechanical Engineers (now the Institution of Civil
Engineers (ICE) & Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IMechE) ) and of Naval Architects,
the Iron and Steel Institute, and later other Professional Institutions.
There is a range of British Standards on quality and manufacturing of building materials, and
we will not refer to them here but instead look at relevant design standards in the UK.
It is probable that the first Building Regulation was that promulgated by London in the year
1189. This gave requirements for the thickness of party walls
The Appraisal of Existing Structures publication gives a great summary of the UK
Construction Design Standards as follows, with the Construction Engineering Design codes
added to the end: -
• Concrete
o CP 114: 1948 (earlier Reinforced Concrete Regulations introduced in London in
1916; Department of Scientific and Industrial Research code of 1934)
o CP 115: 1959 (prestressed)
o CP 116: 1965 (precast)
o CP 110: 1972 (superseded CP 114/115/116)
o BS 8110: 1985 (superseded CP 110)
o BS EN 1992-1, -3 (will supersede BS 8110)
• Steel
o BS 449: 1932 (earlier London Building Acts of 1909 onwards, Institution of
Structural Engineers Report 1927; BS 449 still in use)
o BS 5950: Part 1: 1985
o BS 5950-1: 1990 (superseded BS 5950: Part 1:1985)
o BS 5950-1: 2000 (superseded BS 5950-1: 1990)
o BS EN 1993 (will supersede BS 5950)
• Composite construction (beams for buildings)

o CP 117: Part 1: 1965
o BS 5950: Part 3: Section 3.1: 1990 (superseded
Ronan O’Driscoll
o CP 117: Part 1: 1965)
o BS EN 1994-1 (will supersede BS 5950-3)
• Composite construction (beams for bridges)

o CP 117: Part 2: 1967
o BS 5400: Part 5: 1979 (superseded CP 117: Part 2:1967)
o BS EN 1994-2 (will supersede BS 5400-5)
• Loadbearing masonry walls

o CP 111: 1948
o BS 5628: Part 1: 1978 (superseded CP 111)
o BS 5628-1:1992 (superseded BS 5628: Part 1:1978)
o BS 5628-1: 2005 (superseded BS 5628-1:1992)
• Timber
o CP 112: 1952
o BS 5268: Part 2: 1984 (superseded CP112)
o BS 5268: Part 2: 1988 (superseded BS 5268: Part 2: 1984)
o BS 5268: Part 2: 1991(superseded BS 5268: Part 2: 1988)
o BS 5268-2: 1996 (superseded BS 5268: Part 2: 1991)
o BS 5268-2: 2002 (superseded BS 5268-2: 1996)
• Aluminium
o CP118: 1969 (obsolescent)
o BS 8118: Part 1: 1991
• Foundations
o Civil Engineering Code of Practice No. 4: 1954
o CP 2004: 1972 (superseded CECP4)
o BS 8004: 1986 (superseded CP 2004)
• Earth retaining structures

o Civil Engineering Code of Practice No 2: 1951
o BS 8002: 1994
Ronan O’Driscoll
• Loadings
o CP4: 1944
o CP3: Chapter V: 1952 (superseded CP4)
o BS 648:1964: Schedule of weights of building materials
o BS 6399: Part 1: 1984, Dead and imposed loads, and BS 6399: Part 3: 1988,
Imposed roof loads (superseded relevant parts of CP3: Chapter V)
o BS 6399: Part 2: 1995, Wind loads (ran in parallel with CP3: Chapter V: Part
2, Wind loads, first issued in 1970 – withdrawn 15 October 2001)
o BS EN 1990
o BS EN 1991-1 (will supersede BS 6399)
• Construction Engineering Design

o BS 5975: 1982 – Code of Practice for Falsework
o BS 5975: 1996 – Code of Practice for Falsework
o BS 5975: 2008 – Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the
o BS 5975: 2019 – Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the
Ronan O’Driscoll
10 Load Basics
In Engineering we are really looking at a Force (which is referred to as the Load). The units
used are Kilonewton (kN).
We have Mass which can be defined as a measure of how much matter there is in an object.
The units used are kilograms (Kg)
We have the acceleration due to gravity on Earth which is 9.806 m/s/s = 9.8m/s2.
Acceleration is described as the change of velocity per second.
Force = Mass X Acceleration
In Units it is – kN = Kg X m/s/s
So 1 kN = (101.97 Kg X 9.806 m/s/s ) / 1000
Or 1,000 N = 101.97 Kg X 9.806 m/s/s
For simplicity and for conservatism and safety in numbers from this point onwards let’s just
use 10m/s2 as the force due to gravity.
So 1 kN = (1,000 kg X 10 m/s/s) / 1000
Or 1,000 N = 1,000 kg X 10 m/s/s
An easy guidance is as follows: -
1 Tonne = 1,000 kg = 10 kN = 10,000 N
0.1 Tonne = 100 kg = 1kN = 1,000 N
We also have Pressure which is the force applied perpendicular to the surface of an object
per unit area over which the force is distributed. The units are such as kN / m2.
We also have forces such as the impact from a falling object which requires us to know the
mass of the object (m), the height the object has fallen from (h) and the distance travelled
after impact (d). Using the gravitational force of acceleration g you get the following formula:-
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚h
Average Impact Force =
𝑑𝑑
Ronan O’Driscoll
10.1.1 FIGURE 12 – Simple Diagram of Force from a mass onto a
surface (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)
The red arrows are to show the acceleration due to gravity acting on the cube that has a
mass (m) this results in a force applied to the ground of F.
The pressure on the ground is that force divided by the contact area with the ground – P = F
/A
𝐹𝐹
P=
𝐴𝐴
Ronan O’Driscoll
10.2 Compression and Tension
When a load is applied as shown in the diagram below the column is in compression and
likewise when the column is being pulled as shown below it is in tension.
Note the arrows shown outside of the column are the direction of the applied load. The
arrows shown inside the column are a representation of the equal and opposite force
required for the column to support the load. This sign convention is used by Engineers and
sometimes can be confusing when the internal arrows are all that is present to show the
loading condition.
10.2.1 FIGURE 13 – Simple Diagram of Compression and Tension

Force (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)
Ronan O’Driscoll
10.3 Shear
In Engineering a shear force is a force applied along the surface, in opposition to an offset
force acting in the opposite direction. This results in a shear strain. In simple terms, one part
of the surface is pushed in one direction, while another part of the surface is pushed in the
opposite direction.
10.3.1 FIGURE 14 – Simple Diagram of Shear (Courtesy of Richard

McDonald)
Ronan O’Driscoll
10.4 Bending Moment
In Engineering a Bending Moment (BM) is a measure of the bending effect that can occur
when an external force (or moment) is applied to a structural element.
10.4.1 FIGURE 15 – Simple Diagram of Bending Moment (Courtesy of

Richard McDonald)

Ronan O’Driscoll
10.5 Deflection
In Engineering terms deflection is the degree to which an element of structure changes
shape when a load is applied. The change may be a distance or an angle and can be either
visible or invisible, depending on the load intensity, the shape of the component and the
material from which it is made.
For deflection limits refer to:-
• Fiona Cobb – Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004 – Page 68
• The Steel Construction Institute – Steel Designers Manual – 6th Edition – Page 1,220
• BS 5950-1:2000 – Structural use of Steelwork in Building – Page 24 - Table 8 –
Suggested limits for calculated deflections
• BS 449-2:1969 – Specification for The use of Structural Steel in Building – Clause 15
– Page 8
10.5.1 FIGURE 16 – Simple Diagram of Beam Deflection (Courtesy of

Richard McDonald)

Ronan O’Driscoll
10.6 Stress
In Engineering Stress is the force per unit area within a material. Stress is the measure of
what the material feels from externally applied forces.
Stress has similar units as pressure in that it is kN/m2 or similar as can be seen from the
formula below (Force - kN) divided by (Area – m2)
𝐹𝐹
Sigma = 𝜎𝜎 = = Load / Cross-sectional Area
𝐴𝐴
10.7 Strain
In Engineering Strain is defined as the ratio of change in size to the original size of an object.
Strain is the response of a system to an applied stress. When a material is loaded with a
force, it produces a stress, which then causes a material to deform. Engineering strain is
defined as the amount of deformation in the direction of the applied force divided by the
initial length of the material.
Strain is dimensionless as you can see from the formula below it the units used to derive it
are distance divided by distance.
Δ𝐿𝐿
Epsilon = 𝜀𝜀 = = Change of Length / Orginal Length
𝐿𝐿

Ronan O’Driscoll
11 Geometric Properties
What follows is some basic geometric property information which can be useful when
designing elements of structures.
11.1.1 FIGURE 17 – Cross Section of a Steel Beam (Courtesy of

Richard McDonald)
11.2 Second Moment of Area (I)

The Second Moment of Area is a measure of the efficiency of a shape to resist bending
caused by loading. A beam tends to change its shape when loaded. The second moment of
area is a measure of a shape's resistance to change. Certain shapes are better than others
at resisting bending.
In structural engineering, the second moment of area of a beam is an important property
used in the calculation of the beam's deflection and the calculation of stress caused by a
moment applied to the beam. To maximize the second moment of area, a large fraction of
the cross-sectional area of an I-beam is located at the maximum possible distance from the
centroid of the I-beam's cross-section. The planar second moment of area provides insight
into a beam's resistance to bending due to an applied moment, force, or distributed load
perpendicular to its neutral axis, as a function of its shape. The polar second moment of area
provides insight into a beam's resistance to torsional deflection, due to an applied moment
parallel to its cross-section, as a function of its shape.
Refer to Figure 17 and looking at that section through a beam you can see the top and
bottom flanges are a large fraction of the cross-sectional area and they are located at the
maximum possible distance from the centroid of the I Beam cross section.
The units used for the Second Moment of Area – I = mm4 (or similar)
Ronan O’Driscoll
For formulas to calculate I refer to: -
• The Steel Construction Institute – Handbook of Structural Steelwork – 3rd Edition –

(referred to as the Red Book) – Pages 98 to 103 (inclusive)
• Fiona Cobb – Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004 – Pages 56 to 59
(inclusive)
FORMULA FOR I:-
I = (r2) x (A)
Where:-
• r = the Radius of Gyration

• A = the cross sectional area
I = (Z) x (y)
Where:
• Z = Elastic Modulus
• y = The distance from the neutral axis to any give fibre. It is often used that y = c, where
c is the distance from the neutral axis to the most extreme fibre. From this I = Z x c
11.3 Radius of Gyration (r)

The radius of gyration is used to compare how various structural shapes will behave under
compression along an axis. It is used to predict buckling in a compression member or beam.
The units used for the Radius of Gyration – r = mm (or similar)
For formulas to calculate r refer to: -

FORMULA FOR r:-
𝐼𝐼
r= �
𝐴𝐴
Where:-
• I = The Second Moment of Area

• A = the cross-sectional area

Ronan O’Driscoll
11.4 Elastic Modulus (Z)
Section modulus is a geometric property for a given cross section used in the design of
beams. There are two types of moduli, the elastic section modulus and the plastic section
modulus.
For general design the elastic modulus is used, applying up to the yield point of most metals
and other common materials.
The units used for the Elastic Modulus – Z = mm3 (or similar)
FORMULA FOR Z:-
Z=I/y
Where:
• I = Second Moment of Area

c is the distance from the neutral axis to the most extreme fibre. From this I = (Z) x (c)
11.5 Plastic Modulus (S)

The plastic modulus is used for materials where elastic yielding is acceptable and plastic
behaviour is assumed to be an acceptable limit. Designs generally strive to ultimately remain
below the plastic limit to avoid permanent deformations.
The units used for the Plastic Modulus – S = mm3 (or similar)

Ronan O’Driscoll
11.6 Modulus of Elasticity (E)
Youngs Modulus is sometimes referred to as the Modulus of Elasticity, which means a
measure of the Elasticity of a material. It is the numerical evaluation of Hooke’s Law, namely
the ratio of stress to strain which can be referred to as the measure of resistance to elastic
deformation of the material.
E = Elastic Modulus – Units are N / mm2 (or similar)
𝜎𝜎
E = Stress / Strain = Sigma / Epsilon =
𝜀𝜀
𝐹𝐹
� �
𝐴𝐴
E=
Δ𝐿𝐿
� �
𝐿𝐿
From this if you know any four of the following values you can calculate the remaining fifth
value:-
1. E – Youngs Modulus for the material
2. F – Force applied to the material
3. A – Cross sectional Area
4. L - Original Length of the Element
5. Δ𝐿𝐿 – Change of Length of the Element
Also note that:
Stress = E X Strain
𝜎𝜎 = (E) X ( ) 𝜀𝜀
𝐹𝐹 Δ𝐿𝐿
= (E) X ( )
𝐴𝐴 𝐿𝐿

Ronan O’Driscoll
11.7 Stiffness
Stiffness can be described as the extent to which an object resists elastic deformation in
response to an applied force.
Note that the Strength of a material can be described as a measure of how much stress the
material can take before permanent deformation occurs. So, there is a difference between
Stiffness and Strength of a material.
Stiffness is important to understand the load path as the load will usually be taken by a stiffer
element over a less stiff element if they are working together. i.e. A very simplistic and basic
explanation maybe to take two props supporting a load and one prop is less stiff than the
other, then the load will be taken more by the stiffer element until suitable deformation then
the less stiff prop will take the load.
Just as a side note if you use the term “flexibility” to describe an element that can elastically
deform, it can be described as the inverse of stiffness. Instead of resisting the force, the
material or element tends to move / bend along the force. So, if an element is stiff then the
deformations are small, If a body is less stiff (flexible) then deformations are large.
The stiffness equations are used in stiffness matrices and for finite element modelling so
they are here just for reference. The only one that will be of use for Construction Engineering
and namely for propping is the Axial Stiffness.
11.7.1 Axial Stiffness

Axial Stiffness is for an element under axial tension or compression loading and can be
described as the ratio of axial load to axial deflection.
(𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸)
k=
𝐿𝐿
Where: -
• k is Axial Stiffness – Units are N/mm (or similar)

• E is Modulus of Elasticity (Youngs Modulus) – Units are N/mm2 (or similar)
• A is the cross-sectional Area – Units are mm2 (or similar)
• L is the length of the element – Units are mm (or similar)
This can be used to calculate the axial deformation of the element using the following
formula: -
P =k 𝛿𝛿
Where: -
• P is the axial load – Units N (or similar)

• k is Axial Stiffness – Units are N/mm (or similar)
• 𝛿𝛿 is a measure for the deformation / change in length – Units are mm (or similar)
Rearranging the formula to use it as follows: -
𝛿𝛿 =P/k
From this if you know the load you are applying and you know the stiffness of the element
you can calculate the deformation of that element for that loading.

Ronan O’Driscoll
The same formula can be rearranged for k as follows:-
K= P / 𝛿𝛿
11.7.2 Bending Stiffness

Bending Stiffness is for an element that has a Bending Moment and is the resistance of that
element against bending deformation.
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
k=
𝐿𝐿
Where: -
• k is Bending Stiffness – Units are Nmm2/mm (or similar)

• E is Modulus of Elasticity (Youngs Modulus) – Units are N/mm2 (or similar)
• I is the Second Moment of Area – Units are mm4 (or similar)
Note Bending Stiffness = EI and the Units are Nmm2 (or similar)
11.7.3 Torsional Stiffness

Torsional Stiffness is for an element under torsion loading along its axis and is the resistance
of that element against torsional deformation.
𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
k=
𝐿𝐿
Where:-
• k is Torsional Stiffness – Units are Force X Length /Angle = Nmm/rad (or similar)
• G is the Shear Modulus or the Modulus of Rigidity of the material – Units are N/mm2
(or similar)
• J is the torsional constant of that section – Units are mm4 (or similar)
This can be used to calculate the rotational deformation of the element using the following
formula: -
T =k 𝜃𝜃
Where: -
• T is the applied torsional moment – Units Nmm (or similar)

• k is Torsional Stiffness – Units are Nmm/rad (or similar)
• 𝜃𝜃 is a measure for the rotation – Units are radian (or similar)
Rearranging the formula to use it as follows: -
𝜃𝜃 =T/k

Ronan O’Driscoll
From this if you know the torsional bending moment you are applying and you know the
torsional stiffness of the element you can calculate the rotation of that element for that
loading.
The same formula can be rearranged for k as follows:-
K= T / 𝜃𝜃
The formula for a beam of uniform cross-section along its length can be written as:-
𝜃𝜃 = (TL) / (GJ)
11.8 Some Geometric Properties of Triangles

To assist with solving of calculations it is always beneficial to have some reference for
triangles. When encountering trusses etc. to analyse loads you will need a basic
understanding. Trigonometry is the branch of mathematics concerned with specific functions
of angles and their applications to calculations, it is like a subset of geometry.
For some useful trigonometrical formulae and solutions to triangles refer to:-

11.8.1 FIGURE 18 – Simple Triangle for illustration (Courtesy of Richard

McDonald)
Simple Trigonometry the author was taught to remember the connection between the sides
of a right angled triangle and the Sine, Cosine and Tangent of each angle is as follows:-
• Six Old Horses Carried And Heaved Till Old Age

There are many variations of this that individuals have been taught and just use whatever
works for you.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Looking at the bullet point above and substituting the words for the references from Figure
18 above as follows: -
• Six = Sine
o Sine = Old / Horses = Opposite / Hypotenuse
• Carried = Cosine
o Cosine = And / Heave = Adjacent / Hypotenuse
• Till = Tangent
o Tangent = Old / Age = Opposite / Adjacent

Ronan O’Driscoll
12 Bending Moment and Deflection Formula
For formulas to calculate Bending Moments, reactions (shears) and deflections refer to: -

(inclusive) plus page 78
• The Steel Construction Institute – Steel Designers Manual – 6th Edition – Pages
1,077 to 1,104 (inclusive)
• The Concrete Society – CS30 Formwork – A guide to Good Practice – 3rd Edition –
Appendix B
12.1 BASIC CALCULATION FOR SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH

UNIFORM LOAD ON FULL SPAN
Following on from the references above for formulas for bending and deflection and using
the references in the previous sections for the deflection limits here is a very basic simple
example of some calculations.
Limitations / Points to Note:-
• The quick, brief and basic design of a simply supported steel beam shown here is not
to replace a full design but to assist Site Engineers in initial sizing of beams and for
Construction Engineering on site.
• Further discussion and reading will be required to develop the Engineers
understanding if this is not already well understood by the Engineer
Reference Documents:-
• BS 5975:2008+A1:2011 – Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and

the Permissible Stress Design of Falsework
• Handbook of Structural Steelwork – 3rd Edition – RED BOOK
• Steelwork Design Guide – BLUE BOOK OF PROPERTIES (on line via TATA Steel)
Let’s say the load applied is acting over the whole span and it is 100 kN = W
(We will ignore load factors, etc. for now to keep things simple for this basic example. Load
factors are discussed in more detail later)
Let’s say the beam length is 3 m = L

Ronan O’Driscoll
12.1.1 FIGURE 19 – Simply supported beam with Uniform Load on Full
Span (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
Maximum Bending Moment is at Mid-Span – Mmax =
8
𝑤𝑤𝐿𝐿3
5
Maximum Deflection = 𝛿𝛿 max = x( )
384 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
5
This implies the Second Moment of Area required = Irequired = (( )WL3) / E x 𝛿𝛿 max
384
Youngs Modulus (E) for steel = 2.05 X 105 N/mm2
We can assume the maximum deflection has to equal or be less than the allowable
deflection limit as highlighted earlier in section 10.5. For this example, let’s assume the
deflection limit = Span / 360.
Maximum allowable deflection = Span / 360 = 3,000mm / 360 = 8.3 = 8 mm
We can use this deflection value to place in the formula to calculate I required
5
Therefore - Irequired = (( )WL3) / (E x 𝛿𝛿 max)
384
5
Irequired= (( )(100,000)(30003)) / ((2.05 X 105) x 8) = 21,436,737.8 mm4 = 2,143.7 cm4
384

Ronan O’Driscoll
We can use this initial value to look at steel section tables and start sizing a suitable steel
section as the IXX values must be equal or greater than this value.
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
We also know the maximum Bending Moment using the formula – Mmax =
8
100×3
Mmax = = 37.5 kNm
8
We can use this Bending Moment value to calculate our required beam using the I required
value to give us a rough estimate of the section size we need to be considering.
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Annex K for Effective Lengths and for this example we will refer to
Table K.2 below: -
BS 5975:2019 Annex K Section K.5 gives explanations for torsional restraints at supports,
and Section K.6 gives explanations for effective lateral restraints.
We are going to assume this beam has no intermediate lateral restraint and at the supports
the compression flange is not restrained against rotation in plan, therefore: -
Effective Length = l = 1.2 X L = 1.2 X 3,000 mm = 3,600 mm = 3.6 m
Using the online Interactive “Blue Book” of steel section properties: -
https://www.steelforlifebluebook.co.uk/
We know we need a section with a Second Moment of Area (I) value equal or greater than
137,195.122 cm4.
Please note the reference to labels for axis of steel cross sections, BS 449 (referenced in BS
5975:2019) which is a Permissible Stress Design Code and BS 5950-1:2000 – Structural
use of Steelwork in building which is a Limit State Design Code use the following labels for
axis of steel cross sections: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
Eurocodes which is a Limit State Design Code uses the following labels for axis of steel
cross sections: -
Also note that the 1000 separator (,) used as 1,000 is removed in Eurocodes and the British
Standard of a decimal point is changed to a comma in Eurocodes so that the following is the
result: -
1,000.000 (in British Standards) = 1000,000 (in Eurocodes)
We will be using the British Standard in this document.
From the Interactive “Blue Book” and looking at Second Moment of Area values for the y-y
axis, which equals the x-x axis to BS 449 and BS 5950.
We will select the following Universal Beam Section:-
203 X 133 X 25 UB – Ixx = 2,340 cm4 > 2,143.7 cm4
Ixx = 2,340 cm4 = 23,400,000 mm4
Radius of Gyration – rxx =8.56 cm = 85.6 mm
Radius of Gyration – ryy = 3.10 cm = 31.0 mm
Depth of Section = D = 203.2 mm
Flange Thickness = T = 7.8 mm
Cross Sectional Area = A = 32.0 cm2 = 3,200 mm2
Elastic Modulus of the Section = Zxx = 230 cm3 = 230,000 mm3
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
Note that Bending Stress = Sigma = 𝜎𝜎 =
𝐼𝐼
𝜎𝜎𝜎𝜎
Therefore 𝑀𝑀 = = 𝜎𝜎𝜎𝜎
𝑦𝑦
Ronan O’Driscoll
For Grades of Steel from BS 5975:2019:2019 Annex A to modern steel grades please note:-
Grade 43 = S275
Grade 50 = S355
Grade 55 = S460
We will assume we are going to use S275 Steel (Grade 43)
Bending Capacity: -
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Annex A – Table A.1 (which is directly copied from BS 449-2: 1969 –
Specification for The Use of Structural Steel in Building – Table 3a). For Grade 50 and
Grade 55 refer to BS449-2:1969 – Tables 3b and 3c.
D / T = 203.2 mm / 7.8 mm = 26.051 = 26.0
L / ry = 3,600 mm / 31.0 mm = 116.12 = 116
Referring to Table A.1 of BS 5975:2019 and using these values we get pbc = 114
pbc = 114 N / mm2
It is to be noted that this value of pbc has a factor of safety of approximately 1.65 already
applied as this is Permissible Stress Design.
The Bending Moment Capacity = pbc X Zxx = 114 X 230,000 =26,220,000 Nmm
Bending Moment Capacity = 26.22 kNm < 37.5 kNm
Therefore, it FAILS for Bending Capacity
Deflection:-
5 𝑤𝑤𝐿𝐿3
5 100,000 𝑋𝑋 30003
𝛿𝛿 max = x( ) = 7.33 mm < 8 mm
384 𝐸𝐸 𝑋𝑋 23,400,000
Therefore, the deflection is adequate, but it fails for bending
From this we will have to select another section to ensure the bending capacity is as
required.
We will select the following Universal Beam Section: -

254 X 102 X 28 UB – Ixx = 4,000 cm4 > 2,143.7 cm4
Ixx = 4,000 cm4 = 40,000,000 mm4

Ronan O’Driscoll
Bending Capacity: -
D / T = 260.4 mm / 10.0 mm = 26.04 = 26.0
L / ry = 3,600 mm / 22.2 mm = 162.16 = 162
Referring to Table A.1 of BS 5975:2019 and using these values we get pbc = 85.96
pbc = 86 N / mm2
Bending Moment Capacity = 26.48 kNm < 37.5 kNm
Therefore, it FAILS for Bending Capacity
From this we will have to select another section to ensure the bending capacity is as
required.
We will select the following Universal Beam Section: -

254 X 146 X 31 UB – Ixx = 4,410 cm4 > 2,143.7 cm4
Ixx = 4,410 cm4 = 44,100,000 mm4
Bending Capacity: -
D / T = 251.4 mm / 8.6 mm = 29.23 = 29.0
L / ry = 3,600 mm / 33.6 mm = 107.14 = 107
Referring to Table A.1 of BS 5975:2019 and using these values we get pbc = 119.0
pbc = 119.0 N / mm2
Bending Moment Capacity = 41.769 kNm > 37.5 kNm
Therefore, it PASSES for Bending Capacity

Ronan O’Driscoll
Deflection: -
5 𝑤𝑤𝐿𝐿3
5 100,000 𝑋𝑋 30003
𝛿𝛿 max = x( ) = 3.89 mm < 8 mm
384 𝐸𝐸 𝑋𝑋 44,100,000
Therefore, the deflection is adequate
Quick Shear Check to BS 449 – Clause 23 & Table 10: -

Grade 43 – Thickness less than 40mm – Pb = 125 N/mm2
Shear capacity = Area X Pb = 3,970 mm2 X 125 N/mm2 = 496,250 N = 496.25 kN
Applied Shear load at supports = 100 kN / 2 = 50 kN < 496.25 kN
Applied Shear / Allowable Shear = 100 kN / 496.25 kN = 0.202
Notes on selecting steel section sizes: -

The selection of the steel section maybe influenced by a range of factors including (this list is
not exhaustive but just a flavour of what may need to be considered): -
• What is available, either already in the contractor’s yard or from the steel supplier
• Weight maybe an issue so the preference would be for the lightest weight section
(there maybe many reasons for this outside of cost alone, such as craneage
available, location of the beam and being able to place it, etc.)
• Usually for bending provided there is enough depth for the section Universal Beam
(UB) sections are preferred as their geometry ensures a more economical use of the
steel in the cross section
• Usually for axial loading Universal Columns (UC) sections are preferred again due to
their geometry and being strong in xx and yy axis compared to UB sections
• Compound sections can be fabricated and designed made of steel plates or other
steel sections suitably fixed together so they perform as one whole unit. Later in this
document an example is given of how to calculate the cross section properties of
such a compound section

Ronan O’Driscoll
13 Some useful Quadratic Equation Formula for Reference
Factorisation of Quadratic Equations: -
X2 + aX + b =0 - becomes:-
• X2 + (c+d)X + cd =0
• X2 + cX +dX + cd =0
• X(X+c) + d(X+c)
• (X + c) (X + d) =0
Example would be:- X2 + 7X +6 = 0, which equates to (X + 1)(X + 6) = 0
X2 + aX - b =0 - becomes:-
• X2 + (c+d)X - cd =0
• X2 + cX +dX - cd =0
• X(X+c) - d(X+c)
• (X + c) (X - d) =0
Quadratic Formula to find Roots of Quadratic Equations: -

aX2 + bX + c =0 - becomes:-
−𝑏𝑏±√𝑏𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
X=
2𝑎𝑎

Ronan O’Driscoll
14 Dead Loads
Dead Loads, also known as permanent or static loads, are those that remain relatively
constant over time and compromise, for example the weight of the buildings structural
elements, such as beams, walls, roof and structural flooring components.
BS 6399-1:1996 – Loading of Buildings - Part 1: Code of Practice for Dead and Imposed
Loads, defines Dead Loads as: -
• The load due to the weight of all walls, permanent partitions, floors, roofs, finishes
and all other permanent construction including services of a permanent nature.
BS 6399-1 notes the following: -
• Dead loads are calculated form unit weights given in BS 648 or form actual known
weights of the materials used. Where there is doubt as to the permanency of dead
loads, such loads should be treated as imposed loads.
BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.2 – Weights of Materials – states: -
• Where not given in the code, self-weights of materials should be taken from BS 648,
BS EN 1991-1-1 and Imposed loads taken from BS 6399-1. Recommended figures
for the masses and densities of some commonly used materials are given in
Appendix D.
BS 5975:2019 Clause 17 provides some useful information regarding Dead and Imposed
Loads and the reader should ensure they are aware of the content present in BS 5975: 2019
regarding design.
BS 648:1964 – Schedule of Weights of Building Materials supplies a wide range of weights
for numerous materials and the weights are supplied in kg/m3, kg/m2 and kg/m depending in
the material in question. Multiplying these values by 10 will give a conservative value of
N/m3, N/m2 and N/m respectively. These values could then be divided by 1,000 to convert
from N to kN if needed.
For some dead load information refer to: -
(inclusive) and Page 41

Ronan O’Driscoll
15 Imposed / Live Loads
Imposed Loads (also known as Live Loads, Applied Loads or Variable Actions) may vary
over time and often result from occupancy of a structure. Typically, live loads may include
people, vehicles, in a library structure it could be the weight of the books, etc.
BS 6399-1:1996 – Loading of Buildings - Part 1: Code of Practice for Dead and Imposed
Loads, defines Imposed Loads as: -
• The load assumed to be produced by the intended occupancy or use, including the
weight of movable partitions, distributed, concentrated, impact and inertia, loads, but
excluding wind.
For some imposed load information refer to: -
(inclusive)
BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.4 provides some useful information on Imposed loading and the
reader should ensure they are aware of the content present there.
BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.4.1 refers to the following as Imposed Loads: -
a) Permanent Works. e.g., reinforcement and concrete.
b) Construction Operations, including.
1) Working Areas.
2) Storage Areas.
3) Pedestrian Traffic.
4) Vehicular Traffic.
5) Static Plant.
6) Mobile Plant
BS 5975:2019 gives the following imposed loads: -
• 0.75 kN/m2 – 75kg/m2 - Minimum load for all areas including work areas that are not
in use
• 1.5 kN/m2 – 150 kg/m2 - In all areas where works is carried out and there is likely to
be storage of tools, equipment, and small quantities of materials, or if that part of the
platform is likely to be used as an access route.
• 5.0 kN/m2 – 500 kg/m2 – Pedestrians loading (members of the public)
BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.4.3.1 recommends that:-
Where in situ concrete is to be placed, in addition to the minimum 0.75kN/m2 access loading,
an additional distributed loading should be applied over any 3m X 3m area of soffit formwork
and falsework. This is to cater for the impact loads and heaping of concrete that occur during
concrete placing operations and the weight of small equipment commonly used in reinforced
concrete construction. The additional distributed load is calculated as 10% of the self-weight
of the concrete, with the minimum value being 0.75 kN/m2 and with an upper limit of 1.75
kN/m2.
Combining the distributed load with the additional in situ concrete allowance shows that the
formwork, permanent formwork (e.g., metal decking, pre-cast planks) and falsework has to
be designed for a construction load over any 3m X 3m area of the Construction Engineering
for equivalent solid in situ concrete:

Ronan O’Driscoll
Up to 300mm thick 0.75 + 0.75 = 1.50 kN/m2
From 300mm to 700mm 0.75 + (10% of Self weight of concrete)
Over 700mm 0.75 + 1.75 = 2.50 kN/m2
Care should be taken with thin slabs on metal decking to check for deflection and the
additional loading when casting to a defined level.
For this loading to be valid, the concrete should not be dropped into the reception
arrangements or onto the horizontal surfaces from a free height greater than 1 m. Nor should
the concrete be allowed to heap or accumulate on the formwork to a total height of more
than three times the depth of the slab, i.e. a surcharge of two times the depth of the slab, for
slabs up to 300 mm thick. For slabs greater than 300 mm thick, the allowed surcharge is 600
mm regardless of slab thickness. In all cases the accumulation or heap should not cover an
area of more than 1 m2 measured at top of slab level. Should it be necessary to exceed
these limitations, allowance for the additional loading should be made in the design.
These loadings are for access and working conditions and are similar to that stated in BS EN
12812:2004. They are not intended to allow for the stacking of materials or for the loads of
other equipment and plant for which specific provisions should be made as described in
17.4.3.2 and 17.4.3.4.
15.1.1 FIGURE 20 – Controlled heaping of concrete
Horizontal Imposed loads: -
• 0.75kN/m – 75kg/m – Horizontal loading for pedestrian barriers

• 112.5kN – 11,250 kg – Maximum Impact Allowance for Vehicles on Falsework - For
vertical loading use appropriate axle or wheel loads
• Vehicle Crash Barriers – refer to contract specification
• Plant Horizontal Force in any of the possible directions of movement equal to 10% of
the static load of the moving items where the rate of travel cannot exceed 2 m/s
• Plant Horizontal Force in any of the possible directions of movement equal to 33% of
the static load of the moving items where the rate of travel exceeds 2 m/s
Where the falsework is erected out of vertical by design, a horizontal load component Wsin𝛾𝛾
is produced in the falsework structure, where 𝛾𝛾 is the angle of inclination of the falsework
standards to the vertical and W is the vertical load. This horizontal load will produce
additional loads in all components of the falsework, which should be resolved accordingly.
Vertical loads from Lifting operations: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
• Where impact may occur in the placing of Permanent Works elements, an extra
vertical load should be assumed, which will require assessment in each case. For
example: -
o For a unit weight of 5 t (tonnes), with normal crane operation, an additional
50% of the unit’s mass should be allowed.
o For a piece of steelwork weighing 100 t, crane control would normally be
more careful and an allowance of an extra 10& may be appropriate.
• Dynamic loading from loads moving vertically: -
o The static load of the moving item should be increased by 25% when using
Mechanically operated lifting gear
o The static load of the moving item should be increased by 10% when using
Manually operated lifting gear
Concrete Pumping: -
• Where concrete is being placed by pump or pneumatic placer through a pipeline

carried on the Falsework, the additional force due to the concrete pipeline, FX (in N)
applied to the Falsework may be calculated from the expression:
FX = 0.25 p AX
Where:-
p is the maximum pressure in the pipeline (in N/mm2)
AX is the cross-sectional area of the pipeline (in mm2)
The maximum pressure in the pipeline, p, is dependent upon a number of factors but
the following pressures are not likely to be exceeded:
1) 5.0 N/mm2, for mechanical pumps
2) 0.7 N/mm2, for pneumatic placers
Refer to BS 6399-1:1996 – Loading of Buildings - Part 1: Code of Practice for Dead and
Imposed Loads, for tables of vertical imposed loads and for horizontal imposed loads to
parapets, barriers, and balustrades, etc. In this document there is also guidance on
horizontal loadings to vehicle barriers.

Ronan O’Driscoll
16 Wind Loading
The wind loading information derived in the recent wind design codes and in BS 5975:2019
are derived from BS 6399-2:1997 – Loading for Buildings – Part 2: Code of Practice for Wind
Loads. Within BS 6399-2 there are two basic methods for determining wind loads on
buildings: the Directional Method and the Standard Method.
The Directional Method involves calculating the effective wind speed in several directions
around a structure, this is usually twelve directions at 30o intervals. The Directional Method
is realistically only suitable for evaluation by computer.
The Standard Method incorporates simplifications that reduce both the amount of calculation
and the number of load cases to be considered. The method involves determining the wind
speed in the orthogonal directions, normal to the faces of the building. The wind speed in
these orthogonal directions is assumed to have a coverage of ± 45o. The Standard Method
is a simplification of the Directional Method which is about 14 % more conservative on
average.
It is possible to simplify the Standard Method further by calculating the wind speed for a
given site exposure using the worst possible combination of parameters occurring in any
direction. This is the approach taken by BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5 and the most onerous
values for all the factors that affect the effective wind speed are assumed irrespective of
direction. This produces higher estimates of wind pressure compared to other design
methods and as a result more conservative loads but requires less calculation effort and also
has a greater factor of safety.
BS 5975: 2019 Clause 17.5.1.2 states the following information is required by the
Construction Engineer to calculate wing loading:-
a) Location of site – distances to the edge of town and to the sea
b) Topography of site, considered in all directions, e.g., nominally flat, on moderate or
steep hill, on moderate or steep escarpment
c) Altitude of the site (in meters above sea level)
d) Duration of the falsework operations and use
e) General arrangement of the structure, including its dimensions
f) Whether the falsework is to be clad with debris netting or impervious sheeting
g) Number and size of falsework members from which to determine the areas to which
the wind will act; where using proprietary falsework components, technical details for
wind coefficients from suppliers, if known, will be required
h) Details of the attachments to the falsework or items imposed upon it, e.g., formwork
that will be subject to wind loads, or loading-out of platforms for equipment
16.1 General Wind Loading Information

BS 5975:2019 provides wind loading guidance in Clause 17.5 and Annex L & K.
BS 5975:2019 uses a simplified form of the method given in BS EN 1991-1-4:2005+A1 that
is suitable for the majority of Construction Engineering. The simplification will give
comparable or conservative results compared with BS EN 1991-1-4:2005+A1. The designer
is not precluded from using NA to BE EN 1991-1-4:2005+A1 and BS EN 1991-1-4:2005+A1
to calculate the peak velocity pressure of the situation warrants it.
A simplified method was first introduced for scaffolding; and adopted for BS 5975:2008. This
simplified version was created from BS 6399-2:1997 – Loadings for buildings – Part 2: Code
of Practice for Wind Loads.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Although the method of determining wind pressure, known as velocity pressure, has
changed, the simplified method now recommended has adopted many of the philosophies of
the earlier methods. Additional information, specific to falsework, regarding wind on soffit
formwork and on parapets and edge forms erected on falsework, is included in this code.
Experience has shown that an upper limit to the total wind force on certain unclad falsework
structures, first introduced in BS 5975:1982, is still appropriate and has been retained.
The simplified method given in this standard applies to:
a) falsework structures erected less than 100 m high in areas with no significant
topography;
b) falsework structures erected less than 50 m high in areas of significant topography
(see BS 5975:2019 -Clause 17.5.1.5).
The derivation of the simplified methods given in BS 5975:2019 and information regarding
the use of the standard method from NA to BS EN 1991‑1‑4:2005+A1 is given in BS
5975:2019 Annex L.
The simplified wind methods assume that:
a) the falsework is in the UK.
b) the maximum height above surrounding ground level to the top of the falsework is
less than 100 m (to suit falsework erected on tall buildings).
c) the falsework is erected for less than two years.
d) falsework is not erected near to large neighbouring structures that are twice the
height of the surrounding structures. BS EN 1991‑1‑4:2005+A1, A.4 gives guidance
on neighbouring structures.
e) the falsework is not erected between closely spaced buildings.
f) the falsework and/or supporting structure is not considered a “dynamic structure”.
Where the above parameters are not met, reference should be made to BS 5975:2019
Annex L and BS EN 1991‑1‑4:2005+A1.

Ronan O’Driscoll
16.2 Peak Velocity Pressure for Falsework - qp
The peak velocity pressure is given by:
qp = (0.613) x (c2prob) x (Ce(z)Ce,T) x (S2wind)
Where :-
qp Is the peak velocity pressure (N/m2)
cprob Is the probability factor (See BS 5975:2019 Annex L)
ce(z)ce,T Is the combined exposure factor (See BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.6)
Swind Is the wind factor (see BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.3)
16.3 Wind Factor - Swind
𝐴𝐴
Swind = (Twind) x (vb,map) x (1 + (
1000
))
Where: -
Swind Is the Wind Factor
Twind Is the Topography Factor (from BS 5975:2019 Figure 9 – Clause
17.5.1.5)
Vb,map Is the UK Fundamental Wind Velocity (from BS 5975:2019 Figure 8 –
Clause 17.5.1.4)
A Is the altitude of the site in metres above sea level
16.4 Probability Factor - cprob

The basic wind speed vb,map is defined as having a mean recurrence interval of 50 years. As
Construction Engineering are generally erected for periods substantially less than 50 years,
it is appropriate to take the reduced risk for shorter duration exposure into account.
The BS EN 1991‑1‑4:2005+A1 uses the probability factor cprob to reduce the site wind
velocity. The probability equation in BS EN 1991‑1‑4:2005+A1, 4.2 is understood to give
identical values to that published previously in BS 6399‑2:1997, Annex D.1, giving:
cprob = 0.75 for Q = 0.632, the annual maximum wind;
cprob = 0.85 for Q = 0.227, the likely serviceability limit state design;
cprob = 1.00 for Q = 0.02, for the likely recurrence of 50 years.
In the code for falsework, BS EN 12812:2008, 8.2.4.1 the velocity pressure may be modified
taking the period of use into account.
The recommendation for falsework erected for less than two years is to use a minimum
value of cprob = 0.83. As the factor cprob is applied to the velocity, which is then squared to

Ronan O’Driscoll
obtain the pressure, the effect of probability factor cprob on the pressure is equivalent to
introducing a 0.7 factor on the pressure as cprob2 = 0.832 = 0.7.
Users of earlier versions of BS 5975 should be aware that the velocity pressure reduction
factor of 0.7 for falsework has been replaced in BS EN 12812:2008 by taking the period of
use into account.
It is noted that when designing façade retention structures, CIRIA Publication C579
recommends cprob = 1.00, and the 0.7 reduction factor is not applied.
Using a probability of less than two years so that Cprob2 = 0.7, the Peak Velocity Pressure for
Falsework formula becomes: -
qp = (0.613) x (0.7) x (Ce(z)Ce,T) x (S2wind)
16.5 2022 Update to Probability Factor - cprob

In June of 2022 the Temporary Works Forum provided a Technical Note by P. F. Pallett –
Wind Calculations for Falsework, regarding BS 5975 :2019 Clause 17.5.1.3 – Peak Wind
Velocity Pressure.
Looking at the previous formula above it is now recommended to use the following instead :-
This is due to BS EN 1991-1-6:2005 Table 3.1 giving the probability factor as follows:-
cprob = 0.90 for falsework structures likely to be erected for less than one year, based
on a ten-year return period
cprob2 = 0.902 = 0.81
BS EN 1991-1-6:2005 – Table 1 is as follows: -
It is also recommended that unless it can be assured that a hoarding will be erected for less
than one year, all hoardings are designed with cprob = 1.00.

Ronan O’Driscoll
16.6 The Fundamental Basic Wind Velocity – Vb.map
The fundamental basic wind velocity vb,map is the UK fundamental basic wind velocity (m/s)
as an hourly mean wind speed at 10 m above ground in open country with low vegetation.
The probability is taken as corresponding to a mean recurrence of 50 years which equates to
an annual design risk of 0.02. Values for vb,map in m/s should be selected from BS 5975:2019
Figure 8.
16.7 Wind Force – Unclad Falsework – Fw,max

The maximum wind force exerted by the wind on a component of a falsework structure is
given by:
Fw,max = Cs Cd Cf qp (z) Aref (𝜂𝜂 )
Where:
Fw,max Is the wind force on the structure in N
Cs Cd Is the product of a size factor, Cs and a dynamic factor, Cd (See BS
5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.11)
Cf Is force coefficient (see BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.12)
qp (z) Is the peak velocity pressure in N/mm2 (see BS 5975:2019 Clause
17.5.1.3)
Aref Is the reference area on which the wind acts in m2 (see BS 5975:2019
Clause 17.5.1.13)
𝜂𝜂 Is the shielding factor (see BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.14 and Annex

M)
16.8 Wind Force – Soffit Formwork

To calculate wind forces on soffit formwork, refer to BS 5975: 2019 Clause 17.5.1.15.2.
Regarding uplift wind loading to soffit formwork there is further guidance in BS 5975: 2019
Clause 17.5.1.15.3.
16.9 Wind Force – Edge Formwork

To calculate wind forces on edge formwork, refer to BS 5975: 2019 Clause 17.5.1.15.4 and
5.

Ronan O’Driscoll
16.10 Wind Force – Clad Falsework – 𝑸𝑸 5
The maximum wind force exerted by the wind on falsework that has debris netting or
sheeting attached is given by:
𝑄𝑄 5 = qp (Cpe) Aref
Where:
𝑄𝑄 5 Is total wind force on the structure in N
qp Is the peak velocity pressure in N/mm2 (see BS 5975:2019 Clause

17.5.1.3)
Clause 17.5.1.18)
Cpe Is the net pressure coefficient for the shape of the structure (see BS
5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.18)
16.11 Wind Force – Working Wind

BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.19 refers to working wind as follows:-
A maximum working wind force during operations is assessed as the maximum velocity
pressure during which working operations can take place and is normally limited to that of a
wind force, on the Beaufort Scale, of Force 6. This corresponds to a design velocity pressure
of 18 m/s and gives a working velocity pressure qw equal to 200 N/m2. The values of force
coefficient, site coefficients, shielding factors and effective frontal area are the same as used
for evaluation of the maximum wind condition.
BS EN 12812:2008, 8.2.4.2 states the working velocity pressure of 200 N/m2.
From this the Working Wind Force on Unclad Falsework is given by:-
Fw,work = Cs Cd Cf qw (z) Aref (𝜂𝜂 )
Where:
Fw,work Is the working wind force on the structure in N
Cs Cd Is the product of a size factor, Cs and a dynamic factor, Cd (See BS
5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.11)
Cf Is force coefficient (see BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.12)
qw Is the working velocity pressure of 200 N/m2 (see BS 5975:2019
Clause 17.5.1.19)
Clause 17.5.1.13)
𝜂𝜂 Is the shielding factor (see BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.14 and Annex

M)

Ronan O’Driscoll
From this the Working Wind Force on Clad Falsework is given by:-
𝑄𝑄 5 = 200 (Cpe) Aref
Where:
𝑄𝑄 5 Is total working wind force on the structure in N
Clause 17.5.1.18)
Cpe Is the net pressure coefficient for the shape of the structure (see BS
5975:2019 Clause 17.5.1.18)
16.12 Reference to BS 6399-2

The wind loading information derived in the recent wind design codes and in BS 5975:2019
can be clearly traced back to BS 6399-2:1997 – Loading for Buildings – Part 2: Code of
Practice for Wind Loads.
The reader can find some very useful information in this document that is still very relevant
with diagrams and explanations that may assist the understanding of wind loading.
Windward and leeward wind loading, external and internal wind pressures, dominant
openings, wind friction, roof suction loading, etc. by just looking at the standard method not
the directional method can be better understood from some of the descriptions and diagrams
present.
There are also diagrams of a variety of different structure types and the resulting wind zones
being loaded. It is noted for most general global structural calculations the Zone C loading is
taken across roofs and walls and the localised increased pressures are considered when
looking at specific details or elements in those zones. The zones are also considered in
more detail when looking at cladding designs, etc.
If the reader would like more practical explanation of wind loading and examples the
following document is a good reference: - SCI Publication P286 – Guide to Evaluating
Design Wind Loads to BS 6399-2:1997.

Ronan O’Driscoll
16.13 BASIC WIND LOADING EXAMPLE
As stated in BS 5975 : 2019 Clause 17.5.1.2 the following information is supplied by the
Construction Engineer to calculate wind loading:-
a) Location of site – Inverness – Site in the Country and adjacent to the sea ≤ 0.1 km
b) Topography of site, considered in all directions - Steep Terrain, average slope >1:3,
located at crest of slope
c) Altitude of the site (in meters above sea level) – Assumed 20m altitude with no
surrounding general buildings
d) Duration of the falsework operations and use – 2 years or less
e) General arrangement of the structure – As shown in Figure 21. Formwork to
construct a wall 10m long, 4m high and 0.5m wide.

Ronan O’Driscoll
16.13.1 FIGURE 21 – Simple Formwork example for Basic Wind Loading
to BS 5975 (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)
𝐴𝐴
Swind = (Twind) x (vb,map) x (1 + (
1000
))
Twind BS 5975:2019 Figure 9 = 1.26
Vb,map BS 5975:2019 Figure 8 = 27 m/s
A 20 m
20
Swind = (1.26) x (27) x (1 + (
1000
) ) = 34.7
Ce(z)Ce,T BS 5975 :2019 – Table 16 = 2.31

Ronan O’Driscoll
qp = (0.613) x (0.81) x (2.31) x (34.72) = 1,381 N/mm2
𝑄𝑄 5 = qp (Cpe) Aref
Cpe BS 5975:2019 – Clause 17.5.1.18 = 1.20

Aref 4.5 m X 10 m = 45 m2
𝑄𝑄 5 = 1,381 (1.20) 45 = 74,574 N = 74.574 kN
This is the total wind load over the whole area of the formwork (4.5 m X 10 m).
If we consider the formwork will be erected in frame sections and have raking braces to take
the wind loading along the 10m length, then we would need to consider the wind loading to
the bracing considering the distance between the braces.
From this we may consider the wind load per meter length of formwork which would equal –
74.574 kN / 10 m = 7.46 kN / meter length
Working Wind = 𝑄𝑄 5 = 200 (Cpe) Aref = 200 (1.20) 45 = 10,800 N = 10.8 kN

Ronan O’Driscoll
17 Notional Horizontal Loading
BS 5975: 2019 Clause 19.2.9 refers to notional horizontal loading for minimum lateral
stability at each phase of construction. The applied vertical load is referred to as W and the
horizontal disturbing force is referred to as FH.
The disturbing force FH is to be the great of the following two options: -
a) 2.5% of the applied vertical load (i.e., 2.5% W) considered acting at the points of
contact between the vertical loads and supporting falsework
b) The forces that result form the erection tolerances (normally taken as 1% of the
applied vertical load (i.e., 1% W) plus the sum of the imposed loads, including wind,
out of vertical by design, concrete pressures, water and waves, dynamic and impact
forces and the forces generated by the permanent works.
Node point stability is also referred to in BS 5975:2019 where bracing can be used to reduce
effective lengths of members and resist internal notional forces denoted by NH. The vales
used for NH is 2.5% of the vertical load in the strut.
Both BS 5950-1:2000 – Structural use of Steelwork in Building – Part 1: Code of practice for
design rolled and welded section and BS 449-2:1969 – Specification for the use of Structural
Steel in Building – Part 2 – Metric Units refers to a similar 2.5% notional horizontal loading
for elements being designed.
In addition, for global stability of a structure, BS 5950 Clause 2.4.2.3 notes horizontal wind
loading should not be taken a less than 1.0% of the factored dead load applied horizontally.
Clause 2.4.2.4 refers to a minimum 0.5% of the factored vertical dead loads and imposed
loads applied horizontally. BS 449 reflects the same guidance as BS 5950 using these
values for the design global stability of structures.

Ronan O’Driscoll
18 Concrete Pressures
BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.4.2 states the following: -
• The forces exerted by concrete should be calculated using either the method set out
in CIRIA R108 or an estimate of the concrete pressure (expressed in kN/m2) may be
used conservatively on 25 times the depth of the pour (in m). The latter method
should be used where the concrete will apply a full hydrostatic had to the formwork
as would be the case when using certain admixtures of self-compacting concrete.
BS 5975:2019 Clause 19.2.6 states the following: -
• The pressures of fresh concrete on formwork should be calculated as described in

17.4.2. The fresh concrete applies modified hydrostatic pressures acting normally to
the face of the formwork. Consideration should be given to the out of balance
horizontal forces, for example casting against an existing structure or previous pour
or single-sided formwork. Where any of the formwork surfaces are supported by
falsework, the pressures on the formwork may be transmitted to that falsework. The
vertical load will be the self-weight of the concrete that has to be borne by the
supporting falsework. The horizontal forces on the opposing formwork surfaces may
be resisted within the formwork system by tying opposite faces together. Where the
opposite faces are not adequately tied together, the lateral forces will be transferred
either to the falsework or through the soffit formwork acting as a plate, see 19.3.2.4.
It is important that individual formwork panels forming the soffit are also adequately
restrained against separation by horizontal forces.
Where the soffit is not level, the concept is more complex and is discussed in Annex
H.
Referring to CIRIA Report R108 – Concrete Pressure on Formwork, the maximum concrete
pressure on Formwork = Pmax.
Pmax = D (C1 √𝑅𝑅 + C2 K �𝐻𝐻 − 𝐶𝐶1 √𝑅𝑅) or Dh kN/m2 whichever is the smaller
Where:-
C1 Coefficient dependent on the size and shape of formwork (see CIRIA Report
R108 – Table 1 for values), √𝑚𝑚h
C2 Coefficient dependent on the constituent materials of the concrete (see CIRIA
Report R108 – Table 1 for values), √𝑚𝑚
D Weight density of concrete, kN/m3
H Vertical form height, m
h Vertical pour height, m
36 2
K Temperature coefficient taken as � �
𝑇𝑇+16
R The rate at which the concrete rises vertically up the form, m/h
T Concrete temperature at placing, oC

Ronan O’Driscoll
When C1√𝑅𝑅 > H, the fluid pressure (Dh) should be taken as the design pressure.
The effects of vibration and workability are incorporated in the term:
C1√𝑅𝑅
The effects of the height of discharge, cement type, admixtures and concrete temperature at
placing are incorporated in the term:
C2 K �𝐻𝐻 − 𝐶𝐶1 √𝑅𝑅
18.1.1 FIGURE 22 – Concrete Design Pressure Envelope for Formwork
18.2 Coefficient Dependent on Size & Shape – C1

Walls: C1 = 1.0
Columns: C1 = 1.5
Walls sections are assumed where the plan dimensions of the width or the breadth are
exceeding 2m.
Columns sections are assumed where the plan dimensions of the width and the breadth are
2m or less.

Ronan O’Driscoll
18.3 Coefficient Dependent on Constituent Materials of the Concrete
– C2
For reference with the values taken from CIRIA R108 below please note: -
• OPC Ordinary Portland Cement

• RHPC Rapid Hardening Portland Cement
• SRPC Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement
• LHPBFC Low Heat Portland Blast Furnace Cement
• PBFC Portland Blast Furnace Cement
• PPFAC Portland Pulverised Fuel Ash Cement
• GGBFS Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag
• PFA Pulverised Fuel Ash
18.3.1 TABLE 3 – Values of Coefficient C2 (Refer to CIRIA R108 Table

1)
Concrete Value of C2
OPC, RHPC or SRPC without admixtures 0.3
OPC, RHPC or SRPC with any admixture, except a retarder 0.3
OPC, RHPC or SRPC with a retarder 0.45
LHPBFC, PBFC, PPFAC or blends containing less than 70% GGBFS or 40% 0.45
PFA without admixtures
PFA with any admixtures, except a retarder
PFA with a retarder
Blends containing more than 70% GGBFS or 40% PFA 0.6

Ronan O’Driscoll
18.3.2 TABLE 4 – Updated Values of Coefficient C2 (Refer to CS30 –
Formwork – A Guide to Good Practice -3rd Edition – Concrete
Society - Table 23)
18.4 Density of Concrete - D

BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.2 states the standard density value for reinforced concrete is 2,500
kg/m3 = 25 kN/m3.
For further guidance refer to BS 5975:2019 Annex D.4 which states the following: -
If the quality of steel by volume exceeds 2% and the aggregates are of normal density, the
density should be taken as given in the Table below. Values in this table are based on a
density of unreinforced concrete of 2,400 kg/m3 = 24 kN/m3.
18.4.1 TABLE 5 – Values for Density of Reinforced Concrete (Refer to

BS 5975:2019 – Table D.2)
Steel Quantity (by Volume) Density
% kg/m3 kN/m3
3 2,550 25.5
4 2,610 26.1
5 2,660 26.6
6 2,720 27.2
Ronan O’Driscoll
18.4.2 TABLE 6 – Values for Density of lightweight Reinforced Concrete
(Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table D.3)
Concrete Type Density Range (without reinforcement)

kg/m3 kN/m3
No-fines, with normal density aggregates 1,600 to 2,000 16 to 20
Lightweight coarse aggregate and normal 1,600 to 2,000 16 to 20
density fine aggregate
Lightweight coarse and fine aggregates 1,575 to 1,800 15.75 to 18.00
18.5 Vertical Form Height - H

Refer to CIRIA R108 which states: -
The vertical form height is important for two reasons:
1. It limits the potential maximum pressure which can develop (in general, the maximum
design pressure is not greater than Dh)
2. Height of discharge affects the magnitude of the impact forces.
Both these factors affect the maximum formwork pressure, and they have been incorporated
in the design equation as a function of the form height.
Sometimes, the form can be substantially higher than the height of section case (see the
Figure below). In these cases, the limiting pressure might be the fluid pressure (which is
obtained from the weight density times the actual pour height). This should be checked with
a separate calculation.
18.5.1 FIGURE 23 – Height value to be used in formulae for both H and

h

Ronan O’Driscoll
18.6 Underwater Concreting
CIRIA R108 Clause 2.17 states the following: -
When formwork is designed for use underwater, the buoyant weight density (Density of
Concrete – Density of Water = 25- 9.81 = 15 kN/m3) is normally used to calculate the
effective formwork pressure. For fully-0submerged sections, the formwork pressure can be
calculated using either
1. The design equation for Pmax with D = 15 kN/m3
or
2. 0.6 times the value obtained from Table 2 of CIRIA R108
The procedures assume that the static water pressure is equal on both sides of the
formwork, and that it does not result in stress in the formwork. This is a reasonable basis of
design when the water level is not changing, but it can underestimate the pressures where
there is a rapid drop in water level during concreting. This latter situation is analogous to an
earth dam project subjected to “rapid drawdown”. A change in water level produces an
instantaneous change in pressure on the outside of a form, but a much slower change in the
water pressure within the concrete, because that depends upon the permeability and
hydraulic gradient within the concrete. When the water level is falling rapidly, this effect can
result in the horizontal pressure exceeding the vertical pressure. On the other hand, a rising
water level reduces the formwork pressure. In these circumstances, the formwork should be
designed to rest the effective formwork pressure plus a surcharge proportional to the
maximum tidal fall.

Ronan O’Driscoll
18.7 BASIC CONCRETE PRESSURE EXAMPLE
Wall section 10m long, 4m high and 0.5m thick

Formwork height 4.5m
Concrete OPC normal weight concrete
Concrete Temperature at placing 10oC
Rate of placement 24 m3 / hour
18.7.1 FIGURE 24 – Simple Formwork example for Basic Concrete

Pressure Loading to BS 5975 (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)
Pmax = D (C1 √𝑅𝑅 + C2 K �𝐻𝐻 − 𝐶𝐶1 √𝑅𝑅) or Dh kN/m2 whichever is the smaller
C1 1
C2 0.3

Ronan O’Driscoll
D 25 kN/m3
H 4.5 m
h 4m
36 2
K Temperature coefficient taken as � � = 1.917
10+16
24
R The rate at which the concrete rises vertically up the form,� � = 4.8 m/h
10+0.5
T 10 oC
Pmax = 25 (1 √4.8 + 0.3 (1.917) �4.5 − 1√4.8) = 76.62 kN/m2
Dh = 25 (4) = 100 kN/m2

The lesser load is 76.62 kN/m2 and this load can be taken to calculate the load on the
formwork considering the spacing in meters between walers (horizontal load bearing
members) and soldiers (vertical load bearing members) to equate a load in kN.
To take the load from the wet concrete acting on the formwork using an extremely
conservative value and assuming the pressure is triangular with the total load acting
horizontally at 1/3 the height we can use the following basic assumptions: -
Lateral Pressure = Density (p) X Gravity (g) X Depth of Fluid (h) = p X g X h = 𝛾𝛾 X h
Concrete Density (in kg/m3) X Gravity (g) = 𝛾𝛾 = 2,500 kg/m3 X 10 m/s2 (rounded for
conservatism) = 25 kN/m3
Lateral Pressure = 𝛾𝛾 X h = 25 X 4 = 100 kN/m2 (Which is the same as CIRIA R108 – Dh)
If the pressure is triangular, the bottom of the triangle (base) = 𝛾𝛾 X h = 100 kN/m2
Area of a Triangle = ½ (Base) X Height = ½ (𝛾𝛾 X h) X h = ½ (𝛾𝛾 X h2)
The total horizontal pressure will act at 1/3 the height of the pour and this is conservative
assuming full fluid head
Using 𝛾𝛾 = 25 kN/m3
Total pressure of the Triangle= ½ (Base) X Height = ½ (𝛾𝛾 X h) X h = ½ (25 X h2) = 12.5 X h2
For our 4m high (h) pour this equates to a total and extremely conservative pressure acting
along the wall at 1/3 the height of the pour = 200 kN/m
This is a very conservative value as can be seen and maybe useful for some very early
rough estimates or quick on site calcuations to ensure loads are suitably controlled.

Ronan O’Driscoll
19 Earth Pressures
For Earth Pressures refer to BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.5 which also references BS
8002:2015 Code of practice for earth retaining structures and CIRIA SP95 – The design and
construction of sheet-piled cofferdams.
BS 5975:2019 states: -
The minimum active soil loading should not be less than that caused by a fluid having a
density of 480 kg/m3.
Where the soil is totally submerged, the soil pressure should be based on the submerged
density together with full hydrostatic pressure. In general, values for the angle of internal
friction, 𝜑𝜑 , do not alter significantly for the submerged condition.
Values for cohesion c and internal friction 𝜑𝜑, should be used which are Moderately
Conservative (MC) as defined in BS 8002. This is a value approximately 10% to 20% lower
than the most probable value, depending on the reliability of the soil data available. The MC
values of c and 𝜑𝜑 , should be divided by a factor when calculating the soil pressures and
strengths.
This factor FS is defined as the partial safety factor and given values as follows: -
Effective conditions, i.e., all situations of pure granular soils and when cohesive or
mixed soils will be drained (e.g. excavated and open for some time)
FS = 1.2
Total conditions, e.g., undrained mixed and cohesive soils

FS = 1.5
For all situations other than those which are very simple, the advice of an experienced
geotechnical engineer is essential.
For some geotechnical reference information refer to: -
• Fiona Cobb – Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004

o Pages 96 to 91 (inclusive) – regarding typical soil properties
o Pages 107 to 108 (inclusive) – regarding retaining walls and hence lateral
pressures from soils

Ronan O’Driscoll
19.1.1 FIGURE 25 – Simplistic View of Free earth support walls
(horizontal prop at point O)
19.2 Cohesive Soils

Referring to BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.5.2
Where cohesive properties are relied upon for stability and strength, due car should be taken
in the choice of parameters due to changes in soil properties over time. Further guidance is
given in CIRIA SP 95.
a) Active Soil Pressure. The active soil pressure, pa (in N/m2) is given by the
expression:
2𝐶𝐶
Pa = 9.81 𝛾𝛾 h - ( )
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
Where:
9.81 m/s2 is the acceleration due to gravity or force due to gravity

𝛾𝛾 is the soil density (in kg/m3)
h is the depth below ground level (in m)
c is the Moderately Conservative undrained shear strength (in N/m2)
Fs is the partial soil factor
Often, the calculated active soil pressure will be negative, and the minimum
equivalent fluid pressure will apply using 480 kg/m3.
It is to be noted that further guidance can be found in CIRIA – Guidance on

Embedded Retaining Wall Design – C760 – Section 5.11 – Temporary Works
Design.
b) Passive Soil Pressure. The passive soil pressure, pp (in N/m2) is given by the
expression:
2𝐶𝐶
Pp = 9.81 𝛾𝛾 h - ( )
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠

Ronan O’Driscoll
Where:
9.81 m/s2 is the acceleration due to gravity or force due to gravity

c is the Moderately Conservative undrained shear strength (in N/m2)
c) Soil density. The soil density γ can vary from 1,600 kg/m3 to 2,240 kg/m3 for the
normal condition, and from 640 kg/m3 to 1,280 kg/m3 for the submerged condition.
d) Undrained shear strength. The MC value for the undrained shear strength c should
be used. Values of c are normally between 5 kN/m2 and 75 kN/m2 for the depth range
0 m to 6 m.
1) For normally consolidated cohesive soils, i.e. recent and alluvial deposits, c
should be based on the average undrained shear strength test results for the
depth in question, but biased towards the low values. Values for c will
generally range from 5 kN/m2 to 40 kN/m2 diminishing with depth, the higher
values being associated with the desiccated crust.
2) For over-consolidated cohesive soils, i.e. deposits that have been subjected
to loads in excess of those due to the present over-burden, c should be based
on the undrained shear strength test results, but allowance should be made
for:
i. duration of loading and unloading;
ii. drainage and ground water conditions;
iii. softening effects;
and, in general, very much reduced values for c should be used, probably of the
order of half the average indicated cohesion for the depth being considered. Values
for c will generally vary from 15 kN/m2 to 75 kN/m2.
19.3 Cohesionless Soils

a) Active Soil Pressure. The active soil pressure, pa (in N/m2) is given by the
expression:
Pa = 9.81 Ka 𝛾𝛾 h
Where:
Ka is the active pressure coefficient, and for normal conditions is given by the
expressions:
𝜑𝜑
1−sin
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
Ka = 𝜑𝜑
1+sin
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠

Ronan O’Driscoll
Ka ≤ 0.33
𝜑𝜑 is Moderately Conservative angle of internal friction (in degrees)

b) Passive soil resistance. The passive soil resistance, pp (in N/m2), is given by the
expression:
PP = 9.81 Kp 𝛾𝛾 h
Where Kp is the passive soil resistance coefficient, and for normal conditions is given
by the expressions:
𝜑𝜑
1+sin
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
Kp = 𝜑𝜑
1−sin
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
𝜑𝜑 is the Moderately Conservative angle of internal friction (in degrees)
h is the depth below ground level (in m).
c) Soil density. The soil density 𝛾𝛾, may vary from 1400 kg / m3 to 2100 kg / m3 for the
normal condition, and from 1000 kg /m3 to 1300 kg / m3 for the submerged condition
d) Angle of internal friction. The angle of internal friction 𝜑𝜑, may vary from 30o for loose
material to 45o for dense material. The Moderately Conservative values should be
used.

Ronan O’Driscoll
19.4 Mixed Soils
For soils containing both granular and cohesive material extreme care is required in
assessing soil parameters.
a) Active soil pressure. The active soil pressure pa (in N/m2) is given by the expression:
2𝐶𝐶
pa= 9.81 Ka 𝛾𝛾 h - �𝑘𝑘𝑎𝑎
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
Where Ka, 𝛾𝛾, h, Fs and c are as defined previously.
b) Passive Soil resistance. The passive soil resistance pp (in N/m2) is given by the
expression:
2𝐶𝐶
Pp = 9.81 Kp 𝛾𝛾 h + �𝑘𝑘𝑃𝑃
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
Where Kp, 𝛾𝛾, h, Fs and c are as defined previously.
19.5 Surcharge loading

Referring CIRIA SP95 – The design and construction of sheet-piled cofferdams – Section
4.2 states: -
A minimum uniform surcharge of 10 kN/m2 should be used to allow for plant up to 30 tonne
loaded weight. This can be increased to 20 kN/m2 for plant up to 60 tonne loaded weight.
A surcharge of 15 kN/m2 allows for general site traffic and plant up to 45 tonne working near
the excavation.
A surcharge of 30 kN/m2 allows for London Underground and other light rail systems – RL
Loading.
A surcharge of 50 kN/m2 allows for “Rail Universal” used for all standard UK railways - RU
Loading.
It is recommended any heavy plant is set back at least 1.0 m from the excavation to avoid
excessive localised surcharges.
CIRIA SP95 Section 4.2.5 gives guidance on lateral pressure due to loads other than
uniform surcharge.
The Piling Edition – 9th Edition – Arcelor Mittal, Section 4.9.11 to 4.9.15 gives guidance on
lateral pressure due to loads other than uniform surcharge.

Ronan O’Driscoll
19.6 BASIC EARTH PRESSURE EXAMPLE
What follows is a very basic example of a possible solution to calculate loads for the
selection of a manhole box in a homogenous backfilled material.
For the reader to see examples of manhole boxes, trench boxes, sheets and frames etc.
please refer to the websites of the three main ground support suppliers in the UK which
currently are Groundforce, MGF and Mabey Hire.
The author would recommend the reader to reference the Arcelor Mittal Piling Handbook –
9th Edition for some very useful information and examples. There is an Earth Pressure
Calculation example in this document in Section 4.10 which shows active and passive
pressure calculations along with water pressure. The example is for an embedded sheet
piled wall.
The author would also recommend the reader to reference the Arcelor Mittal Piling
Handbook – 8th Edition for some very useful information and examples. There is an Earth
Pressure Calculation example in this document in Section 4.16 which shows active and
passive pressure calculations and maybe easier for the reader to understand than the
example in the 9th edition of this publication.
It is to be noted that for this example the active soil pressure is considered, and the passive
soil pressure is not considered. As the soil will not be utilised to provide any additional
ground support i.e. the manhole box does not penetrate into the ground, then there is not
utilisation of passive pressure from the soil.
19.6.1 FIGURE 26 – Simplistic Earth Pressure Example Showing a

Proprietary Manhole Box (Supplied from MGF’s Website)

Ronan O’Driscoll
Excavation Depth 5.2m Below Ground Level (B.G.L.)
(Maximum)
Groundwater No groundwater encountered in the
excavation
Duration of Excavation Less than 12 weeks
Excavation Plan Dimensions 4.0m X 4.0m (External)
3.63m X 3.78m (Internal)
Surcharge Loading 15 kN/m2
Ground Material Graded Fill from 0m to 7m (B.G.L.)
Soil Density = 1,800 kg/m3
Angle of Internal Friction 30o
Active Soil Pressure. The active soil pressure, pa (in N/m2) is given by the expression:
Pa = 9.81 Ka 𝛾𝛾 h
Where:
Ka is the active pressure coefficient, and for normal conditions is given by the expressions:
𝜑𝜑
1−sin
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
Ka = 𝜑𝜑
1+sin
𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠
Ka ≤ 0.33
𝜑𝜑 is Moderately Conservative angle of internal friction (in degrees)

= 30o X 0.9 = 27o
Fs is the partial soil factor = 1.5
𝛾𝛾 is the soil density (in kg/m3) = 1,800 kg/m3
h is the depth below ground level (in m) = 5.2 m (Maximum)

Ronan O’Driscoll
27
1−sin
1.5
Ka = 27 =0.528 > 0.33
1+sin
1.5
Therefore:- Ka = 0.33
Pa (at 5.2m B.G.L.) = 9.81 (0.33) (1,800) (5.2) = 30.301.128 N/m2 = 30.3 kN/m2
Conservatively and simplistically adding the surcharge as a uniform load for the total depth
Pressure = 9.81 Ka 𝛾𝛾 h
Where (at 5.2m) :-

9.81 𝛾𝛾 h = (9.81) 1,800 (5.2) = 91,821.6 N/m2 = 91.82 kN/m2 = Soil overburden pressure
From this the Pressure including Surcharge (at 5.2m B.G.L.) = Ka (91.82 kN/m2 + 15 kN/m2)
= 35.25 kN/m2
Note that: - Lateral Pressure = Gravity (g) X Density (p) X Depth (h) = g X p X h = 9.81 𝛾𝛾 h
From this the Pressure including Surcharge (at 0.0m B.G.L.) = Ka (15 kN/m2) = 4.95 kN/m2
Graph of Earth Pressure with depth

0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
4.95
6.12
7.28
8.45
9.61
10.78
11.94
13.11
14.27
15.44
16.60
17.77
18.94
20.10
21.27
22.43
23.60
24.76
25.93
27.09
28.26
29.42
30.59
31.75
32.92
34.09
35.25
From this loading and using manufacturers capacity tables a suitable manhole box can be
selected. The horizontal strut axial loads can be calculated once depths and centre spacings
are known and these values can be checked against the manufacturers capacity tables to
ensure strut capacity is not exceeded.
Ronan O’Driscoll
20 Water Pressures
BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.2 and Annex E provides guidance on forces produced by flowing
water and this information is repeated here.
As far as possible, falsework should be founded in the dry.
Where it is necessary for falsework supports to be placed in flowing water, the effect of the
forces caused by the flow should be considered.
The dynamic pressure of flowing water, qw (in N/m2), is derived from Bernoulli’s equation and
is given by the expression:
qw = 500 𝑉𝑉𝑤𝑤2
Where:
Vw is the speed of water flow (in m/s)
The force due to the water flowing around falsework members, Fw (in N), is given by the
expression:
Fw = qw Cw Aw
Where:
Cw is the force coefficient for water appropriate to the falsework members under
consideration
Aw is the effective area normal to the flow (in m2)
The following are some values of Cw:-
• 1.86, for flat surfaces normal to flow

• 0.63, for cylindrical surfaces
• 0.03, for well streamed surfaces
It is to be noted that a river flow of 3 m/s is described as moderately rapid.
Where there are successive rows of falsework members exposed to flowing water there is
the possibility of some shielding protection and BS 5975:2019 Clause 17.5.2.2 gives some
guidance on this.
The accumulation of debris will produce force on the falsework that may be calculated as for
that on a rectangular cofferdam. This force, Fd (in N), is given by the expression:
Fd = 666 Ad 𝑉𝑉𝑤𝑤2
Where:
Ad is the area of obstruction presented by the trapped debris and falsework (in
m2)
Vw is the speed of the water flow (in m/s)
This effect will be dependent upon the rate of flow, the amount and nature of the floating
debris, the nature of the obstruction and the depth of the water.

Ronan O’Driscoll
20.1 Wave Forces
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Annex E.
There are three main sources of waves:
a) Wind generated waves
b) Oscillations set up by moving objects, e.g. passing boats
c) Tidal surges or bores in certain estuaries
The analysis of wave forces depends on the types of wave at the structure.
There are three distinct types of waves
1) Non-breaking waves
2) Breaking waves
3) Broken waves
Breaking waves will result in higher dynamic loads being applied to the falsework than from
non‑breaking or broken waves. Generally, non-breaking wave conditions will prevail when
the wave height at a wall is less than 1.7 times the still water depth at the wall.
The location of certain structures, e.g., protective structures, will be such that waves will
break before striking them. The forces are complex, and no formulae have been developed
in detail.
The guide in Annex E of BS 5975:2019 is based on vertical walls in front of waves but it is
recommended that wherever possible the advice of an Engineer experienced in marine work
should be obtained, and preferably that protective measures are installed to prevent waves
breaking on to the falsework or formwork.

Ronan O’Driscoll
20.1.1 FIGURE 27 – Non-Breaking Waves – Section Diagram (From BS
5975: 2019)
Generally, where the incident wave height at a wall is less than 1.7 times the still water depth
at the wall, the wave may be assumed to be non-breaking and to form a clapotis or standing
wave.
The forces are essentially hydrostatic but the wave is larger near to the wall owing to the
rebound phenomenon or clapotis being formed. The clapotis pressure, p1 adds to or reduces
the still water hydrostatic pressure (see Figure 27).
pc (in kN/m2), the maximum water pressure at level C, has a pressure diagram of triangular
shape ABC (see Figure 27) and is given by the expression:
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
𝜌𝜌𝑐𝑐 = 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 +
2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
cosh �
𝐿𝐿 �
Where:
w Is the force applied per unit volume of water, i.e., 9.81 kN/m3
d Is the still water depth (in m)
H Is the wave height of the original free wave (in m)
L Is the wavelength (in m)
Ronan O’Driscoll
21 Snow Loading
Refer to BS 5975: 2019 Clause 17.5.3 and 17.5.4 which is repeated here. Also refer to BRE
Digest 439 – Roof loads due to local drifting of snow.
Depending upon seasonal, geographic and construction factors, snow can accumulate and
form into drifts on the permanent and temporary works causing additional loading. Only in
exceptional cases will this loading exceed the allowance of 0.75 kN/m2 recommended in BS
5975:2019-Clause17.4.3.1 and is therefore unlikely to present a problem in areas supporting
permanent works, but ancillary areas should be checked.
The density of powder snow is approximately 80 kg/m3. For further information on snow
loads see BS EN 1991‑3:2003.
For snow drift calculations the author would recommend the reader to reference BS 6399-3
– Loadings for Buildings – Part 3 – Code of Practice for Imposed Roof Loads. This British
Standard gives some very good and clear guidance for the calculations of snow drift loading
with diagrams, etc.
For Construction Engineering it is not foreseen that snow drift loading would be considered
but there may be situations where roofs are being propped for extended periods and they
have large parapets or other obstructions that would allow snow to accumulate and in this
situation snow drift loading may need to be considered.

Ronan O’Driscoll
22 Ice Loading
In conditions of freezing rain or drizzle, melting snow, or fog or cloud at temperatures below
0 °C, ice can form on members, increasing their self-weight and effective frontal area to the
wind.
In considering the effect of ice formation on the design of members of the falsework, the
following should be considered:
a) the probability of appreciable ice formation is very small;
b) recorded ice formation in the UK relates to the months of November to March
inclusive for short durations.
c) the small likelihood of ice formations occurring when erection is at the most critical
stage (i.e. almost complete and awaiting its imposed loading);
d) no work will normally take place on falsework affected by the formation of ice of a
thickness of greater than 1 mm owing to the hazard this presents to the operatives
until such ice has been safely removed.
In the absence of more definite information, the following design criteria should be adopted:
1) maximum ice density is 920 kg/m3;
2) maximum ice thickness surrounding members is unlikely to exceed 25 mm;
3) maximum gust speed to be used, where ice has formed, as the basic wind speed for
design purposes, should be taken as 1.5 VH, where VH (in m/s) is the hourly mean
wind speed at height H (in m) and is given by the expressions:
𝐻𝐻 0⋅17
VH = 15 � �
10
VH ≤ 28
Where:
VH Is the hourly mean wind speed at reference height H (in m/s)
H Is the reference height (in m)

Ronan O’Driscoll
23 Vehicle Barrier Loading
Vehicle barrier loading is not a Construction Engineering item usually but there maybe
instances where a barrier is temporarily required during the construction process and what
follows is a useful guidance to calculate loads of barriers that may assist with a temporary
barrier design.
BS 6399-1: 1996 – Loadings for Buildings – Part 1: Code of practice for dead and imposed
loads, gives some guidance on horizontal loads for parapets, barriers and balustrades as
shown in Table 4 of that document.
Section 11 of BS 6399-1: 1996 gives a good reference for the calculation of the horizontal
force, normal to and uniformly distributed over any length of 1.5m of a barrier for a car park,
required to withstand the impact of a vehicle. Section 11 is repeated below.
This force is F (in kN) and is given by the expression: -
0⋅5𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 2
F=
𝛿𝛿𝑐𝑐 +𝛿𝛿𝑏𝑏
Where:
m is the gross mass of the vehicle (in kg)
v is the velocity of the vehicle (in m/s) normal to the barrier
𝛿𝛿𝑐𝑐 is the deformation of the vehicle (in mm)
𝛿𝛿𝑏𝑏 is the deflection of the barrier (in mm)
Where a car park has been designed on the basis that the gross mass of the vehicles using
it will not exceed 2,500 kg the following values are used to determine the force F:
m = 1,500 kg
v = 4.5 m/s (10 mph)
𝛿𝛿𝑐𝑐 = 100 mm unless better evidence is available
For a rigid barrier, for which 𝛿𝛿𝑏𝑏 may be taken as zero, the force F appropriate up to 2,500 kg
gross mass is taken as 150 kN.
Where a car park has been designed for vehicles whose gross mass exceeds 2,500 kg the
following values are used to determine the force F:
m = the actual mass of the vehicle for which the car park is designed (in
kg)
v = 4.5 m/s (10 mph)
𝛿𝛿𝑐𝑐 = 100 mm unless better evidence is available

Ronan O’Driscoll
24 Highway Bridge Live Loads
For loading to Highway Bridges structures in the UK please reference BS 5400-2:2006 –
Steel, Concrete and Composite Bridges – Part 2: Specification for Loads.
Taking the information from Section 6 of this document it is noted that standard highway live
loading consists of HA and HB loading.
HA loading is a formula loading representing normal traffic in Great Britain.
HB loading is an abnormal vehicle unit loading.
HA Loading consists of a uniformly distribute load (UDL) and a knife edge load (KEL)
combined, or a single wheel load. BS 5400-2:2006 – Table 13 provides values for the UDL
Loading. BS 5400-2:2006 – Clause 6.2.2 provides the KEL load as 120 kN.
The HA single nominal wheel load alternative to the combined UDL and KEL loading is given
in BS 5400-2:2006 – Clause 6.2.5 and has a value of one 100 kN wheel load acting over a
circular area of 340mm diameter or over a square area of 300mm X 300mm. The resulting
contact pressure is 1.1 N/mm2 = 1,100 kN/m2.
HB loading is considered in units with the normal considered number of units being 30 and
this may increase to 45. One unit shall be taken as equal to 10 kN per axle, assuming 4
wheels gives 2.5 kN per wheel.
HB loading like HA loading assumes a contact effective pressure of 1.1 N/mm2 acting over a
circular area of 340mm diameter or over a square area of 300mm X 300mm
For HA and HB the load dispersal is: -
• 1 Horizontally to 2 vertically through asphalt and similar surfacing

• 1 Horizontally to 1 vertically through structural concrete slabs down to the neutral
axis

Ronan O’Driscoll
25 Permissible Stress Design and Limit State Design
When we look at the Strength of materials / elements and we consider it looking at a Stress-
Strain curve. The maximum stress taken by the material is called the Strength. Which
basically is the maximum load taken by the material before its failure is called Strength.
25.1.1 FIGURE 28 – Simple Stress-Strain Curve for a Material
As stated earlier and just as a reminder: -
𝐹𝐹
Stress = Sigma = 𝜎𝜎 =
𝐴𝐴
Δ𝐿𝐿
Strain = Epsilon = 𝜀𝜀 =
𝐿𝐿
Final Length−Orginal Length
% Elongation = X 100
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿ℎ
Strength is classified into many types based on its failure.
• Yield Strength: - The load after which the plastic behaviour or permanent deformation
starts in a material. In other words, the load above which the material cannot regain

Ronan O’Driscoll
its original shape is called Yield Strength. When a material yields, the stiffness of that
material is reduced.
• Ultimate Strength: - The maximum or peak load the material can take. This is higher
than Yield Strength in many cases. For brittle materials this value is close to that of
Yield Strength.
• Rupture Strength:- The load at the failure point of the material. This can be smaller
than Ultimate strength (mostly true for many materials) and the process of loss of
strength from Ultimate to Rupture is called Softening / Necking.
From a design point of view the classification of Strength can be considered as follows:-
• Tensile Strength: - The ability of a material to withstand tensile (elongation) loads

without undergoing permanent deformation
• Compressive Strength: - The ability of a material to withstand compressive loads
• Shear Strength: - The ability of the material to withstand shear force
Noting that Bending is a combination of tension and compression within an element.
With this basic understanding of the strength and failure of materials / elements we must
look how we can design these elements so that we use the maximum amount of strength
without failure and ideally without reaching plastic deformation, i.e., staying within the elastic
deformation phase so that the element returns to its original shape once the load is
removed. So, we ideally design up to the Yield Strength with suitable factors of safety.
Now to design up to Yield Strength we need to use factors of safety to ensure we do not
exceed this point and if you look at this simplistically you can place a factor of safety on the
load being used or a factor of safety on the capacity of the material / element being
designed.
Up to 1972 in the UK design was all Permissible Stress Design, in 1972 Limit State Design
was introduced in the British Code of Practice - CP110 The Structural Use of Concrete.
Permissible Stress Design is used in offshore design codes, American Design Standards
and BS 5975:2019 is based on Permissible Stress Design. The well-known Engineers of old
mentioned previously in the Introduction of this document all designed to Permissible Stress
Design as they tested materials and applied factors of safety to their results, or they used
tables of capacities supplied by others who undertook the same testing and verification of
the material or component to withstand loading.

Ronan O’Driscoll
To try and explain the difference between Permissible Stress Design and Limit State Design
let’s start with Permissible Stress.
If we consider Figure 29 below and as shown in the first diagram the actual load applied has
no factor of safety applied (Working Load) and the Yield Strength Capacity of the beam has
no factor applied.
In Permissible Stress Design the factor of safety is applied to the beam and as a result a
reduced capacity of the beam is used for the same loading. As shown in the second diagram
where the Yield Strength capacity is reduced by a suitable factor of safety. When you design
the beam, you use the Working Load and then you apply that Working Load to the reduced
capacity of the beam which gives the factor of safety.
The Permissible Stress of the beam being designed has been reduced by a suitable factor of
safety when applying the unfactored Working Load.
For Permissible Stress Design the factor is applied to the material capacity to reduce it.
25.1.2 FIGURE 29 – Simple Permissible Stress Example (Courtesy of

Richard McDonald)

Ronan O’Driscoll
If we consider Figure 30 below and as shown in the first diagram the actual load applied has
no factor of safety applied (Working Load) and the Yield Strength Capacity of the beam has
no factor applied.
In Limit State Design the factor of safety is applied to the Working Load and as a result a
larger load is applied to the beam. As shown in the second diagram where the UDL Loading
is increased by a suitable factor of safety. When you design the beam, you use the
increased / factored Working Load and then you apply that increased Load to the beam
which gives the factor of safety.
The Working Load has been increased by a suitable factor of safety when applied to the
beam being designed.
For Limit State Design the factor is applied to the load to increase it.
25.1.3 FIGURE 30 – Simple Limit State Design Example (Courtesy of

Richard McDonald)

Ronan O’Driscoll
25.2 Load Factors
Referring to the 27 number recommendations of the Bragg Report please note No. 4 and 12
repeated below: -
4. Although individual components in a falsework may have their own accepted factors
of safety we nevertheless recommend that the overall factor of safety for the
falsework as a whole should not be less than two. Particular elements may require
the adoption of a higher figure.
12. The designer should assume that previously used material will be incorporated in
falsework and must use appropriate stresses. If there are critical areas where he has
assumed the use of new material these must be clearly indicated on the drawings.
Looking at Load Factors the author has heavily referenced and directly repeated allot of the
information from A History of the Safety Factors – A Paper for The Structural Engineer on
the 18th of October 2011 – by Alasdair N. Beal and would recommend the reader looks at
this document.
As stated in the Introduction of this document British Standards were created at the
beginning of the 20th Century (The Engineering Standards Committee – the forerunner of the
British Standards Institution (BSI) – came into being on the 26th of April 1901) and prior to
1901 Engineers used established capacity tables or undertook their own testing to establish
capacities and then applied suitable factors of safety to these results. In essence as stated
previously the design was Permissible Stress by establishing the capacity of a material or
element and then applying a suitable factor of safety to the resulting number which would
reduce the useable capacity of that material or element, this reduced value would be used
with applied Working Loads to design that beam or column element of the structure.
The factors of safety used in Permissible Stress Design predates the factors of safety used
in Limit State Design and as noted in the previous section the factors of safety are applied
differently depending on which design method is used, i.e., to the material / element being
designed (Permissible Stress) or to the load being applied (Limit State).
Prior to 1939 the Permissible Stress Design factors of safety used were: -
• Steel – Bending & Axial – 2.0

• Steel – Tension – 1.8
• Concrete – Considering the steel reinforcement – 2.0
During the War – 1939 to 1945 the Permissible Stress Design factors of safety used were: -
• Steel – Bending – 1.6

• Steel - Axial – 2.0
• Steel – Tension – 1.8
After 1945 the Permissible Stress Design factors of safety used are: -
• Steel – Bending – 1.65 to 1.70

• Steel – Tension – 1.60 to 1.65
The reduction in the factors reflect the increased manufacturing quality of the materials as
the years progressed and with further testing and understanding of the materials in use.
Ronan O’Driscoll
25.3 Limit State Design
Taking the information directly from the paper on the history of the safety factors as
referenced please note the following copied directly from that paper: -
In 1972, the first UK Limit State Design code was created as CP110 – Code of practice for
the Structural use of Concrete. This code introduced separate partial safety factors on loads
(𝛾𝛾f) and materials (𝛾𝛾m). At this stage Limit State Design was not just a change in calculation
format, the intention was that variation in loads, materials and member strengths would be
analysed statistically and then probability theory would be used to calculate new, more
rational values for design loads and partial safety factors.
It is sometimes assumed that this is how the partial factors in UK Limit State Design codes
have been determined since 1972 but the truth is rather more prosaic. According to Bill
Cranston (W B Cranston who wrote several books on concrete design, 1933-2007) the
CP110 committee faced a practical problem, although they supported the new Limit State
theory, the data that would be required to calculate new “rational” loads and safety factors
were not yet available.
They therefore took the old code’s (Permissible Stress Design) safety factor of 1.8 and split it
in to 𝛾𝛾f and 𝛾𝛾m, dividing it up on a fairly arbitrary basis. If they had chosen 𝛾𝛾f = 1.5 and 𝛾𝛾m =
1.2, this would have produced answers which were exactly the same as CP114, but the
complexity of the new code would then have seemed pointless. They therefore decided to
make 𝛾𝛾f = 1.6 for live load and 1.4 for dead load and 𝛾𝛾m was set as 1.15. This gave a safety
factor which was about 1.8 (the same as CP114) for members supporting mostly live load
but reduced to about 1.65 for members supporting mostly dead loads (which was thought to
be more accurately known).
The” Foreword” to CP110 confirms this, it states that: -
“..insufficient relevant statistical data are available to enable a design method in complete
accord with probability theory to be developed”, so the partial factor values were used
“based on current practice”. However, it was claimed that the partial factor system had the
advantage that “subsequently it will simplify the incorporation of amendments to the Code as
new knowledge becomes available with regard to variations in loads and strengths”.
Thus, when CP110 first appeared it had partial safety factors which were based on past
practice and subjective judgment, just like all previous codes. However, it was assumed that
this would be a temporary state of affairs and soon these initial values would be replaced by
rational values calculated form probability analysis.
Over the following years a considerable amount of research was carried out with the
intention of turning this dream into reality. The results were collected in CIRIA report 63 –
Rationalisation of Safety and Serviceability Factors in Structural Codes, published in 1977,
which captured some of the excitement of the time and discussed he issues in depth. Safety
factor systems with up to 5 or 7 partial factors were discussed, holding out the possibility of
savings “in excess of 10%” of materials used in construction without loss of safety.
In keeping with this thinking, the limit state codes which appeared in the late 1970s adopted
more complex partial factor systems than CP110, the new masonry code BS 5628
introduced variable materials factors and the new bridge code, BS 5400 had a 3-factor
system. However the values for the partial factors in BS 5628 were still set in the same was
as CP110; 𝛾𝛾f = 1.6 for live load and 1.4 for dead load and 𝛾𝛾m was set at 3.5 so that the new

Ronan O’Driscoll
code would give similar results to the old code CP111 – Structural Recommendations for
Loadbearing Walls.
By the early 1980s, the promised new, more rational loadings and partial safety factors for
CP110 had still not appeared but its complexity was proving unpopular with practising
engineers.
Theoretical problems with partial factor systems were also becoming apparent, particularly in
the treatment of dead load in continuous structures and statistical definitions of material
strengths.
A draft limit steel design code was published for comment in 1981. This followed the same
principles as CP110: it had 𝛾𝛾f = 1.6 for live load and 1.4 for dead load and 𝛾𝛾m was set at
1.075 so that results would be similar to BS 449. However, the draft was heavily criticised by
practicing engineers, who saw no point in a more complicated code tat offered no economic
advantage. It was clear that for the new code to have a chance of being accepted, it would
have to be simplified and, if possible, changed to offer greater economy than BS 449.
In 1987 a BRE calibration study (A Deterministic Calibration of draft British Standard BS
5975 – The Structural Use of Steelwork in Buildings) concluded that it would be reasonable
to reduce 𝛾𝛾m from 1.075 to 1.0. However in this study the factored yield stresses for Grade
43 (S275) steel was assumed as 240 N/mm2 (up to 16mm thick) and 220 N/mm2 (over
16mm thick), instead of the correct values based on BS 4360 yield stresses of 255 / 1.075 =
237 N/mm2 and 245 / 1.075 = 228 N/mm2. Unrestrained beams designed to the old BS 449
rules were also included in the comparisons, even though these were known t be
unsatisfactory.
The BRE report also stated incorrectly (on Page 23) that “it is recognised that column
designs to BS 449 were over-conservative”. In fact, for the common situation of a universal
column (UC) buckling about its y-y axis , BS 5975 stress curves (c) is more conservative
than BS 449: with a yield stress of 255 N/mm2 and a load factor of 1.5 it gives almost
identical permissible stresses to BS 449:1969, even though the latter has a nominal safety
factor of 1.7.
For UCs with flanges over 40mm thick (BS 5950 (Curve (d)), the BS 449:1969 permissible
stresses gave a factor of safety of less than 1.5 between L / r = 35 and L / r = 150 and it
dropped to 1.2 at L / r = 75. However, these low apparent safety factors only occur in minor
axis buckling of the very heaviest UC sections at effective lengths over 3m. Research has
shown that in columns with broad flanges, residual stresses locked into the flanges after
rolling can reduce minor axis buckling resistance.
If the yield stress error in the BRE study is corrected and if unrestrained beams and slender
heavy UC columns are excluded form the comparison, then with 𝛾𝛾f = 1.5 and 𝛾𝛾m = 1.0, BS
5950 produces beam designs which have a lower safety factor than BS 449. The same is
true for UB columns and x-x buckling of UC columns. However, for y-y buckling of UC
columns both codes give similar results.
Fully restrained beams are very common, so it is reasonable to assume that the BS 449
rules for these have been thoroughly tested. However, when engineers design slender
columns, they (rightly) tend to make conservative assumptions about effective length, so the
BS 449 column recommendations are less likely to have been tested “to the limit” in practice.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Depending on the view taken, we could say that experience of BS 449 designs had proved a
safety factor of 1.65 to 1.70 in practice and BS 5950 reduced this by about 10%.
Alternatively, we could take the view that experience of UC columns designed for y-y
buckling to the BS 449:1964 rules proved that a factor of safety of 1.5 was adequate and BS
5950 simply took that experience and reduced the safety factor on beams to the same level.
Rightly or wrongly, the proposal of 𝛾𝛾m = 1.0 was adopted in BS 5950, resulting in an overall
safety factor of 1.45 to 1.55.
Over the following years BS 5950 became accepted in use. Amendments were made to BS
5628 to correct some of the errors and anomalies. CP110 was replace by BS 8110, which
offered some simplification and partial solution to the problem of factored dead loads on
continuous beams. However, the promised new “rational” values for loads and partial safety
factors never materialised.
Thus, despite all that has been written about statistics and probability theory in limit state
design, after decades of development the UK limit state codes for buildings still have safety
factors which are based on permissible stress predecessors. When British Standards
Institution (BSI) finally withdrew BS 8110 in 2010, it still had the same partial factors that had
been chosen by the CP110 committee as a temporary stopgap measure back in 1972.
25.4 Eurocodes
Eurocodes are Limit State Design codes, and again what follows is directly copied from A
History of Safety Factors as follows: -
In theory, all UK design codes were withdrawn on 31st of March 2010 and engineers should
now be using Eurocodes. Eurocodes introduce a new, different partial factor system. In
addition, Eurocode A Annexes B and C give guidance on design methods based on
reliability analysis. However, Eurocode 0 section C4 notes that “Full probabilistic methods
(Level III)… are seldom used in the calibration of design codes because of the frequent lack
of statistical data”. It states that the general basis of partial safety factors in current
Eurocodes is method (a): “calibration to al on experience of building tradition”. In other
words, despite frequent references to probabilistic methods, current Eurocodes do not have
partial safety factors derived from reliability analysis – they are based on experience and
previous design codes.
In Eurocode 0 in the UK the basic load factors 𝛾𝛾f are 1.35 (“permanent actions”) and 1.5
(“variable actions”). However in load combinations another factor 𝜓𝜓O may also be applied to
variable loads, this is 0.7 for most floor loads. (𝜓𝜓O = 1 for storage areas, 0 for roof imposed
loads and 0.5 for wind and snow loads.) If Eq. 6.10 is used for design, the design loading is
1.35 DL + 1.5LL1 + 𝜓𝜓O 0 1.5LL2,3…
Alternatively, the design loading may be taken as the worse of either Eq. 6.10a (1.35 DL +
𝜓𝜓O 0 1.5 LL) or Eq.6.10b (𝜉𝜉 1.35 DL + 1.5 LL1 + 1.5 LL2,3…), where 𝜉𝜉 = 0.925 (UK national
value).
Therefore in this method, if 𝜓𝜓O = 0.7 the design loading is the worse of (1.35DL + 1.05LL) or
(1.25DL + 1.5LL1 + 1.05LL2,3..)
Thus for members supporting single live load, Eq.6.10 typically results in an overall load
factor of 1.40 to 1.45 (depending in dead load proportion). If Eqs. 6.10a and 6.10b were
Ronan O’Driscoll
used instead, the overall load factor reduces to 1.30 to 1.45. for comparison, the typical
overall load factor in UK codes such as BS 8110 and BS 5975 is 1.45 to 1.55.
Where a member supports more than one “variable action”, the situation is more complex,
the reduction factor 𝜓𝜓O may be applied to some of the loads but unfortunately Eurocode
does not explain which “variable loads” in a load combination should be considered as parts
of a single “variable action” and which should be considered as separate “variable actions”.
Therefore it is not clear which of the “variable actions” should be reduced by the factor 𝜓𝜓O. If
every different type of floor loading can be considered a separate “variable action”, then a
beam which supports areas of floor and roof with different types of imposed load could end
up being designed for an overall load factor as low as 1.22. This part of Eurocode 0 needs to
be clarified.
For structural steel design to Eurocode 3 (𝛾𝛾m = 1.0), if all the applied loads are considered
as a single “variable action”, the overall safety factor for bending, direct tension and
compression is therefore 1.40 to 1.45 (Eq.6.10) or 1.30 to 1.45 (Eq.6.10a and 6.10b).
However, depending on how the load combination rules for multiple “variable actions” are
interpreted, a steel member supporting several different types of loading could have an
overall safety factor as low as 1.22. For comparison, BS 449 designs typically have a factor
of safety of 1.65 to 1.70 and BS 5950 designs have an overall safety factor of 1.45 to 1.55.
For tension moment resistance in a reinforced concrete member designed to Eurocode 2
(𝛾𝛾m = 1.15), if applied loads are considered as single “variable actions”, the overall safety
factor for bending tension is either 1.61 to 1.67 (Eq.6.10) or 1.50 to 1.57 (Eqs. 6.10a and
6.10b). However, if it supports several different types of live load, as discussed above, the
overall factor of safety might be as low as 1.40.
Designs to UK permissible stress codes typically have an overall safety factor of 1.8 and
designs to CP110 and BS 8110 typically have an overall safety factor of about 1.65 to 1.80.
Thus, although Eurocodes safety factors are claimed to have been set by calibration against
best practice, they generally appear to be lower than UK practice.
The Eurocode 2 permitted concrete compression stress at factored loads in the UK is 0.67 /
1.5 fcu = 0.45 fcu, the same as BS 8110. However according to PD 6687:2006 (Background
paper to the UK National Annexes to BS EN 1992-1), the committee responsible for the UK
National Annex had concerns about possible under conservatism in the Eurocode 2 moment
resistance formula. The issues are rather complex, involving concrete strength, load duration
in tests and concrete strength gain with age but as a result the actual safety factor against
concrete compression failure is not altogether clear.
Eurocodes also permit the alternative option of using probabilistic reliability theory for design.
However, this will only be an option for specialists designing a structure where sufficient
statistical data is available for all the relevant factors. Given that the standard factors in
Eurocodes have not been derived probabilistically and the limited experience we have of the
performance in service structures designed in this way, anyone considering using this
approach will need to proceed with caution.

Ronan O’Driscoll
25.5 Permissible Stress or UK Limit State Design or Eurocodes for
Construction Engineering?
The author does not claim to have the detailed knowledge of Eurocodes as Alasdair N. Beal
and the information directly copied here from his article on a history of the safety factors, but
all practicing engineers should be aware of this and have a basic understanding of the
different load factors for the different design codes which are: -
• UK Permissible Stress Design Codes

• UK Limit State Design Codes
• Eurocodes
The Bragg report recommendation Number 4 specified a factor of safety for Construction
Engineering of 2.0 or higher.
The current British Standard for Construction Engineering Design (BS 5975:2019) uses
Permissible Stress Design.
Permissible Stress Design codes and UK Limit State Design Codes are no longer revised or
updated, and many consider them to be obsolete and believe Eurocodes must now be used
for all designs.
If we simply look at structural design as: -
• Confirmation of actual loads being applied

Ronan O’Driscoll
• Confirmation of the Yield Strength of the element (i.e. beam or column) being
designed
• Selection of suitable safety factors to apply to these values to ensure a safe and
robust design
• From this the designer will select the correct size for the element (i.e. beam or
column) being designed
The selection of suitable factors of safety are the critical element in structural design and for
Construction Engineering these factors should follow the recommendations of the Bragg
Report, BS 5975:2019 and best practice.
For steel design there are questions such as: -
• If the Permissible Stress Design Codes for Steel are not being updated or revised
anymore, does it mean they cannot be used?
• Does it mean they are unsafe and no longer fit to be used safely in design?
• Are the safety factors present in BS 449 now unsafe to use for Construction
Engineering design?
• As a result, are Eurocodes safer with larger factors of safety for Construction
Engineering design? (it is noted that it appears Eurocodes have less factor of safety)
From the information presented here the author will leave the reader to answer these
questions for themself.
It is noted reading the previous sections of this document that it appears Eurocodes have
less factor of safety and as a result are less aligned with the recommendations of the Bragg
report.
Other question to consider are: -
• With the well-established understanding of Permissible Stress Design factors of

safety and the fact that Limit State Design and Eurocodes have ended up adopting
these factors in one way or another would there be any real need to update or revise
the Permissible Stress Design codes? Does this mean they cannot be used
anymore?
The other discussion point for Construction Engineering design is the reduction of complexity
in design and increase the simplicity of the design. This is not saying that Construction
Engineering Design is less complex than Permanent Works Design, quite the contrary as
most Construction Engineering Designers has a far better understanding of load paths than
the majority of Permanent Works Designer. Simpler design is smarter design, and the
complex design can cover up incompetency’s and mistakes where a simple design does not.
As Construction Engineering Designers usually do not have the same timescales as
Permanent Works Designers a quick turnaround of a safe and robust Construction
Engineering design is required. A simple design will be a quicker design and using simpler
design methods with best practice does point the Construction Engineering Designer to
Permissible Stress Design.
Whatever the choice of design method used the designer must be aware of what factors of
safety are being used and satisfy themselves as the designer that those factors are suitable.
Ronan O’Driscoll
The designer must ensure design methods are not used incorrectly i.e. mixing of Permissible
Stress Design and Limit Sate Design safety factors in the same design.
With these points noted the designer must be aware of their requirements under the UK
CDM Regulations and satisfy themselves they are happy with their selected design method
and factors of safety as that is what they may have to justify in a court of law if things go very
badly wrong on site.
Personally, the author believes the easiest option is to use well established factors of safety
that have been developed since British Standards began, are tried, and tested and
considered best practice and have been in place since 1945 which are as follows: -
• Steel – Bending – 1.65 to 1.70

• Steel – Tension – 1.60 to 1.65
To ensure the designer achieve these factors of safety for Construction Engineering Design
of steel and concrete elements simply use BS 5975:2019, BS 449 (or BS 5950) and BS
8110.
26 Steel Column Design

This design is used for the design of axially loaded props in Construction Engineering.
The design of steel columns is briefly described in BS 5975:2019 Annex A-Clause A.1 c) and
Annex K, Clause K.2 and Table K.1 which as stated in BS 5975 is based on data given in BS
449-2:1969 Clause 30 & 31, Table 17 and Appendix B.
The guidance presented in BS 5975:2019 in partnership with the details referenced and
supplied in BS 449-2:1969 will allow the design of steel columns / struts to Permissible
Stress Design.
It is to be noted that steel column design to BS 5950-1:2000 is to Limit State Design and as
noted earlier in this document there are distinct differences, likewise, design to Eurocodes is
Limit State Design.
Steel column design to BS 5950-1:2000 considers steel columns supporting beams at
multiple levels in both x-x and y-y axis with resulting moments allowing for a 100 mm offset
from the face of the web or flange depending on the axis being considered.
The Limit State Design shown in BS 5975:2019 and BS449-2:1969 is perfectly acceptable
for Construction Engineering design of axially loaded props or columns and this simple
example is just to demonstrate at a very basic level how to use the principles presented in
BS 5975:2019.

Ronan O’Driscoll
As always engineering experience, competency and judgment is required for any individual
undertaking any design work and suitable design supervision and checking should be
present where required.
As stated, earlier BS 5950 Limit State Design Code and BS 449-2:1969 Permissible Stress
Design Code use the following labels for axis of steel cross sections: -
Eurocodes which is a Limit State Design Code uses the following labels for axis of steel
cross sections: -
For Grades of Steel from BS 5975:2019:2019 to modern steel grades please note:-
Grade 43 = S275
Grade 50 = S355
Grade 55 = S460
We will assume we are going to use S275 Steel (Grade 43)
Axial capacity of a steel section in compression = Pc = Ag pc

Where:-
Ag Gross cross sectional area of the section
pc Permissible Axial Compressive Stress
Values for pc are supplied in BS 5975:2019 – TableA.2 which is a direct copy of BS 449-2:
Table 17a. These values have a factor of safety of 1.7 already applied.
The values supplied for pc are derived as described in BS 449-2:1969 Appendix B and
shown below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
2
𝑌𝑌𝑠𝑠 + (𝜂𝜂 + 1)𝐶𝐶0 𝑌𝑌𝑠𝑠 + (𝜂𝜂 + 1)𝐶𝐶0
𝑘𝑘2 𝑝𝑝𝐶𝐶 = − �� − 𝑌𝑌𝑠𝑠 𝐶𝐶0 �
2 2
Where:-
𝑝𝑝𝐶𝐶 = The permissible averag stress in N/mm2
𝑘𝑘2 = Load factor or coefficient, taken as 1.7 for the purpose of BS 449
𝑌𝑌𝑠𝑠 = minimum yiels stress in N/mm2
𝜂𝜂 = 0.3 (l / 100 r )2
l/r = Slenderness ratio = Effective Length (l) / Radius of Gyration (r)
𝜋𝜋2 𝐸𝐸 𝜋𝜋2 210,000

𝐶𝐶0 = Euler Crtitical Stress = = N/mm2
(𝑙𝑙 ⁄𝑟𝑟)2 (𝑙𝑙 ⁄𝑟𝑟)2
E = Youngs Modulus for Steel
It is worth noting that Euler Crtical Stress in the formula above is derived from the Euler’s
Crtical Load formula.
𝜋𝜋2 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
Eulers Crtical Load = Pcr =
(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)2
Where – K = column effective length factor
From this Pcr value:-
Pcr = 𝜎𝜎 A
𝜋𝜋2 𝐸𝐸
𝑃𝑃cr
Euler Critical Stress = 𝜎𝜎 = =
A (𝑙𝑙 ⁄𝑟𝑟)2
Noting: -
l Effective Length = KL
𝐼𝐼
r Radius of Gyration = �
𝐴𝐴
The information above is just some background information for reference if required.
26.1 BASIC STEEL COLUMN DESIGN EXAMPLE

For a simple example let us assume we are propping a concrete floor and that each end of
our prop is effectively held in position at both ends. We will refer to BS 5975:2019 Table K.1
to establish the effective length.
Ronan O’Driscoll
The prop length is 3.0m
The prop load is 600 kN
From BS 5975:2019 Table K.1 – Effective Length = Le = 1.0 L = 1.0 (3.0m) = 3.0 m
If a proprietary prop section is proposed to be used, then the supplier will supply the radius
of gyration values, cross sectional area, etc. and this process can be followed using those
values.
For this example, we will look at using a Universal Column Section (UC)

We will select the following Universal Column Section: -
203 X 203 X 46 UC
Second Moment of Area of the Section = Ixx = 4,570 cm4 = 45,700,000 mm4
l / ryy = 3,000 / 51.3 = 58.4795 = 59
From BS 5975:2019 – Table A.2 – pc = 136 N/mm2
Pc = Ag pc = 5,870 X 136 = 798,320 N = 798.32 kN > 600 kN
From this we could look at reducing the section size selected to see if we can have a lighter
section to support the load?
We also need to be aware of any off-centre loading (eccentricity), etc. to consider any
bending moments and as a result combined axial and bending on the section. Refer to BS
5975:2019 Annex A Clause A.1 d)
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
+ ≤1
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
Where:-
Fc is the maximum applied compressive axial stress (in N/mm2)
pc is the permissible compressive axial stress (in N/mm2)
Fbc is the maximum applied compressive bending stress (in N/mm2)
pbc is the permissible compressive bending stress (in N/mm2)

Ronan O’Driscoll
If deflection of this section is to be considered, please refer to earlier sections of this
document that referred to axial stiffness and young modulus as shown below.
(𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸)
k=
𝐿𝐿
𝛿𝛿 =P/k
𝐹𝐹
� �
𝐴𝐴
E=
Δ𝐿𝐿
� �
𝐿𝐿
For vertical propping it is to be noted that axial stiffness is not really a concern if you have a
prop with sufficient capacity and a hydraulic cylinder with sufficient stroke length such that
any prop shortening under load is not a concern. This is assuming there is no temperature
differential issues to consider. The shortening maybe an issue for the loading if there are
multiple prop locations but that can be considered with suitable hydraulic arrangement of
manifolds etc. so loads are distributed as required without excessive loading in one location.
For horizontal props across large excavations there usually are temperature differential
issues which would have to be considered in the design and the prop stiffness.
27 Design of Steel Beam at points of Reactions and

Concentrated Loads
This is used to design stiffeners in beams where the beam is supporting a load from another
beam or column.
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Annex J, Annex A and Annex K as well as BS 449-2:1969 Clause
28.
WEB BUCKLING: - Check that the reaction or concentrated load – R (in N) should not be
greater than the allowable buckling load
R = (b + n1) tw pcw
Where: -
b is the stiff length in bearing (in mm)
n1 is the length obtained by dispersion at 45o from the extreme of the stiff bearing,
through flange plates if any to the mid-height of the web (in mm) See Figure 31
tw is the web thickness (in mm)
Ronan O’Driscoll
pcw is the permissible compressive stress in the web, determined assuming that the web
acts as a strut and taken as equal to the value of permissible axial stress pc for a
compression member whose effective length is given in Table 7 and with a radius of
gyration rg is given by:-
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
rg =
√12
The length of stiff bearing b should be determined by dispersion of load at a slope of 1:1
through solid steel material which is fixed (see figure 31). No dispersion should be taken
through packs unless they are secured by welds or clamping capable of transmitting shear
forces.
WEB CRUSHING: - The reaction or concentrated load – R (in N) should not be greater than
the allowable buckling load
R = (b + n2) tw pb
Where: -
b is the stiff length in bearing (in mm)
n2 is the length obtained by dispersion at 30o from the extreme of the stiff bearing,
through flange plates if any to the web (in mm) See Figure 32
tw is the web thickness (in mm)
pb is the allowable bearing stress (in N/mm2)
If R exceeds these values, then bearing stiffeners will be required

Ronan O’Driscoll
27.1.1 FIGURE 31 – Stress Dispersion – Buckling (refer to BS
5975:2019 Figure J.1)

Ronan O’Driscoll
27.1.2 FIGURE 32 – Stress Dispersion – Bearing (refer to BS 5975:2019
Figure J.2)

Ronan O’Driscoll
27.1.3 TABLE 7 – Effective lengths and slenderness ratios of an
unstiffened web acting as a column (refer to BS 5975:2019 - Table
J.1)

Ronan O’Driscoll
COMBINATION OF LONGITUDINAL AND BUCKLING STRESSES: - Where the reaction or
concentrated load is applied to a compression flange that has longitudinal stress of more
than 60% of the allowable longitudinal stress, the following relationship should be satisfied:
𝐹𝐹𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐

+ + ≤ 1.6
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐
Where:-
FRc is given (in N/mm2) by the expression:
𝑅𝑅
FRc =
(𝑏𝑏+𝑛𝑛1)𝑡𝑡w
Where:-
R is the reaction or concentrated load and b, n1 and tw are defined earlier in this
document
pcw is as defined earlier in this document
Fbc is the maximum applied longitudinal compressive bending stress in the web (in
N/mm2)
pbc is the permissible compressive stress due to bending (in N/mm2)
Fc is the maximum applied longitudinal compressive axial stress in the web (in N/mm2)
pc is the permissible axial stress for struts (in N/mm2)

Ronan O’Driscoll
27.2 BASIC WEB STIFFENER DESIGN EXAMPLE
We will use the following very simple and basic example:-
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 300𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 (2𝑚𝑚)

The Bending Moment = = = 150 kNm (Unfactored)
4 4
Reactions = 150 kN (Unfactored)
Concentrated Load = 300 kN (Unfactored)

Ronan O’Driscoll
WEB BUCKLING: -
R = (b + n1) tw pcw
R = 300 kN (Unfactored)
Steel Section :- 356 X 171 X 51 UB (Universal Beam)
Web thickness = t = 7.4 mm = tw
Flange thickness = T = 11.5 mm
Depth of section = 355.0 mm
b = 7.4 + 11.5 + 11.5 = 30.5 mm

n1 = (355 / 2 ) X 2 = 355 mm
(b + n1) = 30.5 + 355 = 385.5 mm
To calculate pcw we need to establish the effective length of the web using table 7.
D = 355.0 mm
2.0 D = 710.0 mm = le
𝑙𝑙e 7.0 𝐷𝐷 7 (355)
Slenderness ratio = = = = 335.8 = 336
𝑟𝑟g 𝑡𝑡w 7.4
Ronan O’Driscoll
The alternative way to calculate the slenderness ratio is :-
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 7.4
rg = = = 2.136
√12 √12
𝑙𝑙e 710
Slenderness ratio = = = 332.4
𝑟𝑟g 2.136
We will use slenderness ratio = 336, as this will give a slightly more conservative value
From BS 5975:2019 – Table A.2 (which is copied directly from BS 449-2:1969)
pc = 8.84 N/mm2
Therefore: -
R = (385.5) 7.4 (8.84) = 25,217.868 N = 25.22kN < R (300 kN)
Section FAILS for Web Buckling
WEB CRUSHING: -
R = (b + n2) tw pb
R = 300 kN (Unfactored)
11.5 11.5
b = 7.4 + + = 47.24 mm
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 30 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 30
Flange thickness = 11.5 mm

Root radius = 10.2 mm

Ronan O’Driscoll
(11.5+10.2)
n2 = X 2 = 75.17 mm = 75.2 mm
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 30
(b +n2) = (47.24 + 75.2) = 122.44 mm
pb is the allowable bearing stress (in N/mm2)

Refer to BS 449-2:1969 – Clause 22 – Table 9
pb = 210 N/mm2
Therefore: -
R = (122.44) 7.4 (210) = 190,271.76 N = 190.3 kN < R (300 kN)
Section FAILS for Web Crushing
Design of Bearing Stiffeners: -

Refer to BS 5975:2019 – J.3
Web thickness = tw = 7.4mm
20 X Web thickness = 20 X 7.4 = 148 mm
Total length of web used = 148 X 2 = 296 mm
Limiting outstand length of the stiffener from the face of the web should not be more than 14
X ts
Where ts is the thickness of the web stiffener
Assume a web stiffener thickness = 6 mm = ts

14 X ts = 14 X 6 = 84 mm
Length available is 82.05 mm as shown
Removing the root radius of 10.2mm, leaves a length of 71.85 mm
The web stiffener will not go to the end of the flange so that a run of fillet weld can be applied
to the stiffener. Lets use a stiffener length of 65 mm.

Ronan O’Driscoll
We will now consider the stiffeners and the length of web acting as one single strut
supporting a vertical load.
As shown previously for the design of a column we will need to calculate the radius of
gyration for this combined section (r value) and establish the effective length of the web
𝑙𝑙e
stiffener (le value). This will allow us to establish a slenderness ratio ( ) and use that value
𝑟𝑟
to establish the permissible axial compressive stress.

Ronan O’Driscoll
𝐼𝐼
r= �
𝐴𝐴
A = Area of the stiffener arrangement = (296 X 7.4) + (65 X 6) + (65 X 6) = 2,970.4 mm2
The effective length of the stiffener is as stated in BS 5975:2009 – Table J.2
27.2.1 TABLE 8 – Effective lengths of load bearings (refer to BS

5975:2019 - Table J.2)
From Table 8 – Effective Length of the Stiffener = le = 1.2 X L = 1.2 X 332 = 398.4 mm
To calculate r we will need to establish the Second Moment of Area (I) value for the stiffener
arrangement.
Referring to the plan above: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
Top Part of the Stiffener is:-
Middle Part of the Stiffener is:-
Bottom Part of the Stiffener is:-
For the table that follows the following symbols refer to the following values: -
A Is the area of the part being referenced
y Is the distance of the centroid of each part being referenced from the bottom
edge of the combined section
Ay Is the values above multiplied together
IG Is the moment of Inertia of each area about its own centroid axis parallel to
the combined sections XX axis

Ronan O’Driscoll
h Is the distance between the centroid axis of each part and the combined
sections XX axis
Ah2 Is the values above multiplied together
IG +Ah2 Is the values above multiplied together
Note IG values can be calculated using formula sources referenced in Section 11.2 (Second
Moment of Area (I) ) of this document.
Part A y Ay IG h Ah2 IG + Ah2

mm2 mm mm3 mm4 mm mm4 mm4
Top 65 X 6 = 125.3 48,867 137,312.5 46.4 839,654.4 976,966.9
390
Middle 296 X 7.4 78.9 172,822.56 9,996 0 0 9,996
=
2,190.4
Bottom 65 X 6 = 32.5 12,675 137,312.5 46.4 839,654.4 976,966.9
390
TOTALS:- 2,970.4 234,364.56 1,963,929.8
From this table:-

I value for the combined section in this orientation = 1,963,929.8 mm4
𝑦𝑦� is the maximum distance from the bottom of the combined section to the neutral
axis of the combined section
𝑦𝑦� = 𝛴𝛴Ay / 𝛴𝛴A = 234,364.56 / 2,970.4 = 78.9mm

As this section is symmetrical about the XX axis, we can just divide 157.8mm by 2 to
get a value for 𝑦𝑦
� but for combined sections that are not symetrical this can be very
useful.
𝐼𝐼 1,963,929.8
r= � = � = 25.7 = 26 mm
𝐴𝐴 2,970.4
𝑙𝑙e 398.4
slenderness ratio = 𝜆𝜆 = = = 15.32 = 15
𝑟𝑟 26
Total Area of the stiffener = 2,970.4 mm2
Referring to BS 5975:2019 Table A.2 – pc = 162 N/mm2
Load Bearing Capacity of the Stiffener Arrangement = 2,970.4 mm2 X 162 N/mm2
= 481,204.8 N
= 481 kN > 300 kN
Therefore a 6 mm thick stiffener in the arrangement as shown is sufficient for the loading of
300 kN

Ronan O’Driscoll
As highlighted in BS 5975:2019 J.2 – c, the combination of longitudinal and buckling
stresses may need to be checked as described.
Also note the bending moment capacity of the section also needs to be checked as a
separate exercise and like the example provided earlier in this document.
For this stiffener arrangement a continuous fillet weld is assumed.

Ronan O’Driscoll
28 STEEL TRUSS DESIGN EXAMPLE
We will consider a very basic truss example to give a very basic understanding of how to
rationalise truss loads in individual truss members.
As we are considering Permissible Stress Design to this point, we will look at unfactored
loads.
Lest assume we have a truss as follows: -
Span = 22.5m
Central Point Load to Support = 290 kN (Unfactored)
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
Maximum Bending Moment (BM) is at Mid-Span – Mmax =
4
1 𝑤𝑤𝐿𝐿3
48 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
From this: -
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 290(22.5)
BM = = = 1,631.25 kNm
4 4
Let’s begin by assuming the geometry of our truss and this maybe dictated by a truss we
already have our a truss that is going to be fabricated especially for this design.
Note that the trusses can easily be designed, ordered and erected on site using readily
available Construction Engineering equipment such as Mabey Hire: -
• Mass 25 system
• Mass 50 system
• Mat 125 system
• Superprop system
• Etc.

Ronan O’Driscoll
RMD Kwikform:-
• Slimshor system
• Megashor system
• R700 system
• Etc.
MGF
• Unishore system
It would always be advisable to look at this equipment to see if it would make a suitable truss
arrangement for the loading condition and span being considered as this type of equipment
can be designed and supplied by these companies and hired for the duration of time
required on site, then off hired and returned. This can offer a very cost-effective solution
depending on the length of time the truss is required on site.
So, depending on what option is taken for the truss being considered that will dictate the
geometry of the truss.
For our example we will assume truss geometry as shown below: -
We have highlighted Compression members as far as is possible at this stage and given
them the “C” label in the diagram above.
Likewise, we have highlighted Tension members as far as is possible at this stage and given
them the “T” label in the diagram above.
As highlighted in Section 9.2.2 of this document the direction of the arrows shown
sometimes might appear confusing with the Tension arrows pointing in and the compression
arrows pointing outwards. Consider the arrows as the direction that member must pull in or
push to resist the forces being applied to it as opposed to the direction of the forces being
applied.
We have numbered the nodes (joints) 1 to 6 as shown in circles.
The internal angles have been highlighted and dimensions highlighted.
The diagonals are 4.5m in length from node to node.

Ronan O’Driscoll
When selecting the geometry of a truss we ideally want to keep everything symmetrical and
as simple and as repetitive as possible to save time and money on design and analysis but
also to make erection, use and dismantle on site as straightforward as is possible.
Angles for bracing should ideally be 45o ± 15o which results in angles ideally between 30o
and 60o. Angles outside of this range can be designed but the load transfer is not as
favourable and when you consider connection angles at node positions things get more
complicated, but nothing is impossible in Construction Engineering as long as it is correctly
considered, designed and safely delivered on site.
For some truss information refer to: -

(inclusive) and Page 246
TOP & BOTTOM CHORD FORCES: -
Note that “Chords” refers to the outer members of a truss that define the envelope or shape
of the truss.
“Top Chord” refers to the inclined or horizontal member that establishes the upper edge of a
truss. This member is usually subjected to compressive forces as shown in our diagram
above.
“Bottom Chord” refers to the inclined or horizontal member that establishes the lower edge of
a truss. This member is usually subjected to tensile forces as shown in our diagram above,
unless the truss is a cantilever, etc.
For the truss we have chosen the top and bottom chords are horizontal and parallel as
shown.
Chord centres are = 3.897m
Total Bending Moment on the truss = 1,631.25 kNm
From this: -
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 1,631.25 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘

Axial Forces in Top and Bottom Chords = =
Chord Center Spacing 3.897m
= 418.59 = 419 kN
Compression in Top Chord = 419 kN
Tension in Bottom Chord = 419 kN
Note this same principle can be used to rationalise a Bending Moment on a Steel Beam
back to Compression and Tension forces in the top and bottom flanges of the Steel Beam.
Using the Bending Moment divided by the distance between the centers of the flanges of the
steel beam.

Ronan O’Driscoll
RESOLUTION OF JOINT FORCES: -
Let’s start with Joint 1 as shown below: -
The sum of the vertical loads at this joint will be as follows: -

(290 kN) – Sin 60o (Force (1 to 2) ) – Sin 60o (Force (1 to 2) ) = 0
From this: -
290 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Force (1 to 2) =( ) / 2 = 167.43 kN
Sin 60o
Please refer to Section 9.3.8 of this document regarding resolution of angles into vertical and
horizontal components.
From the resolution of Joint 1 above and to assist with understanding: -
𝑉𝑉
Sin 60o = Which Implies: - V = Sin 60o (Force (1 to 2))
Force 1 to 2
𝐻𝐻
Cos 60o = Which Implies: - H = Cos 60o (Force (1 to 2))
Force 1 to 2

Ronan O’Driscoll
Let us carry on to Joint 2 as shown below: -

Sin 60o (167.43) – Sin 60o (Force (2 to 3) ) = 0
From this: -
Sin 60o (167.43)

Force (2 to 3) = = 167.43 kN
Sin 60o
As everything is symmetrical and there are no additional loads the diagonal loading will be
167.43 kN back to the support.
Let us carry on to Joint 6 as shown below: -

Sin 60o (167.43) – Reaction = 0
From this: -
Reaction = 144.9986 kN = 145 kN

Ronan O’Driscoll
We know the reaction should be 290 kN / 2 = 145 kN so the vlaue above is a good check
that the forces have been resolved correctly through the truss.
The resulting loads are as follows:-
Maximum Compression Force in Chords = 419 kN

Maximum Tension Force in Chords = 419 kN
Length of Chord – Node to Node = 4.5 m
Maximum Compression Force in Diagonals = 167.43 kN

Maximum Tension Force in Diagonals = 167.43 kN
Length of Diagonal – Node to Node = 4.5 m
From this the Chords and Diagonals can now be designed as axially load struts following the
sample principle as shown in Section 26.
To calculate the truss deflection, we will need to look at the properties of the combined
element cross section to calculate a Second Moment of Area - I value and then use that
value in the deflection formula.
1 𝑤𝑤𝐿𝐿3
48 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
An example of how to calculate the properties of the combined element cross section is
supplied later in this document.

Ronan O’Driscoll
29 Properties of a combined element cross section
When we want to look at the deflection of a truss, or any other combined section that we are
designing to work as one together, we will need to calculate the Second Moment of Area (I)
of that combined cross section.
The units used for the Second Moment of Area – I = mm4 (or similar)
For formulas to calculate I refer to: -

(inclusive)
FORMULA FOR I:-
I = (r2) x (A)
Where:-
• r = the Radius of Gyration

• A = the cross sectional area
FORMULA FOR r:-
𝐼𝐼
r= �
𝐴𝐴
Where:-
• I = The Second Moment of Area

• A = the cross-sectional area
The r value maybe useful if we have a combined cross section that we want to use as a prop
and load axially like a strut once we have an r value and the effective length le.
𝑙𝑙e
slenderness ratio = 𝜆𝜆 =
𝑟𝑟
We can also use this I value in combination with the y value to calculate a Z value for the
combined cross section.
The units used for the Elastic Modulus – Z = mm3 (or similar)
FORMULA FOR Z:-
Z=I/y
Where:
• I = Second Moment of Area

Ronan O’Driscoll
c is the distance from the neutral axis to the most extreme fibre. From this I = (Z) x (c)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
Note that Bending Stress = Sigma = 𝜎𝜎 =
𝐼𝐼
𝜎𝜎𝜎𝜎
Therefore Bending Moment Capcity - 𝑀𝑀 = = 𝜎𝜎𝜎𝜎
𝑦𝑦
If we have truss that we have designed, we will need to establish the I value of that truss
likewise if we have combined some steel columns or props together to take an axial load, we
may want to establish the combined r value so we can establish an axial capacity using the 𝜆𝜆
value. We may have created an I beam using plate steel (i.e. plate girder) and need to
establish the cross section properties of this new section, etc. There are many and varied
instances when you will combine cross sections together to work as one and as a result
need to estbalish I, r and Z values.
29.1 BASIC EXAMPLE TO CALCULATE THE PROPERTIES OF A

COMBINED SECTION
For this example, let’s assume we are creating a plate girder using three plate sections of
the following cross section: -
Top flange - 800mm X 50 mm plate
Web - 900 mm X 40 mm plate
Bottom Flange - 1,000 mm X 50 mm plate
For this combined cross section we will calculate: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
𝑦𝑦� Location of the neutral axis (x-x)
I Second Moment of Area

Z Elastic Section Modulus
r Radius of gyration
For the table that follows the following symbols refer to the following values: -
A Is the area of the part being referenced
y Is the distance of the centroid of each part being referenced from the bottom
edge of the combined section
Ay Is the values above multiplied together
IG Is the moment of Inertia of each area about its own centroid axis parallel to
the combined sections XX axis
h Is the distance between the centroid axis of each part and the combined
sections XX axis
Ah2 Is the values above multiplied together
IG +Ah2 Is the values above multiplied together
Note IG values can be calculated using formula sources referenced in Section 11.2 (Second
Moment of Area (I) ) of this document.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Top 800 X 50 = 1,000 – (50 / 2) 39,000,000 800 (50)3 975 – 462 = 1.052676 X 1010 1.0535 X 1010
40,000 = = 513
12
975
8,333,333
Middle 900 X 40 = 1,000 – 500 = 18,000,000 40 (900)3 500 – 462 = 51,984,000 2,481,984,000
36,000 500 = 38
12
2,430,000,000
Bottom 1,000 X 50 = 50 / 2 = 1,250,000 1,000 (50)3 462 - 25 = 9,548,450,000 9,558,866,667

50,000 25 = 437
12
10,416,667
TOTALS:- 126,000 58,250,000 2,448,750,000 2.2575944 X 1010

Ronan O’Driscoll
From this table: -
I value for the combined section in this orientation = 2.2575944 X 1010 mm4
= 2,257,594.4 cm4
𝑦𝑦� is the maximum distance from the bottom of the combined section to the neutral
axis of the combined section
𝑦𝑦� = 𝛴𝛴Ay / 𝛴𝛴A = 58,250,000 / 126,000 = 462.3 mm = 462 mm
Z = I / y = 2.2575944 X 1010 / 462 = 48,865,679.65 mm3 = 48,865.7 cm3
𝐼𝐼 2.2575944 X 1010
r= � = � = 423.3 mm
𝐴𝐴 2,970.4126,000
Note that we could use this same system for any combined cross section for example if we
wanted to combine scaffold tubes together to work as one section, we could take a cross
section of the combined tubes and follow this process. Of course, any sections combined
must be suitable connected to ensure they work as one and transfer any forces between the
sections via shear, etc.
For truss arrangements or similar where we are combining 2 cross sections that have the
same know properties, we can use some simpler and quicker formulas as shown below.
New Iyy = 2 X Iyy (For Single Section)

New Ixx = 2 [ Ixx (For Single Section) + (A X y2) ]
Where:-
A = Cross Sectional Area of Single Section
Ronan O’Driscoll
y = New distance of Single Section from its centroid to the centroid of the combined
section (i.e. the middle between both sections)
� 2) X 2
I = (A𝑦𝑦
𝐼𝐼
This implies that:- A =
2 (𝑦𝑦� 2 )
If there is a requirement to establish the combined cross section Plastic Modulus – S = mm3
(or similar), we can use the example shown and calculate it as follows.
Looking at the top half of the combined section above the calculated section neutral axis as
shown below:-

Ronan O’Driscoll
Total depth of the top half of the section shown is 1,000 mm – 462 mm = 538 mm
Part A y Ay
mm2 mm mm3
Top 40,000 513 20,520,000
Flange
Top of (5388 – 50) X 40 = (513 – 50) / 2 = 4,762,880
Web 19,520 244
TOTALS:- 59,520 25,282,880
Top half centroid location = 𝑦𝑦

� = 𝛴𝛴Ay / 𝛴𝛴A = 25,282,880 / 59,520 = 425 mm
Looking at the bottom half of the combined section above the calculated section neutral axis
as shown below: -
Total depth of the bottom half of the section shown is 462 mm
Part A y Ay
mm2 mm mm3
Bottom of (462 – 50) X 40 = (462 – 50) / 2 = 3,394,880
Web 16,480 206
Bottom 50,000 462 – 25 = 21,850,000
Flange 437
TOTALS:- 66,480 25,244,880
Top half centroid location = 𝑦𝑦

� = 𝛴𝛴Ay / 𝛴𝛴A = 25,244,880 / 66,480 = 379.7 mm = 380 mm
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
The Plastic Modulus – S = ( ) X Lever Arm
2

Ronan O’Driscoll
Area = 126,000 mm2
Lever Arm = 425 + 380 = 805 mm
126,000
The Plastic Modulus – S = ( ) X 805 = 50,715,000 mm3
2
= 50,715 cm3

Ronan O’Driscoll
30 STEEL CONNECTION BASIC DESIGN EXAMPLE
For a simple example of a connection let’s consider the detail as shown below.
From this example the connection Bending Moment = 10 kN X 1m = 10 kNm

10 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Axial load in the Cantilever Beam :- Sin 45o =
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
Therefore the Axial Load = 14 kN
The Cantilever Beam can be designed for the bending moment and axial load as shown in
previous examples and this will not be considered here.
Considering the Connection design we have the following loads:-
Shear = 10 kN
Bending Moment = 10 kNm
We will assume the Bolt Spacing shown = 300 mm = 0.3m

Ronan O’Driscoll
To evaluate the tension in the bolts: -
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 10 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
= = 33 kN for the top row of bolts
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 0.3𝑚𝑚
Direct forces such as Shear, Tension, Compression are more direct to evaluate as shown in
previous examples. For Bending moments we need to be mindful of the following
relationships as shown previously in this document.
Bending Moment (capacity) = BM = pb (Z)
Z=I/y
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑦𝑦) 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵

pb = =
𝐼𝐼 𝑍𝑍
If we cut a section through the weld at the connection to estimate the diemsions of the weld
we get the foolowing:-
NOTE ON THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO ASSESS A FILLET WELD:-
• The method of assessing Fillet Weld groups treating welds as lines is reasonably
safe and conservative and convenent to use.
• A Fillet Weld subject to bending can be assessed as follows:-
1. The area of the Fillet Weld Au (Unit Thickness) is calculated assuming the weld is
1 unit thick.
2. The (unit) Moment of Inertia – Iu is calculated assuming the weld is one unit thick
3. The maximum shear stress due to bending is determined:-
𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦)
𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 =
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
M = Applied Moment
y = Distance to weld centroid
4. The maximum shear stress due to direct shear is determined:-
𝑃𝑃
𝜏𝜏𝑠𝑠 =
𝐴𝐴
P = Applied Shear
Ronan O’Driscoll
A = Area
5. The resultant stress is given by:-
𝜏𝜏𝑟𝑟 = �(𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏2 + 𝜏𝜏𝑠𝑠2 )

6. By comparing the design strength pw with the resultant stress 𝜏𝜏𝑟𝑟 the value of the
weld throat thickness is calculated and then the weld size.
𝑇𝑇ℎ𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑇𝑇ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 (𝑡𝑡)

Leg Length = = √2 X Throat Thickness (t) = 1.414 (t)
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (45o )
𝜏𝜏𝑟𝑟
i.e. if = 5 – then the throat thickness (t) = 5 Units
𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤
The resulting Weld Leg Length = 1.414 (t) = 1.414 (5) = 7.07
Refer to:-
• BS 449-2:1969 – Clause 53
• BS 5950-1:2000 – Clause 6.8.7.2 and 6.8.5 and Table 37
NOTE:-
• If we are designing to BS 449 we use Unfactored Loads as this is a Permissible

Stress Design Code
• If we are designing to BS 5950 we must Factor the Loads as this is a Limit State
Design Code

Ronan O’Driscoll
For this example, we will use Design Strength of Fillet Weld values from BS 5950-1:2000
Table 37 and as a result we will factor the load. Refer to BS 5950-1 – Table 2 for Partial
Factors for loads 𝛾𝛾f as copied below:-
For the 100 kN applied load we will use 𝛾𝛾f = 1.6
P = Point Load = 10 kN X 1.6 = 16 kN = 16,000 N (Factored Load)

M = Applied Moment = 16 kN X 1m = 16 kNm = 16,000,000 Nmm (Factored Load)
A = Area of Weld (will be calculated below)
y = Distance to Weld Centroid (will be calculated below)
pw = Design Stress of Weld – From BS 5950-1:2000 Table 37 = 220 N/mm2

Ronan O’Driscoll
Now let us look at the properties of our weld area which is as shown:-

Ronan O’Driscoll
Top Section – Top Surface 200 X 1 = 200 40,000 200 (1)3 100 2,000,000 2,000,017
200 =
12
17
Top Section – Sides 5 197.5 987.5 10 97.5 47,531 47,541

Top Section – Sides 5 197.5 987.5 10 97.5 47,531 47,541
Top Section – Bottom Surface 95 195 18,525 8 95 857,375 857,383
Top Section – Bottom Surface 95 195 18,525 8 95 857,375 857,383
Web Section – Sides 190 100 19,000 571,583 0 0 571,583
Web Section – Sides 190 100 19,000 571,583 0 0 571,583
Bottom Section – Top Surface 95 5 475 8 95 857,375 857,383
Bottom Section – Top Surface 95 5 475 8 95 857,375 857,383
Bottom Section – Sides 2 2.5 12.5 10 97.5 47,531 47,451
Bottom Section – Sides 2 2.5 12.5 10 97.5 47,531 47,451
Bottom Section – Bottom Surface 200 0 0 17 100 2,000,000 2,000,017
TOTALS:- 1,180 118,000 8,762,896

Ronan O’Driscoll
𝑦𝑦� is the maximum distance from the bottom of the combined section to the neutral axis of
the combined section
𝑦𝑦� = 𝛴𝛴Ay / 𝛴𝛴A = 118,000 / 1,180 = 100 mm

Second Moment of Area of Weld = Iu = 8,762,896 mm4
A = Area of Weld = 1,180 mm2
y = Distance to Weld Centroid = 100 mm
𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦) 16,000,000 (100)

𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 = = = 183 N/mm2
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 8,762,896
𝑃𝑃 16,000
𝜏𝜏𝑠𝑠 = = = 14 N/mm2
𝐴𝐴 1,180
𝜏𝜏𝑟𝑟 = �(𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏2 + 𝜏𝜏𝑠𝑠2 ) = �(1832 + 142 ) = 184 N/mm2
𝜏𝜏𝑟𝑟 184
= = 0.84 = 0.9 – throat thickness (t)
𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤 220
Leg Length = 1.414 (t) = 1.414 (0.9) = 1.2726 = 1.3 mm
6mm Fillet Weld:-
• Leg Length = 6 mm
• Throat Thickness = 4.2 mm
We will use a 6 mm Fillet Weld

You can go to the section for “Bolts & Welds” and select a range of tables for capacities of
bolts and welds. Just looking at this website and the section for “Fillet Welds with S275” you
will see the following data:-
Leg Length Throat thickness Longitudinal resistance Transverse resistance

s a Fw,L,Rd Fw,T,Rd
mm mm kN/mm kN/mm
6.0 4.2 0.94 1.15
When the force applied is parallel to the length of the fillet weld the longitudinal resistance
value is used.

Ronan O’Driscoll
When the force applied is perpendicular to the length of the fillet weld the transverse
resistance value is used.
If there is no moment applied and the forces are directly either longitudinal or transvers to
the length of fillet weld you can use these values as a quick check using suitable factors.
Considering the bolts from the end plate to the flange of the column (vertical section)
We will assume the Bolt Spacing shown = 300 mm = 0.3m
To evaluate the tension in the bolts: -
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 16 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 (𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
= = 53.5 kN for the top row of bolts
𝐵𝐵𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 0.3𝑚𝑚
We are using 4 bolts in this connection with 2 bolts for the top row and 2 bolts for the bottom
row.
The top row of 2 bolts will resist the tension load of 53.5 kN, which equals 27 kN per bolt.
The bottom row of 2 bolts will resist the vertical shear load of 16.0 kN, which equals 8 kN per
bolt.
Using the “Blue Book” of steel section properties, referenced above and looking at “Non
preloaded bolts – Property Class 8.8 hexagon head bolts: with S275”.
We will use M20 bolts and from the table of capacities supplied we have the following
values:-
• Tension Resistance = 141 kN > 27 kN

• Single Shear Resistance = 94.1 kN > 16 kN
• Assuming a 10 mm thick end plate – Bearing Resistance = 84.2 kN
o This assumes hole dimensions of:-
 End Distance 40 mm
 Edge Distance 30 mm
 Pitch (Spacing) 60 mm
From this we will use M20 bolts and a 10 mm thick end plate fillet welded to the cantilever
beam using a 6 mm Fillet Weld.
The beam would need to be designed and previous examples give some guidance on this.
The end plate would need some checks just to ensure it is adequate but for this loading and
using a 10 mm end plate there should be no issues. The checks include such items as:-
• The bending of the end plate from the bolt location to the weld location as the load
passes from the beam through the weld into the end plate and to the bolt to be
transferred to the column
• Shear of the end plate at the bolt location to transfer the tension load through the
thickness of the end plate
• Prying loads due to the end plate flexing / deflecting away from the column flange
and as a result increasing the tension load in the bolts
• Etc.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Likewise, there may be checks required of the column looking at the flange capacity to take
the load from the bolts back into the web of the column section, etc.
Where the design has a higher utilisation (closer to 1.0) of the materials then the amount of
checking would have to be suitable to consider if any other secondary loading could take
place and as a result increase utilisation and cause a possible failure. Likewise, if the
materials are all being utilised closer to 1.0 of their capacity, then more checks are required
to ensure everything has been suitably considered. If the utilisation is really low the risk is
reduced and using a risk-based approach to design the level of checking can be less.
So, if the designer knows what the utilisation factor of their design is they can safely
determine if a higher level of checking is required or not. This value of utilisation up to 1.0
can only be truly quantified when the designer fully understands the factors of safety applied
to their design and Permissible Stress Design allows this to be more easily quantified and
applies higher factors of safety than Limit State Design.

Ronan O’Driscoll
31 Basics of Steel Frames
We will just look at a very simple steel framed warehouse / shed to understand the individual
components and the loads applied so that those items can be designed and sized as
required. We will not go into the design as that has been covered with previous examples in
this document.
The elevation of this steel structures is as shown below and roof bracing and roof purlins are
omitted from this elevation for clarity.
The end elevation of the steel structure is as shown below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
The roof plan of the steel structure is as shown below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
The roof plan to show the roof purlins layout is as shown:
Purlins are at 2 m centres from the roof ridge for 14 m length of the roof rafters. This leaves
a remaining length of 1.8 m at the roof eaves.
From this if you look at the roof purlins for design: -
• Span = 5 m (this is simply looking at the purlins as simply supported and not
continuous)
• Centres = 2 m
• Loaded Area = 2 X 5 = 10 m2

Ronan O’Driscoll
Similarly, if you look at the roof rafters for design: -
• Span = 15.8 m
• Centres = 5 m
• Loaded Area = 15.8 X 5 = 79 m2
LOADS:-
Wind loading to the structure looking at: -
• Windward loading on the vertical face of the structure for wall loading against the
structure
• Suction as the wind passes along the vertical faces of the structure for wall loading
pulling away from the structure
• Suction to the roof as the wind passes along the roof causing uplift forces on the roof
members. This used to be predominantly Zone C loading to roofs when designing to
BS 6399-2:1997.
Minimum roof-imposed loading, refer to BS 6399-1 and BS 6399-3. This is a vertical
downwards load on the roof members.
Dead loads from the weight of the structure itself, again this is a vertical downwards load on
the roof members.
This information will then allow you to design the individual members as shown below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
For the resulting horizontal loading and the design of the roof bracing and the vertical (wall)
bracing note the loading shown below.
Loads can be resolved in a similar fashion to the truss example earlier in this document.

Ronan O’Driscoll
For the vertical bracing note BS 5975:2019 Figure 36 which is copied below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
32 BASIC CONCRETE BEAM / SIMPLE SLAB DESIGN
EXAMPLE
We will look at the simple design of a concrete slab spanning one way, i.e. not a two
spanning slab. To design this slab, we consider it as a beam being 1 m wide and it is to be
noted this principle can be followed to design a concrete beam by changing the width (b)
from 1 m to the width required for the beam design.
Basic data as follows: -
• Span = 6.0 m
• Live Load (UDL) = 7.5 kN/m2 (Unfactored)
• Live Load (Point) = 150.0 kN (Unfactored)
• Slab / Beam Depth = 250 mm
Assume: -
• Reinforced Concrete Density = 25 kN/m3

• We will design 1 m width of this slab as a beam and that detail can be repeated for
the whole slab width
Design Code being used: -
• BS 8110-1:1997 – Incorporating Amendments 1 & 2 – Structural Use of Concrete –

Part 1 – Code of practice for design and construction
• From Clause 3.4.1.2 the Effective Span = 6.0m
• This is a Limit State Design Code, and the load factors are supplied in BS 8110-
1:1997 - Table 2.1 and repeated below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Self-Weight of Slab: -
• Assuming 1 m width of slab – b = 1 m

• Self-weight = (1 m X 6 m X 0.25 m) X 25 kN/m3 = 37.5 kN
Loads:-
• Refer to BS 8110-1:1997 – Clause 2.4.1 and 2.4.3

• Characteristic Dead Load = Gk = 37.5 kN
• Characteristic Imposed Load (UDL) = Qk = 7.5 kN/m2 X 1 m X 6 m = 45 kN
• Characteristic Imposed Load (Point) = Qk = 150 kN
• 𝛾𝛾f = 1.4 for Dead Load

• 𝛾𝛾f = 1.6 for Imposed Load
• Factored Dead Load = Gk X 𝛾𝛾f = 37.5 kN X 1.4 = 52.5 kN

• Factored Imposed Load (UDL) = Qk X 𝛾𝛾f = 45 kN X 1.6 = 72.0 kN
• Factored Imposed Load (Point) = Qk X 𝛾𝛾f = 150 kN X 1.6 = 240 kN
Durability: -
• Fire resistance required is 1.5 Hours

• BS 8110-1:1997 – Clause 3.3, Tables 3.2, 3.3 & 3.4, Figure 3.2
• Exposure condition – moderate
• Nominal cover = 35 mm
• Minimum floor thickness = 110 mm < 250 mm
Design:-
• Refer to BS 8110-1:1997 – Clause 3.5 and namely Clause 3.5.1, 3.5.2 and Figure
3.6 (for concentrated loads effective widths)
• From this we can use Clause 3.4 for the design of concrete beams
• This design is assuming a simply supported slab not continuous
• Refer to Clause 3.4.4.3 Symbols used in the design and their definitions

Ronan O’Driscoll
(52.5+ 72.0) 𝑋𝑋 6 (240.0) 𝑋𝑋 6
• Bending Moment =BM= + = 93.375 + 360= 453.4 kNm
8 4
(52.5+ 72.0+240.0)
• Shear = = 182.25 kN
2
• Design resistance moment of beams, refer to Clause 3.4.4.4
• K’ = 0.156
𝑀𝑀
• K=
𝑏𝑏𝑑𝑑2 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
o M = 453.4 kNm = 453,400,000 Nmm

o b = 1 m = 1,000 mm
o fcu = 35 N/mm2
• To calculate d:-
o Assume 12 mm Diameter Reinforcing Steel
o Cover = 35 mm
o Center of Rebar = 12 / 2 = 6 mm
o d = 250 – (35 + 6) = 209 mm
453,400,000
• Therefore K = = 0.207
(1,000) (2502 ) (35)
• K > K’ – therefore Compression reinforcement is required
Noting the cross section and stress blocks as follows assuming compression reinforcement:
-

Ronan O’Driscoll
𝐾𝐾 ′
• Z = Lever arm = d �0 ⋅ 5 + �(0 ⋅ 25 − )� = 162.4 mm = 162 mm
0.9
• x = (d - Z) /0.45 = 104.4 = 104 mm
• As’ = (K – K’) fcu b d2 / 0.95 fy (d – d’)
• d’ = 250 mm – 209 mm = 41 mm
• fy = 460 N / mm2 (refer to BS 8110-1:1997 – Table 3.1)
• (K – K’) fcu b d2 = (0.207 – 0.156) 35 (1,000) 2092 = 77,970,585
• 0.95 fy (d – d’) = 0.95 (460) (209 - 41) = 73,416
• As’ = 77,970,585 / 73,416 = 1,062 mm2
• As = (K’ fcu b d2) / 0.95 fy Z + As’
• (K’ fcu b d2) = 0.156 X 35 X 1,000 X 2092 = 238,498,260
• 0.95 fy Z = 0.95 X 460 X 162 = 70,794
• As = 238,498,260 / 70,794 + 1,062 = 4,431 mm2
• 12 mm diameter reinforcing steel bar – Area = 𝜋𝜋 r2 = 114 mm2
• 20 mm diameter reinforcing steel bar – Area = 𝜋𝜋 r2 = 314.2 mm2
• For compression reinforcement - 1,062 mm2 / 114 mm2 = 9.3 = 10 No. 12 mm Bars
• For tension reinforcement – 4,431 mm2 / 114 mm2 = 38.9 = 39 No. 12 mm Bars
• Using 20mm bars for tension reinforcement – 4,431 mm2 / 314.2 mm2 = 14.1 = 15
No. 20 mm Bars
• The reinforcement is to be detailed for a 1 m width of slab when spacing is

considered and aggregate size, etc. must be considered
• A possible solution maybe 10 No. 12 mm Bars along the top at 100 mm spacing and
15 No. 20 mm Bars along the bottom at 65 mm spacing. Suitable reinforcement
chairs to be used to support the top bars and spacer blocks to give the cover to the
bottom bars. Mesh or roll mat reinforcement is always a good option if it is a slab
being cast as opposed to a beam.
Shear Design: -
• Refer to Clause BS 8110-1:1997 Clause 3.5.5.

• For symbols and definitions refer to Clause 3.5.5.1
• V = 182.25 kN

Ronan O’Driscoll
𝑉𝑉 182,250
• v= = = 0.872 = 0.87
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 1,000 (209)
• 0.8 �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0.8 √35 = 4.73 < 5 N/mm2
• 0.87 < 4.73
• Refer to Clause 3.4.5.2 for concrete beam designs
• vc – design ultimate shear stress is obtained from Table 3.8
o Effective depth = d = 209 mm
100𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 100 𝑋𝑋 4,431

o
𝑏𝑏𝑣𝑣 𝑑𝑑
= = 2.12 – we will use 2.0 for Table 3.8
1,000 𝑋𝑋 209
o Using these values – vc = 0.9392
o v < vc
• For slabs refer to Table 3.16 and for beams refer to Table 3.7
• Referring to Table 3.16 - v < vc – therefore No shear reinforcement is required for the
design
Flat Slabs and Punching Shears:-
• For flat slabs and punching shears refer to BS 8110-1:1997 Clause 3.7 and namely
Clause 3.7.6

Ronan O’Driscoll
33 BASIC CONCRETE PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN
EXAMPLE
We will look at the simple design of a concrete pad foundation.
• Column load to support = 200 kN (Unfactored)

• Column base plate plan dimensions = 300 mm X 300 mm
We will assume we have an allowable ground bearing capacity of 100 kN/m2. Refer to BS
5975:2019 Table 18 and further information supplied later in this document.
Plan Area Required for Pad Foundation:-
• 200 kN (Load) / 100 kN/m2 (allowable Bearing Capacity) = 2 m2

• For a square pad this equals – 1.414m X 1.414 m
• Assume a 1.5 m X 1.5 m pad plan dimensions
If the size of the pad foundation relative to its thickness is such that the load from the column
can be spread by dispersion at 45o over the entire plan area of the base, no bending need
be considered in the foundation design and only nominal reinforcement need be provided,
i.e.
We will assume a base thickness of 0.5 m so that D = 0.5 m as shown below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Size and Volume of Base: -
• 1.5 m X 1.5 m X 0.5 m = 1.125 m3

• Usually we can assume the weight of the soil removed for the pad foundation is at
least as great as the foundation weight, therefore ignore the weight of the pad
foundation
Pad Foundation Concrete Design
• Design to BS 8110-1:1997
• Assume cover = 75 mm – refer to Clause 3.3.1.4
• Effective Depth – d – is the depth from the compression face of the section to the
centre of area of the main reinforcement group allowing for layering, links and
concrete cover.
Therefore: - d should not be less than – 0.5 m (depth of base) – 75 mm
d = 425 mm
Loading
• Unfactored load = 200 kN

• Unfactored design pressure under foundation = 200 kN / (1.5 m X 1.5 m) = 89 kN/m2
• Assuming the 200 kN load is derived from Imposed (𝛾𝛾f = 1.6) and Dead (𝛾𝛾f = 1.4)
Loads combined, we will assume a load factor - 𝛾𝛾f = 1.5 for simplicity.
• Factored load = 89 kN/m2 X 1.5 = 134 kN/m2
Design For Moment: -
• Refer to BS 8110-1:1997 Clause 3.11.3.1

• Referring to the plan below we will consider the bending from the shaded area

Ronan O’Driscoll
• Calculate the shaded area = 1.5 m X 0.6 m = 0.9 m2 = 900,000mm2
• Load causing bending = “Shaded Area” X “Design Pressure under Foundation” = 0.9
m2 X 134 kN/m2 = 121 kN
• L = 0.6 m
𝑊𝑊 𝐿𝐿 (121) 𝑋𝑋 0.6
• Bending Moment =BM= - =- = - 36.3 kNm = - 36,000,000 Nmm
2 4
𝑀𝑀
• Refer to Clause 3.4.4.4 – K =
• Note b = 1.5 m
• Assuming K = 0.156
• The Ultimate Moment Capacity of Concrete = Mu = 0.156 X fcu X b X d2
• K’ = 0.156
• If K ≤ K’, compression reinforcement is not required
• If K > K’, compression reinforcement is required
• Assuming K ≤ K’
𝐾𝐾
o Lever arm = Z = d �0 ⋅ 5 + �(0 ⋅ 25 − )� but not greater than 0.95 d
0.9
𝑀𝑀
o Area of Tension Reinforcement = As =
0.87 (𝑓𝑓y) 𝑍𝑍
o Fy = 460 N/mm2

Ronan O’Driscoll
𝑀𝑀 36,000,000
• K= = = 0.004 < 0.156, Therefore K ≤ K’
𝑏𝑏𝑑𝑑2 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 (1,500) (425)2 ) (30)
• Compression reinforcement is not required
0.004
• Lever arm = Z = 425 �0 ⋅ 5 + �(0 ⋅ 25 − )� = 423.1 = 424 mm
0.9
• Z must not be greater than 0.95 d = 0.95 (425) = 403.75 = 404 mm
• Therefore Z = 404 mm
36,000,000
• Area of Tension Reinforcement = As = = 22.6 = 223 mm2
0.87 (460) 404
• 12 mm diameter reinforcing steel bar – Area = 𝜋𝜋 r2 = 114 mm2
• 10 mm diameter reinforcing steel bar – Area = 𝜋𝜋 r2 = 78.5 mm2
• Looking at Reinforcement Mesh:

Ronan O’Driscoll
• We need 223 mm2 for the 1.5m width which equates to 149 mm2/m
• Using Square Mesh we will use a A193 Mesh for the bottom reinforcement of the pad
foundation

Ronan O’Driscoll
Design for Shear: -
• Refer to BS 8110-1:1997 Clause 3.11.3.4

• Consider shear along a vertical section extending across the full width of the pad
foundation. Refer to Clause 3.5.5.2 and 3.5.5.3
1,500 300
• Shaded Area shown in the plan above = 1,500 mm X ( - – 425) = 1,500 X
2 2
175 = 262,500 mm2 = 0.2625 m2
• V = Shear force due to loading
= “Shaded Area” X “Design Pressure under Foudnation”
= 0.2625 m2 X 134 kN/m2 = 35.2 kN
• From Clause 3.5.5.2
𝑉𝑉 35,200
v= = = 0.006 N/mm2
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 1,500 (425)
• Assuming fcu = 30 N/mm2
• 0.8 �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0.8 √30 = 4.38 N/mm2
• 4.38 N/mm2 > v < 5 N/mm2

• 4.38 N/mm2 > 0.006 N/mm2 < 5 N/mm2
• Clause 3.4.5.4 – and Table 3.8

• vc – design ultimate shear stress is obtained from Table 3.8
o Effective depth = d = 425 mm

Ronan O’Driscoll
100𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 100 𝑋𝑋 223
o 𝑏𝑏𝑣𝑣 𝑑𝑑
= = 0.035
1,500 𝑋𝑋 425
100𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠
o We can assume 𝑏𝑏𝑣𝑣 𝑑𝑑
= 0 ≤ 0.15
o This will give conservative estimates
o Looking at values of vc from Table 3.8, it can be clearly seen that vc > v
o Referring to Table 3.16 noting, v < vc – Therefore No Shear Reinforcement is

required
Punching Shear: -
• Refer to BS 8110-1:1997 Clause 3.11.3.4 – b)

• Refer to Clause 3.7.7.6
• Punching shear around the loaded area referring to the plan below.
• Assumed design pressure under the foundation = 134 kN/m2
• d = 0.425 m = 425 mm
• 1.5 d = 425 mm X 1.5 = 637.5 mm
• For this example, the punching shear zone is outside of the foundation plan area and
as a result there clearly is not a punching shear issue for this example
• The following are steps to follow if punching shear zone was within the pad
foundation plan dimensions
• From the previous plan shown above, the “Shaded Area” would create the load
causing shear
• Load Causing Shear = V = “Shaded Area” X “Design pressure under the foundation”
𝑉𝑉 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒−𝑉𝑉

• v= =
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏 𝑑𝑑
• d is already known as noted previously

Ronan O’Driscoll
• b in this instance is not the width of the section, it is the critical perimeter for punching
shear, as shown below
• b = critical perimeter = (4 X Column Width) + (2 X 𝜋𝜋 X R)

• Shaded Area = (Total Plan Area) – ((𝜋𝜋 R2) + (Column Area) + (1.5d X Column Width
X 4))
• Check v ≤ vc

Ronan O’Driscoll
34 BASIC CONCRETE PILED FOUNDATION DESIGN
EXAMPLE
Refer to: -
• BS 8004:1986 – Code of practice for Foundations – (Formerly CP 2004)

• BS 8110-1:1997 – Clause 3.11.4 – Figure 3.23
• Fiona Cobb – Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004 – Pages 101 to
106 (inclusive)
We will look at the simple design of a concrete piled foundation.
• Column Load = 200 kN (Unfactored)

• Column Base Plate Plan Dimensions = 300 mm X 300 mm
BOREHOLE LOG:-
• Water observed at -5.8 m and below

Ronan O’Driscoll
Refer to BS 5975: 2019 Table 18
• Made ground or fill – No presumed bearing pressure

• Very soft Clays & Silts – No presumed bearing pressure
• Soft Clays and Silts - < 75 kN/m2 presumed bearing pressure
Presumed Bearing Pressures from SPT’s
• SPT = Standard Penetration Test and returns a “N” value / number

• N = 3 at -14.5 m
• Assumed Allowable Bearing Pressure = 3 X N = 3 X 10 = 30 kN/m2
• Water level is at -5.8 m and bearing pressures are halved when ground water is
present
• Resulting assumed Allowable Bearing Pressure = 30 kN/m2 / 2 = 15 kN/m2
• There are no “C” (for soil cohesion) values supplied, if they were supplied, we would
multiply by 2 to get an Allowable Bearing Pressure
• From the data supplied we will assume support from the start starting at -14.5m and
going to -18.6m, giving a supporting depth of 4.1m
Assumed Piles
• We will assume 400 mm X 400 mm pre-cast driven square piles

• Pile circumference = 1,600 mm = 1.6 m
• Pile Base Area = 160,000 mm2 = 0.16 m2
Estimation of Pile Capacity
• Maximum column load = 200kN / No. of Columns (Unfactored)

• Assume 4 No. Piles per column
• Maximum Pile Load = 200 / 4 = 50 kN (Unfactored)
• Pile Safe Working Load = QAllow
o Refer to the diagram below: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
Q𝐵𝐵 +𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠
o QAllow =
𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓
o Q 𝐵𝐵 = End Bearing Capcity of Pile
o 𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠 = Shaft Resistance of Pile
o 𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 = Factor of Safety of Pile, For Driven Piles this Equals 2.0
𝐷𝐷
o Q 𝐵𝐵 = 40 X N X X AB
𝐵𝐵
𝐷𝐷
o 40 X N X ≤ 400 N
𝐵𝐵
o 𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠 = 2 X N X As
4.1
o Q 𝐵𝐵 = 40 X 3 X X AB = 1,230 X AB
0.4
o 400 N = 1,200
o 1,230 > 1,200 – Therefore se 1,200
o Q 𝐵𝐵 = 1,200 X 0.16m2 = 192 kN
o 𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠 =2 X 3 X 1.6 m X 4.1 m (assuming the pile to -18.6m) = 39.36 kN = 39.4 kN
192 +39.4
o QAllow = = 115 kN > 50 kN
2.0
To reduce pile depth and calculate required pile length for the loading create a table as
follows: -
Depth As QB Qs Q𝐵𝐵 +𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠

QAllow =
𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓
-14.5 m
-15.0 m
-15.5 m

Ronan O’Driscoll
-16.0 m
-16.5 m
“
Ensure QAllow ≥ Maximum Column Load
Sizing Pile Cap
• Minimum Pile Spacing = 3 X “Pile 𝜙𝜙“

𝜙𝜙 𝜙𝜙
• Length of Pile Cap = 3 𝜙𝜙 + + + 150 + 150 = 4 𝜙𝜙 + 300 (in mm)
2 2
• Depth of Pile Cap = 2 𝜙𝜙 + 100
• Piles Alowable Concrete Stress = fc = 0.35 fcu
Critical Pile Cap Section for Shear
𝑁𝑁
( )
2
• V=
𝑑𝑑 𝑋𝑋 𝐿𝐿
o N = Total Pile cap Load
o d= Effective Depth (Depth of Pile cap – 75 mm)
o L = Length of Pile cap
2 𝑑𝑑
• Shear Capacity – Vc X
𝑎𝑎𝑣𝑣
o Vc = Design Concrete Shear Stress form BS8110-1:1997 – Table 3.8
• V ≤ Shear Capacity or 0.8 �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 or 5 N/mm2
• Refer to the diagram below: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
Pile Cap Permieter for Punching Shear
• Check not required is spacing ≤ 3 𝜙𝜙

• Refer to BS 8110-1:1997 Figure 3.23 and the diagram above
𝑁𝑁
• V=
𝑑𝑑 𝑋𝑋 "𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒"
• V ≤ 0.8 �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 or 5 N/mm2
NOTE:-
o If pile cap depth = 2 𝜙𝜙 + 100, the shear check is not critical
Following this you could look at the Bending Moment accross the pile cap between the
coulmn and the piles and use that to calculate:-
𝑀𝑀
o K= , and form this the reinforcing required as per previous examples

Ronan O’Driscoll
35 Blinding Concrete
Refer to BS 5975 :2019 Clause 16.5.2 which states: -
Blinding concrete is intended only to prevent local degradation of the soil and to provide an
even surface. Its thickness should be not less than 50 mm. The allowable bearing pressure
should be the same as that of the underlying soil or weak rock, up to a maximum of 2 000
kN/m2.
36 Concrete Spread Footings

Refer to BS 5975 :2019 Clause 16.5.3 which states: -
Mass concrete intended to transfer load direct to the ground and more than 100 mm thick
should be regarded as a spread footing. Spreading from the perimeter of load at an angle of
45° to the axis of the load may be assumed in calculating the bearing pressure on the
ground.

Ronan O’Driscoll
37 Concrete Reinforcement Tie Types
Slash tie, are the most used infill ties. Often the wire ties are doubled for added strength.
Ring Slash, or wall ties prevent bar displacement and are often used to tie smooth stirrups to
main deformed bars
Hairpin or Saddle tie, is used as an alternative to the ring slash tie and is excellent for key
bars

Ronan O’Driscoll
Ring Hairpin or saddle tie with a twist, is sometimes used to tie main bars and to prevent bar
displacement
Crown tie, cross tie or figure-eight tie is a common tie used on main bars for setting up and
tying springy bars
Splice Tie, is used when tying lapped lengths of rebar, etc.

Ronan O’Driscoll
38 Concrete Backpropping in Multi-Storey Construction
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Clause 19.3.4 and Table 21.
38.1.1 TABLE 9 – Example of percentage of Load Transfer for less than

350mm thick flat slabs (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 21)

Ronan O’Driscoll
39 Basic Timber Design
Please refer to: -
• BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.4, where this material is taken from

• BS 5268-2:2002 – Structural use of Timber – Part 2 – Code of Practice for
Permissible Stress Design, materials, and workmanship
• BS 4978:2007 +A2:2017 – Visual Strength grading of softwood – Specification
140 (inclusive)
• CS30 Formwork – A Guide to Good Practice – 3rd Edition – Concrete Society
• Formwork – A Guide to Good Practice – 3rd Edition – Worked Examples - Concrete
Society
BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.4 gives design guidance for timber and what follows is a summary
of that guidance.
The minimum recommended timber strength class for use in Construction Engineering is
C16.
39.1.1 TABLE 10 – Values for Basic Stresses and Moduli of Elasticity for
the Wet Condition (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 3)

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.2 Timber Size
The preferred sizes of sawn timber are stated in BS EN 1313-1:1997 for softwood and in BS
EN 1313-2:1999 for hardwood timber.
The recommended target and actual sizes of softwood timber generally used in falsework
are shown in Table 11. It should be noted that when used in falsework a rectangular timber
is used the strong way around. For example, a 75 mm × 150 mm timber would be used with
the 150 mm side vertical and referred to as “depth 150 mm” in Table 11; whereas this same
dimension would be regarded as “width 150 mm” in BS EN 1313‑1:1997.
39.2.1 TABLE 11 – Preferred target sizes and actual dimensions for

constructional sawn softwood timber (Refer to BS 5975:2019 –
Table 7)
39.3 Timber Modification Factors

The wet grade stresses given in Table 10 should be multiplied by the appropriate
modification factors as shown in BS 5975:2019.
39.3.1 Size – K1
The values supplied in Table 10 have a size modification factor K1 already applied which
equals 1.0.
39.3.2 Moisture Content – K2

The values supplied in Table 10 have a moisture content modification factor K2 already
applied.
The value of K2 applied is based on timber to Service class 3 (wet exposure) stresses with a
moisture content greater than 20%.
39.3.3 Duration of Load – K3

The wet grade stresses provided in Table 10 are for timber under load for 50 years, but
timber will safely sustain higher stresses for shorter periods. Table 12 gives appropriate
values for modification factor K3. The effect is cumulative over the life of the timber, unless
the time lapse between loadings is at least equal to the time during which loads have been
imposed.

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.3.4 TABLE 12 – Modification factor, K3 for duration of load n
falsework (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 8)
39.3.5 Compression perpendicular to the grain – Bearing Stress

Modification - K4
There should be no wane at bearing positions. Stresses given in tables generally assume
that there will be no wane or loss of section at these points. Values for compressive stress
perpendicular to the grain are reduced where wane is permitted and are shown in brackets
in the tables. In no case should the wane exceed that permitted in BS 4978:2007.
The values supplied in Table 10 may be increased by a factor of 1.2 to give values
appropriate for Construction Engineering, this factor was first introduced in BS 5975:1982.
Where the bearing area is short along the grain, a higher stress may be taken, provided that
there is at least 75 mm of timber each side of the bearing. Appropriate values for the
modification factor K4 are given in Table 13.
39.3.6 TABLE 13 – Modification factor, K4 for bearing stress (Refer to BS

5975:2019 – Table 9)
39.4 Compression parallel to the grain

If the timber is intended to be used as struts, with the load end bearing n the timber,
appropriate stresses should be obtained from BS 5268-2:2002.
39.5 Depth-to-breath ratios

There is a risk of tall timbers turning sideways and being unstable. Table 14 gives the ratios
that should not be exceeded.

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.5.1 TABLE 14 – Maximum Depth to Breath Ratios (Refer to BS
5975:2019 – Table 10)
39.6 Shear
The values for basic stress parallel to the grain given in Table 10 may be increased by an
additional factor of 1.5 to give the permissible shear stress for timber in Construction
Engineering applications.
This factor was first introduced in BS 5975:1982. It is noted that this additional factor should
not be confused with the 1.5 factor to convert average stress to maximum shear stress on
parabolic distributions.
The load applied to a timber member generates a shear force with components both in line
and at right angles to the direction of the applied load. Generally, timber is loaded with the
applied vertical load perpendicular to the grain, and it is the shear stress parallel to the grain,
i.e. in the horizontal direction, that is the limiting condition. The distribution of the horizontal
shear stress is not uniform, for example on a rectangular section, see Figure 33 & 34, the
horizontal shear stress is parabolic.
NOTE Previous editions of BS 5975 referred to the permissible shear stress as
“perpendicular to grain”; this has been corrected and referred to as “parallel to grain”.

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.6.1 FIGURE 33 – Shear stress on a timber of rectangular cross-
section (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Figure 5)

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.6.2 FIGURE 34 – Shear stress diagram for a rectangular solid section
(Refer to Formwork – A guide to good practice – 3rd Edition – Figure
38)
Timber of rectangular cross section should be checked for shear in the following manner
(also see Figure 34).
a) Calculate the average shear stress perpendicular to the grain by dividing the shear
force by the cross-sectional area.
b) Calculate the maximum shear stress parallel to the grain by multiplying the average
shear stress perpendicular to the grain by 1.5 (the stress distribution is parabolic with
its maximum occurring at the neutral axis).
3𝐹𝐹
𝜏𝜏 = 2𝑏𝑏ℎ𝑣𝑣
where:
𝜏𝜏 is the shear stress
Fv is the shear force.

Ronan O’Driscoll
c) Compare the maximum horizontal shear stress with the appropriate value for the
shear stress parallel to the grain as given in Table 10.
Care should be taken to ensure that splits are not positioned where high shear stresses are
expected (see BS 5975: 2019 Clause16.4.4).
Where the cross-section is not rectangular, the distribution is not parabolic and reference
should be made to structural handbooks for calculation of the maximum shear stress.
39.7 Timber Permissible Stresses
The stresses given in Table 15 may be used for general falsework calculations if the
following conditions apply (the relevant modification factors described have been applied):
a) the timber is loaded such that load sharing is not considered;
b) the timber has been accepted as appropriate to the class concerned;
c) the duration of the load does not exceed one week;
d) the bearing length does not exceed 75 mm, there is at least 75 mm of timber each
side of the bearing, and take-up is not critical;
e) the depth-to-breadth ratios of Table 14 are not exceeded; and
f) the depth of timber does not exceed 300 mm.
The stresses given in Table 16 may be used for falsework calculations where load sharing,
see BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.4.2.10, is applicable and if the following conditions apply (the
modification factors described have already been applied):
1) the load sharing system comprises four or more members spaced a maximum of 610
mm centre to centre;
2) the timber has been accepted as appropriate to the class concerned;
3) the duration of the load does not exceed one week;
4) the bearing length does not exceed 75 mm, there is at least 75 mm of timber each
side of the bearing, and take-up is not critical;
5) the depth-to-breadth ratios of Table 14 are not exceeded; and
6) the depth of timber does not exceed 300 mm.

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.7.1 TABLE 15 – Permissible Stresses and Moduli of Elasticity for
General Falsework Applications (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 12)

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.7.2 TABLE 16 – Permissible Stresses and Moduli of Elasticity for
Load-Sharing Falsework Applications (Refer to BS 5975:2019 –
Table 13)
39.8 Timber Depth – K7

The data for bending stress parallel to the grain given in Table 10, Table 15 and Table 16
are applicable to solid timber which is 300 mm deep. For beams between 72 mm and 300
mm in depth, slightly higher figures are appropriate. Table 17 gives the value of the
modification factor K7 for timbers less than 300 mm deep. For timbers more than 300 mm
deep, see BS 5268‑2:2002 – Clause 2.10.6.
39.8.1.1.1 Table 17 – Depth Modification Facto K7 for solid timber less than
300 mm depth (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 11)
39.9 Timber Load Sharing – K8

Where a single member may carry its full share of the load unaided by its neighbours, the
appropriate working stresses and the minimum value of modulus of elasticity should be
used, but if members are spaced not more than 610 mm apart, and there is adequate

Ronan O’Driscoll
provision for lateral distribution of loads by means of decking or joists spanning at least four
supports, the stresses may be increased by a modification factor of K8 = 1.1.
39.10 Grading Used Timber

Where the origin and grading of the material is no longer known, it can be regraded if the
species is known, although this should be done by a person capable of such work.
Cross cutting will not reduce the grading, but when timber is ripsawn after stress grading, the
original grading will no longer be valid.
Timber should be discarded if any of the following are present:
a) it has been painted such that it prevents assessment.
b) there is any sign of rot, fungal or chemical.
c) there are cuts in the edge greater than one-twentieth of the thickness of the section.
d) there are holes in the two outer thirds.
e) there is other mechanical damage.
f) there is any undue distortion of shape.
g) in the case of timber to be used for beams or columns, there is a piece containing
any fissures at slopes greater than 1:6 for class C16 or 1:10 for class C24.
In cases c) and d), the design may be based on the remaining good section.
Timber should never be reused without a careful inspection.
39.11 Bending Stress

To calculate the Applied Bending Stress so it can be compared to the allowable bending
stress parallel to the grain from Tables 10, 15 or 16.
Get the Maximum Bending Moment (M) and divide it by the Section Modulus (Z), so that: -
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 (𝑀𝑀)
Applied Bending Stress =
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 (𝑍𝑍)
Use the section dimensions from Table 11 i.e. 75mm X 150mm timber dimensions = 72mm
X 145mm
(𝑏𝑏𝑑𝑑2 )
Z=
6

Ronan O’Driscoll
39.12 Bending Stiffness - EI
For deflection calculations it may be beneficial to calculate the Bending Stiffness (EI) so you
have the value ready to be placed in the deflection formula.
Simply select the relevant Modulus of Elasticity value (E) from Table 10, 15 or 16.
Depending on the application as stated in the table titles being the basic stresses, general
for Falsework or load sharing.
Use the section dimensions from Table 11 i.e. 75mm X 150mm timber dimensions = 72mm
X 145mm
(𝑏𝑏𝑑𝑑3 )
I=
12
From this you have both values so that you can multiply E X I to give the Bending Stiffness
(EI) in Nmm2 (depending on the units used).

Ronan O’Driscoll
40 Foundations
Please refer to: -
• BS 5975:2019 Clause 18 and 19.6, where this material has been copied from
• BS 8004:2015 – Code of practice for Foundations
• BS 8002:2015 – Code of practice for Earth Retaining structures
• BS 6031:2009 – Code of Practice for Earthworks
• BS 8000-1:1989 – Workmanship on Building Sites – Part 1: Code of Practice for
Excavation and Filling
• BS 5930:1999 +A2:2010 – Code of Practice for Site Investigations
• HSE “Safety in Excavations” HSG 185
116 (inclusive)
BS 5975:2019 Clause 18 gives guidance for foundations and ground conditions and what
follows is a summary of that guidance.
BS 5975 Clause 18 states this section is only a guide to the assessment of critical properties
of the ground conditions beneath the falsework and their potential effect on the safety of the
falsework. In some cases, where ground conditions are not straightforward, it will be
necessary to obtain the advice of an engineer experienced in geotechnics.
BS 8004:1986 sets out the methods of assessment of ground engineering properties by site
investigations and the importance of those properties with regard to the behaviour of
particular strata when subjected to loading, vibrations, variation in water content or
environmental influence. It describes the different ways in which foundations can be
provided in the ground to provide adequate safe bearing capacities and control of deflections
or other movements.
However, it should be noted that BS 8004:1986 relates almost entirely to permanent
foundations. BS 5975:2019 Clause 18 sets out some of the special considerations relating to
falsework foundations.
BS 8004:2015 Clause 4.9.2 references Construction Engineering (Temporary Works) and
states the following:-
• The design and construction of temporary excavations, trenches, pits and shafts
should conform to BS 6031.
• The procedural controls that should be applied to all aspects of temporary works
BS 8002:2015 Clause 4.9.2 references Construction Engineering (Temporary Works) and
states the following:-
• The design and construction of temporary excavations, trenches, pits and shafts
• The procedural controls that should be applied to all aspects of temporary works

Ronan O’Driscoll
BS 6031:2009 – Code of Practice for Earthworks references Construction Engineering
(Temporary Works) as follows:-
In Section 3 – Clause 13.1 this code references the following: -
• Procedural controls of Temporary Works for excavations should be undertaken in

accordance with BS 5975
Clause 13.5 – The design of Stable Slopes and Supports to Excavations states the following:
-
• For routine excavations, in stable ground conditions, information on the loads to be

resisted or the load resisting capabilities of the excavation support system should be
available from supplier’s literature or websites or by reference to standard texts such
as CIRIA R97.
• In other situations, geotechnical engineering principles using strength parameters
obtained from site investigation work should be used to design the excavation
support system in accordance with accepted procedures.
Section 14 Construction Procedure, Clause 14.1 Support of Temporary Excavations states
the following: -
• Temporary excavation support systems should be selected, for one or more of the
following purposes:
o The protection of persons within and around the excavation
o The control of movement of the ground around the excavation perimeter; or
o To minimise the excavated area
Clause 14.1.3 – Buildability Criteria – states the following: -
There are a number of issues relating to the buildability of the support system which should
be considered:
• Means and sequence of installation

• Maintenance of the system when in use
• Backfilling requirements
• Ease of striking parts or all of system without compromising safety
• Protection against falls of system components due to unintended removal of load.
• Temporary support and reinstatement of service crossings.
NOTE: - Practical Guidance on these issues can be found in HSE “Safety in Excavations”
HSG 185, BS 6031: 1981 and supplier’s literature and websites. BS 6031: 1981 is
obsolescent, but is considered to contain important information on timber support, and is still
available from BSI.
BS 8000-1:1989 – Workmanship on Building Sites – Part 1: Code of Practice for Excavation

and Filling, states the following: -
In Section 3.37 – Trench Support it states the following: -
Provide support for all vertically sided trenches more than 1.2m deep and for shallower
trenches in which personnel will have to work substantially below surface level.

Ronan O’Driscoll
COMMENTARY: Sides of trenches or other excavations can never be relied upon to stay up
without support. A person can be buried even in a shallow trench. Many collapse soon after
the trench has been excavated. It is important that no one enters an unprotected trench for
any reason at all.
If temporary excavations are to be made self-supporting by battering of sides, the angle of
batter of the ground will normally be stable if it is in general accord with the values in Table
1.
Further guidance is given in BS 6031 and the Construction Industry Research and
Information Association Report 97.
The legal requirements for the temporary support of excavations are contained in
Construction (General Provisions) Regulations, 1961.
HSE “Safety in Excavations” HSG 185 states the following: -

Clause No. 29 – Battering & Stepping states the following: -
• Any unsupported excavation will be safe without support only if its sides are battered
back sufficiently, or if the excavation is in sound rock. Battering back the sides of an
excavation to a safe angle is an acceptable means of preventing instability. In many
situations this is the simplest and safest way of ensuring stability and should receive
first consideration. In granular soils the angles of slope should be less than the
natural angle of reposes of the material being excavated. In wet ground considerably
flatter slope will be required.
Clause No. 32 states the following: -
• Stepping the excavation sides is an alternative to battering. In this method one or

more steps are cut into the excavation side(s). The depth and width of the step need
to be determined using the typical slope angles given in Table 2, although the vertical
distances should not exceed 1.2m.

Ronan O’Driscoll
40.1 Slope and Stability
The slope of the ground can cause stability problems and it is recommended that the slope
of the surface on which the falsework rests should not exceed 1 in 6 unless approved by a
suitably qualified engineer specializing in geotechnics or the foundations are specially
designed to cater for the slope of the ground. The stability of the ground above and below
the falsework site should also be considered.
1 in 6 would be equivalent to a maximum 1m vertical in every 6m horizontal distance or a
slope angle not exceeding 9 degrees.

Ronan O’Driscoll
40.2 California Bearing Ratio Guidance
Interim Advice Note 73/06 – Design Guidance for Road Pavement Foundations references
the following: -
Stiffness Modulus: The ratio of applied stress to induced strain.
Foundation Surface Modulus: a ‘Stiffness Modulus’ based on the application of a known
load at the top of the foundation; it is a composite value with contributions from all underlying
layers.
Layer Modulus: The ‘stiffness modulus’ assigned to a given foundation layer; for
hydraulically bound materials this will take account of degradation due to cracking.
Element Modulus: The modulus of elasticity measured in a laboratory test; for hydraulically
bound materials it is generally significantly greater than the layer modulus.
Clause 3.9 of this document states: -
The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) is traditionally used as an index test for subgrade
strength, but it should be recognised that there is no definitive relationship between CBR and
Stiffness Modulus (E). The following equation has been derived from work on certain UK
soils (Powell et al, 1984) and may be used to give an estimate of Stiffness Modulus,
acknowledging a degree of uncertainty.
E = 17.6 (CBR) 0.64 MPa
The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test is a simple strength test that compares the bearing
capacity of a material with that of a well-graded crushed stone, i.e., a high-quality crushed
stone material should have a CBR of 100%. You are comparing the resistance of a given
material to the resistance of an ideal crushed stone that will support 1,000 Pounds per
Square Inch (psi) at 0.1 Inch deflection.
CBR tests only load a very shallow depth of ground and as a result only gives information on
the ground very close to the level of the test. To relate CBR to bearing capacity, the designer
must be very confident that there are no weaker strata within the depth of influence of the
foundation.
The publication “Geotechnique” Volume 11, Issue 1, March 1961 published a paper by
W.P.M. Black titled “The Calculation of Laboratory and in-situ Values for California Bearing
Ratio from Bearing Capacity Data”. Within this document the following information can be
viewed: -
qu Bearing Capacity (psi)
𝑞𝑞𝑢𝑢
CBR =
10
Which equates to qu = CBR X 10
This is based on findings from Wilson and Williams, 1960 and Rosenak, 1968.

Ronan O’Driscoll
It is noted this paper is titled for cohesive soils but Black notes that the Equations 2 and 3 in
the paper were applied to tests on sand and shown to give virtually identical values for the
bearing capacity.
From this to get a bearing capacity in kN/m2 :-
qu = (CBR X 10) X 6.89476
A Factor Of Safety of 3.0 should then be applied to this number to get an Allowable Ground
Bearing Capacity in kN/m2. It maybe possible to reduce this Factor Of Safety if the soil has
been thoroughly investigated and the engineer is suitably competent and experienced to
confirm this is acceptable and reduce this Factor.

Ronan O’Driscoll
40.3 Site Investigation for Falsework Foundations
Some advice on identification and description of soils is given in Table 18, but for further
information on the identification and classification of soils and rocks for engineering
purposes, reference should be made to BS 5930:1999.

Ronan O’Driscoll
40.3.1 TABLE 18 – Identification and Description of Soils (Refer to BS
5975:2019 – Table 19)

Ronan O’Driscoll
Initially, the nature of the soil and/or rock should be identified and placed within one or more
of the classifications given in Table 18.
40.3.2 TABLE 19 – Presumed allowable bearing pressure under vertical

static loading (Refer to BS 5975:2019 – Table 18)

Ronan O’Driscoll
Table 18 of BS 5975:2019 – Presumed allowable bearing pressure under vertical static
loading has been created from BS 8004:1986 Table 1 and is repeated in Fiona Cobb –
Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004 – Page 100 as shown below in Table
20.
40.3.3 TABLE 20 – Typical allowable bearing pressures under static

loads (refer to Fiona Cobb – Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st
Edition 2004 – Page 100)

Ronan O’Driscoll
A suitably competent Construction Engineering Coordinator can use this information to
calculate an assumed allowable ground bearing pressure provided the soil is suitably
identified and described. Of course, there are limitations to this that BS 5975:2019 highlights
and describes.
The other point to note that the values for allowable bearing pressures stated in the tables
have a Factor Of Safety of 2.0 already applied to them as this is Permissible Stress Design.
To use these values unfactored loads are used to estimate the required value from the table
provided.
BS 5975:2019 Clause 18.2 states: -
In many instances there will be no doubt as to the uniformity of the soil and/or rock under the
area on which the falsework will be founded and the strength and characteristics of the strata
will be clearly adequate to receive the applied loads safely. In cases of variable strata, or
when any doubt exists concerning the adequacy of knowledge of the soil or rock beneath the
foundations, then a site investigation involving bore holes and/or trial pits should be carried
out and the properties of the underlying strata determined. This will enable a suitably
experienced designer to determine the general stability of the ground in the vicinity of the
falsework location and predict the likely settlement of the falsework.
When a site investigation is undertaken for the permanent design, it is desirable that any
additional data likely to be needed for the falsework should also be obtained. This will
normally be the properties of the soils and rocks at shallow depths, up to one and a half
times the width (1.5 x B – where B is the width of the foundation) of the falsework structure.
Essential properties of the soils and rocks are in situ density, moisture content and shear
strength characteristics.

Ronan O’Driscoll
40.4 Depths for Site Investigation and Sampling
BS 5975:2019 Annex F states: -
The following gives an outline of the methods used for routine investigations, but other
methods may be required for special ground conditions.
a) Gaining access to the ground
1) Shallow machine-dug trial pits (maximum depth approximately 5 m).
2) Hand auger boring (suitable only for cohesive soil).
3) Cable percussion boring (i.e. the “shell and auger” method, suitable for any
soil or weak rock).
4) Rotary core drill (used for proving rock).
b) Determining ground water conditions
1) Standing water levels can be measured in pits and bore holes provided these
have been left open long enough for the water level to reach equilibrium.
2) Piezometers (stand pipes) can be installed as an alternative to leaving open
the pits and bore holes. Grout seals may be required if there is more than one
water-bearing stratum.
c) Samples
1) Disturbed samples taken from the drill tools or excavator bucket.
2) Thick-wall samples taken in connection with the standard penetration test
(see 3.3 (test 19) of BS 1377‑9:1990), and suitable only for visual examination
or laboratory classification tests.
3) 100 mm general purpose samples (see BS 5930:1999), nominally undisturbed
and suitable for most laboratory tests.
d) Bore hole tests
1) Standard penetration test (see 3.3 (test 19) of BS 1377‑9:1990) gives an
indication of the consistency of soils and weak rocks and is widely used in
granular soils.
2) Vane test (see 4.4 (test 18) of BS 1377‑9:1990) measures the shear strength
of cohesive soils and is particularly useful in soft clays.
e) Frequency of samples and bore hole tests
The following general procedures will be found suitable for most investigations.
1) A disturbed sample should be taken at the top of each new stratum and
thereafter at 1 m intervals.
2) In cohesive soils, a 100 mm general purpose sample should be taken at the
top of each new stratum, at proposed foundation depth, and at 1 m intervals
through each stratum.
3) In granular soils, standard penetration tests should be taken at similar
intervals to those for the 100 mm samples.
4) In mixed granular and cohesive soils, 100 mm samples and standard
penetration tests should be carried out alternately.

Ronan O’Driscoll
40.5 Modification Factors Applied to Presumed Bearing Pressures
(Table 18)
BS 5975:2019 Clause 18.5 (which is repeated here) provides modification factors to apply to
the presumed bearing pressure values in Table 19 (BS 5975:2019 Table 18). Simply multiply
the selected value from Table 19 by the selected modification factor to get a presumed
bearing pressure to use.
40.5.1 Modification Factor for Reliability of Site Information

In the case of homogeneous (of the same kind) ground and where there is no test data, the
values of presumed allowable bearing pressures given in Table 19 may be used for the
support of vertical loads.
The excavation for the foundations of the permanent structure will frequently provide a check
on the assumptions previously made and an opportunity to determine the nature of the
ground conditions.
If there is no such opportunity and no other direct examination of the ground is possible, the
presumed bearing pressures given in Table 19 should be multiplied by a factor of 0.75.
40.5.2 Modification Factor for Settlements of Foundations Underneath

the Falsework
In the design of the falsework full account should be taken of the effects of settlement of the
foundations, both uniform and differential. Differential settlement can be caused by various
conditions, such as variation in ground under the falsework when part of the falsework is
being supported on the permanent work, and variations in loading. Both uniform and
differential settlement of the falsework can also have an effect on the permanent works,
especially during the initial set and early gain in strength of permanent works concrete, and
can result in damage to these works.
Where the soil on which the falsework rests is susceptible to settlements and such
movement would be of consequence to the falsework system, the presumed allowable
bearing pressures given in Table 19 should be multiplied by a factor of 0.75 for soils in
groups 2 and 3 (Non-cohesive soils & Cohesive soils) in order to restrict the magnitude of
the settlement. Where long-term settlement or a settlement of any magnitude is likely to
prove unacceptable, a more detailed settlement analysis should be carried out.
40.5.3 Modification Factor for Ground Water Levels

The presumed allowable bearing pressures given in Table 19 only apply where the ground
water level lies at a depth below the foundation greater than the width of that foundation, i.e.
groundwater level is greater than 1 x B under the foundation.
Continued flooding or wet weather will soften clay soils. Where site flooding and/or high
ground water levels are likely to be experienced the presumed allowable bearing pressures
in Table 19 should be multiplied by the factor given in Table 21.

Ronan O’Driscoll
40.5.3.1 TABLE 21 – Groundwater level modification factor (refer to BS
5975:2019 – Table 20)
40.6 Simple Foundations on Sands and Gravels (Non-Cohesive

Soils) - SPT Values
Where lightly loaded foundations on sands and gravels are proposed, the allowable bearing
pressure can be assessed from standard penetration tests (SPTs) and is based on
settlements rather than shear failure since the latter is a rare phenomenon with granular
soils. The exception to this is a foundation less than one metre wide, where shearing might
occur.
The SPT value will be supplied as a “N” number, which is the sum of the number of blows
required to drive the sample tube as stated in relevant British Standards for this test.
Refer to Fiona Cobb – Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004 – Pages 101.
Using the N value supplied following the SPT test this N value can be multiplied by a suitable
number to get an allowable bearing pressure as follows: -
Pad Footing on Dry Soil: –
• N x 10 = Allowable Ground Bearing pressure in Newtons (N)

• This value has Factor Of Safety applied of 3
Strip Footing on Dry Soil: –
• N x 7 = Allowable Ground Bearing pressure in Newtons (N)

• This value has Factor Of Safety applied of 3
Spread Foundation at or below groundwater table: –
• (Allowable Ground Bearing Pressure as calculated above) / 2 = Allowable Ground

Bearing pressure in Newtons (N)
40.7 Simple Foundations on Cohesive Soils – C Values

In cohesive soils, the allowable bearing pressure can be determined from shear tests. The
following equations may be used; they incorporate a factor of safety against failure of three
(𝛾𝛾f = 3.0), which is the value normally adopted.
a) Strip foundations. The allowable bearing pressure, qb (in kN/m2), is given by the
expression:
qb =1 7 c
where:
c is the undrained shear strength (in kN/m2)

Ronan O’Driscoll
b) Square foundations. The allowable bearing pressure, qb (in kN/m2), is given by the
expression:
qb = 2 c
where:
c is the undrained shear strength (in kN/m2).
It is important to note that the allowable bearing pressures derived from these expressions
are not linked to any particular values of settlement.
40.8 Fill Material

In cases where the filling material is variable in consistency and unable to receive and
transmit loads uniformly, a minimum depth of 0.5 m of the fill should be removed and
replaced by well compacted and stabilized granular material of known bearing capacity.
Allowable bearing pressures for the foundations of falsework on fully compacted controlled
filling should not exceed:
a) 200 kN/m2, for broken rock;
b) 150 kN/m2, for well graded sands and gravels;
c) 100 kN/m2, for uniform sands and hard shaley clays;
d) 50 kN/m2, for firm to stiff clays;
e) 25 kN/m2, for soft clay.
Poorly compacted or suspect material should be considered as being similar to a soft clay.
Note these values have a factor of safety of 2.0 already applied.
40.9 Protection of the Foundation Area

The area covered by the foundations under the falsework should be considered in relation to
the general topography of the surrounding ground and the likelihood of outside influences
affecting it and steps taken to safeguard it. The continued safe performance of the ground
under and round the falsework foundations will depend on their remaining unaffected by:
a) local influences of water from water courses, extreme rainfall, melting snow or burst
water mains;
b) severe frosts or excessively dry and hot weather;
c) movements of surrounding ground subjected to excavation, filling or other changes;
d) all pressures applied by other adjacent construction operations.
In many instances, parts of the foundations to the falsework incorporate concrete bedding
and it is good practice to extend this concrete as a blinding layer over the entire area under
the falsework and any surrounding areas used as working areas or that are susceptible to
environmental conditions and which by virtue of changes could jeopardize the performance
of the soils under the falsework.
The embedding of sole plates in both cohesive and non-cohesive soils will increase bearing
capacity and give protection against the effects of scour, softening, frost and seasonal
moisture changes. Where this is not feasible it is good practice to bed and haunch sole
plates with concrete.

Ronan O’Driscoll
41 Excavation Guidance for Construction Engineering
For excavation guidance for Construction Engineering the author would direct the reader to
CIRIA Report 97 – Trenching Practice, and the information here has been copied from that
publication.
CIRIA Report 97 provides design information that can be used directly on site by suitably
competent and experienced individuals and this information can be referenced by the
Construction Engineering Coordinators (CEC) in the Construction Engineering Register
(CER).
The assumptions within CIRIA Report 97 for design is clearly stated on Page 5 of that
document as follows: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
Ronan O’Driscoll
CIRIA Report 97 Page 12 provides a table for excavation temporary safe slopes as follows:

Ronan O’Driscoll
Ronan O’Driscoll
CIRIA Report 97 provides guidance for the design of ground support to trenches and the
resulting Waler (horizontal member to support horizontal loading) and Soldier (vertical
member to support horizontal loading) design and capacities.
There is allot of very good and valuable information presented in this document in a very
simple and concise manner that makes the reading and use of the information relatively easy
and as a result the author would recommend the reader gets a copy and keeps it for reference.

Ronan O’Driscoll
42 Working Platform Foundations for Plant
There are several reference documents on this, and the author would recommend the reader
to get copies of the following publications which are: -
• CIRIA C703 – Crane Stability on Site

• Construction Plant-hire Association (CPA) – Ground Conditions for Construction
Plant – Good practice Guide
• BRE 470 – Working Platforms for Tracked Plant
• Working Platforms – Design of Granular Working platforms for Construction Plant –
A Guide to good practice – Temporary Works forum (TWf)
Referring to BRE 470 for Granular Platform Design and Appendix A information from that
document is copied here as follows:-
The design calculation is based on an analysis developed by Meyerhof and his co-workers
for a footing punching through a strong platform material overlying a weak subgrade. The
analysis based on punching failure represents a major simplification of the actual field
situation and is semi-empirical in character. Results from the design calculations have been
calibrated against other design methods for strip loadings and also against the experience of
Federation of Piling Specialists (FPS) members in the design and performance of working
platforms for piling rigs.
BRE 470 Appendix A1 describes the general approach on which these design calculations
are based. BRE 470 Appendix A2 applies the method to working platforms on cohesive
subgrades and BRE 470 Appendix A3 to working platforms on granular subgrades. The
major difference between the two types of subgrade is that the strength of a cohesive
subgrade can be characterised by an undrained shear strength cu and the strength of a
granular subgrade can be characterised by an angle of shearing resistance 𝜑𝜑 ′ .
It is emphasised that where the subgrade is very weak, layered or sloping, or where
calculations based on the routine design suggest an excessively deep platform, it may be
appropriate to undertake more sophisticated types of calculation. Such methods are not
described in BRE 470.
42.1 Working Platform Design – General Approach

Where a load is applied directly to the subgrade, the bearing resistance can be readily
calculated using well established bearing capacity factors. Where a load is applied to a
working platform which has been placed on the subgrade, the procedure for calculating the
bearing resistance of this two-soil system is less well established.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Bearing Resistance (R) of a cohesive subgrade:-
R = cu Nc sc
Where:-
R Bearing Resistance
cu Undrained Shear Strength of cohesive material
Nc Bearing Capacity Factor of cohesive subgrade = (2 +𝜋𝜋 )
Sc Shape Factor = 1 + 0.2 (W / L)
Bearing Resistance (R) of a granular subgrade:-

R = 0.5 (γ′s) W Nγs sγ
Where:-
γ′s Effective Unit Weight of the subgrade
W Width of applied load
Nγs Bearing Capacity Factor of granular subgrade and provided in BRE 470
Table A1 and Figure A2
sγ Shape Factor = 1 - 0.3 (W / L)

Ronan O’Driscoll
Using the simplified analysis developed by Meyerhof and his co-workers for a footing punching
through a dense sand layer overlying soft clay.
The following expression is obtained for the bearing resistance of a platform on a cohesive
subgrade:
R = ( cu Nc sc )+ (γp D2 / W) Kp tanδ sp
Where:-
cu Undrained Shear Strength of cohesive material
Nc Bearing Capacity Factor of cohesive subgrade = (2 + 𝜋𝜋 )
sc Shape Factor = 1 + 0.2 (W / L)

γp Is the bulk unit weight of the platform material
D is the thickness of the material
W Width of the applied load
KpTanδ Is the punching shearing resistance coefficient refer to BRE 470 Table
A2 and Figure A4
sp Shape Factor = 1 + (W / L)

Ronan O’Driscoll
Bearing Resistance (R) of a platform on a granular subgrade:-
R = ( 0.5 γ′s W Nγs sγ ) + (γpD2/W) Kptanδ sp
Where:-
γ′s Effective unit weight of the subgrade
W Width of the applied load
Nγs Bearing Capacity Factor of granular subgrade
sγ Shape Factor = 1 - 0.3 (W / L)
γp Is the bulk unit weight of the platform material
D is the thickness of the material
KpTanδ Is the punching shearing resistance coefficient refer to BRE 470 Table
A2 and Figure A4
sp Shape Factor = 1 + (W / L)
Where structural geosynthetic reinforcement is used in the working platform foundation for
plant design it is usually provided as a reinforced layer in which the geosynthetic is designed
to take tensile loads.
If the geosynthetic is not incorporated into the working platform to take tensile loading and it
has another purpose it cannot be used in the calculations for the required thickness of the
working platform.
The design tensile strength of the reinforcement (Td) should be evaluated by applying a
minimum factor of 2 to the ultimate tensile strength (Tult) of the reinforcement so that:
Td = Tult / 2
Where the reinforcement is not stiff, a higher factor or the strength at 5% strain should be
used.
The bearing resistance provided by the reinforcement has to be assessed and it is proposed
that this is calculated in a simplified way based on the punching failure mechanism, such that
the additional bearing resistance is calculated as 2 Td / W.
For example, for a platform on a cohesive subgrade:
R = ( cu Nc sc ) + (γp D2 / W) Kp tanδ sp + 2Td / W
R = (Cohesive Subgrade Capacity) + (Granular Platform Capacity) + (Geosynthetic)
And likewise for platform on a granular subgrade:
R = ( 0.5 γ′s W Nγs sγ ) + (γpD2/W) Kptanδ sp + 2Td / W
R = (Granular Subgrade Capacity) + (Granular Platform Capacity) + (Geosynthetic)
Using this formula, the thickness of the working platform required (D) can be calculated.
Follow BRE 470 – Figure A6 – Design Process Flowchart.

Ronan O’Driscoll
42.2 BRE 470 Working Platform Design – Calculation Stages
BRE 470 routine design calculations have the following eight stages:
• Characterise ground conditions

• Characterise loading conditions
• Derive bearing capacity and shape factors and punching shear coefficient
• Check support of subgrade alone
• Check support of platform material alone
• Determine required thickness of platform
• Use of geosynthetic reinforcement
• Final evaluation of results
The design process is described by a logical sequence in the flowchart BRE 470 Figure A6.
42.2.1 BRE 470 Working Platform Design – Limitations of Application

The punching shear failure mechanism provides the basis for a simple method of calculation
of the required thickness for a working platform. However, the limitations of the applicability of
this failure mechanism, and hence design calculations based on it, should be recognised.
While these limitations are mentioned at relevant places in the three sections of RE 470
Appendix A, it may be helpful to have them summarised at this point. In situations where the
routine design calculations are not appropriate it may be necessary to carry out more
sophisticated forms of analysis.
The limitations are as follows.
• The punching shear failure mechanism is only applicable where the working platform
is significantly stronger than the underlying subgrade. A check that this requirement is
met is included in the design calculations presented in BRE 470 Appendices A2 and
A3.
• The punching shear failure mechanism is not applicable where the subgrade has
virtually no strength. For a cohesive subgrade, the routine design calculations are not
appropriate for very soft clay with cu < 20 kPa, as emphasised in BRE 470 Appendix
A2.
• With large platform thicknesses, punching shear is unlikely to be the critical failure
mechanism and the failure may be largely within the platform material. The routine
design calculation method based on punching shear is not appropriate where (D / W)
>1.5.
• In practice there will be a minimum thickness of platform, below which it will have no
significant effect on bearing resistance. In BRE 470 Appendices A2 and A3 it is
specified that the minimum thickness should be the lesser of 0.5 W (light plant only) or
300 mm.
• The routine design calculations are applicable to level sites only. Slopes greater than
1 in 10 will require design not covered by the BRE 470 guide.

Ronan O’Driscoll
42.3 FIGURE 35 Construction Plant-hire Association (CPA) – Ground
Conditions for Construction Plant – Good practice Guide – Crawler Track
Pressure Distribution

Ronan O’Driscoll
42.4 Load spread under foundations
Working Platforms – Design of Granular Working platforms for Construction Plant – A Guide
to good practice – Temporary Works forum (TWf) gives some guidance on load spread in
Section 2.2.
It is standard practice to assume the load spreads through the granular platform / soil as
shown below.
42.4.1 FIGURE 36 – Load Spread Model (Refer to TWf publication –

Figure 1)
The angle for dispersion of the load is usually assumed to be 1:2 (1 Horizontal for every 2
Vertical). This gives an average loading as shown (q’average) below but this does not directly
match the actual pressure under the foundation as shown (q’max). It is accepted that the 1:2
dispersion gives suitably conservative results.

Ronan O’Driscoll
42.4.2 FIGURE 37 – Load Spread Model (Refer to TWf publication –
Figure 2)
For trapezoidal or triangular pressure distributions under plant as shown previously the
designer can covert these loads into an equivalent rectangular stress block as shown below.
Note “B” is the breadth or width of the load.

Ronan O’Driscoll
42.4.3 FIGURE 38 – Conversion from trapezoidal / triangular stress
block to rectangular stress block (Refer to TWf publication – Figure
20)
The load spread under the foundation will also dictate the depth of influence of the foundation
and this depth can be used as a guide for any required ground investigation sampling depths,
etc. The Boussinesq pressure bulb is used to calculate this depth of influence under
foundations as shown below.
The pressure reduces as shown and at 20 % (0.2q) this is assumed to be the depth of
influence.
The depth depends on the shape of the load / footing and is approximated as follows: -
• Circular pad – depth to 0.2q = 1.5 B (where B is the diameter)

• Strip / Square pad – depth to 0.2q = 3.0 B (where B is width of the pad / strip)

Ronan O’Driscoll
42.4.4 FIGURE 39 – Depth of influence for bearing as defined by
Boussinesq pressure bulbs (Refer to TWf publication – Figure 14)
Joseph Valentin Boussinesq (1842 – 1929) evolved equations that can be used to determine
stresses at any point P at a depth z as a result of a surface point load.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Boussinesq’s Formula Equation: -
At point P of above figure due to a point load Q
3𝑄𝑄 1 𝑄𝑄
Vertical Stress, 𝜎𝜎z =� �� = 𝐼𝐼
2𝜋𝜋𝑧𝑧 2 𝑟𝑟 2
5�
2 𝑧𝑧 2 𝐵𝐵
�1+�𝑧𝑧� �
Where:-
r the horizontal distance between an arbitrary point P below the surface and the
vertical axis through the point load Q
z the vertical depth of the point P from the surface
IB Boussinesq stress coefficient, which equals the following: -
3 ⎛ 1 ⎞
𝐼𝐼𝐵𝐵 = � �
2𝜋𝜋 ⎜ 𝑟𝑟 2
5�
2
⎟
�1 + � � �
⎝ 𝑧𝑧 ⎠
42.5 Load spread under tyres

Self-Propelled Modular Transporters (SPMTs): A Brief Guide - Temporary Works forum
(TWf) gives some guidance on load spread under tyres in Section 10.4 to Section 11.0. This
information is copied here.
Ronan O’Driscoll
It is of limited practical use but it is worth being aware in case there is no other load data
available that you can multiple the tyre pressure by the contact area of that tyre with the
ground to get a resulting ground pressure. Refer to Figure 35 below.
42.5.1 FIGURE 40 – Typical area for a tyre in contact with the ground
(Refer to TWf publication – Figure 18)
If you know the tyre pressure either in bar or PSI you can convert this pressure to kN/m2.
• 1 Bar pressure = 100 kN/m2

• 1 Pound Per Square Inch (PSI) Pressure = 6.9 kN/m2
From this take the tyre pressure in Bar or PSI and multiple by the conversion value above to
get a kN/m2 value.
Estimate the tyre contact area and multiply this area in m2 by the pressure in kN/m2, which will
give a load value in kN.
This value in kN is the resulting load on the ground.
This is a very basic and simplified estimate of the load from the tyres but is a viable way of
assessing on site of there is no better data available.
For trailers such as Self-Propelled Modular Transporters (SPMTs) the wheels are spaced very
close together and, in this instance, individual tyre loads would not be taken but instead the
total load spread over the area of the trailer. This area is also called the “shadow area” as
referred to in the TWf publication referenced.

Ronan O’Driscoll
42.5.2 FIGURE 41 – Schematic showing how the ground bearing
pressure can be considered as acting on the area of the tailer or
“shadow area” under the transporter (refer to TWf publication –
Figure 20)

Ronan O’Driscoll
43 Outrigger Mats
The loading to outriggers of mobile cranes is usually supplied by the Appointed Person (AP)
in charge of the lifting operation and will take into account the load being lifted and the
radius, etc.
Other outrigger loadings from plant such as lorry mounted Hiab units, certain Mobile
Elevated Work Platforms (MEWPs) etc. will be available from the technical specification
documents for this plant and the worst-case loading is always to be assumed unless there
are very clear reasons and strict controls to warrant using any other values.
Where a mobile crane outrigger loading has not been supplied from crane manufacturers
software such as LICCON, a calculation of crane outrigger loading can be undertaken by a
suitably experienced and competent engineer using moments and assumed worst case
loading to calculate the worst-case outrigger loading. This would have to be agreed with the
AP and would have to consider all the individual crane component weights and centres of
gravity plus the load to be lifted and weight or rigging equipment and radius of lift, etc. acting
over one outrigger. Construction Plant-hire Association (CPA) – Ground Conditions for
Construction Plant – Good practice Guide – Annex A provides an example of this type of
calculation.
An alternative simplified and conservative method is provided in “Mobile Crane Planning
Safety Bulletin – Hardstand Assessment / Outrigger Loadings” dated 3rd August 2009 and
created by the Health and Safety Executive (HSE), British Construction Steelwork
Association (BCSA) and the Precast Flooring Federation (PFF). This safety bulletin refers to
the use of the 75% or 100% of the gross weight acting on one outrigger location. The use of
75% of the total weight of the crane including load being lifted, lifting equipment, etc. acting
over one outrigger is widely accepted in the UK.
It is noted that the Mobile Crane – Code of Practice 2006 – Office of Industrial Relations
Workplace Health and Safety Queensland - Australia – Section 10.2.6 uses 65% of the
gross weight as opposed to the 75% recommended in the UK.
The location of the outriggers relative to slopes and structures is important as shown in the
figures that follow. CIRIA C703 – Crane Stability on Site and Construction Plant-hire
Association (CPA) – Ground Conditions for Construction Plant – Good practice Guide
provides guidance on the placement of outriggers on top of outrigger mats and ground
conditions under outrigger mats. The figures below are taken from both documents and the
author would recommend the reader to consult and reference these documents.
The same information is available in BS 7121-3:2017+A1:2019 – Code of Practice for Safe
Use of Cranes – Part 3: Mobile Cranes.

Ronan O’Driscoll
43.1.1 FIGURE 42 – Proximity of Slopes and Excavations (refer to CPA
document Fig D1 & CIRIA C703 Page 55)
43.1.2 FIGURE 43 – Proximity of Slopes and Excavations (refer to BS

7121-3 Figure 12)

Ronan O’Driscoll
43.1.3 FIGURE 44 – Proximity of Earth Retaining Structure (refer to
CIRIA C703 Page 56)
43.1.4 FIGURE 45 – Proximity of Basement Structures (refer to CIRIA

C703 Page 56)

Ronan O’Driscoll
BS 7121-3:2017+A1:2019 – Code of Practice for Safe Use of Cranes – Part 3: Mobile
Cranes – Clause 8.2.2.3 states the following: -
The pressure of the outrigger mat can be considered to pass into the ground at an angle of
45° from the outside edges, so that the distance between the edge of the outrigger mat and
the toe of an unsupported excavation should always be greater than the depth of the
excavation (see Figure 46). An outrigger mat can be placed close to an edge that is suitably
supported (e.g. by sheet piling), but the appointed person should seek expert advice if there
is any doubt concerning this.
43.1.5 FIGURE 46 – Outrigger spread of load into ground (refer to BS

7121-3 Figure 11)

Ronan O’Driscoll
Considering the load spread through a timber outrigger mat please refer to BS 5975:2019
Clause 19.6.3 as highlighted in the figure below. Load may be assumed to spread down
through a timber ground distribution member at a slope of two horizontal to one vertical in a
direction along the grain, and 1:1 across the grain.
43.1.6 FIGURE 47 – Load spread through Timber Outrigger Mat (refer to

BS 5975:2019 Clause 19.6.3)
To calculate this outrigger foundation areas required CIRIA C703 – Crane Stability on Site
and Construction Plant-hire Association (CPA) – Ground Conditions for Construction Plant –
Good practice Guide provides some guidance tables as shown in the following figures.

Ronan O’Driscoll
43.1.7 FIGURE 48 – Outrigger Foundation Areas on Granular Soils
(refer to CIRIA C703 Page 49)
𝜑𝜑 = Angle of internal Friction

FOS = Factor Of Safety

Ronan O’Driscoll
43.1.8 FIGURE 49 – Outrigger Foundation Areas on Cohesive Soils
(refer to CIRIA C703 Page 50)
Cu = Undrained Shear Strength

FOS = Factor Of Safety

Ronan O’Driscoll
43.1.9 TABLE 22 – Safe Working Loads for Differing Ground Conditions and Mat Sizes (refer to CPA Document
Table E1)

Ronan O’Driscoll
CIRIA C703 – Crane Stability on Site – Appendix A1 provides guidance on the design of
timber outrigger mats. Please refer to this and the description below to aid understanding of
the solution presented in CIRIA C703 Appendix A1.
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.4 regarding Timber design.
The example present in CIRIA C703 – Appendix A1 follows the following steps: -
• Nominal size equated to an actual size in line with BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.4.1.5
• Elastic section Modulus – Z calculated, refer to Section 9.2.4 of this document
o Z = (bd2) / 2
o Bending Moment Capacity = (Z) x (Bending Stress)
• The Timber stresses shown in CIRIA C703 are taken from BS 5268 – Part 2- 1991 –
Structural Use of Timber - Table 9 for Timber Strength Class SC5
• Refer to BS 5268 – Part 2- 1991 – Table 17 for K3 value of 1.5
• Refer to BS 5268 – Part 2- 1991 – Section 14.6 for K7 value of 1.1
• Refer to BS 5975 : 2019 – Clause 16.4.2.8 for 1.5 Shear value
• Refer to BS 5975 : 2019 – Clause 16.4.2.5 for 1.2 Bearing value
• The resulting Permissible Stresses shown for Bending (f), Shear (q) and Bearing are
the product of the Timber Stresses by the factors present
• The moment of resistance is = (Z) x (Bending Stress) = (Z) x (f)
• Permissible Shear Force = (q) x (Cross Sectional Area)
• The outrigger load is 330 kN and the Outrigger leg plan dimensions is 0.4m X 0.4m
• Mat area is sized as 0.9m2 = Selected plan dimensions of 0.75m X 1.2m
• Results in 2 layers of sleepers
o Top Layer – 2 Sleepers – Each is 0.75m Long, 0.25m Wide and 0.125m Deep
o Bottom Layer – 3 Sleepers – Each is 1.2m Long, 0.25m Wide and 0.125m
Deep
• Bearing Stress under outrigger leg is calculated as 330 kN / (0.4m X 0.4m), this is
checked against the timber permissible bearing stress which is 5.0 N/mm2
• For the Bending Moment Calculations shown: -
o The load is taken per sleeper as 330 / 2 = 165 kN
o The Bending Moment distance is split in half either side of the centre line, i.e.,
0.4m / 2 = 0.2m and 0.75m / 2 = 0.375m
o The load is spilt in half over the centre line = 165 / 2 = 82.5 kN
o The Bending Moment can then be considered as a UDL over the full length of
a cantilever, the cantilever lengths being 0.2m and 0.375m as we are looking
at one side of the centre line and it is to be symmetrical on the other side
o One bending moment is acting down from the outrigger
o The other bending moment is acting up from the support
o BM = (WL) / 2
 BM from Outrigger = (82.5 X 0.2) / 2 = 8.25 kNm
 BM from support = (82.5 X 0.375) / 2 = 15.47 kNm
 Resulting Bending Moment = 15.47 – 8.25 = 7.2 kNm
 This value is compared to the moment of resistance calculated
previously
• Shear is taken at the face of the outrigger pad per sleeper as (165kN / 0.75m) =
220kN/m x ((0.75 – 0.4) / 2 ) =38.5 kN
o This can be described as the length past the outrigger on each side multiplied
by the shear force which equals 0.175m X 220 kN/m = 38.5 kN
o This is compared to the Permissible Shear Value calculated
Ronan O’Driscoll
• The same process is repeated for the lower level of 3 sleepers
o Load = 330 kN / 3 = 110 kN
o Load split in half for Bending Moment Calculations = 55 kN
o Distances either side of the centre line for Bending moment calculations: -
 0.25m from above
 0.6m from underneath
o Length either side used for shear calculation = (1.2m – 0.5m) / 2 = 0.35m
This example in CIRIA C703 Appendix A1 considers the bending moment and shear
capacity of the sleepers to spread the load from the outrigger into the supporting ground.
What follows is the direct copy of CIRIA C703 Appendix A1 for reference following the
explanation of the steps.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Ronan O’Driscoll
Ronan O’Driscoll
Ronan O’Driscoll
Ronan O’Driscoll
Ronan O’Driscoll
43.2 BASIC OUTRIGGER MAT DESIGN EXAMPLE
The author suggests there is another way you can look at this design as follows: -
• Take the load applied and divide it by the ground bearing pressure available
• Noting a suitable Factor Of Safety (FOS) and the fact the values supplied in BS 5975
:2019 Table 18 already have a FOS of 2.0
• Using this resulting area to size the outrigger plan dimensions required
• Design the outrigger mat as far as possible to disperse the load in direct bearing from
the outrigger to the ground i.e. for Timber 1:1 across the grain and 2:1 along the
grain or 1:1 for steel outrigger mats
• Where the load goes outside of this area of direct bearing dispersion the mat will
have to be suitably stiff to disperse the load adequately and not excessively deflect or
fail
• For the area of direct bearing dispersion, the load applied can be checked against
the bearing capacity of the outrigger mat material
• For any remaining outrigger mat outside of this dispersion area that is required to
spread the load into the ground the Second Moment of Area (I) can be calculated,
and the deflection of this cantilevered section checked to ensure it is suitable and not
excessive
43.2.1 FIGURE 50 – Outrigger Foundation Example from CIRIA C703

Appendix A1 (Courtesy of Richard McDonald)

Ronan O’Driscoll
From Figure 50 above we have the following arrangement, details, and assumptions: -
• 330 kN load from the outrigger (Unfactored)

• Outrigger plan dimensions – 0.4m X 0.4m
• Allowable Ground Bearing of 200 kN/m2 (this includes a Factor Of Safety of 2.0)
• Timber Permissible bearing stress = 5.0 N/mm2
• Outrigger leg on 2 layers of sleepers
• Top layer is 3 number sleepers each 0.9m long X 0.25m wide X 0.125m deep
• Lower layer of 4 sleepers each 1.65m long X 0.25m wide X 0.125m deep.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Required contact area with the ground to suitably spread the load: -
• Resulting plan area required to spread the load suitably into the ground = 330 kN /
200 kN/m2 = 1.65m2
• From Figure 43 we have a plan area of 1.65m X 1.0m = 1.65m2
Timber Bearing pressure: -
• Applied load = 330 kN

• Timber Permissible bearing stress = 5.0 N/mm2
• Contact area with outrigger = 400 mm X 400 mm = 160,000 mm2
• Timber Permissible Bearing load over this area = 160,000 mm2 X 5.0 N/mm2 =
800,000 N = 800 kN > 330 kN, therefore there is no issue with the bearing area
Load dispersion through each layer of support in direct bearing: -
• Applied load = 330 kN

• This load is initially applied over the 0.4m X 0.4m outrigger plan area on to the first
layer of sleepers and disperses through the depth of the sleepers at 1:1 across the
grain and 2:1 along the grain in direct bearing
• Resulting in a load area of 0.65m X 0.9m on top of the lower layer of sleepers
• Finally, this load disperses through the bottom layer of sleepers in direct bearing at
1:1 across the grain and 2:1 along the grain in direct bearing
• Resulting in a direct bearing load area of 1.0m X 1.15m into the ground

Ronan O’Driscoll
• From this direct bearing load area, we cannot use the full plan area of 1.0m X 1.65m
• So, the resulting timber length that is outside of the direct bearing zone = 1.65m –
1.15m = 0.5m
• This 0.5m is spread over each end of the timber sleepers so we have a resulting
cantilever length of timber sleeper outside of the direct bearing zone of 0.5m / 2 =
0.25m
Outrigger mat area outside of direct bearing area that must spread the load: -
• Allowable Ground Bearing of 200 kN/m2 (this includes a Factor Of Safety of 2.0)
• Cantilevered length of sleeper required to spread the load = 0.25 m
• We will look at the deflection of this cantilevered length of sleeper to ensure the
deflection is not excessive
• If the sleeper deflection is acceptable then it can be assumed the load is adequately
spread into the ground
• Sleeper cantilever loaded area to consider = 0.25m (Cantilever length) X 0.25m
(Sleeper width) = 0.0625 m2 = 62,500 mm2
• Load applied to this cantilever (W) = 0.0625m2 X 200 kN/m2 = 12.5 kN
• Deflection for a cantilever with a Uniformly Distributed Load (UDL) over the full span
is:-
3
𝑤𝑤𝐿𝐿
𝛿𝛿 =
8𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
Where:-
W = the load applied (unfactored load used for deflection calculations)=12,500 N
L = Cantilever length = 250 mm
E = Modulus of Elasticiy, as this is timber sleeper the value can vary from
9,520 N/mm2 to 27,600 N/mm2
We shall use the conservative value of 9,520 N/mm2
𝑏𝑏 d3 250 (125)3
I = Second Moment of Area = = = 40,690,104 mm4
12 12
Therefore:-
12,500 (250)3
𝛿𝛿 = = 0.063 mm
8 (9,520) (40,690,104)

Ronan O’Driscoll
• From this we can see the 250mm length of railway sleeper outside of the direct
bearing load area will deflect 0.63mm to spread the permissible ground bearing
pressure
• Deflection Limit for a cantilever = Span / 180 = 250 mm / 180 = 1.38 mm
• The defelction may be limited by ither requirements and this would need to be
confirmed on a case by case basis
• This deflection is within acceptable limits so we do not need to undertake a strength
check
• This same process can be undertaken for a steel outrigger mat by calculating the I
value of the outrigger mat and using the modulus of elasticity for steel

Ronan O’Driscoll
44 Scaffold Tube - Basics
Scaffold design is highlighted in BS 5975:2019 for Falsework applications and Clause 15
states, “For guidance on the design and use of scaffolding and special scaffold structures
other than falsework, reference should be made to BS EN 12811-1 and the NASC guide
TG20.”
BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.8, Annex A, B and D have information and guidance on the use of
Scaffold Tube for Falsework applications.
BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.8.3 clearly states the factor of safety used as 1.65, from a factor of
1.5 for loads and a factor of 1.1 for material. So, all the values supplied for Scaffold Tubes
and fittings in BS 5975 have a factor of safety of 1.65 already applied.
BS 5975:2019 Clause 19.7.6 and Figure 50 provides guidance on deviation of load paths at
connection points as shown below.
It is stated, “Generally, provided that the distance between the centrelines of the load paths
does not exceed 160 mm, the effects of torsion and eccentricity may be ignored.”
Scaffold Tube Dimensions

Ronan O’Driscoll
Double Coupler – Right-Angle Coupler
Swivel Coupler
Single Coupler – Putlog Coupler

Ronan O’Driscoll
Sleeve Coupler
Spigot Pin
Band & Plate Coupler

Ronan O’Driscoll
Girder Coupler / Girder Clamp

Ronan O’Driscoll
44.1.1 FIGURE 51 – Maximum deviation of load path in Scaffold
connections (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Fig 50)

Ronan O’Driscoll
44.1.2 TABLE 23 – Section Properties of Scaffold Tube (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table B.1)

Ronan O’Driscoll
44.1.3 TABLE 24 – Safe Axial Loads in Compression for Type 4 Steel
Scaffold Tubes Manufactured in accordance with BS EN 39:2001
(Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table B.2)

Ronan O’Driscoll
44.1.4 TABLE 25 – Safe Axial Loads in Compression for Type 4 Steel
Scaffold Tubes Manufactured in accordance with BS 1139-1:1982
(Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table B.3)

Ronan O’Driscoll
44.1.5 TABLE 26 – Safe Working Loads for individual Couplers and
Fittings (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table B.4)

Ronan O’Driscoll
44.1.6 TABLE 27 – Masses of Scaffolding Material (Refer to BS
5975:2019 Table D.4)

Ronan O’Driscoll
45 Brickwork and Blockwork – BS 5975:2019 Guidance
Refer to BS 5975:2019 Clause 16.6 which states the following: -
Where brickwork is to be load bearing, the rate of building should be restricted to a
maximum height of 1.5 m per day for normal construction in bricks with a compressive
strength of up to 35 N/mm2. No one portion should rise more than 1 m above the level of
adjacent brickwork. Bricks of higher compressive strength usually have a higher density and
lower absorption and because of this it may be necessary to limit the height of the building
per day still further.
If the loading is to be applied less than 28 days after completion of the brickwork or
blockwork, characteristic strengths in compression should be calculated in accordance with
Table 2 of BS 5628‑1:2005. Brickwork or blockwork should not be loaded at less than seven
days and preferably not less than 14 days after completion of the work.
45.1 Propping and Needling of Masonry Walls - Basics

The propping and needling of masonry walls are usually to support the installation of a new
lintel or opening and as a result a good reference document is BS 5977-1:1981 Lintels- Part
1: Method for assessment of load. Figure 1 from this document is copied below.
The “Load Triangle” referenced is a 45o triangle having1:1 time the clear span of the lintel as
its base.
The “Interaction Zone” referenced is a zone outside of the load triangle but within 60o
triangle having 1:1 time the clear span of the lintel as its base.
Please note that Figure 45 is showing the loading to the lintel.
A good reference document the document would recommend the reader looks at for
propping in buildings is – BRE Good Building Guide – Providing temporary support during
work on openings in external walls – GBG 15.

Ronan O’Driscoll
45.1.1 FIGURE 52 – Load triangle and Interaction Zone (Refer to BS
5977-1 Fig 1)

Ronan O’Driscoll
45.1.2 FIGURE 53 – Propping and Needling example (Supplied from
Maybe Hire website)
“needle”
Prop bracing
Figure 53 shows a typical propping and needling arrangement for a masonry wall.
The “needles” are the horizontal members spanning between the props on either side of the
wall and supporting the weight of the masonry as they pass through the wall. The needles
will be in bending supporting the weight of the masonry above and transferring the vertical
load to the prop supports either side of the wall. It is standard practice to space these
needles at 0.9m centres or shorter and it is to be noted that the masonry at a 45o dispersion
line between the props may be lost and need replacing if the wall is removed below the
needles. As a result, and to minimise the requirement to replace masonry the needle centre
distance can be reduced. Also, the needle length needs to allow for the props to be placed
sufficiently far away from the wall to allow any construction access for any work that is
required.
The props themselves are taking the vertical load from the needles and usually will have
some bracing to ensure horizontal stability as shown.

Ronan O’Driscoll
46 Coefficient of Friction - Basics
BS 5975:2019 Clause 19.4.5.1 and Figure 47 gives some guidance regarding lateral
restraint by friction.
46.1.1 FIGURE 54 – Lateral restraint provided by friction (refer to BS

5975 Fig 47)
The coefficient of static friction 𝜇𝜇 is given by the following expression with reference to
Figure 47 above, as follows: -
𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝜃𝜃
𝜇𝜇 = = = tan 𝜃𝜃
𝑅𝑅 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝜃𝜃
Where:
R is the reaction force normal to the surface (in N)
Ff is the limiting value of the frictional force (in N)
W is the vertically applied force (in N)
𝜃𝜃 is the minimum angle from the horizontal, for a particular pair of materials, at
which sliding will commence (in degrees)
From this formula Ff = 𝜇𝜇 R
BS 5975 does highlight that it is important to note that the value of the limiting value of the
frictional force is that force at which sliding is just about to occur. Thus, when lateral restraint

Ronan O’Driscoll
is to be transmitted between the members in contact by friction, a suitable factor of safety to
prevent sliding should be used. It is recommended that this should not be less than 2.0.

Ronan O’Driscoll
46.1.2 TABLE 28 – Recommended Values of Coefficient Static Friction (Refer to BS 5975:2019 Table 25)

Ronan O’Driscoll
For sloping Construction Engineering solutions BS 5975:2019 Annex H provides some
guidance which is partly repeated here.
46.1.3 FIGURE 55 – Freestanding Falsework Sliding Forces (refer to BS

5975 Fig H.4)
S = W Sin 𝜃𝜃
Where:-
S Sliding force (N)
W Vertical load (N)
𝜃𝜃 Angle from the horizontal as shown
For kinetic coefficients of friction information CIRIA Report 68 – Lateral Movement of Heavy
Loads gives the following values as per the Table below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
46.1.4 TABLE 29 – Coefficients of Friction and bearing pressures (for
initial study use) (Refer to CIRIA Report 68 Table 2)

Ronan O’Driscoll
47 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion - Basics
The coefficient of linear thermal expansion is used to estimate the variation in length of
elements due to heat.
Lengththermal = 𝛼𝛼 (t max – tmin) loverall
Where:-
Lengththermal Is the resulting variation in length of the element due to thermal
expansion or contraction
𝛼𝛼 Coefficient of linear thermal expansion
tmax Maximum temperature experienced by the element

tmin Minimum temperature experienced by the element
loverall The original overall length
A typical internal temperature range in the UK might be -5oC to 35oC.
Externally this might be more like -5oC to 60oC to allow for frost, wind chill and direct solar
gain.
Note that: - Stress = E X Strain
- Stress = E X Strain
- 𝜎𝜎 = (E) X ( ) 𝜀𝜀
𝐹𝐹 Δ𝐿𝐿
- = (E) X ( )
𝐴𝐴 𝐿𝐿
Strain for thermal actions (Change in length (Δ𝐿𝐿)) in the formula above
From this the stress for Thermal Action can be calculated

Ronan O’Driscoll
47.1.1 TABLE 30 – Coefficients of Linear Thermal Expansion (Refer to
Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition – Page 64)

Ronan O’Driscoll
48 Hydraulics - Basics
Hydraulics are widely used in Construction Engineering for a range of applications such as
frames in ground support systems, horizontal props in ground support systems, vertical
props, bridge jacking, etc.
There are several Construction Engineering specialist suppliers in the UK who have a wealth
of knowledge and experience of hydraulics for Construction Engineering applications and
specialists such as this should always be consulted regarding the use of any hydraulics.
The basic principle is that the pressure on the hydraulic system will equate to the load being
supported
If you know the pressure either in bar or PSI you can convert this pressure to kN/m2.
• 1 Bar pressure = 100 kN/m2

• 1 Pound Per Square Inch (PSI) Pressure = 6.9 kN/m2
So, the next question is the contact area to equate this pressure of kN/m2 into a load in kN.
This area will depend on the hydraulic cylinder being used as a larger diameter cylinder may
result in a larger contact area and as a result a larger load for the same pressure.
Looking at the diagram below which shows a single acting hydraulic cylinder, the contact
area to move the hydraulic cylinder vertically and lift any load in question is the blue area of
the bottom of the rod end.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Looking at the diagram below which shows a double acting hydraulic cylinder, the contact
area to move the hydraulic cylinder vertically and lift any load in question is the yellow area
of the bottom of the rod end. The resulting contact area to push the rod end back down is the
blue area in contact with the ram lip shown and this is referred to as the annulus. You can
see from this that a double acting hydraulic cylinder will always have more capacity lifting as
the area is larger than retracting where the area is less. Yellow area for lifting and blue area
retracting.
These hydraulic cylinders are usually tested to 1.25 of the rated loads.
Hydraulic cylinders should not be horizontally loaded while extending or retracting as the
horizontal force may push the rod end off centre and create a gap around the packed gland
where hydraulic fluid may escape. Some hydraulic cylinders have a mechanical locking ring
to take the load and release the hydraulic pressure and these can sustain in the region of
5% of the vertical load acting horizontally when fully locked off.
If the maximum capacity of the hydraulic cylinder is known with the corresponding maximum
pressure, this information will be supplied with all hydraulic cylinders, a plot of load against
pressure can easily be created. This is a straight-line graph through the origin as shown
below.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Multiple hydraulic cylinders can be linked and then the pressure on the hydraulic system will
be equal across all linked cylinders. If they are the same cylinders the load capacity should
equalise across the cylinders. With a system linked together there may be a load point that
increases on a specific hydraulic cylinder or group of cylinders, and this can be addressed
individually if there are suitable manifolds in the hydraulic system so you can close off
selected cylinders and then increase or decrease pressure on selected hydraulic cylinders.
The pressure in the system can be read from pressure gauges and the load can be
calculated using the pressure to load chart.
A key point when using hydraulics will be the contact area with the structure and the
hydraulic cylinder. Head plates will be used to give larger contact areas with the hydraulic
cylinder and likewise base plates. This will be to spread the load sufficiently using a sufficient
contact area. It is noted that a load dispersion through steel is usually taken at 450 but for
bridge structures this angle can be taken to 300 as highlighted in BS 5400-9.1:1983 – Steel,
concrete, and composite bridges – Part 9: Bridge bearings – Section 9.1 Code of practice for
design of bridge bearings, Clause 5.10 Outer bearing plates or spreader plates and Figure 2.
This allows a larger dispersion of load through steel head or base plates to get a larger
contact area and is very beneficial when using hydraulic cylinders to move concrete bridge
structures. The angle referred to in Clause 5.10 and Figure 2 is 600 to the vertical which
equates to 300 from the horizontal.
There is allot more to hydraulics in Construction Engineering and that is why specialists
should always be consulted but this is to just give a very basic understanding of hydraulic
cylinders for Construction Engineering applications.

Ronan O’Driscoll
49 Buoyancy Calculations - Basics
The basics are simply: -
Buoyant force = weight of displaced fluid
There are other calculations relating to stability considering the center of gravity, metacentric
height, center of buoyancy (being the centroid of the displaced volume of fluid), etc. but for
now we will keep it very simple and look at vertical force for buoyancy.
For these basic calculations we will assume the density of water being displaced is 10
kN/m3. This density does vary for sea water but for simple basic calculations this figure will
suffice.
For Construction Engineering pontoons or barges are sometimes used to support plant and
equipment and understanding the freeboard level of the pontoon or barge can be critical for
several reasons.
Freeboard and draught (or draft in America) is a shown below.
When equipment is placed on a pontoon or barge the draught increases and the freeboard
decreases, basically the pontoon or barge goes lower in the water.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Of course, we need to keep freeboard level above water level and we may also need to
know this level if the pontoon or barge is moved and passes under structures such as
bridges that maybe present in river construction projects.
Assuming a flat-bottomed square barge we can take the plan dimensions of the barge for
our calculations and likewise for square flat-bottomed pontoons.
If we have a load that we need to place on our barge or pontoon and we know the total load
in kN we can call this load “W” in kN.
We know the buoyant force must equal load “W” or we will sink.
We know the weight of displaced fluid will equal 10 kN/m3 by the volume of fluid displaced.
We know the volume of fluid being displaced in this instance will be the plan dimension of
our barge or pontoon multiplied by the depth the barge or pontoon lowers in the water.
From this we get: -
Load “W” in kN = (Plan Dimensions X Depth in m3) X 10 kN/m3
If we know the load “W” in kN and we know the plan dimensions m2 then we can calculate
the reduction in freeboard and the increase in draught.
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 "𝑊𝑊"
Distance of reduction in freeboard (in m) = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
((𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑚𝑚2 ) 𝑋𝑋 10 3)
𝑚𝑚

Ronan O’Driscoll
50 Centre of Gravity - Basics
The example used here is a steel support frame for an item of mechanical plant and we look
at the frame in 2-D along its axis’s in plan, i.e. X and Y.
We end up looking at the frame in an elevation and end elevation and we take moments of
each section form one corner in each of the two elevations to get a distance to the centre of
gravity for the frame in each of these elevations.
Using these two measurements we can then locate the centre of gravity of the load in plan
so we can arrange any lifting slings and chain lengths etc. to pick the load up level if
required. The principle is to have the hook of the crane or lifting equipment directly over the
centre of gravity of the load being lifted.

Ronan O’Driscoll
50.1.1 FIGURE 56 – Steel support frame for an item of mechanical plant
Referring to Figure 56 above we have the following arrangement, details, and assumptions: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
• We are not considering the design of the frame here or the weight
• We are to establish where the centre of gravity of this frame is in plan
• For the lifting operation the crane hook should be over the centre of gravity and the
chains and lifting accessories sized to suit this arrangement
• Steel sections shown are all 203 X 203 X 46 UC sections
Weight = 46.1 kg/m
Width = 203.6 mm
• Open mesh steel flooring shown weighs 18kg/m2
• Top level of frame consists of 2 No. 203 X 203 X 46 UC’s, both are 3.0 m in length
• Middle level of frame consists of 2 No. 203 X 203 X 46 UC’s, both are 6.0 m in length
• Bottom level of frame consists of 2 No. 203 X 203 X 46 UC’s, both are 10.0 m in
length
In addition, there is the open mesh flooring over an area of 6m X 7m = 42 m2
• We will assume there are no plates for connections and the sections are connected
with fillet welds or drilled and countersunk holes as required. This means for this
example we will not consider any weight from connections.
Weights and resulting forces: -
• Top level of frame consists of 2 No. 203 X 203 X 46 UC’s, both are 3.0 m in length
3.0 m X 46.1 kg/m = 138.3 kg (mass)
138.3 kg X 10 = 1,383 N = 1.383 kN (force) per UC Section
• Middle level of frame consists of 2 No. 203 X 203 X 46 UC’s, both are 6.0 m in length
6.0 m X 46.1 kg/m = 276.6 kg (mass)
276.6 kg X 10 = 2,766 N = 2.766 kN (force) per UC Section
• Bottom level of frame consists of 2 No. 203 X 203 X 46 UC’s, both are 10.0 m in
length
10.0 m X 46.1 kg/m = 461 kg (mass)
461 kg X 10 = 4,610 N = 4.61 kN (force) per UC Section
In addition, there is the open mesh flooring over an area of 6m X 7m = 42 m2

42m2 X 18 kg/m2 = 756 kg (mass)
756 kg X 10 = 7,560 N = 7.56 kN (force) for the open mesh floor
• Total force from the frame: -

(1.383 kN X 2) + (2.766 kN X 2) + (4.61 kN X 2) + 7.56 kN = 25.078 kN
Resolving moments of force: -
• We will look at the Elevation and End Elevation and resolve moments from one
corner (this being our selected point)
• The moment = (force per individual item) X (distance to the centre for gravity of that
item from the selected point)
• The combined moments of all the individual items will be equal to the total moment of
the frame
Ronan O’Driscoll
• The total moment of the frame = (total force for the frame) X (distance to the centre
for gravity of the frame)
• Let’s start with the Elevation
(1.383 kN X 8.5 m) X 2 + (2.766 kN X 9.8982 m) + (2.766 kN X 7.1018 m) + (4.61 kN

X 5.0m ) X 2 + 7.56 kN X 3.5 m = 25.078 kN X (Distance to centre of gravity of the
frame)
143.093 kNm = 25.078 kN X (Distance to centre of gravity of the frame)
Distance to centre of gravity of the frame = 143.093 / 25.078 = 5.706 m = 5.7 m
• Looking at the End Elevation
(1.383 kN X 5.8982 m) + (1.383 kN X 3.0 m) + (2.766 kN X 3.0 m) X 2 + (4.61 kN X

5.8982m) + (4.61 kN X 0.1018m) + 7.56 kN X 3.0 m = 25.078 kN X (Distance to
centre of gravity of the frame)
79.242 kNm = 25.078 kN X (Distance to centre of gravity of the frame)

Ronan O’Driscoll
Distance to centre of gravity of the frame = 79.242 / 25.078 = 3.159 m = 3.2 m
• Resulting centre of gravity: -

Ronan O’Driscoll
51 Planning of Construction Engineering Works - Basics
The planning of a construction project should be undertaken by a suitably experienced and
competent construction planner. This individual, if suitably competent and experienced, can
be the most important individual on a project to ensure construction delivery to time and
cost.
A construction planner will be able to create a true, realistic, and achievable construction
programme and then be able to break that program down into manageable sections. These
sections can be broken down to suitable duration lengths and then given to the supervisor or
manager in charge of that section of work. When the planner gives this mini program to the
supervisor or manager, they ensure they understand what is to be achieved and by when.
The planner will then consult to see progress and update the construction program as
required and then creates the next section of the program for the supervisor or manager in
charge of this section of work and repeat this process for the duration of the project. Direct
collaboration and two-way communication with the site team ensures that any issues or
delays and the actions required for their mitigation are identified, and all parties have clear
sight and understanding of progress and projected end dates.
A good Planner will have the experience and competence to be able to create a true,
realistic, and achievable construction programme as they will fully understand the
construction project and all that is required including all the associated Construction
Engineering. If required, the planner will spend time on site to understand the project and the
challenges being faced so that the program can reflect all of this.
One issue is that, in the author’s experience, effective Construction Planners are hard to
find, many could be better described as Construction Schedulers. The author has worked
with many that you would refer to as “Construction Schedulers”. “Construction Schedulers”
are often called planners and are capable of running the planning software such as
primavera, but they do not have the experience or competence to call themselves real
Construction Planners as they cannot create a true, realistic, and achievable construction
programme and as a result they cannot break that program down into suitably manageable
sections. They cannot manage the program and update it as required with direct
collaboration with the site teams. Unfortunately, this is a common issue across UK
construction projects. Evidently there is a skills gap in the UK for true construction planners
and a real opportunity for anyone considering this as a career option, as there is a high
demand for those with this valuable skillset.
Skills gap aside, it is worth noting some basic construction planning points.
Constructability Review Meetings should be implemented and conducted as early as
possible in a project and during the design phase.
At the design phase, before the Principal Contract (PC) is appointed, these meetings are to
be led by the Principal Designer (PD) as clearly highlighted in the CDM 2015 Regulations.
As noted in the CDM Regulations the PD is to ensure a suitably constructable design is
produced by the Permanent Works Designer (PWD) and any remaining residual risks that
the designer could not remove are suitably communicated to the contractor on site for
construction.
The earlier that construction is considered in design the more beneficial it will be for safety,
time, and budget. Conversely, the later it is considered the more detrimental it is for safety,
time and budget. That is why a Constructability Review Meeting undertaken with the
designers as early as possible is hugely beneficial and there should be several of these
Ronan O’Driscoll
meetings as the designer will have to take on board points and look at redesign or altering of
design, having further meetings to further review and refine. For these to be beneficial and
successful the designer must take on the points noted and do everything possible to allow
for any construction issues in their designs, where this is not possible the information is
highlighted in the Designers Risk Register as a Residual Design Risk that site will have to
control and mitigate.
It is all too common for Permanent Works Designers to not consider construction adequately
in their designs and as a result the issues are corrected and dealt with on site once
construction has commenced. This is one of the main reasons construction projects face
safety issues, project delays and cost overruns. Undertaking the Construction Engineering
Design as part of the Permanent Works Design is hugely beneficial and will have massive
benefits.
This same level of consideration must be given to the use of the structure and the possible
demolition of the structure in the future as clearly required in CDM 2015 Regulations.
The problem with the PD role and the PD being the lead for Constructability Review
Meetings is that we expect and assume the PD is suitably experienced and competent and
has Permanent Works Design experience and knowledge as well as Construction
Engineering Design experience and knowledge, plus real life site construction experience.
This experience being to the suitable level and knowledge to match the complexity of the
works.
The Temporary Works Forum (TWf) undertook a survey of Design Risk Management in the
UK Construction Industry in October 2020 and published this as TW 20.122 (10.11.20)
Design Risk Management – Survey Results. Other Temporary Works Forum documents to
reference in relation to this include: -
• TW21.023 (26.2.21) – Summary: TWf Survey

• TW21.029(5.3.21) – HSE Research Project to broaden understanding of how CDM
2015 Principal Designer role is working in Practice
From this survey the following is directly quoted from the TWf documents referenced
(As highlighted in this document we have used the term “Construction Engineering” in place
of “Temporary Works” and please note the term “Temporary Works” has not been changed
from the information copied here): -

Ronan O’Driscoll
• Are suitable people and organisations being appointed to the PD role?
(e.g. with appropriate levels of skills, knowledge and experience in design and health
& safety and the right experience for the project; and where they are an organisation,
organisational capability necessary to fulfil the role)
Whether suitable people and organisations are being appointed appears to depend
largely on the nature of the Client and, to some extent, the size of the project (where
an integrated approach is beneficial).
In many other cases, however, there is a lack of sufficient knowledge of temporary
works and the construction process (‘method’).
The effectiveness in discharging the role hinges on the diligence and persuasiveness
of the individual undertaking the role as opposed to how good their organisation
appears to be. The role is more effectively discharged by those who have ‘technical’
qualifications as opposed to those who have ‘managerial’ qualifications.
• Are there any key issues in relation to the PD role that you would like to raise on
behalf of your members?
(Both positives and negatives)
The logic of having a PD is appealing, but the role has not worked in practice (nor
has it in its different guises over the last 25 years). The old saying “the right
information, to the right people at the right time” has not been realised. The existing
role is perceived as having a negative or neutral value.
Positives:
None.
Negatives:
Despite 25 years of CDM there is still a lack of understanding about “significant
residual risk”. Permanent works designers do not know ‘how far to go’. They still
provide generic information that is of no benefit. The message “you don’t need to tell
a competent contractor what they already know” appears to have been lost.
PWDs – and thus PDs – should provide information about the indicative construction
sequence, showing how their design can be erected safely (L144, Para 134); noting
that contractors may then adopt this method or develop their own approach. This
should be mandated.
When bringing together the pre-construction information the PD should consider the
information required by temporary works designers (and not just the permanent
works designer), e.g.:
• structural surveys or assessments
• site investigation and the properties of soils at shallow depth
• dimensional surveys, rebar breakout reports, ferro-scanning, concrete testing, etc.

Ronan O’Driscoll
These items may need to be commissioned by the Client and are critical to improving
safety as well saving money and, indeed, determining whether there is even a
requirement for temporary works.
If a PD does not have expertise in ‘temporary works’, then they should seek input
from a specialist. Early contractor involvement is encouraged.
• Do Permanent Works Designers (PWDs) make serious effort to ‘Eliminate’ or

‘Mitigate’ risk that could affect temporary works?
Overwhelmingly, permanent works designers:
• have a lack of knowledge and are disconnected from site.
• give insufficient thought to the construction sequence.
• think that temporary works is an issue for the contractor.
• do not understanding the construction process.
• fail to adopt a ‘safe by design’ approach.
• provide insufficient detail on significant residual risks.
• should do more to integrate permanent works and temporary works design.
• Do Permanent Works Designers make serious effort to pass on useful information

relating to buildability and ‘significant residual risk’?
In terms of passing on useful information, permanent works designers frequently:
• fail to identify significant residual risks.
• do not understand constructability.
• lack a collaborative approach.
• communicate better when they are also the PD.
• provide information that is too generic.
• do not provide sufficient pre-construction information (especially surveys).
• inhibited in better communication by long supply chains.
From the Temporary Works Forum (TWf) Survey results, it can be seen that a PD
undertaking a constructability review meeting with a Permanent Works Designer and
possibly also Project Managers with no demonstrable Construction Engineering knowledge
and experience, will not produce anything of any use or value for the construction project.
What it will do however is provide a tick box to say a Constructability Review Meeting has
been held and completed, regardless of its value to the project.

Ronan O’Driscoll
In the UK construction industry, we currently have a situation where there are very few real
Construction Planners, but a wealth of Construction Schedulers, and no real competence or
value in any preconstruction planning by Principal Designers and Permanent Works
Designers who sometimes work in partnership with Project Managers with no Construction
Engineering experience or competence.
Of course, if you look at construction projects that have safety issues, are running over
planned construction program durations and over budget you can clearly point most of the
reason back to poor or no preconstruction planning and no consideration of Construction
Engineering by the Permanent Works Designer or the Principal Designer prior to
construction beginning.
Is this the elephant in the room for the UK construction industry? So how do we rectify the
issue?
The rectification requires honesty and humility to admit there is a lack of competence and
experience in Construction Engineering (2022).
The below highlights some basics that may benefit any reader of this document.
When a construction project is being designed or even thought of, the first and principal thing
that must be kept in everyone’s mind is how it will look, while being constructed, from the
eyes of the construction operative at the workface who is undertaking the construction work.
It should be clear in everyone’s mind and then everyone can visualise what the work will
look, sound and perhaps even smell like.
Think of things such as : -
• What workspace will there be for an operative to undertake their work?

o Has the Permanent Workers Designer considered this and altered the design
to minimise any issues?
• What will an operative have to lift or move to complete the task they must undertake?
Has the design considered this?
• How many individuals will be in the construction team working with the operative?
• What is the operative’s access and egress to the workface?
• How is the construction material transported to the workface?
• Is there any lay down area for construction material? if so where and how large an
area?
• Is the work being undertaken widely understood and common place on construction
sites currently?
o Or is the work being undertaken novel and unique and not widely undertaken
on construction sites currently?

Ronan O’Driscoll
 Has the Permanent Workers Designer considered this and altered the
design to minimise any issues?
• What Construction Engineering is required to complete the task being undertaken?
• Will Construction Engineering designs on site have to be loaded and then unloaded?
how will this take place and be controlled on site?
• Will there be a hand over from a day shift to a night shift or will the same team
undertake the works on day shifts? If a day shift and night shift is required how is
information passed between the two shifts? Is there any work that must be done on
day shift only? Can the design consider all these issues and design out any risks?
• Will deliveries to site possibly slow the progress of the work at the workface or can
material be stockpiled / stored and transported on site when needed?
• Will high winds or other weather events affect the construction work? if so, can this
be mitigated in anyway?
• If lifting of plant or equipment is required on site what has been selected to undertake
this lifting? can this be optimised? has weather been considered for this? Can lifting
be designed out or reduced by design? Does the design consider the preferred lifting
arrangement so everything can be designed to maximise the lifting capacity and
radius of any crane selected, i.e. everything in the design is sized for the maximum
load and radius of the preferred crane during construction?
• For the size of the site footprint what is the maximum workface that can be
constructed safely at one time? can this be considered and maximised at the design
stage?
• For the size of the site footprint and the planned maximum size of the workface to
construct what is the resulting maximum number of individuals on site? and as a
result is suitable welfare, parking, transport, etc. available for the site footprint being
proposed?
• Has the Permanent Works Designer incorporated as much construction access as is
possible into the design of the Permanent Works? i.e. temporary connection points
for temporary stairs and access platforms, use of the permanent access as early as
possible in the construction for the construction activities, etc.

Ronan O’Driscoll
• Has the Permanent Works Designer considered all possible construction loading
situations in the Permanent Works Design? and clearly shown this information on Fit
For Construction drawings that can be used by operatives on the construction site.
• This list is not exhaustive
If the Permanent Works Designer and the Principal Designer can clearly picture their design
through all stages of construction (as if they are an operative constructing it and stood at the
workface seeing it through their eyes) then it should be straightforward to design and plan in
line with all the requirements of CDM 2015.
If a Permanent Works Designer and Principal Designer can’t do this, it is likely they will need
to employ a specialist who can advise them.
Being able to visualise and imagine all situations, challenges, and issues in advance,
ensures that as much as possible is removed or reduced by the design, and the remainder
can be considered for further mitigation. Following this, the construction program and the
design should be as well considered as is reasonably practicable with a variety of possible
eventualities considered and mitigation plans in place if required.
With this mindset it should be clear to all involved in any construction that the most important
consideration for any project is enabling the operatives at the workface to complete the work,
and everyone and everything else is a support service for them.
Unfortunately, it is all too common in the UK construction industry for individuals involved in
construction to lose sight of this fact and believe that they, or their function, are more
important than the construction operative at the workface.
Whatever someone’s involvement with construction, or whatever they do, if they work for a
construction organisation be it Human Relations (HR), Commercial, Accounts, Project
Management, Health & Safety (H&S), Administration, Recruitment, Inspections, Construction
Engineering, Environmental, Permanent Works Design, Principal Designer, etc. they are all
a support service for the construction operative undertaking the work at the workface.
Everything should be planned and managed with that in mind and the more successful that
operative is at the workface the more successful everyone involved is.
One easy way to visualise this very basic principle is to imagine the construction process as
a machine consisting of cogs or gears with the objective being to turn the central
“Construction Project” cog or gear from the beginning point to the completed / finished point.

Ronan O’Driscoll
51.1.1 FIGURE 57 – Simplistic Diagram to Visualise the Construction
Process
For the diagram below note that each cog has a certain amount of internal force that will
make it rotate independently on its own in the direction of the arrows shown but all the cogs
combined use their force together to complete the construction project.
The “PROJECT” cog has no independent ability to rotate and the arrows are there to show
the direction from “START” to “FINISH” of the Project.
A sample number of cogs and names are shown here for simplicity but there can be many
more cogs above and below the ones shown and the names and amounts of the cogs can
all vary.
Also note that the most important cogs are the ones in contact with the “PROJECT” cog.
The contact area between the “WORK FORCE” cog and the “PROJECT” cog is the work
face available to complete the construction.

Ronan O’Driscoll
51.1.2 FIGURE 58 – Simplistic Diagram to Visualise the Construction
Process highlighting an increased workface
Please note the points from the previous Figure.

This diagram is to illustrate an increased work face available to complete the construction.

Ronan O’Driscoll
52 Construction Engineering using Technology
The UK Construction Industry has been talking about technology for many years and the use
of Building Information Modelling (BIM), etc. but the reality is the UK Construction Industry is
very slow to change and BIM and other technology has not really been fully realised from
conception to completion on projects. The author has to date not worked on any construction
project that has fully adopted BIM and technology to the fullest and in the main there are little
pockets where technology is used for parts of construction but not in the whole.
Specialist suppliers within the UK Construction industry have been the main advocates and
drivers for BIM and other technology. The below highlights where technology may
realistically be adopted in the current construction industry.
Technology should be in place for the benefit of the user and the project as opposed to just
adopting technology to say you have.
Construction Engineering technology can be very easily adopted and can be very beneficial
for the whole construction project by assisting the management of Construction Engineering
on site.
The use of technology for the management of Construction Engineering on site would be to
provide technology tools to assist the Construction Engineering Coordinator and
Construction Engineering Supervisors on site and make their task easier. Meaning they can
concentrate their time on site for the safe management of Construction Engineering and not
worry about the administration, recording and filing, etc.
A software platform for the management of the Construction Engineering Register would be
hugely beneficial provided it is laid out, designed, and developed by experienced
Construction Engineering Coordinators that clearly understand what is required and how to
manage a Construction Engineering Register. Software platforms created by individuals who
do not have the competence and experience are of less value on a construction site.
This software platform could use the Construction Engineering Register layout as the
interface as it is familiar to all competent and experienced Construction Engineering
Coordinators. From this interface there would be links to design briefs, risk registers,
drawings, permits to load and unload, the designers and design checkers, letters of
appointment, competence assessments, Construction Engineering procedures, etc.
Linked to this interface can be onsite inspections that can be controlled using a portable
software application (App) on a phone or tablet, etc. On site the item of Construction
Engineering can have a tag placed on it so there is a visible indicator of inspection, this tag
could have Near Field Communication (NFC) technology which is quite commonplace now.
The App would allow the user to swipe the tag with the NFC technology and all the
inspection details for that item of Construction Engineering could then be shown on the App
for the individual inspecting the Construction Engineering to complete. The tag could then be
swiped by the App at the end of the inspection and all data stored for that item of
Construction Engineering. A visual insert could be in place with the site tag or all users on
the site could have free read only access to the data on the tag using their phone or a tablet
to swipe the tag and access the data.
This inspection data from the App can be linked to the software interface of the Construction
Engineering Register so the Construction Engineering Coordinator has all data live and
available.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Currently in the UK there is a company developing and providing this proposed solution that
company is Temporary WorX and they currently provide an inspection App called TempTag
Lite.
The author would recommend readers to look at this company website for further details.**
** The Author is a company Technical Director for Temporary WorX and part of the initial
design team for TempTag Lite.

Ronan O’Driscoll
REFERENCES
• The Final Report of the Advisory Committee on Falsework (Bragg Report)
• BS 5975: 2019 – Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the
• The Construction Design and Management (CDM) Regulations 2015
• Health and Safety at Work Act 1974
• The Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1999
• The Work at Height Regulations 2005
• Thomas Telford – L.T.C. Rolt
• Lives of the Engineers – George and Robert Stephenson – Samuel Smiles
• Isambard Kingdom Brunel – L.T.C Rolt
• Eiffel – The genius who reinvented himself – David I Harvie
• Engineering Legends – Great American Civil Engineers – Richard G Weingardt
• The Checklist Manifesto – Atul Gawande
• Handbook of Structural Steelwork – 3rd Edition – The Steel Construction Institute
(referred to as the Red Book)
• Structural Engineers Pocket Book – 1st Edition 2004 – Fiona Cobb
• Steel Designers Manual – 6th Edition – The Steel Construction Institute
• BS 5950-1:2000 – Structural Use of Steelwork in Building
• BS 449-2:1969 – Specification for the use of Structural Steel in Building
• Wikipedia and numerous other easily accessible and public internet sources for some
terminology
• CS30 Formwork – A Guide to Good Practice – 3rd Edition – Concrete Society
• Formwork – A Guide to Good Practice – 3rd Edition – Worked Examples - Concrete
Society
• BS 6399-1:1996- Loadings for Buildings – Part 1: Code of Practice for Dead and
Imposed Loads
• BS 648: 1964 – Schedule of Weights of Building Materials
• BS 6399-2:1996- Loadings for Buildings – Part 2: Code of Practice for Wind Loads
• SCI Publication P286 – Guide to Evaluating Design Wind Loads to BS 6399-2:1997
• CIRIA Publication – C579
• BS 5400-2:2006 – Steel, Concrete and Composite Bridges – Part 2: Specification for
loads
• CIRIA Report 108 – Concrete Pressure on Formwork
• BS 8002:2015 Code of practice for earth retaining structures
• BS 8004:2015 – Code of practice for Foundations
• BS 6031:2009 – Code of Practice for Earthworks
• BS 8000-1:1989 – Workmanship on Building Sites – Part 1: Code of Practice for
Excavation and Filling
• HSE “Safety in Excavations” HSG 185
• Interim Advice Note 73/06 – Design Guidance for Road Pavement Foundations
• CIRIA SP95 – The design and construction of sheet-piled cofferdams
• Piling Handbook – 9th Edition – Arcelor Mittal
• Piling Handbook – 8th Edition – Arcelor Mittal
• BS 6399-3: 1988 – Loading for Buildings – Part 3 – Code of Practice for imposed roof
loads
• A History of the Safety Factors – Paper for The Structural Engineer on the 18th of
October 2011 – by Alasdair N. Beal
Ronan O’Driscoll
• BS 8110-1:1997 – Incorporating Amendments 1 & 2 – Structural Use of Concrete –
Part 1 – Code of practice for design and construction
• BS 5268-2:2002 – Structural use of Timber – Part 2 – Code of Practice for
Permissible Stress Design, materials and workmanship
• BS 4978:2007 +A2:2017 – Visual Strength grading of softwood – Specification
• BS 5930:1999 +A2:2010 – Code of Practice for Site Investigations
• CIRIA Report 97 – Trenching Practice
• CIRIA C703 – Crane Stability on Site
• Construction Plant-hire Association (CPA) – Ground Conditions for Construction
Plant – Good practice Guide
• BRE 470 – Working Platforms for Tracked Plant
• Working Platforms – Design of Granular Working platforms for Construction Plant – A
Guide to good practice – Temporary Works forum (TWf)
• Self-Propelled Modular Transporters (SPMTs): A Brief Guide – Temporary Works
forum (TWf)
• Mobile Crane Planning Safety Bulletin – Hardstand Assessment / Outrigger Loadings
- dated 3rd August 2009 - created by the Health and Safety Executive (HSE), British
Construction Steelwork Association (BCSA) and the Precast Flooring Federation
(PFF)
• Mobile Crane – Code of Practice 2006 – Office of Industrial Relations Workplace
Health and Safety Queensland – Australia
• BS 5977-1:1981 – Incorporating Amendment No 1 – Lintels – Part 1 – Method for
Assessment of Load
• CIRIA Report 68 – Lateral Movement of Heavy Loads
• TW 20.122 (10.11.20) Design Risk Management – Survey Results -Temporary
Works Forum
• TW 21.023 (26.2.21) Summary: TWf Survey -Temporary Works Forum
• TW 21.024 (26.2.21) The Principal Designer (under CDM2015) and how the role is
being discharged (or not) -Temporary Works Forum
• TW21.029(5.3.21) – HSE Research Project to broaden understanding of how CDM
2016 Principal Designer role is working in Practice
• BRE Digest 439 – Roof loads due to local drifting of snow
• Cracking in Buildings – BRE Publication – By R B Bonshor and L L Bonshor
• BS 6954: Part 3 : 1988 – Tolerances Building – Part 2 – Recommendations for
selecting target size and predicting fit
• BS 5606:1990 – Guide to Accuracy in building
• Historical Structural Steelwork Handbook – BCSA – W. Bates
• BRE Good Building Guide – Providing temporary support during work on openings in
external walls – GBG 15
• BS 5268-1:2005 – Code of Practice for the use of Masonry – Part 1: Structural use of
reinforce masonry
• Appraisal of Existing Structures (Third Edition) – October 2010 – The Institution of
Structural Engineers (IStructE)
• Strength of Materials: SI Edition – G. H. Ryder
• BS 7121-3:2017+A1:2019 – Code of Practice for Safe Use of Cranes – Part 3:
Mobile Cranes

Ronan O’Driscoll
• Geotechnique – Volume 11, Issue 1, March 1961 – “The Calculation of Laboratory
and In-situ Values for California Bearing Ratio from Bearing Capacity Data” by
W.P.M. Black
• CIRIA – Guidance on Embedded Retaining Wall Design – C760

Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX A
BS 5975 – Construction Engineering Flowchart
(In Swim Lanes – Horizontal)

Ronan O’Driscoll
BS 5975 – BASIC FLOWCHART FOR CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
Clients
Client DI Ensures all Construction
Designated Individual DI Establishes a Client Appoints a Client Appoints a Client Appoints a
organisations have a Engineering
(DI) Clients CE Principal Permanent Works (PWs) Principal Contractor
Construction Engineering Procedure
Appointed for Client Procedure Designer`(PD) Designer (PC)
(CE) Procedure in place
CLIENT
Client provides all necessary information to enable the PD and / or the PC to design, construct and remove CE and, where necessary, protect any assets' which belong to the client or a third party
The Clients Designated Individual should ensure that the Principal Designer’s and Principal Contractors procedure (s) for the control of Construction Engineering are being implemented
PRINCIPAL DESIGNER
The PD should ensure that:-

 There is a coherent construction method which identifies all key temporary conditions and CE
 The finally agreed construction method, sequence and CE are not deleterious to the Permanent Works (PWs)
Principal Designer
Designated Individual PD DI Ensures all DI Establishes a (PD) Construction Design
(DI) organisations have a Principal Engineering  Designers follow the relevant clauses within the British Standard
PD coordinates all information
Appointed for Principal Construction Engineering Designers (PD)  They share information with Designers, and the PC’s Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) and CEC, that
Procedure between the PWD and the PC’s
Designer (PD) (CE) Procedure in place CE Procedure might influence the design of CE or the selection of construction methods
CEC or any other relevant CEC
 Designers take account of the construction phase plan
 They retain appropriate information relating to CE that would be required for the Health & Safety file
 Designers comply, Co-operate, Co-ordinate and Pass Information
PERMANENT WORKS DESIGNERS
DESIGNATED INDIVIDUAL
 PWD DI Establishes a PWD CE Procedure

 Designers should have the qualifications,
skills, knowledge and experience required to Permanent Works
Designated Individual carry out the design and co-ordination roles Designer (PWD)
(DI) and the passing/receiving of information Construction
Appointed for Permanent relevant to any Construction Engineering Engineering
Works Designer (PWD)  Design organisations should verify the Procedure
competence of both designers and checkers
of Construction Engineering within their
organisation
The PWD should ensure that:-

 They have addressed the buildability of the Permanent Works (PWs) and identify, and make provision for, any CE
and temporary conditions required by their design and their assumed method of construction.
 They have considered a proposed method and sequence of construction which should have no adverse effects on
the PWs.
 They have decided on and communicated the intended construction process, giving particular attention to new or
Permanent Works Designer unfamiliar processes.
PERMANENT WORKS DESIGNERS
Permanent Works Designer (PWD) experience and PWD selected and record (PWD) Experience &  They have considered the stability of existing structures and partially constructed / erected / demolished structures Permanent Works Designer Permanent Works Designer (PWD) Produces
PWD has suitable CE and PWD undertakes (PWD) Produces an outline a Designers Risk Register (DRR) to
competency checked and confirmed by the PWD DI maintained of experience and Competency Record for CE and, where this is not immediately obvious, providing information to show how temporary stability could be achieved.
Construction experience and Yes PWD completes the design considering all CE and Constructability Reviews Schedule of Construction communicate all foreseen Risks from their
to ensure they have suitable understanding of CE for competency assessment for CE and Construction  They have identified where standard industry details are not suitable, and where detailed structural design is to be
competency Construction requirements as required by the with PD, Client and any Engineering required for their Design to the PC and Construction
their designs and Construction carried out by others.
Construction, Design & Management (CDM) Regulations Contractor agreed at that design to be constructed Engineering Designers (CEDs)
 They have considered the effect of the proposed work on the integrity of adjacent / existing structures, particularly
time
during refurbishment.
 The overall design takes account of TWs which might be needed, no matter who is to develop those works.
 Consideration has been given to the availability of sufficient space required to construct or maintain the structure.
No  They clearly state loads for which the structure has been designed including the proposed plant installation loads
and plant routes.
 The PWD should respond promptly and clearly to any request from the PC or a contractor, appointed to manage
part of the CE, for information or design criteria, in respect of CE, to allow the Construction Engineering Designer
(CED) to complete the design and allow the PC or other contractor to manage and discharge their responsibilities.
The PWD should liaise with the PD to provide all necessary information relevant to any CE or temporary condition(s) to
The PWD could be closely mentored and managed by another member of the PWs Design team the PC through the PD.
who has the suitable experience and competency
Or
A suitable CE / Construction specialist could be consulted and utilised to fill the gap in experience
and competency
Or
Any alternative PWD is to be selected provided they have the suitable experience and competency
DESIGNERS
DI Establishes a
(DI) TWD Temporary
Principal
Appointed for Construction Works Procedure
Contractor (PC)
Engineering Designer
CE Procedure
(CED)
LEAD CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGNER
Lead Construction Lead Construction

Lead Construction Engineering Designer (LCED) LCED selected and record Engineering Designer Engineering Designer
LCED has suitable CE and (LCED) Experience & (LCED) Keeps Records of all Construction Engineering
experience and competency checked and confirmed maintained of experience and CEC Sends CAT 1 or 2 Design CE Register Updated CE Register Updated
Construction experience and Yes Competency Record for CE CEDs and coordinates all of CED returns Design Design
by the CED DI to ensure they have suitable competency assessment for CE Brief to CED
competency and Construction the CE Designers
understanding of CE for their designs and Construction
CE Register Updated
CED returns Design Design
No
If the LCEC is deficient in competency by a small amount further training and experience can be
given Construction Engineering CE Register Updated
CE Register Updated
Or CED returns Design Design
They can be closely mentored and managed by the CED DI until the DI is satisfied they can work
independently
Or
Another more suitable LCEC is selected
Construction Engineering Designer (CED) CED selected and record Designer (LCED) Experience
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGNERS
CED has suitable CE and

experience and competency checked and confirmed maintained of experience and & Competency Record for
Construction experience and Yes
by the CED DI to ensure they have suitable competency assessment for CE TWs and Construction
competency
understanding of CE for their designs and Construction
No
If the CED is deficient in competency by a small amount further training and experience can be
given
Or
They can be closely mentored and managed by the CED DI until the DI is satisfied they can work
independently
Or
Another more suitable CED is selected
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGN
CHECKER
CED Checker Completes Design Check and

returns Design Check Certificate Construction Engineering
Design Check as required
Design Check
INDEPENDENT CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING
CED Independent Checker Completes Design

Check and returns Design Check Certificate
DESIGN CHECKER
Design Check
CAT 1 or 2
Designated Individual PC DI Ensures all DI Establishes a PC Construction

(DI) organisations have a Principal Engineering Principal Contractor Appoints a Principal Contractor Appoints a
Appointed for Principal Construction Engineering Contractor (PC) Procedure Sub-Contractor Supplier / Manufacturer
Contractor (PC) (CE) Procedure in place CE Procedure Principal Contractor Reviews & Approves Sub-
Contractor Construction Engineering Procedure Principal Contractor Reviews & Approves Sub-Contractor
Construction Engineering Coordinator Appointment
CEC Creates Construction Engineering Register as a minimum to include the following columns:-
No Lead CEC Coordinates with all parties to establish CE scope and what CE are required
Register
- Reference Number
- Short Description (including location, etc.)
LEAD CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING COORDINATOR

- Design Checker (company and / or name) CEC to assess if any Construction CEC to Categorises Design
No CE Design Brief CE Register Updated CEC Sends CAT 3 Design Brief to
- Date Design is required Engineering Supervisors (CES) are to be CES’s Appointed CEC to populate the CE Register Risk and Implementation CE Design Required Yes CAT 1, 2 or 3 Design CAT 3 Construction Engineering
appointed Risk CED CE Register Updated
- Date Design completed Design & Design Check

- CE erection complete & checked with date of Permit To Load (if required) CAT 0
Lead CEC Coordinates with all Sub-Contractor CECs and - Date of Permit to Unload (if required)
Lead Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) experience and competency checked parties to establish CE scope and what CE are required
and confirmed by the PC DI to ensure they have suitable experience and competency for CEC is competent & has relevant up-to-date CEC selected and record
training & the necessary skills, knowledge & maintained of experience and CEC Letter of Appointment DI Appoints further CECs as
the role taking into account the complexity of CE Yes Construction Engineering
experience appropriate to the complexity of the Any further CECs required? Yes required and nominates one Lead
The CEC should not be responsible for the day-today progress of the CE or other project competency assessment for CE Design & Design Check
project and anticipated CE CEC
matters (e.g. commercial or programme matters) and Construction Standard Solution selected CAT 0 Design
CEC to confirm if a Permit

Permit To Load Required
To Load is required
No CEC notes Designer and Construction Engineering
Design Checker Names on ReDesign Check as required
CE Register
CEC contacts CE Designer CE Register Updated
ReDesign Required Yes
and discusses
Or NO
Or
NO CE Register Updated
- Reference Number
CEC is competent & has relevant up-to-date CEC selected and record - Short Description
training & the necessary skills, knowledge & maintained of experience and CEC Letter of Appointment - Design Check Category
Yes CEC Coordinates with all parties to establish CE scope and what CE are required - Risk Classification of Construction Engineering
experience appropriate to the complexity of the competency assessment for CE CEC Creates Construction Engineering
project and anticipated CE and Construction - Date Design Brief issued to Designer
Register
- Design Checker (company and / or name)
- Date Design is required
- Date Design completed

Yes
No - CE erection complete & checked with date of Permit To Load (if required)
Or
Or
Yes
SITE INSPECTIONS
Inspection is specific to the type of

The CEC will be best placed to highlight any spe
A suitable visible, clear indication of inspection and suitability of CEC or CES Inspects Construction Engineering and the
Inspection is specific to the type of Construction Engineering and the requirements of those Construction The CEC will be best placed to highlight any specific inspection requirements for any specific Construction inspection requirements for any specific Constru
CEC or CES Inspects completed CE on site Construction Engineering for Loading or UnLoading should be used completed CE on site requirements of those Construction
Engineering Engineering Engineering
on site Engineering
CES is competent & has relevant up-to-date CES selected and record
training & the necessary skills, knowledge & CE Register updated with
CEC to appoint CES as per the maintained of experience and CES Letter of Appointment
Yes CES names
approved CE Procedure experience appropriate to the complexity of the competency assessment for CE
project and anticipated CE and Construction
No
If the CES is deficient in competency by a small amount further training and experience can be given
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING SUPERVISOR
Or
They can be closely mentored and managed by the CEC until the CEC is satisfied they can work independently
Or
Another more suitable CES is selected CE Designer to be CE Register Updated
NO
consulted
NO
CE Register Updated
CES Inspects completed CE on site CE Satisfactory on Site Yes
CES Inspects completed CE on site

CONSTRUCTION TEAM
Construction Team on site erect CE to

approved RAMS & Drawings Construction Team on site complete all
necessary work required
SUB-CONTRACTOR
Sub-Contractor DI Ensures Sub-Contractor

Designated Individual DI Establishes a Construction
all organisations they
(DI) Sub-Contractor Engineering DI Appoints CECs as required and
employ have a Construction
Appointed for Sub- (PC) CE Works Procedure nominates one Lead CEC
Engineering (CE) Procedure
Contractor (PC) Procedure
in place
- Reference Number
- Short Description
CEC is competent & has relevant up-to-date CEC selected and record - Construction Engineering Designer name (company and / or individual)
training & the necessary skills, knowledge & - Design Checker (company and / or name) CEC to assess if any Construction
maintained of experience and CEC Letter of Appointment CEC Creates Construction Engineering
experience appropriate to the complexity of the Yes CEC Coordinates with all parties to establish CE scope and what CE are required - Date Design is required Engineering Supervisors (CES) are to be CES’s Appointed No CEC to populate the CE Register
competency assessment for CE Register
project and anticipated CE - Date Design completed appointed
and Construction
No
SUB-CONTRACTOR
Or
Or
Yes
SITE INSPECTIONS
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING SUPERVISOR
CES is competent & has relevant up-to-date CES selected and record
CE Register updated with
CEC to appoint CES as per the training & the necessary skills, knowledge & maintained of experience and CES Letter of Appointment
Yes CES names
approved CE Procedure experience appropriate to the complexity of the competency assessment for CE
project and anticipated CE and Construction
SUB-CONTRACTOR
No
If the CES is deficient in competency by a small amount further training and experience can be given
Or
They can be closely mentored and managed by the CEC until the CEC is satisfied they can work independently
Or
Another more suitable CES is selected
CONSTRUCTION TEAM
SUB-CONTRACTOR
SUPPLIERS / MANUFACTURERS
Supplier / Manufacturer Provision of Design Data:-

 The supplier should either provide published technical data or justify the capacities by specific calculations and certificates
 NOTE:- Attention is drawn to section 8 of the Health and Safety at Work, etc. Act 1974 and the duty of suppliers and importers of equipment to supply relevant and correct performance data
 The design data should include:

Supplier / Manufacturer CE Procedure should cover:- Supplier / Supplier / Manufacturer Provision of Information for the Safe Use of Equipment:- Supplier / Manufacturer
Supplier / Manufacturer Verification of Design Information:- Supplier / Manufacturer Provision of Information:-
 Ensuring their equipment conforms to their published technical data Manufacturer Construction Engineering
Designated Individual  The intended use of components and how they can be identified Supplier / Manufacturer Standard Solutions:-
 The original design if the components, verification and production of technical information for individual and assemblies of proprietary items Construction  The supplier should provide the following: Design
(DI) DI Establishes a Supplier /  The supplier should carry out sufficient calculations and testing to prove the capacity of all Construction Engineering components / equipment, including  The supplier should provide all information necessary for the design, assembly, use, dismantling and maintenance components offered for use as Construction Engineering equipment  Appropriate dimensions, section and material properties and masses
 Ensuring that manufactured and repaired items conform to the original design requirements for the initial and all subsequent production through the application of robust quality control Engineering
Appointed for Supplier / Manufacturer CE Procedure connections  Performance data issued by a supplier of equipment can reasonably be relied on without further justification  Structural properties for various conditions of use, such as different extensions and eccentricities, together with details of any necessary bracing or lacing  The supplier should provide published technical data in the form of arrangements of their equipment based on certain conditions of use
 Material handling and transportation Procedure  Detailed user guides, in appropriate format, explaining how the items should be used STANDARD SOLUTIONS
Manufacturer  Calculations and any necessary testing should be carried out to recognised standards  The information should relate to the properties of the individual components, their use in expected assemblies, and any specific requirements or constraints for use, inspection and maintenance  A clear statement on whether capacities are in terms of characteristic strength or maximum safe working loads  These arrangements, known as standard solutions and often presented in tabular or readily assimilated format, should relate to the suppliers product only
 Maintenance and repair of items that are hired or offered for second-hand sale  Information on transportation and safe handling of Construction Engineering equipment on site, i.e. lifting points, safe stacking and storage
 Any testing should be representative of the actual conditions of use and be sufficient in number to give statistically significant results  The information provided to third parties should be sufficient to enable them to carry out their own design(s) or independent checking of the supplier’s design  What factors of safety have been included or assumed
 Equipment substitutions when the original component is not available  Identification of critical items requiring inspection, such as connections or items prone to deterioration over a period of time and specify any specific testing, maintenance or inspection regime
 NOTE: For characteristic strength this includes recommended partial material and load factors. For maximum safe working load this is the global factor on the failure
 Whether the components conform to the requirements of an appropriate British or European Standard
 Details and capacities of connections where loads are received into one or more components, transferred form one to the other, and transmitted to other supports such as foundations
 Any limiting deflection conditions
 The supplier need not publish test reports or manufacturing drawings but should be prepared to share this information with specific users of the equipment, putting confidentially agreements in place if necessary
CEC Sends CAT 1 or 2 Design CE Register Updated CE Register Updated
CE Register Updated Brief to CED
CE Register Updated
CE Register Updated CE Register Updated
CED Checker Completes Design Check and
returns Design Check Certificate Construction Engineering
Design Check
Construction Engineering CED Independent Checker Completes Design

Design Check as required Check and returns Design Check Certificate
Design Check
CEC to confirm if a Permit CEC issues a Permit To CE Permit To UnLoad /

CE Register Updated Permit To UnLoad /
To UnLoad / Dismantle is Yes UnLoad / Dismantle is Dismantle
required Dismantle Required required
CEC to confirm if a Permit CEC issues a Permit To CE Permit To Load

Permit To Load Required Yes
To Load is required Load is required
ReDesign Check as required

NO
CE Register Updated
NO
CE Register Updated
Inspection is specific to the type of A suitable visible, clear indication of

Inspection is specific to the type of A suitable visible, clear indication of The CEC will be best placed to highlight any specific
The CEC will be best placed to highlight any specific CEC or CES Inspects Construction Engineering and the inspection and suitability of
CEC or CES Inspects Construction Engineering and the inspection and suitability of inspection requirements for any specific Construction
inspection requirements for any specific Construction completed CE on site requirements of those Construction Construction Engineering for Loading
completed CE on site requirements of those Construction Construction Engineering for Loading Engineering
Engineering Engineering or UnLoading should be used on site
Engineering or UnLoading should be used on site
CE Register Updated
CES Inspects completed CE on site CE Inspection Recorded

CES Inspects regularly during CE use
CAT 1 or 2
Construction Team on site complete all Construction Team on site load and use Construction Team on site UnLoad /
necessary work required TWs Dismantle TWs
CE Design Brief CEC to Categorises Design

CE Register Updated CEC Sends CAT 3 Design Brief to
Risk and Implementation CE Design Required Yes CAT 1, 2 or 3 Design CAT 3 Construction Engineering
Risk CED CE Register Updated
Design & Design Check
CAT 0
Design & Design Check
Standard Solution selected CAT 0 Design CEC to confirm if a Permit CEC issues a Permit To CE Permit To UnLoad /
CE Register Updated Permit To UnLoad /
To UnLoad / Dismantle is Yes UnLoad / Dismantle is Dismantle
Dismantle Required
required required
CEC to confirm if a Permit CEC issues a Permit To CE Permit To Load

Permit To Load Required Yes
To Load is required Load is required
CEC notes Designer and Construction Engineering
Design Checker Names on ReDesign Check as required
CE Register CEC contacts CE Designer CE Register Updated
ReDesign Required Yes
and discusses
NO
CE Register Updated
NO
CE Register Updated
NO
Yes
A suitable visible, clear indication of inspection and suitability of

Inspection is specific to the type of Construction Engineering and the requirements of those Construction The CEC will be best placed to highlight any specific inspection requirements for any specific Construction Inspection is specific to the type of Construction A suitable visible, clear indication of inspection and
CEC or CES Inspects completed CE on site Construction Engineering for Loading or UnLoading should be used CEC or CES Inspects The CEC will be best placed to highlight any specific inspection
Engineering Engineering Engineering and the requirements of those suitability of Construction Engineering for Loading or
on site completed CE on site requirements for any specific Construction Engineering
Inspection is specific to the type of Construction A suitable visible, clear indication of inspection and Construction Engineering UnLoading should be used on site
CEC or CES Inspects The CEC will be best placed to highlight any specific inspection
Engineering and the requirements of those suitability of Construction Engineering for Loading or
completed CE on site requirements for any specific Construction Engineering
Construction Engineering UnLoading should be used on site
CE Designer to be CE Register Updated

NO
consulted
NO
CE Register Updated
CES Inspects completed CE on site CE Satisfactory on Site Yes
CES Inspects completed CE on site CE Inspection Recorded

CES Inspects regularly during CE use
Construction Team on site erect CE to

approved RAMS & Drawings Construction Team on site complete all Construction Team on site load and use Construction Team on site UnLoad /
necessary work required CE Dismantle CE
APPENDIX A 1
BS 5975 – Construction Engineering Flowchart
(Vertical)

Ronan O’Driscoll
BASIC FLOWCHART FOR BS 5975 FOR CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING UNDERTAKEN BY
A CONTRACTOR
(DI)
Appointed
THIS COLOUR FOR DI
DI Ensures all
organisations have a
Construction Engineering THIS COLOUR FOR CEC
(CE) Procedure in place
DI Establishes a CE THIS COLOUR FOR CE

Procedure DESIGNER
THIS COLOUR FOR

Construction INDEPENDENT CE DESIGN
Engineering CHECKER
Procedure
THIS COLOUR FOR CES

DI Appoints a
Construction
Engineering
Coordinator (CEC)
THIS COLOUR FOR

CONSTRUCTION TEAM
CEC Letter of
Appointment
DI Appoints further
Are further CEC’s Yes CECs as required
required and nominates one
Lead CEC
No
CEC Letter of
CEC Coordinates with Appointment
all parties to establish
scope and what
Construction
Engineering are
required CDM PRINCIPAL DESIGNER
COORDINATES PWs DESIGNER
INFORMATION
PWs Designers Create a

CEC Creates a Construction Engineering PWs Design Risk PERMANENT WORKS (PWs) DESIGNERS
Construction Schedule of CE they fore see Assessment UNDERTAKE CONSTRUCTABILITY
Engineering being required REVIEWS OF THEIR PROPOSED DESIGNS
Register
- Reference Number
- Short Description
- Design Checker (company and / or name)
- Date Design is required
- Date Design completed
CEC to assess if any

Supervisors (CESs) are to be
appointed
CEC to appoint CES CE Register

CES Letter of
CES’s as per the updated with CeS
Yes Appointment
appointed approved CE names
Procedure
No
CEC to populate
the CE Register
CEC to create CE
Design Brief
CE Design Brief
CEC Categorises
Design Risk and
Implementation
Risk
Construction Construction Construction Independent CE

CEC sends CAT 3 Construction
Engineering Engineering CE Designer Engineering Design Checker
Design Brief to CE Engineering Design
Register Updated Register Updated returns design Register Updated Completes Check
Designer
and returns design
CAT 3
Construction
CE Design CAT 1, 2 or 3 Engineering Design
Required Yes Design & Design Check
CAT 1 or 2
CAT 0
CEC sends CAT 1 or CE Designer
Engineering Engineering Design
Standard Solution 2 Design Brief to returns design with
Register Updated & Design Check
selected CE Designer Design Check
CAT 0 Design
CEC notes Designer

& Design Checker
names on Register
Construction
Engineering
Register Updated
Construction Team
on site erect CE to
approved RAMs &
Drawings
Independent CE
Design Checker
Engineering CE Designer Engineering
Completes New Check
Register Updated returns redesign Register Updated
and returns design
check if CAT 3
Yes
CES inspects Construction

completed CE on CEC contacts CE Construction
ReDesign Engineering Engineering
site Designer and No
Required Register Updated ReDesign & Design
discusses
Check
Yes
Construction Team Construction

CE Satisfactory CE Designer to be on site complete all Engineering
No consulted No necessary work Register Updated
on site
required
Yes
Construction
CES inspects
Engineering
completed CE on
Register Updated
site
CEC to confirm if a
Permit To Load is
required
Construction
CEC issues Permit
Permit To Load Yes Enginerring Permit
or if Appointment
Required To Load
allows CES issues
No
Construction
Engineering
Register Updated
Construction Team
on site load and
use CE
CES inspects
regularly during CE
use
Construction
Engineering
Inspection
Recorded
Construction
Engineering
Register Updated
CEC confirms when

CE are to be
unloaded /
dismanled
Construction
Engineering
Register Updated
CEC or CeS (if

appointment
allows) inspects CE
prior to unloading /
dismantling
Construction
CEC issues Permit
Permit To UnLoad Engineering Permit
or if Appointment
Required Yes To UnLoad
allows CES issues
No
Construction
Engineering
Register Updated
Construction Team
on site UnLoad /
Dismantle CE
Construction
Engineering
Register Updated
APPENDIX B
Draft Construction Engineering Design Brief

Ronan O’Driscoll
COMPANY DOCUMENT NUMBER HERE
Revision 01
LOGO PLACED Company Document
HERE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGN BRIEF
Customer: - Date: -
Project: - Project Number: -
Construction
Construction Start
Estimated End Date:
Date: -
-
Created by (Name / Company / Position): -
Category of
Construction
Engineering Assumed Construction
at time of Design Engineering Design
Brief*: - Brief No: -
(See note below)

Construction Engineering Implementation Risk Class:
-
Brief Description of Construction Engineering to be Designed: -
Design Notes: All information necessary to enable the Construction Engineering Designer (CED) to
produce the design must be included.
Enclosed Not Applicable

A Drawing references
B Relevant Boreholes / Trial Pits / Site Investigation
C Existing Ground Conditions
D Ground Levels
E Services / Traffic / Rail / River / Canal / Buildings
F Loading Criteria
Any relevant Clauses from the Specification, Site Restrictions,
G Programme Restraints, Site Photos, Site Plant to be Used,
Access and / or Any Buildability Issues, etc.
Preferred Materials
H Additional Information
Preferred Method
Others (please specify)
Approved (Name / Company / Position): - Date: -
** NO CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING MUST BE CONSTRUCTED UNTIL A RELEVANT “FOR

CONSTRUCTION” DESIGN HAS BEEN PRODUCED, UNLESS CAT 0**
Ronan O’Driscoll Page 1 of 1
APPENDIX C
Draft Designers Check Certificate

Ronan O’Driscoll
Revision 01
HERE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGN CHECK
CERTIFICATE
Customer: - Date: -
Project: - Project Number: -
Created by (Name / Company / Position): -
Construction
Category of Construction
Engineering Design
Engineering: -
Check Certificate No: -
Implementation Risk Engineering Design
Class: - Brief No: -
Brief Description of Construction Engineering to be Checked: -
PART A (To be completed by the Designer)

Design organisation
I certify that reasonable professional skill and care has been used in the preparation of the Design of the above item of
Construction Engineering and it has been designed in accordance with the following requirements and provided it is installed in
accordance with this design, it is safe to use the temporary works for the purpose it is intended.
Design brief reviewed? Y / N Site visit? Y / N
Where there any Changes in Design Y / N Which is latest revision & where are the changes recorded?
Standards, codes of practice and other reference documentation:
Drawings (including Revision Numbers):
Risk Assessments, etc.:
Note: Certificate Only Required for Construction Engineering CAT 2 & 3.
I propose that the Design of the Construction Engineering be checked as the following CAT -
Category in accordance with Table 1 of “BS 5975 Code of Practice for Temporary Works
Procedures and Permissible Stress Design of Falsework”. (Insert 2 or 3 as appropriate)
SIGNED: PRINT: DATE:
To be signed by the External or Internal Designer who has carried out the Design of the Construction Engineerings.
No Calculations to be provided to the Design Checker
Revision 01
CERTIFICATE
PART B (To be completed by the Design Checker CAT 2 only)
Checker organisation:
I certify that reasonable professional skill and care have been used in checking the Design of Construction Engineering identified
in PART A of this certificate, with the objective of ensuring that:
• The Design is in accordance with the requirements of the design brief,
• The Design is in Accordance with the Standards, Codes of Practice (and any departures from these
standards) stated in PART A and these standards and codes are appropriate in the Circumstances.
• The Design is in accordance with the Drawings and Revision number stated in Part A
• The Design is in accordance with the specification provided in Part A
Are there any constraints or loading conditions to note? If so list below: -
Is there any specific methodology as part of this Construction Engineering Design? If so list below: -
I confirm that the checking of the Construction Engineering Design has been carried out with CAT -
the independence specified in table 1 of “BS 5975-2008 Code of Practice for Temporary Works
Procedures and Permissible Stress Design of Falsework” and in accordance to the following (Insert 1 or 2 as appropriate)
Category:
To be signed by the Engineer responsible for undertaking the checking of this design.
THE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGN CHECKER CONFIRMS: -
• The Design is suitable and correct and there is nothing further required
• The design output is suitable and sufficient for the site team to construct on site and
there is nothing further required to progress the work on site.
Revision 01
CERTIFICATE
PART C (3rd Party Independent Design Checker Check CAT 3 only)
3rd party check organisation:
Is the independent check required?
Y / N
I certify that reasonable professional skill and care have been used in checking the Design of Construction Engineering identified
in PART A of this certificate, with the objective of ensuring that:
• The Design is in accordance with the requirements of the design brief,
• The Design is in Accordance with the Standards, Codes of Practice (and any departures from these
standards) stated in PART A and these standards and codes are appropriate in the Circumstances.
• The Design is in accordance with the Drawings and Revision number stated in Part A
• The Design is in accordance with the specification provided in Part A
Are there any constraints or loading conditions to note? If so list below: -
Is there any specific methodology as part of this Construction Engineering Design? If so list below: -
I confirm that the checking of the Construction Engineering Design has been carried out with CAT - 3
the independence specified in table 1 of “BS 5975-2008 Code of Practice for Temporary Works
Procedures and Permissible Stress Design of Falsework” and in accordance to the following (Insert 3 as appropriate)
Category:
To be signed by 3rd party check Engineer from an Independent Company
THE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGN CHECKER CONFIRMS: -
• The Design is suitable and correct and there is nothing further required
• The design output is suitable and sufficient for the site team to construct on site and
there is nothing further required to progress the work on site.
APPENDIX D
Draft Designers Risk Assessment

Ronan O’Driscoll
COMPANY LOGO DOCUMENT NUMBER HERE
Revision 01
PLACED HERE Company Document
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DESIGN RISK ASSESSMENT
Project Job No. Date Sheet No.

Project Stage Designers
NO. 1 - Activity / Hazard & Possible Consequence Persons at Risk Eliminate Reduce Risk by Design Remaining Risks
by Design & Who is to Control these Risks
Work Site Others
  
Solutions Considered Not Presumed Construction Methods

Reasonably Practicable
NO. 2 - Activity / Hazard & Possible Consequence Persons at Risk Eliminate Reduce Risk by Design Remaining Risks
by Design & Who is to Control these Risks
Work Site Others
  
Solutions Considered Not Presumed Construction Methods

Reasonably Practicable
SIGNED PRINT DATE POSITION

PREPARED BY:
Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX E
Draft Construction Engineering Register

Ronan O’Driscoll
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING REGISTER CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING REGISTER
Ref: ----
PROJECT NAME : PROJECT NO : ON-SITE CEC : XXXXX
CE Check PERMITS CONSTRUCTION

CE Design ENGINEERING
(CAT 0, 1, 2, 3 or RD) Where Required
INTERFACES WITH
Implementation Date of Issue of
Design Check Date the Design is Date: Date: Record or MS& RA Reviewed OTHER
CE Reference No. Description of CE Risk Class (VL, L, Design Brief to COMMENTS Record of CEC Responsible
Cat no. (0,1,2,3) Required Inspection (If Required) CONSTRUCTION
M or H) CED CE Designer CE Checker Inspection
Submitted / (PERMIT TO ENGINEERING AND /
(Name & Company) Returned (Name & Company) (PERMIT TO
Returned UNLOAD / OR PERMANENT
LOAD)
DISMANTLE) WORKS

CEC
PREPARED BY:
*ALL CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING ARE UNDERTAKEN USING SAFE SYSTEMS OF WORK*

*This Document is to be used with conjunction with document (XXXXX) “Construction Engineering Procedure”
Document Owner: Ronan O'Driscoll

Date: XX-XX-XX Uncontrolled when printed
Linked to Procedure XXXXX Page 1 of 1 Issue Number: 00
APPENDIX F
Draft Construction Engineering Permit To Load / Unload

Ronan O’Driscoll
Revision 01
HERE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING PERMIT TO
LOAD / UNLOAD / DISMANTLE
*This Document is to be used with conjunction with document (XXX-REG-XXX) “Construction
Engineering Register” and this form is only required for Cat 2 and 3 Construction Engineering Designs.
PROJECT No :
PROJECT Name :
SECTION OF TEMP WORKS :
Reference Documentation / Drawings (including

Revision Numbers) :
DATE OF INSPECTION : TIME :
PART A
Report :
1. The Construction Engineering have been constructed in accordance with the certified design
(design and design check certificates have been issued and the drawings (including revision numbers)
and specification used are the ones referenced on the certificates).
2. The water, ground, environmental and any other loading conditions and use are as envisaged by
the design.
3. Additional observations and any modifications:
4. If required have the additional observations and any modifications been approved by the Designer:
5. Subject to the adequacy of the accepted design and subject to the satisfactory completion of any
remedial works identified in section 3 & 4, I certify that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the CE
are fit to be taken into use.
NAME: SIGNED: DATE:
To be signed by the Construction Engineering Coordinator / Supervisor for the site.
Revision 01
HERE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING PERMIT TO
LOAD / UNLOAD / DISMANTLE
PART B :
Report :
1. The Construction Engineering have been constructed in accordance with the certified design
(design and design check certificates have been issued and the drawings (including revision numbers)
and specification used are the ones referenced on the certificates).
2. The water, ground, environmental and any other loading conditions and use are as envisaged by
the design.
3. Additional observations and any modifications:
4. If required have the additional observations and any modifications been approved by the Designer:
5. Subject to the adequacy of the accepted design and subject to the satisfactory completion of any
remedial works identified in section 3 & 4, I certify that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, the CE
are fit to be taken out of use to Unload and / or Dismantle.
I certify that the Construction Engineering have fulfilled their purpose and it is now safe to Unload and /
or Dismantle the Construction Engineering.
NAME: SIGNED: DATE:
To be signed by the Construction Engineering Coordinator / Supervisor for the site.
APPENDIX G
Draft Construction Engineering Coordinator Appointment

Ronan O’Driscoll
Revision 01
HERE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING COORDINATOR
APPOINTMENT
(DELETE IF THE APPOINTMENT IS FOR A CONTRACTOR OTHER THAN THE PC)

The appointed PC Construction Engineering Coordinator role will include:
1. The PC’s CEC should have overall responsibility for the co-ordination of all Construction Engineering across
the site, whether the Construction Engineering are being implemented by the PC, a sub-contractor or a
client’s appointed contractor.
2. The PC’s CEC should be the single point of contact for providing and receiving relevant information from the
client, Principal Designer(PD), Construction Engineering Designer (CED), the site team and any CEC, where
appointed, for all Construction Engineering matters.
3. The PC’s CEC should be responsible for ensuring that the organization’s agreed procedure for the control of
Construction Engineering is implemented on site. This responsibility includes co-ordinating other contractors
whose procedures might be accepted for use for agreed parts of the work and checking that those
contractors are implementing those procedures.
4. The PC’s CEC should be responsible for providing information to and receiving information from the CEC of
any contractor which has been approved to manage its own Construction Engineering schemes.
5. The PC’s CEC should be responsible to the PC’s DI for ensuring the Construction Engineering design is
implemented in accordance with the relevant construction issue drawings and the specification.
6. The PC’s CEC should not be responsible for the day-to-day progress of the Construction Engineering or other
project matters, for example:-
• Commercial
• Or programme matters
Where this is not possible, the PC's CEC should recognize that the role of CEC overrides other
responsibilities the individual might have and should not put progress of the works above the safety of the
Construction Engineering. However, it is recognized that this might not be possible on projects that have few
or no engineering staff.
7. If the PC’s CEC has responsibility for both checking the Construction Engineering and progress of the
construction works, decisions should not be compromised by commercial or other pressures. If the PC’s CEC
considers that they are under undue pressure to achieve production at the expense of structural stability, then
they should seek assistance from their DI
8. The PC's CEC should bring matters of concern to the DI that cannot be adequately resolved at site level.
9. The PC's CEC should ensure that adequate checks have been completed to confirm the proposed
Construction Engineering have no adverse effect on the Permanent Works. This should be either by:-
• A certificate signed by the CED and CEDC
• Or by a statement that the Construction Engineering design is in accordance with the PWD’s
sequence/methodology
• Or by confirmation from the PWD that the proposed Construction Engineering have no adverse
effects on the permanent works.
10. The PC's CEC should have adequate authority to carry out their tasks including authority to stop the work if it
is not being carried out satisfactorily.
11. The PC’s CEC should be responsible for ensuring the provision of formal permission to load or progress
beyond the hold point. The PC’s CEC should not permit work to continue beyond any critical stage until it is to
the standard specified.
12. The PC’s CEC should ensure that once the Construction Engineering has been checked and passed, it is not
altered until the loading stage has been completed, and the design allows for it to be dismantled or altered.
13. The role of the PC’s CEC should not include a responsibility for carrying out any design or design checking of
14. This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads, assessment of load paths, engineering checks
of any kind, determination of foundation capacity etc.
15. The appointment of a person as PC’s CEC should not preclude them from carrying out design and/or design
checking if they are considered competent and it is within their experience based on the complexity of the
project.
Revision 01
APPOINTMENT
The appointed PC Construction Engineering Coordinator will carry out the following duties:
1. Co-ordinate all Construction Engineering activities;
2. Ensure a Construction Engineering register is established and maintained;
3. Ensure that information relevant to the Temporary Works has been received from the Client, Principal
Designer and Permanent Works Designer (PWD), as appropriate;
4. Ensure that a design brief is prepared with consultation within the project team and that it is both adequate
and in accordance with the actual situation on site;
5. Ensure that any other Construction Engineering in the vicinity are referenced in the design brief;
6. Ensure that any residual risks, identified at the design stage, assumed methods of construction or loading
constraints identified by the PWD are included in the design brief;
7. Ensure that the design brief is issued to the Construction Engineering Designer (CED) for a satisfactory
Construction Engineering design to be carried out;
8. Ensure that a design check is carried out by someone who was not involved in the original design;
9. Where appropriate, ensure that information on the certified Construction Engineering Design is made
available to other interested parties, e.g. the Principal Designer and/or the Designer of the Permanent Works,
and, where required to the client;
10. Register or record the drawings, calculations and other relevant documents relating to the final design;
11. Ensure that the relevant client and/or third-party approvals, required by the contract, have been received;
12. Ensure that those responsible for on-site supervision receive all the details of the design, any residual risks,
including any limitations and guidance notes associated with it and ensure that a specific method statement,
which details a safe system of work, is prepared;
13. Ensure that an inspection and test plan is prepared, along with an appropriate quality control check list(s),
based on the Construction Engineering Design output and is used to verify that the Construction Engineering
have been constructed in accordance with the certified design;
14. Ensure that any proposed changes in materials or construction are checked against the original design and
appropriate action taken;
15. Ensure that checks, inspections and tests are made at appropriate stages;
16. Advise the designer of any changes or modifications to the scheme or differences from the envisaged
conditions (use or environmental);
17. In the event that any inspections carried out reveal discrepancies between the certified and as constructed
Construction Engineering, prevent loading (or unloading) until the discrepancies have been rectified to their
satisfaction;
18. Ensure a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) is issued after a final check, which is satisfactory, by either
the PC’s CEC, CEC or CES;
19. Ensure that during use of the Construction Engineering all appropriate maintenance is carried out;
20. Ensure a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use) the Construction Engineering is issued, when it has
been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength and/or stability, by either the
PC’s CEC, CEC or CES;
21. Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the dismantling of any
Construction Engineering; and
22. Ensure that any relevant information for the health and safety file is transmitted to the Principal Designer.
The duties of the PC’s CEC in relation to other contractors are as follows: -
1. Receive the contractor’s DI’s assessment of the capability of the CES (and CEC where appointed), including
the individual’s acceptance of the role;
2. Ensure that the CECs and CESs are operating in accordance with the approved procedures;
3. Provide copies of all information relevant to the contractor’s Construction Engineering Design to the
contractor’s CEC;
4. Define the interfaces between the contractor’s works and those of the PC or other contractors to establish
which design briefs should be provided to the PC’s CEC for approval before issue to the relevant CED;
5. Receive copies of the relevant design briefs produced by the contractor’s CEC and confirm there are no
adverse effects on any other works (including Construction Engineering) which might be planned;
6. For relevant designs, receive copies of the design output, design and design check certificates prior to
implementation of the contractor’s Construction Engineering; and
7. Inspect the contractor’s Construction Engineering, where necessary.
Revision 01
APPOINTMENT
(DELETE IF THE APPOINTMENT IS FOR THE PC)

The appointed Contractor Construction Engineering Coordinator will role will include:
1. The CEC should be the single point of contact for providing and receiving relevant information from the PC’s
CEC and the contractor’s site team for their organization's Construction Engineering matters.
2. The CEC should be responsible for the implementation of the contractor’s approved procedure for the control
of Construction Engineering.
3. The role of the CEC should not include a responsibility for carrying out any design or design checking of
4. This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads, assessment of load paths, engineering checks
of any kind, determination of foundation capacity etc.
5. The appointment of a person as a CEC should not preclude them from carrying out design and/or design
checking if they are considered competent and it is within their experience based on the complexity of the
project.
6. When appointed, the CEC should:-
• Co-ordinate the contracting organization's Construction Engineering on site
• Liaise with the PC's CEC and any PC's CES
• Where required liaise with the PC’s CEC for the preparation of design briefs
• Provide information regarding any proposed CE designers and design checkers
• Under take inspection of Construction Engineering on site
• Provision of any design and design check certificates to the PC's CEC
• Checking the erected Construction Engineering on site before loading/unloading.
7. The CEC should be responsible to both:-
• Their organization’s designated individual, for the implementation of their organization's procedure
• The PC’s CEC for ensuring that their Construction Engineering is managed and designed in
accordance with the relevant procedures, drawings and the specification.
The PC's CEC remains ultimately responsible for the Construction Engineering on the project/site.
8. The CEC should not be responsible for the day-to-day progress of the Construction Engineering or other
project matters. For example:-
• Commercial
• Or programme matters
Where this is not possible, the PC's CEC should recognize that the role of CEC overrides other
responsibilities the individual might have and should not put progress of the works above the safety of the
Construction Engineering. However, it is recognized that this might not be possible on projects that have few
or no engineering staff.
9. If the CEC has responsibility for both checking the Construction Engineering and progress of the construction
works, decisions should not be compromised by commercial or other pressures.
10. If the CEC considers that they are under undue pressure from site management to achieve production at the
expense of structural stability, then they should seek assistance from the organization’s Designated Individual
and/or the PC’s CEC.
11. On larger sites the CEC may request that one or more Construction Engineering Supervisors (CESs) be
appointed to supervise their specific Construction Engineering
The appointed Contractor Construction Engineering Coordinator will carry out the following duties:
1. Co-ordinate the Construction Engineering activities of their organization;
2. Ensure that the PC’s DI has given approval to the contractor to manage and design the Construction
Engineering, and confirm that the organization has accepted their appointment;
3. Ensure that the PC’s DI has either given approval to the contractor to use their own Construction Engineering
procedure, or ensure that the agreed procedure is in use for their Construction Engineering;
4. Be aware of any limitations on use of their Construction Engineering for which their organization is
responsible;
5. Liaise with the PC’s CEC to ensure that those involved understand the types and limits of permits and when
they have the authority to proceed by releasing the hold points;
6. Be responsible for providing information to and receiving information from the PC’s CEC to manage the
Construction Engineering schemes for which they are responsible;
7. Ensure a Construction Engineering register is established and maintained for the Construction Engineering
involved;
8. Ensure that their register is copied to the PC’s CEC at each major update and to an agreed regular timescale;
Revision 01
APPOINTMENT
9. Ensure that a design brief is prepared with consultation within the project team, is adequate, and is in
accordance with the actual situation on site;
10. Where required, provide copies of any design briefs prepared and submit to the PC’s CEC and receive
confirmation there are no adverse effects on the Construction Engineering which might be planned;
11. Ensure that all Construction Engineering designers and design checkers are competent and have been
verified by the organization’s DI for carrying out designs;
12. Ensure that any residual risks, identified at the design stage, assumed methods of construction or loading
constraints identified by the designer of the Permanent Works are included in the design brief;
13. Receive copies of the design output, design and design check certificates prior to implementation of the
Construction Engineering and, where required, provide evidence to the PC’s CEC that the design and
checking has been carried out;
14. Ensure that the relevant client and/or third-party approvals, required by the contract, have been received from
the PC’s CEC;
15. Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the erection of any
Construction Engineering;
16. Ensure that an inspection and test plan is prepared, along with an appropriate quality control check list(s),
based on the Construction Engineering design output and is used to verify that the Construction Engineering
have been constructed in accordance with the certified design;
17. Ensure that checks, inspections and tests are made at appropriate stages and that the inspection and test
plan (at relevant stages) and check list(s) are signed by the CEC or CES as appropriate and, where required,
the PC's CEC;
18. Ensure that any changes or modifications to the scheme or differences from the envisaged conditions (use or
environmental) are drawn to the attention of the designer;
19. Issue a notice to prevent loading (or unloading) in the event that any inspections reveal discrepancies
between the certified and as constructed Construction Engineering, until the discrepancies have been
rectified to the satisfaction of the PC’s CEC and/or CEC;
20. Ensure that any instructions from the PC’s CEC in connection with any identified discrepancies in the
Construction Engineering have been rectified to the satisfaction of the PC’s CEC;
21. Ensure that any agreed changes, or corrections of faults, are correctly carried out on site;
22. Ensure that during use of the Construction Engineering all appropriate monitoring and maintenance is carried
out;
23. Ensure a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) after a final check, which is satisfactory, is issued by either
the PC's CEC, CEC or CES;
24. Ensure that a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use), the Construction Engineering is issued, when it
has been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength and/or stability, by either the
PC's CEC, CEC or CES;
25. Register or record the drawings, calculations and other relevant documents relating to the final design of their
Construction Engineering and, where required, submit to the PC’s CEC;
26. Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the dismantling of any
Construction Engineering;
27. Ensure that any relevant information for the health and safety file is transmitted to the PC’s CEC; and
28. Ensure that any appointed CES is operating in accordance with the correct approved procedure.
Revision 01
APPOINTMENT
If a Construction Engineering Coordinator is absent from site during a period when their input would be required, the
Construction Director must arrange for alternative coverage. If in doubt refer to the PC Construction Engineering
Team on Site
Any specific duties of this Individual CEC as a result of specific competency and experience that has been
assessed by the DI: -
1. List specific detail to be included in this appointment (Omit if not required)
CONFIRMATION OF ACCEPTANCE OF APPOINTMENT AUTHORISATION OF APPOINTMENT
Signed: ……………………………………………………. Signed: …………………………………………………….
Name: ……………………………………………………… Name: ………………………………………………………
Construction Engineering Coordinator Designated Individual
Date: / / Date: / /
APPENDIX H
Draft Construction Engineering Supervisor Appointment

Ronan O’Driscoll
Revision 01
HERE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING SUPERVISOR
APPOINTMENT
The appointed Construction Engineering Supervisor role will include:

1. The CES, where appointed, should be responsible to the PC’s CEC or CEC as appropriate. The CES should
assist the PC’s CEC or CEC, as appropriate, in the supervision and checking of the Construction
Engineering.
The line of responsibility is appropriate to the organization making the appointment and whether the
organization is approved to manage their own Construction Engineering.
2. A CES should only be authorized to issue a permit to proceed, e.g. load (bring into use) or unload (take out of
use), if the DI of their organization and the PC’s CEC are satisfied that:
• An individual CES is competent and has been given the appropriate authority in respect of that
individual; and
• The risk classification identified is low or very low
3. The role of the CES is to provide on-site support to the PC’s CEC or CEC for the control of Construction
Engineering as such the CES should not be responsible for any design or design checking of Construction
Engineering but should be responsible for the implementation of the PC’s or contractor’s procedure for the
control of Construction Engineering.
This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads; assessment of load paths; engineering checks
of any kind; determination of foundation capacity, etc.
4. The appointment of a person as CES should not preclude them from carrying out design or design checking if
they are considered competent
The organization's DI can appoint the same individual to carry out specific design and/or design checking but
this would be under a separate specific nomination relating to design.
The appointed Construction Engineering Supervisor will carry out the following duties:
1. Liaise and co-operate with the PC’s CEC or CEC where appropriate;
2. Assist the appropriate CEC in ensuring that the site is operating in accordance with the approved procedures;
3. Check that information relevant to the Construction Engineering has been received prior to commencement of
work on site; this should include any residual risk information from the TWD;
4. Supervise the erection, use, maintenance and dismantling of the Construction Engineering as applicable;
5. Carry out or supervise the required checks at appropriate stages during the construction erection or
installation of the Construction Engineering;
6. Carry out or supervise any planned maintenance of the Construction Engineering;
7. Ensure that any changes or modifications to the scheme or differences from the envisaged conditions (use or
environmental) are drawn to the attention of the PC’s CEC or CEC as appropriate, and the designer if
appropriate;
8. Carry out the final check prior to use of the Construction Engineering;
9. In the event that any inspections reveal discrepancies between the certified and as constructed Construction
Engineering issue a notice to prevent loading (or unloading) until the discrepancies have been rectified to the
satisfaction of the PC’s CEC and/or CEC;
10. After a final check, which is satisfactory, and when authorized, ensure a permit to load or proceed (bring into
use) is issued and provide a copy of the permit to the PC’s CEC and/or CEC; and
11. When it has been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength and/or stability, and
when authorized, ensure a permit to unload (take out of use) the Construction Engineering is issued and
provide a copy of the permit to the PC’s CEC and/or CEC.
Any specific duties of this Individual CES as a result of specific competency and experience that has been
assessed by the DI: -
1. List specific detail to be included in this appointment (Omit if not required)
Ronan O’Driscoll
Page 1 of 2
Revision 01
HERE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING SUPERVISOR
APPOINTMENT
CONFIRMATION OF ACCEPTANCE OF APPOINTMENT AUTHORISATION OF APPOINTMENT
Signed: ……………………………………………………. Signed: …………………………………………………….
Name: ……………………………………………………… Name: ………………………………………………………
Construction Engineering Supervisor Designated Individual
Date: / / Date: / /
Ronan O’Driscoll
Page 2 of 2
APPENDIX I
Draft Construction Engineering Schedule for a PWD

Ronan O’Driscoll
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING SCHEDULE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING SCHEDULE
Ref: ----
PROJECT NAME : PROJECT NO : PERMANENT WORKS CEC : XXXXX
Has the Permanent Works Design CONSTRUCTION

Can the Permanent Worls Design be altered to What loads is the Construction Will there be a specific Sre there any specific
Estimated date in the What foundations or How long will the allowed enough space for all required ENGINEERING
reduce or simplify any Construction Engineering Solution required to resist ? loading and unloading restrictions and / or residual
Construction Engineering Design required for which items of Construction Any possible alternative construction sequence that could alter How will stability be maintained for the supports are in place for Construction Construction Engineering, including INTERFACES WITH OTHER
CE Reference No. Description of CE Engineering Required ? And in what direction is the load required sequence required for risks that the Construction COMMENTS
Permanent Works ? Programme the Design the Construction Engineering required ? Construction Engineering solution ? the Construction Engineering solution space for installation and removal ? CONSTRUCTION
(Yes / No) to be resisted ? the Constrcutin Engineering Designer should be
is Required Engineering solution ? be required ? Is space aloowed for any required ENGINEERING AND / OR
If Yes then explain (Reasonable estimates at this stage) Engineering solution ? aware of ?
plant, equipment, access, etc. ? PERMANENT WORKS

CEC
PREPARED BY:
*ALL CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING ARE UNDERTAKEN USING SAFE SYSTEMS OF WORK*

*This Document is to be used with conjunction with document (XXXXX) “Construction Engineering Procedure”
Document Owner: Ronan O'Driscoll

Date: XX-XX-XX Uncontrolled when printed
Issue Number: 00
Linked to Procedure XXXXX Page 1 of 1
APPENDIX J
Draft Construction Engineering Check Lists
Some draft Construction Engineering Checklists are provided here. It is to be noted that a
checklist should not be a prescriptive list of items to cover everything but instead should be a
high-level list to cover the main items and act as an aide memoir used by a suitably
experienced and competent individual and should not just list every possible item. Please
refer to publications such as “The Checklist Manifesto” by Atul Gawande for more guidance
on the effective use of checklists.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering General Excavation Inspection
QUESTION
QUESTION:- RESPONSES:-
NO:-
1 General - Is the excavation being inspected at the beginning of each shift and / or after any significant changes in weather ? Yes No N/A
2 Design - Is there a specific Construction Engineering Design in place for the excavation ? If so is there design information or drawings available to use for the excavation inspection ? Yes No N/A
3 Proprietary Ground Shoring Equipment - If proprietary ground shoring equipment is used is it installed as per the design / manufacturers guidelines ? Yes No N/A
4 Timber Ground Shoring Equipment - If timber ground shoring equipment is used is it installed as per the design / industry guidelines ? Yes No N/A
5 Surrounding Area - Are any stockpiles / spoil heaps away from the edge of the excavation to the required distance for this design ? Yes No N/A
6 Surrounding Area - Is there water present in the surrounding ground / excavation and if so is the water levels present within the allowable design parameters for the excavation supports ? Yes No N/A
7 Surrounding Area - Are any surrounding plant / vehicles kept to the required distance away from the excavation that is allowed in the design ? Yes No N/A
8 Ground Conditions - Are there any changes on the ground conditions that might affect the Construction Engineering Design ? Yes No N/A
9 Ground Conditions - Are there any visible signs of ground movement that might affect the Construction Engineering Design ? Yes No N/A
10 Ground Water Level - Are the ground water levels within the parameters allowed for in the Construction Engineering Design ? Yes No N/A
11 Access / Egress - Is the access / egress into the excavation suitable and as per the design ? Yes No N/A
12 Access / Egress - If the access / egress into the excavation is provided by Scaffold or another independent Construction Engineering Design has this Access / Egress been suitably inspected and confirmed as fit for use ? Yes No N/A
13 Water Pumping - If sump pumps or other means of water pumping is required in the excavation is this in place and operating as required ? Yes No N/A
14 Rescue Equipment - If there is any rescue equipment required as part of the design, such as Davit Arms, etc. is this in place and fit for use of required ? Yes No N/A
15 Battered / Stepped / Open Excavations - If the excavation is battered or stepped are the batters at the correct angle or the steps at the correct horizontal and vertical heights ? Yes No N/A
16 Shoring Equipment - If the excavation faces are supported by shoring equipment is the equipment in good condition and installed as required ? Yes No N/A
17 Shoring Equipment (Shields)- If the shoring equipment are to act like shields for operatives in the excavation are they installed as required and have walers, braces and struts, etc. in place and secured as required ? Yes No N/A
Shoring Equipment (Not Shields)- If the shoring equipment are not to act like shields for operatives in the excavation are they installed as required and have walers, braces and struts, etc. in place and secured as required plus any packing to ensure
18 even load distribution between members ? Yes No N/A
19 Shoring Equipment Connections - If the excavation has timber or proprietary shoring equipment are all critical connections secure and in good condition ? Yes No N/A
20 Base of Excavation - Is the base of the excavation as assumed in the design and with the water level as assumed in the Construction Engineering Design ? Yes No N/A
23 General - Are there any issues to note or highlight ? Yes No N/A
THESE ARE HIGH LEVEL GENERAL QUESTIONS TO ASSIST THE INSPECTOR AS REMINDERS BUT THE INSPECTOR SHOULD HAVE SUFFICIENT COMPETENCE TO UNDERTAKE INSPECTION WITHOUT A CHECKLIST
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Hoarding Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
1 Design - Is there a design in place for this hoarding ? If so is there a drawing to reference and check the hoarding installation against Yes No N/A
2 Manufacturer Details - Is the hoarding constructed using proprietary equipment installed as per the manufacturers guidelines ? If so are their manufacturers guidelines to reference and check the hoarding installation against Yes No N/A
3 Design - If there is a specific design for this hoarding are there any specific requirements for the installation on site, noted in the design and has this specific requirement been completed correctly on site ? Yes No N/A
4 General Appearance - Does the general appearance of the hoarding appear ok ? Yes No N/A
5 Posters / Signs, etc. - If the hoarding is not a solid faced structure is it free from posters / signs etc. ? Yes No N/A
6 Posters / Signs, etc. - If the hoarding is not a solid faced structure and posters / signs are fixed to it is this suitably reflected in the design ? Yes No N/A
7 Timber - If the hoarding is constructed from timber are all of the timbers in good condition and appear not to be damaged or weakened in anyway ? Yes No N/A
8 Timber - If the hoarding is constructed from timber are all of the timber post in good condition at ground level where they are fixed to foundations and appear not to be damaged / have rot or weakened in anyway ? Yes No N/A
9 Proprietary Equipment / Steel - If the hoarding is constructed from proprietary equipment / steel is the material in good condition and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
10 Proprietary Equipment / Steel - If the hoarding is constructed from proprietary equipment / steel is the ground level connection to the foundation in good condition and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
11 Foundations - Are the foundations in good condition and free from damage ? i.e. no ground subsidence or movement, no cracking in concrete that would affect the foundation strength Yes No N/A
12 Surrounding Area - There are no excavations nearby to affect the performance of the foundations or the hoarding ? Yes No N/A
13 Surrounding Area - There are no materials heaped near to the hoarding to affect the design or the performance of the hoarding ? Yes No N/A
14 Rakers / Bracing - If the design requires raking members are they in place and correctly spaced ? Yes No N/A
15 Panels - Are the panels between vertical posts in good condition and appear structurally sound ? Yes No N/A
16 Panel Connections - Are panels suitably connected to vertical posts and each other where required ? Yes No N/A
17 Gates / Hinges - Where there are gates / doors present are they in good condition and are any hinges secure and in good condition ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Scaffold Inspection to confirm compliance to TG 20:21
QUESTION
NO:-
1 Compliance Sheet - Is there a TG 20 Compliance sheet present for this scaffold ? Yes No
2 Compliance Sheet - Has this scaffold been erected to the TG 20 Compliance sheet ? Yes No
3 Tube & Fit - Is the Scaffold constructed from Tube & fitting ? i.e. not system scaffold Yes No
4 Height - Is the scaffold maximum height less than 16m ? Yes No
2
5 Load Class - Is the scaffold maximum load Class 4 = 3.0 kN/m or less ? Yes No
6 Loading - Does the scaffold structure have 1 platform level loaded and 1 platform level loaded at 50% of the maximum load class ? Yes No
7 Transom - Maximum transom spacing is 1.2m or less ? Yes No
8 Bay Lengths - Are the maximum bay lengths 2.4m or less ? Yes No
9 Board Width - Is the maximum total board width of a platform 5 Boards ? (Loading bays may have more and would have to be checked against the design) Yes No
10 Inside Boards - Is the maximum number of inside board on a platform 3 Boards ? Yes No
11 Lift Height - Is the maximum lift height 2.0m or less ? Except for a pavement lift Yes No
12 Ties- Is the scaffold Ties positioned a minimum at alternative lifts and alternative standards ? Yes No
13 Façade Bracing - Is there façade bracing to the top lift at each elevation ? Yes No
14 Façade Bracing - Is the façade bracing spacing to each elevation at a minimum of one set per six bays ? Yes No
15 Ledger Bracing - Is there ledger bracing present as a minimum at alternative standards in all lifts ? Yes No
16 Guard Rails - As a minimum on boarded lifts are there double guard rails present ? Triple guard rails maybe provided at the top lift if required Yes No
17 Guard Rails - As a minimum on unboarded lifts are there single guard rails present in accordance with NASC SG4 ? Yes No
18 Brick Guards / Debris Netting - Scaffold structure may include brick guards or may be clad with sheeting or debris netting, is this reflected in the design (Compliance Sheet) ? Yes No
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Basic Scaffold Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
1 Standards - Are the bay centres correct ? Yes No N/A
2 Ledgers - Are the joints staggered, or if not, pinned ? Yes No N/A
3 Ties - Has the scaffolding been tied to a structure in accordance to the design ? Yes No N/A
4 Decks - Scaffolding boards / decking have been installed correctly and secured without any trip hazards Yes No N/A
5 Decks - No gaps in the boards / decking greater than 50mm Yes No N/A
6 Decks - Toe boards have been installed correctly and secured (150mm minimum height) Yes No N/A
7 Handrails - Guard rails have been installed correctly (950mm height and no gap greater than 470mm) Yes No N/A
8 Ladders - Are they in good condition ? Yes No N/A
9 Ladders - Are they securely tied at the top & bottom ? Yes No N/A
10 General - Does the scaffolding visually look level and plumb Yes No N/A
11 Standards - Are baseplates and / or screw jacks in firm contact with the ground and plumb Yes No N/A
12 Standards - Are the joints staggered, or if not, pinned ? Yes No N/A
13 General - Has the scaffolding been erected in line with the design (Manufacturer's specification / TG20 compliance sheet) Yes No N/A
14 Ties - Have the ties been tested in accordance to the design requirements ? Yes No N/A
15 General - Sole boards have been installed correctly and free from damage Yes No N/A
16 General - Have the correct fittings been used for the job Yes No N/A
17 General - Has the area been inspected for hazardous conditions (Power lines and wind loading, possible washout of footings) Yes No N/A
18 General - Is any of the material damaged ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Water Filled Barriers Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
1 General - Are there regular inspections ? Yes No N/A
2 Design - Is there a specific Construction Engineering Design in place for this ? If so is there design information or drawings available to use for this inspection ? Yes No N/A
3 For Water Filled barriers are they filled with water to the correct level as per manufacturers instructions ? Yes No N/A
4 Are barriers fixed suitably together with pins and joint plates ? Yes No N/A
5 Do the barriers appear to be in a good state of repair ? Yes No N/A
6 Are barriers suitably positioned ? i.e. not close to slopes and ensuring correct distance for vehicles and pedestrians ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Haki Staircase Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
2 Design - Is there a specific Construction Engineering Design in place for this ? If so is there design information or drawings available to use for the this inspection ? Yes No N/A
3 Height and use of the Stair Tower is within the Haki Manufacturers recommendations ? Yes No N/A
4 Are there the correct number of Ties ? And the correct spacing and installation ? Yes No N/A
5 If kentledge is provided is it as per the manufacturers guidelines or the specific design ? Yes No N/A
6 Base Plates / Base Jacks are correctly used and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
7 Does the supporting ground appear satisfactory and without ponding, etc. ? Supports are not positioned near slopes unless the design confirms this is acceptable ? Yes No N/A
8 Standards are vertical and within the manufactures tolerances for use ? Yes No N/A
9 Ledgers & Transoms are level and within the manufactures tolerances for use ? Yes No N/A
10 Guardrail frames are installed throughout ? Yes No N/A
11 Bracing is aligned and suitably secured / fixed ? Yes No N/A
12 All locking pins / catches are suitably engaged ? Yes No N/A
13 Are standards pinned and base plates fixed if required for lifting of the stair tower ? Yes No N/A
14 All Stair flights in good condition ? - Visual check for straightness, check complete treads for dents Yes No N/A
15 All Stair flights in good condition ? - Check all hooks are straight Yes No N/A
16 All Stair flights in good condition ? - Check all welds for any cracks or deterioration Yes No N/A
17 Are all Stair flights sitting correctly on transoms ? (2 hooks on 2 outer transoms) Yes No N/A
18 Are all Stair flights installed correctly & locking catches engaged ? Yes No N/A
19 Have all landings suitable toe boards in place ? Yes No N/A
20 Are all stair exits clear and unobstructed ? Yes No N/A
21 Does the Stair Entrance have an acceptable stair height ? (If not the recommended action would be to install double step brackets and additional step or make up entrance step with alternative materials) Yes No N/A
22 Are all exits suitably guard railed off on to access platform / into structures ? Yes No N/A
23 Is there cladding sheeting on the stair tower ? If so does this match the design ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Heras Fencing Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Is there signage present on the Heras panels ? If so is this allowed for in the Construction Engineering Design ? Yes No N/A
4 Do the panels appear satisfactory and in reasonable condition with no visible defects ? Yes No N/A
5 Are the panel bases / feet in good condition as required ? Yes No N/A
6 Are the panel bases / feet orientated correctly with the panels ? Yes No N/A
7 If struts are used to the panel bases / feet are they consistently used on each panel, in good conditions and connected correctly ? Yes No N/A
8 If stabilisation struts with counterweight are used, are they consistently used on each panel, in good conditions and connected correctly ? Yes No N/A
9 Have panels suitable clips fixing each panel together ? And the correct number of clips ? (minimum of 2 per panel) Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Slope / Embankment Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Does the slope / embankment appear to be art the correct angle for stability ? Yes No N/A
4 Is the face of the slope / embankment consistent and there are no visible cracks or local failures ? Yes No N/A
5 Is the crest of the slope / embankment consistent and there are no visible cracks or local failures ? Yes No N/A
6 Is the toe of the slope / embankment consistent and there are no visible cracks or local failures ? Yes No N/A
7 Is there any water present on the crest, the face or the toe of the slope / embankment ? Yes No N/A
8 Are loads / stockpiles suitably far enough away from the crest to match the design requirements ? Yes No N/A
9 Are any loads / stockpiles below the maximum allowance as per the design ? Yes No N/A
10 Are there any activities within the vicinity of the slope / embankment that maybe affected by the slope / embankment ? If so is this considered in the design ? Yes No N/A
11 Are there any soft areas visible ? Yes No N/A
12 Does the face of the slope require any redressing ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Temporary Bridges Inspection
INSPECTION REGIME:-
A) - Weekly (Frequency may be varied to suit bridge usage)
Visual inspection of parts for interference, vehicle damage, vandalism, etc., particularly adjacent to vehicle passage. This work could be carried out by a foreman or supervisor by walking up and down the bridge and viewing from below.
B) - After the first 3 Months
Check each component visually for damage and surface condition and the security of all pins and bolts. Tighten bolts as required. Work through all components using a suitable check list and record findings.
The frequency of these inspections may be varied depending on the findings of previous inspections.
This work would be carried out by a Supervisor or Engineer with suitable tools and safety equipment.
C) - 6 Monthly Intervals
Checks should be carried out as (B) above.
Maintenance
General bolt checking and tightening should be carried out at the time of inspections 6 Monthly Inspection.
The deck, trusses and bearings should be cleared of any debris at appropriate intervals. This is to allow maximum airflow around components to help minimise corrosion.
Pins and bolts will require cleaning and painting/greasing every few years. The frequency will be dependant upon specific site conditions (e.g. atmospheric conditions and frequency of use).
Inspection / Maintenance Documents
A suitable checklist is attached
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Does the bridge appear suitable and free from defects ? Yes No N/A
4 Are connections as required in the design drawing ? Yes No N/A
5 Is the approach and off ramp suitable and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
6 Are there any visible gaps on the deck or the approach ramps that exceed the design allowance ? Yes No N/A
7 Is the deck free from defects and damage ? Yes No N/A
8 Are the bridge parapets free from defects and damage ? Yes No N/A
9 If supporting trestles / columns are present are they free from damage and as per the design ? Yes No N/A
10 Are bracing members free from defects and damage and connections suitable ? Yes No N/A
11 If access is possible to the underside of the deck is the structure free from defects ? Looking at connections, welds and materials condition, etc. Yes No N/A
12 Are the bridge bearings as per the design ? With any fixed bearings in the locations shown and the correct movement bearings at the correct support locations as shown in the design Yes No N/A
13 Bridge bearings - Are they free from damage with no visible defects ? Yes No N/A
14 Bridge bearings - On bearings with movement is the bridge movement within the design requirements ? Yes No N/A
15 Is the bridge signage in place and as required noting any load or speed restrictions required ? Yes No N/A
16 If there are any height restriction barriers in place for the bridge are they free from damage and secured as required ? Yes No N/A
17 Is there a Product Inspection Procedure from the Bridge Manufacture ? If so is it available and has it been completed correctly ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Void Covers over Floor Penetrations Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Are the void covers free from defects and damage ? Yes No N/A
4 Are the void covers installed and used as per the design requirements ? Yes No N/A
5 Is signage in place as required ? Yes No N/A
6 Are the void covers clearly marked and visible ? Yes No N/A
7 Is the void cover constructed from the correct grade of material and in a good condition ? Yes No N/A
8 Is the void cover suitable secured to ensure it cannot move or come free from its position and as a result create an opening ? Yes No N/A
9 If there is a permitting system in place for voids and covers is there a suitable up to date permit in place and present ? Yes No N/A
10 Can the cover be inspected from below ? If so are there any visible defects and / or damage ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Designed Supports for Site Signage Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Is the signage size within the allowed dimensions from the design to take into account wind loading ? Yes No N/A
4 Is the signage suitably secured to the support structure ? Yes No N/A
5 Is the support structure for the signage as required from the Temporary Works Design ? Yes No N/A
6 Are fixings as per the Construction Engineering Design and free from defects and damage ? Yes No N/A
7 Is the signage itself free from defects and damage ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Layher, Haki, Modular Tents Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Is the sheeting in place as required and free from defects and damage ? Yes No N/A
4 Are the sheeting fixings in place as required and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
5 Height and use of the Modular Tent / Enclosure is within the Manufacturers recommendations ? Yes No N/A
6 If kentledge is provided is it as per the manufacturers guidelines or the specific design ? Yes No N/A
7 If there are fixings to the foundation are they as per the design ? Yes No N/A
8 Base Plates / Base Jacks are correctly used and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
9 Does the supporting ground appear satisfactory and without ponding, etc. ? Supports are not positioned near slopes unless the design confirms this is acceptable ? Yes No N/A
10 Standards are vertical and within the manufactures tolerances for use ? Yes No N/A
11 Roof trusses / members are installed within the manufacturers tolerances for use ? Yes No N/A
13 Bracing is aligned and suitably secured / fixed ? Yes No N/A
14 All locking pins / catches are suitably engaged ? Yes No N/A
15 Are standards pinned and base plates fixed if required for lifting of the tent / enclosure ? Yes No N/A
16 All components in good condition ? - Visual check for straightness, etc. Yes No N/A
17 All components in good condition ? - Check all welds for any cracks or deterioration Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Prop Support Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Is the equipment in good condition and free from damage or distortion ? Yes No N/A
4 Are the props secure and tight in their position and not free to move ? Yes No N/A
5 Are any props that are being used suitable positioned to be plumb and avoid eccentricity of load through the prop member ? Yes No N/A
6 If there is adjustment of the length of the prop is the prop capacity suitable for the prop extension observed ? Is this within the design requirements ? Yes No N/A
7 If any preload has been placed in the prop as required by the design can this be checked as being present for the inspection ? i.e. how tight are any screw jacks, etc. Yes No N/A
8 If bracing is required by the design is this present as specified in the design and to the requirements of the design ? Yes No N/A
9 Are end plates / base plates free from damage ? Yes No N/A
10 Are end plates / base plates in contact with the supporting load and foundation with the correct required contact area of the plate and the correct contact location of the plate ? Yes No N/A
11 Are foundations suitable and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
12 If bracing is required and present is it free from damage ? And connections suitable and secure ? Yes No N/A
13 If header beams or base beams are used and present are they free from damage ? And connections suitable and secure ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Trench Boxes Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
3 Proprietary Ground Shoring Equipment - If proprietary ground shoring equipment is used is it installed as per the design / manufacturers guidelines ? Yes No N/A
7 Ground Conditions - Are there any changes on the ground conditions that might affect the Construction Engineering design ? Yes No N/A
8 Ground Conditions - Are there any visible signs of ground movement that might affect the Construction Engineering design ? Yes No N/A
14 Shoring Equipment - If the excavation faces are supported by shoring equipment is the equipment in good condition and installed as required ? Yes No N/A
15 Shoring Equipment (Shields)- i.e. this maybe at an open end of a trench box ? - If the shoring equipment are to act like shields for operatives in the excavation are they installed as required and have walers, braces, etc. in place and secured as requi Yes No N/A
16 Shoring Equipment (Trench Box)- Is the shoring equipment installed as required and have struts, etc. in place and secured as required plus any packing to ensure even load distribution between members ? Yes No N/A
17 Shoring Equipment Connections - Are all critical connections secure and in good condition ? Yes No N/A
18 Shoring Equipment Connections - Are all pins and bolts correctly located ? Yes No N/A
19 Base of Excavation - Is the base of the excavation as assumed in the design and with the water level as assumed in the Temporary Works Design ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Sheet Piled Excavation Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
6 Ground Conditions - Are there any changes on the ground conditions that might affect the Construction Engineering design ? Yes No N/A
7 Ground Conditions - Are there any visible signs of ground movement that might affect the Construction Engineering design ? Yes No N/A
13 Shoring Equipment (Sheet Piles)- Is the shoring equipment installed as required and have walers, braces and struts, etc. in place and secured as required plus any packing to ensure even load distribution between members ? Yes No N/A
14 Shoring Equipment (Sheet Piles)- Is there excessive deflection on braces, walers, trench sheets, sheet piles, etc. ? Yes No N/A
15 Shoring Equipment Connections - Are all critical connections secure and in good condition ? Yes No N/A
16 Shoring Equipment Connections - Are all pins and bolts correctly located ? Yes No N/A
17 Shoring Equipment Hydraulics -Are there any visible signs of loss of hydraulic fluid on hydraulic components if used ? Yes No N/A
18 Base of Excavation - Is the base of the excavation as assumed in the design and with the water level as assumed in the Construction Engineering Design ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Back Propping Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
Design - There will be a specific Back Propping Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
2 - On site is there the correct number of levels of back propping present as shown on the design drawing, i.e. 1 or 2 levels ? Yes No N/A
3 - On site is there the correct number of props present and on the correct number of levels as shown on the design drawing ? Yes No N/A
4 - Are the props at the correct center spacing in both directions as shown on the design drawing ? Yes No N/A
5 - Are the props located in the correct position as shown on the design drawing ? Yes No N/A
6 - Are there any special requirements highlighted on the design drawing ? And if so are they suitably executed on site and evident ? Yes No N/A
Loading - There will be a specific Back Propping Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
7 Yes No N/A
- Prior to loading of the props has the strength of the lower slabs been confirmed as acceptable in line with the design and sequence for loading shown on the design drawing ?
Loading - There will be a specific Back Propping Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
8 Yes No N/A
- Prior to loading of the props has the sequence for loading shown on the design drawing been briefed to the site team and sutable understood and followed on site ?
Un-Loading - There will be a specific Back Propping Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
9 Yes No N/A
- Prior to Un-loading of the props has the strength of the upper slabs been confirmed as acceptable in line with the design and sequence for un-loading shown on the design drawing ?
Un-Loading - There will be a specific Back Propping Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
10 - Prior to un-loading of the props has the sequence for un-loading shown on the design drawing been briefed to the site team and sutable understood and followed on site ? Yes No N/A
11 Surrounding Area - Are there any signs of cracking or damage to the concrete structure in contact with the base or head of the props ? Yes No N/A
12 Surrounding Area - Are there any signs of excess deflection to the concrete structure being propped ? Yes No N/A
13 Surrounding Area - Can the level under the lowest level of props be accessed ? If so is there any unexpected cracking in the soffitt observed ? or any excessive deflection of the soffit observed ? Yes No N/A
14 General - Is the equipment in good condition and free from damage or distortion ? Yes No N/A
15 General - Are the props secure and tight in their position and not free to move ? Yes No N/A
16 General - Are any props that are being used suitable positioned to be plumb and avoid eccentricity of load through the prop member ? Yes No N/A
17 General - If there is adjustment of the length of the prop is the prop capacity suitable for the prop extension observed ? Is this within the design requirements ? Yes No N/A
18 General - If any preload has been placed in the prop as required by the design can this be checked as being present for the inspection ? i.e. how tight are any screw jacks, etc. Yes No N/A
19 General - If bracing is required by the design is this present as specified in the design and to the requirements of the design ? Yes No N/A
20 General - Are end plates / base plates free from damage ? Yes No N/A
21 General - Are end plates / base plates in contact with the supporting load and foundation with the correct required contact area of the plate and the correct contact location of the plate ? Yes No N/A
22 General - Are foundations suitable and free from damage ? Yes No N/A
23 General - If bracing is required and present is it free from damage ? And connections suitable and secure ? Yes No N/A
24 General - If header beams or base beams are used and present are they free from damage ? And connections suitable and secure ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Formwork - Single Sided - Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
1 General - Are there regular inspections ? Or is this a pre-pour inspection ? Yes No N/A
Design - There will be a specific Formwork (Single Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
2 - On site does the drawing match what has been constructed on site i.e. equipment type and geometry, etc.? Yes No N/A
3 Yes No N/A
- On site is the face material that is to be in contact with the concrete secure, correct thickness and grade, correct span distance between the supporting secondary bearers (usually horizontal Walers), etc ?
4 Design - There will be a specific Formwork (Single Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this. Yes No N/A
- On site is the members supporting the face material (secondary bearers usually horizontal Walers) suitably secure and spanning the correct distance between their supports (primary bearers usually vertical Soldiers), etc. ?
5 Design - There will be a specific Formwork (Single Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this. Yes No N/A
- On site are the primary bearers (usually vertical Soldiers) suitably secure and spanning the correct distance between their supports , etc. ?
6 Yes No N/A
- On site is the support frame for the primary bearers (the falsework) suitably secure, correct centre spacing, and spanning the correct distances as shown on the drawing, etc. ?
7 Yes No N/A
- On site is the support frame for the primary bearers (the falsework) fixed correctly to the foundations as shown on the drawing, etc. ?
8 Yes No N/A
- Are any clips / clamps / brackets / connections suitably secure and as shown on the design drawing ?
9 Yes No N/A
- If panel systems are used are the panels as shown on the drawing ? With the correct number of connection clamps to adjacent panels, etc.
10 - Are foundations and fixings to foundations as shown on the design ? Yes No N/A
12 - Are there any Stop End Details on the design drawing ? And if so are they suitably constructed and secure on site ? (Stop Ends if present need a thorough check on site) Yes No N/A
Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Single Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
13 Yes No N/A
- Are there any special requirements highlighted on the design drawing ? And if so are they suitably executed on site and evident ?
Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Single Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
14 Yes No N/A
- For concrete pours is the rate of rise shown clearly on the drawing ? and do the site team understand the stated rate of rise and have systems in place to manage on site during the concrete pour ?
Un-Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Single Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
15 Yes No N/A
Un-Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Single Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
16 - Does the drawing state a required cube strength before the removal of formwork ? and can this cube strength be confirmed before unloading / striking ? Yes No N/A
17 Surrounding Area - Are any foundations / support locations suitable and without any visible movement or damage, etc. ? Yes No N/A
18 Surrounding Area - Is there suitable room for access for erection and dismantle as well as any concrete pour operations ? and movement of any plant or equipment ? Yes No N/A
19 Surrounding Area - Is there suitable room and plans in place for any rescue of individuals if required ? Yes No N/A
21 General - Is the equipment secure and tight in their position and not free to move ? Yes No N/A
22 General - Are any props / rakers that are being used suitable positioned to be plumb and avoid eccentricity of load through the prop member ? Yes No N/A
23 General - If there is adjustment of the length of the prop / raker is the prop / raker capacity suitable for the prop extension observed ? Is this within the design requirements ? Yes No N/A
24 General - If bracing is required by the design is this present as specified in the design and to the requirements of the design ? Yes No N/A
25 General - Are end plates / base plates free from damage ? Yes No N/A
26 General - Are end plates / base plates in contact with the supporting load and foundation with the correct required contact area of the plate and the correct contact location of the plate ? Yes No N/A
28 General - If bracing is required and present is it free from damage ? And connections suitable and secure ? Yes No N/A
29 General - If panel formwork systems are used are they used as required with the correct product components as stated in the design ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
Construction Engineering Formwork - Double Sided - Inspection
QUESTION
NO:-
1 General - Are there regular inspections ? Or is this a pre-pour inspection ? Yes No N/A
Design - There will be a specific Formwork (Double Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
2 - On site does the drawing match what has been constructed on site i.e. equipment type and geometry, etc.? Yes No N/A
3 Yes No N/A
- On site is the face material that is to be in contact with the concrete secure, correct thickness and grade, correct span distance between the supporting secondary bearers, etc ?
4 Design - There will be a specific Formwork (Double Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this. Yes No N/A
- On site is the members supporting the face material (secondary bearers) suitably secure and spanning the correct distance between their supports (primary bearers), etc. ?
5 Design - There will be a specific Formwork (Double Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this. Yes No N/A
- On site are the primary bearers suitably secure and spanning the correct distance between their supports , etc. ?
6 Yes No N/A
- On site are the through ties at the correct centre spacing as shown on the drawing, etc. ?
7 Yes No N/A
- On site are the through ties the correct type and thickness as shown on the drawing, etc. ?
8
- On site are the through ties bearer plates and connection nuts / spinners the correct type and thickness, etc. as shown on the drawing ?
9
- Are any clips / clamps / brackets / connections suitably secure and as shown on the design drawing ?
10 Yes No N/A
- Are any rakers / props used for stability and / or wind loading as shown on the design drawing and suitably secure, correct locations and centers, etc. ?
11 Yes No N/A
- If panel systems are used are the panels as shown on the drawing ? With the correct number of connection clamps to adjacent panels, etc.
12 - Are foundations and fixings to foundations as shown on the design ? Yes No N/A
14 - Are there any Stop End Details on the design drawing ? And if so are they suitably constructed and secure on site ? (Stop Ends if present need a thorough check on site) Yes No N/A
Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Double Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
15 Yes No N/A
Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Double Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
16 Yes No N/A
- For concrete pours is the rate of rise shown clearly on the drawing ? and do the site team understand the stated rate of rise and have systems in place to manage on site during the concrete pour ?
Un-Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Double Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
17 Yes No N/A
Un-Loading - There will be a specific Formwork (Double Sided) Construction Engineering Design and Drawing in place for this.
18 - Does the drawing state a required cube strength before the removal of formwork ? and can this cube strength be confirmed before unloading / striking ? Yes No N/A
19 Surrounding Area - Are any foundations / support locations suitable and without any visible movement or damage, etc. ? Yes No N/A
20 Surrounding Area - Is there suitable room for access for erection and dismantle as well as any concrete pour operations ? and movement of any plant or equipment ? Yes No N/A
21 Surrounding Area - Is there suitable room and plans in place for any rescue of individuals if required ? Yes No N/A
23 General - Is the equipment secure and tight in their position and not free to move ? Yes No N/A
24 General - Are any props / rakers that are being used suitable positioned to be plumb and avoid eccentricity of load through the prop member ? Yes No N/A
26 General - If panel formwork systems are used are they used as required with the correct product components as stated in the design ? Yes No N/A
Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX K
Draft Temporary Works Awareness Course Slides
This is a very rough first draft for a Temporary Works Awareness Course. It is to be noted
this example provided is not a finished complete Temporary Works Awareness training
course but instead is a starting point to be used if found to be suitable and will require
editing, etc. as required.
It is also to be noted that this awareness course content has been created to attempt to
match the current CITB Temporary Works Awareness course content requirements and the
author would agree there is very little value in some of the slides present.

Ronan O’Driscoll
SUGGESTED TIMETABLE
TIME SUBJECT CONTENT
10 Minutes 1. Course Administration • Registration and domestics in accordance with venue requirements. Introductions, etc.
(09:00 to 09:10)
30 to 60 Minutes 2. Module 1 – What are Temporary Works • Identify the different types of Temporary Works and Temporary Works solutions and their
(09:10 to 09:40 or 10:10) impact on Health & Safety on constructions sites
• Identify the different types of Temporary
Works • What are Temporary Works, what do they do, temporary conditions for permanent works,
what can happen if things go wrong
• Show wide range of examples of Temporary Works and their purposes
• Stress that managing Temporary Works correctly helps control risks and can save time and
money
30 to 60 Minutes 3. Module 2 – The history of Temporary • State the history that set the requirements for a series of changes, to create a robust, safety-
(Assume 10:00 to 10:30 or 11:00) Works conscious process for the design, management and removal of Temporary Works
• State the consequences of failure and the importance of avoiding failure
• The history of Temporary Works • The 3P’s (People, Process & Product)
• The consequences of failure • The 4C’s (Competence, Control, Co-operation & Communication)
• Statute overrides contract

• History behind why we have Temporary Works Procedures (Bragg Report, BS 5975 and
HSE Guidance)
• BS 5975:2019
• CDM 2015
• Other relevant codes and guidance, BSEN12811, BSEN 12812, TG20, etc.
10 Minutes Coffee Break for 10 Minutes
(Around 10:30 to 11:00)
60 to 90 Minutes 4. Module 3 – Who is involved with • Identify the key roles and responsibilities of the primary stakeholders responsible for
(Assume 11:00 to 12:00 or 12:30) Temporary Works ? managing the safe implementation of Temporary Works
• Stakeholders & Duty holders • Roles of Clients, Permanent Works Designers, Principal Designer, Temporary Works
responsibilities & accountabilities Designers, Other Designers, Principal Contractors, Other Contractors.
• DI, TWC, and TWS
• CITB training courses (TWCTC & TWSTC), HSE and TW Forum competency guidance
30 Minutes Lunch Break for 30 Minutes
(Around 12:00 to 12:30)
SUGGESTED TIMETABLE
TIME SUBJECT CONTENT
60 to 90 Minutes 5. Module 4 – Planning Temporary • State the key components present in the planning of TW, including design materials,
(Assume 12:30 to 13:30 or 14:00) Works components and solutions
• Management and control of design • Classification of TW according to Implementation Risk Class & Design Check Category
• What are “standard details” and when can they be used
• Design Brief
• Who can design TW and what competencies do they require
• Who can check TW designs and what competencies do they require
• Identifying interfaces and managing “incomplete” designs
• Importance of managing on site changes to schemes
• Managing designs carried out by subcontractors and equipment suppliers
• Using proprietary equipment
• External approvals (e.g. Network Rail)
• What is a designers risk assessment, why do they need to be carried out and what are
residual risks
10 Minutes Coffee Break for 10 Minutes
(Around 13:30 to 14:00)
60 to 90 Minutes 6. Module 5 – Managing the • Know how to support the TWC in the coordination and supervision of TW during their
(assume 14:00 to 15:00 or 15:30) construction, erection and dismantling of construction, erection and dismantling
Temporary Works
• Trainer to tailor this section to suite target audience
• Key activities required during the • Understanding specific use of Temporary Works
active life of the Temporary Works • Cost, programme and safety implications of specific items of Temporary Works
• Case studies of good and bad practices
• Tutorials to identify specific risks and how to deal with them (i.e. what to look out for)
10 Minutes 7. Course Administration Any closing up details and feedback forms, etc.
(could be
Total 4 Hours 20 Minutes to 6 Hours
40 Minutes
Plus 50 minutes for breaks
(Should be 7.5 plus breaks)
Finish 14:10 to 16:30
Some typical subjects that trainer could choose from to suit the target audience
1 Site se-up, hoarding and public protection
2 Formwork, Falsework and back-propping
3 Striking and curing, with assessment of strength and stability
4 Trenching, excavations, testing pipelines and temporary haul roads
5 Sheet piling, piling gates, cofferdams and de-watering
6 Scaffolding, edge protection, access, load out, work at height and mobile towers
4 Craneage, hoists, Temporary Works for lifting and working platforms for tracked plant
8 Demolition, crash decks, propping, shoring and structural alterations
9 Effect of Temporary Works on Permanent Works and integration of temporary Works into Permanent Works
10 Other subjects to suit the specific audience

(Company Logo & Company Presentation
Template to be used throughout the slides)
Temporary Works General Awareness

Training Course
(TWGATC)
(Company Logo & Company Presentation
Template to be used throughout the slides)
Introductions
Course Administration
Temporary Works General Awareness Training Course
Aims & Objectives
AIMS
The aim is to give delegates a general awareness and appreciation of Temporary Works. They should
understand:-
• What is deemed to be Temporary Works
• How Temporary Works are used
• The role of Safety in Temporary Works
• Common issues associated with Temporary Works
• The management processes
OBJECTIVES
At the end of the course delegates should:-

• Understand what constitutes Temporary Works
• Know how Temporary Works are used
• Understand the importance of safety and how to overcome common safety issues
• Understand the need for management processes
Construction Industry Training Board (CITB) recommended Target Audience
for Temporary Works General Awareness Training Courses
TARGET AUDIENCE
• Delegates who are not likely to be TWCs or TWSs in the near future (or at all) but may be involved
in Temporary Works process
• Directors, Contract Managers, Site Supervisors, Estimators, Planners, procurement professionals,
commercial managers and Project Leads
• Health and Safety Professionals wishing to gain a better understanding of Temporary Works
• Delegates undertaking a graduate development programme
• Delegates not directly from the civil engineering or building sectors who may use Temporary Works
(for example, mechanical and electrical contractors) or delegates from Local Authority building
maintenance departments, nuclear decommissioning and utility companies
• Delegates who have come into construction form other industries
• Foreign contractors who wish to learn from UK best practice
• Permanent works designers involved in Temporary Works, and other consulting or structural
engineers
• Principal designers and clients representatives
• People from the training industry, including university and college lecturers
• Salespersons from the equipment or plant suppliers
Temporary Works ?
List on Flipchart of TW examples supplied by

Delegates
Temporary Works Examples
Formwork & Falsework
What do these TWs do ? Impact on H&S & Construction ?
Working Platforms – Cranes and Piling

Ground Support

Façade Retention

Hoarding, Edge Protection, Loading Platform and Signage, etc.

Temporary Bridges

Hoists / Mast Climbers, Outrigger Pads, Tower Crane Bases

Temporary Works Definition
BS 5975:2019 Code of practice for Temporary Works procedures and the permissible stress design
of Falsework
Temporary Works can be described as providing an “engineered solution” that is used to support
or protect either an existing structure or the Permanent Works during construction, or to support
an item of plant or equipment, or the vertical sides or side-slopes of an excavation during
construction operations on site or to provide access.
It is used to control stability, strength, deflection, fatigue, geotechnical effects and hydraulic
effects within defined limits.
NOTE:-
To assist with the understanding of Temporary Works delegates may consider using the term
“Construction Engineering” to replace the term “Temporary Works” ?
What are NOT Temporary Works
• Temporary Site Facilities

• Temporary Electricity Supplies
• Temporary Water Supplies
• Temporary Doors
• Plant & Equipment
• Etc.
Temporary Works applies to Civil / Structural Engineering rather than

Electrical, Mechanical, Hydraulic, etc. solutions
Note that there may be Temporary Works for the construction of

foundations, to provide supports etc. to these examples that may be
considered Temporary Works
Arch construction used to demonstrate Temporary Works
Temporary Condition for Permanent Works

Eiffel Tower Construction used to demonstrate Temporary Works
Construction commenced on 28th January 1887 and Opened on 31st of March 1889
• 324 Meters Tall
• Base footprint is 125 meters square
Brooklyn Bridge Construction used to demonstrate Temporary Works
Construction commenced in 1869 and Opened on 24th of May 1883
• It is a hybrid cable-stayed / suspension bridge
• Main span is 486.3 Meters (1,595.5 Feet)
• First Steel Wire Suspension Bridge Constructed
Millau Viaduct Construction used to demonstrate Temporary Works
Construction commenced in December 2001 and Opened on 16h of December 2014
• It is a cable-stayed bridge
• One of the masts summits is 324 meters tall
• Bridge deck height is 270 meters
• Example of Temporary Works integrated into the
Permanent Works Design process and planning
Examples of Temporary Works Solutions
Gabion construction incorporating

Scaffold Access
• TW design incorporating scaffold

access for personnel
• TW design having direct impact on
the Health & Safety (H&S) of the
construction operation being
undertaken
Pile Gate for off-shore piling operation
• TW design incorporating access for personnel

• TW design having direct impact on the Health & Safety
(H&S) of the construction operation being undertaken
Jetty Construction
• TW design incorporating access for

personnel
undertaken
Sea Wall Construction
• TW design incorporating access for

personnel
undertaken
Travelling access gantry to allow access to the
underside of road bridge parapet
• TW design incorporating access for personnel

• TW design having direct impact on the Health &
Safety (H&S) of the construction operation being
undertaken
Propping Frame for precast RC

Beam
• TW design incorporating
temporary stability of Temporary
Works prior to loading
• Consideration of the
construction of Temporary
Works
Propping Frame to underside

of Road bridge
(Bridge column heights from

12.5 to 16m
Column loads to support from
180 Tonnes to 990 Tonnes)
• Consideration of the
construction of Temporary
Works (note jacking
frames used to strand jack
the prop frame)
Birdcage scaffold for bridge construction

Jacking frame to allow vertical and horizontal movement of a bridge deck being propped
300 Tonne vertical

Hydraulic Cylinders
Strand Jacking used to erect Propping
Towers in a confined site footprint
• TW design incorporating temporary

stability of Temporary Works prior to
loading
• Consideration of the construction of
Temporary Works
Sheet piled excavation with waler frames and struts
• TW design incorporating slope – embankment to

reduce sheet pile requirement
• Access, etc. visible
Examples of Temporary Works Solutions not considered
Temporary Works Not considered by

the Permanent Works Designer (PWD)
• The PWD have not considered

access for construction activities. No
provision for brackets or fixings to
support temporary access platforms
• Lack of TW design having a
negative impact on the Health &
Safety of the construction operation
being undertaken
• The requirement for additional

access added time and cost to the
project
Temporary Works Not considered by

the construction team
• No Temporary Works management

evident
• Lack of TW design having a
negative impact on the Health &
Safety of the construction operation
being undertaken
• Additional time and cost added to

the project to carry out corrective
work
Temporary Works Not considered by the
construction team
• No design brief or Temporary Works

management evident
• Lack of TW design having direct impact on
construction operation being undertaken
• This also causes additional time added to

the construction project for corrective work
and additional cost
Example of Temporary Works Failure
Shutter moved during concrete pour allowing concrete to flow
free of the formwork
• TW failure having a negative impact on the Health & Safety of
the construction operation being undertaken
• Additional time and cost added to the project to carry out
corrective work
Examples of Incorrect Temporary Works
Concrete Pump outriggers not centered

on outrigger pad to spread load
• Corrected on site once observed

and prior to concrete pump use
• If not corrected the ground loading

may not be spread as expected and
may over load the supporting slab
Examples of Temporary Works issues observed during a site Inspection
Temporary Works slope and bund with tension crack

visible
• Slope remediated following this observation
• If not remediated and there was any further slope

movement there is the possibility of slope failure
• The History of Temporary Works
The History of Temporary Works – Consequence of Failure
• The major falsework failures in the 1970s

(although there were many before this) were the
catalyst which led to the publication of the
‘Bragg’ report in 1975 and subsequently, as a
direct result, BS5975 in 1982.
• During Loddon Viaduct Construction in 1972
there was a major falsework collapse causing
the death of 3 men and injuring 10. The men
were trapped in the tangled mesh of girders,
rods and splintered wooden frames. Hundreds
of tons of concrete, wood and steel had crashed
40ft down when the span between two concrete
piers was on the point of being poured.
The History of Temporary Works
• HANDOUT :- IStructE Comments on Bragg Committee Report

The History of Temporary Works
• 1st Report on Falsework was in July of 1971 and titled – The Concrete Society Falsework – Report
of the Joint Committee, the Concrete Society and the Institution of Structural Engineers, Technical
Report TRCS 4
• Tuesday 24th October 1972 – Loddon Bridge Collapse – A329M near Reading
• Final Report of the Advisory Committee on Falsework – Bragg Report – June 1975 –
- Committee appointed on 13 March 1973 by the Secretary of State for Employment and the
Secretary of State for the Environment
- Final Report made 27 Recommendations
• BS 5975 : 1982 – First Temporary Works guidance in the world – Referred to Falsework Coordinator
• BS 5975 : 1996 – Section 2 guidance on procedures was 4 pages long – Referred to Falsework
Coordinator
• BS 5975 : 2008 – Section 2 guidance on procedures was 15 pages long – Referred to Temporary
Works Coordinator (TWC) for the 1st time. Introduces the term Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS)
• BS 5975 : 2019 – Section 2 guidance on procedures is 39 pages long – Refers to details for Clients,
Permanent Works Designers, Principal Designers, etc. that has not be highlighted previously
• Temporary Works Failure During Bridge Bearing Replacement Works
Temporary Works Failure During Bridge Bearing Replacement Works
A 7.2 Tonne piece of a steel frame used to jack a bridge deck from its supports to allow bridge
bearing replacement work was being lowered to the ground from a height of approximately 21m
using 2 No. 5 Ton Air hoists when the cantilever support steel supporting one of the air hoists
came free from its support due to the bolts failing.
The 7.2 Tonne steel assembly plus air hoists and cantilever supports fell towards the ground and
was stopped by the birdcage scaffold built around the lifting void.
An operative in a safety harness attached to the bridge steel work ended up upside down and
suspended in the air at 21m above the ground. The site team immediately rescued the operative.
This operation had been completed successfully on 1 previous occasion by the site team as the
bridge bearing replacement work progressed and the site team was familiar with the process and
the equipment.
3-D of Steel Jacking Frame

3-D PDF of Steel Jacking Frame
4 No. Vertical Hydraulic

Cylinders per Jacking Frame
Each Hydraulic Cylinder has a

lifting capacity of 320 Tonne
Total lift capacity of 1,280 Tonne

per jacking frame
Steel Jacking Frame being fabricated
Site location with Scaffold in place (approximately 21m high)
View from Scaffold (approximately 21m high)
View from Scaffold (approximately 21m high) 7 Tonne steel assembly being raised
Steel fixed to bridge steel beams to allow the jacking frame to be lifted into place
7 Tonne Steel Assembly came loose at 21m high and fell through scaffold
HSE Findings noted:-

• Principal cause of failure was accidental overtightening of the bolts with an impact wrench.
The bolt size was M16 and had been used for the previous operations to move the steel frame
as the bearing replacement work progressed
• There was no further action taken by the HSE for this incident
The learning from this for a Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) may be as follows:-
• TWC to have a clear understanding of load paths and critical connections and from this all
critical bolted connections to have a suitable level of Design Check
• Critical connections to use the correct bolt types i.e. possible use of TCB’s to ensure the
correct torque is applied
• Bolts not to be reused for critical connections
• Suitable controls in place on site to ensure bolts are not reused and to ensure the correct type
and grade of bolts are used
• TWC or Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS) on site to ensure this has been understood by
the site team and to inspect to ensure compliance as required
Health and Safety at Work etc Act 1974
• The Health and Safety at Work etc Act 1974 is commonly referred to as HSWA or HASAWA
• This is the primary piece of legislation covering occupational Health and Safety in Great Britain
• It sets out the general duties which:
- Employers have towards employees and members of the public
- Employees have to themselves and to each other
- Certain self-employed have towards themselves and others#
• The Health and Safety (Offences) Act 2008 (HSOA 2008) makes amendments to the HSWA namely
regarding maximum penalties.
- £20,000 maximum fine in a magistrates court applying to most H&S offences
- Does not affect Crown Court fines having an unlimited maximum value
- Makes imprisonment of individuals an option for many H&S offences, this includes:-
- Employees who do not take reasonable care of the H&S of others
- Directors, Senior Managers, etc.
- Maximum custodial sentence that can be given by a Magistrates Court is 6 months
- Maximum custodial sentence that can be given by the Crown Court is 2 years
Regulations
• The Construction Design & Management Regulations (CDM) - 2015

• The Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations - 1999
• The Work at Height Regulations - 2005
• Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations (LOLER) - 1998
• Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations (PUWER) - 1998
• The Personal Protective Equipment at Work Regulations – 1992
• Etc..
Hierarchy of Documents
ACTS HASAWA / HSOA
(Acts of the UK Parliament referred to as “Primary Corporate Manslaughter and Corporate Homicide Act
Legislation” sometimes referred to as “statutes”) 2007
REGULATIONS CDM / H&S at Work / Work at Height / LOLER / PUWER /

PPE at Work / etc.
(Regulations referred to as “Secondary Legislation” (also
called “Subordinate Legislation”) and is a type of UK Statutory
Instrument)
STANDARDS BS 5975:2019 Code of Practice for Temporary Works

Procedures and the Permissible Stress Design of
(British Standards give recommendations and guidance of Falsework / etc.
doing something. It is not a legal requirement but would may
be hard to justify if you were not following the principles of
the standard)
GUIDANCE DOCUMENT / COMPANY POLICIES / etc. HSE Guidance documents, etc.
Company Temporary Works procedures, etc.
Construction Design & Management Regulations (CDM)
• The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations (CDM) was originally issued in 1994
- Revised April 2007 - (Replaced - Construction(Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1996)
- Latest Revision April 2015 – known as CDM 2015
• Reg 4 – Clients duty to provide pre-construction information; e.g. ground conditions, structural
drawings
• Reg 8 – Competence required of all those with a role to discharge in planning, design and execution
of Temporary Works
• Reg 9 – A Designer must consider the construction and demolition phase (i.e. Temporary Works)
and use the general principle's of prevention and collaborate with all parties involved
• Reg 11 – The Principal Designer must consider the construction and demolition phase (i.e.
Temporary Works) and use the general principle's of prevention and collaborate with all parties
involved to provide information on design, construction and / or maintenance of the structure.
• Reg 13 – Duties of a Principal Contractor in relation to Health & Safety at the Construction Phase –
Take into account the General Principles of Prevention.
• Reg 19 & 20 – Stability of Structures and Demolition & Dismantling.
• Reg 22 & 23 – Relates to Excavations and Cofferdams and Caissons
General Principles of Prevention
• These principles are a requirement of the Management of Health & Safety at Work Regulations
1999 (Schedule 1) and apply to all industries, including construction. They provide a framework to
identify and implement measure to control risk on a construction project.
• The general principles of prevention are to:

a) Avoid risks;
b) Evaluate the risks which cannot be avoided;
c) Combat the risks at source;
d) Adapt the work to the individual, especially regarding the design of workplaces, the choice of
work equipment and the choice of working and production methods, with a view, in particular, to
alleviate monotonous work, work at a predetermined work rate and to rediucing their effect on
health;
e) Adapt to technical progress;
f) Replace the dangerous by the non-dangerous or the less dangerous;
g) Develop a coherent overall prevention policy which covers technology, organization of work,
working conditions, social relationships and the influence of factors relating to the working
environment;
h) Give collective protective measures priority over individual protective measures; and
i) Give appropriate instructions to employees.
HSE – Sector Information Minutes (SIMs)
SIM 02 / 2010 / 04
• HSE SIM – The Management of Temporary Works in the Construction Industry – Risk Matrix
Consequence Application / Likelihood
Interpretation
Probable Possible Remote Nil / Negligible
Risk of Collapse of High Risk or complex High Risk or Medium Risk TW A TW procedure
Serious Permanent Structure TW being used complex TW being being used with for all categories
personal due to inadequate without key used with most of most of the key consistent with
injury Temporary Works elements of TW the key elements elements of TW the advice in the
procedure in place, of TW procedure procedure in HSE SIM is in place
Collapse or failure of particularly absence in place, but place, but absence and evidence it is
Temporary Works & of evidence of the absence of of some elements being used
associated plant due TW being designed evidence of the requiring effectively
to poor design, by a competent TW designs being improvement
erection or person independently
overloading verified
Evidence of
Falls from height significant problems
from poorly designed being manifested
/ constructed
Temporary Works
SIM 02 / 2010 / 04
• The Management of Temporary Works in the Construction Industry – Enforcement Action
Control Failure Risk of Serious Personal Initial Enforcement Expectation
Injury likelihood Consider Consider Consider
Prohibition Notice Improvement Notice Letter
No TW Procedure and High Risk or Probable X X
Complex TW is use or planned
Inadequate TW Procedure and Possible X
Medium Risk TW in use or planned
Absence of effective input from Possible / Remote X
Principal Designer (was CDM Co-
ordinator) demonstrated by lack of
co-operation between Temporary
and Permanent Works Designers
and / or, inadequate TW
arrangements in Construction
Phase Plane
SIM 02 / 2010 / 04
• HANDOUT :- HSE – The management of Temporary Works in Construction – Sector Information

Minute
BS 5975 – Three Fundamental Principals of Controlling Temporary Works
• Clause 5.1.1.10
1. All organisations have a duty to manage and control their work
2. The contractor is responsible for building the Permanent Works, and that includes any associated
Temporary Works in order to construct the project
3. One person should take overall responsibility for managing the Temporary Works. (BS 5975:2019
allows large sites to be suitably split up)
BS 5975 – Aims of Temporary Works Procedure & Safe Method of Work
• Clause 5.1.1.7
- One of the main aims of the procedure and the method of work adopted, should be to minimize
the chance of errors being made, and to maximize the chance of errors being discovered if they
are made.
There should be effective communication of information and requirements between all levels of
the construction organizations involved, whether they are concerned primarily with the
Permanent Works or the Temporary Works.
An effective system of checking, both for the design and its implementation, should also be
implemented.
3P’s
1. PEOPLE
• Correctly competent and empowered people are essential for the safe management of Temporary Works
• SKATE:-
 Skills – Ability & Aptitude to carry out a task
Refers to the techniques and approaches that are employed in order to implement the knowledge that has been
acquired and allow competence to be demonstrated and developed. As knowledge is applied, understanding
develops. Understanding has been defined as being able to apply the right knowledge appropriately in a variety of
contexts.
 Knowledge – Understanding of the subject and access to suitable information if required
Formal Knowledge also referred to as codified knowledge combined with Personal Knowledge
 Attitude – Correct attitude / behaviour
The way in which one acts or conducts oneself, especially towards other people
 Training – Undertaken suitable training
 Experience – Demonstrable experience
2. PROCESS
• Temporary Works Procedure, etc.
3. PRODUCT
• Correct equipment used as specified in the Temporary Works Design
4C’s
1. COMMUNICATION
• Spoken, written and visible – Design Briefs, Toolbox talks, meetings, discussions, etc.
2. CO-ORDINATION
• Between individuals and groups – PWD, TWD, TWC, Site Team, etc.
3. CO-OPERATION
• Allocating responsibilities, securing commitment, instruction & supervision – TWC & TWS
4. COMPETENCY
• Correctly competent and empowered people are essential for the safe management of TW
• SKATE:-
 Attitude – Correct attitude
Hudson’s Safety Culture Ladder for Organisations
High level of High level
trust and communication
accountability and information
GENERATIVE sharing
(High Reliability Organisations) HSE is how we do business around here,
fully integrated safety culture
PROACTIVE
Safety leadership and values drive continuous improvement. Safety
processes effectively utilised
CALCULATIVE
We have systems in place to manage all hazards. Safety process in place
REACTIVE
Safety is important, we do allot every time we have an accident, safety
prioritised after failure or event
PATHOLOGICAL
Who cares as long as we’re not caught, seeking to evade
Low level of Low level of

trust and communication and
accountability information sharing
High level of Hudson’s Safety Culture Ladder for Organisations High level
trust and communication
accountability and information
GENERATIVE
sharing
Organisations set very high standards and attempt to exceed them. They use
failure to improve, not to blame. Management knows what is really going on,
because the workforce tells them. People are trying to be as informed as
possible, because it prepares them for the unexpected.
PROACTIVE
Moving away from managing HSE based on what has happened in the past to
preventing what might go wrong in the future. The workforce start to be
involved in the HSE function, while HSE personnel; reduce in numbers and
provide advice rather than execution
CALCULATIVE
Focus on systems and numbers. Lots of data is collected and analysed, lots of
audits are performed and people begin to feel they know “how it works”. The
effectiveness of the gathered data I not always proven though.
REACTIVE
Safety is taken seriously, but only after things have gone wrong. Managers feel
frustrated about how the workforce won’t do what they are told. Low level of
PATHOLOGICAL communication
People don’t really care about HSE and are only driven by regulatory
and information
compliance and/or not getting caught
sharing
Low level of
trust and
accountability
Temporary Works Corporate Manslaughter Convictions
(refer to Hand Out)
The Corporate Manslaughter and Corporate Homicide Act 2007 is a landmark in UK law. Companies
and organizations can be found guilty of corporate manslaughter as a result or serious management
failures resulting in a gross breach of duty of care.
• Cotswold Geotechnical Holdings – 1st prosecution under the Act – Young geologist killed in an
unsupported excavation – Fined £385,000 – Due to Director terminal illness no further charges
• Linley Developments Ltd – Worker was crushed when a structurally unstable retaining wall
collapsed – Fined £225,000 – 2 No. Company Directors sentenced to 6 months and given personal
fines up to £32,500
• Monavan Construction Ltd – 2 members of the public had been drinking when they got into a fight
and fell 4 meters through the building sites perimeter plywood hoarding. The hoarding was not
sufficiently sturdy – Fined £300,000 plus costs (company annual turnover was £500,000)
• Siday Construction Ltd - Worker crushed to death in basement excavation that was not supported –
Siday Company owner sentenced to 3 Years and 3 Months and a Health & Safety Advisor
sentenced to 9 months
How to Create a Robust, Safety-Conscious Process for the Design,
Management & Removal of Temporary Works
• Appoint a Designated Individual (DI)

• Company Temporary Works Procedure created
• Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) appointed by the DI
• Clear understanding all TW are suitably managed by a TWC and all interfaces are clear and
understood by all parties
• If required a Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS) is appointed
• Permanent Works Designer (PWD) to supply a design considering all Temporary Works as
required in CDM Regulations
• TWC to assess the Permanent Works proposals and Temporary Works highlighted by the PWD
• TWC to create a Temporary Works Register for the management of Temporary Works on site
Typical Interfaces between Parties
Client Designated Individual (DI)
Principal Contractor (PC) Permanent Workers Designer

DI DI
Principal Designer
DI
PC Appointed Contractors Other Designer

DI DI
Client Appointed Contractor

PC Temporary Works
DI
Coordinator
Temporary Works Temporary Works Designer Temporary Works Supplier

Coordinator DI DI
Temporary Works
Coordinator
Temporary Works Temporary Works Temporary Works

Supervisors Supervisors Supervisors
Construction Delivery Teams

Temporary Works Register
• TWC to utilize TW Register to manage Temporary Works as follows:-
- Temporary Works Reference number recorded

- Temporary Works description recorded
- Design Check & Implementation Risk Recorded
- Design Brief created and issue date to designer recorded
- Date design is required is recorded so design time can be monitored
- Any relevant comments or discussions with the Temporary Works Designer (TWD) is noted
- TWD name and company is recorded
- TW Design return date is recorded
- TW Design Checker name ad company is recorded
- TW Design Check return date is recorded
- Drawings and Method Statements recorded for reference
- Permit To Load recorded (where required)
- Permit To UnLoad recorded (where required)
- TW interface with other TW and / or Permanent Works is recorded
(USE TEMPORARY WORKS REGISTER HAND OUT TO DESCRIBE THIS PROCESS)

COFFEE BREAK
10 MINUTES
Who is Involved with Temporary Works
• Clause 5.1.1.3
- When a project has, or might be anticipated to have, the requirement for any Temporary
Works, all organizations involved in the management of the Temporary Works, whether
implemented by themselves or others, should have and implement a procedure which outlines
how they are to discharge their duties in relation to the Temporary Works.
NOTE:- The purpose of the procedures is to manage and control the organizations
involvement both within their own organization and when they are employing others or working
with other organizations to carry out Temporary Works roles.
• Clause 5.1.1.5
- All types of organizations, from the use of Temporary Works by small contractors to the very
large organizations and / or utilities should use the procedures outlined in detail below. This
includes civil engineering companies and building companies. The approach adopted in
Section (BS 5975) is “organization focused” so the procedures for each organization are
separated – it is accepted that this includes some duplication of text.
- NOTE:- The term “organization” includes Clients, Designers, Permanent Works Designers,
Temporary Works Designers, Principal Designers, Contractors, Principal Contractors, Sub-
Contractors, Specialist Contractors, Third-Party Contractors and Supplier / Manufacturers.
CLIENT
• The Client
- Could the Client anticipate the project would require Temporary Works ?
- Could the Client be expected to directly implement Temporary Works themselves ?
- Would the Client employ an organization that will directly implement Temporary Works ?
- Does the Client require a Temporary Works Procedure ?
- If a Temporary Works Procedure is required what would it contain ?

- What duties would need to be discharged in relation to Temporary Works ?
Permanent Works Designer
• The Permanent Works Designer
- Could the Permanent Works Designer anticipate the project would require Temporary Works ?
- Could the Permanent Works Designer be expected to directly implement Temporary Works
themselves ?
- Would the Permanent Works Designer employ an organization that will directly implement
Temporary Works ?
- Does the Permanent Works Designer require a Temporary Works Procedure ?

BS 5975 Permanent Works Designer (PWD) Requirements

PWD should address the buildability of the PW and identify, and make provision for, any TW and temporary
conditions required by their design and their assumed method of construction. This should include:
a) A proposed method and sequence of construction which should have no adverse effects on the PW;
b) Deciding on and communicating the intended construction process, giving particular attention to new or
unfamiliar processes;
c) Considering the stability of existing structures and partially constructed/erected/ demolished structures and,
where this is not immediately obvious, providing information to show how temporary stability could be
achieved;
d) Identifying where standard industry details are not suitable, and where detailed structural design is to be
carried out by others;
e) Considering the effect of the proposed work on the integrity of adjacent/existing structures, particularly
during refurbishment;
f) Ensuring that the overall design takes account of Temporary Works which might be needed, no matter who
is to develop those works;
g) Ensuring that consideration has been given to the availability of sufficient space required to construct or
maintain the structure; and
h) Clearly stating loads for which the structure has been designed including the proposed plant installation
loads and plant routes.
The designer should liaise with the PD to provide all necessary information relevant to any TW or temporary
condition(s) to the PC through the PD.
Other Client Designers
• Other Client Designers
- Could Other Client Designers anticipate the project would require Temporary Works ?
- Could Other Client Designers be expected to directly implement Temporary Works themselves ?
- Would Other Client Designers employ an organization that will directly implement Temporary
Works ?
- Do Other Client Designers require a Temporary Works Procedure ?

Principal Designer
• The Principal Designer
- Could the Principal Designer anticipate the project would require Temporary Works ?
- Could the Principal Designer be expected to directly implement Temporary Works themselves
?
- Would the Principal Designer employ an organization that will directly implement Temporary
Works ?
- Does the Principal Designer require a Temporary Works Procedure ?

BS 5975 Principal Designer (PD) Requirements
• In relation to TW, the PD should ensure that:

a) There is a coherent construction method which identifies all key temporary conditions and
Temporary Works;
b) The finally agreed construction method, sequence and Temporary Works are not deleterious
to the Permanent Works Design;
c) Designers follow the recommendations of the relevant clauses within British Standard BS
5975 : 2019;
d) They share information with designers, and the PC’s TWC and TWC, that might influence the
design of Temporary Works or the selection of construction methods;
e) Designers take account of the construction phase plan;
f) They retain appropriate information relating to Temporary Works that would be required for
the Health and Safety file; this should include information on construction method or
sequence including associated Temporary Works which might impact on future maintenance
or deconstruction; this information should be obtained from the PC’s TWC; and
g) They carry out the domestic client’s duties with respect to Temporary Works, where these
have been transferred to the Principal Designer.
Principal Contractor
• The Principal Contractor
- Could the Principal Contractor anticipate the project would require Temporary Works ?
- Could the Principal Contractor be expected to directly implement Temporary Works
themselves ?
- Would the Principal Contractor employ an organization that will directly implement Temporary
Works ?
- Does the Principal Contractor require a Temporary Works Procedure ?

Sub-Contractor
• A Sub-Contractor
- Could a Sub-Contractor anticipate the project would require Temporary Works ?

- Could a Sub-Contractor be expected to directly implement Temporary Works themselves ?
- Would a Sub-Contractor employ an organization that will directly implement Temporary Works ?
- Does a Sub-Contractor require a Temporary Works Procedure ?

Specialist Contractor, Third-Party Contractor
• A Specialist Contractor, Third-Party Contractor
- Could a Specialist Contractor, Third-Party Contractor anticipate the project would require
Temporary Works ?
- Could a Specialist Contractor, Third-Party Contractor be expected to directly implement
Temporary Works themselves ?
- Would a Specialist Contractor, Third-Party Contractor employ an organization that will directly
implement Temporary Works ?
- Does a Specialist Contractor, Third-Party Contractor require a Temporary Works Procedure ?

Supplier / Manufacturers
• A Supplier / Manufacturers
- Could a Supplier / Manufacturer anticipate the project would require Temporary Works ?
- Could a Supplier / Manufacturer be expected to directly implement Temporary Works
themselves ?
- Would a Supplier / Manufacturer employ an organization that will directly implement
Temporary Works ?
- Does a Supplier / Manufacturer require a Temporary Works Procedure ?

Early Project Phase prior to Appointment of PC
Client
Principal Designer Permanent Workers Designer

PD PWD
Other Designer
• Greatest benefits for Construction, Temporary Works, Safety, Project Duration & Cost can be
made at this stage with the correct planning of Temporary Works and Construction by the
Permanent Works Designer
Project Phase - PC Appointed & Client Appointed Contractor
Client
Permanent Workers Designer

PWD
Principal Contractor Principal Designer

Client Appointed Contractor PC PD
Other Designer
Project Phase - Construction - PC Appoints Sub-Contractor, Supplier, etc.
Client
Permanent Workers Designer

PWD
Principal Contractor Principal Designer

Client Appointed Contractor PC PD
Other Designer
Principal Contractor Appointed Principal Contractor Appointed Principal Contractor Appointed

Sub-Contractor Specialist Contractor Specialist Supplier / Manufacturer
• Least benefits for Construction, Temporary Works, Safety, Project Duration & Cost if the Permanent
Works Designer has not adequately addressed and considered the planning of Temporary Works
and Construction prior to construction commencing
Designated Individual (DI)
• Suitably competent and experienced for the level of Temporary Works being undertaken
• Senior person within an organization
• Responsible for:-
- Establishing a procedure for the control of Temporary Works
- Implementing a procedure for the control of Temporary Works
- Maintaining a procedure for the control of Temporary Works
- Establishing a procedure for the control of Temporary Works
- Suitably appointing and empowering a Temporary Works Coordinator (if required)

Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC)

• Appointed by the DI
- Ensuring Temporary Works on site are managed in line with the approved Temporary Works
Procedure
- Overall responsibility for the co-ordination of all TW across the site
- The TWC should be the single point of contact providing & receiving relevant information from
the Client, Principal Designer, Temporary Works Designer, the site team and any TWC, for all
TW matters
- TWC not responsible for day-to-day progress of TW or other project matters (e.g. commercial
or programme matters)
- Suitably appointing and empowering a Temporary Works Supervisor (if required)

Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS)

• Appointed by the DI or TWC
- Ensuring Temporary Works on site are managed in line with the approved Temporary Works
Procedure
- The TWS should assist the TWC in ensuring that the site is operating in accordance with the
approved TW procedure, in the supervision and checking of the TW
- TWS not responsible for any design or design checking of TW

Temporary Works Designer (TWD)

- Ensuring the Temporary Works Design details and outline methodologies are accurately
translated into the design output, and that the designs follow appropriate engineering
principles
- TWD and TW Design Checker (TWDC) should confirm that the design output adequately
describes the design in a design check certificate or other suitable form of record
Single Contractor on Small Project

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
Temporary Works Coordinator
(TWC)

TWD In-House External
Temporary Works Designer Temporary Works Designer
(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Temporary Works Supervisor
TWS
Note the PC
PC
TWC interaction Site Team
with parties
Temporary Works
On Site
PROJECT or SITE
Principal Contractor Appointed by the Client

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC
Temporary Works Supervisor Temporary Works Supervisor
TWS TWS
Note the PC PC PC
TWC interaction Site Team Site Team
with parties
Temporary Works Temporary Works
On Site On Site

Principal Contractor with Several Small Sites

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC PC
Temporary Works Supervisor Temporary Works Supervisor Temporary Works Supervisor
TWS TWS TWS
Note the PC
PC PC
TWC interaction Site Team Site Team
PC
Site Team
with parties
Temporary Works Temporary Works Temporary Works
On Site On Site On Site
SMALL SITE SMALL SITE SMALL SITE

Principal Contractor Appoints a Sub-Contractor to Implement PC’s TW

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Supervised
Sub-Contractor
TWS
Sub-Contractor
PC
Note the PC Temporary Works Supervisor
TWS
Site Team
TWC interaction
with parties On Site On Site
Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Complex Project Able to be Split into Well-Defined Areas

Client
Clients
Principal Contractor (PC) Principal Designer (PD)
PC Other Designers
Lead Temporary Works Coordinator
(L-TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC
Temporary Works Coordinator Temporary Works Supervisor
(TWC) TWS
Note the PC INTERFACE FOR LEAD TEMPORARY
WORKS COORDINATOR TO MANAGE
PC
Lead TWC Temporary Works Supervisor
PC
Site Team
TWS
interaction with
parties Temporary Works
On Site
Temporary Works
On Site
WELL DEFINED AREA X WELL DEFINED AREA Y
PROJECT or SITE
PC Appoints a Sub-Contractor to Co-ordinate their own TW

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Self Delivering
Sub-Contractor
TWS
Sub-Contractor
Note the PC Temporary Works Coordinator
TWC
PC
Site Team
TWC interaction Sub-Contractor
with parties Temporary Works Supervisor
TWS
Temporary Works
On Site
Temporary Works
On Site
Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Client Appoints a Sub-Contractor to Co-ordinate their own TW

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Self Delivering
TWS
Temporary Works Coordinator PC
Note the PC TWC Site Team
TWC interaction Temporary Works Supervisor Temporary Works
TWS On Site
with parties
Client Temporary Works
On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Typical Interfaces between Parties on a Project

Client
Clients
Client Contractor Principal Contractor (PC)
PC
TWC
Client Contractor
TWC
Sub-Contractor Site Team
PWD TWD
Self Delivering
Sub-Contractor
Sub-Contractor
TWC PCs PCs
In-House External
Self Delivering Specialist Supplier (TWD) (TWD)
Sub-Contractor TWD
TWD
Note the PC
TWC interaction
with parties
LUNCH BREAK
30 MINUTES
Planning Temporary Works
Sample Exercise
• Cabins are being delivered to site to set up a compound and consists of 2 No. cabins, a 20’
Container and a 32’ Cabin
• A mobile telescopic crane is being used for this unloading on site – Liebherr LTM1055-3.1 - 60
Ton all terrain Crane
• The lift plan states the maximum outrigger loading for this operation is 25 Tonne
• The outrigger mats supplied are 1.0 m X 1.0m Square
• The crane supplier and the lift plan states the resulting ground bearing under the supplied
outrigger mats are 25.0 Tonne / m2
• The existing ground from a visual description is a non-cohesive medium dense gravel and sandy
gravel that is resistant to digging unless using a hand pick and has a resistance to attempts at
shoveling by hand
• You are a suitably competent and appointed TWC for the site and you have to provide a Permit
To Load for the crane lift operation
Sample Exercise
• Additional Information:-
- During the site setup you have been on site and witnessed the ground being dug with a
machine for the installation of some services to a depth of 1.2m and there was no ground
water present and no sign of any ground water at that depth
- The area is well drained and there is no ponding or pooling of water
- On the proposed day of the delivery the ground is dry and there is no rain
- The ground is homogeneous across the site, i.e. it is consistently the same
- You have witnessed during the site setup that there are no soft spots present and the area has
been compacted with a site roller
- There are no slopes or embankments in the area
- There are no underground services or voids present in the area
- There are no adjacent structures or foundations in the area
Sample Exercise - Handout

• Using the handout info supplied as shown, which uses
the data shown in Table 18 & 19 of BS 5975 : 2019,
estimate the allowable bearing pressure of the ground
described
Sample Exercise – Soil Field Description

• To assist with the use of Table 18 & 19 from BS 5975 regarding the field description of soils
• British Soil Classification System using basic soil type groups according to particle size:-
- Boulders :- > 200 mm
- Cobbles :- 60 to 200 mm
- Coarse Soils – Gravel – Coarse :- 20 to 60 mm
- Coarse Soils – Gravel – Medium :- 6 to 20 mm
- Coarse Soils – Gravel – Fine :- 2 to 6 mm
- Coarse Soils – Sand – Coarse :- 0.6 to 2.0 mm
- Coarse Soils – Sand – Medium :- 0.2 to 0.6 mm
- Coarse Soils – Sand – Fine :- 0.06 to 0.2 mm
- Fine Soils – Silt – Coarse :- 0.02 to 0.06 mm
- Fine Soils – Silt – Medium :- 0.006 to 0.02 mm
- Fine Soils – Silt – Fine :- 0.002 to 0.006 mm
- Fine Soils – Clay :- < 0.002 mm
• Sand (and coarser) particles are visible to the naked eye

• Silt particles become dusty when dry and are easily brushed off hands and boots
• Clay particles are greasy and sticky when wet and hard when dry, and have to be
scraped or washed off hands and boots
Sample Exercise
• Assumed Allowable Ground Bearing pressure:-
- Have we estimated a value of 200 kN/m2 ?

- This value has a factor of safety as it is to BS 8004
- The supplied ground bearing pressure under the outrigger mats is 25.0 Tonne/m2, can we
convert this to kN/m2 to compare the values ?
- The supplied outrigger mat is 1.0 m X 1.0 m Square which gives a total area of 1.0 m2
- The load from the outrigger is 25 Tonne, what is the resulting plan are required on the ground ?
Sample Exercise
• Using the handout information supplied:-
- BS 5975 :2019 – Clause 19.6.3 states load spread through timber as follows:-
- Slope of two horizontal to one vertical in a direction along the grain
- Slope of one horizontal to one vertical in a direction across the grain
- You have 1.4m long X 0.1m deep X 0.2m wide Hardwood timbers on site
- How could you arrange this timber under the 1.0 m X 1.0m crane outrigger pads ?
Sample Exercise
• After completing this exercise you are now a Designer and have obligations under the CDM
Regulations
• Some points to note:-

- Are you competent to undertake this ?
- Have you been suitably appointed to allow you to undertake this design ?
- Was the design brief suitable and adequate ?
- Do you know the Implementation Risk Class and the Design Check Category ?
- Have you used the Principles of Prevention ?
- Have you had your design checked ?
- Have you highlighted any residual risks in this design ?
Competency
• SKATE:-
• For the sample exercise did you have the ability and aptitude to describe the ground and
compare it with values in tables ?
• For the sample exercise did you understand the requirements to spread the load and
where you could find reference material to support your decision ?
 Attitude – Correct attitude
• For the sample exercise would you be willing to check your design if someone gave a
valid challenge or would you just tell them you are right and they are wrong ?
• Have you had any training in this engineering ?
• Are you familiar with this type of design as you have done it numerous times in the past ?
Appointment
• For the sample exercise you are an appointed TWC, does your letter of appointment have to
highlight you have been assessed by the DI as competent to undertake design and authorize you
to undertake design work ?
Design Brief
• Temporary Works Design Brief:-
• More time spent creating a good brief will mean less time answering queries and revising
designs at a later date
• Opportunity to highlight preferred construction methods, materials, preferred components to

use, preferred solutions to use, etc.
• Highlight any critical stages or interfaces to ensure the designer is aware
• Highlight risks for the designer to be aware of and to reduce
• Highlight all relevant information
• Highlight the initial estimated Implementation Risk Class and Design Check Category
Implementation Risk Class
• BS 5975 : 2019 – Table 1 – Implementation

Risk Classes for Temporary Works and
Examples of Mitigation Measures
Design Check Category
• BS 5975 : 2019 – Table 2 – Categories of

Design Check in Temporary Works
• Also note any external approvals if required

(e.g. Network Rail, HA)
Designers Risk Assessment
(Hand Out to refer to)
ERIC
• ELIMINATE
• Can a risk be Eliminated by removing the hazard completely ? Eliminated through design or
construction method ?
• REDUCE
• If a hazard cannot be designed out can the risk from this hazard be Reduced through design ?
• INFORM
• If the risk is present provide suitable information to Inform all relevant parties
• CONTROL
• Control measures to manage a residual risk may be the provision of training, appropriate PPE,
monitoring ?
(Hazard is any source of potential damage, harm or adverse health effects on something or someone.
Risk is the chance, high or low, that any Hazard will actually cause somebody harm)
Design Changes / Alterations
• Due to change in construction methodology on site ?
• Changes in conditions encountered on site ?
• Dimensional variations ?
• How to manage ?
• Who to notify or confirm changes with ?

Standard Solutions
• BS 5975 : 2019 – Clause 13.4.1 states a Standard Solution comprises:-

• A suitable arrangement for which the basic design work has already been carried out and
presented in tabular or other easily assimilated form. And for which no further structural
calculations are necessary
• When selecting a standard solution what are your responsibilities and duties ?
Scaffold Standard Solutions – TG 20

• National Access & Scaffolding Confederation (NASC) Technical Guide on the use of BS EN
12811-1 – TG20:13 Design Guide
• TG20 Design Limitations are to be noted as follows: -

- Tube & Fit Scaffold
- 16m maximum height of Scaffold
- Each Scaffold elevation maybe loaded at one working platform and one working platform loaded at 50%
- Maximum load Class 4 = 3.0 kN/m2
- Transom spacing to a maximum of 1.2m
- Bay Lengths to a maximum of 2.4m
- Maximum total board width is 5 Boards
- Maximum inside boards is 2 Boards
- Maximum lift height is 2.0m except for pavement lift
- Tied at alternative lifts and alternative standards
- Façade bracing to the top lift at every elevation. One set per six bays
- Ledger bracing at alternative standards in all lifts
- Double guard rails provided at boarded lifts. Single guardrails left in place at unboarded lifts, in accordance with NASC
SG4. Triple guard rails maybe provided at the top lift if required.
- May include brick guards or may be clad with sheeting or debris-netting.
Taken from BS 5973

• Is there a design required ?
• Is a design check required ?
• How can it be confirmed it is built to the required centers, etc. ?

• TG20 Compliance Sheets confirm scaffold design

to the TG20 Standard Design Solution
• Refer to Hand Out
COFFEE BREAK
10 MINUTES
Managing the Construction, Erection and Dismantling of Temporary Works
Sample Exercise
• A concrete wall is being poured on site:-
• Assume for this example that the wet concrete behaves like water and has full hydrostatic head
(this is very conservative and not true behavior)
• Lateral Pressure (P) =Density(p) X Gravity (g) X Depth of Fluid (h) = (p X g) X h = ɣ X h
• Wall pour height is 2m = h
• Concrete Density in kg/m3 X Gravity = p X g = ɣ = 25 kN/m3
• Resulting Force from Triangular Load Acting at 1/3 Height of Triangle = ½ X Base X Height
• Figure 3 from CIRIA Report 108

– Concrete Pressure on Formwork
• Pressure at 1/3 height = ½ (ɣ X h) X h = ½ ɣ h2

• Pressure at base (conservative) in kN/m =
((½ ɣ h2) / 2) 3 = 18.75 h2
• With concrete acting as a fluid the pressure at the base = 18.75 X (2m)2 = 75 kN/m
• This equals a pressure of 7.5 Tonne per meter at the base
• Safe management of loads like this is critical on a construction site
Key Activities during life of TW

• Temporary Works are suitably designed and construction methodology agreed and confirmed
• Site team construct Temporary Works to the approved Temporary Works Design
• Temporary Works Supervisor or Temporary Works Coordinator checks TW on site during
construction if required
• Once completed and prior to loading the TWS or TWC inspect the TW to ensure everything is as
per the approved design
• Any changes / alterations or observed differences are highlighted to the TWD designer if required
prior to loading
• Once the final constructed TW is confirmed as suitable to the design the TWC or TWS (if
authorized) can issue a Permit To Load (if required for the item of TW)
• Periodic inspections of the TW maybe required while in use depending on the TW and duration of
use
• Once the TW have completed their required task and they are no longer needed or loaded a
Permit To Unload (Strike) can be issued (if required for the item of TW)
• The TW can then be dismantled and removed from site
Support for the TWC in charge of the Temporary Works

• Following this Temporary Works Awareness course individuals should:-
• Have a better understanding of what Temporary Works are to BS 5975
• Understand the reasons for BS 5975 and the requirement of specific control of design and site
management of Temporary Works for safety, construction programme and construction cost
• Understand who is involved in Temporary Works and who are the key individuals
• Understand the importance of the correct Temporary Works Design and ensuring the design is
followed on site
• So from this the delegates will understand the Temporary Works Coordinator is the central contact
for Temporary Works on a Construction site and the importance of the TWC role
• To support the TWC on site and without undertaking the TWS or TWC course, delegates can be
aware of what good and bad Temporary Works look like so if anything of concern is observed they
can inform the relevant TWC on site to address any issues if required
Support for the TWC – Site Fencing, Hoarding

• All TW to be erected to the approved design / drawing and
this can be confirmed by discussing with the TWC or TWS
in charge of those TW
• Things to possibly note visually could include:-
• Consistent layout and suitable foundations or
counterweights present
• Everything in a good state of repair and suitably stable
Support for the TWC – Formwork, Falsework

• Consistent layout, looks tidy and uniform
• Correct equipment used and not mixed unless design
specifies
• Correct number of clips connecting each panel
• Correct number of ties
• Correct use of components
• Stop end details look correct with correct Walers and
spacing's
• Etc.
Support for the TWC – Scaffold

• Scaffold Inspection Tag present and in date
• Consistent layout, looks tidy and uniform
• Correct equipment used and not mixed unless design
specifies
• Consistent bracing layout
• Correct number of ties
• Suitable foundations
• Etc.
Information on Temporary Works
• The Temporary Works Forum

• https://www.twforum.org.uk/hom
• Any Temporary Works Supplier / Manufacturer
• Construction Industry Research and Information Association (CIRIA) Publications
• National Access and Scaffolding Confederation (NASC) Publications

Any Questions ?
Feedback Forms
APPENDIX L
Draft Temporary Works Procedure - Client
Attached is a draft Construction Engineering procedure in line with the requirements of

BS5975:2019. This procedure uses the term “Temporary Works” so that it is useable with
the current industry terminology. This procedure is a draft and not the finished article and
can be edited with information removed as required to reduce the size of the document

Ronan O’Driscoll
LOGO Revision 01

CLIENTS TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Company Document
CLIENTS
TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Revision 01
Date of Issue
Document No. X X X X X XX
DRAFT
Status UNDER REVIEW
APPROVED
Next Review Date Y ear ly R ev ie w
Approver Main Board Director
Technical Reviewer
Owner & Author Clients DI
Document Control
Version Purpose Amendment By Date
LOGO Revision 01

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1. scope........................................................................................................................................ 3
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................................................................... 3
1.3. DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS ................................................................................................ 4
2. ORGANISATION AND REPONSIBILITY ..................................................................................... 5
2.1. TW Management - TYPICAL INTERFACES BETWEEN PARTIES .......................................... 5
2.2. The Temporary Works Process ................................................................................................ 6
3. temporary works management - organisations procedures .......................................................... 7
3.1. organisations designated individual .......................................................................................... 7
3.1.1. Clients Designated Individual ................................................................................................ 8
3.1.2. principal designers Designated Individual ............................................................................. 9
3.1.3. permanent works designer Designated Individual ............................................................... 10
3.1.4. client appointed contractor Designated Individual ............................................................... 11
3.1.5. Principal contractor Designated Individual........................................................................... 11
3.1.6. PC APPOINTED contractor Designated Individual .............................................................. 12
3.1.7. Other Designated Individuals .............................................................................................. 13
4. Temporary works guidance ........................................................................................................ 14
4.1. Temporary works Definition .................................................................................................... 14
4.2. Aims of a Temporary works procedure ................................................................................... 14
4.3. Control of Temporary works risk ............................................................................................. 15
Table 1 – Implementation risk classes for Temporary Works and examples of mitigation measures
...................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.4. design of Temporary works .................................................................................................... 18
4.4.1. design brief ......................................................................................................................... 18
4.4.2. design Check ...................................................................................................................... 19
Table 2 – Categories of design check in Temporary Works ........................................................... 21
5. organisation and responsibility ................................................................................................... 22
5.1. Typical TW Organisation where the PC is Appointed by the client .......................................... 22
5.2. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE client appoints a sub-contractor to manage their
own tw............................................................................................................................................... 23
6. client Temporary works requirements......................................................................................... 24
LOGO Revision 01

1. INTRODUCTION
The procedure establishes and defines the minimum and essential requirements for the safe
planning, organisation, coordination, supervision and execution of all Temporary Works undertaken
by the Client.
This will allow the Client to understand, control or mitigate risks associated with Temporary Works.
This document is to be read in conjunction with any requirements of BS 5975 and the CDM
Regulations.
BS 5975 notes that today very little construction work is carried out by the main contractor / Principal
Contractor (PC) and the latest revision of the Construction Design and Management Regulations
2015 (CDM) recognises this fact. As a result, the latest revision of BS 5975 takes this into account
and allows contractors and sub-contractors to plan, manage and monitor their own work if they have
the skills, knowledge, experience and organizational capability. The PC’s Temporary Works Co-
ordinator (PC’s TWC) has overall responsibility for all Temporary Works on site, including those of
contractors appointed by the Client.
1.1. SCOPE
This Temporary Works Procedure is applicable to all Temporary Works as a result of any construction
proposed by the Client.
The guidance provided in this procedure are in line with the requirements of the Construction Design
and Management (CDM) Regulations 2015 – Regulation 4 and BS 5975:2019 Code of Practice for
Temporary Works Procedures and the Permissible Stress Design of Falsework.
BS 5975:2019 states during the conceptual or design stage, either the Client’s or the PD's Temporary
Works procedures should be used, but once the PC is appointed, the PC's Temporary Works
procedures should take precedence over the Client's or the PD's.
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY
The Designated Individual (DI) is a senior person with responsibility for establishing, implementing
and maintaining a procedure for the control of Temporary Works for that organisation.
The Client DI should be responsible for ensuring that any organizations that they employ or
recommend to be employed have adequate Temporary Works procedures if they are designing,
carrying out and/or managing Temporary Works.
LOGO Revision 01

1.3. DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS

CDM - Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015
CIRIA - Construction industry research and information association
BS 5975 - BS 5975 : 2019 – Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the
DI - Designated Individual
PD - Principal Designer
PC - Principal Contractor
TWC - Temporary Works Coordinator
PWD - Permanent Works Designer
TWD - Temporary Works Designer
TWDC - Temporary Works Design Checker
TWS - Temporary Works Supervisor
For other definitions, see BS5975
Key Symbols
- Alert – This symbol identifies critical information that must be understood and
followed
- Document Reference – This symbol identifies reference documentation
- Mandatory Action Required – This symbol requires an action to be taken by a

contractor or individual
- Prohibited – Items or actions that are not permitted by the Client
LOGO Revision 01

2. ORGANISATION AND REPONSIBILITY

2.1. TW MANAGEMENT - TYPICAL INTERFACES BETWEEN PARTIES
Ronan O’Driscoll
LOGO Revision 01

2.2. THE TEMPORARY WORKS PROCESS
Appoint a Principal Designer Ensure the PD, PWD and PC

Create a Temporary Works (PD), Permanent Works have a Temporary Works
Procedure for the Client Designer (PWD) and Principal Procedure in place and it is
Contractor (PC) being implemented
Clients Designated Individual Client Clients Designated Individual
Ensure the PD & PWD have Identification of any Assets

Identification of any
followed the CDM Principles of belonging to the Client or Third
requirement for reviews or
Prevention and have a fully Party that might be affected by
formal acceptance by the Client
workable construction solution and TWs
Clients Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual
Any requirement to provide Any requirement for Client

Process for the Client to accept
information to the PD to enable Specified hold points for TWs
or not accept a TW proposal or
the PD and/or PC to design, should be highlighted and
hold point
construct and remove TWs defined
Temporary Works Process
Clients Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual Clients Designated Individual
Ensure all parties whoever they are Ensure all parties whoever they All TWs and PWs coordinated
employed by are aware the PD are employed by are aware the and constructability reviews
TWs Procedure is to be followed PC TWs Procedure is to be undertaken before Construction
until Construction begins followed during Construction begins following CDM Guidelines
Clients Designated Individual Clients Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual
KEY
All TWs information and fully Information supplied by the PD
workable construction solutions used to develop Temporary
handed to the PC DI Works on site Responsibility
PD’s Designated Individual PC’s Designated Individual
NOTE:
When reading this flowchart refer to the specific requirements within this standard.
LOGO Revision 01

3. TEMPORARY WORKS MANAGEMENT - ORGANISATIONS

PROCEDURES
The following organisations should have Temporary Works procedures covering roles, responsibilities
and appointments, all with the intention of removing ambiguity and making the PC’s overall
a) Clients
d) Contractors / Sub-Contractors / Specialist Contractors (including demolition contractors) all of
which manage their own Temporary Works. This includes third-party employed contractors,
such as utility providers and their contractors
e) Temporary Works Designers and Permanent Works Designers
3.1. ORGANISATIONS DESIGNATED INDIVIDUAL
The Designated Individual (DI) is a senior person within an organisation with responsibility for
establishing, implementing and maintaining a procedure for the control of Temporary Works for that
organisation.
The DI should have both responsibility and authority for establishing and maintaining a procedure to
control those aspects of Temporary Works (and associated risks) for which the organizations have
requirement for Temporary Works or involved in Temporary Works and should appoint a Designated
Individual (DI).
The DI should be responsible for ensuring that any organizations that they employ or recommend to
be employed have adequate Temporary Works procedures if they are designing, carrying out and/or
managing Temporary Works.
LOGO Revision 01

3.1.1. CLIENTS DESIGNATED INDIVIDUAL
The Clients DI should establish a Temporary Works Procedure to cover items such as: -
• Ensuring the PD and PC and any other organization directly employed by the client should
have in place Temporary Works procedures in accordance with BS 5975.
• The client should provide all necessary information to enable the PD and/or the PC to design,
construct and remove Temporary Works and, where necessary, protect any assets which
belong to the client or a third party.
• This information could include site investigation information (including that for the design of
working platforms), computer models (including BIM [building information modelling] and/or
design package input) to allow the Temporary Works Designer to input the new information in
relation to the Temporary Works, information on the assets which might be affected by the
Temporary Works (drawings, results of any invasive investigations of the assets and any
calculations which might be available).
• Any organization directly employed by the client should be informed that they should adhere to
the PD's or PC's procedures unless their own procedures are approved by the PD’s DI or PC’s
DI, as appropriate, for use. Once appointed the PC’s procedure takes precedence over the
Client or PD’s Temporary Works Procedures.
• The arrangements should include provisions for the organization's management to both liaise
with and be responsible to the PC’s TWC on matters related to their Temporary Works input.
The Client will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works Procedure as per the
requirements of BS 5975
The Client DI will ensure the Principal Designer (PD), Principal Contractor (PC) and any Client
appointed Contractor has suitable Temporary Works Procedures and DI’s appointed as
required
The Client will ensure all parties on site are aware of their requirements to liaise and be
responsible to the PC’s TWC
LOGO Revision 01

3.1.2. PRINCIPAL DESIGNERS DESIGNATED

INDIVIDUAL
The Principal Designers DI should establish a Temporary Works Procedure to cover items such as: -
• Ensuring there is a coherent construction method which identifies all key temporary conditions
and Temporary Works. This will be established through pre-construction constructability
reviews with the Permanent Works Designers.
• Ensure the finally agreed construction method, sequence and Temporary Works are not
deleterious to the Permanent Works Design.
• Ensure designers follow the recommendations of the relevant clauses within BS 5975 and the
CDM Regulations.
• The PD shares information with designers, and the PC’s TWC and TWC, that might influence
the design of Temporary Works or the selection of construction methods.
• Ensure designers take account of the construction phase plan.
• The PD retains appropriate information relating to Temporary Works that would be required for
the Health and Safety file; this should include information on construction method or sequence
including associated Temporary Works which might impact on future maintenance or
deconstruction; this information should be obtained from the PC’s TWC.
The Principal Designer (PD) will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works Procedure as
per the requirements of BS 5975
Prior to construction work on site the PD will ensure there is a coherent construction
method which identifies all key temporary conditions and Temporary Works and is not
deleterious to the Permanent Works Design. This is all communicated by the PD to the PC’s
TWC
LOGO Revision 01

3.1.3. PERMANENT WORKS DESIGNER DESIGNATED

INDIVIDUAL
The Permanent Works Designers DI should establish a Temporary Works Procedure to address the
buildability of the Permanent Works and identify, and make provision for, any Temporary Works and
temporary conditions required by their design and their assumed method of construction. This should
include:
• A proposed method and sequence of construction which should have no adverse effects on
the Permanent Works,
• Deciding on and communicating the intended construction process, giving particular attention
to new or unfamiliar processes.
• Considering the stability of existing structures and partially constructed/erected/ demolished
structures and, where this is not immediately obvious, providing information to show how
temporary stability could be achieved.
• Identifying where standard industry details are not suitable, and where detailed structural
design is to be carried out by others.
• Considering the effect of the proposed work on the integrity of adjacent/existing structures,
particularly during refurbishment.
• Ensuring that the overall design takes account of Temporary Works which might be needed,
no matter who is to develop those works.
• Ensuring that consideration has been given to the availability of sufficient space required to
construct or maintain the structure.
• Clearly stating loads for which the structure has been designed including the proposed plant
installation loads and plant routes.
• Permanent Works Designers Temporary Works procedures should clearly show how the
Permanent Works Designer will create and communicate an outline Temporary Works
Schedule of the Temporary Works they foresee being required in their design. This
Temporary Works Schedule can be used by the PC TWC to create the Temporary Works
Register for the project.
The designer should liaise with the PD to provide all necessary information relevant to any Temporary
Works or temporary condition(s) to the PC through the PD.
Permanent Workers Designer (PWD) will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works
Procedure as per the requirements of BS 5975
PWD Temporary Works procedures should clearly show how the Permanent Works Designer
will create and communicate an outline Temporary Works Schedule of the Temporary
Works they foresee being required in their design. This Temporary Works Schedule can be
used by the PC TWC to create the Temporary Works Register for the project.
LOGO Revision 01

3.1.4. CLIENT APPOINTED CONTRACTOR DESIGNATED

INDIVIDUAL
The Client Appointed Contractor DI should establish a Temporary Works Procedure to cover items
such as: -
• Ensuring the client contractor’s roles and responsibilities are the same as those for the
contractor appointed by the PC.
• The client contractor’s DI should be aware of the responsibilities and procedural
requirements of their contract and the interfaces required with the PC DI and PC TWC on
site.
• The PC’s DI has a responsibility to ensure the client contractor’s procedures are satisfactory
and accepted before the contractor is allowed to work on the PC controlled site.
• If the client's contractor does not have their own procedures, or they are deemed not
acceptable by the PC's DI, then they should be required to work to the temporary works
procedures of the PC.
• The client contractors TWC on site has to report to the PC TWC.
Client Appointed contractors will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works Procedure as
3.1.5. PRINCIPAL CONTRACTOR DESIGNATED

INDIVIDUAL
The Principal Contractor DI should establish a Temporary Works Procedure to cover items such as :-
• The contractor's procedure should ensure that responsibilities are properly allocated and
communication arrangements established. The key items are:
a) responsibilities should be clearly defined;
b) all instructions should be clear and complete; and
c) documented records of responsibilities allocated, instructions given and actions taken
should be maintained.
• The main items for which responsibility should be established are as follows:
a) the appointment of a TWC and, where appropriate, a TWS;
b) the limits of authority of the TWC, any TWC appointed by contractors other than the PC
and TWS, where appointed, including any authorization to release hold points, such as
permits to load (bring into use) or unload (take out of use) the Temporary Works;
LOGO Revision 01

c) the preparation of an adequate design brief, including where appropriate the establishing
of the scheme concept and risk classification;
d) the design, including calculations, sketches, drawings, specification, preparation of a risk
assessment and where necessary a designer’s construction sequence for the Temporary
Works scheme;
e) the independent checking of the design; this should include the design check category;
f) the issue of a design/design check certificate or other suitable form of record, where
appropriate;
g) obtaining acceptance of the Temporary Works scheme directly from third parties as
required;
h) the procurement of materials in accordance with the TWD’s specification;
i) the control of erection, safe use, maintenance and dismantling on site;
j) the checking of the erected Temporary Works, and control of their use, maintenance and
dismantling, in stages where necessary, to ensure compliance with the design and any
hold points; and
k) where necessary, the issue of a formal “permit to load” or permit to proceed.
• Those who are allocated responsibilities should have the authority to take and enforce
decisions, including to stop the works.
• The PC has ultimate responsibility for all work on site, irrespective of how the work is
procured/managed commercially.
• The PC’s procedures or others approved by the PC's DI should take precedence during the
construction phase.
Principal Contractors will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works Procedure as per the
3.1.6. PC APPOINTED CONTRACTOR DESIGNATED

INDIVIDUAL
The PC Appointed Contractor DI should establish a Temporary Works Procedure to cover items such
as: -
• The Contractors procedure is to detail how approval will be sought and granted from the PC
on site.
• How the contractor is to interact with the PC’s TWC on site.
• In addition to the procedural items outlined applicable to all contractors, the contractor should
be aware that the PC checks the capability of any contractor to plan and implement any
Temporary Works which might be required under their contract.
LOGO Revision 01

• The contractor should ensure that the PC's DI is provided with a copy of their Temporary
Works procedure, and associated evidence, to verify that it is in accordance with the
recommendations of this British Standard.
• Where the contractor is appointed to both manage and design the Temporary Works, in
addition to other recommendations, the organization's procedure should cover the
management of any Temporary Works Design process, and include measures for ensuring the
roles of TWD, TWC and TWS are carried out by competent individuals and how they interact
with the PC's TWC.
• A Temporary Works protocol should be established, at the start of the contract, between the
PC's TWC and the TWC, which defines the appropriate degree of control, by each party, to
ensure the co-ordination and safe execution of the Temporary Works on the project.
• The protocol might include who is to review design briefs, permitted signatories, etc.
• The protocol should include how the interfaces between the contractor's Temporary Works
with other Temporary Works and Permanent Works should be managed in order that none
has an adverse effect on the other.
• The contractor’s procedure should recognize that the PC has ultimate responsibility for all
work on site, irrespective of how the work is procured/managed commercially.
• The contractor’s procedure for the management of Temporary Works should address the type,
scale and complexity of their work/projects so that the associated foreseeable risks can be
identified, classified and effectively managed.
• The PC contractors TWC on site has to report to the PC TWC.
PC Appointed contractors will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works Procedure as

3.1.7. OTHER DESIGNATED INDIVIDUALS
The other DI’s should be directly under the control of the PC DI and have relevant DI’s and
Temporary Works Procedures in place, these include: -
• Other Designers Appointed by the PC

• Temporary Works Designers Appointed by either the PC or PC Appointed Contractors
• Temporary Works Suppliers Appointed by either the PC or PC Appointed Contractors
LOGO Revision 01

4. TEMPORARY WORKS GUIDANCE

4.1. TEMPORARY WORKS DEFINITION
Temporary Works can be described as providing an “engineered solution” that is used to support or
protect either an existing structure or the permanent works during construction, or to support an item
of plant or equipment, or the vertical sides or side-slopes of an excavation during construction
operations on site or to provide access. It is used to control stability, strength, deflection, fatigues,
geotechnical effects and hydraulic effects within defined limits.
This description of Temporary Works includes, but is not limited to:
a) Supporting or protecting either an existing structure or the permanent works during
construction, modification or demolition;
b) Provision of stability to the permanent structure during construction, pre-weakening or
demolition (e.g. propping, shoring, façade retention, etc.);
c) Securing a site, or providing access to a site or workplace on site or segregation of pedestrian
and vehicles (e.g. hoarding, haul roads, fencing, stairs);
d) Supporting or restraining plant, materials or equipment, including stability of water-borne craft;
e) Provision of earthworks or slopes to an excavation or supports to the side or roof of an
excavation or supports or diversions to watercourse during construction operations;
f) Providing a safe platform for work activity on land or water (e.g. jetty, scaffolding, edge
protection or towers);
g) Providing measures to control noise, dust, debris fume, air quality, groundwater or any site
discharges during construction or demolition (e.g. screens, bunds, de-watering, demolition
debris);
h) Providing protection or support to services; and
i) Facilitating testing (e.g. pressure testing, pre-demolition floor load capacity testing).
4.2. AIMS OF A TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
One of the main aims of the Temporary Works procedure and the method of work adopted, should be
to minimise the chance of errors being made, and to maximise the chance of errors being discovered
if they are made.
There should be effective communication of information and requirements between all levels of the
construction organisation involved, whether they are concerned primarily with the Permanent Works
or the Temporary Works.
implemented.
Organisations that may be involved with Temporary Works and who require a Temporary Works
Procedure include Clients, Designers, Permanent Works Designers, Temporary Works Designers,
Principal Designers, Contractors, Principal Contractors, Sub-Contractors, Specialist Contractors,
Third-Party Contractors and Suppliers / Manufacturers.
LOGO Revision 01

4.3. CONTROL OF TEMPORARY WORKS RISK
BS 5975 Clause 6.1.3 relates to what is referred to as implementation risk and is not to be confused
with the category of design check. The design check category would remain the same for a design but
when the design is to be implemented in different locations, etc. then the implementation risk may
change.
It is stated the risks associated with Temporary Works can be considered to arise from: -
• Their design
Design risks relate to the complexity of the design and the mitigation is addressed through the
selection of the category of design check.
Construction, use and removal risks relate to such aspects as workmanship, materials, experience
and manner of use. These are termed execution risks.
Consequences of failures risks relate to the location of the Temporary Works, and what might be
affected by the failure.
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High
To assess the risks associated with Temporary Works on a project, each item of Temporary Works
should be classified and appropriate procedures adopted to control risk.
Each organisation involved in Temporary Works should determine the level of control for each risk
class of Temporary Works depending on: -

• Competence
• Location of the particular Temporary Works
• Consequence of the failure of the Temporary Works
The approach to be taken when managing risk under each of the implementation classes should be
defined in the company Temporary Works procedures.
Implementation risk classification should be done in consultation with other relevant parties, such as
the construction team or the design team.
Where there is an interface of Temporary Works with another party / contractor the Principal
Contractor (PC) TWC on site should be consulted by the relevant organisation and be responsible for
the risk classification. Where there is no interface the TWC of the relevant organisation is responsible
for the risk classification.
Where there is no interface the TWC of the relevant organisation is responsible for the risk classification.
LOGO Revision 01

Where there is an interface of Temporary Works with another party / contractor the
Principal Contractor (PC) TWC on site should be consulted by the relevant organisation’s
TWC and be responsible for the risk classification
Where there is no interface the TWC of the relevant organisation is responsible for the risk
classification
LOGO Revision 01

Table 1 – Implementation risk classes for Temporary Works and examples of mitigation
measures
Implementation Risk Permits required Other control measures
risk class
failure.
Inspection by site team, not
• No impact if failure occurs. necessarily recorded on the
temporary works register and might
not require a design brief.
Low • Minor structures with high Permits can be Follow company procedures, including
levels of robustness. signed by:- inspection and test plan
• Very experienced workforce. • a TWC

or
• Failure is entirely within the
• an authorized
site, of low impact.
TWS.
Medium • Conventional Permits can be Follow company procedures, including
structures. Conventional signed by:- inspection and test plan
construction methods. • the PC’s TWC
• Relatively or
experienced workforce. • an authorized
TWC.
fatality or significant economic
loss. Would not initiate
secondary events.
High • Schemes with dependency Permits can be Follow company procedures, including
on critical structural details, signed by:- inspection and test plan
with little or no redundancy, or • the PC’s TWC PC’s DI to ensure the scheme is
with stability reliant on critical or reviewed, e.g. HAZOP or peer review.
elements.
• an authorized
• Schemes with complex TWC.
interfaces where various items
of temporary works impact on
one another
• Unfamiliar processes
or equipment.
in its own right, or if minor might
initiate a secondary or chain
reaction of major or catastrophic
events.
NOTE 1 The PC's TWC agrees the signatory for each permit applicable to the item of temporary works.
NOTE 2 It is outside the scope of BS 5975 to classify particular temporary works.
LOGO Revision 01

4.4. DESIGN OF TEMPORARY WORKS

The design of Temporary Works should be undertaken with reasonable professional skill and care.
The Permanent Works Designer should ensure their design:-
• Has considered the risks involved in the buildability of the structure

• The Permanent Works Designer has taken account of the methods of construction and the
space required for the Temporary Works
• The Permanent Works Designer should provide the relevant information, particularly the
significant residual risks involved in its construction
• The Permanent Works design output has to clearly communicate any particular sequence in
which the works should be built, or for any particular feature (such as stiffness or point
support) in the Temporary Works scheme. This should be clearly illustrated or communicated
in the Permanent Works Design output.
During construction if the TWC responsible for the work wishes to depart from the Temporary Works
and construction requirements the Permanent Works designer has communicated or illustrated the
TWC should confirm with the Permanent Works Designer that the change is acceptable.
If the Permanent Works Designer has not communicated or illustrated any particular sequence or
requirements for the Temporary Works or not provided any particular significant residual risks
involved. It will prove very difficult for a TWC to communicate a change to the Permanent Works or
know if there is a change to the proposed construction sequence that the Permanent Works Designer
has allowed for in their design.
Also if the PWD has not communicated this they have not fulfilled their obligations under CDM
Regulation 9.
It is noted a designer includes anyone who specifies a design, design standard or design method, alters
a design, or specifies a particular method of work or material, or arranges for or instructs someone else
to do so. The designer should justify their requirements by identifying the associated risks and how they
might be mitigated
4.4.1. DESIGN BRIEF

Temporary Works Design Briefs and notes should be prepared to serve as the basis for subsequent
decisions, design work, calculations, drawings and design checks. All concerned with the construction
should contribute towards the preparation of the Temporary Works Design Brief.
The brief should include all data relevant to the design of the Temporary Works including residual
risks introduced by the methodology chosen by the site team or by the PWD. It should be prepared
early enough to allow sufficient time for all subsequent activities, i.e. design, design check,
procurement of equipment and construction/erection of the scheme.
The preparation of the brief might involve relatively little work for the smaller scheme, but for major
work such as the construction of a large bridge or deep excavation a large amount of information
might be needed; the TWC should ensure that sufficient and comprehensive information is collated
before design work can commence or a programme for the construction of the temporary works can
be drawn up.
LOGO Revision 01

A Temporary Works Designer should be provided with a design brief, irrespective of whether they are
from the construction organisation or not.
4.4.2. DESIGN CHECK
BS 5975 states prior to the commencement of the construction work, the proposed Temporary Works
design should be checked for concept, adequacy, correctness and compliance with the requirements
of the design brief. This check should be carried out by a competent person or persons, independent
from those responsible for the design. The ability of the TWDC and their remoteness or independence
from the TWD should be greater where new ideas are incorporated or the Temporary Works are
complex.
When the design has been completed, or is advanced to an appropriate stage, the design brief should
be provided to the organization/individual who is to carry out the design check, together with the
relevant design statement, drawings and specification and associated information.
The responsibility for stating the independence of the design check category should be established at
an early stage as it can affect the level and quantity of design output.
It should require input/advice from the designer. The check category is unlikely to be known at the
time of writing the original register, but should be included when determined.
Where different organizations, or individuals, have prepared different parts of a design, the category
of design check should be appropriate to the part of the design being checked. For example: -
• If a proprietary supplier is carrying out a falsework design for their equipment, and stability is
assumed by being fixed at the head to the Permanent Work (i.e. top restrained), the check on
the falsework would be Category 1 but the check that the structure is able to resist the applied
horizontal load might be Category 2.
On completion of the design and design check, a certificate should be issued for Category 2 and
Category 3 checks and, depending on the organization's procedures, might also be required for a
Category 1 check.
• The designer
The package of Temporary Works design information issued to the TWC should include this
certificate.
LOGO Revision 01

Neither the designer nor the design checker’s calculations form part of the design compliance items
listed on the signed design certificate.
Temporary Works design check categories can be developed by each organisation’s procedures to
suit their particular range and scope of work.
Design checks should be undertaken in accordance with one of the categories given in Table 2
The design check categories relate to the level of independence of the design check and are not
related to the classification of risk associated with implementation listed in Table 1.
Implementation risk in Temporary Works is classified as very low, low, medium or high. This is used
to establish the management level required, not the design check category.
It is noted for Category 0 Temporary Works Design Check: -
conditions
• The independence of the check is established by the person selecting the standard solution
obtaining approval from a second competent member of either the site or design team
• The degree of formality would be determined by the organization.
• The check should include verification both that the simple design suits the site conditions and
that relevant technical information has been interpreted correctly
• The degree of formality would be determined by the organization
It is noted for Category 2 and Category 3 Temporary Works Design Check: -
• The checker should carry out the check without reference to the designer’s calculations
• The checker should be supplied the design brief, including its associated information, and the
design output
LOGO Revision 01

Table 2 – Categories of design check in Temporary Works

Checker
include: formwork; falsework; undertaken using simple carried out by another
publications.

considerable degree of individual not involved
excavation support using sheet
piles, for foundations, for interpretation of loading or in the design and
structural steelwork soils’ information is not consulted by the
connections, for reinforced required before the design designer.
concrete. Designs where
of the foundation or
Works (e.g. top restrained is carried out.
falsework).
complex sequences of moving
significant departures from organization and
the Temporary Works or standards, novel methods should include an
Permanent Works. It also of analysis or considerable overall check to assure
LOGO Revision 01

5. ORGANISATION AND RESPONSIBILITY

5.1. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC IS APPOINTED BY THE CLIENT
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC
TWS TWS
PC PC
Site Team Site Team

On Site On Site
Ronan O’Driscoll
LOGO Revision 01

5.2. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE CLIENT APPOINTS A SUB-

CONTRACTOR TO MANAGE THEIR OWN TW
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Self Delivering
TWS
TWC Site Team
Temporary Works Supervisor Temporary Works
TWS On Site

On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
LOGO Revision 01

6. CLIENT TEMPORARY WORKS REQUIREMENTS
In relation to Temporary Works the Client Designated Individual will: -
• Ensure the PD and PC and any other organization directly employed by the client have in place a
Temporary Works procedure in accordance with the recommendations of this BS 5975.
• Ensure that the PD's and PC's procedure(s) for the control of Temporary Works are being
implemented.
o Implementation can be checked either by using the client’s own staff during the contract,
by using a consultant or an independent third-party audit and/or certification scheme.
• Ensure any assets belonging to the client or third party that might be affected by any Temporary
Works should be identified.
• Clarify if there are any requirement for review or formal acceptance of the Temporary Works by
the client, including design brief and/or design statement and/or design output should be defined.
• All necessary information has been provided to enable the PD and/or the PC to design, construct
and remove Temporary Works and, where necessary, protect any assets which belong to the
client or a third party.
o This information could include site investigation information (including that for the design
of working platforms), computer models (including BIM [building information modelling]
and/or design package input) to allow the Temporary Works Designer to input the new
information in relation to the Temporary Works, information on the assets which might be
affected by the Temporary Works (drawings, results of any invasive investigations of the
assets and any calculations which might be available).
• Ensure any requirement for client-specified hold points for Temporary Works, including signing of
an acceptance certificate to release any hold point (as a permit to proceed), are defined.
• This procedure should define the actions to be taken in the event that a client does not accept a
TW proposal, or withholds or delays the release of a hold point.
The agreed contract arrangement will dictate this and will not be known until the
contract arrangement is known
• Any other constraints or criteria, performance or otherwise, is to be defined and clarified to the
Client.
The agreed contract arrangement will dictate this and will not be known until the
contract arrangement is known
• When the Client appoints an organisation other than the PD or PC that are involved in Temporary
Works the additional Clients responsibilities are as follows:-
o Any organization directly employed by the client should be informed that they should
adhere to the PD's or PC's procedures unless their own procedures are approved by the
PD’s DI or PC’s DI, as appropriate, for use.
LOGO Revision 01

o The arrangements should include provisions for the organization's management to both
liaise with and be responsible to the PC’s TWC on matters related to their Temporary
Works input.
o A Client assessment of:-

i. The contractor’s procedures
ii. Competence of contractor
iii. The contractor’s designer and proposals for design checking
iv. Competence of any checking organization;
o Acknowledgement that the appointed PC has ultimate decision on:-

i. Design check category
ii. Construction risk category etc.;
o The client will not place commercial or contractual constraints on the PC's ultimate
responsibility; and
o Acceptance that the PC appoints a PC's TWC and that the PC's TWC or PC's TWS
(subject to limits of authority) can be the counter signatory on permits.
APPENDIX M
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Principal Designer


Ronan O’Driscoll
PLACED HERE Revision 01
Company Document
PRINCIPAL DESIGNER TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Company Document
PRINCIPAL DESIGNER
Revision 01
Date of Issue
DRAFT
Status UNDER REVIEW
APPROVED
Technical Reviewer
Document Control
Company Document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1. scope........................................................................................................................................ 4
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................................................................... 4
3.1.2. principal designers Designated Individual ........................................................................... 10
...................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.4.1. design brief ......................................................................................................................... 19
4.4.2. Temporary Works Design Guidance ................................................................................... 20
4.4.3. choice of temporary works solution ..................................................................................... 21
4.4.4. design Check ...................................................................................................................... 22
4.4.4.1. Resolution of Queries Rasied by the design Checker ...................................................... 26
4.4.2. design alterations ................................................................................................................ 27
5.1. typical TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC IS APPOINTED BY THE CLIENT.................. 28
5.2. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE client appoints a sub-contractor to mange their
own tw............................................................................................................................................... 29
6. permanent works designers ....................................................................................................... 30
Company Document
7. temporary works designers ........................................................................................................ 31

8. principal designer Temporary works requirements ..................................................................... 32
Company Document
1. INTRODUCTION
by the Principal Designer.
This will allow the Principal Designer to understand, control or mitigate risks associated with
Temporary Works.
Regulations.
1.1. SCOPE
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY
The Designers' DI should establish a procedure describing how the main items for which the designer
has responsibility should be managed.
Company Document

Key Symbols
followed

Company Document

Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document


Any requirement to provide Any requirement for Client

Process for the Client to accept
information to the PD to enable Specified hold points for TWs
or not accept a TW proposal or
the PD and/or PC to design, should be highlighted and
hold point
construct and remove TWs defined
Clients Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual Clients Designated Individual
Ensure all parties whoever they are Ensure all parties whoever they All TWs and PWs coordinated
employed by are aware the PD are employed by are aware the and constructability reviews
TWs Procedure is to be followed PC TWs Procedure is to be undertaken before Construction
until Construction begins followed during Construction begins following CDM Guidelines
Clients Designated Individual Clients Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual
KEY
NOTE:
Company Document

PROCEDURES
a) Clients
organisation.
Individual (DI).
Company Document
required
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
CDM Regulations.
TWC
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
include:
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
such as: -
site.

INDIVIDUAL
Company Document
Works scheme;
appropriate;
required;
hold points; and
construction phase.

INDIVIDUAL
as: -
on site.
Company Document
with the PC's TWC.


Company Document

debris);
if they are made.
implemented.
Company Document
change.
• Their design
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High

• Competence
Company Document
classification
Company Document
measures
risk class
failure.

or
• an authorized
TWS.
• Relatively or
TWC.
secondary events.
elements.
• an authorized
one another
or equipment.

events.
Company Document


might be mitigated
4.4.1. DESIGN BRIEF

be drawn up.
Company Document
4.4.2. TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN GUIDANCE
BS 5975 states those responsible for the design of Temporary Works scheme should base their
design on the previously agreed Design Brief.
The Temporary Works Designer should highlight any changes from the Design Brief to the TWC
responsible for the Temporary Works as soon as the changes are identified and the Design Brief can
be amended to reflect these changes if agreed.
All Temporary Works should be designed using global or partial factors appropriate to the situation,
taking material quality, certainty of loading and standard of execution of the temporary works into
account.
For permissible stress design the global factors incorporated into the allowable working loads given in
BS 5975 Section 3 should be used for general falsework and other Temporary Work design.
The loads supplied in BS 5975 Section 3 are suitable as unfactored service loads for Limit State
Design.
For limit state design of Temporary Works, the loads should be in accordance with BS EN 1991 1 6
and other relevant codes and industry best practice guidance.
BS EN 1991 1 6 states that the supported loads are to be treated as variable actions (imposed loads)
and not as permanent actions (dead loads). In some situations, geotechnical loads may be
considered as permanent actions instead of variable actions.
For the design of steel or aluminium elements of Temporary Works, the partial factor for material at
ultimate limit state should be a minimum of 1.1. Where Temporary Works are designed, manufactured
and assembled for a single use using similar details and execution standards as adopted for
Permanent Works then the designer may justify the use of a lower partial material factor.
The increased partial material factor for Temporary Works applications is used to take into account
reuse of equipment, increased tolerances, reduced stiffness at joints, reduced residual stiffness and
reduced redundancy compared with permanent works.
Temporary Works Design software should be used with caution to ensure all appropriate checks are
carried out.
Temporary Works systems should be designed with regard to ease and safety of erection and
dismantling. TWDs and suppliers should provide guidance on the implementation of their design.
Detailing of the Temporary Works structure should be such that any local failure within it does not
lead to the progressive collapse of the whole structure.
Where the design relies on specific site conditions, such as ground conditions, the TWC should be
provided with guidance on the identification of the soil type and environmental conditions such as
water level.
It is to be noted that the Temporary Works Designers calculations do not form part of the design
output.
Company Document
For complex schemes the Temporary Works Designer should brief the site team on the key elements
and hazards identified during the design process.
summarized separately from the design calculations in order that it can be available to the Temporary
Works Design Checker (TWDC). For complex schemes the information may be presented in the form
of a “design statement” which may also include: an idealized structure, method(s) of analysis, and the
version of computer software, if any, used.
For each Temporary Works design, the designer should take into account:
a. the structural strength and stiffness of the individual members and their connections to
transmit the applied forces safely including any p-delta or feedback effects;
b. the lateral stability of both individual members and the structure as a whole;
c. the resistance to overturning or rotational failure of the temporary works structure;
d. positional stability; and
e. the effects on the permanent works and its surroundings.
Within these five considerations, subsidiary considerations might be necessary to allow for the
different phases of construction and the varying stability and restraint conditions applied, including the
particular case where falsework is designed as top-restrained.
4.4.3. CHOICE OF TEMPORARY WORKS SOLUTION

alternatively, to proceed on the basis of a standard solution.
• No further structural calculations are necessary.
When selecting a standard solution, those responsible for making the final choice should ensure that
they understand and take full account of the limitations of these designs so that they are used only in
appropriate circumstances.
If a design office produces standard solutions to suit their materials or operations, then such designs
should: -
• Layout
• Loading
• Limitations
• Tolerances
• Lateral restraint requirements
• etc.
Those who select a particular standard solution should be aware that they have responsibilities and
duties as a designer under the CDM regulations.
Company Document
Provided the equipment is erected, used and operated within the limitations placed in the standard
solution, a TWC does not need to further verify the actual design calculations of the standard solution.
a. solution assumes that the equipment specified is used, without substitutions;
b. concept is acceptable for the location;
c. conditions of use and limitations on use are within the specified limits;
NOTE:- For trench support systems this includes verification that the ground conditions
(including groundwater level) are as specified for the equipment
d. assembly is erected to the expected tolerances;
e. solution is within the experience of the workforce and its supervision;
f. equipment is not damaged and does not show signs of excessive wear;
g. method of loading the system is as stated in the standard solution;
h. ancillary items, or additional temporary works (such as foundations), by others have been
designed and supplied as required; and
i. arrangement, prior to use, has been separately checked for compliance with the guidance
provided by the supplier or organization responsible for the standard solution.
4.4.4. DESIGN CHECK
complex.
Category 1 check.
Company Document
• The designer
certificate.
conditions
• The name of the Temporary Works Designer (TWD) and Temporary Works Design Checker
(TWDC) needs to be clear and visible
• A formal Design Check Certificate is not expected for a Cat 0 Design Check
design output
Company Document
• A formal Design Check Certificate is required for a Cat 2 & 3 Design Check
A Temporary Works Design Check certificate should:-

The certificate should be signed (electronic Signature is acceptable) by:-

• The designer
Company Document

Checker
publications.

falsework).
Temporary Works Coordinators will ensure that the design brief has all relevant information
and data that is pertinent to the design
Company Document
4.4.4.1. RESOLUTION OF QUERIES RASIED BY THE

DESIGN CHECKER
BS 5975 states in all categories of check the design checker should withhold signature of the design
check certificate until they are completely satisfied that the design output contains all necessary
information to allow the Temporary Works to be constructed without the site team having to develop it
further.
In addition, the design checker should be satisfied that the design output is in accordance with the
requirements of the design brief and has been produced in accordance with recognized engineering
principles, relevant British Standards and other appropriate specialist guidance.
The Design Checker should sign the Check Certificate only when the following is confirmed: -
• The Design Checker has confirmed the Design is suitable and correct and there is nothing
further required
• The Design Checker has confirmed the design output is suitable and sufficient for the site
team to construct on site and there is nothing further required to progress the work on site.
If the Temporary Works Design Checker has any queries on the design and prior to signing the Check
Certificate, they should identify areas in the design output where their calculations indicate an element
(including connections) might be overstressed or exceed the allowable load in a proprietary member.
The design checker should identify also any area where further or additional detail is required.
For Category O or Category 1 Design Check Queries should be raised directly with the designer and
resolved before the design output is issued as a certified design.
For Category 2 Design Check Queries should be prepared in a schedule by the Design Checker and
issued directly to the Temporary Works Designer with a copy of the query schedule sent to the TWC
for that work and copied to the PC’s TWC as appropriate. The query schedule should: -

The Temporary Works Designer should respond to the queries and provide additional and / or revised
details where necessary.

design outputs where necessary. The Temporary Works Designer should copy the schedule with
responses to the TWC and the PC’s TWC where appropriate and ensure it is issued to the design
checker.
The design checker should then review the schedule and annotate it to accept or reject the designer’s
response. When there is an impasse over particular queries the TWC for this work and the PC's TWC
as appropriate, after consultation with the client, should confirm whether the designer and design
Company Document
checker should discuss the outstanding query(ies) and how these discussions should be recorded.
The design checker should confirm all queries have been resolved and the designer should issue the
revised design output in order that the design and design check certificate can be signed by the
design checker.
For Category 3 designs and design checks the design parameters (loads, idealized structures, soil
parameters and design standards/guidance) should be identified in an AIP (Approved In Principle) or
similar document (design statement) prepared by the designer and agreed by the client’s technical
advisor before commencement of the design. In the event that the client does not appoint a technical
advisor, the Principal Designer (PD) should agree the AIP (design statement). The design statement
should form the basis for the design and checking and should assist in the resolution of queries.
4.4.2. DESIGN ALTERATIONS
BS 5975 states changes in the requirements of the design brief should be recorded in writing, with
reference to the original design brief, and issued to the designer. The designer should check the
proposals against the certified design and incorporate the requirement for these alterations into the
design and drawings.
If there is no significant change to the design, the designer should confirm the acceptability of the
proposals to the appropriate TWC.
Any alterations to the temporary works, proposed by the site team, should be referred to the TWC or
PC’s TWC as appropriate, who should contact the TWD for incorporation of the change into the
design.
Where the designer considers that the alteration is significant, the alteration should be referred to the
design checker. Any revised design or design check documentation should be recertified when
considered appropriate by the TWC or PC’s TWC as appropriate.
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC
TWS TWS
PC PC
Site Team Site Team

On Site On Site
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document

CONTRACTOR TO MANGE THEIR OWN TW
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Self Delivering
TWS
TWC Site Team
TWS On Site

On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
6. PERMANENT WORKS DESIGNERS

BS 5975 states Organizations carrying out Permanent and/or Temporary Works Designs should have
a DI to ensure that a Temporary Works procedure suitable to their organization is in place and
managed. The Designers' DI should establish a Temporary Works procedure describing how the main
items for which the designer has responsibility should be managed.
BS 5975 states Permanent Works Designers should address the buildability of the Permanent Works
and identify, and make provision for, any Temporary Works and temporary conditions required by
their design and their assumed method of construction. This should include:
a) A proposed method and sequence of construction which should have no adverse effects on the
Permanent Works;
b) Deciding on and communicating the intended construction process, giving particular attention to
new or unfamiliar processes;
c) Considering the stability of existing structures and partially constructed/erected/ demolished
temporary stability could be achieved;
d) Identifying where standard industry details are not suitable, and where detailed structural design
is to be carried out by others;
e) Considering the effect of the proposed work on the integrity of adjacent/existing structures,
particularly during refurbishment;
f) Ensuring that the overall design takes account of Temporary Works which might be needed, no
matter who is to develop those works;
g) Ensuring that consideration has been given to the availability of sufficient space required to
construct or maintain the structure; and
h) Clearly stating loads for which the structure has been designed including the proposed plant
The Designer of the permanent works should satisfy themselves that their assumed Temporary
Works have no adverse effects on the permanent works.
The Permanent Works Design will address the buildability of the Permanent Works. This includes any
assumed construction methods / sequences, Temporary Works requirements, loads to be either
imposed on or imposed by the Permanent Works and that all such requirements are clearly
communicated to NNB via the risk register & inclusion of SHE boxes on drawings.
During the design process the permanent works designers should be able to demonstrate they have
produced a high-level schedule of the Temporary Works they have allowed for in their designs when
assessing the constructability as highlighted in CDM, if possible this list can be passed to the
Temporary Works Coordinator via the Principal Designer to form the basis of the Temporary Works
Register for use on site. The designers risk assessments will be linked to this register as it shows the
control of risk on site for construction and can be used for the creation of design briefs.
The Permanent Works Designer will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works Procedure
as per the requirements of BS 5975
Company Document
The Permanent Works Designer will liaise with the Principal Designer (PD) to provide all
necessary information relevant to any Temporary Works or temporary condition(s) to the PC
TWC through the PD.
7. TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGNERS

The detailed role and responsibilities of the Temporary Works Designer are defined in BS 5975.
The Designers' DI should establish a Temporary Works Procedure describing how the main items for
which the designer has responsibility should be managed.
The respective NNB or Contractor Temporary Works Designer is responsible for the following:
• Reviewing adequacy of Design Briefs via a liaison with the Temporary Works Coordinator and
review of all drawings and other relevant information
• The design, including calculations, sketches, drawings, specification, preparation of a design
risk assessment and where necessary a designer’s construction sequence for the Temporary
Works scheme
• Carrying out checks of others designs
• The issue of a design check certificate (or similar), where appropriate
• It may be required that a Temporary Works Designer visit site for more complicated designs,
i.e. CAT 2 and CAT 3 designs, this is to be discussed and agreed with the Temporary Works
Coordinator as / if required
• Clearly communicate the design, in accordance with any agreed format, to the PC's TWC, or
TWC where appropriate. The design output includes: -
o The residual risks associated with the design;
o Any hold points required by the designer,
o And which criteria allow their release;
o Limitations of the use of the design;
o And/or an outline methodology on how the Temporary Works should be constructed
(where this is not obvious to a competent contractor);
o Data required by other designers interfacing with this design, for example loads on
foundations;
o A drawing or sketch clearly showing the Temporary Works as intended by the design
so any variation form the proposed design can be clearly observed and highlighted;
o Ensure that any areas of Temporary Works Design responsibility which are excluded
for whatever reason are clearly highlighted and communicated.
The Temporary Works Designer will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works Procedure
It is the responsibility of the Temporary Works Designer to ensure that all equipment
specified within the design is in accordance with the manufactures instructions
Company Document
8. PRINCIPAL DESIGNER TEMPORARY WORKS

REQUIREMENTS
In relation to Temporary Works the Principal Designer Designated Individual will: -
• Ensure all parties are aware that BS 5975 states during the conceptual or design stage, either the
Client’s or the PD's procedures should be used, but once the PC is appointed, the PC's procedures
should take precedence over the Client's or the PD's.
• Ensure the PD has in place a Temporary Works procedure in accordance with the
recommendations of this BS 5975 and appropriate to the type and complexity of work, and
associated risks, which the designer is to consider.
• Ensure sub-consultants should have adequate procedures for managing the Temporary Works
design.
• The Designated Individual, any Permanent Works Designers, any Temporary Works Designers,
Temporary Works Design Checkers, Principal Designers, etc. are to be clearly highlighted so all
parties are aware.
• The competency and relevant experience relating to Temporary Works required for the
Designated Individual, any Permanent Works Designers, any Temporary Works Designers,
Temporary Works Design Checkers, Principal Designers, etc. are to be clearly highlighted.
• How the Designated Individual, any Permanent Works Designers, any Temporary Works
Designers, Temporary Works Design Checkers, Principal Designers, etc. are assessed and
appointed are to be clearly highlighted.
• Ensure the Permanent Works Designer responds promptly and clearly to any request from the
PC or a contractor, appointed to manage part of the Temporary Works, for information or design
criteria, in respect of Temporary Works, to allow the TWD to complete the design and allow the
PC or other contractor to manage and discharge their responsibilities.
• The Principal Designer should liaise fully and clearly with all parties, initially with the TWC, but
this may be extended to cover other designers and/or design checkers.
• Ensure designers have the qualifications, skills, knowledge and experience required to carry out
the design and co-ordination roles and the passing/receiving of information relevant to any
Temporary Works.
• Ensure Design organizations verify the competence of both designers and checkers of
Temporary Works within their organization.
• Ensure designers should address the buildability of Permanent Works, Temporary Works, their
interfaces, their proposed methods of construction and any related design assumptions.
• Ensure designers apply the general principles of prevention to the identified risks, and highlight
any residual risks. Appropriate and proportionate information about the residual risks should be
provided to those who need it via the Principal Designer.
Company Document
• Unnecessary information (risks that a competent contractor could readily identify) can prevent the
clear communication of key messages.
• Ensure there is a coherent construction method which identifies all key temporary conditions and
Temporary Works.
• Ensure designers follow the recommendations of the relevant clauses within British Standard BS
5975 : 2019.
• Ensure designers share information with other designers, and the PC’s TWC and TWC, that
might influence the design of Temporary Works or the selection of construction methods;
• The process for requesting a design using a Design Brief needs to be clear and highlighted.
• If a designer will be required to prepare a design statement or Approval In Principle (AIP) or

equivalent this has to be clear and highlighted.
• The Principal Designer (PD) Temporary Works Procedure should highlight:-
o How the PD will undertake constructability reviews with the Permanent Works Designers to
establish the construction methods and any Temporary Works required.
o How the PD will assist the Permanent Works Designers creating a Temporary Works
Schedule of the Temporary Works required following the constructability reviews. This
information can be used by the TWC to create the Temporary Works Register for the
project.
o How the PD will share information with all parties.
o How the PD has confirmed the proposed construction sequence and chosen Temporary
Works supplied through constructability reviews with the Permanent Works Designer is the
safest Temporary Works solution possible at that time with the information available, i.e.
making clear what was known and assumed at that time.
• The Principal Designer must retain appropriate information relating to Temporary Works that
would be required for the Health and Safety file; this should include information on construction
method or sequence including associated Temporary Works which might impact on future
maintenance or deconstruction; this information should be obtained from the PC’s TWC.
• The Principal Designer can carry out the domestic client’s duties with respect to Temporary
Works, where these have been transferred to the Principal Designer.
APPENDIX N
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Permanent Works Designer


Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
PERMANENT WORKS DESIGNER TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Company Document
PERMANENT WORKS DESIGNER
Revision 01
Date of Issue
DRAFT
Status UNDER REVIEW
APPROVED
Technical Reviewer
Document Control
Company Document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1. scope........................................................................................................................................ 4
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................................................................... 4
...................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.4.1. design brief ......................................................................................................................... 19
4.4.4. design Check ...................................................................................................................... 22
4.4.4.1. Resolution of Queries RaIsed by the design Checker ...................................................... 26
5.1. typical TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC IS APPOINTED BY THE CLIENT.................. 28
own tw............................................................................................................................................... 29
Company Document

8. permanent works designer Temporary works requirements ....................................................... 32
Company Document
1. INTRODUCTION
by the Permanent Workers Designer.
This will allow the Permanent Works Designer to understand, control or mitigate risks associated with
Temporary Works.
Regulations.
1.1. SCOPE
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY
Company Document

Key Symbols
followed

Company Document

Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document


Any requirement to provide Ensure a fully workable

Communicate all residual
information to the PD to enable construction solution is
Construction Risks that could
the PD and/or PC to design, designed taking into account all
not be designed out to the PD
construct and remove TWs Temporary Works required
Clients Designated Individual Permanent Works Designer DI Permanent Works Designer DI
If required utilise the skills of a If required look at redesign of All TWs and PWs coordinated
Temporary Works specialist to fully Permanent Works to ensure a and constructability reviews
explore all design options fully workable construction undertaken before Construction
regarding Temporary Works solution begins following CDM Guidelines
PWD’s & PD’s Designated

Permanent Works Designer DI Permanent Works Designer DI
Individual
KEY
NOTE:
Company Document

PROCEDURES
a) Clients
organisation.
Individual (DI).
Company Document
required
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
CDM Regulations.
TWC
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
include:
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
such as: -
site.

INDIVIDUAL
Company Document
Works scheme;
appropriate;
required;
hold points; and
construction phase.

INDIVIDUAL
as: -
on site.
Company Document
with the PC's TWC.


Company Document

debris);
if they are made.
implemented.
Company Document
change.
• Their design
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High

• Competence
Company Document
classification
Company Document
measures
risk class
failure.

or
• an authorized
TWS.
• Relatively or
TWC.
secondary events.
elements.
• an authorized
one another
or equipment.
events.
Company Document


might be mitigated
4.4.1. DESIGN BRIEF

be drawn up.
Company Document
account.
Design.
carried out.
water level.
output.
Company Document

should: -
• Layout
• Loading
• Limitations
• Tolerances
• etc.
Company Document
4.4.4. DESIGN CHECK
complex.
Category 1 check.
Company Document
• The designer
certificate.
conditions
design output
Company Document


• The designer
Company Document

Checker
publications.

falsework).
Company Document
4.4.4.1. RESOLUTION OF QUERIES RAISED BY THE

DESIGN CHECKER
further.
further required


checker.
Company Document
design checker.
design.
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC
TWS TWS
PC PC
Site Team Site Team

On Site On Site
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Self Delivering
TWS
TWC Site Team
TWS On Site

On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document

Permanent Works;
Company Document
TWC through the PD.

Works scheme
foundations;
Company Document
8. PERMANENT WORKS DESIGNER TEMPORARY WORKS

REQUIREMENTS
In relation to Temporary Works the Permanent Workers Designer Designated Individual will: -
• Ensure the Designated Individual and any Permanent Works Designers are to be clearly
highlighted so all parties are aware.
• Ensure the PWD has in place a Temporary Works procedure in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 5975 and appropriate to the type and complexity of work, and associated
risks, which the designer is to consider.
• Ensure sub-consultants have adequate procedures for managing the Temporary Works design.
• Ensure The roles and responsibilities of the Designated Individual, any Permanent Works
Designers, any Temporary Works Designers, Temporary Works Design Checkers, Principal
Designers, etc. and any other key individuals such are to be clearly highlighted.
• Ensure the Permanent Works Designer responds promptly and clearly to any request from the
Permanent Works Designers are to be clearly highlighted.
• Description how the Designated Individual and any Permanent Works Designers are assessed
and appointed are to be clearly highlighted.
Temporary Works.
• Ensure designers address the buildability of Permanent Works and Temporary Works, their
Company Document
• Ensure there is a coherent construction method which identifies all key temporary conditions and
Temporary Works.
• Ensure designers follow the recommendations of the relevant clauses within British Standard BS
5975 : 2019.
• Ensure designers share information with other designers, and the PC’s TWC and TWC, that
might influence the design of Temporary Works or the selection of construction methods.
• Ensure the process for requesting a design using a Design Brief is clear and highlighted.
• Highlight if a designer will be required to prepare a design statement or Approval In Principle

(AIP) or equivalent this has to be clear and highlighted.
• How the Designer will liaise fully and clearly with all parties, initially with the TWC, but this may be
extending to cover other designers and / or design checkers.
Permanent Works Designer will communicate their proposed method and sequence of
construction and any Temporary Works they foresee plus any residual risks they cannot design
out.
Permanent Works Designer will create and communicate an outline Temporary Works Schedule
of the Temporary Works they foresee being required in their design. This Temporary Works
Schedule can be used by the TWC to create the Temporary Works Register for the project.
APPENDIX O
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Temporary Works Designer


Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGNER TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Company Document
TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGNER
Revision 01
Date of Issue
DRAFT
Status UNDER REVIEW
APPROVED
Technical Reviewer
Document Control
Company Document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1. scope ........................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY........................................................................................................................ 4
1.3. DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS .................................................................................................... 5
2.1. TW Management - TYPICAL INTERFACES BETWEEN PARTIES .............................................. 6
2.2. The Temporary Works Process .................................................................................................... 7
3.1. organisations designated individual .............................................................................................. 8
4.1. Temporary works Definition ........................................................................................................ 15
4.2. Aims of a Temporary works procedure ....................................................................................... 15
4.3. Control of Temporary works risk................................................................................................. 16
...................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.4. design of Temporary works ........................................................................................................ 19
4.4.1. design brief ......................................................................................................................... 19
4.4.4. design Check ...................................................................................................................... 22
5.1. typical TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC IS APPOINTED BY THE CLIENT ..................... 28
own tw............................................................................................................................................... 29
Company Document

8. TEMPORARY works designer Temporary works requirements .................................................. 32
Company Document
1. INTRODUCTION
by the Temporary Workers Designer.
This will allow the Temporary Works Designer to understand, control or mitigate risks associated with
Temporary Works.
Regulations.
1.1. SCOPE
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY
Company Document

Key Symbols
followed

Company Document

Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document


followed the CDM Principles of belonging to the Client or Third Create Temporary Works
Prevention and have a fully Party that might be affected by Procedure
Contractor Designated
Clients Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual
Individual
Coordinate requirements of the Coordinate requirements of the

Create a Temporary Works Permanent Works Design with the Permanent Works Design with the
Designers Temporary Temporary Works Designer and Temporary Works Designer and
Procedure produce the required TWs Design Brief produce the required TWs Design
(If Required) Brief (if required)
TWDs Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual Contractors Designated Individual
Ensure a suitable Temporary Works TWs for the PD? or TWs for the
Design is produced as required in the PC? will dictate who will Ensure a suitable check is
Design Brief and return to the PD or coordinate the TWDs undertaken for the TWs Design
PC (Depending on who requested) information
PD Designated Individual or PC PD Designated Individual or PC

TWDs Designated Individual
TWC TWC
KEY
Information supplied by the PD
TWs Design and Check
used to develop Temporary
completed as required Responsibility
Works on site
PD Designated Individual or PC
PC’s Designated Individual
TWC
NOTE:
Company Document

PROCEDURES
a) Clients
organisation.
Individual (DI).
Company Document
required
Company Document
3.1.2. PRINCIPAL DESIGNERS DESIGNATED INDIVIDUAL
CDM Regulations.
TWC
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
include:
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
such as: -
site.

INDIVIDUAL
Company Document
Works scheme;
appropriate;
required;
hold points; and
construction phase.

INDIVIDUAL
as: -
on site.
Company Document
with the PC's TWC.


Company Document

debris);
if they are made.
implemented.
Company Document
change.
• Their design
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High

• Competence
Company Document
classification
Company Document
measures
risk class
failure.

or
• an authorized
TWS.
• Relatively or
TWC.
secondary events.
elements.
• an authorized
one another
or equipment.
events.
Company Document


might be mitigated
4.4.1. DESIGN BRIEF

be drawn up.
Company Document
account.
Design.
carried out.
water level.
output.
Company Document

should: -
• Layout
• Loading
• Limitations
• Tolerances
• etc.
Company Document
4.4.4. DESIGN CHECK
complex.
Category 1 check.
Company Document
• The designer
certificate.
conditions
design output
Company Document


• The designer
Company Document

Checker
publications.

falsework).
Company Document

DESIGN CHECKER
further.
further required


checker.
Company Document
design checker.
design.
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC
TWS TWS
PC PC
Site Team Site Team

On Site On Site
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Self Delivering
TWS
TWC Site Team
TWS On Site

On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document

Permanent Works;
Company Document
TWC through the PD.

Works scheme
foundations;
Company Document
8. TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGNER TEMPORARY WORKS

REQUIREMENTS
In relation to Temporary Works the Temporary Works Designer Designated Individual will: -
• Ensure the Designated Individual and any Temporary Works Designers are to be clearly
highlighted so all parties are aware.
• Ensure the Temporary Workers Designer has in place a Temporary Works procedure in
accordance with the recommendations of BS 5975 and appropriate to the type and complexity of
work, and associated risks, which the designer is to consider.
• Ensure sub-consultants have adequate procedures for managing the Temporary Works Design.
• Ensure The roles and responsibilities of the Designated Individual, any Permanent Works
Designers, any Temporary Works Designers, Temporary Works Design Checkers, Principal
Designers, etc. and any other key individuals such are to be clearly highlighted.
• Ensure the Temporary Works Designer responds promptly and clearly to any request from the
Temporary Works Designers are to be clearly highlighted.
• Description how the Designated Individual and any Temporary Works Designers are assessed
and appointed are to be clearly highlighted.
Temporary Works.
• Ensure designers address the buildability of Permanent Works and Temporary Works, their
Company Document
o Ensure there is a coherent construction method which identifies all key temporary conditions and
Temporary Works.
o Ensure the finally agreed construction method, sequence and Temporary Works are not
o Ensure designers follow the recommendations of the relevant clauses within British Standard BS
5975 : 2019.
o Ensure designers share information with other designers, and the PC’s TWC and TWC, that
might influence the design of Temporary Works or the selection of construction methods.
o Ensure designers take account of the construction phase plan.

• Ensure the process for requesting a design using a Design Brief is clear and highlighted.
• Highlight if a designer will be required to prepare a design statement or Approval In Principle

(AIP) or equivalent this has to be clear and highlighted.
• How the Designer will liaise fully and clearly with all parties, initially with the TWC, but this may be
extending to cover other designers and / or design checkers.
• Temporary Works Designers Temporary Works procedures should clearly show how the
Temporary Works Designer will communicate their proposed method and sequence of
construction and any Temporary Works they foresee plus any residual risks they cannot design
out.
• Temporary Works Design Checker Temporary Works Procedures should clearly show how the
Temporary Works Design will be checked for each Category and: -
o What information is expected
o How any communication will be undertaken
o And then how the Temporary Works Design Check Certificate will be presented and signed.
• Where a Temporary Works scheme involves design contributions from more than one Designer,
one of the Designers should undertake the role of Lead Temporary Works Designer, and manage
the design interfaces. The name of the nominated Lead Temporary Works Designer should be
recorded. The Lead Designer for a Temporary Works scheme might not necessarily be the
Principal Designer. On completion of the design, a single design certificate should be issued. The
Lead Temporary Works Designer Temporary Works Procedure needs to highlight this.
o The Lead Temporary Works Designer should ensure that:
a) There is a distribution of design tasks amongst appropriate designers, especially where the
design of Temporary Works is an integral part of the Permanent Works methodology;
b) The communication of design data between organizations is controlled and any iterations
are completed to the required levels;
c) Design contributions from all designers are compatible with each other;
d) They have a holistic understanding of the whole design;
e) The design output is complete and clearly communicated; and
Company Document
f) The Principal Designer and TWC are informed about significant residual risks associated
with the design.
APPENDIX P
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Principal Contractor


Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
PRINCIPAL CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Company Document
Revision 01
Date of Issue
DRAFT
Status UNDER REVIEW
APPROVED
Technical Reviewer
Document Control
Company Document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1. scope ........................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY........................................................................................................................ 5
3.1. organisations designated individual .............................................................................................. 9
3.1.1. Clients Designated Individual .............................................................................................. 10
...................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.4. design of Temporary works ........................................................................................................ 20
4.4.1. design brief ......................................................................................................................... 20
4.4.4. design Check ...................................................................................................................... 23
4.5. Temporary works REGISTER .................................................................................................... 29
4.6. Temporary works SITE CONSIDERATIONS .............................................................................. 30
4.7. Temporary works loading / unloading & dismantling................................................................... 31
Company Document
4.7.1. Temporary works loading .................................................................................................... 31

4.7.2. Temporary works unloading ................................................................................................ 32
4.7.3. Temporary works dismantle ................................................................................................ 33
5.2. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC appoints a sub-contractor to manage their own
temporary works................................................................................................................................ 35
own temporary works ........................................................................................................................ 36
5.4. PC Temporary works management organisation ........................................................................ 37
6. PC temporary works personnel .................................................................................................. 38
6.1. PC designated individual ............................................................................................................ 38
6.2. PC LEAD TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR .................................................................. 38
6.3. PC TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR............................................................................. 39
6.4. PC TEMPORARY WORKS Supervisor (S)................................................................................. 42
7. contractor temporary works personnel ....................................................................................... 43
7.1. contractor designated individual ................................................................................................. 43
7.2. contractor temporary works coordinator ..................................................................................... 44
7.3. contractor temporary works supervisor....................................................................................... 47
7.4. dual responsibilities .................................................................................................................... 49
9.1. PC Approval of temporary works design contractors .................................................................. 52
10. basic requirements for TEMPORARY works procedures on site ................................................ 52
11. contractors tEMPORARY works in relation to the pc .................................................................. 54
11.1. contractors appointment of di .............................................................................................. 54
11.2. contractors temporary works procedure .............................................................................. 54
11.3. contractors temporary works coordinator ............................................................................ 55
11.4. contractors temporary works register .................................................................................. 55
11.5. contractors temporary works SUPERVISOR ....................................................................... 57
11.6. contractors temporary works designs .................................................................................. 57
11.6.1. contractors tWs design RISK ASSESSMENT .................................................................. 58
11.6.2. contractors external designers ......................................................................................... 58
11.6.3. contractors temporary works design checker competencies ............................................ 59
11.7. contractors construction of temporary works ....................................................................... 59
11.7.1. supervision of work on site and checking ......................................................................... 59
11.7.2. permits to load and permits to unload / dismantle ............................................................ 60
11.7.3. risk assessment and method statement........................................................................... 60
Company Document
11.7.4. alterations ........................................................................................................................ 60

11.7.5. control of communications ............................................................................................... 61
11.7.6. temporary works handovers ............................................................................................ 61
12. TEMPORARY works interface.................................................................................................... 62
12.1. TEMPORARY works interface management ....................................................................... 63
12.2. TEMPORARY works interface with permanent works ......................................................... 63
13. TEMPORARY works design flow chart....................................................................................... 64
14. voids and openings .................................................................................................................... 65
15. temporary works and lifting ........................................................................................................ 66
16. scaffolding works on the construction site .................................................................................. 67
17. temporary works assessments / audits on site ........................................................................... 68
18. temporary works inspections ...................................................................................................... 68
19. temporary works meetings and forums....................................................................................... 69
Company Document
1. INTRODUCTION
by the Principal Contractor.
This will allow the Principal Contractor to understand, control or mitigate risks associated with
Temporary Works.
Regulations.
1.1. SCOPE
and Management (CDM) Regulations 2015 – Regulation 9, 13, 15, 20, 22 and 23 and BS 5975:2019
Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the Permissible Stress Design of Falsework.
All contractors (including their suppliers) and any other organisation and personnel who are engaged
with the planning, organisation, coordination, supervision and execution of Temporary Works must
adhere to or exceed the requirements of this standard.
The PC will monitor and verify compliance with this procedure across all Temporary Works
undertaken on the PC’s construction site.
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY
The Principal Contractors' DI should establish a procedure describing how the main items for which
the Principal Contractor has responsibility should be managed.
Company Document

Key Symbols
followed

Company Document

Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
Contractor Appoints a Contractors DI produces a

Identify Temporary Works
Designated Individual (DI) Temporary Works Procedure
requirements
(7.1 & 11.1) (11.1)
Reviewed by PC DI & Contractors Designated

Contractors Management Team
Temporary Works Team Individual
Submit the Temporary Works Identify and appoint Temporary

Procedure to PC for review and Works Coordinator & Submit Temporary Works
acceptance Temporary Works Supervisor Coordinator Appointment
(11.2) (11.3 &11.5)
Reviewed & Accepted by PC DI Contractors Designated Reviewed & Accepted by PC DI

& Temporary Works Team Individual & Temporary Works Team
Produce a Temporary Works Prepare and issue design briefs Design to be developed in
register and input all known where applicable, clearly accordance with the Temporary
Temporary Works detailing specific requirements Works design brief
(11.4) (4.4.1 & 11.6) (11.6)
Contractors Temporary Works Must be undertaken by a Must be undertaken by a

Coordinator Competent Person Competent Person
Ensure the Temporary Works

Ensure design checks are Identify any Temporary Works
design is in line with the
carried out and recorded Interface and suitable record
Temporary Works design brief
(4.4 & 11.6) (12)
(4.4.1 & 11.6)
Contractor Temporary Works Contractors Temporary Works Contractors Temporary Works

Designer Coordinator Coordinator
Raise an RFI or FCR if required Submit the Temporary Works Ensure the installation of the Temporary
for any Temporary Works design pack to PC for review Works on site in accordance with the
Interface and suitable record and acceptance design and design risk assessment
(12.2) (11.6) (11.7)
Contractors Temporary Works Reviewed by PC Temporary Contractors Temporary Works

Coordinator Works Team Supervisors
Ensure Inspections are carried

Permits to load to be obtained
out. (Daily, Weekly, Adverse PC Inspections & Audits on
and Issued
Weather, Long Term etc) Temporary Works items on site
(11.7.2)
(11.7.1)
Contractors Temporary Works Contractor Temporary Works PC Temporary Works

Coordinator Supervisor Coordinator / Supervisor
KEY
Permit to Strike / Dismantle
Ensure records are maintained
obtained and issued Contractors
(11.7.6)
(11.7.2) Responsibility
Contractors Temporary Works

Contractors Team PC Responsibility
Coordinator
NOTE:
When reading this flowchart refer to the specific requirements within this procedure. The relevant section is
referred to in bold (Example 3.4.1)
Company Document

PROCEDURES
a) Clients
d) Principal Contractors / Sub-Contractors / Specialist Contractors (including demolition
contractors) all of which manage their own Temporary Works. This includes third-party
employed contractors, such as utility providers and their contractors
organisation.
Individual (DI).
Company Document
required
Company Document
CDM Regulations.
TWC
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
include:
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
such as: -
site.

INDIVIDUAL
Company Document
Works scheme;
appropriate;
required;
hold points; and
construction phase.

INDIVIDUAL
as: -
on site.
Company Document
with the PC's TWC.


Company Document

debris);
if they are made.
implemented.
Company Document
change.
• Their design
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High

• Competence
Company Document
Principal Contractor (PC) TWC on site should be consulted by the relevant
organisation’s TWC and be responsible for the risk classification
Where there is no interface the TWC of the relevant organisation is responsible for
the risk classification
Company Document
measures
risk class
failure.

or
• an authorized
TWS.
• Relatively or
TWC.
secondary events.
elements.
• an authorized
one another
The PC’s TWC is to
• Inexperienced workforce. countersign other
contractor’s Permits
to confirm they have
or equipment.
followed their
• Failure would be catastrophic approved Temporary
in its own right, or if minor might Works Procedures
events.
Company Document

The design of Temporary Works should be undertaken with reasonable professional skill and care as
highlighted in BS 5975 Clause 13.
The Permanent Works Designer should ensure their design (BS 5975 Clause 13.1.2 & 3) :-

Regulation 9.
might be mitigated.
4.4.1. DESIGN BRIEF

BS 5975 Clause 13.2 relates to Temporary Works Design Briefs and notes this should be prepared to
serve as the basis for subsequent decisions, design work, calculations, drawings and design checks.
All concerned with the construction should contribute towards the preparation of the Temporary
Works Design Brief.
be drawn up.
Company Document
account.
Design.
carried out.
water level.
Company Document
output.

should: -
• Layout
• Loading
• Limitations
• Tolerances
• etc.
Company Document
4.4.4. DESIGN CHECK
complex.
Category 1 check.
Company Document
• The designer
certificate.
conditions
Company Document
design output


• The designer
Company Document

Checker
publications.

falsework).
Company Document
4.4.4.1. RESOLUTION OF QUERIES RAISED BY THE DESIGN

CHECKER
further.
further required


checker.
Company Document
design checker.
design.
Company Document
4.5. TEMPORARY WORKS REGISTER
BS 5975 states the Temporary Works Register is an aide memoire to assist categorizing, designing
and checking all the relevant Temporary Works. Correct use of such a register is an important
management tool for the site. The register is also useful as verification that a safe procedure is in use
on the site.
There is no standard format of a register; each organization needs to relate its register to the type of
work carried out and the nomenclature/forms, etc. used in the company procedures. What is important
is how it is used and the way in which it is maintained and kept up to date as the project progresses.
The PC Temporary Works Register is usually on a project-specific database this gives the opportunity
for several different staff to monitor progress of the Temporary Works, but overall it remains the
responsibility of the PC’s TWC throughout the project.
Where a contractor has been appointed to manage their own Temporary Works the relevant TWC
should also prepare and maintain their own Temporary Works register.
The TWC should supply the register to the PC’s TWC :-

The register should be in a common format to allow incorporation of the TWC’s data into a database of
the PC’s TWC’s if the project has TW Register database.
The PC’s TWC should ensure that a Temporary Works register is prepared and maintained throughout
the project. The register should identify what Temporary Works are needed on the contract. The
register, often commenced at tender stage in outline, is:-
• Not expected to identify all the details of all the Temporary Works to be required.
As the project progresses the register should be maintained as an “active document” and the PC’s TWC
should ensure that it is kept up to date.
The register is an important management tool, and the relevant company should have a process by
which such registers are regularly audited. The auditing should be carried out by someone familiar and
competent with Temporary Works.
A Temporary Works register should include:
a) reference number and short description;
b) date design brief issued;
c) date required;
d) risk classification of temporary works (see Table 1);
NOTE:- The implementation risk classification might be influenced by the client’s requirements,
such as increasing the risk level for a particular section of Temporary Works.
Company Document
g) design check category;

requirements or by a minimum category of check for a particular type of temporary works set by
the PC or contractor.
h) date design completed;
i) date design checked/approved;
j) erection complete and checked with date of permit to load (bring into use) if necessary;
k) date of permit to unload (take out of use) if necessary; and
l) third-party approvals.
4.6. TEMPORARY WORKS SITE CONSIDERATIONS
Work on site should be the subject of careful direction, supervision and inspection and checks to ensure
that the Temporary Works is constructed safely in accordance with the design and specified materials
and equipment, and that only when all checks have proved satisfactory is the works loaded, used,
maintained, unloaded and then dismantled in accordance with an implementation plan.
The PC's TWC or relevant TWC should ensure that a Temporary Works implementation plan is in place
covering the erection/assembly, use, unloading and dismantling of the Temporary Works including what
inspections, checks, hold points, permits and certification are required. This should include defining the
regular inspections which are required during the use (loading) of the Temporary Works.
The implementation plan could consist of the method statement, task specific risk assessment,
inspection and test plan (ITP), checklists and other certification (for example, quality control check lists).
The inspection and test plan can be used to define hold points, where works stops for an inspection or
testing to take place. A permit is used to release the hold point and allow work to continue.
The implementation plan should be developed taking into account the site conditions, programme,
original design brief and the construction phase plan and use of the drawings, specification and
methodology supplied by the designer.
The plan should define hold points at which the structure should be checked for conformity and who is
authorized to do so, including issuing permits to load or unload (release the hold point), signing of quality
control check lists etc. by the PC's TWC, the relevant TWC or the TWS, and how the results of these
inspections should be communicated and acted upon.
If the implementation plan has been produced by others it should be approved by the PC's TWC or
relevant TWC.
TWS may issue the permit for a defined scope and range of work as described in the individual's
appointment.
The PC's TWC or relevant TWC should ensure that the guidance on the implementation of the design
provided by the designer or supplier, including any residual risks, are incorporated into the
implementation plan.
Company Document

The design documentation and method statement should be followed but those responsible for work on
site and they should bear in mind the need to compare conditions experienced on site during
construction with those assumed by the design in order that appropriate action can be taken if it
becomes apparent that they are different.
At all stages during fabrication/pre-fabrication, construction/erection, use and dismantling of the
Temporary Works, the information being used should be checked to ensure that it is correct, and that
the work carried out is in accordance with the design details (drawings/sketches) and is as specified to
ensure that the completed structure will function as intended.
This is necessary, not only to ensure that the Temporary Works are safe to use, but also to facilitate
remedial work should this prove necessary; it is often difficult to do this later.
Prior to bringing Temporary Works into service a final inspection should be carried out to verify that it
has been constructed in accordance with the requirements of the design and any subsequent approved
modifications.
The results of these inspections, together with any requirements for improvement, should be recorded
by the appropriate person as allowed by the implementation plan. For complex or innovative designs
consideration should be given to an inspection by the TWD.
It might be necessary to carry out inspections of the Temporary Works at points during
assembly/erection.
4.7. TEMPORARY WORKS LOADING / UNLOADING &

DISMANTLING
4.7.1. TEMPORARY WORKS LOADING
As a means of exercising control over bringing the Temporary Works into use a formal procedure for
giving permission to load, or proceed to the next stage in the implementation sequence should be part
of the implementation plan.
Not all Temporary Works will require a Permit To Load but this can be highlighted where required on
the Temporary Works Register.
In simple cases a single “permit to load”, when the Temporary Works has been checked, might be
appropriate.
In complex or larger cases, permits might be required at different stages, both as regards loading or
for different areas or for excavation.
It is normally desirable to limit the period of validity of the permit, as subsequent modifications or
changes in circumstances (soil wash out under footings or similar) may take place, For example, a
permit to load for a falsework is normally valid for 24 hours.
The area over which loading can take place, and to what extent, is set down in the permit, e.g. it might
be “reinforcement only”.
Company Document
The PC's TWC, an authorized TWC or authorized TWS as identified in the implementation plan,
should ensure that a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) is issued to the site team prior to its
use.
a) The Temporary Works have been constructed in accordance with the certified design (design
and design check certificates have been issued and the drawings and specification used are
the ones referenced on the certificates);
b) Any modifications to the Temporary Works have been approved by the designer; and
c) The water, ground and environmental conditions and use are as envisaged by the design.
Where a Permit To Load is required, the Permit will not be signed until it is confirmed the
Temporary Works are constructed in accordance with the certified design and design check
certificate which will clearly highlight the drawing / sketch to reference for the Temporary
Works on site
4.7.2. TEMPORARY WORKS UNLOADING
Where the Temporary Works is used to provide support to the Permanent Works until it is self-
supporting, the PC's TWC, an authorized TWC or authorized TWS, as identified in the implementation
plan, should determine that the Permanent Works have attained adequate strength and/or stability, with
reference to the PWD’s specification or in conjunction with the PWD if necessary, prior to ensuring that
a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use) is issued.
A TWC or TWS may issue the permit for a defined scope and range of work if authorized to do so by
the PC's TWC in the implementation plan; for example, they might need to verify concrete strength or
that all structural steelwork elements and connections are completed or that any post-tensioning has
been carried out prior to issuing the permit.
The sequence and order of removing Temporary Works, where critical, should be defined in the design
output and/or confirmed in the implementation plan. The sequence should be referenced in the permit
to unload or permit to proceed.
The sequence and order of removing Temporary Works supports can be critical to avoid damage to the
Permanent Works under construction. Generally, the supports to spanning members should be
removed starting mid-span, and for cantilever sections, should be removed starting at the tip.
The PC’s TWC, or TWC where appointed, should refer to the Permanent Works and/or Temporary
Works Designer if in any doubt about the sequence.
The sequence and level of props removed during backpropping operations is particularly important to
avoid overloading of the completed slabs. The sequence should be agreed by the PC's TWC or the
relevant TWC with the Permanent Works designer and be included in the implementation plan.
The Principal Designer is to confirm all of the requirements from the Permanent Works
Designer to the PC’s TWC in relation to Temporary Works such as construction sequences
and loading for backpropping, etc.
Company Document
4.7.3. TEMPORARY WORKS DISMANTLE
When the structure being supported by the Temporary Works has become self-supporting, or the
excavation has been backfilled or other condition, the Temporary Works should be dismantled
(removed) in accordance with any restrictions imposed by the Permanent Works Designer as set out in
the implementation plan. As at the loading stage, a permit to dismantle the Temporary Works might be
appropriate, particularly where this takes place in stages. Care should be taken to ensure that the
Temporary Works remains stable during all stages of the dismantling process.
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)
It is to be noted that each of
the TWC’s shown may have
direct contact to a Specialist
Suppler Temporary Works
Designer, an In-House
TWD In-House External Temporary Works Designer
Temporary Works Designer Temporary Works Designer and / or an external
(TWD) (TWD)
Temporary Works Designer in
the same way as is shown for
PC PC
Temporary Works Supervisor Temporary Works Supervisor the Lead TWC but it is not
TWS TWS shown for clarity.
PC PC
Site Team Site Team

On Site On Site
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
5.2. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC APPOINTS A SUB-CONTRACTOR

TO MANAGE THEIR OWN TEMPORARY WORKS
It is to be noted that each of the TWC’s

shown may have direct contact to a
Specialist Suppler Temporary Works
Designer, an In-House Temporary Works
Designer and / or an external Temporary
Works Designer in the same way as is
shown for the Lead TWC but it is not
shown for clarity.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
5.3. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE CLIENT APPOINTS A SUB-CONTRACTOR TO

MANAGE THEIR OWN TEMPORARY WORKS
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

Specialist Supplier PCs PCs shown may have direct contact to a
TWD In-House External Specialist Suppler Temporary Works
(TWD) (TWD) Designer, an In-House Temporary Works
PC shown for the Lead TWC but it is not
Self Delivering
Temporary Works Supervisor shown for clarity.
TWS
TWC Site Team
TWS On Site

On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
5.4. PC TEMPORARY WORKS MANAGEMENT ORGANISATION
PC Designated Individual
PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator
PC Temporary Works Coordinator PC Temporary Works Coordinator PC Temporary Works Coordinator
PC Temporary Works Supervisor PC Temporary Works Supervisor PC Temporary Works Supervisor
PC Construction Delivery Team
TWC & TWS numbers

are shown here
indicatively
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
6. PC TEMPORARY WORKS PERSONNEL

All personnel involved in the planning, organisation, coordination, supervision and execution of
temporary works must be competent to undertake their assigned roles.
The titles Temporary Works Coordinator, Temporary Works Supervisor and the Design Check
Categories were first officially introduced in BS 5975 :2008. From this to demonstrate experience and
competence individuals should have experience of managing Temporary Works on site for a
Contractor to the requirements of BS 5975 after 2008.
Competence assumes a sufficient up-to-date knowledge of Temporary Works relevant to the
complexity of the project.
All those managing Temporary Works should have, as a minimum, an understanding of:
a) The Temporary Works Procedures outlined in Section 2 of BS 5975 : 2019;
b) The specific procedures for the organisation for whom the person works;
c) The risk management aspect associated with the management of Temporary Works;
d) Technical knowledge relevant both to the role and the complexity of the work; and
e) Practical knowledge relevant to the complexity of the work.
The minimum standards of competence including the minimum and mandatory training requirements
are included in Temporary Works roles and responsibilities and competence requirements.
6.1. PC DESIGNATED INDIVIDUAL
The PC Designated Individual will be responsible for the implementation and management of this
Temporary Works procedure. The Designated Individual will be responsible for the appointment of a
competent PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator. The appointed person(s) must have or be given
authority to make and enforce the necessary decisions.
The PC's DI should have ultimate responsibility for the Temporary Works procedures on the project
so that, although other contractors are required to appoint their own DIs, any other DIs are aware of
the responsibilities and procedural requirements of their contracts.
Where contractors are appointed either by the PC or by the client or by a third party, the PC's DI
should ensure that contractors’ Temporary Works procedures are satisfactory.
6.2. PC LEAD TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR
The PC Designated Individual following an assessment of their competence will appoint the PC Lead
Temporary Works Coordinator in writing. The role and responsibility of the PC Lead TWC is
highlighted in BS 5975: 2019.
Company Document
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will establish a team of Temporary Works Coordinators /
Supervisors to ensure suitable control and site management of Temporary Works across the main
construction site.
The Lead PC Temporary Works Coordinator responsibilities will be fulfilled by delegation of these
tasks to the PC Temporary Works Coordinator in charge of areas of work on site.
BS 5975 States the PC’s TWC should not be responsible for the day-to-day progress of the
Temporary Works or other project matters, for example: -
• Commercial
• Or Programme matters
The role of the PC’s TWC should not include a responsibility for carrying out any design or design
checking of Temporary Works.
This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads, assessment of load paths, engineering
checks of any kind, determination of foundation capacity etc.
The appointment of a person as PC’s TWC should not preclude them from carrying out design and/or
design checking if they are considered competent and it is within their experience based on the
The PC Designated Individual will appoint in writing the PC Lead Temporary Works
Coordinator
PC Temporary Works Coordinator / Supervisor letter of appointment

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
6.3. PC TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will appoint the PC Temporary Works Coordinator(s)
following an assessment of the competence in which the PC DI will participate. The role and
responsibility of the PC TWC is highlighted in BS 5975 : 2019.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator responsibilities will be fulfilled by delegation of these tasks to
the contractors Temporary Works Coordinator as required, in charge of areas of work on site. The PC
Temporary Works Coordinator will coordinate information to be issued to the Lead PC Temporary
Works Coordinator.
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will appoint in writing the PC Temporary Works
Coordinator(s)
Company Document

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The duties of the PC TWC are as follows: -

a) Co-ordinate all Temporary Works activities;
b) Ensure a Temporary Works register is established and maintained;
c) Ensure that information relevant to the Temporary Works has been received from the Client,
Principal Designer and Permanent Works Designer, as appropriate;
d) Ensure that a design brief is prepared with consultation within the project team and that it is
both adequate and in accordance with the actual situation on site;
e) Ensure that any other Temporary Works in the vicinity are referenced in the design brief;
f) Ensure that any residual risks, identified at the design stage, assumed methods of construction
or loading constraints identified by the PWD are included in the design brief;
g) Ensure that the design brief is issued to the TWD for a satisfactory Temporary Works design to
be carried out;
h) Ensure that a design check is carried out by someone who was not involved in the original
design (depending on Category of Check);
i) Where appropriate, ensure that information on the certified Temporary Works design is made
available to other interested parties, e.g. the Principal Designer and/or the Designer of the
Permanent Works, and, where required to the client;
j) Register or record the drawings, calculations and other relevant documents relating to the final
design;
k) Ensure that the relevant client and/or third-party approvals, required by the contract, have been
received;
l) Ensure that those responsible for on-site supervision receive all the details of the design, any
residual risks, including any limitations and guidance notes associated with it and ensure that a
specific method statement, which details a safe system of work, is prepared;
m) Ensure that an inspection and test plan is prepared, along with an appropriate quality control
check list(s), based on the Temporary Works Design output and is used to verify that the
Temporary Works have been constructed in accordance with the certified design;
n) Ensure that any proposed changes in materials or construction are checked against the original
design and appropriate action taken;
o) Ensure that checks, inspections and tests are made at appropriate stages;
p) Advise the designer of any changes or modifications to the scheme or differences from the
envisaged conditions (use or environmental);
Company Document
q) In the event that any inspections carried out reveal discrepancies between the certified and as
constructed Temporary Works, prevent loading (or unloading) until the discrepancies have been
rectified to their satisfaction;
r) Ensure a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) is issued after a final check, which is
satisfactory, by either the PC’s TWC, TWC or TWS;
s) Ensure that during use of the Temporary Works all appropriate maintenance is carried out;
t) Ensure a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use) the Temporary Works is issued, when it
has been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength and/or
stability, by either the PC’s TWC, TWC or TWS;
u) Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the dismantling
of any Temporary Works; and
v) Ensure that any relevant information for the health and safety file is transmitted to the Principal
Designer.
The duties of the PC’s TWC in relation to other contractors are as follows: -
a) Receive the contractor’s DI’s assessment of the capability of the TWS (and TWC where
appointed), including the individual’s acceptance of the role;
b) Ensure that the TWCs and TWSs are operating in accordance with the approved Temporary
Works procedures;
c) Provide copies of all available information relevant to the contractor’s Temporary Works Design
to the contractor’s TWC;
d) Define the interfaces between the contractor’s works and those of the PC or other contractors to
establish which design briefs should be provided to the PC’s TWC for review / approval before
issue to the relevant TWD;
e) Receive copies of the relevant design briefs produced by the contractor’s TWC and confirm
there are no adverse effects on any other works (including Temporary Works) which might be
planned;
f) For relevant designs, receive copies of the design output, design and design check certificates
prior to implementation of the contractor’s Temporary Works; and
g) Inspect the contractor’s Temporary Works, where necessary.
The PC's TWC should ensure that a contractor’s proposals for Temporary Works do not adversely
affect/are not adversely affected by other construction works including other Temporary Works.
Company Document
6.4. PC TEMPORARY WORKS SUPERVISOR (S)
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will appoint the PC Temporary Works Supervisor(s)
following an assessment of their competence in which the PC Designated Individual participates.
The role and responsibility of the PC TWS is highlighted in BS 5975.
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will appoint in writing the PC Temporary Works
Supervisor(s)
The duties of the TWS are as follows: -
a) Liaise and co-operate with the PC’s TWC or TWC where appropriate;
b) Assist the appropriate TWC in ensuring that the site is operating in accordance with the
approved procedures;
c) Check that information relevant to the Temporary Works has been received prior to
commencement of work on site; this should include any residual risk information from the
TWD;
d) Supervise the erection, use, maintenance and dismantling of the Temporary Works as
applicable;
e) Carry out or supervise the required checks at appropriate stages during the construction
erection or installation of the Temporary Works;
f) Carry out or supervise any planned maintenance of the Temporary Works;
g) Ensure that any changes or modifications to the scheme or differences from the envisaged
conditions (use or environmental) are drawn to the attention of the PC’s TWC or TWC as
appropriate, and the designer if appropriate;
h) Carry out the final check prior to use of the Temporary Works;
i) In the event that any inspections reveal discrepancies between the certified and as
constructed Temporary Works, issue a notice to prevent loading (or unloading) until the
discrepancies have been rectified to the satisfaction of the PC’s TWC and/or TWC;
j) After a final check, which is satisfactory, and when authorized, ensure a permit to load or
proceed (bring into use) is issued and provide a copy of the permit to the PC’s TWC and/or
TWC; and
k) When it has been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength
and/or stability, and when authorized, ensure a permit to unload (take out of use) the
Temporary Works is issued and provide a copy of the permit to the PC’s TWC and/or TWC.
The TWS, where appointed, should be responsible to the PC’s TWC or TWC as appropriate. The TWS
should assist the PC’s TWC or TWC, as appropriate, in the supervision and checking of the Temporary
Works.
The duties of the PC’s TWS in relation to other contractors are as follows: -
a) The PC’s TWS will be recognised as a Temporary Works Advisor (TWA) for Contractors
Temporary Works on site which they are not directly responsible for the delivery and
construction of;
Company Document
b) The PC TWS will undertake site inspections of contractors Temporary Works on site in
collaboration with the relevant Contractor Temporary Works Team;
c) The PC TWS may undertake site audits of contractors Temporary Works on site in
collaboration with the relevant Contractor Temporary Works Team.
The TWS line of responsibility is appropriate to the organization making the appointment and whether the
organization is approved to manage their own Temporary Works.
7. CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS PERSONNEL
BS 5975 states to cater for the wide range of knowledge, skills, experience and qualifications which
are encountered, this British Standard is drafted in the broadest terms. This should allow the duties, of
the TWC and TWS for example, to be carried out by individuals who do not have engineering
qualifications.
7.1. CONTRACTOR DESIGNATED INDIVIDUAL

The DI should ensure that:
a) For the type, scale and complexity of work/projects undertaken by the organization, the TW
risks can be identified, classified and effectively managed;
b) There is a clear process for on-site management of the design, design checking, erection, use,
maintenance, monitoring and dismantling of Temporary Works;
c) The risks, roles and responsibilities associated with the sub-contracting of any elements of
Temporary Works are addressed;
d) A TWC is appointed for each project who is-
• Competent
• Given clear written authority
• Technically responsible to the DI
• Responsible for the implementation of the organizations procedure
• And the final authority on site for the safe use of any Temporary Works;
e) Provision is made for the appointment by the organization of one or more TWSs, where
required; and
f) The TWC is given sufficient time and resources to fulfil the role.
The Contractors Temporary Works procedure is to detail how: -
• Approval will be sought and granted from the PC on site.
• The contractor will interact with the PCs TWC on site
The role and responsibility of the Contractor DI is highlighted in BS 5975 and also refer to Section
3.1.4 for Client Appointed Contractor DI responsibilities.
Company Document
The Contractor Temporary Works Designated Individual (DI) appointments are to be

supplied to the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator 6 months prior to work commencing
on site
The Contractor Temporary Works Procedure is to be supplied to the PC Lead Temporary

Works Coordinator 6 months prior to work commencing on site
No Contractor can undertake any Temporary Works on the Construction site without: -
• A suitably experienced and competent DI appointed
• An approved Temporary Works Procedure
• An approved Temporary Works Coordinator appointed
7.2. CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR
The detailed role and responsibilities of the Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator are defined in
BS 5975 and also refer to Section 6.2 & 6.3 for TWC responsibilities.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator / Supervisor appointment form (or similar document approved
by the PC) will be signed and approved by the contractor Designated Individual and submitted to the
PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator for acceptance.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The Contractor DI signed and approved Contractor Temporary Works Procedure is to be

submitted to the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator for review / acceptance prior to
work on site
The Contractor DI signed Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) appointments are
work on site
The Contractor TWC Appointments are reviewed annually by the PC Temporary Works Team
for acceptance to work on site. At any stage if concerns are raised regarding the competency
or capabilities of a Contractor TWC then their acceptance to work on site may be reviewed
and acceptance of their TWC appointment removed
The Contractor TWC should be the single point of contact for providing and receiving
relevant information from the PC’s TWC, TWS and the contractor’s site team for their
organization's Temporary Works matters
Company Document
The Contractor TWC is responsible to the PC’s TWC for ensuring that their Temporary Works
is managed and designed in accordance with the relevant procedures, design, drawings and
the specification
The Contractor TWC is responsible to the PC’s TWC to organise regular update meetings
The Contractor TWC is responsible to the PC’s TWC to issue their Temporary Works Register
at a minimum of 1 month intervals or interval agreed with the PC TWC
The Contractor TWC is responsible to the PC’s TWC to highlight any Temporary Works
interfaces with other Temporary Works or the Permanent Works
The TWC should be aware that the PC’s DI defines the PC’s TWC’s lines of responsibility in relation
to each contractor’s TWC and/or TWS, which is employed on the site.
The role of the TWC should include as follows: -
• The TWC should be the single point of contact for providing and receiving relevant information
from the PC’s TWC and the contractor’s site team for their organization's Temporary Works
matters.
• The TWC should be responsible for the implementation of the contractor’s approved procedure for
the control of Temporary Works.
• The role of the TWC should not include a responsibility for carrying out any design or design
• This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads, assessment of load paths,
engineering checks of any kind, determination of foundation capacity etc.
• The appointment of a person as a TWC should not preclude them from carrying out design and/or
• When appointed, the TWC should: -
o Co-ordinate the contracting organization's Temporary Works on site
o Liaise with the PC's TWC and any PC's TWS
o Where required liaise with the PC’s TWC for the preparation of design briefs
o Provide information regarding any proposed TW designers and design checkers
o Under take inspection of Temporary Works on site
o Provision of any design and design check certificates to the PC's TWC
Company Document
o Checking the erected Temporary Works on site before loading/unloading.

• The TWC should be responsible to both: -
o Their organization’s designated individual, for the implementation of their organization's
procedure
o The PC’s TWC for ensuring that their Temporary Works is managed and designed in
• The PC's TWC remains ultimately responsible for the Temporary Works on the project/site.
• The TWC should not be responsible for the day-to-day progress of the Temporary Works or other
project matters. For example: -
o Commercial
o Or Programme matters
• Where this is not possible, the PC's TWC should recognize that the role of TWC overrides other
responsibilities the individual might have and should not put progress of the works above the safety
of the Temporary Works. However, it is recognized that this might not be possible on projects that
have few or no engineering staff.
• If the TWC has responsibility for both checking the Temporary Works and progress of the
construction works, decisions should not be compromised by commercial or other pressures.
• If the TWC considers that they are under undue pressure from site management to achieve
production at the expense of structural stability, then they should seek assistance from the
organization’s Designated Individual and/or the PC’s TWC.
• On larger sites the TWC may request that one or more Temporary Works Supervisors (TWSs) be
appointed to supervise their specific Temporary Works
The duties of the TWC are as follows: -
a) Co-ordinate the Temporary Works activities of their organization;
b) Ensure that the PC’s DI has given approval to the contractor to manage and design the
Temporary Works, and confirm that the organization has accepted their appointment;
c) Ensure that the PC’s DI has either given approval to the contractor to use their own
Temporary Works procedure, or ensure that the agreed procedure is in use for their
Temporary Works;
d) Be aware of any limitations on use of their Temporary Works for which their organization is
responsible;
e) Liaise with the PC’s TWC to ensure that those involved understand the types and limits of
permits and when they have the authority to proceed by releasing the hold points;
f) Be responsible for providing information to and receiving information from the PC’s TWC to
manage the Temporary Works schemes for which they are responsible;
g) Ensure a Temporary Works register is established and maintained for the Temporary Works
involved;
h) Ensure that their register is copied to the PC’s TWC at each major update and to an agreed
regular timescale;
i) Ensure that a design brief is prepared with consultation within the project team, is adequate,
and is in accordance with the actual situation on site;
Company Document
j) Where required, provide copies of any design briefs prepared and submit to the PC’s TWC
and receive confirmation there are no adverse effects on the Temporary Works which might
be planned;
k) Ensure that all Temporary Works designers and design checkers are competent and have
been verified by the organization’s DI for carrying out designs;
l) Ensure that any residual risks, identified at the design stage, assumed methods of
construction or loading constraints identified by the designer of the Permanent Works are
included in the design brief;
m) Receive copies of the design output, design and design check certificates prior to
implementation of the Temporary Works and, where required, provide evidence to the PC’s
TWC that the design and checking has been carried out;
n) Ensure that the relevant client and/or third-party approvals, required by the contract, have
been received from the PC’s TWC;
o) Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the erection
of any Temporary Works;
p) Ensure that an inspection and test plan is prepared, along with an appropriate quality control
check list(s), based on the Temporary Works design output and is used to verify that the
q) Ensure that checks, inspections and tests are made at appropriate stages and that the
inspection and test plan (at relevant stages) and check list(s) are signed by the TWC or TWS
as appropriate and, where required, the PC's TWC;
r) Ensure that any changes or modifications to the scheme or differences from the envisaged
conditions (use or environmental) are drawn to the attention of the designer;
s) Issue a notice to prevent loading (or unloading) in the event that any inspections reveal
discrepancies between the certified and as constructed Temporary Works, until the
t) Ensure that any instructions from the PC’s TWC in connection with any identified
discrepancies in the Temporary Works have been rectified to the satisfaction of the PC’s
TWC;
u) Ensure that any agreed changes, or corrections of faults, are correctly carried out on site;
v) Ensure that during use of the Temporary Works all appropriate monitoring and maintenance
is carried out;
w) Ensure a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) after a final check, which is satisfactory, is
issued by either the PC's TWC, TWC or TWS;
x) Ensure that a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use), the Temporary Works is issued,
when it has been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength
and/or stability, by either the PC's TWC, TWC or TWS;
y) Register or record the drawings, calculations and other relevant documents relating to the
final design of their Temporary Works and, where required, submit to the PC’s TWC;
z) Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the
dismantling of any Temporary Works;
aa) Ensure that any relevant information for the health and safety file is transmitted to the PC’s
TWC; and
bb) Ensure that any appointed TWS is operating in accordance with the correct approved
procedure.
7.3. CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS SUPERVISOR
Company Document
The detailed role and responsibilities of the Contractor Temporary Works Supervisor are defined in
BS 5975 and also refer to Section 6.4 for TWS responsibilities.
by the PC) will be signed and approved by the contractor Temporary Works Coordinator and
submitted to the PC for information.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The Contractor Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS) appointments are submitted to the PC
Lead Temporary Works Coordinator for information prior to work on site

a) Liaise and co-operate with the TWC;
TWD;
applicable;
conditions (use or environmental) are drawn to the attention of the TWC or PC’s TWC as
discrepancies have been rectified to the satisfaction of the TWC and/or PC’s TWC;
proceed (bring into use) is issued and provide a copy of the permit to the TWC and/or PC’s
TWC; and
Temporary Works is issued and provide a copy of the permit to the TWC and/or PC’s TWC.
The TWS, where appointed, should be responsible to the TWC. The TWS should assist the TWC in
the supervision and checking of the Temporary Works.
Company Document
The Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator is to ensure the Contractor Temporary Works
Supervisor (TWS) has clear understanding of the role and responsibility of their appointment
7.4. DUAL RESPONSIBILITIES
On smaller, lower risk individual pieces of Temporary Works that may occur on site: -
• The Temporary Works Coordinator may have dual responsibility for progress and for checking
of the Temporary Works (i.e. the Temporary Works Supervisor role)
Likewise
• It may be appropriate for the Temporary Works Coordinator and Temporary Works Design
roles or Temporary Works Designer / Coordinator to be carried out by the same person. Prior
to this being implemented the Lead PC Temporary Works Coordinator will need to review and
approve
Likewise
• It may be appropriate for the Temporary Works Supervisor and Temporary Works Designer
approve
This is acceptable as long as the individuals clearly understand the responsibilities required for each
individual role and can undertake these roles without having any of their decisions affected / biased
due to other responsibilities. The individuals will have to be suitably competent and this should be
noted in letters of appointment for future reference.
Dual responsibilities are permitted for CAT 0 & 1 level designs only

Company Document
Permanent Works;
TWC through the PD.
The PC will be responsible for the coordination of any Temporary Works that interface with
the Permanent Works Design
Company Document

Works scheme
foundations;
PC Temporary Works Design Brief

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PC Temporary Works Design Check Certificate

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The preparation of a site-specific method statement and risk assessment is the responsibility
of the construction team
Company Document
The Temporary Workers Designer will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works
9.1. PC APPROVAL OF TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN

CONTRACTORS
When the PC and / or Contractors require external specialist design resource to design Temporary
Works these contractors must be approved by the PC prior to undertaking work on the construction
site. The approved designer will take the responsibility as “Designer” under the CDM regulation 9.
The approved design contractors will be responsible for all aspects of the Temporary Works Design.
The relevant Temporary Works Coordinator is to manage the interfaces between the Temporary
Works Designer and the Permanent Works Designer.
Temporary Works Design Contractors must be able to clearly demonstrate: -
• They have experience of Temporary Works Design to BS 5975
• They have suitably qualified and experienced Temporary Works Designers and Temporary
Works Design Checkers (where required)
the permanent Works Design
All Temporary Works Designers working on the Project must be members of the Temporary
Works Forum
All Temporary Works Design Organisations working on the Project must have approval
granted from the PC TWC and communicated to the TWC appointing the designer in
advance of work on site
This Approval is to be recorded by the relevant TWC appointing the designer in the relevant
Temporary Works Register with the date of approval
10. BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY WORKS

PROCEDURES ON SITE
The basic requirements for Temporary Works procedures on site are as follows: -
Company Document
• A Designated Individual needs to be appointed in writing and they need to be suitably competent
and aware of their responsibilities. Their appointment is to be made evident to the PC DI and
PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
• A Temporary Works Procedure is to be created and submitted for review / acceptance by the
PC DI and PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
• A Temporary Works Coordinator needs to be appointed in writing and they need to be suitably
competent and aware of their responsibilities. The appointment is to be submitted for review /
acceptance by the PC DI and PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
• If the organisation has a Lead TWC and appoints other TWC’s the Lead TWC is to keep a table
highlighting all TWCs appointed with names, dates of appointment, limits of appointment etc.
This table is to be issued to the PC TWC for information.
• If required a Temporary Works Supervisor needs to be appointed and they need to be suitably
competent and aware of their responsibilities. All TWS appointments are to be submitted to the
PC TWC for information.
• The relevant TWC is to keep a table highlighting all TWS’s they appoint with names, dates of
appointment, limits of appointment etc. This table is to be issued to the PC TWC for information.
• A design brief needs to be created to give to the Temporary Works Designers
• The relevant Temporary Works Coordinator is to identify any Temporary Works that interface
with other Temporary Works or the Permanent Works and make this clear to the relevant PC’s
TWC
• A Temporary Works Designer is to provide the design and design risk assessment
• A Temporary Works Design Checker is to check the design as per the required Design Check
Category
• The Temporary Works Coordinator is to confirm this design has been designed for the correct
information supplied and that the correct level of design check has been completed
• The Temporary Works Coordinator will capture all of this information in a Temporary Works
register.
• The Temporary Works will be checked to ensure it is as per the design and drawings and erected
correctly before a permit to load (if required) is issued by the Temporary Works Coordinator or
Temporary Works Supervisor (if suitably competent)
• The Temporary Works will be regularly inspected to ensure it is still fit for purpose
• If required a permit to dismantle will be issued by the Temporary Works Coordinator or
Temporary Works Supervisor (if suitably competent & authorized to do so by the Temporary
Works Coordinator)
• For simple designs that do not require a staged dismantle process this will not be required
• If the Temporary Works are being used repeatedly, for instance a trench box along a long trench
excavation, then unless the ground conditions, surcharges, depths, etc. change the design will
not change so this process will not need to be repeated. But a record will have to be kept to
show the ground conditions, surcharges, depths, etc. are being assessed at each location and
that the design is still suitable for its application on site. This could be captured in site diaries,
permits to load or similar
At any stage of the Temporary Works process the site personnel can contact a Temporary
Works Designer if they feel more comfortable and require any further assistance on site
Company Document
11. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS IN RELATION TO

THE PC
11.1. CONTRACTORS APPOINTMENT OF DI
6 Months prior to construction on site or the commencement of any work on the construction site the
contractor will highlight the name of their Designated Individual and make it officially known to the PC
Designated Individual and the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
Refer to Section 7.1
11.2. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
contractor will issue their Temporary Works Procedure for “Acceptance”.
The PC DI and / or the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will be the Lead Reviewers for this
document.
If required, the PC Temporary Works Coordinators on site can work with the Contractor to assist the
creation and submission of their Temporary Works procedure.
The Contractors Temporary Works Procedure is to clearly highlight the interaction required with the
PC’s TWC’s on site.
On acceptance of the contractor’s Temporary Works procedure, the PC Lead Temporary Works
Coordinator and the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator will chair a Temporary Works readiness
review. The following roles will be required to attend:
• PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator
• The relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator
• Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator
• Any other relevant contractor personnel involved in the safe planning, organisation,
coordination, supervision and execution of Temporary Works
Each contractor will submit their company’s Temporary Works procedure for review and
acceptance prior to any Temporary Works being undertaken on the construction site
Contractors may use this PC Temporary Works procedure should their company not have a
Temporary Works Procedure. This must be formally agreed with the Lead PC Temporary
Works Coordinator.
The Contractor will still have to have a DI and appointed TWC to use this procedure as their
own
Company Document
11.3. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR
contractor will issue their Temporary Works Coordinator Appointment for “Acceptance”.
The PC DI and PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator or relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator
will be the Lead Reviewers for this document.
If required and as early as possible a Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will be appointed by the
Contractors Designated Individual. Only one Lead Temporary Works Coordinator should be appointed,
but they may be supported by any number of suitably delegated Temporary Works Coordinator(s).
Contractors will ensure that the size of their Temporary Works team is appropriate to the size and
complexity of their work package.
All Temporary Works Coordinator appointments are to be submitted for review and “Acceptance”.
All Temporary Works Coordinator appointments are to be reviewed every 12 months.
Each contractor Lead Temporary Works Coordinator is to supply a table listing TWC appointments,
date of appointment and area of responsibility to the relevant PC TWC.
The PC can withdraw approval of a contractor TWC to work on the construction site if the TWC is not
working to the agreed Temporary Works Procedure and / or not liaising and coordinating with the
relevant PC TWC as required.
Refer to Section 6.2, 6.3 & 7.2
If the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator raises issues with a Contractor Temporary
Works Coordinator and the Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator does not remedy
these issues as required, the Contractor will be instructed that Temporary Works
Coordinator Appointment is rejected and that individual is not allowed to work on the
construction site as a Temporary Works Coordinator
11.4. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS REGISTER
1 Month prior to construction on site or the commencement of any work on the construction site the
contractor will issue their Temporary Works Register for “Acceptance”.
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and / or the PC Temporary Works Coordinator for that
area will be the Lead Reviewers for this document.
If possible, Contractor will provide the PC Temporary Works Team live visibility of their Temporary
Works Register(s). Where technically this is not possible, the Contractor will supply their Temporary
Works Register to the PC Temporary Works Team in an agreed form. The minimum requirement is a
monthly update.
The Temporary Works Register will be issued to the PC a minimum of 4 week intervals after first
submission and will be issued “For Information” after the first submission is “Accepted”.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator for this area will be the only reviewer required from the PC for
Contractors Temporary Works Registers.
Company Document
The Contractor Temporary Works Register is to include a column to identify if the Temporary Works
impact or have any interface on: -
• Other Temporary Works
• Any item of Permanent Works
Contractors Temporary Works Register to include a column to identify if the Temporary

Works impact or have any interface on: -
Contractors TWCs are to ensure a Temporary Works register is developed & maintained for all
Temporary Works under their control.
This information is to be recorded in a format to suit the contractor and as long as the information is
clearly visible there is no need for any specific formatting.
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator will
work jointly to ensure this information is suitably recorded and stored for visibility as required.
Any Temporary Works which remain as part of the Permanent Works must be recorded in a
format agreed with the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator or relevant PC Temporary
Works Coordinator. These items will be added to the Health & Safety File.

c) date required;
NOTE 1:- The implementation risk classification might be influenced by the client’s
requirements, such as increasing the risk level for a particular section of temporary works.
k) date of permit to unload (take out of use) as necessary;
l) third-party approvals;
m) identify impact or interface with other Temporary Works and / or Permanent Works; and
n) identify the approval of Temporary Works Design Contractors (if used) by PC TWC.
Company Document
11.5. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS SUPERVISOR
Once on site the contractor will issue their Temporary Works Supervisor Appointments to the relevant
PC Temporary Works Coordinator for information. The format of this issue is to be agreed with the PC
Temporary Works Coordinator but can be via E-mail.
The Contractors Temporary Works Supervisors should be appointed by the Contractors Temporary
Works Coordinator using the PC Appointment of Temporary Works Coordinator / Supervisor (or a
similarly approved form). The Contractor TWC is to meet the TWS and explain the requirements and
responsibilities of their appointment before they are officially appointed as a TWS.
The relevant Contractor TWC is to supply a table listing their TWS’s names, date of appointment and
area of responsibility to the relevant PC TWC.
Refer to Section 6.4 & 7.3
11.6. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGNS
Once on site the contractor will issue their Temporary Works Design packs for review and
“Acceptance””.
The relevant contractor TWC is responsible for the management and coordination of Temporary Works
Designers and notifying the PC TWC as required.
The relevant Contractor TWC will coordinate and liaise with the Temporary Workers Designer
as required and notify the PC TWC as required
The PC Temporary Works Coordinators as Lead Reviewers for submitted Contractor Temporary Works
Design packs will be looking for the following information checklist as a minimum: -
• Design Brief present

• Suitable Temporary Works Design Check Categorisation i.e. 0, 1, 2 or 3
• Designers Risk Assessment present
• Temporary Works Design evident and present
• Design Check present suitable to the Design Check Category. In all cases of Category, the
name of the designer and the name of the design checker is to be clear and evident
• As a minimum a sketch or outline drawing clearly showing the proposed Temporary Works being
used as the Design intends. This sketch / outline drawing is to have enough information to make
the Temporary Works Design intent and limitations clearly visible to anyone observing this
Temporary Works in a finished drawing. If there are any variations from this sketch / outline
drawing and any drawings produced at a later date with this Temporary Works Design, then the
drawings cannot be accepted or used on the construction site as this will mean the design intent
cannot be verified in the drawing on site.
Company Document
• Temporary Works Implementation Risk Class present, i.e. Very Low (VL), Low (L), Medium (M)
or High (H)
• Does the Temporary Works Design match the Temporary Works Design Brief
• Has the Designers Risk Assessment considered all of the relevant hazards for the Temporary
Works Design and demonstrated how the design has removed or reduced the likelihood of these
hazards or where this is not possible what controls the designer is putting in place in relation to
these hazards and the resulting overall risk, to be communicated to the site teams as required
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator as Lead Reviewer will return the design documents without
“Acceptance” if they do not meet the requirements of the bullet point list above as a minimum plus any
further additional requirements depending on the design in question.
11.6.1. CONTRACTORS TWS DESIGN RISK ASSESSMENT
Contractors are to ensure that all completed Temporary Works Design packages contain a design risk
assessment highlighting residual risk that will be managed by Contractors site team.
Temporary Works Designers must provide information about aspects of the designs that could create
significant risks during any future construction work. (Safety, Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ)
box in all drawings).
Temporary Works Designers are to provide suggested construction sequences (or similar) showing
how the design will be constructed. Contractors are to ensure that the construction sequence is followed
however any variations from the designer’s design will be brought to the attention of the Temporary
Works Coordinator and the design brief revised if required.
11.6.2. CONTRACTORS EXTERNAL DESIGNERS
Contractors will ensure that where external design companies are used, they must go through an
approval process in order to demonstrate their competence. Where external companies are used to
undertake designs, all relevant information must be provided, this may include:
• Design brief
• Site contact details
• Photos
• Geo-technical information
• Build methodology
• Site constraints
• Any other information specific to the design
Company Document
11.6.3. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN

CHECKER COMPETENCIES
In the assessment of Temporary Works Designers or Temporary Works Design Checkers the
Contractors Temporary Works Procedure should ensure that the design is undertaken by competent
individuals or organisations.
Organisations working in a joint venture may use their joint venture partner’s company’s organisation
to undertake a CAT 2 & 3 check providing the designer is independent from the checkers company.
Further guidance on joint venture Temporary Works checks can be found in Table 2.
Where organisations opt to use partner company’s Temporary Works teams to undertake CAT 2 & 3
design checks a comprehensive list of ongoing checks will be produced by the contractor and supplied
to the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator or the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator.
Contractors in-house CAT 2 and CAT 3 Design Checkers information will be submitted to the
PC for information. Third party organisations checkers do not have to be submitted as the
Contractors own Temporary Works Procedures will ensure their competency assessment
11.7. CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPORARY

WORKS
11.7.1. SUPERVISION OF WORK ON SITE AND CHECKING
Contractors will ensure the appropriate level of Temporary Works supervision is available to support
the construction delivery teams. The Temporary Works Coordinators will liaise with the Temporary
Works Supervisors to identify areas where Temporary Works supervision is required. Temporary Works
Supervisors responsibilities are defined in the Appointment Letter.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
In addition to the responsibilities set out in the Temporary Works Supervisors Appointment Letter, the
following items must be considered:
• Work on site should be subject to careful direction, supervision and inspection to ensure the
Temporary Works are constructed safely and in accordance with the design, and only when all
checks have proved satisfactory should the works be loaded, used and dismantled in
accordance with the design and method statement
• All occurrences and information relevant to the Temporary Works should be captured and noted
for example in a site diary or other appropriate records where it can be accessed and referenced
• Design documentation and method statements will be followed and Temporary Works
Supervisors should compare the actual conditions onsite against the design. If deviations occur,
Company Document
then work should be stopped and the matter referred to the Temporary Works Coordinator /
Temporary Works Designer
• For CAT 2 & 3 items, if required the Temporary Works Coordinator/s will carry out a final
inspection using a Permit to Load / dismantle before the Temporary Works are put into use or
dismantled
11.7.2. PERMITS TO LOAD AND PERMITS TO UNLOAD /

DISMANTLE
It is the responsibility of the contractor’s Temporary Works team to ensure where required the permit to
load and permit to unload / strike / dismantle are issued. Permit to load and permit to unload / strike /
dismantle will be issued in accordance with the contractors approved Temporary Works procedure.
Temporary Works Coordinators will ensure a suitable inspection is conducted prior to permit to load
and permit to unload / strike / dismantle being issued. The Temporary Works Coordinator will produce
a schedule outlining the anticipated Temporary Works and where applicable the requirement for Permit
to load and permit to unload / strike / dismantle.
The PC Temporary Works Supervisors will be responsible for conducting site wide Temporary Works
inspections. The PC Temporary Works Supervisors will liaise with the PC Lead Temporary Works
Coordinator or the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator to identify at risk areas to ensure the
appropriate level of support.
A regular Temporary Works meeting will be used as a forum to discuss any permits to load or permit to
unload / strike / dismantle and record any agreements or points relating to upcoming permits on site.
11.7.3. RISK ASSESSMENT AND METHOD STATEMENT
Contractors will produce method statements and associated risk assessments (RAMS) following or in
parallel to the Temporary Works design package approval process.
The RAMS will be submitted for review and approval by the contractor prior to work commencing on
site. The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator
or a suitable member of the Temporary Works team will review RAMS for Temporary Works CAT 2 and
above.
11.7.4. ALTERATIONS
Contractors are to ensure that all proposed Temporary Works changes are referred to the Contractors
Designer via the Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator to confirm that the changes are safe and
acceptable to proceed.
Company Document
No changes are to be made to Temporary Works without the approval of the Contractors
Designer or Temporary Works Coordinator
It is common to encounter differing site conditions to those which were designed for, i.e.
change in ground condition. If this does occur the construction of the Temporary Works
must stop immediately and advice must be sought from the Temporary Works Designer
The designer will ensure that all alterations to accepted Temporary Works will result in the design being
reviewed and updated prior to being issued in writing and submitted to the Temporary Works
Coordinator for review and acceptance. The Temporary Works Coordinator will decide on the level of
check required.
Contractors will ensure that should any design change result in additional hazards or increase in risk
that a formal review of existing site documentation is undertaken and sent to PC Lead Temporary Works
Coordinator or the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator for review and acceptance.
Refer to Section 4.4.5
11.7.5. CONTROL OF COMMUNICATIONS
Contractors will ensure that where instruction is given to their team on Temporary Works changes or
where issues have been identified and instruction given to rectify, these are followed up in writing and
recorded in the Temporary Works Register. Contractors will maintain records of these communications
as long as required.
11.7.6. TEMPORARY WORKS HANDOVERS
Contractors are to ensure prior to the handover of their Temporary Works that all information relevant
to their Temporary Works are packaged and submitted to the PC for review and acceptance. The
minimum required information to be submitted is as follows:
• Design brief
• Design information
• Design certificate (if applicable)
• Any permits still “live”
• Any RAMS used for the construction of the Temporary Works
• Any Installation / Construction information that maybe relevant, i.e. pull out tests, etc.
Once accepted from the contractor the PC will be responsible for coordinating the handover to the new
Temporary Works owner.
Company Document
12. TEMPORARY WORKS INTERFACE
Interfaces, in both design and execution, are one of the key areas where problems can occur in
Temporary Works and should be controlled by all who can affect the interface to ensure the risk to the
Temporary Works can be managed effectively.
The PC’s TWC should be responsible for classifying Temporary Works, where there is an interface
between contractors. Where there is no interface, the TWC of the organization carrying out the
Temporary Works should be responsible for classifying the Temporary Works.
The design and construction of Permanent Works and the attendant Temporary Works often involves
several organizations, therefore introducing a number of organizational interfaces. Common
arrangements include the following and combinations thereof:
a) Equipment can be hired, with the supplier carrying out the design, or supplying the basic design
data;
b) Equipment can be erected using operatives who are not direct employees of the main
construction organization, e.g. the supplier of the equipment might also erect it; and
c) Use of a design produced by another organization.
When work is being carried out by different organizations, the organizational interfaces can be
manifested on site as physical interfaces between different phases of the scheme, e.g. it is common for
one organization to prepare and provide the foundations upon which another subsequently erects the
main Temporary Works structure.
The physical interface in this example is particularly critical, but in all cases the physical constraints and
interface conditions should be clearly defined and the work procedures adopted should take account of
these interfaces.
The TWC should manage these interfaces and retain an overview of the whole scheme to ensure each
step of the procedure is completed and does not adversely affect the scheme.
Details of the interfaces should be included in the construction phase plan.
When work is being carried out at a number of small projects, a TWS with an appropriate level of
authority may be appointed for each individual project, under the overall responsibility of a single TWC.
Contractors are appointed by clients, or by other contractors to carry out the works. In all cases the
contracting organization’s procedures should recognize that, whatever the method of procurement, the
PC has ultimate responsibility for the safe execution of all Temporary Works on site.
The contractor’s procedure should cover the management of any Temporary Works and include
measures for ensuring that the roles of a TWC and TWS are carried out by competent individuals.
Where contractors are appointed by the client and/or PC, the PC's DI should ensure that contractors’
Temporary Works procedures are satisfactory.
If the contractors' procedures are deemed not acceptable by the PC's DI, then they should work to the
Temporary Works procedures of the PC.
Company Document
12.1. TEMPORARY WORKS INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
Temporary Works Coordinators are to identify on their Temporary Works Register any Temporary
Works Interfaces with: -
• Other Temporary Works; and / or
• Permanent Works
Temporary Works Coordinators are to communicate this interface to the relevant NNB Temporary
Works Coordinator.
Contractor (PC) TWC on site should be consulted by the relevant organisation’s TWC and be
responsible for the risk classification
classification
Temporary Works that interface with other Temporary Works or Permanent Works require this interface
to be suitably managed and controlled both on site and prior to site during the Temporary Works Design
phase.
12.2. TEMPORARY WORKS INTERFACE WITH PERMANENT

WORKS
Temporary Works interfacing with Permanent Works will require the relevant Temporary Works
Coordinator to manage and coordinate this interface and to identify this to the relevant PC Temporary
Works Coordinator.
The Permanent Works Designer can be consulted by the relevant Contractor Temporary Works
Coordinator raising a Request For Information (RFI) or a Field Change Request (FCR) as required.
This is to be recorded with a suitable column on the relevant Temporary Works Register.
Company Document
The Temporary Works cannot be brought into use on site until any outstanding RFI’s or FCR’s are
suitably answered and agreed.
Suitable arrangements can be agreed with Contractors and the PC Temporary Works Coordinators for
how this is managed and controlled.
13. TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN FLOW CHART
Company Document
Identification of temporary works
TWC Identifies
Temporary Works
TWC Categorises
Temporary Works
Categorisation
CAT CAT CAT CAT PERMANENT

0 1 2 3 WORKS INTERFACE
Competent Person Competent Person to establish design brief in accordance with section 4.4.1 of the Temporary
Selects Solution - Works Procedure
No Design The Relevant TWC will raise a RFI
or FCR as required and identify
Design
this on the relevant Temporary

Design Brief issued to designer
Works Register.
Refer to Section 4.5 and Section
12.0
The TWD will provide a design in accordance with the design brief
PWD Check and reply to RFI

Cat 1 Cat 2 Cat 3 or FCR as required
The check will be

Competent person
carried out by
checks and accepts The check will be
another member of The check should be The design will need
Temporary Works carried out by an
the design team carried out by checking to Category 0,
Check
individual not
another organisation 1, 2 or 3 as appropriate
involved in the
design and not and be approved by the
consulted by the Permanent Works
designer Designer (PWD) as noted
in the response to the RFI
or FCR as required
Site Temporary Works
Register
Temporary Works Coordinator records accepted Temporary Works on Site Register
14. VOIDS AND OPENINGS
Company Document
Where any opening exist through which any part of a person can fall it must be covered using material
that is sufficiently strong to support any forces that it may be subjected to i.e. falling person or object,
mobile plant, etc.
Each cover will be constructed and implemented in accordance to the approved Temporary Works
Design. It also must be prevented from being inadvertently displaced or adjusted.
The following requirements must be adhered to in all cases: -
• The cover must be clearly identified by being painted bright yellow
• DANGER HOLE BELOW must be clearly marked in red on the cover
• The cover must be on a register with a unique reference number assigned to it
• The Temporary Works Design is to be recorded on the relevant Temporary Works Register
• The cover is to be inspected at regular intervals (prior to first use and weekly as a minimum)
and maintained as required
• All covers will be recorded on a specific Voids and Openings Register
The relevant TWC will record Temporary Works Designs for void openings an in the
A register will be kept for Voids and Openings
15. TEMPORARY WORKS AND LIFTING
When undertaking lifting operations, it is the responsibility of the Temporary Works Coordinator for that
area to ensure that the acceptable ground bearing pressure beneath the outrigger pads, tracks, wheels
etc.
Temporary Works items that are required to be lifted will incorporate designated lifting points which will
be clearly identified on the design. All lifting operations regardless of the Temporary Works will be
undertaken in accordance with the Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations (LOLER).
Company Document
16. SCAFFOLDING WORKS ON THE CONSTRUCTION SITE
When undertaking scaffold on site the category of design and implementation risk is to be agreed with
the PC TWC on site.
It is foreseen that proprietary system scaffold used as per the manufacturers guidelines and erected by
suitably experienced and competent Scaffolders will be Category 0 Design to a set limit of height or
use. The implementation risk will depend on a number of factors including the area / environment where
the scaffold is being erected. This is to be confirmed by the PC TWC on site.
It is foreseen that Scaffold Contractor design books may be accepted by the PC TWC on site and
suitably experienced and competent Scaffolders from that Scaffold Contractor would be able to use the
Scaffold Contractor design book within the parameters of the design. In this situations the design would
be Category 0 but the implementation risk will depend on a number of factors including the area /
environment where the scaffold is being erected. This is to be confirmed by the PC TWC on site.
National Access and Scaffolding Confederation (NASC) Technical Guide (TG) 20 Designs will be
Category 1 designs but the implementation risk will depend on a number of factors including the area /
environment where the scaffold is being erected. This is to be confirmed by the PC TWC on site. TG
20 designs will have a Compliance Sheet available on site and the limits of TG 20 designs are to be
noted such as: -
• Tube & Fit Scaffold

• 16m maximum height of Scaffold
Company Document
• Each Scaffold elevation maybe loaded at one working platform and one working platform loaded
at 50%
• Maximum load Class 4 = 3.0 kN/m2
• Transom spacing to a maximum of 1.2m
• Bay Lengths to a maximum of 2.4m
• Maximum total board width is 5 Boards
• Maximum inside boards is 2 Boards
• Maximum lift height is 2.0m except for pavement lift
• Tied at alternative lifts and alternative standards
• Façade bracing to the top lift at every elevation. One set per six bays
• Ledger bracing at alternative standards in all lifts
• Double guard rails provided at boarded lifts. Single guardrails left in place at unboarded lifts, in
accordance with NASC SG4. Triple guard rails maybe provided at the top lift if required.
• May include brick guards or may be clad with sheeting or debris-netting.
Any Scaffold Designs not mentioned in the previous paragraphs will be Category 2 or higher designs
and again this is to be agreed with the PC TWC on site.
17. TEMPORARY WORKS ASSESSMENTS / AUDITS ON SITE
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and / or relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator or
Supervisor will routinely undertake an assessment of the Contractors Temporary Works procedure. The
audits are not expected to last longer than half a day.
The assessment / audits provides an opportunity to verify the procedures are being followed and a
suitable level of control and inspection of Temporary Works is demonstrable by the contractor.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinators / Supervisors undertaking Assessments and Audits

will score this and report this score as part of the PC Temporary Works Report issued to the
PC Management team
18. TEMPORARY WORKS INSPECTIONS
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator and / or relevant PC Temporary Works Supervisor will undertake
regular site inspections of Temporary Works.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinators / Supervisors undertaking Inspections will score this
and report this score as part of the PC Temporary Works Report issued to the PC Management
team
Company Document
Contractor Temporary Works Coordinators will supply an organogram showing TWC’s (if they
are Lead TWC’s) and TWS’s they manage with contact names and numbers to ensure the
correct individuals are contacted for Temporary Works Site Inspections
Contractor Temporary Works Coordinators will supply the PC document Reference number
for their Temporary Works Register to assist the Temporary Works Site Inspection
19. TEMPORARY WORKS MEETINGS AND FORUMS
Various meetings and other engagements are required to plan, manage, monitor and coordinate
Temporary Works activities. Provided below is an overview of the critical meetings and forums that will
be held at the construction site. These are:
• The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and / or a PC Temporary Works Coordinator will
chair a Bi-weekly Temporary Works Coordination meeting with the Contractors Temporary
Works teams.
chair a Bi-weekly Temporary Works Interface meeting with the Contractors Temporary Works
teams.
chair a Monthly Temporary Works Coordination meeting with the PC Construction Delivery
Group & Surveillance teams. If there is no attendance at this meeting it is assumed there are no
issues to raise to the PC Temporary Works Team on site.
• The Contractor TWS is to have a regular meeting and / or site walk around with the relevant PC
Temporary Works Coordinator or a suitably delegated member of the PC Temporary Works
team on site. The contract partner can record this meeting formally as required to ensure any
agreements or relevant discussions are suitably recorded.
• The PC Scaffolding Lead will chair a regular Scaffold & Access meeting for relevant parties on
the construction Site.
APPENDIX Q
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Contractor


Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Company Document
CONTRACTOR
Revision 01
Date of Issue
DRAFT
Status UNDER REVIEW
APPROVED
Technical Reviewer
Document Control
Company Document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1. scope ........................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY........................................................................................................................ 5
3. Temporary works management - organisations procedures ......................................................... 9
3.1. Organisations designated individual ............................................................................................. 9
3.1.1. Clients Designated Individual .............................................................................................. 10
3.1.2. Principal designers Designated Individual ........................................................................... 11
3.1.3. Permanent works designer Designated Individual ............................................................... 12
3.1.4. Client appointed contractor Designated Individual ............................................................... 13
...................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.4. Design of Temporary works ....................................................................................................... 20
4.4.1. Design brief ......................................................................................................................... 20
4.4.3. Choice of temporary works solution .................................................................................... 22
4.4.4. Design Check...................................................................................................................... 23
4.4.5. Design alterations ............................................................................................................... 28
4.5. Temporary works REGISTER .................................................................................................... 29
4.6. Temporary works SITE CONSIDERATIONS .............................................................................. 30
4.7. Temporary works loading / unloading & dismantling................................................................... 31
Company Document
4.7.1. Temporary works loading .................................................................................................... 31

4.7.2. Temporary works unloading ................................................................................................ 32
4.7.3. Temporary works dismantle ................................................................................................ 33
5.1. Typical TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC IS APPOINTED BY THE CLIENT .................... 34
5.2. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC appoints a sub-contractor to manage their own
temporary works................................................................................................................................ 35
own temporary works ........................................................................................................................ 36
5.4. Contractor Temporary Works management organisation ........................................................... 37
6. Contractor Temporary Works personnel..................................................................................... 38
6.1. Contractor designated individual ................................................................................................. 38
6.2. Contractor Temporary Works coordinator .................................................................................. 39
6.3. Contractor Temporary Works supervisor .................................................................................... 42
6.4. Dual responsibilities.................................................................................................................... 44
7. Permanent Works Designers...................................................................................................... 45
8. Temporary Works Designers ...................................................................................................... 46
8.1. Contractor Approval of temporary works design contractors ...................................................... 47
9. Basic requirements for TEMPORARY works procedures on site ................................................ 48
10. Contractors TEMPORARY works in relation to the pc ................................................................ 49
10.1. Contractors appointment of di ............................................................................................. 49
10.2. Contractors Temporary Works procedure ........................................................................... 49
10.3. Contractors Temporary Works coordinator.......................................................................... 50
10.4. Contractors Temporary Works register................................................................................ 50
10.5. Contractors Temporary Works SUPERVISOR .................................................................... 52
10.6. Contractors Temporary Works designs ............................................................................... 52
10.6.1. Contractors TWs design RISK ASSESSMENT ................................................................ 53
10.6.2. Contractors external designers ........................................................................................ 53
10.6.3. Contractors temporary works design checker competencies ........................................... 54
10.7. Contractors construction of Temporary Works .................................................................... 54
10.7.1. Supervision of work on site and checking ........................................................................ 54
10.7.2. Permits to load and permits to unload / dismantle............................................................ 55
10.7.3. Risk assessment and method statement .......................................................................... 55
10.7.4. Alterations........................................................................................................................ 56
10.7.5. Control of communications .............................................................................................. 56
10.7.6. Temporary Works handovers........................................................................................... 56
11. TEMPORARY Works interface ................................................................................................... 57
Company Document
11.1. TEMPORARY Works interface management ...................................................................... 58

11.2. TEMPORARY Works interface with permanent works ........................................................ 58
12. TEMPORARY Works design flow chart ...................................................................................... 59
13. Voids and openings.................................................................................................................... 60
14. Temporary Works and lifting ....................................................................................................... 61
15. Scaffolding works on the construction site .................................................................................. 62
16. Temporary Works assessments / audits on site ......................................................................... 63
17. Temporary Works inspections .................................................................................................... 63
18. Temporary Works meetings and forums..................................................................................... 64
Company Document
1. INTRODUCTION
by the Contractor.
This will allow the Contractor to understand, control or mitigate risks associated with Temporary
Works.
Regulations.
1.1. SCOPE
and Management (CDM) Regulations 2015 – Regulation 9, 13, 15, 20, 22 and 23 and BS 5975:2019
Code of Practice for Temporary Works Procedures and the Permissible Stress Design of Falsework.
All contractors (including their suppliers) and any other organisation and personnel who are engaged
with the planning, organisation, coordination, supervision and execution of Temporary Works must
adhere to or exceed the requirements of the PC’s procedure.
The PC will monitor and verify compliance of the Contractor with this procedure across all Temporary
Works undertaken on the PC’s construction site.
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractors' DI should establish a procedure describing how the main items for which the
Contractor has responsibility should be managed.
Company Document

Key Symbols
followed

Company Document

Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
Contractor Appoints a Contractors DI produces a

Identify Temporary Works
Designated Individual (DI) Temporary Works Procedure
requirements
(6.1 & 10.1) (10.1)
Reviewed by PC DI & Contractors Designated

Contractors Management Team
Temporary Works Team Individual
Submit the Temporary Works Identify and appoint Temporary

Submit Temporary Works
Procedure to PC for review and Works Coordinator &
Coordinator Appointment
acceptance Temporary Works Supervisor
(10.3 & 10.5)
(10.2) (6.2 & 6.3)
Reviewed & Accepted by PC DI Contractors Designated Reviewed & Accepted by PC DI

& Temporary Works Team Individual & Temporary Works Team
Produce a Temporary Works Prepare and issue design briefs Design to be developed in
register and input all known where applicable, clearly accordance with the Temporary
Temporary Works detailing specific requirements Works design brief
(10.4) (4.4.1 & 10.6) (10.6)
Contractors Temporary Works Must be undertaken by a Must be undertaken by a

Coordinator Competent Person Competent Person
Ensure the Temporary Works

Ensure design checks are Identify any Temporary Works
design is in line with the
carried out and recorded Interface and suitable record
Temporary Works design brief
(4.4 & 10.6) (11)
(4.4.1 & 10.6)
Contractor Temporary Works Contractors Temporary Works Contractors Temporary Works

Designer Coordinator Coordinator
Raise an RFI or FCR if required Submit the Temporary Works Ensure the installation of the Temporary
for any Temporary Works design pack to PC for review Works on site in accordance with the
Interface and suitable record and acceptance design and design risk assessment
(11.2) (10.6) (10.7)
Contractors Temporary Works Reviewed by PC Temporary Contractors Temporary Works

Coordinator Works Team Supervisors
Ensure Inspections are carried

Permits to load to be obtained
out. (Daily, Weekly, Adverse PC Inspections & Audits on
and Issued
Weather, Long Term etc) Temporary Works items on site
(10.7.2)
(10.7.1)
Contractors Temporary Works Contractor Temporary Works PC Temporary Works

Coordinator Supervisor Coordinator / Supervisor
KEY
Permit to Strike / Dismantle
Ensure records are maintained
obtained and issued Contractors
(10.7.6)
(10.7.2) Responsibility
Contractors Temporary Works

Contractors Team PC Responsibility
Coordinator
NOTE:
When reading this flowchart refer to the specific requirements within this procedure. The relevant section is
referred to in bold (Example 3.4.1)
Company Document

PROCEDURES
and appointments, all with the intention of removing ambiguity and making the PC’s and
Contractoverall responsibilities clear.
a) Clients
d) Principal Contractors / Sub-Contractors / Specialist Contractors (including demolition
contractors) all of which manage their own Temporary Works. This includes third-party
employed contractors, such as utility providers and their contractors
organisation.
Individual (DI).
Company Document
required
Company Document
CDM Regulations.
TWC
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
include:
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
such as: -
site.

INDIVIDUAL
Company Document
Works scheme;
appropriate;
required;
hold points; and
construction phase.

INDIVIDUAL
as: -
on site.
Company Document
with the PC's TWC.


Company Document

debris);
if they are made.
implemented.
Company Document
change.
• Their design
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High

• Competence
Company Document
classification
Company Document
measures
risk class
failure.

or
• an authorized
TWS.
• Relatively or
TWC.
secondary events.
elements.
• an authorized
one another
The PC’s TWC is to
• Inexperienced workforce. countersign other
contractor’s Permits
to confirm they have
or equipment.
followed their
• Failure would be catastrophic approved Temporary
in its own right, or if minor might Works Procedures
events.
Company Document

The design of Temporary Works should be undertaken with reasonable professional skill and care as
highlighted in BS 5975 Clause 13.
The Permanent Works Designer should ensure their design (BS 5975 Clause 13.1.2 & 3) :-

Regulation 9.
might be mitigated.
4.4.1. DESIGN BRIEF

BS 5975 Clause 13.2 relates to Temporary Works Design Briefs and notes this should be prepared to
serve as the basis for subsequent decisions, design work, calculations, drawings and design checks.
All concerned with the construction should contribute towards the preparation of the Temporary
Works Design Brief.
be drawn up.
Company Document
account.
Design.
carried out.
water level.
Company Document
output.

should: -
• Layout
• Loading
• Limitations
• Tolerances
• etc.
Company Document
4.4.4. DESIGN CHECK
complex.
Category 1 check.
Company Document
• The designer
certificate.
conditions
Company Document
design output


• The designer
Company Document

Checker
publications.

falsework).
Company Document
4.4.4.1. RESOLUTION OF QUERIES RAISED BY THE DESIGN

CHECKER
further.
further required


checker.
Company Document
design checker.
design.
Company Document
4.5. TEMPORARY WORKS REGISTER
BS 5975 states the Temporary Works Register is an aide memoire to assist categorizing, designing
and checking all the relevant Temporary Works. Correct use of such a register is an important
management tool for the site. The register is also useful as verification that a safe procedure is in use
on the site.
There is no standard format of a register; each organization needs to relate its register to the type of
work carried out and the nomenclature/forms, etc. used in the company procedures. What is important
is how it is used and the way in which it is maintained and kept up to date as the project progresses.
The PC Temporary Works Register is usually on a project-specific database this gives the opportunity
for several different staff to monitor progress of the Temporary Works, but overall it remains the
responsibility of the PC’s TWC throughout the project.
Where a contractor has been appointed to manage their own Temporary Works the relevant TWC
should also prepare and maintain their own Temporary Works register.
The TWC should supply the register to the PC’s TWC :-

The register should be in a common format to allow incorporation of the TWC’s data into a database of
the PC’s TWC’s if the project has TW Register database.
The PC’s TWC should ensure that a Temporary Works register is prepared and maintained throughout
the project. The register should identify what Temporary Works are needed on the contract. The
register, often commenced at tender stage in outline, is:-
• Not expected to identify all the details of all the Temporary Works to be required.
As the project progresses the register should be maintained as an “active document” and the PC’s TWC
should ensure that it is kept up to date.
The register is an important management tool, and the relevant company should have a process by
which such registers are regularly audited. The auditing should be carried out by someone familiar and
competent with Temporary Works.
c) date required;
NOTE:- The implementation risk classification might be influenced by the client’s requirements,
such as increasing the risk level for a particular section of Temporary Works.
Company Document

j) erection complete and checked with date of permit to load (bring into use) if necessary;
k) date of permit to unload (take out of use) if necessary; and
l) third-party approvals.
4.6. TEMPORARY WORKS SITE CONSIDERATIONS
Work on site should be the subject of careful direction, supervision and inspection and checks to ensure
that the Temporary Works is constructed safely in accordance with the design and specified materials
and equipment, and that only when all checks have proved satisfactory is the works loaded, used,
maintained, unloaded and then dismantled in accordance with an implementation plan.
The PC's TWC or relevant TWC should ensure that a Temporary Works implementation plan is in place
covering the erection/assembly, use, unloading and dismantling of the Temporary Works including what
inspections, checks, hold points, permits and certification are required. This should include defining the
regular inspections which are required during the use (loading) of the Temporary Works.
The implementation plan could consist of the method statement, task specific risk assessment,
inspection and test plan (ITP), checklists and other certification (for example, quality control check lists).
The inspection and test plan can be used to define hold points, where works stops for an inspection or
testing to take place. A permit is used to release the hold point and allow work to continue.
The implementation plan should be developed taking into account the site conditions, programme,
original design brief and the construction phase plan and use of the drawings, specification and
methodology supplied by the designer.
The plan should define hold points at which the structure should be checked for conformity and who is
authorized to do so, including issuing permits to load or unload (release the hold point), signing of quality
control check lists etc. by the PC's TWC, the relevant TWC or the TWS, and how the results of these
inspections should be communicated and acted upon.
If the implementation plan has been produced by others it should be approved by the PC's TWC or
relevant TWC.
TWS may issue the permit for a defined scope and range of work as described in the individual's
appointment.
The PC's TWC or relevant TWC should ensure that the guidance on the implementation of the design
provided by the designer or supplier, including any residual risks, are incorporated into the
implementation plan.
Company Document

The design documentation and method statement should be followed but those responsible for work on
site and they should bear in mind the need to compare conditions experienced on site during
construction with those assumed by the design in order that appropriate action can be taken if it
becomes apparent that they are different.
At all stages during fabrication/pre-fabrication, construction/erection, use and dismantling of the
Temporary Works, the information being used should be checked to ensure that it is correct, and that
the work carried out is in accordance with the design details (drawings/sketches) and is as specified to
ensure that the completed structure will function as intended.
This is necessary, not only to ensure that the Temporary Works are safe to use, but also to facilitate
remedial work should this prove necessary; it is often difficult to do this later.
Prior to bringing Temporary Works into service a final inspection should be carried out to verify that it
has been constructed in accordance with the requirements of the design and any subsequent approved
modifications.
The results of these inspections, together with any requirements for improvement, should be recorded
by the appropriate person as allowed by the implementation plan. For complex or innovative designs
consideration should be given to an inspection by the TWD.
It might be necessary to carry out inspections of the Temporary Works at points during
assembly/erection.
4.7. TEMPORARY WORKS LOADING / UNLOADING &

DISMANTLING
4.7.1. TEMPORARY WORKS LOADING
As a means of exercising control over bringing the Temporary Works into use a formal procedure for
giving permission to load, or proceed to the next stage in the implementation sequence should be part
of the implementation plan.
Not all Temporary Works will require a Permit To Load but this can be highlighted where required on
the Temporary Works Register.
In simple cases a single “permit to load”, when the Temporary Works has been checked, might be
appropriate.
In complex or larger cases, permits might be required at different stages, both as regards loading or
for different areas or for excavation.
It is normally desirable to limit the period of validity of the permit, as subsequent modifications or
changes in circumstances (soil wash out under footings or similar) may take place, For example, a
permit to load for a falsework is normally valid for 24 hours.
The area over which loading can take place, and to what extent, is set down in the permit, e.g. it might
be “reinforcement only”.
Company Document
The PC's TWC, an authorized TWC or authorized TWS as identified in the implementation plan,
should ensure that a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) is issued to the site team prior to its
use.
a) The Temporary Works have been constructed in accordance with the certified design (design
and design check certificates have been issued and the drawings and specification used are
the ones referenced on the certificates);
b) Any modifications to the Temporary Works have been approved by the designer; and
c) The water, ground and environmental conditions and use are as envisaged by the design.
Where a Permit To Load is required, the Permit will not be signed until it is confirmed the
Temporary Works are constructed in accordance with the certified design and design check
certificate which will clearly highlight the drawing / sketch to reference for the Temporary
Works on site
4.7.2. TEMPORARY WORKS UNLOADING
Where the Temporary Works is used to provide support to the Permanent Works until it is self-
supporting, the PC's TWC, an authorized TWC or authorized TWS, as identified in the implementation
plan, should determine that the Permanent Works have attained adequate strength and/or stability, with
reference to the PWD’s specification or in conjunction with the PWD if necessary, prior to ensuring that
a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use) is issued.
A TWC or TWS may issue the permit for a defined scope and range of work if authorized to do so by
the PC's TWC in the implementation plan; for example, they might need to verify concrete strength or
that all structural steelwork elements and connections are completed or that any post-tensioning has
been carried out prior to issuing the permit.
The sequence and order of removing Temporary Works, where critical, should be defined in the design
output and/or confirmed in the implementation plan. The sequence should be referenced in the permit
to unload or permit to proceed.
The sequence and order of removing Temporary Works supports can be critical to avoid damage to the
Permanent Works under construction. Generally, the supports to spanning members should be
removed starting mid-span, and for cantilever sections, should be removed starting at the tip.
The PC’s TWC, or TWC where appointed, should refer to the Permanent Works and/or Temporary
Works Designer if in any doubt about the sequence.
The sequence and level of props removed during backpropping operations is particularly important to
avoid overloading of the completed slabs. The sequence should be agreed by the PC's TWC or the
relevant TWC with the Permanent Works designer and be included in the implementation plan.
The Principal Designer is to confirm all of the requirements from the Permanent Works
Designer to the PC’s TWC in relation to Temporary Works such as construction sequences
and loading for backpropping, etc.
Company Document
4.7.3. TEMPORARY WORKS DISMANTLE
When the structure being supported by the Temporary Works has become self-supporting, or the
excavation has been backfilled or other condition, the Temporary Works should be dismantled
(removed) in accordance with any restrictions imposed by the Permanent Works Designer as set out in
the implementation plan. As at the loading stage, a permit to dismantle the Temporary Works might be
appropriate, particularly where this takes place in stages. Care should be taken to ensure that the
Temporary Works remains stable during all stages of the dismantling process.
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)
It is to be noted that each
of the TWC’s shown may
have direct contact to a
Specialist Suppler,
Temporary Works Designer,
TWD In-House External an In-House Temporary
Temporary Works Designer Temporary Works Designer Works Designer and / or an
(TWD) (TWD)
external Temporary Works
Designer in the same way
PC PC
Temporary Works Supervisor Temporary Works Supervisor as is shown for the Lead
TWS TWS TWC but it is not shown for
clarity.
PC PC
Site Team Site Team

On Site On Site
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
5.2. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE PC APPOINTS A SUB-CONTRACTOR

TO MANAGE THEIR OWN TEMPORARY WORKS

shown may have direct contact to a
Specialist Suppler, Temporary Works
Designer, an In-House Temporary Works
shown for the Lead TWC but it is not
shown for clarity.
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
5.3. TYPICAL TW ORGANISATION WHERE THE CLIENT APPOINTS A SUB-CONTRACTOR TO

MANAGE THEIR OWN TEMPORARY WORKS
Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

Specialist Supplier PCs PCs shown may have direct contact to a
TWD In-House External Specialist Suppler, Temporary Works
(TWD) (TWD) Designer, an In-House Temporary Works
PC shown for the Lead TWC but it is not
Self Delivering
Temporary Works Supervisor shown for clarity.
TWS
TWC Site Team
TWS On Site

On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
5.4. CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS MANAGEMENT ORGANISATION
Contractor Designated Individual
Contractor Lead Temporary Works Coordinator TWC & TWS numbers

are shown here
indicatively
Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator
Contractor Temporary Works Supervisor Contractor Temporary Works Supervisor Contractor Temporary Works Supervisor
Contractor Construction Delivery Team
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
6. CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS PERSONNEL
BS 5975 states to cater for the wide range of knowledge, skills, experience and qualifications which
are encountered, this British Standard is drafted in the broadest terms. This should allow the duties, of
the TWC and TWS for example, to be carried out by individuals who do not have engineering
qualifications.
6.1. CONTRACTOR DESIGNATED INDIVIDUAL

The DI should ensure that:
a) For the type, scale and complexity of work/projects undertaken by the organization, the TW
risks can be identified, classified and effectively managed;
b) There is a clear process for on-site management of the design, design checking, erection, use,
maintenance, monitoring and dismantling of Temporary Works;
c) The risks, roles and responsibilities associated with the sub-contracting of any elements of
Temporary Works are addressed;
d) A TWC is appointed for each project who is-
• Competent
• Given clear written authority
• Technically responsible to the DI
• Responsible for the implementation of the organizations procedure
• And the final authority on site for the safe use of any Temporary Works;
e) Provision is made for the appointment by the organization of one or more TWSs, where
required; and
f) The TWC is given sufficient time and resources to fulfil the role.
The Contractors Temporary Works procedure is to detail how: -
• Approval will be sought and granted from the PC on site.
• The contractor will interact with the PCs TWC on site
The role and responsibility of the Contractor DI is highlighted in BS 5975 and also refer to Section
3.1.4 for Client Appointed Contractor DI responsibilities.
The Contractor Temporary Works Designated Individual (DI) appointments are to be

supplied to the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator 6 months prior to work commencing
on site
The Contractor Temporary Works Procedure is to be supplied to the PC Lead Temporary

Works Coordinator 6 months prior to work commencing on site
Company Document
No Contractor can undertake any Temporary Works on the Construction site without: -
• A suitably experienced and competent DI appointed
• An approved Temporary Works Procedure
• An approved Temporary Works Coordinator appointed
6.2. CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR
The detailed role and responsibilities of the Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator are defined in
BS 5975.
by the PC) will be signed and approved by the contractor Designated Individual and submitted to the
PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator for acceptance.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The Contractor DI signed and approved Contractor Temporary Works Procedure is to be

work on site
The Contractor DI signed Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) appointments are
work on site
The Contractor TWC Appointments are reviewed annually by the PC Temporary Works Team
for acceptance to work on site. At any stage if concerns are raised regarding the competency
or capabilities of a Contractor TWC then their acceptance to work on site may be reviewed
and acceptance of their TWC appointment removed
The Contractor TWC should be the single point of contact for providing and receiving
relevant information from the PC’s TWC, TWS and the contractor’s site team for their
organization's Temporary Works matters
The Contractor TWC is responsible to the PC’s TWC for ensuring that their Temporary Works
is managed and designed in accordance with the relevant procedures, design, drawings and
the specification
The Contractor TWC is responsible to the PC’s TWC to organise regular update meetings
Company Document
The Contractor TWC is responsible to the PC’s TWC to issue their Temporary Works Register
at a minimum of 1 month intervals or interval agreed with the PC TWC
The TWC should be aware that the PC’s DI defines the PC’s TWC’s lines of responsibility in relation
to each contractor’s TWC and/or TWS, which is employed on the site.
The role of the TWC should include as follows: -
• The TWC should be the single point of contact for providing and receiving relevant information
from the PC’s TWC and the contractor’s site team for their organization's Temporary Works
matters.
• The TWC should be responsible for the implementation of the contractor’s approved procedure for
the control of Temporary Works.
• The role of the TWC should not include a responsibility for carrying out any design or design
• This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads, assessment of load paths,
engineering checks of any kind, determination of foundation capacity etc.
• The appointment of a person as a TWC should not preclude them from carrying out design and/or
• When appointed, the TWC should: -
o Co-ordinate the contracting organization's Temporary Works on site
o Liaise with the PC's TWC and any PC's TWS
o Where required liaise with the PC’s TWC for the preparation of design briefs
o Provide information regarding any proposed TW designers and design checkers
o Under take inspection of Temporary Works on site
o Provision of any design and design check certificates to the PC's TWC
o Checking the erected Temporary Works on site before loading/unloading.
• The TWC should be responsible to both: -
o Their organization’s designated individual, for the implementation of their organization's
procedure
o The PC’s TWC for ensuring that their Temporary Works is managed and designed in
Company Document
• The PC's TWC remains ultimately responsible for the Temporary Works on the project/site.
• The TWC should not be responsible for the day-to-day progress of the Temporary Works or other
project matters. For example: -
o Commercial
o Or Programme matters
• Where this is not possible, the PC's TWC should recognize that the role of TWC overrides other
responsibilities the individual might have and should not put progress of the works above the safety
of the Temporary Works. However, it is recognized that this might not be possible on projects that
have few or no engineering staff.
• If the TWC has responsibility for both checking the Temporary Works and progress of the
construction works, decisions should not be compromised by commercial or other pressures.
• If the TWC considers that they are under undue pressure from site management to achieve
production at the expense of structural stability, then they should seek assistance from the
organization’s Designated Individual and/or the PC’s TWC.
• On larger sites the TWC may request that one or more Temporary Works Supervisors (TWSs) be
appointed to supervise their specific Temporary Works
The duties of the TWC are as follows: -
a) Co-ordinate the Temporary Works activities of their organization;
b) Ensure that the PC’s DI has given approval to the contractor to manage and design the
Temporary Works, and confirm that the organization has accepted their appointment;
c) Ensure that the PC’s DI has either given approval to the contractor to use their own
Temporary Works procedure, or ensure that the agreed procedure is in use for their
Temporary Works;
d) Be aware of any limitations on use of their Temporary Works for which their organization is
responsible;
e) Liaise with the PC’s TWC to ensure that those involved understand the types and limits of
permits and when they have the authority to proceed by releasing the hold points;
f) Be responsible for providing information to and receiving information from the PC’s TWC to
manage the Temporary Works schemes for which they are responsible;
g) Ensure a Temporary Works register is established and maintained for the Temporary Works
involved;
h) Ensure that their register is copied to the PC’s TWC at each major update and to an agreed
regular timescale;
i) Ensure that a design brief is prepared with consultation within the project team, is adequate,
and is in accordance with the actual situation on site;
j) Where required, provide copies of any design briefs prepared and submit to the PC’s TWC
and receive confirmation there are no adverse effects on the Temporary Works which might
be planned;
k) Ensure that all Temporary Works designers and design checkers are competent and have
been verified by the organization’s DI for carrying out designs;
l) Ensure that any residual risks, identified at the design stage, assumed methods of
construction or loading constraints identified by the designer of the Permanent Works are
included in the design brief;
Company Document
m) Receive copies of the design output, design and design check certificates prior to
implementation of the Temporary Works and, where required, provide evidence to the PC’s
TWC that the design and checking has been carried out;
n) Ensure that the relevant client and/or third-party approvals, required by the contract, have
been received from the PC’s TWC;
o) Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the erection
of any Temporary Works;
p) Ensure that an inspection and test plan is prepared, along with an appropriate quality control
check list(s), based on the Temporary Works design output and is used to verify that the
q) Ensure that checks, inspections and tests are made at appropriate stages and that the
inspection and test plan (at relevant stages) and check list(s) are signed by the TWC or TWS
as appropriate and, where required, the PC's TWC;
r) Ensure that any changes or modifications to the scheme or differences from the envisaged
conditions (use or environmental) are drawn to the attention of the designer;
s) Issue a notice to prevent loading (or unloading) in the event that any inspections reveal
discrepancies between the certified and as constructed Temporary Works, until the
t) Ensure that any instructions from the PC’s TWC in connection with any identified
discrepancies in the Temporary Works have been rectified to the satisfaction of the PC’s
TWC;
u) Ensure that any agreed changes, or corrections of faults, are correctly carried out on site;
v) Ensure that during use of the Temporary Works all appropriate monitoring and maintenance
is carried out;
w) Ensure a permit to load or proceed (bring into use) after a final check, which is satisfactory, is
issued by either the PC's TWC, TWC or TWS;
x) Ensure that a permit to unload or proceed (take out of use), the Temporary Works is issued,
when it has been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength
and/or stability, by either the PC's TWC, TWC or TWS;
y) Register or record the drawings, calculations and other relevant documents relating to the
final design of their Temporary Works and, where required, submit to the PC’s TWC;
z) Ensure that a documented safe system of work is in place and implemented for the
dismantling of any Temporary Works;
aa) Ensure that any relevant information for the health and safety file is transmitted to the PC’s
TWC; and
bb) Ensure that any appointed TWS is operating in accordance with the correct approved
procedure.
6.3. CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY WORKS SUPERVISOR
The detailed role and responsibilities of the Contractor Temporary Works Supervisor are defined in
BS 5975.
Company Document
by the PC) will be signed and approved by the contractor Temporary Works Coordinator and
submitted to the PC for information.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The Contractor Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS) appointments are submitted to the PC
Lead Temporary Works Coordinator for information prior to work on site
The role of the TWS is as follows: -
• The TWS, where appointed, should be responsible to the PC’s TWC or TWC as appropriate.
The TWS should assist the PC’s TWC or TWC, as appropriate, in the supervision and
checking of the temporary works.
The line of responsibility is appropriate to the organization making the appointment and
whether the organization is approved to manage their own Temporary Works.
• A TWS should only be authorized to issue a permit to proceed, e.g. load (bring into use) or
unload (take out of use), if the DI of their organization and the PC’s TWC are satisfied that:
o An individual TWS is competent and has been given the appropriate authority in
respect of that individual; and
o The risk classification identified is low or very low
• The role of the TWS is to provide on-site support to the PC’s TWC or TWC for the control of
Temporary Works; as such the TWS should not be responsible for any design or design
checking of Temporary Works but should be responsible for the implementation of the PC’s or
contractor’s procedure for the control of Temporary Works.
This exclusion also covers the determination of specific loads; assessment of load paths;
engineering checks of any kind; determination of foundation capacity, etc.
• The appointment of a person as TWS should not preclude them from carrying out design or
design checking if they are considered competent
The organization's DI can appoint the same individual to carry out specific design and/or
design checking but this would be under a separate specific nomination relating to design.

a) Liaise and co-operate with the TWC;
TWD;
applicable;
Company Document
conditions (use or environmental) are drawn to the attention of the TWC or PC’s TWC as
discrepancies have been rectified to the satisfaction of the TWC and/or PC’s TWC;
proceed (bring into use) is issued and provide a copy of the permit to the TWC and/or PC’s
TWC; and
Temporary Works is issued and provide a copy of the permit to the TWC and/or PC’s TWC.
The TWS, where appointed, should be responsible to the TWC. The TWS should assist the TWC in
the supervision and checking of the Temporary Works.
The Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator is to ensure the Contractor Temporary Works
Supervisor (TWS) has clear understanding of the role and responsibility of their appointment
6.4. DUAL RESPONSIBILITIES
On smaller, lower risk individual pieces of Temporary Works that may occur on site: -
• The Temporary Works Coordinator may have dual responsibility for progress and for checking
of the Temporary Works (i.e. the Temporary Works Supervisor role)
Likewise
• It may be appropriate for the Temporary Works Coordinator and Temporary Works Design
approve
Likewise
• It may be appropriate for the Temporary Works Supervisor and Temporary Works Designer
approve
This is acceptable as long as the individuals clearly understand the responsibilities required for each
individual role and can undertake these roles without having any of their decisions affected / biased
due to other responsibilities. The individuals will have to be suitably competent and this should be
noted in letters of appointment for future reference.
Dual responsibilities are permitted for CAT 0 & 1 level designs only
Company Document

Permanent Works;
Company Document
TWC through the PD.

Works scheme
foundations;
PC Temporary Works Design Brief

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Company Document
PC Temporary Works Design Check Certificate

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
The preparation of a site-specific method statement and risk assessment is the responsibility
of the construction team
The Temporary Workers Designer will have a nominated DI and a Temporary Works
8.1. CONTRACTOR APPROVAL OF TEMPORARY WORKS

DESIGN CONTRACTORS
When the Contractor requires external specialist design resource to design Temporary Works these
contractors must be approved by the PC prior to undertaking work on the construction site. The
approved designer will take the responsibility as “Designer” under the CDM regulation 9.
The approved design contractors will be responsible for all aspects of the Temporary Works Design.
The relevant Temporary Works Coordinator is to manage the interfaces between the Temporary
Works Designer and the Permanent Works Designer.
Temporary Works Design Contractors must be able to clearly demonstrate: -
• They have experience of Temporary Works Design to BS 5975
• They have suitably qualified and experienced Temporary Works Designers and Temporary
Works Design Checkers (where required)
the permanent Works Design
All Temporary Works Designers working on the Project must be members of the Temporary
Works Forum
All Temporary Works Design Organisations working on the Project must have approval
granted from the PC TWC and communicated to the TWC appointing the designer in
advance of work on site
This Approval is to be recorded by the relevant TWC appointing the designer in the relevant
Temporary Works Register with the date of approval
Company Document
9. BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY WORKS

PROCEDURES ON SITE
The basic requirements for Temporary Works procedures on site are as follows: -
• A Designated Individual needs to be appointed in writing and they need to be suitably competent
and aware of their responsibilities. Their appointment is to be made evident to the PC DI and
PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
• A Temporary Works Procedure is to be created and submitted for review / acceptance by the
PC DI and PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
• A Temporary Works Coordinator needs to be appointed in writing and they need to be suitably
competent and aware of their responsibilities. The appointment is to be submitted for review /
acceptance by the PC DI and PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
• If the organisation has a Lead TWC and appoints other TWC’s the Lead TWC is to keep a table
highlighting all TWCs appointed with names, dates of appointment, limits of appointment etc.
This table is to be issued to the PC TWC for information.
• If required a Temporary Works Supervisor needs to be appointed and they need to be suitably
competent and aware of their responsibilities. All TWS appointments are to be submitted to the
PC TWC for information.
• The relevant TWC is to keep a table highlighting all TWS’s they appoint with names, dates of
appointment, limits of appointment etc. This table is to be issued to the PC TWC for information.
• A design brief needs to be created to give to the Temporary Works Designers
• The relevant Temporary Works Coordinator is to identify any Temporary Works that interface
with other Temporary Works or the Permanent Works and make this clear to the relevant PC’s
TWC
• A Temporary Works Designer is to provide the design and design risk assessment
• A Temporary Works Design Checker is to check the design as per the required Design Check
Category
• The Temporary Works Coordinator is to confirm this design has been designed for the correct
information supplied and that the correct level of design check has been completed
• The Temporary Works Coordinator will capture all of this information in a Temporary Works
register.
• The Temporary Works will be checked to ensure it is as per the design and drawings and erected
correctly before a permit to load (if required) is issued by the Temporary Works Coordinator or
Temporary Works Supervisor (if suitably competent)
• The Temporary Works will be regularly inspected to ensure it is still fit for purpose
• If required a permit to dismantle will be issued by the Temporary Works Coordinator or
Temporary Works Supervisor (if suitably competent & authorized to do so by the Temporary
Works Coordinator)
• For simple designs that do not require a staged dismantle process this will not be required
• If the Temporary Works are being used repeatedly, for instance a trench box along a long trench
excavation, then unless the ground conditions, surcharges, depths, etc. change the design will
not change so this process will not need to be repeated. But a record will have to be kept to
show the ground conditions, surcharges, depths, etc. are being assessed at each location and
that the design is still suitable for its application on site. This could be captured in site diaries,
permits to load or similar
Company Document
At any stage of the Temporary Works process the site personnel can contact a Temporary
Works Designer if they feel more comfortable and require any further assistance on site
10. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS IN RELATION TO

THE PC
10.1. CONTRACTORS APPOINTMENT OF DI
contractor will highlight the name of their Designated Individual and make it officially known to the PC
Designated Individual and the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator.
10.2. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
contractor will issue their Temporary Works Procedure for “Acceptance”.
The PC DI and / or the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will be the Lead Reviewers for this
document.
If required, the PC Temporary Works Coordinators on site can work with the Contractor to assist the
creation and submission of their Temporary Works procedure.
The Contractors Temporary Works Procedure is to clearly highlight the interaction required with the
PC’s TWC’s on site.
On acceptance of the contractor’s Temporary Works procedure, the PC Lead Temporary Works
Coordinator and the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator will chair a Temporary Works readiness
review. The following roles will be required to attend:
• PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator
• The relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator
• Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator
• Any other relevant contractor personnel involved in the safe planning, organisation,
coordination, supervision and execution of Temporary Works
Each contractor will submit their company’s Temporary Works procedure for review and
acceptance prior to any Temporary Works being undertaken on the construction site
Company Document
Contractors may use the PC Temporary Works procedure should their company not have a
Temporary Works Procedure. This must be formally agreed with the Lead PC Temporary
Works Coordinator.
The Contractor will still have to have a DI and appointed TWC to use the PC procedure as
their own
10.3. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS COORDINATOR
contractor will issue their Temporary Works Coordinator Appointment for “Acceptance”.
The PC DI and PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator or relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator
will be the Lead Reviewers for this document.
If required and as early as possible a Lead Temporary Works Coordinator will be appointed by the
Contractors Designated Individual. Only one Lead Temporary Works Coordinator should be appointed,
but they may be supported by any number of suitably delegated Temporary Works Coordinator(s).
Contractors will ensure that the size of their Temporary Works team is appropriate to the size and
complexity of their work package.
All Temporary Works Coordinator appointments are to be submitted for review and “Acceptance”.
All Temporary Works Coordinator appointments are to be reviewed every 12 months.
Each contractor Lead Temporary Works Coordinator is to supply a table listing TWC appointments,
date of appointment and area of responsibility to the relevant PC TWC.
The PC can withdraw approval of a contractor TWC to work on the construction site if the TWC is not
working to the agreed Temporary Works Procedure and / or not liaising and coordinating with the
relevant PC TWC as required.
If the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator raises issues with a Contractor Temporary
Works Coordinator and the Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator does not remedy
these issues as required, the Contractor will be instructed that Temporary Works
Coordinator Appointment is rejected and that individual is not allowed to work on the
construction site as a Temporary Works Coordinator
10.4. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS REGISTER
1 Month prior to construction on site or the commencement of any work on the construction site the
contractor will issue their Temporary Works Register for “Acceptance”.
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and / or the PC Temporary Works Coordinator for that
area will be the Lead Reviewers for this document.
If possible, Contractor will provide the PC Temporary Works Team live visibility of their Temporary
Works Register(s). Where technically this is not possible, the Contractor will supply their Temporary
Company Document
Works Register to the PC Temporary Works Team in an agreed form. The minimum requirement is a
monthly update.
The Temporary Works Register will be issued to the PC a minimum of 4 week intervals after first
submission and will be issued “For Information” after the first submission is “Accepted”.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator for this area will be the only reviewer required from the PC for
Contractors Temporary Works Registers.
The Contractor Temporary Works Register is to include a column to identify if the Temporary Works
impact or have any interface on: -
Contractors Temporary Works Register to include a column to identify if the Temporary

Works impact or have any interface on: -
Contractors TWCs are to ensure a Temporary Works register is developed & maintained for all
Temporary Works under their control.
This information is to be recorded in a format to suit the contractor and as long as the information is
clearly visible there is no need for any specific formatting.
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator will
work jointly to ensure this information is suitably recorded and stored for visibility as required.

c) date required;
NOTE 1:- The implementation risk classification might be influenced by the client’s
requirements, such as increasing the risk level for a particular section of temporary works.
Company Document

k) date of permit to unload (take out of use) as necessary;
l) third-party approvals;
m) identify impact or interface with other Temporary Works and / or Permanent Works; and
n) identify the approval of Temporary Works Design Contractors (if used) by PC TWC.
10.5. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS SUPERVISOR
Once on site the contractor will issue their Temporary Works Supervisor Appointments to the relevant
PC Temporary Works Coordinator for information. The format of this issue is to be agreed with the PC
Temporary Works Coordinator but can be via E-mail.
The Contractors Temporary Works Supervisors should be appointed by the Contractors Temporary
Works Coordinator using the PC Appointment of Temporary Works Coordinator / Supervisor (or a
similarly approved form). The Contractor TWC is to meet the TWS and explain the requirements and
responsibilities of their appointment before they are officially appointed as a TWS.
The relevant Contractor TWC is to supply a table listing their TWS’s names, date of appointment and
area of responsibility to the relevant PC TWC.
10.6. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGNS
Once on site the contractor will issue their Temporary Works Design packs for review and
“Acceptance””.
The relevant contractor TWC is responsible for the management and coordination of Temporary Works
Designers and notifying the PC TWC as required.
The relevant Contractor TWC will coordinate and liaise with the Temporary Workers Designer
as required and notify the PC TWC as required
The PC Temporary Works Coordinators as Lead Reviewers for submitted Contractor Temporary Works
Design packs will be looking for the following information checklist as a minimum: -
• Design Brief present

• Suitable Temporary Works Design Check Categorisation i.e. 0, 1, 2 or 3
• Designers Risk Assessment present
• Temporary Works Design evident and present
Company Document
• Design Check present suitable to the Design Check Category. In all cases of Category, the
name of the designer and the name of the design checker is to be clear and evident
• As a minimum a sketch or outline drawing clearly showing the proposed Temporary Works being
used as the Design intends. This sketch / outline drawing is to have enough information to make
the Temporary Works Design intent and limitations clearly visible to anyone observing this
Temporary Works in a finished drawing. If there are any variations from this sketch / outline
drawing and any drawings produced at a later date with this Temporary Works Design, then the
drawings cannot be accepted or used on the construction site as this will mean the design intent
cannot be verified in the drawing on site.
• Temporary Works Implementation Risk Class present, i.e. Very Low (VL), Low (L), Medium (M)
or High (H)
• Does the Temporary Works Design match the Temporary Works Design Brief
• Has the Designers Risk Assessment considered all of the relevant hazards for the Temporary
Works Design and demonstrated how the design has removed or reduced the likelihood of these
hazards or where this is not possible what controls the designer is putting in place in relation to
these hazards and the resulting overall risk, to be communicated to the site teams as required
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator as Lead Reviewer will return the design documents without
“Acceptance” if they do not meet the requirements of the bullet point list above as a minimum plus any
further additional requirements depending on the design in question.
10.6.1. CONTRACTORS TWS DESIGN RISK ASSESSMENT
Contractors are to ensure that all completed Temporary Works Design packages contain a design risk
assessment highlighting residual risk that will be managed by Contractors site team.
Temporary Works Designers must provide information about aspects of the designs that could create
significant risks during any future construction work. (Safety, Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ)
box in all drawings).
Temporary Works Designers are to provide suggested construction sequences (or similar) showing
how the design will be constructed. Contractors are to ensure that the construction sequence is followed
however any variations from the designer’s design will be brought to the attention of the Temporary
Works Coordinator and the design brief revised if required.
10.6.2. CONTRACTORS EXTERNAL DESIGNERS
Contractors will ensure that where external design companies are used, they must go through an
approval process in order to demonstrate their competence. Where external companies are used to
undertake designs, all relevant information must be provided, this may include:
• Design brief
• Site contact details
• Photos
• Geo-technical information
Company Document
• Build methodology
• Site constraints
• Any other information specific to the design
10.6.3. CONTRACTORS TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN

CHECKER COMPETENCIES
In the assessment of Temporary Works Designers or Temporary Works Design Checkers the
Contractors Temporary Works Procedure should ensure that the design is undertaken by competent
individuals or organisations.
Organisations working in a joint venture may use their joint venture partner’s company’s organisation
to undertake a CAT 2 & 3 check providing the designer is independent from the checkers company.
Further guidance on joint venture Temporary Works checks can be found in Table 2.
Where organisations opt to use partner company’s Temporary Works teams to undertake CAT 2 & 3
design checks a comprehensive list of ongoing checks will be produced by the contractor and supplied
to the PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator or the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator.
Contractors in-house CAT 2 and CAT 3 Design Checkers information will be submitted to the
PC for information. Third party organisations checkers do not have to be submitted as the
Contractors own Temporary Works Procedures will ensure their competency assessment
10.7. CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPORARY

WORKS
10.7.1. SUPERVISION OF WORK ON SITE AND CHECKING
Contractors will ensure the appropriate level of Temporary Works supervision is available to support
the construction delivery teams. The Temporary Works Coordinators will liaise with the Temporary
Works Supervisors to identify areas where Temporary Works supervision is required. Temporary Works
Supervisors responsibilities are defined in the Appointment Letter.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
In addition to the responsibilities set out in the Temporary Works Supervisors Appointment Letter, the
following items must be considered:
Company Document
• Work on site should be subject to careful direction, supervision and inspection to ensure the
Temporary Works are constructed safely and in accordance with the design, and only when all
checks have proved satisfactory should the works be loaded, used and dismantled in
accordance with the design and method statement
• All occurrences and information relevant to the Temporary Works should be captured and noted
for example in a site diary or other appropriate records where it can be accessed and referenced
• Design documentation and method statements will be followed and Temporary Works
Supervisors should compare the actual conditions onsite against the design. If deviations occur,
then work should be stopped and the matter referred to the Temporary Works Coordinator /
Temporary Works Designer
• For CAT 2 & 3 items, if required the Temporary Works Coordinator/s will carry out a final
inspection using a Permit to Load / dismantle before the Temporary Works are put into use or
dismantled
10.7.2. PERMITS TO LOAD AND PERMITS TO UNLOAD /

DISMANTLE
It is the responsibility of the contractor’s Temporary Works team to ensure where required the permit to
load and permit to unload / strike / dismantle are issued. Permit to load and permit to unload / strike /
dismantle will be issued in accordance with the contractors approved Temporary Works procedure.
Temporary Works Coordinators will ensure a suitable inspection is conducted prior to permit to load
and permit to unload / strike / dismantle being issued. The Temporary Works Coordinator will produce
a schedule outlining the anticipated Temporary Works and where applicable the requirement for Permit
to load and permit to unload / strike / dismantle.
The PC Temporary Works Supervisors will be responsible for conducting site wide Temporary Works
inspections. The PC Temporary Works Supervisors will liaise with the PC Lead Temporary Works
Coordinator or the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator to identify at risk areas to ensure the
appropriate level of support.
A regular Temporary Works meeting will be used as a forum to discuss any permits to load or permit to
unload / strike / dismantle and record any agreements or points relating to upcoming permits on site.
10.7.3. RISK ASSESSMENT AND METHOD STATEMENT
Contractors will produce method statements and associated risk assessments (RAMS) following or in
parallel to the Temporary Works design package approval process.
The RAMS will be submitted for review and approval by the contractor prior to work commencing on
site. The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator
or a suitable member of the Temporary Works team will review RAMS for Temporary Works CAT 2 and
above.
Company Document
10.7.4. ALTERATIONS
Contractors are to ensure that all proposed Temporary Works changes are referred to the Contractors
Designer via the Contractor Temporary Works Coordinator to confirm that the changes are safe and
acceptable to proceed.
No changes are to be made to Temporary Works without the approval of the Contractors
Designer or Temporary Works Coordinator
It is common to encounter differing site conditions to those which were designed for, i.e.
change in ground condition. If this does occur the construction of the Temporary Works
must stop immediately and advice must be sought from the Temporary Works Designer
The designer will ensure that all alterations to accepted Temporary Works will result in the design being
reviewed and updated prior to being issued in writing and submitted to the Temporary Works
Coordinator for review and acceptance. The Temporary Works Coordinator will decide on the level of
check required.
Contractors will ensure that should any design change result in additional hazards or increase in risk
that a formal review of existing site documentation is undertaken and sent to PC Lead Temporary Works
Coordinator or the relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator for review and acceptance.
Refer to Section 4.4.5
10.7.5. CONTROL OF COMMUNICATIONS
Contractors will ensure that where instruction is given to their team on Temporary Works changes or
where issues have been identified and instruction given to rectify, these are followed up in writing and
recorded in the Temporary Works Register. Contractors will maintain records of these communications
as long as required.
10.7.6. TEMPORARY WORKS HANDOVERS
Contractors are to ensure prior to the handover of their Temporary Works that all information relevant
to their Temporary Works are packaged and submitted to the PC for review and acceptance. The
minimum required information to be submitted is as follows:
• Design brief
• Design information
• Design certificate (if applicable)
• Any permits still “live”
• Any RAMS used for the construction of the Temporary Works
• Any Installation / Construction information that maybe relevant, i.e. pull out tests, etc.
Company Document
Once accepted from the contractor the PC will be responsible for coordinating the handover to the new
Temporary Works owner.
11. TEMPORARY WORKS INTERFACE
Interfaces, in both design and execution, are one of the key areas where problems can occur in
Temporary Works and should be controlled by all who can affect the interface to ensure the risk to the
Temporary Works can be managed effectively.
The PC’s TWC should be responsible for classifying Temporary Works, where there is an interface
between contractors. Where there is no interface, the TWC of the organization carrying out the
Temporary Works should be responsible for classifying the Temporary Works.
The design and construction of Permanent Works and the attendant Temporary Works often involves
several organizations, therefore introducing a number of organizational interfaces. Common
arrangements include the following and combinations thereof:
a) Equipment can be hired, with the supplier carrying out the design, or supplying the basic design
data;
b) Equipment can be erected using operatives who are not direct employees of the main
construction organization, e.g. the supplier of the equipment might also erect it; and
c) Use of a design produced by another organization.
When work is being carried out by different organizations, the organizational interfaces can be
manifested on site as physical interfaces between different phases of the scheme, e.g. it is common for
one organization to prepare and provide the foundations upon which another subsequently erects the
main Temporary Works structure.
The physical interface in this example is particularly critical, but in all cases the physical constraints and
interface conditions should be clearly defined and the work procedures adopted should take account of
these interfaces.
The TWC should manage these interfaces and retain an overview of the whole scheme to ensure each
step of the procedure is completed and does not adversely affect the scheme.
Details of the interfaces should be included in the construction phase plan.
When work is being carried out at a number of small projects, a TWS with an appropriate level of
authority may be appointed for each individual project, under the overall responsibility of a single TWC.
Contractors are appointed by clients, or by other contractors to carry out the works. In all cases the
contracting organization’s procedures should recognize that, whatever the method of procurement, the
PC has ultimate responsibility for the safe execution of all Temporary Works on site.
The contractor’s procedure should cover the management of any Temporary Works and include
measures for ensuring that the roles of a TWC and TWS are carried out by competent individuals.
Where contractors are appointed by the client and/or PC, the PC's DI should ensure that contractors’
Temporary Works procedures are satisfactory.
Company Document
If the contractors' procedures are deemed not acceptable by the PC's DI, then they should work to the
Temporary Works procedures of the PC.
11.1. TEMPORARY WORKS INTERFACE MANAGEMENT
Temporary Works Coordinators are to identify on their Temporary Works Register any Temporary
Works Interfaces with: -
• Other Temporary Works; and / or
• Permanent Works
Temporary Works Coordinators are to communicate this interface to the relevant NNB Temporary
Works Coordinator.
Contractor (PC) TWC on site should be consulted by the relevant organisation’s TWC and be
responsible for the risk classification
classification
Temporary Works that interface with other Temporary Works or Permanent Works require this interface
to be suitably managed and controlled both on site and prior to site during the Temporary Works Design
phase.
11.2. TEMPORARY WORKS INTERFACE WITH PERMANENT

WORKS
Company Document
Temporary Works interfacing with Permanent Works will require the relevant Temporary Works
Coordinator to manage and coordinate this interface and to identify this to the relevant PC Temporary
Works Coordinator.
The Permanent Works Designer can be consulted by the relevant Contractor Temporary Works
Coordinator raising a Request For Information (RFI) or a Field Change Request (FCR) as required.
This is to be recorded with a suitable column on the relevant Temporary Works Register.
The Temporary Works cannot be brought into use on site until any outstanding RFI’s or FCR’s are
suitably answered and agreed.
Suitable arrangements can be agreed with Contractors and the PC Temporary Works Coordinators for
how this is managed and controlled.
12. TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN FLOW CHART
Company Document
Identification of temporary works
TWC Identifies
Temporary Works
TWC Categorises
Temporary Works
Categorisation
CAT CAT CAT CAT PERMANENT

0 1 2 3 WORKS INTERFACE
Competent Person Competent Person to establish design brief in accordance with section 4.4.1 of the Temporary
Selects Solution - Works Procedure
No Design The Relevant TWC will raise a RFI
or FCR as required and identify
Design
this on the relevant Temporary

Design Brief issued to designer
Works Register.
Refer to Section 4.5 and Section
11.0
The TWD will provide a design in accordance with the design brief
PWD Check and reply to RFI

Cat 1 Cat 2 Cat 3 or FCR as required
The check will be

Competent person
carried out by
checks and accepts The check will be
another member of The check should be The design will need
Temporary Works carried out by an
the design team carried out by checking to Category 0,
Check
individual not
another organisation 1, 2 or 3 as appropriate
involved in the
design and not and be approved by the
consulted by the Permanent Works
designer Designer (PWD) as noted
in the response to the RFI
or FCR as required
Site Temporary Works
Register
Temporary Works Coordinator records accepted Temporary Works on Site Register
13. VOIDS AND OPENINGS
Company Document
Where any opening exist through which any part of a person can fall it must be covered using material
that is sufficiently strong to support any forces that it may be subjected to i.e. falling person or object,
mobile plant, etc.
Each cover will be constructed and implemented in accordance to the approved Temporary Works
Design. It also must be prevented from being inadvertently displaced or adjusted.
The following requirements must be adhered to in all cases: -
• The cover must be clearly identified by being painted bright yellow
• DANGER HOLE BELOW must be clearly marked in red on the cover
• The cover must be on a register with a unique reference number assigned to it
• The Temporary Works Design is to be recorded on the relevant Temporary Works Register
• The cover is to be inspected at regular intervals (prior to first use and weekly as a minimum)
and maintained as required
• All covers will be recorded on a specific Voids and Openings Register
The relevant TWC will record Temporary Works Designs for void openings an in the
A register will be kept for Voids and Openings
14. TEMPORARY WORKS AND LIFTING
When undertaking lifting operations, it is the responsibility of the Temporary Works Coordinator for that
area to ensure that the acceptable ground bearing pressure beneath the outrigger pads, tracks, wheels
etc.
Temporary Works items that are required to be lifted will incorporate designated lifting points which will
be clearly identified on the design. All lifting operations regardless of the Temporary Works will be
undertaken in accordance with the Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations (LOLER).
Company Document
15. SCAFFOLDING WORKS ON THE CONSTRUCTION SITE
When undertaking scaffold on site the category of design and implementation risk is to be agreed with
the PC TWC on site.
It is foreseen that proprietary system scaffold used as per the manufacturers guidelines and erected by
suitably experienced and competent Scaffolders will be Category 0 Design to a set limit of height or
use. The implementation risk will depend on a number of factors including the area / environment where
the scaffold is being erected. This is to be confirmed by the PC TWC on site.
It is foreseen that Scaffold Contractor design books may be accepted by the PC TWC on site and
suitably experienced and competent Scaffolders from that Scaffold Contractor would be able to use the
Scaffold Contractor design book within the parameters of the design. In this situations the design would
be Category 0 but the implementation risk will depend on a number of factors including the area /
environment where the scaffold is being erected. This is to be confirmed by the PC TWC on site.
National Access and Scaffolding Confederation (NASC) Technical Guide (TG) 20 Designs will be
Category 1 designs but the implementation risk will depend on a number of factors including the area /
environment where the scaffold is being erected. This is to be confirmed by the PC TWC on site. TG
20 designs will have a Compliance Sheet available on site and the limits of TG 20 designs are to be
noted such as: -
• Tube & Fit Scaffold

• 16m maximum height of Scaffold
Company Document
• Each Scaffold elevation maybe loaded at one working platform and one working platform loaded
at 50%
• Maximum load Class 4 = 3.0 kN/m2
• Transom spacing to a maximum of 1.2m
• Bay Lengths to a maximum of 2.4m
• Maximum total board width is 5 Boards
• Maximum inside boards is 2 Boards
• Maximum lift height is 2.0m except for pavement lift
• Tied at alternative lifts and alternative standards
• Façade bracing to the top lift at every elevation. One set per six bays
• Ledger bracing at alternative standards in all lifts
• Double guard rails provided at boarded lifts. Single guardrails left in place at unboarded lifts, in
accordance with NASC SG4. Triple guard rails maybe provided at the top lift if required.
• May include brick guards or may be clad with sheeting or debris-netting.
Any Scaffold Designs not mentioned in the previous paragraphs will be Category 2 or higher designs
and again this is to be agreed with the PC TWC on site.
16. TEMPORARY WORKS ASSESSMENTS / AUDITS ON SITE
The PC Lead Temporary Works Coordinator and / or relevant PC Temporary Works Coordinator or
Supervisor will routinely undertake an assessment of the Contractors Temporary Works procedure. The
audits are not expected to last longer than half a day.
The assessment / audits provides an opportunity to verify the procedures are being followed and a
suitable level of control and inspection of Temporary Works is demonstrable by the contractor.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinators / Supervisors undertaking Assessments and Audits

will score this and report this score as part of the PC Temporary Works Report issued to the
PC Management team
17. TEMPORARY WORKS INSPECTIONS
The PC Temporary Works Coordinator and / or relevant PC Temporary Works Supervisor will undertake
regular site inspections of Temporary Works.
The PC Temporary Works Coordinators / Supervisors undertaking Inspections will score this
and report this score as part of the PC Temporary Works Report issued to the PC Management
team
Company Document
Contractor Temporary Works Coordinators will supply an organogram showing TWC’s (if they
are Lead TWC’s) and TWS’s they manage with contact names and numbers to ensure the
correct individuals are contacted for Temporary Works Site Inspections
Contractor Temporary Works Coordinators will supply the PC document Reference number
for their Temporary Works Register to assist the Temporary Works Site Inspection
18. TEMPORARY WORKS MEETINGS AND FORUMS
Various meetings and other engagements are required to plan, manage, monitor and coordinate
Temporary Works activities. Provided below is an overview of the critical meetings and forums that will
be held at the construction site. These are:
chair a Bi-weekly Temporary Works Coordination meeting with the Contractors Temporary
Works teams.
chair a Bi-weekly Temporary Works Interface meeting with the Contractors Temporary Works
teams.
chair a Monthly Temporary Works Coordination meeting with the PC Construction Delivery
Group & Surveillance teams. If there is no attendance at this meeting it is assumed there are no
issues to raise to the PC Temporary Works Team on site.
• The Contractor TWS is to have a regular meeting and / or site walk around with the relevant PC
Temporary Works Coordinator or a suitably delegated member of the PC Temporary Works
team on site. The contract partner can record this meeting formally as required to ensure any
agreements or relevant discussions are suitably recorded.
• The PC Scaffolding Lead will chair a regular Scaffold & Access meeting for relevant parties on
the construction Site.
APPENDIX R
Draft Temporary Works Procedure – Temporary Works Suppliers


Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document
TEMPORARY WORKS SUPPLIERS TEMPORARY WORKS PROCEDURE
Company Document
TEMPORARY WORKS SUPPLIERS
Revision 01
Date of Issue
DRAFT
Status UNDER REVIEW
APPROVED
Technical Reviewer
Document Control
Company Document
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1. Scope........................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY........................................................................................................................ 4
3. Temporary Works management - organisations procedures ........................................................ 8
3.1. Organisations designated individual ............................................................................................. 8
3.1.2. Principal Designers Designated Individual .......................................................................... 10
3.1.3. Permanent Works Designer Designated Individual.............................................................. 11
3.1.4. Client appointed contractor Designated Individual ............................................................... 12
3.1.7. Temporary Works supplier Designated Individual ................................................................ 14
4. Temporary Works guidance ....................................................................................................... 15
4.1. Temporary Works Definition ....................................................................................................... 15
...................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.4. Design of Temporary works ....................................................................................................... 19
4.4.1. Design brief ......................................................................................................................... 19
4.4.3. Choice of temporary works solution .................................................................................... 21
4.4.4. Design Check...................................................................................................................... 22
4.4.2. Design alterations ............................................................................................................... 27
own tw............................................................................................................................................... 29
Company Document
6. Permanent Works Designers...................................................................................................... 30

7. Temporary Works Designers ...................................................................................................... 31
8. TEMPORARY Works SUPPLIER Temporary Works requirements ............................................ 32
Company Document
1. INTRODUCTION
by the Temporary Workers Supplier.
This will allow the Temporary Works Supplier to understand, control or mitigate risks associated with
Temporary Works.
Regulations.
1.1. SCOPE
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY
The Suppliers' DI should establish a procedure describing how the main items for which the supplier
Company Document

Key Symbols
followed

Company Document

Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document


followed the CDM Principles of belonging to the Client or Third Create Temporary Works
Prevention and have a fully Party that might be affected by Procedure
Contractor Designated
Clients Designated Individual PD’s Designated Individual
Individual
Coordinate requirements of the Coordinate requirements of the

Permanent Works Design with the Permanent Works Design with the
Create a Temporary Works
Temporary Works Designer/Supplier Temporary Works Designer/Supplier
Suppliers Temporary Procedure
and produce the required TWs Design and produce the required TWs Design
Brief (If Required) Brief (if required)
TW Supplier Designated
PD’s Designated Individual Contractors Designated Individual
Individual
Ensure a suitable Temporary Works

TWs for the PD? or TWs for the
Design is produced as required in the
PC or Contractor? will dictate Ensure a suitable check is
Design Brief and return to the PD, PC
who will coordinate the TWDs undertaken for the TWs Design
or Contractor (Depending on who
information
requested)
PD Designated Individual, PC PD Designated Individual, PC or
TW Suppliers Designated Individual or Contractor TWC Contractor TWC
KEY
Information supplied by the PD
TWs Design and Check
used to develop Temporary
completed as required Responsibility
Works on site
PD Designated Individual, PC
PC’s Designated Individual
or Contractor TWC
NOTE:
Company Document

PROCEDURES
a) Clients
organisation.
Individual (DI).
Company Document
required
Company Document
CDM Regulations.
TWC
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
include:
Company Document

INDIVIDUAL
such as: -
site.

INDIVIDUAL
Company Document
Works scheme;
appropriate;
required;
hold points; and
construction phase.

INDIVIDUAL
as: -
on site.
Company Document
with the PC's TWC.

3.1.7. TEMPORARY WORKS SUPPLIER DESIGNATED

INDIVIDUAL
BS 5975 states Temporary Works Suppliers should appoint a DI responsible for establishing,
implementing and maintaining procedures to manage those aspects of Temporary Works with which
they are involved.
Company Document


debris);
if they are made.
Company Document
implemented.
change.
• Their design
• Very Low
• Low
• Medium
• High

• Competence
Company Document
classification
Company Document
measures
risk class
failure.

or
• an authorized
TWS.
• Relatively or
TWC.
secondary events.
elements.
• an authorized
one another
or equipment.
events.
Company Document


might be mitigated
4.4.1. DESIGN BRIEF

be drawn up.
Company Document
account.
Design.
carried out.
water level.
output.
Company Document

should: -
• Layout
• Loading
• Limitations
• Tolerances
• etc.
Company Document

4.4.4. DESIGN CHECK
complex.
Category 1 check.
Company Document

• The designer
certificate.
conditions
design output
Company Document


• The designer

Checker
Company Document
publications.

falsework).
Company Document

DESIGN CHECKER
further.
further required


checker.
Company Document
design checker.
design.
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC PC
TWS TWS
PC PC
Site Team Site Team

On Site On Site
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document

Client
Clients
PC Other Designers
(TWC)

(TWD) (TWD)
PC
Self Delivering
TWS
TWC Site Team
TWS On Site

On Site
Client Sub-Contract
PROJECT or SITE
Ronan O’Driscoll
Company Document

Permanent Works;
Company Document
TWC through the PD.

Works scheme
foundations;
Company Document
8. TEMPORARY WORKS SUPPLIER TEMPORARY WORKS

REQUIREMENTS
In relation to Temporary Works the Temporary Works Supplier Designated Individual will: -
• Ensure the Temporary Works Supplier's procedure covers:

a) Ensuring their equipment conforms to their published technical data;
b) Where multiple versions of similar equipment are available, the supplier should ensure
that each version can be easily identified and conforms to the appropriate technical data.
Limitations on use of mixing versions should be identified in the data.
c) The original design of the components, verification and production of technical information
for individual and assemblies of proprietary items;
d) Ensuring that manufactured and repaired items conform to the original design
requirements for the initial and all subsequent production through the application of robust
quality control;
e) Material handling and transportation;
f) Maintenance and repair of items that are hired or offered for second-hand sale; and
g) Equipment substitutions when the original component is not available.
• Verification of design information: -

a) The supplier should carry out sufficient calculations and testing to prove the capacity of all
Temporary Works components/equipment, including connections.
b) Calculations and any necessary testing should be carried out to recognized standards.
c) Any testing should be representative of the actual conditions of use and be sufficient in
number to give statistically significant results.
• Provision of information: -
a) The supplier should provide all information necessary for the design, assembly, use,
dismantling and maintenance of components offered for use as Temporary Works
equipment.
b) Performance data issued by a supplier of equipment can reasonably be relied on without
further justification.
c) The information should relate to the properties of the individual components, their use in
expected assemblies, and any specific requirements or constraints for use, inspection and
maintenance.
d) The information provided to third parties should be sufficient to enable them to carry out
their own design(s) or independent checking of the supplier’s design.
• Provision of Design Data: -

o The supplier should either provide published technical data or justify the capacities by
specific calculations and certificates.
Attention is drawn to section 6 of the Health and Safety at Work, etc. Act 1974 and the
duty of suppliers and importers of equipment to supply relevant and correct
performance data.
o The design data should include:
a) the intended uses for the components and how they can be identified;
b) appropriate dimensions, section and material properties and masses;
c) structural properties for various conditions of use, such as different extensions and
eccentricities, together with details of any necessary bracing or lacing;
d) a clear statement on whether capacities are in terms of characteristic strength or
maximum safe working loads;
Company Document
e) what factors of safety have been included or assumed;

For characteristic strength this includes recommended partial material and load
factors. For maximum safe working load this is the global factor on the failure.
f) whether the components conform to the requirements of an appropriate British or
European Standard;
g) details and capacity of connections where loads are received into one or more
components, transferred from one to the other, and transmitted to other supports
such as foundations; and
h) any limiting deflection conditions.
The supplier need not publish test reports or manufacturing drawings but should be prepared
to share this information with specific users of the equipment, putting confidentiality
agreements in place if necessary.
• Provision of information for the safe use of equipment: -

The supplier should provide the following and specify any specific testing, maintenance or
inspection regimes:
a) detailed user guides, in an appropriate format, explaining how the items should be used;
b) information on transportation and safe handling of Temporary Works equipment on site,
e.g. lifting points, safe stacking and storage; and
c) identification of critical items requiring inspection, such as connections or items prone to
deterioration over a period of time.
• Standard Solutions
o The supplier should provide published technical data in the form of arrangements of
their equipment based on certain conditions of use; these arrangements, known as
standard solutions and often presented in a tabular or readily assimilated format,
should relate to the supplier's products only.
APPENDIX S
Draft Temporary Works Audit Questions – Construction Engineering
Procedures alignment with BS 5975 : 2019
Attached in Appendix S is a draft list of questions that could be utilised for an audit of
Construction Engineering Procedures to the requirements of BS 5975:2019. This is a draft
and not the finished article and can be edited with information removed as required,

Ronan O’Driscoll
AUDIT REVIEW
Management of Construction Engineering in Line with BS 5975 :2019
Name of Assessor:-
Work Location:-
Date of Assessment:-
Company Name being assessed:-

Name of Company Representative Present:-
Position of Company Representative Present:-
This audit is to confirm a Contractors Construction Engineering Procedure compared to the basic requirements of BS 5975:2019
As BS 5975 : 2019 cannot be read or interpreted line for line as read in black and white and requires experience and competence to use correctly the Assessor must have demonstrable up to date relevant Construction Engineering experience to be able to correctly assess a Contractor to BS 5975 : 2019
Compliant
REF No. Requirement Comments Main Findings & Gaps Observations to note Actions (If Required) Action Owner Date Required
(Yes / No / Not Applicable)
1 Is there an approved and up to date Contractor Construction Engineering procedure present and available for inspection ?
2 Is this audit for a Principal Contractor or a Contractor working under the supervision of a Principal Contractor ?
2 Is the Contractor Designated Individual (DI) clearly highlighted and named ?
3 Are Construction Engineering Coordinator (CEC) appointments present and available for inspection ?
Work Planning
4 If there are any Construction Engineering Supervisor (CES) appointments are they present and available for inspection ?
5 Do the CEC & CES Appointments clearly highlight the area they are responsible for and the limits of the appointment ? (i.e. permits, design, etc.)
6 Are there records present of suitable Construction Engineering Training for the CEC's and CES's ?
7 Is there a Construction Engineering Register present and available for inspection ?
8 If this is a Principal Contractor does the Construction Engineering procedure highlight the processes for Sub-Contractors on site in relation to Construction Engineering in line with BS 5975:2019 ?
9 Are interfaces between areas of Construction Engineering clearly highlighted and suitable management of Interfaces demonstrated in the procedure ?
Are there any Construction Engineering implementation Plans present and available for inspection (if required)? (an implementation plan can consist of the RAMS, a Task Specific RA, Inspection and Test Plan
10
(ITP), Checklists and other certification)
11 Is there a Construction Engineering Register present and available for inspection ?
12 Is the Construction Engineering Register (CER) live and kept up to date as far as is reasonably practicable ?
Does the CER clearly show the following information:-

- Reference number and short description
- Date of issue of design brief to the designer
- Date the design is required
- Implementation Risk Classification of the Construction Engineering (VL, L, M , H)
- Design Check Category of the Construction Engineering (0, 1, 2, 3)
13 - Designer name present (company and / or individual)
- Design Checker (company and / or individual)
- Date Design was completed and returned
- Date Design Check was completed and returned
- Date the erection was complete and checked with date of Permit To Load (if required)
- Date of Permit To Unload (if required)
- Any third party approvals if required
14 If the audit is for a PC with Contractors managing and delivering their own Construction Engineering how does the PC CEC record the Sub-Contractor CER ? And is it present and available for inspection ?
15 For an item of Construction Engineering from the Construction Engineering Register that is a CAT 2 or 3 design - Is the Construction Engineering Design Brief present and available for inspection ?
Construction Engineering Design
16 Is there evidence present in the Design Brief to show the CEC has been involved and reviewed the brief ?
17 If required has any alteration to the design brief been recorded suitably ? i.e. design brief changes following feedback from site and / or designer
18 Is the design drawing present for this item of Construction Engineering and does it reflect the requirements of the Design Brief ?
19 Are any risks highlighted in the Design Brief ?
20 Is the Design Check Certificate present and available for inspection for this design ?
21 Is the Design Check Certificate signed by the Design Checker ?
22 On this Design Check Certificate is the Designer name present and the design drawings and documents referenced ? Along with the design codes used ?
23 Has the design produced a Designers Risk Assessment ? And is the information present sufficient ?
24 Have the design risks been communicated adequately on the design drawings for the site team to use ?
25 Are there any specific risk the designer has highlighted to be controlled by the site team ? And if so how has this been communicated to the site team and evidenced ?
26 Are there any designs present that can evidence alterations to the design once it has been competed and can demonstrate how design alterations are managed ?
27 For an item of Construction Engineering on the Construction Engineering Register are there any inspection records available ?
28 For an item of Construction Engineering on the Construction Engineering Register are there any Permit To Load records available ?
Site Inspections
29 For an item of Construction Engineering on the Construction Engineering Register are there any Permit To Unload records available ?
30 For an item of Construction Engineering is there evidence available to show how the site team have been briefed for the erection and / or use and / or dismantle of the Construction Engineering on site ?
31 For an item of Construction Engineering is there any evidence of hold points in the RAMS if required ?
32 For an item of Construction Engineering on the Construction Engineering Register is there a specific requirement for a certain material or quality of material ? If so how has this been controlled on site ?
33 How has the quality of equipment been inspected and confirmed as suitable on site ? How is this evidenced ? (possibly deliver certificates listing equipment, grades of timber, grades of steel, etc. )
34 For an item of Construction Engineering on the Construction Engineering Register how is the removal / dismantle evidenced and recorded ?
35 Is there any evidence present to demonstrate the PC CEC interaction with Sub-Contractor CEC's (if required) ? (i.e., copies of meeting minutes, etc.)
Management
Construction
Engineering
36 Is there any evidence present to demonstrate the CEC interaction with the CES (if required) ? (i.e., copies of inspection records, permits, letters of appointment, etc.)
37 Has the CEC present been pressured at any time with issues relating to the project Commercial or Programme issues ? If so has the DI supported the CEC ?
38 Does the CEC have enough time and resource to suitably deliver the required Construction Engineering on site ? If not has this been raised to the DI ?
39 Are the Construction Engineering Designers and Design Checkers used suitably experienced and competent ? If not has the CEC raised this with the DI ?
40 If any issues have been raised to the DI for support or resolving how has the DI responded and / or closed out these issues?
Business Site Management
For an item of Construction Engineering selected form the Construction Engineering Register that is currently live on site.
Engineering On
Construction
- Check the information available in the office before going out on site to observe
- Onsite check the documentation against what has been observed
41
- Onsite if possible speak to the CES for that item of Construction Engineering and ask if there are any issues or improvements worth noting ?
- Onsite ask the CEC if there are any learnings or improvements following the delivery of these Construction Engineering on site ?
- Onsite does the Construction Engineering Implementation Risk and Design Check Category look sufficient and adequate ?
Other
Any
42 Are there any other issues or points that any party would like to raise or highlight, these can be good or bad ?
Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX T
Temporary Works Design Report Checklist - aligned with BS 5975 : 2019
Attached in Appendix T is a Construction Engineering Design Report Checklist that the HPC
PC Construction Engineering Team use. This checklist is aligned with the requirements of
BS 5975:2019 and provides an objective scoring systems of contractors Construction
Engineering Design Reports. This allows better metrics and monitoring of contractors on a
huge project when you have a small PC Construction Engineering team.
This document was created, developed, and is owned by Stuart Cook who is a member of
the HPC PC Construction Engineering Team. The Author did not create this document.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Management of Temporary Works
Temporary Works Design Report (TWR) Checklist

Score 0 Not compliant - content missing
1 Satisfactory - content present, but recommendations for improvement
2 Compliant
N/A Not applicable
Compliance Requirements Score Comment
B-01 Details of the permanent works, incl. any loading constraints 0
B-02 Appropriate clauses from the specification 0
B-03 Residual risks from the permanent works 0
Design brief
B-04 Request for access for erection/use/dismantling 0

B-05 Nearby temporary works and activities have been identified 0
B-06 Environmental information and constraints 0
B-07 Site investigation data and reports 0
B-08 Sequencing of works 0
B-09 Proposals for protection of temporary works 0
A-01 Hazards have been eliminated or reduced/controlled SFAIRP 0
A-02 Includes risks arising from installation 0
0
Designer's Risk Assessment
A-03 Includes risks arising from use

A-04 Includes risks arising from striking/dismantling 0
A-05 Identifies interface issues, including outside of direct scope 0
A-06 Record of mitigation measures to be considered 0
A-07 Record of mitigation measures rejected and why 0
A-08 Status of risks 0
A-09 Risks included in SHE Box on drawing 0
A-10 SHE Box information for end user to manage/control risks 0
Assessment of impact on permanent works where methods differ
A-11 from permanent works design intention 0
Lead designer for the scheme is identified (where more than one
C-01 designer is involved in the overall scheme) 0
TWDC is competent. Ability should be greater where new ideas are
C-02 0
Design Check Certificate
incorporated or the temporary works are complex

C-03 Check undertaken in accordance with categorisation 0
C-04 Certificate states the standards/technical literature used 0
C-05 Certificate lists the constraints or loading conditions imposed 0
Certificate lists the drawings/sketches, specification and any
C-06 methodology that are part of the design 0
C-07 Certificate is signed by the designer and design checker 0
Alterations to the design have been suitably coordinated with the
C-08 checker 0
Score % ##### 0
Note - items N/A are not to be used in final scoring 0
Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX U
Temporary Works & Scaffold Specific Site Inspection Checklists
Attached in Appendix U is a Construction Engineering Site Inspection and a more focused

Scaffold Site Inspection Checklist that the HPC PC Construction Engineering Team use.
These checklists provide an objective scoring systems of contractors Construction
Engineering on site. This allows better metrics and monitoring of contractors on a huge
project when you have a small PC Construction Engineering team.
These documents were created, developed, and are owned by the HPC PC Construction
Engineering Team. The Author did not create this document.

Ronan O’Driscoll
PC Company Document XX-000-CHK-100001 - Rev 2
TEMPORARY WORKS SITE INSPECTION
NOT PROTECTIVELY MARKED
Project Name: TEMPORARY WORKS REGISTER REFERENCE:

Contract Number: Contractor:
PC: CONTRACTOR:
Inspection undertaken by:
Work area inspected: Date: Time:
Brief description of works in operation:
Temporary Works Register:
Is the Register up to Date within 4 Weeks? N
Are Permit requirements recorded on TW Register? N
Temporary Works scheme on site selected for inspection

TW Ref Category Title Status: Tick where applicable
Installation: In use: Striking: Out of use:
Site Inspection of Temporary Works Referenced and selected

Comment
Identification and Classification

Is the item properly identified on the TWC register and can required drawings etc be identified from the register and any other schedules presented Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Has the correct TW Category been applied? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Information control at Site
Is the drawing or model available with the delivery team at site Y/N (2 or 0) (2 or 0)
Is the drawing approved and suitably watermarked? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Is the drawing the correct revision based on the control register or later (may have been updated if the register is live) Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Is any change documentation raised available at site(if None mark as Y) Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Execution
Is the material in use of suitable condition and well controlled at site Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Are works erected as per drawing? Y/N (1 to 5) (1 to 5)
Are any changes or additions suitably recorded? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Does the site team know who their Temporary Works Supervisor is? – Is the Temporary Works Organogram clearly displayed? Y/N (2 or 0) (2 or 0)
Does the site team understand the details and requirements of any permits for these Temporary Works? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Have the details been suitably briefed and understood by the site team? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Are permits in place where required? Have the inspection requirements been clearly communicated by the designer, and have these been actioned? Y/N (2 or 0) (2 or 0)
COMPLIANCE SCORE /20 0 (X out of 20)
Actions (if any)

Actual Closure
Relevant Workstream Key Actions Item Potential Proposed Closure Date Delta
Date
Issues relating to the installation of the works
Issues relating to the design documentation.
Issues relating to briefing of the design and

risks.
Issues relating to permits.
Immediate actions to reduce harm.
Good practice to be shared
Investigate Action:- Potential Close out periods:-

IN1 – High Potential CA1 – Closed Out Immediately
IN2 – Medium Potential CA2 – Within 5 Days
IN3 – Low Potential CA3 – 5 Days or More #NAME?
Ronan O’Driscoll
PC Company Document XX-000-CHK-100002 - Rev 1
SCAFFOLD SITE INSPECTION
NOT PROTECTIVELY MARKED
TEMPORARY WORKS REGISTER
Project Name:
REFERENCE:
Contract Number: Contractor:
PC: CONTRACTOR:
Inspection undertaken
by:
Work area inspected: Date: Time:
Brief description of
works in operation:
Scaffold Registers (ref):

Is the Scaffold Register up to date? Y/N Y/N
Is the Ladder Register up to date? Y/N Y/N
Is the design / drawing / TG20 Compliance sheet
available with the delivery team at site?
Y/N or NA Y/N or NA
Is the drawing watermarked as per the NNB

Temporary Works Standard?
Y/N or NA Y/N or NA
Scaffold scheme on site
Tag no. CAT / Load Class Title / Description Status: (tick as appropriate)
Erecting: In use: Dismantle Out of use:
Inspection of selected scaffold
Comment
Scaffold Identification and Classification

Is the item properly identified on the scaffold register and can relevant drawings be identified from the register? (If no drawings exist mark as Y) Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Has the correct risk category or load class been applied? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Information control at Site

Is the design / drawing / TG20 Compliance sheet available with the delivery team at site? Y/N (2 or 0) (2 or 0)
Is the drawing approved and suitably watermarked? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Is the drawing the correct revision based on the control register or later (may have been updated if the register is live) Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Is any change documentation raised available at sitee.g. FCR etc. (if None mark as Y) Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Execution
Is the material in use of suitable condition and well controlled at site Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Are works erected as per drawing / compliance sheet? Y/N (1 to 5) (1 to 5)
Are any modifications suitably recorded? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Is the scaffold founded on a suitable base with base plate fitted? (except where on rebar) Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Are standards, transoms & ledgers correctly spaced? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Has suitable access been considered? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Are scaffold boards secured and in good condition? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)

Is appropriate signage in place? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
Are permits in place where required? Y/N (1 or 0) (1 or 0)
COMPLIANCE SCORE /20 0 (X out of 20)
Actions (if any)
Issues relating to the installation of the works
Issues relating to the design documentation.
Issues relating to briefing of the design and risks.
Issues relating to permits.
Immediate actions to reduce harm.
Good practice to be shared
Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX V
Using the BRE Document to explain normal distribution and standard
deviation
Attached in Appendix V is information copied directly from – Cracking in Buildings – BRE

Publication – By R B Bonshor and L L Bonshor – Chapter 3 : Joints as safeguards against
cracking – Inaccuracies in Buildings – Page 21.
The document details cracking in buildings and discusses tolerances and as a result
possible cracking. Through this discussion a practical explanation of normal distribution and
standard deviation is given that may prove beneficial for the reader to understand these
terms better even though it is explained here in terms of building tolerances.
The description provided maybe found useful to explain normal distribution and standard
deviation as these terms are used in many other areas such as establishing values for
allowable stresses of materials, etc.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Inaccuracies in building
In the field of building design and construction the subject of accuracy and tolerances is not
generally well understood, and this is particularly true of the terminology. The effect is that
design in particular is less competent in this respect than it could be. Perhaps the
commonest misconception is that tolerances are a means to describe how accurate (or
inaccurate) something is. However, the nature of inaccuracy is such that it cannot be so
described, as is now explained.
Suppose that a fairly large number of pieces of wood 300 mm long are needed, to be sawn
by hand from long lengths. Using a rule and a pencil each 300 mm length is roughly marked
out and sawn off in turn. Suppose that all the cut pieces are then very carefully measured
and the sizes so measured are plotted against the number of pieces. The graph produced
will have the characteristic shape shown in Figure 3.1 and is known as normal distribution.
Figure 3.1 shows that the largest single group of sizes produced is that at 300 mm - the size
that the pieces were indeed intended to be. However, if the pieces that proved to be 299 mm
long are added to those that proved to be 301 mm long, these pieces together outnumber
those that proved to be 300 mm long. If all the pieces that proved not to be 300 mm long are
added together they greatly outnumber those which were 300 mm long. This characteristic is
common to all processes subject to random error; it is no one’s fault that the pieces of the
required size are outnumbered by the remainder, or that some sizes produced differed
greatly from the intended size. The number that differed greatly from 300 mm was small -or,
to put it another way, their probability of occurrence was low. But when they occur they
cannot be held up as examples of shoddy workmanship: their occurrence, at that level of
probability, was inevitable when that particular process was used to manufacture those
particular items.
Suppose now that in that same process the hand saw was located in position by some kind
of jig or template. The distribution of sizes now produced might be that in Figure 3.2.

Ronan O’Driscoll
The graph of numbers (or frequency) against sizes still has the characteristic normal
distribution shape but this time there are more pieces matching the required 300 mm. While
they are still outnumbered by the sizes that are not 300 mm, sizes which differ greatly from
300 mm are still produced, but the probability of their occurrence has been reduced.
This increased probability of occurrence of the intended 300 mm size, and the reduced
probability of unwanted sizes, together mean that the new process is intrinsically more
accurate. Similarly, for every kind of component or typical piece of site construction, its
dimensional accuracy is dependant on both what it is and how it is made, and that accuracy
is characteristic of all such items made in that way.
If Figure 3.2 is now superimposed on Figure 3.1 and two limits of size are marked out on the
base line at, say, 15 mm each side of the centre, it will be seen (Figure 3.3) that both sets of
timber pieces could be described as complying with a tolerance of plus or minus 15 mm, but
the truth is that the accuracies of the two processes are very different. This is one important
reason why the term tolerance should not be used when a means of describing accuracy is
sought.

Ronan O’Driscoll
A further point must now be considered. When sawing off the 300 mm lengths of wood, it is
quite likely that the saw would consistently be positioned to one side or other of the marked
line. For this reason the plotted graph in Figure 3.1 might well be found to be centred on,
say, 298 mm rather than the intended size of 300 mm and all of the measured sizes in the
curve correspondingly displaced by 2 mm from their positions in Figure 3.1. This kind of
circumstance is called, for fairly obvious reasons, systematic error and the distribution curve
would be said to have a mean, in this example of -2 mm.
It can now be seen that there are two characteristics that describe accuracy: the shape of
the distribution and the mean. Comparing accuracies (eg, of the same product produced by
several different manufacturers) by comparing the shapes of their distribution curves is
clearly not a simple process. What is needed therefore is a single numerical value that
describes the shape of an entire distribution, so that these single numerical values can be
compared.
Suppose that one of the pieces of sawn timber is selected at random from those from which
Figure 3.1 was plotted. It proves to have a length of, say, 305 mm and thus it could be
described as differing from the mean by 5 mm. It follows, then, that the single numerical
value that describes the entire distribution curve is the average amount by which all the
pieces differ from the mean. It can be shown as a mathematical expression: if the mean is
designated by 𝑥𝑥̅ and an individual size by 𝑥𝑥𝑖𝑖 , then the difference between any individual
size and the mean is (𝑥𝑥̅ - 𝑥𝑥𝑖𝑖 ). To obtain the average of all the differences then - as for any
average - they must be summed (the mathematical symbol is 𝛴𝛴 and divided by the number
of them 𝑛𝑛. Thus:
∑(𝑥𝑥̅ − 𝑥𝑥𝑖𝑖 )
𝑛𝑛

Ronan O’Driscoll
However, since the curve is symmetrical about the mean, for every positive value of the
difference there is an equivalent negative value and the sum would thus be zero. A solution
is to square all the values before summing them, so that the negative values become
positive. Thus:
�(𝑥𝑥̅ − 𝑥𝑥𝑖𝑖 )2
𝑛𝑛
This mathematical device must now be corrected by taking the square root of the result:
∑(𝑥𝑥̅ − 𝑥𝑥𝑖𝑖 )2
�
𝑛𝑛
The value so obtained represents the average amount by which all of the values, such as
those plotted in Figure 3.1, differ from the mean; it thus encapsulates the entire shape of the
distribution curve. This numerical value is called Standard Deviation or s. The greater the
amount by which all the individual sizes differ from the mean the larger the calculated value
for s will be.
If the batch of pieces of sawn timber used to produce Figure 3.1 is sufficiently large it can be
taken to be representative of all such pieces of timber produced in that way. The values
found for the mean 𝑥𝑥̅ and the Standard Deviation s would be valid for all, including further
batches that will not be sawn until, say, ten years hence. The statistical term for ‘all’ is the
population, an infinite number. However, if infinity ∞ is substituted for 𝑛𝑛 in the expression
above, the calculation will produce the result of any finite number divided by infinity: zero.
The mathematical device employed to overcome this is to substitute (𝑛𝑛 - 1) for 𝑛𝑛 , thus
dividing by one less than infinity. The expression so modified becomes the expression for
Standard Deviation of the population and, to distinguish that Standard Deviation from one
calculated for the sample or batch, it is designated 𝜎𝜎 instead of s.
Thus:
𝑠𝑠(𝑥𝑥̅ −𝑥𝑥𝑖𝑖 )2
𝜎𝜎 = �
(𝑛𝑛−1)
So if representative samples of parts of building construction, built by normal techniques, are

measured, the calculated value for the mean x and the Standard Deviation 𝜎𝜎 will provide a
complete description of the accuracy of all such pieces of construction. Thus they provide a
description of the accuracy of such items yet to be made.
A remarkable property
Standard Deviation has a property which is of immense potential value to the process of
designing and building.
The value ±3𝜎𝜎 always embraces 99.73% of the distribution, while ±2𝜎𝜎 embraces 95.45%
and ± 𝜎𝜎 embraces 68.27%. Suppose that the value of 𝜎𝜎 calculated from measurements of
Ronan O’Driscoll
a representative sample such as the pieces of sawn timber whose sizes are plotted in Figure
3.1, is 5 mm. Then ±15 mm would contain nearly 100% (strictly 99.73%) of the pieces, ±10
mm would contain 95% and ±5 mm would contain 68%. These percentages could equally
well be expressed as probabilities. For example, since ±2𝜎𝜎 embraces 95%, it follows that
5% would be outside that range; one might say therefore that a piece of sawn timber taken
at random would have a 5% chance, and thus a 1 in 20 chance, of being outside the range
covered by ±2𝜎𝜎. A standard graph, reproduced in Figure 3.4 and based on that in BS
6954:Part 3 (Tolerances for Buildings), provides probabilities for all multiples of 𝜎𝜎 likely to be
needed.
Once a representative sample (of, say, a commonly occurring piece of construction in

buildings) has been measured and the value of 𝜎𝜎 calculated, the graph can be used to find
the probability of occurrence for any chosen size from among those scattered around the
intended size - and the probability therefore of any size proving to be outside a
predetermined acceptable limit even though construction may not start for some years.
Representative samples of very many common pieces of building construction have been
measured. The corresponding calculated values of mean x and Standard Deviation 𝜎𝜎 are
given in Tables 4 and 5 of BS 5606. Then using the given value of 𝜎𝜎 for a particular piece of
commonly occurring construction to enter the graph in Figure 3.4, the probability of any
particular size occurring in the same kind of construction can be known in advance.
Some typical values for 𝜎𝜎 are taken from Table 4 of BS 5606 and reproduced in Table 3.3
as examples of the order of size of such values. A very simple illustration of their use

Ronan O’Driscoll
(leaving aside for this purpose the effect of 𝑥𝑥̅ being something other than zero) is shown in
the feature panel in the next column.
Tolerances
In a piece of building construction, as in a piece of machinery, some of the dimensions must
lie within certain limits if the parts involved are to fit together and the assembly to work as
intended. Those limits are determined by the nature and use of the assembly, and it is part
of the designer’s task to identify, objectively, what they are. The limits, when found for any
particular dimension, represent the maximum error permitted by the nature and use of the
assembly about the intended or target size for that dimension.
AN EXAMPLE OF PROBABILITY OF OCCURRENCE
Suppose that it is necessary to impose a tolerance of ±I2 mm on the verticality of in

Situ concrete columns of storey (3 m) height. Dividing this tolerance by the value
given for 𝜎𝜎 for that construction (5.7 mm) gives a result of 2.1. Entering the graph in
Figure 3.4 at this figure reveals a probability of approximately 4% (or 1 in 25) that
such a tolerance will not automatically be met. In other words, there is a 1 in 25
chance that corrective work will be needed.
In other words, the limits represent the tolerable amount of error in the size. The term for
such limits is tolerance. Thus tolerances describe the limits of tolerable error dictated by the
need for the assembly to fit together and to function as intended. It will be clear that to have
misused the term to describe the accuracy of something (i.e., the errors that occur) would
have pre-empted the proper use of the term to describe the amount of those errors that is
tolerable if the assembly is to fit and function.
The proper use of the term tolerance provides a means to compare what will inevitably
happen (as represented in principle by Figure 3.1) with what is required. In Figure 3.5 the
distribution curve in Figure 3.1 is repeated with the addition of tolerable limits of error. It is
Ronan O’Driscoll
supposed that the use to which the pieces of sawn timber will be put requires that the pieces
used in an assembly will have sizes lying within ±10 mm of the intended 300 mm size. If the
calculated Standard Deviation 𝜎𝜎 for all such pieces of timber is, say, 5 mm, then a tolerance
of ±I0 mm embraces ±2𝜎𝜎. So 95% (strictly 95.45%) of all the pieces produced can be
expected to comply while 5%, or 1 in 20, will not.
If the tolerance could be increased (in this example to, say, ±15 mm) then virtually all of the
pieces would be within tolerance and usable in the assembly. Such an increased tolerance
would be more easily met and would cost less, but the increase cannot be obtained merely
by changing the figure. If the tolerance of ±10 mm was correctly identified in the first place,
an increased tolerance can be obtained only by changing the design - to one more tolerant
of error. An alternative would be to improve the intrinsic accuracy of the pieces of sawn
timber. This also cannot be achieved merely by hopeful specification: the process must be
changed to one with better characteristic accuracy, as exemplified in Figure 3.6.

Ronan O’Driscoll
Without the information about mean 𝑥𝑥̅ and Standard Deviation 𝜎𝜎 contained in BS 5606, the
need for either a more tolerant design or an intrinsically more accurate process could not be
recognised before construction began. It might remain unrecognised until joints, with widths
unacceptably reduced by inaccuracy, closed completely in service, and cracks and
associated damage developed in the structure.

Ronan O’Driscoll
APPENDIX W
Details of the Author
Attached are some details on the Author

Ronan O’Driscoll
(Home address) Mobile No:
Halifax, West Yorkshire, Or Home:
U.K. E-mail rodriscoll@hotmail.com
EUR.ING. RONAN O'DRISCOLL B.Eng.(Hon.s), M.Sc.,C.Eng.,IntPE(UK),M.I.C.E.,M.I.Mech.E.,M.I.Struct.E.,L.C.G.I.,D.I.S.,

Personal Info  Nationality: Irish
Qualifications
and Education
June 2018 University of Aberdeen – 3 Year Distance Learning
- Master of Science (MSc) Degree in Oil & Gas Structural Engineering
June 2014 Qualified for the International Professional Engineer (IntPE) Register.
August 2013 Qualified as a Corporate Member of the Institution of Structural Engineers

(M.I.Struct.E.) and a Chartered Structural Engineer (C.Eng.)
October 2012 Qualified to be registered as a European Engineer (EUR. ING.)

by the European Federation of National Engineering Associations (FEANI)
September 2011 Qualified as a Corporate Member of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers (M.I.Mech.E.) and a Chartered
Mechanical Engineer (C.Eng.)
Autumn 2008 Qualified as a Corporate Member of the Institution of Civil Engineers (M.I.C.E.) and a Chartered Civil
Engineer (C.Eng.)
1996 – 2000 University of Bradford, Bradford, West Yorkshire

B.Eng. (Hon.s) Civil and Structural Engineering & Awarded the Diploma of Industrial Studies (D.I.S.),
by Incorporating a placement year
1996 Awarded Licentiate of the City and Guilds of London Institute (L.C.G.I.) in Civil & Structural Engineering
1995 – 1996 University of Bradford, Bradford, West Yorkshire - Foundation course in Engineering
Work experience
April 2022- Hinkley Point C (HPC) - EDF Energy – Nuclear New Build Generation Company (NNB GenCo)
To Present (Type of Business:- Power Company Construction Department as Owner, Principal Contractor and Operator on Hinkley Point C)
EDF Temporary Works (TW) Manager & TW Lead for the HPC Construction Project
April 2016 - Hinkley Point C - EDF Energy – Nuclear New Build Generation Company (NNB GenCo)
To April 2022 (Type of Business:- Power Company Construction Department as Owner, Principal Contractor and Operator on Hinkley Point C)
EDF Lead Temporary Works Coordinator for the Hinkley Point C Construction Project
The Lead Temporary Works individual on site for EDF on the Hinkley Point C construction project fulfilling
the Temporary Works obligations for EDF as Principal Contractor for this project and ensuring the
implementation of the NNB GenCo Manage Temporary Works Procedure. The estimated £23 Billion
construction project has a variety of Temporary works including Groundworks, Marine, Tunnelling,
Temporary Bridges, Propping etc. Contract Partners working for EDF to deliver this project include
consortiums of companies such as Laing O’Rourke, Bouygues, Kier, Bam Nuttall, Costain, Fugro, Balfour
Beatty, NG Bailey, Alstom and Areva.
October 2011 - Doosan Babcock Ltd. South Normanton & Crawley (Formerly Doosan Babcock Energy)
To April 2016 (Type of Business:-EPC (Engineering, Procurement & Construction) Contractor to the Power Industry)
Technical Authority for Temporary Works for the Nuclear Business Sector, Temporary
Works Coordinator, Design Manager, Senior Civil & Structural Project Engineer
Provided Temporary Works guidance and assistance for the Nuclear Business Sector as the Temporary
Works Technical Authority. Worked on a variety of projects, including FEED studies for new build Biomass
Power Stations, tendering for new build Coal Fired Power Stations projects, Nuclear Projects such as the
Sellafield, Separation Area Ventilation (SAV) Project & the B6 (Windscale Pile 1) Demolition as well as
working on numerous tenders for the Sellafield site. Provided on-going Temporary Works support to the B6
Care & Maintenance Project. Introduced new products to Sellafield such as Greenkote Thermal Diffusion
Metal Coating and Corroseal Rust Converter. Also assisted with refurbishments such as retrofit Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems both in the UK and Europe and a number of tenders for Nuclear New
Build and Decommissioning Projects. On site Temporary Works Coordination for numerous projects
including Drax Selective Non-Catalytic Reduction (SNCR) and Nuclear projects in Sellafield.
October 2018 - TemporaryWorx
To Present Engineering Director
Company providing end to end Temporary Works Management
August 2013 - 3RM Associates Ltd

To Present (Type of Business:-Temporary Works Consultancy)
Managing Director
Running a company with three very experienced colleagues who are specialists in Temporary Works and
procedural control of BS 5975. Providing a range of services to clients for their Temporary Works
requirements. 3RM Associates Ltd is a member of the Temporary Works Forum. 3RM Associates have had
a case study article published in the New Civil Engineer (NCE) publication, the “Temporary Works Forum
Yearbook 2015”.
Structural Support Systems Ltd

October 2011 - Managing Director
To April 2020
Running my own company providing consultancy services for small domestic projects and Construction
Design & Management Coordination (CDMC) for projects up to £150,000 in value up to the commencement
of the new CDM Regulations 2015 on the 6th of April 2015. After this date, the CDMC role has been
replaced by the Principal Designer role.
Balfour Beatty Utility Solutions Ltd. Sheffield

May 2011– (Type of Business:-UK’s leading Utility Solutions provider, working across Electricity, Gas, Wastewater & Water Sectors)
October2011 Senior Authorising Engineer for Temporary Works for all Sectors & Temporary Works
Design Engineer (Gas & Water)
In charge of Temporary Works for Gas & Water and overall control of all Temporary Works for the company as the
Senior Authorising Engineer. Member of the Engineering Leadership Team representing Temporary Works for the
company as well as a member of the Zero Harm 2012 fatal risk group for Excavations again representing
Temporary Works.
Ekspan Ltd. Sheffield

June 2009 – (Type of Business:-Installation & Manufacture of Bridge Bearings, Engineering & Heavy Fabrication Subcontractor)
May 2011 Senior Project Engineer / Project Manager (Temporary Works / Bearing Replacements)
Worked on the pricing, planning and execution of bridge bearing installations on new and existing structures, as
well as designing any required temporary works. Worked on a grant funded project with Xanthus Energy Ltd to
develop a new innovative foundation for offshore wind turbines. Also worked on swing bridge fabrications and
installation. Responsibilities included the pricing and estimating, design, provision of drawings and calculations,
risk assessments, method statements, organising of steel fabrication, delivery and the management of the
engineering programme, coordinating operations with the design office, fabrication shop and construction team, as
well as liaising with the client, designers and sub-contractors.
Barrett Steel Buildings Ltd. Bradford (Type of Business:- Design and Build Steelwork Subcontractor)
April 2007 –
Project Engineer (Structural Steelwork Designer)
June 2009
Worked on the structural steel design of various multi-storey projects for clients as a design and build
subcontractor also worked on an aircraft hanger design for Ryanair at Stansted. Responsibilities included the
pricing and estimating, design, provision of drawings and calculations, coordinating operations with the drawing
office, fabrication shop and construction department, as well as liaising with the client, architect and sub-
contractors. Using various computer packages such as the CSC suite of structural software.
April 2006 – MJM Consulting Engineers Ltd. Wakefield (Type of Business:- Engineering Consultancy)
April 2007 Project Engineer (Structures Designer)

Worked on the structural design of various projects for clients such as ASDA, Home Base, B&Q, KFC and Argos
for new builds and refurbishments. Also worked on the Steel Design for the new British Library building in Boston
Spa. Responsibilities included the design, provision of drawings and calculations, liaising with the client, architect
and sub-contractors as well as the organising of site investigations and surveys.
Jan. 2004 – Mabey Support Systems Ltd. Garswood, Near Wigan (Type of Business:- Specialist Subcontractor in Temporary Works)
April 2006 Project Engineer (Temporary Works Designer)
Worked on a multitude of construction projects. Projects were varied in the level of expertise required, from the
hiring of equipment to the provision of cost-effective solutions for clients including full design, steel fabrication,
project management, delivery, erection, operation and dismantle.
I worked with contractors and designers on various projects including internal propping of buildings, bridge jacking
for bearing replacements, formwork support and support to structures during demolition and repositioning.
Responsibilities included the full design and costing, provision of drawings and design calculations, risk
assessments, method statements, organising of steel fabrication, delivery and the management of the engineering
programme. Other responsibilities included the day to day running of projects on site including regular client
contact and project meetings.
Sept. 2001 – FDT Associates Ltd. Denton, Manchester
Dec.2003 (Type of Business:- Engineering Consultancy and Inspection Contractor to the Telecommunications Industry)
Structural Design & Senior Inspection Engineer (Telecommunications)
Worked as a structural design engineer for various telecommunication projects for the deployment of 3rd
Generation mobile telecommunications network for Orange PCS and Hutchison 3G as well as the enhancement
of existing networks. Primarily deploying sites on existing rooftops and water towers. Responsibilities included
ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionising Radiation Protection) Surveys for Orange PCS as part of a
national survey and strategy report. Also heavily involved in the inspection of 3 (formerly known as Hutchison 3G)
and Orange PCS sites as a Senior Inspection Engineer.
July 2000 – Amec Capital Projects Ltd. Chorley, Lancashire (Type of Business:-Main Contractor)
Aug. 2001 Graduate Structural Engineer (Training towards chartership)
Worked on a 3 month Tender for the A650 Bingley By-pass, in Ove-Arups offices in Leeds. From October 2000
to August 2001 undertook site work for the Birmingham Northern Relief Road (BNRR), M6 Toll as it is now
known, as a Site Engineer in charge of structures. I was solely responsible for a number of bridge
structures, which among other things involved setting out the structure, organising and supervising the work
and managing the sub-contractors to ensure quality etc.
June 1998 – Fugro Singapore Pte. Ltd. Singapore (Type of Business:- Site Investigation Contractor)
July 1999 Placement Student Geotechnical Engineer
Offshore experience:
Site investigations for platform developments for Brunei Shell Petroleum in the Champion Oil Field, Offshore
Brunei. Site investigations for pipeline projects for Conoco Indonesia Inc. working in the West Natuna Sea,
Offshore Indonesia. Site investigations for jack-up rig projects for JVPC (Vietnam) Ltd. working out of Vung
Dong, Vietnam in the South China Sea and Harrods Energy (Thailand) Ltd. working in the Gulf of Thailand.
Onshore experience:
Site investigation for the construction of a third production train for Malaysia Liquefied Natural Gas near
Bintulu in Sarawak, Malaysia, on the island of Borneo. A site investigation for a plant extension for Seraya
Chemicals (Shell) on the island of Pulau Seraya in Singapore.
Responsibilities included the management of plant and labour on site, the site classifications of soil samples
and advising the client on termination depths of boreholes, the lab testing of soil and preparation of reports.
Additional I have current and valid: -

Information • CSCS Managers Qualification (Black CSCS Card)
• CITB and Thomas Telford Training Course and Certificate for Temporary Works Coordinators
• Institution of Occupational Safety & Health (IOSH) – Safe Management of Work on Site
Other Qualifications, such as: -
• BTEC Level 3 Award in Education and Training
Previous qualifications that have now expired include: -

• Certificate of Proficiency in Personal Survival Techniques – Offshore
• Licensed Practitioner of Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP) – Certificate Expired 31-12-2020
• Licensed Master Practitioner of Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP) – Certificate Expired 31-10-2021
• CCNSG Safety Passport, CPCS Crane Supervisor
• Personal Track Safety
• IPAF Static Boom
• Rooftop Access
• Advanced Climbers
• Tower Rescue
• EUSR Utility SHEA (Gas)
• Sellafied P4 Pass
• Sellafield Monitored Worker
• Sellafield PVC Suit
• Sellafield Respirator Fit, etc.
• Offshore Survival
• Etc.
Interested in many activities and attend the gym regularly, work permitting.
Passed my advanced drivers’ examination to become a Member of the Institute of Advanced Motorists.
Temporary Works Coordinator, Temporary Works Designated Individual, Temporary Works Lead, Temporary Works Manager,
Temporary Works Chief Engineer, Director, Nuclear, Hinkley Point C, Sizewell, Moorside, Wyfla, Demolition, Temporary Works
Director, Temporary Works Head of Department, High Speed 2, HS2, Sellafield, Chief Engineer, Temporary Works Consultant,
Technical Authority, Nuclear Decommissioning, Head of Department Temporary Works Forum BS5975

Construction Engineering A Guide To Temporary Works Bs 5975

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction Engineering A Guide To Temporary Works Bs 5975

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DISLAIMER

Principal Recommendations of the Bragg Report

iii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

The first revision of BS 5975: 1982 -

• Titled: - BS 5975: 1982 – Code of Practice for Falsework

• Titled: - BS 5975: 1996 – Code of Practice for Falsework

The fourth revision of BS 5975: 2019-

• BS 5975 is predominantly a Temporary Works design code with reference to

Refer to BS 5975:2019 Clause 19.1.2.

“Design” includes drawings, design details, specifications and bills of quantities

“Principal Contractor” means the contractor appointed under regulation 5(1)(b) to

“Principal Designer” means the designer appointed under regulation 5(1)(a) to

• The definition of “Structure” in CDM 2015 refers to Temporary Works as underlined

Regulation 8 – General Duties

8.—(1) A designer (including a principal designer) or contractor (including a principal

vii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

viii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Other possible relevant Regulations

Other possible relevant regulations would include:-

• Regulation 20 – Demolition or Dismantling

• If a Permanent Works Designer cannot demonstrate they have considered and

xii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

xiv CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

5.2.1. All those managing temporary works should have, as a minimum, an

Regarding assessing trainer competence BS 5975: 2019 states the following:-

BS 5975 : 2019 Section 3.13 describes a competent person / organisation as : -

xvi CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

Possible Course Structure

2. Temporary Works Supervisor (TWS) Training Course

xvii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

3. Temporary Works Coordinator (TWC) Training Course

xix CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

• The answer to all questions should be YES, the importance of understanding BS

Let’s use the following as an example: -

Another example maybe as follows: -

xxi CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

• “Construction Engineering” (CE) = “Temporary Works” (TW)

xxii CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

• Support or protect either an existing structure or the permanent works during

This photo of construction shows the progress of placing

This photo of construction shows the work force of that time

This diagram cross section shows the

This photo of construction shows the progress of the

Construction workers working on

This photo of construction shows the piers

This photo of construction shows various Construction Engineering with a large

This photo of construction shows the spans being constructed

This photo of construction shows the piers being

This photo of construction shows the piers

This photo of construction shows the deck

This photo of construction shows the deck being constructed with

In the UK construction industry, we have a hierarchy of documents as follows: -

British Standard (BS)

Publicly Available Specification (PAS) /

British Standard (BS)

Publicly Available Specification (PAS) / Industry Guidance Documents / Company

3.1 CDM 2015 – Organisational Arrangement

3.1.1 The Client

• Demonstrable experience of being a Construction Engineering Coordinator working

• Demonstrable experience of being a Construction Engineering Designer creating Fit

• When preparing or modifying designs, to eliminate, reduce or control foreseeable

3.1.4 Principal Contractor (PC)

3.1.6 CDM 2015 - Organogram